John Deere 5620, 5720, 5820 Tractor Diagnostic & Tests (TM4791) Shop Manual

John Deere Agriculture
5620, 5720 and 5820 Tractors
DIAGNOSIS AND TESTS

SERVICE MANUAL
Covered models: 5620, 5720, 5820
tm4791, April 2006

tm4791 - 5620, 5720 and 5820 Tractors (g) by Belgreen v2.0
Table of contents
FOREWORD
VERSION DATE
Section 210 - GENERAL INFORMATION
Group 05 - Safety Measures
Group 15 - General References
Section 220 - ENGINE
Group 10 - Operational Checks
Group 15 - Tests And Adjustments
Section 230 - FUEL, AIR INTAKE AND COOLING SYSTEMS
Group 20 - Theory Of Operation
Section 240 - ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
Group 10 - Electrical Circuit Checks
Group 15 - Component Testing
Group 25 - Functional Schematics
Group 26 - Summary of Wiring Harnesses
Group 26A - Wiring Harnesses
Group 26B - Wiring Harnesses from Serial Number 424816
Section 245 - ELECTRONIC CONTROL UNITS
Group 05 - Operation and General Information on Diagnostics
Group 20 - Data BUS Systems, Theory of Operation
Group BCU - BCU - Basic Control Unit
Group BIF - BIF - Basic Informator
Group EPC - EPC - Control Unit for PowrQuad Plus Transmission
Group PRF - PRF - Performance Monitor
Section 255 - POWRQUAD AND POWRQUAD PLUS TRANSMISSIONS
Group 05 - Introductory Checks
Group 10 - Operational Check-Out
Group 15 - Tests and Adjustments
Group 20 - Theory of Operation
Section 256 - DRIVE SYSTEMS
Section 260 - STEERING AND BRAKES
Group 05 - Troubleshooting
Section 270 - HYDRAULIC SYSTEM
Section 280 - MISCELLANEOUS
Section 290 - OPERATOR′S CAB
Section 299 - SPECIAL TOOLS
<- Go to Global Table of contents tm4791 - 5620, 5720 and 5820 Tractors
Group 05 - Special Tools (Dealer-Fabricated)

Group 10 - Special Tools and Test Equipment
Foreword
This “Operation and Tests” manual applies to the following tractor types:
5620, 5720 and 5820
This manual is written for an experienced technician. Special tools required in performing certain service work are identified in
this manual and are recommended for use.
Live with safety: Read the safety messages in the initial section of this manual and the cautions presented throughout the text
of the manual.
CAUTION:
This is the safety-alert symbol. When you see this symbol on your machine or in this manual, be alert to the potential for
personal injury.
Technical Manuals are concise guides for specific machines. They are on-the-job guides containing only the vital information
needed for diagnosis, analysis, testing and repair.
Fundamental service information is available from other sources covering basic theory of operation, fundamentals of
troubleshooting, general maintenance and basic type of failures and their causes.
GENERAL INFORMATION (g) by Belgreen v2.0
Version Date
01 May 2007
<- Go to Section TOC Section 210 page 1 tm4791 - 5620, 5720 and 5820 Tractors
Section 210 - GENERAL INFORMATION

Table of contents
Group 05 - Safety Measures ................................................................................................................... 1
Recognize Safety Information ............................................................................................................... 1
”Important” Information ....................................................................................................................... 1
”Note” Information ............................................................................................................................... 1
Prevent Machine Runaway ................................................................................................................... 1
Handle Fluids Safely—Avoid Fires ......................................................................................................... 2
Prevent Battery Explosions ................................................................................................................... 2
Prepare for Emergencies ...................................................................................................................... 2
Prevent Acid Burns ............................................................................................................................... 4
Avoid High-Pressure Fluids ................................................................................................................... 4
Service Cooling System Safely ............................................................................................................. 5
Remove Paint Before Welding or Heating ............................................................................................. 5
Avoid Heating Near Pressurized Fluid Lines .......................................................................................... 7
Work In Ventilated Area ........................................................................................................................ 7
Wear Protective Clothing ...................................................................................................................... 8
Practice Safe Maintenance ................................................................................................................... 9
Park Machine Safely ............................................................................................................................. 9
Use Proper Lifting Equipment ............................................................................................................. 10
Construct Dealer-Made Tools Safely ................................................................................................... 10
Support Machine Properly .................................................................................................................. 11
Work in Clean Area ............................................................................................................................. 11
Illuminate Work Area Safely ............................................................................................................... 12
Service Machines Safely ..................................................................................................................... 12
Use Proper Tools ................................................................................................................................. 13
Service Tires Safely ............................................................................................................................ 14
Service Front-Wheel Drive Tractor Safely ........................................................................................... 14
Safety Information - Air Brake System ............................................................................................... 16
Avoid Eye Contact With Radar ............................................................................................................ 16
Keep ROPS Installed Properly ............................................................................................................. 17
Replace Safety Signs .......................................................................................................................... 17
Dispose of Waste Properly .................................................................................................................. 17
Live With Safety ................................................................................................................................. 18
Safety Measures on Electronic Control Units ...................................................................................... 18
Group 15 - General References ............................................................................................................ 20
Reference 210-15-001, General References—Summary .................................................................... 20
Reference 210-15-010, Unified Inch Bolt and Cap Screw Torque Values ............................................ 21
Reference 210-15-015, Metric Bolt and Cap Screw Torque Values ..................................................... 22
210-15-020, Hydraulic System Inch Fitting Torques ........................................................................... 23
210-15-025, Hydraulic System Metric Fitting Torques ........................................................................ 24
210-15-030, Component Identification Table ..................................................................................... 25
Reference 210-15-035, How to Read a Functional Schematic ............................................................ 26
210-15-040, How to Read a Diagnostic Schematic ............................................................................. 27
210-15-042, Wire Numbers and Color Codes ...................................................................................... 28
210-15-045, Schematic, Wiring and Harness Symbols ....................................................................... 29
Reference 210-15-046, Troubleshooting Unsolved Problems ............................................................. 31
210-15-050, Visual Check of the Electrical System ............................................................................ 31
Types of fault ...................................................................................................................................... 33
Reference 210-15-060, Seven Step Electrical Test Procedure ............................................................ 37
210-15-065, Hydraulic System — Circuit Symbols .............................................................................. 38
Section 210 - GENERAL INFORMATION Group 05: Safety Measures
Group 05 - Safety Measures

Recognize Safety Information
Safety-alert symbol
This is a safety-alert symbol. When you see this symbol on your machine or in this manual, be alert to the potential for personal
injury.
Follow recommended precautions and safe operating practices.
”Important” Information
Information marked as IMPORTANT points out problems that may lead to machine damage. By following the directions given,
these problems can be avoided.
”Note” Information
When marked with NOTE the information given is more detailed or contains restrictions to directions given previously. On the
other hand useful information may be given belonging to certain instructions without being directly connected to them.
Prevent Machine Runaway
Machinery Runaway
Avoid possible injury or death from machinery runaway.
Do not start engine by shorting across starter terminals. Machine will start in gear if normal circuitry is bypassed.
NEVER start engine while standing on ground. Start engine only from operator’s seat, with transmission in neutral or park.
Handle Fluids Safely—Avoid Fires
Avoid Fires
When you work around fuel, do not smoke or work near heaters or other fire hazards.
Store flammable fluids away from fire hazards. Do not incinerate or puncture pressurized containers.
Make sure machine is clean of trash, grease, and debris.
Do not store oily rags; they can ignite and burn spontaneously.
Prevent Battery Explosions
Battery Explosions
Keep sparks, lighted matches, and open flame away from the top of battery. Battery gas can explode.
Never check battery charge by placing a metal object across the posts. Use a volt-meter or hydrometer.
Do not charge a frozen battery; it may explode. Warm battery to 16°C (60°F).
Prepare for Emergencies
First Aid Kit
Be prepared if a fire starts.
Keep a first aid kit and fire extinguisher handy.
Keep emergency numbers for doctors, ambulance service, hospital, and fire department near your telephone.
Prevent Acid Burns
Acid Burns
Sulfuric acid in battery electrolyte is poisonous. It is strong enough to burn skin, eat holes in clothing, and cause blindness if
splashed into eyes.
Avoid the hazard by:
1. Filling batteries in a well-ventilated area.

2. Wearing eye protection and rubber gloves.
3. Avoiding breathing fumes when electrolyte is added.
4. Avoiding spilling or dripping electrolyte.
5. Use proper jump start procedure.
If you spill acid on yourself:
1. Flush your skin with water.

2. Apply baking soda or lime to help neutralize the acid.
3. Flush your eyes with water for 15—30 minutes. Get medical attention immediately.
If acid is swallowed:
1. Do not induce vomiting.

2. Drink large amounts of water or milk, but do not exceed 2 L (2 quarts).
3. Get medical attention immediately.
Avoid High-Pressure Fluids
High-Pressure Fluids
Escaping fluid under pressure can penetrate the skin causing serious injury.
Avoid the hazard by relieving pressure before disconnecting hydraulic or other lines. Tighten all connections before applying
pressure.
Search for leaks with a piece of cardboard. Protect hands and body from high pressure fluids.
If an accident occurs, see a doctor immediately. Any fluid injected into the skin must be surgically removed within a few hours
or gangrene may result. Doctors unfamiliar with this type of injury should reference a knowledgeable medical source. Such
information is available from Deere & Company Medical Department in Moline, Illinois, U.S.A.
Service Cooling System Safely
Cooling System
Explosive release of fluids from pressurized cooling system can cause serious burns.
Shut off engine. Only remove filler cap when cool enough to touch with bare hands. Slowly loosen cap to first stop to relieve
pressure before removing completely.
Remove Paint Before Welding or Heating
Toxic Fumes
Avoid potentially toxic fumes and dust.
Hazardous fumes can be generated when paint is heated by welding, soldering, or using a torch.
Remove paint before heating:
Remove paint a minimum of 100 mm (4 in.) from area to be affected by heating. If paint cannot be removed, wear an
approved respirator before heating or welding.
If you sand or grind paint, avoid breathing the dust. Wear an approved respirator.
If you use solvent or paint stripper, remove stripper with soap and water before welding. Remove solvent or paint stripper
containers and other flammable material from area. Allow fumes to disperse at least 15 minutes before welding or
heating.
Do not use a chlorinated solvent in areas where welding will take place.
Do all work in an area that is well ventilated to carry toxic fumes and dust away.
Dispose of paint and solvent properly.
Avoid Heating Near Pressurized Fluid Lines
Flammable Spray
Flammable spray can be generated by heating near pressurized fluid lines, resulting in severe burns to yourself and
bystanders. Do not heat by welding, soldering, or using a torch near pressurized fluid lines or other flammable materials.
Pressurized lines can accidentally burst when heat goes beyond the immediate flame area.
Work In Ventilated Area
Engine exhaust fumes
Engine exhaust fumes can cause sickness or death. If it is necessary to run an engine in an enclosed area, remove the exhaust
fumes from the area with an exhaust pipe extension.
If you do not have an exhaust pipe extension, open the doors and get outside air into the area
Wear Protective Clothing
Protective Clothing
Wear close fitting clothing and safety equipment appropriate to the job.
Prolonged exposure to loud noise can cause impairment or loss of hearing.
Wear a suitable hearing protective device such as earmuffs or earplugs to protect against objectionable or uncomfortable loud
noises.
Operating equipment safely requires the full attention of the operator. Do not wear radio or music headphones while operating
machine.
Practice Safe Maintenance
Keep Area Clean
Understand service procedure before doing work. Keep area clean and dry.
Never lubricate, service, or adjust machine while it is moving. Keep hands, feet , and clothing from power-driven parts.
Disengage all power and operate controls to relieve pressure. Lower equipment to the ground. Stop the engine. Remove the
key. Allow machine to cool.
Securely support any machine elements that must be raised for service work.
Keep all parts in good condition and properly installed. Fix damage immediately. Replace worn or broken parts. Remove any
buildup of grease, oil, or debris.
On self-propelled equipment, disconnect battery ground cable (-) before making adjustments on electrical systems or welding
on machine.
On towed implements, disconnect wiring harnesses from tractor before servicing electrical system components or welding on
machine.
Park Machine Safely
Remove the Key
Before working on the machine:
Lower all equipment to the ground.

Stop the engine and remove the key.
Disconnect the battery ground strap.
Hang a "DO NOT OPERATE" tag in operator station.
Use Proper Lifting Equipment
Proper Lifting Equipment
Lifting heavy components incorrectly can cause severe injury or machine damage.
Follow recommended procedure for removal and installation of components in the manual.
Construct Dealer-Made Tools Safely
Construct Dealer-Made Tools Safely
Faulty or broken tools can result in serious injury. When constructing tools, use proper, quality materials, and good
workmanship.
Do not weld tools unless you have the proper equipment and experience to perform the job.
Support Machine Properly
Support Properly
Always lower the attachment or implement to the ground before you work on the machine. If the work requires that the
machine or attachment be lifted, provide secure support for them. If left in a raised position, hydraulically supported devices
can settle or leak down.
Do not support the machine on cinder blocks, hollow tiles, or props that may crumble under continuous load. Do not work
under a machine that is supported solely by a jack. Follow recommended procedures in this manual.
When implements or attachments are used with a machine, always follow safety precautions listed in the implement or
attachment operator′s manual.
Work in Clean Area
Clean Work Area
Before starting a job:
Clean work area and machine.

Make sure you have all necessary tools to do your job.
Have the right parts on hand.
Read all instructions thoroughly; do not attempt shortcuts.
Illuminate Work Area Safely
Work Area Safely
Illuminate your work area adequately but safely. Use a portable safety light for working inside or under the machine. Make sure
the bulb is enclosed by a wire cage. The hot filament of an accidentally broken bulb can ignite spilled fuel or oil.
Service Machines Safely
Moving Parts
Tie long hair behind your head. Do not wear a necktie, scarf, loose clothing, or necklace when you work near machine tools or
moving parts. If these items were to get caught, severe injury could result.
Remove rings and other jewelry to prevent electrical shorts and entanglement in moving parts.
Use Proper Tools
Proper Tools
Use tools appropriate to the work. Makeshift tools and procedures can create safety hazards.
Use power tools only to loosen threaded parts and fasteners.
For loosening and tightening hardware, use the correct size tools. DO NOT use U.S. measurement tools on metric fasteners.
Avoid bodily injury caused by slipping wrenches.
Use only service parts meeting John Deere specifications.
Service Tires Safely
Explosive Tire and Rim Parts
Explosive separation of a tire and rim parts can cause serious injury or death.
Do not attempt to mount a tire unless you have the proper equipment and experience to perform the job.
Always maintain the correct tire pressure. Do not inflate the tires above the recommended pressure. Never weld or heat a
wheel and tire assembly. The heat can cause an increase in air pressure resulting in a tire explosion. Welding can structurally
weaken or deform the wheel.
When inflating tires, use a clip-on chuck and extension hose long enough to allow you to stand to one side and NOT in front of
or over the tire assembly. Use a safety cage if available.
Check wheels for low pressure, cuts, bubbles, damaged rims or missing lug bolts and nuts.
Service Front-Wheel Drive Tractor Safely
Support Front and Rear Wheels
When servicing front-wheel drive tractor with the rear wheels supported off the ground and rotating wheels by engine power,
always support front wheels in a similar manner. Loss of electrical power or transmission/ hydraulic system pressure will
engage the front driving wheels, pulling the rear wheels off the support if front wheels are not raised. Under these conditions,
front drive wheels can engage even with switch in disengaged position.
Safety Information - Air Brake System
Compressed air tank
CAUTION:
Compressed air tank is pressurized!
Always relieve pressure before working on the air brake system. Do not carry out any welding jobs on the air brake system.
Avoid Eye Contact With Radar
Avoid Eye Contact With Radar
Radar ground speed sensor emits a very low intensity microwave signal. It will not cause any ill effects during normal use.
Although intensity is low, DO NOT look directly into face of sensor while in operation, to avoid any possible eye damage.
Keep ROPS Installed Properly
Roll-Over Protective Structure
Make certain all parts are reinstalled correctly if the roll-over protective structure (ROPS) is loosened or removed for any
reason. Tighten mounting bolts to proper torque.
The protection offered by ROPS will be impaired if ROPS is subjected to structural damage, is involved in an overturn incident,
or is in any way altered by welding, bending, drilling, or cutting. A damaged ROPS should be replaced, not reused.
Replace Safety Signs
Safety Signs
Replace missing or damaged safety signs. See the machine operator’s manual for correct safety sign placement.
Dispose of Waste Properly
Recycle Waste
Improperly disposing of waste can threaten the environment and ecology. Potentially harmful waste used with John Deere
equipment include such items as oil, fuel, coolant, brake fluid, filters, and batteries.
Use leakproof containers when draining fluids. Do not use food or beverage containers that may mislead someone into drinking
from them.
Do not pour waste onto the ground, down a drain, or into any water source.
Air conditioning refrigerants escaping into the air can damage the Earth’s atmosphere. Government regulations may require a
certified air conditioning service center to recover and recycle used air conditioning refrigerants.
Inquire on the proper way to recycle or dispose of waste from your local environmental or recycling center, or from your John
Deere dealer.
Live With Safety
Safety Systems
Before returning machine to customer, make sure machine is functioning properly, especially the safety systems. Install all
guards and shields.
Safety Measures on Electronic Control Units
Section 210 - GENERAL INFORMATION Group 15: General References
CAUTION:
Before installing test equipment on tractor, always shut off the engine and turn off key switch.
CAUTION:
Always engage the park lock when performing tests with the engine running.
CAUTION:
When testing is performed with the engine running, there is a risk of injury from rotating parts.
IMPORTANT:
Do not use a test lamp on any control unit. Only use a multimeter (JT05791A/JDG1478).
IMPORTANT:
To protect electronic circuits, disconnect the battery and alternator before performing any welding on
the tractor.
Group 15 - General References

Reference 210-15-001, General References—Summary
The following list contains additional references which may be helpful when diagnosing the machine.
General Information
Reference 210-15-010 , Unified Inch Bolt and Cap Screw Torque Values
Reference 210-15-015 , Metric Bolt and Cap Screw Torque Values
Reference 210-15-020 , Hydraulic System Inch Fitting Torques
Reference 210-15-025 , Hydraulic System Metric Fitting Torques
Electrical System
Reference 210-15-030, Component identification table

Reference 210-15-035, How to read a functional schematic
Reference 210-15-040, How to read a diagnostic schematic
Reference 210-15-042, Wire numbers and color codes
Reference 210-15-045, Schematic, wiring and harness symbols
Reference 210-15-050, Electrical system visual check
Reference 210-15-055, Electrical circuit malfunctions
Reference 210-15-060, Seven-step electrical test procedure
Hydraulic System
Reference 210-15-065 , Hydraulic circuit symbols
Reference 210-15-010, Unified Inch Bolt and Cap Screw Torque Values
Top, SAE Grade and Head Markings; Bottom, SAE Grade and Nut Markings
Unified Inch Bolt and Cap Screw Torque Values, 1 of 2
Grade 1 (No Mark) Grade 2 a (No Mark) Grade 5, 5.1 or 5.2 Grade 8 or 8.2
b b b
Lubricated Lubricated Lubricated Lubricated b
Size Dry c N˙m(lb-ft) Dry c N˙m(lb-ft) Dry c N˙m(lb-ft) Dry c N˙m(lb-ft)
N˙m(lb-ft) N˙m(lb-ft) N˙m(lb-ft) N˙m(lb-ft)
1/4 3.8 (2.8) 4.7 (3.5) 6 (4.4) 7.5 (5.5) 9.5 (7) 12 (9) 13.5 (10) 17 (12.5)
5/16 7.7 (5.7) 9.8 (7.2) 12 (9) 15.5 (11.5) 19.5 (14.5) 25 (18.5) 28 (20.5) 35 (26)
3/8 13.5 (10) 17.5 (13) 22 (16) 27.5 (20) 35 (26) 44 (32.5) 49 (36) 63 (46)
7/16 22 (16) 28 (20.5) 35 (26) 44 (32.5) 56 (41) 70 (52) 80 (59) 100 (74)
1/2 34 (25) 42 (31) 53 (39) 67 (49) 85 (63) 110 (80) 120 (88) 155 (115)
9/16 48 (35.5) 60 (45) 76 (56) 95 (70) 125 (92) 155 (115) 175 (130) 220 (165)
5/8 67 (49) 85 (63) 105 (77) 135 (100) 170 (125) 215 (160) 240 (175) 305 (225)
3/4 120 (88) 150 (110) 190 (140) 240 (175) 300 (220) 380 (280) 425 (315) 540 (400)
7/8 190 (140) 240 (175) 190 (140) 240 (175) 490 (360) 615 (455) 690 (510) 870 (640)
1 285 (210) 360 (265) 285 (210) 360 (265) 730 (540) 920 (680) 1030 (760) 1300 (960)
1-1/8 400 (300) 510 (375) 400 (300) 510 (375) 910 (670) 1150 (850) 1450 (1075) 1850 (1350)
1-1/4 570 (420) 725 (535) 570 (420) 725 (535) 1280 (945) 1630 (1200) 2050 (1500) 2600 (1920)
1-3/8 750 (550) 950 (700) 750 (550) 950 (700) 1700 (1250) 2140 (1580) 2700 (2000) 3400 (2500)
1-1/2 990 (730) 1250 (930) 990 (730) 1250 (930) 2250 (1650) 2850 (2100) 3600 (2650) 4550 (3350)
a
Grade 2 applies for hex cap screws (not hex bolts) up to 6 in. (152 mm) long. Grade 1 applies for hex cap screws over 6 in. (152 mm) long, and for all other types of
bolts and screws of any length.
b
"Lubricated" means coated with a lubricant such as engine oil, or fasteners with phosphate and oil coatings.
c
"Dry" means plain or zinc plated without any lubrication.
Unified Inch Bolt and Cap Screw Torque Values, 2 of 2
DO NOT use these values if a different torque value or tightening procedure is given for a Make sure fastener threads are clean and that you properly start
specific application. Torque values listed are for general use only. Torque values listed are for thread engagement. This will prevent them from failing when
general use only. tightening.
Tighten plastic insert or crimped steel-type lock nuts to approximately

Check tightness of fasteners periodically. Shear bolts are designed to fail under predetermined 50 percent of the dry torque shown in the chart, applied to the nut, not
loads. Always replace shear bolts with identical grade. to the bolt head. Tighten toothed or serrated-type lock nuts to the full
torque value.
Fasteners should be replaced with the same or higher grade. If higher grade fasteners are
used, these should only be tightened to the strength of the original.
Reference 210-15-015, Metric Bolt and Cap Screw Torque Values
Top, Property Class and Head Markings; Bottom, Property Class and Nut Markings
Metric Bolt and Cap Screw Torque Values, 1 of 2
Class 4.8 Class 8.8 or 9.8 Class 10.9 Class 12.9

a a a
Lubricated Lubricated Lubricated Lubricated a
Size Dry b N˙m(lb-ft) Dry b N˙m(lb-ft) Dry b N˙m(lb-ft) Dry b N˙m(lb-ft)
N˙m(lb-ft) N˙m(lb-ft) N˙m(lb-ft) N˙m(lb-ft)
M6 4.7 (3.5) 6 (4.4) 9 (6.6) 11.5 (8.5) 13 (9.5) 16.5 (12.2) 15.5 (11.5) 19.5 (14.5)
M8 11.5 (8.5) 14.5 (10.7) 22 (16) 28 (20.5) 32 (23.5) 40 (29.5) 37 (27.5) 47 (35)
M10 23 (17) 29 (21) 43 (32) 55 (40) 63 (46) 80 (59) 75 (55) 95 (70)
M12 40 (29.5) 50 (37) 75 (55) 95 (70) 110 (80) 140 (105) 130 (95) 165 (120)
M14 63 (46) 80 (59) 120 (88) 150 (110) 175 (130) 220 (165) 205 (150) 260 (190)
M16 100 (74) 125 (92) 190 (140) 240 (175) 275 (200) 350 (255) 320 (235) 400 (300)
M18 135 (100) 170 (125) 265 (195) 330 (245) 375 (275) 475 (350) 440 (325) 560 (410)
M20 190 (140) 245 (180) 375 (275) 475 (350) 530 (390) 675 (500) 625 (460) 790 (580)
M22 265 (195) 330 (245) 510 (375) 650 (480) 725 (535) 920 (680) 850 (625) 1080 (800)
M24 330 (245) 425 (315) 650 (480) 820 (600) 920 (680) 1150 (850) 1080 (800) 1350 (1000)
M27 490 (360) 625 (460) 950 (700) 1200 (885) 1350 (1000) 1700 (1250) 1580 (1160) 2000 (1475)
M30 660 (490) 850 (625) 1290 (950) 1630 (1200) 1850 (1350) 2300 (1700) 2140 (1580) 2700 (2000)
M33 900 (665) 1150 (850) 1750 (1300) 2200 (1625) 2500 (1850) 3150 (2325) 2900 (2150) 3700 (2730)
M36 1150 (850) 1450 (1075) 2250 (1650) 2850 (2100) 3200 (2350) 4050 (3000) 3750 (2770) 4750 (3500)
a
"Lubricated" means coated with a lubricant such as engine oil, or fasteners with phosphate and oil coatings.
b
"Dry" means plain or zinc plated without any lubrication.
Metric Bolt and Cap Screw Torque Values, 2 of 2
DO NOT use these values if a different torque value or tightening procedure is given for a Make sure fastener threads are clean and that you properly start
specific application. Torque values listed are for general use only. Torque values listed are for thread engagement. This will prevent them from failing when
general use only. tightening.
Tighten plastic insert or crimped steel-type lock nuts to approximately

Check tightness of fasteners periodically. Shear bolts are designed to fail under predetermined 50 percent of the dry torque shown in the chart, applied to the nut, not
loads. Always replace shear bolts with identical grade. to the bolt head. Tighten toothed or serrated-type lock nuts to the full
torque value.
Fasteners should be replaced with the same or higher grade. If higher grade fasteners are
used, these should only be tightened to the strength of the original.
210-15-020, Hydraulic System Inch Fitting Torques
Torques values in hydraulic system
LEGEND:
A Bulkhead fitting
B Lock nut
C Union nut
D Union nut
Torque values in hydraulic system
Fittings with flat-faced ring seal
Union nut Lock nut for bulkhead fitting
Thread size N˙m lb-ft N˙m lb-ft
9/16—18 16 12 5 3.5
11/16—16 24 18 9 6.5
13/16—16 50 37 17 12.5
1—14 69 51 17 12.5
1-3/16—12 102 75 17 12.5
1-7/16—12 142 105 17 12.5
1-11/16—12 190 140 17 12.5
2—12 217 160 17 12.5
The torques in the table above are intended only as approximate values and do NOT apply if a different torque value is listed
for specific fittings at other points in this manual. Check fittings regularly to make sure they are seated properly.
When replacing fittings, be sure to use parts with an equal or higher grade to the parts you are replacing. Items of hardware
(e.g. union nuts) that are of a higher grade should be tightened to the same torque value as the parts they replace.
It is vitally important to make sure that the sealing faces are clean and that the O-rings have been inserted properly.
210-15-025, Hydraulic System Metric Fitting Torques
LEGEND:
A Stud-end fitting
B Groove for metric thread
C Lock nut
D Adjustable stud-end fitting
Stud-end fitting and lock nut for adjustable stud-end fitting
Steel or grey-cast iron Aluminium
Thread size N˙m lb–ft N˙m lb–ft
M12x1,5 21 15.5 9 6.6
M14x1,5 33 24 15 11
M16x1,5 41 30 18 13
M18x1,5 50 37 21 15
M22x1,5 69 51 28 21
M27x2 102 75 46 34
M33x2 158 116 71 52
M38x2 176 130 79 58
M42x2 190 140 85 63
M48x2 217 160 98 72
The torques in the table above are intended only as approximate values and do NOT apply if a different torque value is listed
for specific fittings at other points in this manual. Check fittings regularly to make sure they are seated properly.
When replacing fittings, be sure to use parts with an equal or higher grade to the parts you are replacing. Items of hardware
(e.g. union nuts) that are of a higher grade should be tightened to the same torque value as the parts they replace.
It is vitally important to make sure that the sealing faces are clean and that the O-rings have been inserted properly.
210-15-030, Component Identification Table

Each component (electrical device) and main connector will have an identification letter assigned to it. A number is added to
the letter to separate and indicate all components within that letter group.
Component Identification Table
Identification
Type Examples
Letter
A System, subassembly, parts group Electronic control units, trigger boxes, two-way radios, logic module, FNR logic module
Transducer for conversion of non- Speed senders, pressure senders, pressure switch horns, sensors, pickups, limit-value sensors, pulse
B electrical variables to electrical and vice generators, loudspeakers, inductive pickups, probes, air-flow sensors, oil-pressure switches, temperature
versa senders, ignition-voltage pickups
C Condenser Condensers and capacitors, general
D Binary device, memory Digital devices, integrated circuits, pulse counters, magnetic tape recorders
E Various devices and equipment Heating devices, air conditioners, light, headlights, spark plugs, ignition distributors
F Guard Release mechanisms, polarity protection devices, fuses, current protection circuits
G Power supply, generator Batteries, generators, alternators, charging units
H Monitor, alarm, signalling device Audible alarms, indicator lights, turn-signal lights, brake lights, alarms, warning lights, buzzers
K Relay Battery relays, turn signal relays, solenoids, starting relays, warning flashers
L Inductor Choke coils, coils, windings
M Engine Blower motors, fan motors, starter motors
N Regulator, amplifier Regulators (electronic or electromechanical), voltage stabilizers
Ammeter, diagnostic connectors, tachometers, fuel gauge, pressure gauges, measuring points, test
P Measuring instrument
points, speedometers
Flame glow plugs, sheathed-element flame glow plugs, glow plugs, heating resistors, NTC resistors, PTC
R Resistance
resistors, potentiometers, regulating resistors
S Switch Switches and pushbuttons, general key switch, light switch, horn switch, flasher switch
T Transformer Ignition coil, ignition transformer
U Modulator, converter DC transformers
V Semiconductor, electron tubes Transistors, diodes, electron tubes, rectifiers, semiconductors, thyristors, zener diodes
W Transmission path, conductor, antenna Antennas, shielding components, shielded conductors, cable harnesses, conductors, ground conductors
Terminal, plug, plug-and-socket Terminal studs, electrical connections, connectors for electrical line couplers, line connectors, sockets,
X
connection plugs, terminals, plug-and-socket connections
Permanent magnets, injection valves (solenoid-operated), electromagnetic clutches and brakes, air
Y Electrically actuated mechanical device
valves, fuel pumps, solenoids, switching valves, start valves, locking systems
Z Electrical filter Interference suppression filters
Reference 210-15-035, How to Read a Functional Schematic
Functional schematic
LEGEND:
A Power supply wires:
Wire 012 (terminal 30), battery
Wire 022 (terminal 15), ignition
Wire 212 (terminal 54), not supplied with power during engine starting
Wire 072 (ELX), power supply for electronics
Wire 202 (ACC), power supply for accessories
B Wire number
C Part designation
D Section designation
E Section to which cable is routed
F Wire 310 (terminal 31), ground
The functional schematic is divided into functional sections. The part designations, wire numbers and symbols are identical
with the corresponding data in the wiring and harness diagram. Switches and relays are shown in “OFF”position.
210-15-040, How to Read a Diagnostic Schematic
Diagnostic schematic
LEGEND:
A Current supply from section (SE)
B Symbol (connector)
C Symbol (ground)
D Wire number
E Splice point (SP)
F Plug designation (X)
Like the functional schematic, the diagnostic schematic is divided into functional sections. It contains information about plugs
(X) and connectors. Each wire is identified by a number that also indicates the cable color and the relevant circuit. The letter at
the end of a wire number indicates that there are several wires with the same number but different letters.
210-15-042, Wire Numbers and Color Codes

Wire number
Schematic wire numbers
Wire no. Electrical circuit
000—099 Power supply
100—199 Lighting system
200—299 Accessories
300—499 Motor
500—699 Transmission
700—799 Hydraulic system
800—899 Rockshaft
900—999 Miscellaneous
Color code
→NOTE:
The last digit of the wire number indicates the color.
Schematic wire color code
Wire no. Color Application
x50 Black Battery ground
xx0 Black Ground
xx1 Brown Not used
xx2 Red Power supply
xx3 Orange Not used
xx4 Yellow "
xx5 Dark green "
xx6 Light blue "
xx7 Pale purple "
xx8 Grey "
xx9 White "
210-15-045, Schematic, Wiring and Harness Symbols
Symbols in functional schematic, wiring and harness diagrams
LEGEND:
A Alternator with rectifier and regulator
B Starting motor with solenoid
C Fuel pump
D Compressor
E Battery
F Fuse
G Bulb with one luminous element
H Bulb with two luminous elements
I Radio
K Loudspeaker
L Horn
M Valve, operated electro-mechanically
N Switch, actuated by pressure
O Switch, actuated by temperature
P Variable resistor
Symbols in functional schematic, wiring and harness diagrams
LEGEND:
A Electric clutch
B Wiper motor
C Buzzer
D Mechanical switch
E Center-zero relay
F Mechanical switch (microswitch)
G Diode
H Sensor
I Hall sending unit
K Resistor
L Tachometer
M Tachometer
N Control unit
O Battery ground
P Cable ground
Q Vehicle ground
Reference 210-15-046, Troubleshooting Unsolved Problems
→NOTE:
This reference deals with the troubleshooting of problems that persist after standard diagnosis has been
carried out. These problems are usually caused by certain operating conditions, by intermittent
malfunctions, or, in rare cases by a failed controller. Depending on the situation, some or all of the
following information may be of importance.
[1] - Problems caused by certain operating conditions:
Check all recorded diagnostic trouble codes and ask the operator for operating and vehicle conditions at the time the problem
occurred. Write down details.
Does the diagnostic trouble code/problem appear together with other problems?
Does the diagnostic trouble code/problem appear when the machine is at operating temperature or when the machine is
cold?
Does the diagnostic trouble code/problem appear during field operation or during transport?
Does the diagnostic trouble code/problem appear when certain operational procedures are carried out (e.g. shifting,
turning, braking or operating certain hydraulic functions)?
When did the diagnostic trouble code/problem appear first? Has service work been carried out recently? If yes, check
areas where service work was performed for damage and improperly installed parts.
Try to generate the diagnostic trouble code/problem again by creating the same conditions. If possible, repeat the operational,
system relevant, electric, hydraulic or mechanic tests under these conditions.
[2] - Problems caused by intermittent electric failures:
→NOTE:
Intermittent electrical failures are usually caused by wiring harness, terminal or connector problems.
Check all connectors and terminals of the electric circuits associated with the malfunction.
Check if harnesses or connectors are obstructed by mechanical parts.
Check harnesses for missing or poor fasteners or tie bands. Wiring harnesses that are too loose or too tight may lead to
worn or damaged cables.
Check that mechanical parts are in good working condition.
210-15-050, Visual Check of the Electrical System

If a customer reports a problem, perform a visual check of the electrical system before starting the tractor.
[1] - Check for frayed leads.
[2] - Check for missing or worn insulation; this can point to a conductor problem.
[3] - Check for loose or broken connections and wiring leads.
[4] - Check battery for:
Corroded terminal connections

Loose cable clamps or battery posts
Dirty batteries
Wet batteries
Cracked case
Correct electrolyte level
[5] - Check the alternator belt tension.
[6] - Check for overheated components five minutes after the engine has been shut off. Often there will be the smell of burnt
insulation. Place your hand on the alternator. The presence of heat after the engine has been off for some time is a sure sign of
a charging circuit problem.
[7] - If the visual check does not isolate a possible problem, but the results do not indicate the engine should not be started,
turn the ignition key to the IGN position. Check the accessory circuits, indicator lights, etc. How are these individual
components working? Look for sparks or smoke as signs of shorts.
[8] - Start the engine. Check all indicators for proper operation; determine if the system is charging or discharging.
[9] - In short, check for any abnormal conditions.
Many electrical faults cannot be identified even if the engine is started. For this reason the electrical system should be
systematically and completely checked.
Reference 210-15-055, Electrical Circuit Malfunctions
Electrical circuit malfunction areas
Malfunctions
There are only four circuit malfunctions.
High-Resistance Circuit ( GO TO 1 ).
Open Circuit ( GO TO 1 ).
Grounded Circuit ( GO TO 2 ).
Shorted Circuit ( GO TO 3 ).
There are only three sections in a simple circuit where these malfunctions occur: Before the controlling switch (A), between the
controlling switch (A) and the load (B), and after load (B).
Component malfunctions can easily be confused with circuit malfunctions. Therefore, care must be exercised when isolating
the cause of the problem.
Example: A component may not operate before disconnecting an electrical connection, but it operates after reconnecting the
connector. Cause: High resistance created a voltage drop at the connector terminals which prevented the proper amount of
current from flowing to the component.
Types of fault
( 1 ) High resistance or open circuit
Action:
LEGEND:
A Battery
B Fuse
C Switch
D Component terminal
E Circuit resistor
F Circuit connector
G Circuit connector
H Component terminal
I Lamp
J Ground
High resistance or open circuit
A high resistance circuit can result in slow, dim or no component operation (e.g. loose, corroded, dirty or oily terminal, also if
the gauge of the wire is too small or broken strands exist).
An open circuit results in no component operation because the circuit is incomplete (e.g. broken wire, terminals disconnected,
open protective device on switch).
To isolate the location of a “high resistance” or “open circuit”:
[1] - With the controlling switch (C) ON and the load (I) connected into the circuit, check for proper voltage at a location easily
accessible between (D) and (H).
If voltage is low, move toward voltage source (A) to locate point of voltage drop.
→NOTE:
The example shows high resistance between (D) and (F) and open circuit between (F) and (G).
If voltage is correct, move toward load (I) and ground terminal (J) to locate voltage drop.
[2] - Repair circuit as required.
Result:
NO:Repeat check-out procedure after repair.
YES:See procedure for “Grounded Circuit”: GO TO 2 ..See procedure for “Shorted Circuit”: GO TO 3 .
( 2 ) Grounded circuit
Action:
LEGEND:
A Battery
B Fuse terminal
C Fuse terminal
D Switch
E Component terminal
F Grounded circuit
G Component terminal
H Lamp
Grounded Circuit
A grounded circuit results in no component operation and the fuse or circuit breaker open (e.g. power wire contacting ground).
To isolate the location of a grounded circuit:
[1] - With controlling switch (D) OFF, check for continuity to ground between (C) and (D).
If there is continuity, there is a grounded circuit between (C) and (D). Repair circuit.
No continuity, go to 2.
[2] - Disconnect load (H) at (G).
[3] - With controlling switch (D) OFF, check continuity to ground between (D and F).
If there is continuity, there is a grounded circuit between (E) and (F). Repair circuit.
→NOTE:
The example is grounded between (E) and (F).
Result:
YES:See procedure for “Shorted Circuit”: GO TO 3 .
( 3 ) Shorted circuit
Action:
LEGEND:
A Switch
B Lamp
C Fuse
D Switch
E Component terminal
F Circuit connector
G Circuit connector
H Component terminal
I Lamp
Shorted circuit
A shorted circuit usually results in two components operating when one of two switches is turned on (e.g. improper wire-to-wire
contact). Components can also become shorted. However, shorted components will usually open the circuit protection device.
To isolate the location of a shorted circuit:
[1] - Turn switch (A) ON for correct lamp (B) to operate.
[2] - Start at controlling switch (D) of lamp (I) that should not be operating and disconnect the wire at terminal (E).
[3] - Follow circuit and disconnect wire at connectors (F, G or H) until the extra lamp (I) stops operating.
[4] - The short or improper connection will be between the last two locations where the wire was disconnected. In our example,
it is between (F) and (G).
[5] - Repair circuit as follows:
Wires not in a loom: Wrap individual wire with electrical tape or replace the damaged wire and band as required.
Wires in a loom: If hot spots exist in shorted area of loom, replace harness. If hot spots are not noticeable, install a new wire of
proper gauge between the last two connections. Band wire to outside of harness.
Result:
Reference 210-15-060, Seven Step Electrical Test Procedure
Electrical test procedure
LEGEND:
A Component terminal
B Component terminal
C Component terminal
D Component terminal
E Wire
Electrical test procedure
Step 1—Switch ON
Check battery side of circuit breaker (A) for battery voltage .......... Battery voltage normal. Go to step 2.
Low voltage, repair high resistance or open circuit from battery.
Step 2—Switch OFF
Check load side of circuit breaker (B) for battery voltage .......... Battery voltage normal. Go to step 4.
Low voltage, replace circuit breaker.
No voltage. Go to step 3.
Step 3—Switch OFF
Check load side of circuit breaker (B) for continuity to ground. Clip at battery voltage
Continuity to ground. Repair grounded circuit at or before switch.
(A) ..........
No continuity to ground, replace circuit breaker.
Step 4—Switch ON
Check load side of circuit breaker (B) for battery voltage .......... Battery voltage normal. Go to step 6.
Low voltage, replace circuit breaker.
No voltage. Go to step 5.
Step 5
[ A multimeter will not apply a load to the circtuit at step 5. The multimeter result is tested as a voltage condition in the result column. ]
Disconnect lead to component at (C). Switch ON. Check lead (E) for battery voltage
Battery voltage, repair component.
..........
No voltage, repair grounded circuit at or after switch.
Step 6—Switch ON
Check lead to component at (C) for battery voltage .......... Battery voltage normal. Go to step 7.
Low voltage, repair high resistance in circuit between fuse and component.
No voltage, repair high resistance or open circuit between fuse and component.
Step 7—Switch ON
Check ground lead of component at (D) for voltage .......... No voltage, good continuity to ground. Repair component.
Voltage, poor continuity to ground. Repair high resistance or open ground circuit.
210-15-065, Hydraulic System — Circuit Symbols

Lines
LEGEND:
A Oil line or passage
B Pilot (control) line
C Sub-assembly enclosure
D Mech. connections (e.g. shafts)
Hydraulic symbols—lines
Valves
LEGEND:
A With one operating position
B With two operating positions
C With three operating positions
D 3/2 directional control valve
Hydraulic Symbols—Valves
→NOTE:
When designating a valve such as the 3/2 directional control valve (D), the first figure indicates the
number of connections, and the second the number of operating positions.
Arrows
LEGEND:
A Direction of throughflow (in valves)
B Direction of flow (in lines)
C Direction of rotation (at component)
D Adjustable or variable components
Hydraulic Symbols—Arrows
Valve actuation
LEGEND:
A Lever
B Pedal
C Button
D Spring
E Electro-magnet (with one coil)
F Electro-magnet (with two coils)
G Pressure
Hydraulic symbols—Valve actuation
Detent Valves
LEGEND:
A With one detent position
B With two detent positions
Hydraulic symbols—detent valves
Check Valves
LEGEND:
A Check valve without spring
B Spring-loaded check valve
C With restricting effect in closed position
Hydraulic symbols—check valves
Pressure Relief Valves
LEGEND:
A Pilot pressure preset by a spring
B Pilot pressure controlled by pilot line
Hydraulic symbols—pressure relief valves
Proportional Valves (with Transition)
Hydraulic symbols—directional control valves with restricting effect
Restrictors
LEGEND:
A Constant
B Variable
Hydraulic symbols—restrictors
Hydraulic Cylinders
LEGEND:
A Single-acting
B Double-acting
Hydraulic symbols—hydraulic cylinders
Pumps
LEGEND:
A Constant
B Variable
Hydraulic Symbols—Pumps
Hydraulic Motor
Hydraulic symbols—hydraulic motor
Filter or Screen
Hydraulic symbols—filter or screen
Cooler
Hydraulic symbols—cooler
Line Connections and Junctions

LEGEND:
A Line connections
B Hose
C Line junctions
Hydraulic symbols—connections & junctions
Connections
LEGEND:
A Quick coupler
B Test port
Hydraulic symbols—connections
ENGINE (g) by Belgreen v2.0
Reservoirs/Tanks
LEGEND:
A Open (sump)
B Under pressure
Hydraulic symbols—reservoirs/tanks
Sensors
LEGEND:
A Pressure sensor
B Temperature sensor
C Pressure switch
Hydraulic symbols—sensors
Electrical Lines
Hydraulic symbols—electrical lines
Section 220 - ENGINE

Table of contents
Group 10 - Operational Checks .............................................................................................................. 1
Reference 220-10-010, Safety .............................................................................................................. 1
Reference 220-10-020, Preliminary Engine Tests ................................................................................. 1
Group 15 - Tests And Adjustments ....................................................................................................... 2
Reference 220-15-001, Tests and Adjustments—Summary of References ........................................... 2
220-15-010, Dynamometer Test .......................................................................................................... 2
Reference 220-15-020, Measuring PTO Power Output .......................................................................... 3
Section 220 - ENGINE Group 15: Tests And Adjustments
Group 10 - Operational Checks

Reference 220-10-010, Safety
CAUTION:
Always shut off the engine before connecting test equipment to the tractor.
CAUTION:
Always engage the parking lock when performing tests with the engine running.
CAUTION:
When testing is performed with the engine running, there is a risk of injury from moving parts.
Reference 220-10-020, Preliminary Engine Tests

Before tuning up an engine, determine whether a tune-up will restore operating efficiency. When there is doubt, the following
preliminary tests will help to determine whether the engine can be tuned up.
Perform the following tests:
After engine has been stopped for several hours, carefully loosen crankcase drain plug and watch for any water to seep out. A
few drops could be due to condensation, but any more than this would indicate problems which require engine repairs rather
than just a tune-up.
With engine stopped, inspect engine coolant for an oil film. With engine running, inspect coolant for air bubbles. Either
condition would indicate problems which require engine repairs rather than just a tune-up.
Perform a dynamometer test and record horsepower. Repeat dynamometer test after tune-up so that horsepower before and
after tune-up can be compared.
Measure compression as described in the Technical Manual “Engines”.

Reference 220-15-001, Tests and Adjustments—Summary of References
Reference 220-15-010 , Dynamometer Test
Reference 220-15-020 , Measuring PTO Power Output
220-15-010, Dynamometer Test

If possible, test the engine on a dynamometer before it is tuned.
This test indicates whether a tune-up can restore the engine or whether an overhaul is needed.
Good engine performance depends to a great extent on the following:
an adequate supply of clean air and fuel

good compression
proper valve and injection pump timing for good combustion
proper air and fuel temperatures
Perform dynamometer test as follows:
[1] - Connect the dynamometer to tractor PTO as described in the manufacturer′s instructions.
[2] - Run engine at half load until coolant and engine oil have reached normal operating temperature.
[3] - Run engine at fast idle speed. See “Engine Specifications” in relevant Technical Manual, Section 10, Group 05.
[4] - Gradually increase engine load until engine speed drops to rated speed. See “Engine Specifications” in relevant Technical
Manual, Section 10, Group 05.
[5] - Read the horsepower on dynamometer.
Compare reading with relevant PTO horsepower specifications.
Reference 220-15-020, Measuring PTO Power Output

Before detailing the complete power-performance-test procedure, we would like to inform you about some important pre-
checks that need to be made before performing a PTO power check. Failing to make these checks may result in a PTO power
reading that deviates from specification.
→NOTE:
The test sheet for 4-cyl. tractors can be found in DTAC solution no. 60740.
Always check the following points before starting a PTO power test:
[1] -
LEGEND:
A Test port for stand-by pressure
Checking stand-by pressure in the hydraulic system
Before checking stand-by pressure in the hydraulic system, see Reference 270-15-072 , ”Checking the System Pressure”.
Ensure that there is no hydraulic application in use during an engine power test (e.g. SCV still engaged from transmission oil
pre-heating). If the stand-by pressure is not within specification, the PTO power test results will be negatively affected.
[2] - Check the level of the transmission oil.
Check that the transmission oil level is between minimum and maximum. Transmission oil level above maximum will
negatively affect the engine power reading. For example, an additional 6 liter oil fill above maximum may result in a 4 kW
power loss. Overfill will affect road transport performance at high speed quite heavily.
[3] - Transmission oil temperature.
It is important that the transmission oil is heated up to 60-65°C (140-149°F) prior to test. Cold transmission oil has a higher
viscosity and increases power losses. Make sure the oil is at this temperature for at least 20 min. to ensure transmission
housing is warmed up too.
[4] - Viscous fan.
To get the best measurement results make sure that the coolant temperature is below 85°C (185°F). During measurement,
make sure the fan speed does not exceed 1800 rpm. PTO power specifications are based on 1600 fan rpm. A higher speed
causes higher power losses, which must be taken into account when interpreting the final result.
[5] - Tractors with PowrQuad transmission.
Ensure that the PowrQuad 3rd gear is engaged during the engine power test. This provides the highest transmission efficiency.
[6] - Ensure that the a/c as well as the blower is switched off during the engine power test.
[7] - Check battery. The battery must be fully charged and in good condition.
Charging battery during power test can create power losses above 1.5 kW
[8] - Enter the following tractor data in the test sheet.
→NOTE:
The test sheet for 4-cyl. tractors can be found in DTAC solution no. 60740.
Tractor model
Tractor serial number
Engine hours
Engine serial number
Transmission oil temperature
Coolant temperature
Transmission version
Add other tractor details such as front and rear tire size.
[9] - Make sure that the front PTO is disengaged, if equipped.
[10] - Check the engine oil level according to the OM.
[11] - Check if all coolers are clean.
[12] - Check condition of fuel filter. No water or sediment must be present in the filter.
[13] -
Dynamometer Connection
Connect the dynamometer to the tractor. Make sure that the u.j. shaft is not straight; it must be connected in a slight angle.
[14] -
Warming up the engine using a plastic cover
For a quick engine warm-up use a plastic cover, see picture.
[15] - See Reference 270-15-010 for how to heat up the hydraulic oil.
[16] - Check temperature of engine coolant - AddressBIF034 .
Temperature of coolant should be below 85°C (185°F).
[17] - Check temperature of transmission oil - AddressBIF033 orEPC036 .
Transmission oil temperature should be 60-65°C (140-149°F).
[18] - Remove the plastic cover once correct transmission and engine temperature has been reached.
[19] - Measure fan speed and wait until stable at around 1600 rpm (may vary under different ambient temperatures).
[20] - Engage park lock.
Move actuated SCV lever back to neutral position (off).
Engage PowrQuad 3rd gear.
Select 1000 rpm PTO and engage PTO.
[21] - Fully open throttle. Allow engine to run for 1 minute before starting power measurement.
High idle engine speed for engine power measurement:

5620 - 5820 = 2460 - 2510 rpm
Rated engine speed for engine power measurement:
5620 - 5820 = 2300 rpm
[22] - After the complete power performance test, check the engine and temperature of the transmission oil again.
Check temperature of engine coolant - AddressBIF034 .
Check temperature of transmission oil - AddressBIF033 orEPC036 .
[23] - After the power test, run the engine at low rpm for five minutes.
[24] -
FUEL, AIR INTAKE AND COOLING SYSTEMS (g) by Belgreen v2.0
Test sheet
Power curve
The illustrations show examples of test sheet and PTO power curve.
The original test sheet can be found in DTAC solution no. 60740.
Section 230 - FUEL, AIR INTAKE AND COOLING SYSTEMS

Table of contents
Group 15 - Tests And Adjustments ....................................................................................................... 1
Reference 230-15-001, Tests and Adjustments—Summary of References ........................................... 1
Reference 230-15-010, General Information ........................................................................................ 1
Reference 230-15-020, Explanation of Checks ..................................................................................... 1
Reference 230-15-030, Safety .............................................................................................................. 1
Reference 230-15-040, Special Tools ................................................................................................... 2
Reference 230-15-050, Specifications .................................................................................................. 4
Reference 230-15-060, Testing Air Intake System ............................................................................... 5
Reference 230-15-061, Testing the Low-Pressure Switch in Air Intake System .................................... 6
Reference 230-15-070, Checking the Cooling System for Leaks .......................................................... 7
Reference 230-15-080, Testing the Temperature at which the Thermostat opens .............................. 9
Reference 230-15-090, Checking the Viscous Clutch of the Fan ........................................................ 10
Reference 230-15-100, Checking the Fuel Transfer Pump ................................................................. 11
Reference 230-15-110, Hand Throttle Lever and Accelerator Pedal Adjustment ................................ 12
Group 20 - Theory Of Operation .......................................................................................................... 13
Reference 230-20-001, Component Description - Summary of References ........................................ 13
Reference 230-20-010, Fuel System - Description ............................................................................. 14
Reference 230-20-020, Air Intake System - Theory of Operation ....................................................... 16
Reference 230-20-030, Coolant Circuit - Description ......................................................................... 17
Reference 230-20-040, Cooling System Radiator - Description .......................................................... 18
Reference 230-20-070, Viscous Clutch of Fan - Theory of Operation ................................................. 19
Reference 230-20-080, Automatic Drive Belt Tensioner - Theory of Operation .................................. 20
Reference 230-20-090, Cold Weather Starting Aids - Theory of Operation ........................................ 20
Section 230 - FUEL, AIR INTAKE AND COOLING SYSTEMS Group 15: Tests And Adjustments

Reference 230-15-001, Tests and Adjustments—Summary of References
Reference 230-15-010 "General Information"
Reference 230-15-020 "Explanation of Checks"
Reference 230-15-030 "Safety"
Reference 230-15-040 "Special Tools"
Reference 230-15-050 "Specifications"
Reference 230-15-060 "Testing Air Intake System"
Reference 230-15-070 "Checking the Cooling System for Leaks"
Reference 230-15-080 "Testing the Temperature at which the Thermostat opens"
Reference 230-15-090 "Checking the Viscous Clutch of the Fan"
Reference 230-15-100 "Checking the Fuel Transfer Pump"
Reference 230-15-110 "Hand Throttle Lever and Accelerator Pedal Adjustment"
Reference 230-15-010, General Information
CAUTION:
Do not smoke or permit live sparks or fire of any nature in the vicinity while testing the fuel system.
→NOTE:
The fuel injection pump, fuel injection nozzles and fuel filter are dealt with in the technical manual that
covers engines.
Reference 230-15-020, Explanation of Checks
CAUTION:
Always follow the safety measures outlined in this group when performing tests on the fuel, air intake
and cooling systems.
The following tests are used to examine and adjust individual engine components.
The applicable test should be performed if a component does not operate or operates poorly, or if a component has been
repaired.
In any case, follow the test sequence and use the applicable test data.
Reference 230-15-030, Safety
CAUTION:
Shut off the engine before checking any components located near moving parts.
CAUTION:
CAUTION:
Always engage the parking lock when performing test with engine running.
CAUTION:
Escaping fuel under pressure can penetrate the skin causing serious injury. Avoid the hazard by relieving
pressure before disconnecting hydraulic or other lines. Check and tighten all connections before applying
pressure.
CAUTION:
To avoid the possibility of severe infection, seek medical assistance immediately if injured by exposure
to fuel under pressure.
CAUTION:
Reference 230-15-040, Special Tools
→NOTE:
Order tools according to information given in the U.S. SERVICEGARD ™ Catalog or European Microfiche
Tool Catalog (MTC).
Pressure gauge kit
FKM10002
FKM10002
Measuring air pressure in intake system
Pressure gauge
FKM10242
FKM10242
Pump
D05104ST
D05104ST
Checking the cooling system for leaks
Adapter
JDG839
Checking the cooling system for leaks
Hand-held digital tachometer
JT05719
JT05719
Checking the viscous clutch of the fan
Reference 230-15-050, Specifications

Item Measurement Specification
Cooling system
Cooling system test pressure Pressure 50 to 60 kPa
0.5 to 0.6 bar
7 to 8.7 psi
Expansion tank cap

Pressure at which high-pressure valve opens High pressure 70 to 90 kPa
0.7 to 0.9 bar
10 to 13 psi
Pressure at which low-pressure valve opens Low pressure 1 to 10 kPa
0.01 to 0.1 bar
0.15 to 1.5 psi
Air intake system

Intake pressure—5720 tractor Pressure 66 kPa
660 mbar
9.6 psi
Intake pressure—5820 tractor Pressure 72 kPa
720 mbar
10.4 psi
Low-pressure switch in air intake system Low pressure 5.9 to 6.9 kPa
59 to 69 mbar
0.85 to 1.0 psi
Fuel system
Fuel system pressure Pressure 15 kPa
0.15 bar
2.18 psi
Reference 230-15-060, Testing Air Intake System

LEGEND:
FKM10417 pressure gauge for measuring intake
A pressure
[ Included in gauge set FKM10002 ]
B Pressure hose FKM10209

C KJD10148 connector
Testing the air intake system
→NOTE:
After engine has been adjusted or repaired, always check air intake system and low-pressure switch.
[1] - Clean air cleaner.
[2] - Connect FKM10417 pressure gauge (A).
Pressure gauge set
FKM10002
FKM10002
[3] - Run engine until it reaches operating temperature.
[4] - Run engine at fast idle speed. See “Engine Specifications” , Section 10, Group 05.
Measuring intake pressure:
Intake pressure - 5720 tractor Pressure 66 kPa
660 mbar
9.6 psi
Intake pressure - 5820 tractor Pressure 72 kPa
720 mbar
10.4 psi
Depending on the pressure gauge used, the measured pressure values may vary extremely.
If the pressure is not as specified, check air cleaner and intake hoses for contamination and correct connections.
Reference 230-15-061, Testing the Low-Pressure Switch in Air Intake

System
Low-pressure switch in air intake system
[1] - Run engine at fast idle speed. See reference ”Engine Specifications” , Section 10, Group 05.
[2] - Partly cover air cleaner intake (A) with a piece of cardboard (B). Gradually increase the restriction.
[3] - The air cleaner indicator light should glow. If not, check the sending unit of low-pressure switch (C), see Reference
240-15-002 , ”SE02 — Basic Informator”
IMPORTANT:
If you replace the sending unit for air cleaner restriction, you should check the basic informator BIF
[ With PowrQuad Plus transmission only ]

for diagnostic trouble codes. See Reference 245-05-002 , ”Accessing Addresses and Diagnostic Trouble
Codes”.
Reference 230-15-070, Checking the Cooling System for Leaks
Expansion tank cap and pressure tester
[1] - Check radiator, expansion tank, coolant hoses, coolant pump and engine for leaks and other damage, and repair when
necessary.
[2] - Clean exterior of radiator and straighten any bent fins.
[3] - As shown in the illustration, connect pump D05104ST and adapter JDG839 or a commercial radiator tester (A) to the
expansion tank (B).
[4] - Check cooling system with the following pressure.
Cooling system pressure test Pressure 50 to 60 kPa
0.5 to 0.6 bar
7 to 8.7 psi
→NOTE:
Radiator repairs should be carried out only by experienced mechanics or in specialist workshops.
Check expansion tank cap
Checking expansion tank cap
[1] - Check rubber seal on cap for cracks and brittleness. The sealing ring must be soft and seated securely.
[2] - Remove expansion tank cap (A) and test it with pump D05104ST
Pump
D05104ST
and adapter JDG839
Adapter
JDG839
or with a commercial radiator and pressure cap tester (B).
Pressure at which high-pressure valve opens.
Expansion tank cap—Opening pressure High pressure 70 to 90 kPa
0.7 to 0.9 bar
10 to 13 psi
Expansion tank cap—Opening pressure Low pressure 1 to 10 kPa
0.01 to 0.1 bar
0.15 to 1.5 psi
Reference 230-15-080, Testing the Temperature at which the

Thermostat opens
Testing the temperature at which the thermostat opens
[1] - Remove thermostats.
[2] - Visually inspect thermostat for corrosion or damage. Replace thermostats as a matched set as necessary.
[3] -
CAUTION:
DO NOT allow thermostat or thermometer to rest against the side or bottom of container when heating
water. Either may rupture if overheated.
Suspend thermostat and a thermometer in a container of water.
[4] - Stir the water as it heats. Observe opening action of thermostat and compare temperatures with specifications given in
chart below.
→NOTE:
Due to varying tolerances of different suppliers, initial opening and full open temperature may vary
slightly from specified temperatures.
Thermostat test specifications
THERMOSTAT TEST SPECIFICATIONS
Nominal value Initial opening (range) Full open (nominal)
82°C (180°F) 80-84°C (175-182°F) 94°C (202°F)
[5] - Remove thermostat from container and observe its closing action as it cools. In ambient air the thermostat should close
completely. Closing action should be smooth and slow.
[6] - Should the thermostat be defective, replace it.
Reference 230-15-090, Checking the Viscous Clutch of the Fan
Measuring the fan speed
This check requires the engine to be cold and under zero load.
[1] - Open the hood and apply reflective tape JT05709 (A)
[ Included in hand-held digital tachometer JT05719 ]

to the fan.
[2] - Start the engine and run it at 2000 rpm for 3 minutes. During this time, fan speed should increase and drop again (the
change can be heard).
[3] - Set engine speed to between 850 and 900 rpm (slow idle).
Measure fan speed using hand-held digital tachometer JT05719 (B); fan speed should be at least 800 rpm, but a drop to 600
rpm for approx. 30 seconds is permissible.
[4] - Set engine speed to 1200 rpm and let it run at this speed for 4 minutes.
Fan speed should not drop below 1000 rpm.
[5] - Set engine speed to 1800 rpm and let it run at this speed for 4 minutes.
Fan speed should not drop below 1000 rpm here either.
Reference 230-15-100, Checking the Fuel Transfer Pump

[1] -
LEGEND:
A Fuel transfer pump
B Hose to fuel filter
C Hose from primary fuel filter
D Fuel filter
E Primary fuel filter
F Hose from fuel tank
Fuel transfer pump up to tractor serial no. 443511
Fuel transfer pump from tractor serial no. 443512
Fuel filter and primary fuel filter
Turn the key switch one position to the right (to ON). With the key in this position, it should be possible to hear and to feel
(touch it) the fuel transfer pump (A) running.
If you cannot hear the pump running:
See Section 240, Group 10 for checking electrical circuits.

Replace the pump (its motor is defective).
[2] - Remove hose (B) from the injection pump and repeat the check.
If the pump is running but no fuel emerges:
Is the primary filter (E) clogged?

Is the screen on the fuel gauge intake pipe clogged?
Check if lines are crossed, pinched or blocked. See Reference 230-20-010 , "Fuel System Description”.
Section 230 - FUEL, AIR INTAKE AND COOLING SYSTEMS Group 20: Theory Of Operation
Check if the pump gear is OK.
If fuel is not being transferred properly:
Check if the tank is venting properly (filler cap).
Reference 230-15-110, Hand Throttle Lever and Accelerator Pedal

Adjustment
Adjusting the hand throttle lever and accelerator pedal
Hand throttle lever
[1] - Disengage bowden cable (A).
[2] - Adjust accelerator pedal to the low idle stop using bowden cable (B) set screws.
[3] - Move hand throttle lever (C) to idle position.
[4] - Engage bowden cable (A).
[5] - Adjust hand throttle lever to the low idle stop using bowden cable (A) set screws.
[6] - Fully operate hand throttle lever or accelerator pedal. Low idle and max. speed must be obtained individually. See
Reference “Engine Specifications” , Section 10, Group 05.
Group 20 - Theory Of Operation

Reference 230-20-001, Component Description - Summary of References
Reference 230-20-010, Fuel System - Description
Reference 230-20-020 , Air Intake System - Theory of Operation
Reference 230-20-030, Coolant Circuit - Description
Reference 230-20-040, Cooling System Radiator - Description
Reference 230-20-070 , Viscous Clutch of Fan - Theory of Operation
Reference 230-20-080, Automatic Drive Belt Tensioner - Theory of Operation
Reference 230-20-090 , Cold Weather Starting Aids - Theory of Operation
Reference 230-20-010, Fuel System - Description
Exploded view of fuel system
LEGEND:
A Fuel injection pump
B Fuel filter
C Fuel gauge sending unit
D Fuel tank
E Primary fuel filter
F Check valve
G Fuel transfer pump from tractor serial no. 443512

H T-fitting from tractor serial no. 443512
I Adapter from tractor serial no. 443512
K Fuel transfer pump up to tractor serial no. 443511
1 Hose to fuel tank
2 Hose from primary fuel filter
3 Hose to check valve
4 Hose to fuel transfer pump
5 Hose to fuel filter
6 Hose to injection pump
7 Hose to adapter (from tractor serial no. 4435122)
8 Hose from adapter to fuel tank (from tractor serial no. 443512)
The fuel system consists of fuel tank (D), fuel gauge sending unit (C), primary fuel filter (E), check valve (F), either fuel injection
pump (G) or (K), and fuel filter (B).
From the fuel tank, fuel is drawn through the primary fuel filter (E) and check valve (F) by the transfer pump (G) or (K) and fed
via fuel filter (B) to injection pump (A).
Excess fuel passes from the injection pump back to the tank along the return line and via adapter (I).
Fuel transfer pumps (G) and (K) are of a vane type, located in-line behind the primary fuel filter (E) and ahead of fuel filter (B).
→NOTE:
Return lines (7) and (8), T-fittings (H) and adapter (I) are omitted on tractors up to serial number 443511.
Reference 230-20-020, Air Intake System - Theory of Operation
Engine air cleaner
LEGEND:
A Air outlet
B Primary filter element
C Dust unloading valve
D Secondary (safety) element
E Air inlet
F Low pressure switch
Under the influence of suction generated by the engine, unfiltered air flows through air inlet tube (E) and is forced into a
swirling motion by the curved passage.
In this circular action around primary filter element, centrifugal force separates most of the dirt and dust particles from the air
and expels them via dust unloading valve (C).
The remaining dirt is removed as the air flows through primary filter element (B) and secondary (safety) filter (D) before being
drawn into the engine at outlet tube (A).
The secondary (safety) filter (D) prevents dirt from entering the engine when the primary filter is being serviced, and also
ensures that should primary element (B) fail no unfiltered air is drawn into the engine.
A low-pressure switch (F) located in the air outlet in conjunction with a warning light indicates the current service status (see
Operator′s Manual).
Reference 230-20-030, Coolant Circuit - Description
Coolant circuit
LEGEND:
A Expansion tank
B Radiator
C Hose
D Return hose (large circuit)
E Coolant pump
F Heater line (return)
G Engine oil cooler
H Heater line (supply)
I Return line (small circuit)
K Fan
L Thermostat
M Supply hose (large circuit)
→NOTE:
The thermostat and coolant pump are dealt with in the technical manual that covers engines.
The coolant circuit consists of a small and a large circuit, plus a cab heater circuit.
→NOTE:
The coolant circuit also includes the oil cooler plates in engine oil cooler (G), thus cooling engine oil as
well.
Small coolant circuit:
Coolant pump (E) pumps coolant through the coolant passages of the engine to thermostat (L). Coolant returns to the pump via
return line (I). In the coolant passages of the engine, the coolant receives the combustion heat of the engine, thus bringing
down the temperature of the engine. Once the coolant circuit reaches a temperature of between 80 and 84°C (175 and 182°F),
thermostat (L) opens and the coolant flows through the large coolant circuit.
Large coolant circuit:
The large coolant circuit consists basically of radiator (B), expansion tank (A), coolant pump (E), thermostat (L) and radiator fan
(K). The heated coolant is pumped via supply hose (M) to radiator (B), where it passes through the fins of the radiator. Fresh air
is drawn in by fan (K) and also passes through the fins of the radiator. Excess heat is transferred to the air, thus cooling the
coolant. Pump (E) ingests the cooled coolant through return hose (D) and pumps it back through the coolant passages of the
engine.
Heater circuit:
The heater circuit is connected to the coolant circuit. When the cab heater valve is opened, warm coolant flows via supply line
(H) to the fins of the radiator. Via the fins, this hot coolant heats the surrounding air inside the cab. Pump (E) ingests the
coolant via return line (F) and pumps it back through the coolant passages of the engine.
Reference 230-20-040, Cooling System Radiator - Description

LEGEND:
A Tubes
B Air
C Fins
Radiator tubes, air and fins
The engine radiator is of the conventional design with cooling tubes through which the coolant passes, and soldered, exterior
fins.
The coolant in cooling tubes (A) is cooled by air (B) forced through the radiator core by the fan blades. The cooling surface of
the tubes is greatly increased by means of fins (C).
Reference 230-20-070, Viscous Clutch of Fan - Theory of Operation
Viscous clutch of fan
LEGEND:
A Drive shaft
B Fan carrier
C Studs (4 used)
D Driven clutch half
E Bimetallic spring
F Driving clutch half
G Grooves
H Channels (operating chamber)
I Groove
J Return oil passage
K Oil reservoir
L Plug
M Grooves
The viscous clutch is a temperature-controlled hydraulic fan clutch with speed control. It consists of the driving clutch half (F)
with drive shaft (A) and driven clutch half (D) with reservoir (K). The fan carrier (B) is seated with bearings on drive shaft. The
channels (H) of both clutch halves form the operating chamber. The system is filled with silicone fluid.
Torque is transmitted by means of the inner friction between the fluid and the surface of the operating chamber. The operating
chamber surface is enlarged by means of grooves.
The total amount of silicone fluid exceeds the capacity of the reservoir, so that there is always some fluid in the operating
chamber. Consequently, the driven clutch half turns even when the radiator is cold, but at a slower speed than the driving
clutch half.
As the radiator gets warm, bimetallic spring (E) expands and opens reservoir cap (L). Centrifugal force causes fluid to flow from
the reservoir into the operating chamber. The high friction of the fluid in the operating chamber causes the speed of the driven
clutch half to increase until both halves are travelling at approx. the same speed.
Centrifugal force causes oil to be forced outwards through groove (I) and, due to rotational speed, to be carried via return
channel (J) to the reservoir. A cycle takes place. Fluid is constantly forced back into the reservoir and at the same time fluid is
flowing into the operating chamber.
Because of the high fan speed, the radiator temperature drops. The bimetallic spring coil contracts, closing the reservoir cap
and preventing further fluid from flowing to the operating chamber. Fluid continues to flow into the reservoir through groove
(I). The amount of fluid in the operating chamber decreases, reducing friction, and fan speed slows.
Grooves (G and M) enable fluid to flow quicker out of the operating chamber, enabling the viscous clutch of the fan to react
more quickly to changes in the radiator temperature.
Reference 230-20-080, Automatic Drive Belt Tensioner - Theory of

Operation
LEGEND:
A Tensioner roll
B Spring dampener unit
C Drive belt
Automatic drive belt tensioner
The drive belt is tensioned by means of idler roll (A), which is itself held in place by a coil spring inside spring dampener unit
(B).
Reference 230-20-090, Cold Weather Starting Aids - Theory of

Operation
General information
Since the engine depends on heat in the combustion chamber to ignite the fuel, starting the engine in cold weather may be a
problem.
The fuel, the air drawn into the engine and/or the coolant may be preheated by means of the cold weather starting aids, which
improves starting in cold weather.
Electrical starting aid operation
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM (g) by Belgreen v2.0
LEGEND:
A Heating element
B Intake manifold
Electrical starting aid
The air drawn into the engine is heated by heating element (A).
The heating element is installed below the intake manifold (B). Turning the starter switch clockwise to the first position closes
the electrical circuit.
Coolant heater operation
Electrical heating element
The electrical heating element (A) heats the engine coolant, resulting in better starting performance. Furthermore, the engine
will reach its operating temperature more quickly.
The temperature of the coolant increases to approx. 50°C (120°F) above the ambient temperature.
Specifications:
Coolant heater Voltage 230 V
Power output 650 W
Section 240 - ELECTRICAL SYSTEM

Table of contents
Group 10 - Electrical Circuit Checks ...................................................................................................... 1
Reference 240-10-001, Checking Electrical Circuits — Summary of References .................................. 1
Reference 240-10-003, SE1 - Starting Motor and Charging Circuit ....................................................... 3
Reference 240-10-004, SE2 - Basic Informator/Instrument Unit ......................................................... 21
Reference 240-10-005, SE3 - Horn ..................................................................................................... 38
Reference 240-10-006, SE4 - Cigarette Lighter and Operator′s Seat .................................................. 42
Reference 240-10-007, SE6 - Lights ................................................................................................... 46
Reference 240-10-008, SE7 - Worklights ............................................................................................ 60
Reference 240-10-009, SE8 - Front Loader Plug ................................................................................. 64
Reference 240-10-010, SE9 - Radio, Dome Light and Console Light .................................................. 66
Reference 240-10-011, SE10 - Fan and Air Conditioner ..................................................................... 70
Reference 240-10-012, SE11 - Windshield Wiper and Washer ........................................................... 74
Reference 240-10-013, SE12 - Rear Window Wiper and Washer ........................................................ 80
Reference 240-10-014, SE13 - Beacon Light ...................................................................................... 84
Reference 240-10-015, SE14 - 3- and 7-Terminal Power Outlet Sockets ............................................ 87
Reference 240-10-016, SE15 - Electronic Hitch Control ..................................................................... 91
Reference 240-10-017, SE16A - Basic Control Unit (BCU) (Rear PTO and External Control) ............... 96
Reference 240-10-018, SE16B - Basic Control Unit (BCU) (Front PTO) ............................................. 100
Reference 240-10-019, SE16C - Basic Control Unit (BCU) (Front-Wheel Drive) ................................ 103
Reference 240-10-020, SE16D - Basic Control Unit (BCU) (Differential Lock) ................................... 107
Reference 240-10-021, SE16E - Basic Control Unit (BCU) (Hazard Warning and Turn Signal Lights)
................................................................................................................................................... 110
Reference 240-10-022, SE16F - Basic Control Unit (BCU) (Speed Sending Units and Radar) ........... 114
Reference 240-10-023, SE16G - Basic Control Unit (BCU) (Headland Management System II) ........ 118
Reference 240-10-024, SE16H - Basic Control Unit (BCU) (Power Supply, Acoustic Alarm) .............. 122
Reference 240-10-026, SE16J - Basic Control Unit (BCU) (Brake System and Handbrake Monitor Unit)
................................................................................................................................................... 125
Reference 240-10-027, SE17 - Signal Socket and Service Plug ........................................................ 129
Reference 240-10-028, SE18 - Performance Monitor ........................................................................ 131
Reference 240-10-033, SE22 - BUS Terminating Resistor ................................................................ 134
Reference 240-10-035, SE26 - Transmission Control Unit (PowrQuad Plus Transmission) ............... 137
Group 15 - Component Testing .......................................................................................................... 170
Component Tests ............................................................................................................................. 170
Component tests .............................................................................................................................. 187
Component checks ........................................................................................................................... 192
Component Tests ............................................................................................................................. 196
Component Tests ............................................................................................................................. 199
Component Tests ............................................................................................................................. 202
Component Tests ............................................................................................................................. 204
Component Tests ............................................................................................................................. 211
Component Tests ............................................................................................................................. 214
Component tests .............................................................................................................................. 216
Component tests .............................................................................................................................. 219
Component tests .............................................................................................................................. 222
Component Tests ............................................................................................................................. 228
Component Tests ............................................................................................................................. 232

Component Tests ............................................................................................................................. 236
Component Tests ............................................................................................................................. 237
Component Tests ............................................................................................................................. 239
Group 25 - Functional Schematics .................................................................................................... 244
Reference 240-25-001, Circuit Diagram — Summary of References ................................................ 244
Reference 240-25-010, Fuses and Relays ........................................................................................ 245
Reference 240-25-011, Designation of Parts Shown in Functional Schematic and Harness Diagram
................................................................................................................................................... 260
Reference 240-25-012, Designation of Sections Shown in Functional Schematic ............................ 266
Reference 240-25-013, Wiring Harness Designations ...................................................................... 267
Reference 240-25-014, Functional Schematic (Complete Tractor) ................................................... 268
Group 26 - Summary of Wiring Harnesses ....................................................................................... 315
Reference 240-26-001, Wiring Harnesses for Tractors with PowrQuad Transmission — Summary of
References ................................................................................................................................ 315
Reference 240-26-003, Wiring Harnesses for Tractors with PowrQuad Transmission from Serial No.
436758 — Summary of References ........................................................................................... 315
Reference 240-26-002, Wiring Harnesses for Tractors with PowrQuad Plus Transmission — Summary of
References ................................................................................................................................ 317
Reference 240-26-004, Wiring Harnesses for Tractors with PowrQuad Plus Transmission from Serial
No. 424816 - Summary of References ....................................................................................... 318
Group 26A - Wiring Harnesses ........................................................................................................... 319
Reference 240-26-011, W01 — Wiring Harness - Power Supply and Starting Aid ............................. 319
Reference 240-26-021, W02 - Wiring Harness - Engine .................................................................... 327
Reference 240-26-041, W04 — Wiring Harness - Headlights ............................................................ 340
Reference 240-26-072, W07 — Wiring Harness - Front PTO ............................................................. 344
Reference 240-26-081, W08 — Wiring Harness - Cab (Tractors with PowrQuad Transmission) ....... 346
Reference 240-26-082, W08 — Wiring Harness - Cab (Tractors with PowrQuad Plus Transmission)
................................................................................................................................................... 405
Reference 240-26-131, W13 — Wiring Harness - Clutch Sender ...................................................... 473
Reference 240-26-141, W14 — Wiring Harness - 3-Terminal Power Outlet Socket .......................... 476
Reference 240-26-181, W18 — Wiring Harness - Windshield Wiper Switch (Without Intermittent Wipe)
................................................................................................................................................... 479
Reference 240-26-182, W18 — Wiring Harness - Windshield Wiper Switch (With Intermittent Wipe)
................................................................................................................................................... 483
Reference 240-26-191, W19 - Wiring Harness - Cab Roof and Fan ................................................... 488
Reference 240-26-201, W20 — Wiring Harness - Turn Signal and Clearance Lights ........................ 510
Reference 240-26-211, W21 — Wiring Harness - Cab Roof Worklights, Adapter .............................. 517
Reference 240-26-231, W23 — Wiring Harness - Windshield Wiper (with Hinged Windshield) ........ 523
Reference 240-26-281, W28 — Wiring Harness - Front End of Transmission (Tractors with PowrQuad
Transmission) ............................................................................................................................ 525
Reference 240-26-282, W28 — Wiring Harness - Front End of Transmission (Tractors with PowrQuad
Plus Transmission) ..................................................................................................................... 532
Reference 240-26-301, W30 - Wiring Harness - Rear End of Transmission ...................................... 543
Reference 240-26-421, W42 — Wiring Harness - Battery Cut-Off Switch (Version 1) ....................... 550
Reference 240-26-461, W46 — Wiring Harness - Front PTO, Adapter .............................................. 554
Group 26B - Wiring Harnesses from Serial Number 424816 ......................................................... 557
W01 — Wiring Harness - Power Supply and Starting Aid from Serial No. 436764 ............................ 557
W01 — D31 ...................................................................................................................................... 558
W01 — F09 ....................................................................................................................................... 558
W01 — F11 ....................................................................................................................................... 559
W01 — F13 ....................................................................................................................................... 559
W01 — F14 ....................................................................................................................................... 560

W01 — G02 ...................................................................................................................................... 560
W01 — K01 ....................................................................................................................................... 562
W01 — K36 ....................................................................................................................................... 563
W01 — M01 ...................................................................................................................................... 563
W01 — R15 ....................................................................................................................................... 564
W01 — X473 ..................................................................................................................................... 564
W01 — X547 ..................................................................................................................................... 566
W08 — Wiring Harness - Cab for Tractors with PowrQuad Transmission from Serial No. 436758 .... 567
W08 — B28/LH .................................................................................................................................. 571
W08 — F03 ....................................................................................................................................... 572
W08 — F04 ....................................................................................................................................... 574
W08 — F05 ....................................................................................................................................... 576
W08 — F06 ....................................................................................................................................... 578
W08 — K01 ....................................................................................................................................... 580
W08 — K02 ....................................................................................................................................... 582
W08 — K07 ....................................................................................................................................... 585
W08 — K08 ....................................................................................................................................... 587
W08 — R19 ....................................................................................................................................... 588
W08 — S01 ....................................................................................................................................... 589
W08 — S01/1 .................................................................................................................................... 589
W08 — S04 ....................................................................................................................................... 590
W08 — S08 ....................................................................................................................................... 591
W08 — S09 ....................................................................................................................................... 592
W08 — X10/1 .................................................................................................................................... 592
W08 — X10/2 .................................................................................................................................... 593
W08 — X10/3 .................................................................................................................................... 593
W08 — X14/1 .................................................................................................................................... 595
W08 — X14/2 .................................................................................................................................... 596
W08 — X34 ....................................................................................................................................... 597
W08 — X35 ....................................................................................................................................... 598
W08 — X37 ....................................................................................................................................... 598
W08 — X38 ....................................................................................................................................... 600
W08 — X44 ....................................................................................................................................... 600
W08 — X106 ..................................................................................................................................... 602
W08 — X107 ..................................................................................................................................... 603
W08 — X113/1 .................................................................................................................................. 604
W08 — X113/2 .................................................................................................................................. 605
W08 — X120/1 .................................................................................................................................. 605
W08 — X120/2 .................................................................................................................................. 605
W08 — X122/2 .................................................................................................................................. 606
W08 — X125 ..................................................................................................................................... 607
W08 — X127 ..................................................................................................................................... 608
W08 — X128 ..................................................................................................................................... 608
W08 — X174 ..................................................................................................................................... 609
W08 — X230 ..................................................................................................................................... 609
W08 — X235 ..................................................................................................................................... 609
W08 — X239 ..................................................................................................................................... 611
W08 — X243 ..................................................................................................................................... 612
W08 — X245 ..................................................................................................................................... 613
W08 — X285 ..................................................................................................................................... 613
W08 — X311/1 .................................................................................................................................. 613
W08 — X311/2 .................................................................................................................................. 614
W08 — X324 ..................................................................................................................................... 615

W08 — X400 ..................................................................................................................................... 616
W08 - X430 ....................................................................................................................................... 618
W08 — X450 ..................................................................................................................................... 620
W08 — X473 ..................................................................................................................................... 622
W08 — X474 ..................................................................................................................................... 622
W08 — X488 ..................................................................................................................................... 622
W08 — X500 ..................................................................................................................................... 624
W08 — X516 ..................................................................................................................................... 626
W08 — X571 ..................................................................................................................................... 627
W08 — X579/1 .................................................................................................................................. 627
W08 — X579/2 .................................................................................................................................. 628
W08 - X616/1 .................................................................................................................................... 629
W08 — X616/2 .................................................................................................................................. 631
W08 — X616/3 .................................................................................................................................. 633
W08 — X617 ..................................................................................................................................... 635
W08 — X618 ..................................................................................................................................... 636
W08 — X620 ..................................................................................................................................... 637
W08 — X623 ..................................................................................................................................... 638
W08 — X629 ..................................................................................................................................... 639
W08 — XGND1 ................................................................................................................................. 639
W08 — XGND4 ................................................................................................................................. 641
W08 — XGND5 ................................................................................................................................. 642
W08 — XGND6 ................................................................................................................................. 643
W08 — XGND43 ............................................................................................................................... 643
W08 — XGND47 ............................................................................................................................... 644
W08/1 — Wiring Harness - Cab for Tractors with PowrQuad Plus Transmission from Serial No. 434662
................................................................................................................................................... 645
W08/1 — B28/LH .............................................................................................................................. 649
W08/1 — F03 .................................................................................................................................... 650
W08/1 — F04 .................................................................................................................................... 652
W08/1 — F05 .................................................................................................................................... 654
W08/1 — F06 .................................................................................................................................... 656
W08/1 — K01 .................................................................................................................................... 658
W08/1 — K02 .................................................................................................................................... 660
W08/1 — K07 .................................................................................................................................... 663
W08/1 — K08 .................................................................................................................................... 666
W08/1 — S01 .................................................................................................................................... 668
W08/1 — S09 .................................................................................................................................... 669
W08/1 — X14/1 ................................................................................................................................. 670
W08/1 — X14/2 ................................................................................................................................. 671
W08/1 — X20 .................................................................................................................................... 672
W08/1 — X25 .................................................................................................................................... 673
W08/1 — X26 .................................................................................................................................... 674
W08/1 — X34 .................................................................................................................................... 675
W08/1 — X35 .................................................................................................................................... 676
W08/1 — X37 .................................................................................................................................... 676
W08/1 — X38 .................................................................................................................................... 678
W08/1 — X39 .................................................................................................................................... 679
W08/1 — X44 .................................................................................................................................... 679
W08/1 — X106 .................................................................................................................................. 681
W08/1 — X107 .................................................................................................................................. 682
W08/1 — X113/1 ............................................................................................................................... 682
W08/1 — X113/2 ............................................................................................................................... 683

W08/1 — X120/1 ............................................................................................................................... 683
W08/1 — X120/2 ............................................................................................................................... 684
W08/1 — X122/2 ............................................................................................................................... 684
W08/1 — X125 .................................................................................................................................. 686
W08/1 — X126 .................................................................................................................................. 687
W08/1 — X127 .................................................................................................................................. 688
W08/1 — X128 .................................................................................................................................. 688
W08/1 — X132 .................................................................................................................................. 689
W08/1 — X174 .................................................................................................................................. 690
W08/1 — X230 .................................................................................................................................. 690
W08/1 — X235 .................................................................................................................................. 691
W08/1 — X239 .................................................................................................................................. 692
W08/1 — X242 .................................................................................................................................. 692
W08/1 — X243 .................................................................................................................................. 694
W08/1 — X245 .................................................................................................................................. 695
W08/1 — X247 .................................................................................................................................. 696
W08/1 — X249/3 ............................................................................................................................... 697
W08/1 — X285 .................................................................................................................................. 697
W08/1 — X322 .................................................................................................................................. 699
W08/1 — X324 .................................................................................................................................. 700
W08/1 — X400 .................................................................................................................................. 701
W08/1 - X430 .................................................................................................................................... 703
W08/1 — X440 .................................................................................................................................. 705
W08/1 — X450 .................................................................................................................................. 706
W08/1 — X471 .................................................................................................................................. 708
W08/1 — X473 .................................................................................................................................. 709
W08/1 — X474 .................................................................................................................................. 709
W08/1 — X487 .................................................................................................................................. 710
W08/1 — X488 .................................................................................................................................. 710
W08/1 — X489 .................................................................................................................................. 712
W08/1 - X490/1 ................................................................................................................................. 715
W08/1 - X490/1 ................................................................................................................................. 716
W08/1 — X500 .................................................................................................................................. 717
W08/1 — X503 .................................................................................................................................. 718
W08/1 — X571 .................................................................................................................................. 719
W08/1 — X615 .................................................................................................................................. 720
W08/1 - X616/1 ................................................................................................................................. 721
W08/1 — X616/2 ............................................................................................................................... 723
W08/1 — X616/3 ............................................................................................................................... 725
W08/1 — X620 .................................................................................................................................. 727
W08/1 — X623 .................................................................................................................................. 728
W08/1 — XGND1 .............................................................................................................................. 728
W08/1 — XGND5 .............................................................................................................................. 728
W08/1 — XGND43 ............................................................................................................................ 729
W08/1 — XGND47 ............................................................................................................................ 729
W28 — Front Transmission Wiring Harness for Tractors with PowrQuad Transmission from Serial No.
431378 ...................................................................................................................................... 731
W28 — X80 ....................................................................................................................................... 732
W28 — X81 ....................................................................................................................................... 732
W28 — X82 ....................................................................................................................................... 733
W28 — X83 ....................................................................................................................................... 733
W28 — X86 ....................................................................................................................................... 734
W28 — X91 ....................................................................................................................................... 734

W28 — X93 ....................................................................................................................................... 735
W28 — X500 ..................................................................................................................................... 736
W28 — XGND46 ............................................................................................................................... 737
W28/1 — Front Transmission Wiring Harness for Tractors with PowrQuad Plus Transmission from Serial
No. 424816 ................................................................................................................................ 738
W28/1 — X30 .................................................................................................................................... 740
W28/1 — X80 .................................................................................................................................... 741
W28/1 — X83 .................................................................................................................................... 741
W28/1 — X86 .................................................................................................................................... 741
W28/1 — X91 .................................................................................................................................... 742
W28/1 — X307 .................................................................................................................................. 742
W28/1 — X459 .................................................................................................................................. 744
W28/1 — X493 .................................................................................................................................. 744
W28/1 — X494 .................................................................................................................................. 744
W28/1 — X495 .................................................................................................................................. 745
W28/1 — X499 .................................................................................................................................. 746
W28/1 — X500 .................................................................................................................................. 747
W28/1 — X546 .................................................................................................................................. 749
W28/1 — X701 .................................................................................................................................. 749
W28/1 — X702 .................................................................................................................................. 750
W28/1 — XGND46 ............................................................................................................................ 750
W42 — Wiring Harness - Battery Cut-Off Switch (Version 2) ............................................................ 752
W42 — F25 ....................................................................................................................................... 753
W42 — K24/2 .................................................................................................................................... 753
W42 — K56 ....................................................................................................................................... 755
W42 — K57 ....................................................................................................................................... 756
W42 — X696 ..................................................................................................................................... 757
W42 — XGND56 ............................................................................................................................... 758
Section 240 - ELECTRICAL SYSTEM Group 10: Electrical Circuit Checks
Group 10 - Electrical Circuit Checks

Reference 240-10-001, Checking Electrical Circuits — Summary of
References
Reference 210-15-001 , “General References (Summary)”
Reference 240-10-003 , SE1 Starting and Charging Circuit

Reference 240-10-004 , SE2-Basic Informator/Instrument Unit
Reference 240-10-005 , SE3-Horn
Reference 240-10-006 , SE4-Cigarette Lighter and Operator′s Seat
Reference 240-10-007 , SE6-Lights
Reference 240-10-008 , SE7-Worklights
Reference 240-10-009 , SE8-Front Loader Plug
Reference 240-10-010 , SE9-Radio, Dome Light and Console Light
Reference 240-10-011 , SE10-Fan and Air-Conditioning System
Reference 240-10-012 , SE11-Windshield Wiper and Washer
Reference 240-10-013 , SE12-Rear Window Wiper and Washer
Reference 240-10-014 , SE13-Beacon Light
Reference 240-10-015 , SE14-3- and 7-Terminal Power Outlet Sockets
Reference 240-10-016 , SE15-Electronic Hitch Control
Reference 240-10-017 , SE16A-Basic Control Unit (BCU) (Rear PTO and Remote Control)
Reference 240-10-018 , SE16B-Basic Control Unit (BCU) (Front PTO)
Reference 240-10-019 , SE16C-Basic Control Unit (BCU) (Front-Wheel Drive)
Reference 240-10-020 , SE16D-Basic Control Unit (BCU) (Differential Lock)
Reference 240-10-021 , SE16E-Basic Control Unit (BCU) (Hazard Warning Lights and Turn-Signal Lights)
Reference 240-10-022 , SE16F-Basic Control Unit (BCU) (Speed Sensor and Radar)
Reference 240-10-023 , SE16G-Basic Control Unit (BCU) (Headland Management System II)
Reference 240-10-024 , SE16H-Basic Control Unit (BCU) (Power Supply, Acoustic Alarm)
Reference 240-10-026 , SE16J-Basic Control Unit (BCU) (Brake System and Handbrake Monitor Unit)
Reference 240-10-027 , SE17-Signal Socket and Service Plug
Reference 240-10-028 , SE18-Performance Monitor
Reference 240-10-033 , SE22-BUS Terminator and Terminating Resistor
Reference 240-10-035 , SE26-Transmission Control (PowrQuad Plus Transmission)
→NOTE:
Tool Catalog (MTC).
Multimeter
JT05791A
Multimeter
Testing electrical circuits and components.
Reference 240-10-003, SE1 - Starting Motor and Charging Circuit

General information
Starting motor circuit
The starting motor circuit consists of the battery, key switch, starting motor relay, neutral start switch, starting motor with
solenoid and electrical start aid heater element or fuel preheater. The battery is located behind the front grille, the starting
motor is mounted on the flywheel housing on the left or right side of the engine and the starting motor relay is mounted on the
starting motor.
The neutral start switch is located in the forward/reverse valve housing of the front transmission cover.
The heating element of the electrical starting aid is installed in the air intake manifold. The fuel preheater heating element is
located in the fuel filter.
Charging circuit
The charging circuit consists of the battery, the key switch, the alternator and the alternator indicator light. The alternator is at
the front right of the engine. During engine operation the alternator supplies current for tractor electrical circuits and maintains
the battery charge.
Power circuit
The power supply circuit consists of the battery, two 70-amp main fuses, the alternator and a fuse box containing most of the
tractor′s fuses. The two main fuses are located at the r.h. engine side below the alternator. The fuse box is located near the l.h.
side of the operator′s seat underneath the storage rack trim panel. The fuse box contains fuses, diodes and relays.
Battery cut-off switch
The battery cut-off switch is located underneath the cab near the left-hand access step. It interrupts the power supply from the
battery to the tractor′s electrical system.
Theory of operation
Starting motor circuit
Current flows from battery (G01) to terminal BAT (30) of key switch (S01) via fuse (F13). Turning the key switch (S01) to the
START position routes current via the ST terminal to the starter relay (K01). The relay engages and routes battery power to the
starter (M01) pull-in relay terminal 50.
Charging circuit
When the ignition is on, current flows from the key switch (S01) ELX pin to relay (K01/2) pin 86. The relay switches pins 30 and
87 to power the alternator indicator light SE2 fuse (F04/05). The indicator light comes on when grounded via alternator (G02)
pin D+. When the engine is running, current flows from pin D+ of alternator (G02) to the indicator light. When both sides of the
indicator light are supplied with power, the light does not come on.
Power supply for electronics
When the ignition is on, current flows from the key switch (S01) ELX pin to relay (K01/2). The relay switches terminals 30 and
87 to power the electronics. A diode installed in alternator (G02) protects the electronics against voltage peaks.
Electrical starting aid
Depress ignition key in position "ON” for a maximum of 25 seconds. Current flows from the key switch AID pin to pin 1 on relay
(K36). The relay switches pins 3 and 4. The glow plug (R15) receives power from the battery (G01) positive post via fuse (F09).
Fuel preheater
Current flows from IGN pin of key switch (S01) to pin 86 of relay (K07/3). This relay switches pins 30 and 87 and conveys
current from the positive pole of the battery through fuse (F04/03) to the glow plug (R02) of the fuel preheater. If the
temperature of the fuel drops below 5°C (40°F), the thermostat switch built into the fuel filter is activated and current can flow.
Battery cut-off switch, version 1
When battery cut-off switch (S117) is switched on, ground current is directed to pin 85 of battery cut-off relay (K50). This relay
activates pins 30 and 30A. The tractor′s electrical system receives current from the positive terminal of battery (G01).
Current flows from IGN pin of key switch (S01) to pin 86 of relay (K48). This relay switches pins 30 and 87 and supplies ground
current to pin 85 of the battery cut-off relay (K50).
When the battery cut-off switch is switched off, the flow of ground current to battery cut-off relay (K50) is only interrupted by
switching off the key switch.
Battery cut-off switch, version 2
When battery cut-off switch (S125) is switched ON, ground current is supplied to pin 85b of battery cut-off relay (K56). This
relay activates pins 88 and 88a. The tractor′s electrical system receives current from the battery′s positive terminal.
Current flows from the IGN pin of main (key) switch (S01) via fuse (F05/08) to relay (K57). Relay (K57) interrupts the ground
connection to pin 2 of battery cut-off switch (S125), thus preventing battery cut-off relay (K56) from being turned off while the
tractor is in operation.
When the battery cut-off switch (S125) is switched OFF, the main (key) switch must be turned off first to interrupt the power
supply to relay (K57). The battery cut-off switch (S125) supplies ground current to the battery cut-off relay (K56). The battery
cut-off relay (K56) disconnects pins 88 and 88a, the tractor electrical system is disconnected from the battery and without
current.
Accessory relay (K01/1)
→NOTE:
Pin ELX on the key switch (S01) is not powered during starting.
Current flows from ELX pin of key switch (S01) to pin 86 of relay (K01/1). This relay activates pins 30 and 87 and supplies
power to the following accessories:
DEFINITIONS:
F06/04 Fuse for windshield wiper (SE11)
F06/05 Fuse for rear window wiper (SE12)
F06/07 Fuse for beacon light (SE13)
X37 2-pin plug for front loader (SE8)
Accessory relay (K01/3)
→NOTE:
Pin ACC on the key switch (S01) is not powered during starting.
Current flows from ACC pin of main (key) switch (S01) to pin 86 on relay (K01/3). The relay switches pins 30 and 87 to power
the following accessories via fuse (F05/10):
DEFINITIONS:
F06/10 Fuse for horn (SE3)
F06/11 Fuse for cigarette lighter (SE4)
F06/12 Fuse for operator′s seat (SE4)
F06/09 Fuse for radio (SE9)
SE1-Functional Schematic - Starting Motor and Charging Circuit with Battery Cut-off Switch
(Version 1)
SE1-Functional schematic
LEGEND:
B03 Sender for fuel gauge and fuel transfer pump (W08)
B36 Neutral start switch (W28)
F05/08 Fuse (W08)
F05/09 Fuse (W08)
F05/10 Fuse (W08)
F05/11 Fuse (W08)
F05/12 Fuse (W08)
F13 Fuse (W01)
F14 Fuse (W01)
G01 Battery (W01)
G02 Alternator (W01, W02)
K01 Starting motor relay (W01)
K01/1 Accessory relay (W08)
K01/2 Relay for power supply to electronics (W08)
K07/1 Diode for power supply to electronics (W08)
K24 Injection pump shut-off valve (W02)
K48 [ Relay for battery cut-off switch (W42) Option ]
K50 [ Battery cut-off relay (W01, W42) Option ]
M01 Starting motor (W02)

S01 Main (key) switch (W08)
S117 [ Battery cut-off switch (W42) Option ]
X450 42-pin plug (engine harness connecting point; W02, W08)

X575 2-pin plug for fuel transfer pump (W02)
SE1-Diagnostic Schematic - Starting Motor and Charging Circuit with Battery Cut-off Switch
(Version 1)
SE1-Diagnostic schematic
LEGEND:
B03 Sender for fuel gauge and fuel transfer pump (W08)
F05/08 Fuse (W08)
F05/09 Fuse (W08)
F13 Fuse (W01)
F14 Fuse (W01)
G01 Battery (W01)

X86 3-pin plug, sending unit for fuel gauge and fuel pump (W28)
X93 2-pin plug for neutral start switch (W28)
X103 4 terminals with rings for starting motor relay (W01)
X450 42-pin plug (engine harness connection point; W02, W08)
X473 2-pin plug (connecting point for power supply harness; W01, W08)
X500 42-pin plug (connecting point, harness at front end of transmission; W08, W28)
X547 10-pin plug (connecting point - starting aid harness; W01, W02)
X593 [ 4-pin plug for battery cut-off switch (W42) Option ]
X694/1 Terminal with ring (battery cut-off relay; W42)

X695 5-pin plug (relay for battery cut-off switch; W42)
X696 10-pin plug (switch for battery cut-off switch; W35)
4-pin plug (connecting point - access-step light and battery cut-off switch (W35) to battery cut-off switch harness
X697
(W42))
XGND2 Ground point
XGND9 Engine ground point (W02)
XGND46 Collective ground point for transmission (W28)
XGND56 Ground point for battery cut-off switch (W4)
XGND57 Ground point for battery cut-off relay (W42)
(Version 1) - Continued
SE1-Diagnostic schematic-cont.
LEGEND:
F05/10 Fuse (W08)
F05/11 Fuse (W08)
F05/12 Fuse (W08)

XGND5 Cab ground point (W08)
SE1-Functional Schematic - Starting Motor and Charging Circuit with Battery Cut-off Switch
(Version 2)
LEGEND:
F05/08 Fuse (W08)
F05/10 Fuse (W08)
F05/11 Fuse (W08)
F05/12 Fuse (W08)
F13 Fuse (W01)
F14 Fuse (W01)
F25 Fuse (W42)
G01 Battery (W01)


Y02 Fuel transfer pump (W02)
(Version 2)
LEGEND:
F05/08 Fuse (W08)
F13 Fuse (W01)
F14 Fuse (W01)
F25 Fuse (W42)
G01 Battery (W01)


X500 42-pin plug (connection point for front end of transmission; W08, W28)
X547 10-pin plug (starting aid connection point; W01, W02)
4-pin plug (connecting point - access-step light and battery cut-off switch (W35) to battery cut-off switch harness
X697
(W42))
Y02 Fuel transfer pump (W02)
XGND2 Ground point
(Version 2) - Continued
LEGEND:
F05/10 Fuse (W08)
F05/11 Fuse (W08)
F05/12 Fuse (W08)

SE1A-Functional schematic
LEGEND:
F04/03 Fuse (W08)
K07/3 Relay for fuel preheater (W08)
R02 Heater element for fuel preheater (W02)
SE1A-Diagnostic schematic
LEGEND:
F04/03 Fuse (W08)
K07/03 Relay for fuel preheater (W08)
R02 Heater element for fuel preheater (W02)
X79 3-pin plug for fuel preheater (W02)

SE1B-Functional schematic
LEGEND:
D31 Diode for electrical starting aid (W01)
F09 Fuse (W01)
F11 Fuse (W01)
H77 Indicator light for electrical starting aid (W08)
K36 Relay for electrical starting aid (W01)
R15 Heating element for electrical starting aid (W01)
SE1B-Diagnostic schematic
LEGEND:
D31 Diode for electrical starting aid (W01)
F09 Fuse (W01)
F11 Fuse (W01)
H77 Indicator light for electrical starting aid (W08)
K36 Relay for electrical starting aid (W01)

R15 Heating element for electrical starting aid (W01)
X547 10-pin plug (connection point for electrical starting aid; W02, W01)
X579 2 terminals for indicator light of electrical starting aid (W08)
Reference 240-10-004, SE2 - Basic Informator/Instrument Unit

General information
All of the tractor′s instruments and most of its indicator lights are located in the basic informator or instrument unit.
The coolant temperature indicator is activated via a sender in the engine block. The fuel gauge receives signals from a sender
in the fuel tank.
The speedometer and rev counter receive impulses from magnetic senders on the tractor via the basic control unit (BCU).
Instrument panel lighting is controlled by the light switch (parking lights).
Theory of operation
Current flows from the key switch (S01) SE1 ELX pin to pin 86 on relay (K01/2). This relay activates pins 30 and 87. Current
flows via fuses (F04/04) and (F04/05) to the basic informator (or instrument unit) and supplies the following instruments and
indicator lights with electrical power:
Coolant temperature gauge

Fuel gauge
Oil temperature warning light
Engine oil pressure indicator light
Transmission oil filter indicator light
Alternator indicator light
Air cleaner restriction warning light
Engagement oil pressure warning light
Front-wheel drive indicator light
Dipped-beam indicator light
Full-beam indicator light
PTO indicator light
Differential lock indicator light
Hourmeter
The current for instrument lighting comes from pin C of light switch (S09) SE6 via fuse (F04/12) SE6. The hour meter is powered
by alternator (G02) pin D+ SE1.
The coolant temperature gauge and fuel gauge receive signals via the sending units (B08) and (B03) on the tractor.
All the other indicator lights receive ground current via the individual senders on the tractor.
SE2 - Functional schematic (PowrQuad transmission)
SE2 - Functional schematic (PowrQuad transmission)
LEGEND:
B37 Handbrake switch (W08)
F04/04 Fuse (W08)
F04/05 Fuse (W08)
P21 Instrument unit (W08)
SE2 - Functional schematic (PowrQuad transmission), contd.
SE2 - Functional schematic (PowrQuad transmission), contd.
LEGEND:
B02 Sender, air cleaner restriction warning light (W02)
B03 Sending unit for fuel gauge (W28)
B04 Engine oil pressure sender (W02)
B07 Sender, oil filter restriction warning light (W28)
B08 Sender for coolant temperature gauge (W02)
B29 Low-temperature switch (W28)
B30 High-temperature switch (W28)
B31 Sender for transmission oil pressure (W28)
SE2 - Diagnostic schematic (PowrQuad transmission)
SE2 - Diagnostic schematic (PowrQuad transmission)
LEGEND:
X235 2-pin plug for handbrake switch (W08)
X616 26-pin plug for l.h. end of instrument panel (W08)
X617 26-pin plug for r.h. end of instrument panel (W08)
SE2-Diagnostic schematic (PowrQuad transmission), contd.
SE2-Diagnostic schematic (PowrQuad transmission), contd.
LEGEND:
B29 Low-temperature switch (W28)
B30 High-temperature switch (W28)
F04/04 Fuse (W08)
F04/05 Fuse (W08)
X70 2-pin plug for sender for air cleaner restriction warning light (W02)
X78 1-pin plug, sending unit for engine oil pressure (W02)
X80 2-pin plug for switch that warns of a restriction at the transmission oil filter (W28)
X81 1-pin plug for low-temperature switch (W28)
X82 Terminal with ring, for high-temperature switch (W28)
X83 2-pin plug (connection point, sender for engagement oil warning light; W28)
X86 2-pin plug for fuel gauge sender (W28)
X262 2-pin plug, sender for coolant temperature gauge (W02)
X500 42-pin plug (connection point for harness at front end of transmission; W08, W28)
SE2 - Functional schematic (PowrQuad Plus transmission), contd.
LEGEND:
F04/04 Fuse (W08)
F04/05 Fuse (W08)
H22 540 rpm rear PTO indicator light
H24 540E rpm rear PTO indicator light
LEGEND:
B60 Sender for transmission oil temperature (W28)
B111 Hydraulic oil filter sender (W28)
S32 Digital instrument set switch (W08)
SE2 - Diagnostic schematic (PowrQuad Plus transmission)
SE2 - Diagnostic schematic (PowrQuad Plus transmission)
LEGEND:
B111 Hydraulic oil filter sender (W28)
F04/04 Fuse (W08)
F04/05 Fuse (W08)
H24 540E rpm rear PTO indicator light
S32 Digital instrument set switch (W08)
X20B 3-pin plug (windshield washer connection point; W08, W18)
X247 26-pin plug for monitor unit (W08)
X546 4-pin plug for hydraulic oil filter sender (W28)
XGND43 Ground point for electronics (W08)
SE2-Diagnostic schematic (PowrQuad Plus transmission), contd.
SE2-Diagnostic schematic (PowrQuad Plus transmission), contd.
LEGEND:
B60 Sender for transmission oil temperature (W28)

X120/1 1-pin plug for backlighting of pressure gauge (W08)
X307 2-pin plug for transmission oil temperature sender (W28)
Reference 240-10-005, SE3 - Horn

General information
The horn is located at the front, just behind the front grille. The horn button is either integrated into the multi-function unit or
else it is located next to the main (key) switch. The horn circuit is closed by pushing in the button.
Theory of operation
Current flows from terminals 30 and 87 on activated relay (K01/3) SE1 via fuse (F06/10) to the horn button (S04). Pressing the
button causes current to flow to the horn (H01).
Possible faults in the horn circuit
Possible faults in the horn circuit
Problem Possible cause
Fuse F06/10 has blown

Faulty horn button
Horn does not produce any noise Faulty horn
Power leads broken or shorted
Poor ground connection
Faulty horn button

Horn produces a noise continuously
Power leads shorted
Faulty horn
Horn not loud enough Power leads damaged or corroded
Horn/ground connections are loose or corroded
LEGEND:
F06/10 Fuse (W08)
H01 Horn (W02)
S04 Horn button (W08)
LEGEND:
F06/10 Fuse (W08)
H01 Horn (W02)
S04 Horn button (W08)
X59 1-pin plug for horn button (W17)

X66/1 1-pin plug for horn (W02)
X411 8-pin plug (lighting harness connecting point; W02, W04)
X487 10-pin plug (connecting point for multi-function unit harness; W08, W17)
Reference 240-10-006, SE4 - Cigarette Lighter and Operator′s Seat

General information
Cigarette lighter
The cigarette lighter is to the right of the operator on the shift console. When the cigarette lighter is pressed in it remains in
that position until the heating element is hot enough to release it.
Operator′s seat
The operator′s seat may be equipped either with a mechanical spring or an air spring. The back rest, height, ride, position and
arm rests can be adjusted on the air suspension seat. By means of the armrest height adjusting knobs (located on the sides of
the armrests) vertical armrest adjustment is possible. With a handwheel on the side, backrest tilt can be adjusted; a second
handwheel behind the backrest adjusts the lumbar support. A lever in front of the seat cushion allows the seat to be pivoted 20
degrees to the left or right. A lever in front of the seat allows it to be positioned fore and aft. Seat height is adjusted with a
lift/lower lever located in the lower portion of the seat.
Theory of operation
→NOTE:
Power is removed from all electrical accessories powered via the key switch ACC pin during the starting
process.
Cigarette lighter
Current flows from ACC pin of key switch (S01) to pin 86 of relay (K01/3). This relay activates pins 30 and 87 and supplies
power to the cigarette lighter via fuse (F06/11).
Operator′s seat
Current flows from the key switch (S01) ACC pin to pin 86 on relay (K01/3); this relay switches pins 30 and 87 to power the air-
suspension compressor and seat heater via fuse (F06/12). The air spring cuts in automatically to suit the weight of the
operator.
Possible faults in the cigarette lighter circuit
Possible faults in the cigarette lighter circuit
Fault Possible cause

Corroded housing or cartridge
Cigarette lighter does not get hot Defective heating element
Power leads broken
Cigarette lighter is hot but does not retract Defective heating element
Possible faults in the seat circuit
Possible faults in the seat circuit

Power leads broken or shorted
Seat will not raise or lower Defective raise microswitch
Defective air suspension unit
Defective compressor
LEGEND:
F06/11 Fuse (W08)
F06/12 Fuse (W08)
A29 Seat with compressor and heater (W08)
E05 Cigarette lighter (W08)
LEGEND:
F06/11 Fuse (W08)
F06/12 Fuse (W08)
A29 Seat with compressor and heater (W08)
E05 Cigarette lighter (W08)
X128 2 terminals for cigarette lighter (W08)

X488 2-pin plug for operator′s seat (W08)
Reference 240-10-007, SE6 - Lights

General information
The light switch is located in the instrument housing. The light switch activates the headlights and worklights.
The full-beam light switch is either integrated into the multi-function unit or else it is located in front of the operator on the left
side of the instrument panel.
If a multi-function unit is equipped, the flash-to-pass function is activated by briefly pulling the turn signal switch toward the
driver.
The switch for the lights on the cab frame is located in the center post to the right of the operator.
Theory of operation
Current flows from the battery positive terminal (G01) pin 30 to pin B of light switch (S09) via fuse (F04/12).
Parking lights
When the parking lights are on, current flows via pins B and C of light switch (S09) and fuses (F03/03) and (F03/04) to the
following lights:
DEFINITIONS:
E03 Left clearance light
E04 Right clearance light
E13 Left tail light
E14 Right tail light
E21 License plate light
Dipped-beam headlights
When the dipped-beam lights are switched on, pins B and M are connected and current flow to pin 86 on relay (K02/1) via pin
C1 and NC of switch (S10). The relay switches pins 30 and 87 and supplies pin 56b of the light (E01, E02) with current via the
fuses (F03/13), (F03/01) and (F03/02).
Full-beam headlights
When the headlights are on at full-beam, pins C1 and NO of switch (S10) form a connection, and current flows to relay (K02/2).
This relay switches pins 30 and 87 and supplies power to pin 56a of headlights (E01) and (E02) via fuse (F03/14).
Flash-to-pass
When the flash-to-pass is actuated, current flows from the battery positive terminal (pin 30) via fuse (F04/12) and the flash-to-
pass switch (S30) to pin 86 of relay (K02/2). The relay switches pins 30 and 87 and supplies pin 56a of the light (E01, E02) with
current via the fuse (F03/14).
Lights on cab frame
When switch (S11) is actuated, current flows to pin 86 of relay (K02/6). This relay activates pins 30 and 87 and supplies power
to headlights (E07), (E08) and (E20) on the cab frame via fuse (F03/10).
Possible faults in the lighting circuit
Possible faults in the lighting circuit
Failed light
Corroded bulb socket or receptacle
One headlight does not work
Broken circuit wiring
Fuse has blown

Circuit wiring broken or shorted
Several headlights do not work Defective relay
Battery in poor condition
LEGEND:
E01 Right headlight (W04)
E02 Left headlight (W04)
E03 Left clearance light (W19)
E04 Right clearance light (W19)
E13 Left tail light (W08)
E14 Right tail light (W08)
E21/1 License plate light (on left) (W08)
E21/2 License plate light (on right) (W08)
F03/01 Fuse (W08)
F03/02 Fuse (W08)
F03/03 Fuse (W08)
F03/04 Fuse (W08)
F04/12 Fuse (W08)
K02/1 Relay for dipped-beam (W08)
K02/2 Relay for full-beam (W08)
K07/1 Diode for dipped- and full-beam headlights (W08)
S09 Light switch (W08)
S10 Switch for dipped- and full-beam headlights (W08, W17)
S30 Flash-to-pass switch (W17)
SE6A-Diagnostic Schematic
SE6A-Diagnostic Schematic
LEGEND:
E01 Right headlight (W04)
E02 Left headlight (W04)
E03 Left clearance light (W19)
E04 Right clearance light (W19)
E13 Left tail light (W08)
E14 Right tail light (W08)
E21/1 License plate light (on left) (W08)
E21/2 License plate light (on right) (W08)
F03/01 Fuse (W08)
F03/02 Fuse (W08)
F03/03 Fuse (W08)
F03/04 Fuse (W08)
F04/12 Fuse (W08)
K02/1 Relay for dipped-beam (W08)
K02/2 Relay for full-beam (W08)
K07/1 Diode for dipped- and full-beam headlights (W08)
S10 Switch for dipped- and full-beam headlights (W08, W17)
S10/1 1-pin plug, switch for dipped- and full-beam headlights (W08, W17)
S30 Flash-to-pass switch (W17)
X61 1-pin plug for flash-to-pass switch (W17)
X67 3-pin plug for right headlight (W04)
X68 3-pin plug for left headlight (W04)
X106 4-pin plug for right tail, brake and turn signal lights (W08)
X107 4-pin plug for left tail, brake and turn signal lights (W08)
X108 3-pin plug for right turn signal and clearance lights (W20)
X109 3-pin plug for left turn signal and clearance lights (W20)
X113/1 2-pin plug for license plate light (on left) (W08)
X113/2 2-pin plug for license plate light (on right) (W08)
X400 42-pin plug (cab roof connecting point; W08, W19)
X442 6-pin plug (harness connecting point for turn-signal and clearance lights, right; W19, W20)
X443 6-pin plug (harness connecting point for turn-signal and clearance lights, left; W19, W20)
XGND10/1 Collective ground point for XGND10 (W19)
LEGEND:
F03/13 Fuse (W08)
F03/14 Fuse (W08)
LEGEND:
F03/13 Fuse (W08)
F03/14 Fuse (W08)
SE6C-Functional schematic
LEGEND:
E20/R Right cab frame worklight (W20)
E20/L Left cab frame worklight (W20)
F03/10 Fuse (W08)
F03/13 Fuse (W08)
F03/14 Fuse (W08)
K02/6 Relay for worklights or headlights (W08)
SE6C-Diagnostic schematic
LEGEND:
E20/R Right cab frame worklight (W20)
E20/L Left cab frame worklight (W20)
F03/10 Fuse (W08)
F03/13 Fuse (W08)
F03/14 Fuse (W08)

X101 2-pin plug for headlight switch (W19)
X155 2-pin plug for right cab frame worklight (W20)
X156 2-pin plug for left cab frame worklight (W20)
X442 6-pin plug (connection point for turn signal and clearance lights, right; W19, W20)
X443 6-pin plug (connecting point for turn signal and clearance lights, left; W19, W20)
SE6D-Functional schematic
LEGEND:
E07 Left cab frame light (W20)
E08 Right cab frame light (W20)
F03/11 Fuse (W08)
F03/12 Fuse (W08)
F03/15 Fuse (W08)
F03/16 Fuse (W08)
K02/7 Relay for lights on cab frame (W08)
SE6D-Diagnostic schematic
LEGEND:
E07 Left cab frame light (W20)
E08 Right cab frame light (W20)
F03/11 Fuse (W08)
F03/12 Fuse (W08)
F03/15 Fuse (W08)
F03/16 Fuse (W08)
K02/7 Relay for lights on cab frame (W08)
X110 2-pin plug for left cab frame light (W20)
X115 2-pin plug for right cab frame light (W20)
X442 6-pin plug (connecting point for turn signal and clearance lights, right; W19, W20)
Reference 240-10-008, SE7 - Worklights

General Information
The worklight switches are located in the center post to the right of the operator. The worklights are turned on and off at the
light switch. Depending on the switch setting the following worklight combinations are lit:
Information on the worklights
Worklight switches Worklight combinations
S59 Front corner worklights
S92/1 Worklights on front of cab roof
S92/2 Worklights on rear of cab roof
Theory Of Operation
Front corner worklights
Current flows from the light switch (S09) SE6 H pin to pin 86 on relay (K08/7). The relay switches pins 30 and 87 to power the
worklights (E09) via the worklight switch (S59).
Worklights on front of cab roof
Current flows from the light switch (S09) SE6 H pin to pin 86 on relay (K08/5). The relay switches pins 30 and 87 to power the
worklights (E18) via the worklight switch (S92/1).
Worklights on rear of cab roof
Current flows from the light switch (S09) SE6 H pin to pin 86 on relay (K206). The relay switches pins 30 and 87 to power the
worklights (E11) via the worklight switch (S92/2).
LEGEND:
E09/L Worklight at left front corner (W04)
E09/R Worklight at right front corner (W04)
E11/1L Inner left worklight at rear of cab roof (W22)
E11/1R Inner right worklight at rear of cab roof (W22)
E11/2L Outer left worklight at rear of cab roof (W22)
E11/2R Outer right worklight at rear of cab roof (W22)
E18/1L Inner left worklight at front of cab roof (W21)
E18/1R Inner right worklight at front of cab roof (W21)
E18/2L Outer left worklight at front of cab roof (W21)
E18/2R Outer right worklight at front of cab roof (W21)
F03/05 Fuse (W08)
F03/06 Fuse (W08)
F03/07 Fuse (W08)
F03/08 Fuse (W08)
F03/09 Fuse (W08)
K02/3 Relay for worklights on front of cab roof (W08)
K02/4 Relay for worklights on rear of cab roof (W08)
K02/5 Relay for front corner worklights (W08)
S59 Switch for front corner worklights (W19)
S92/1 Switch for worklights on front of cab roof (W19)
S92/2 Switch for worklights on rear of cab roof (W19)
LEGEND:
E09/L Worklight at left front corner (W04)
E09/R Worklight at right front corner (W04)
E11/1L Inner left worklight at rear of cab roof (W22)
E11/1R Inner right worklight at rear of cab roof (W22)
E11/2L Outer left worklight at rear of cab roof (W22)
E11/2R Outer right worklight at rear of cab roof (W22)
E18/1L Inner left worklight at front of cab roof (W21)
E18/1R Inner right worklight at front of cab roof (W21)
E18/2L Outer left worklight at front of cab roof (W21)
E18/2R Outer right worklight at front of cab roof (W21)
F03/05 Fuse (W08)
F03/06 Fuse (W08)
F03/07 Fuse (W08)
F03/08 Fuse (W08)
F03/09 Fuse (W08)
K02/3 Relay for worklights on front of cab roof (W08)
K02/4 Relay for worklights on rear of cab roof (W08)
K02/5 Relay for front corner worklights (W08)
S59 Switch for front corner worklights (W19)
S92/1 Switch for worklights on front of cab roof (W19)
S92/2 Switch for worklights on rear of cab roof (W19)
X69/1 2-pin plug for worklight at right front corner (W04)
X69/2 2-pin plug for worklight at left front corner (W04)
X114/1F1 2-pin plug for outer right worklight on rear of cab roof (W22)
X114/1F2 2-pin plug for inner right worklight on rear of cab roof (W22)
X114/2F1 2-pin plug for outer left worklight on rear of cab roof (W22)
X114/2F2 2-pin plug for inner left worklight on rear of cab roof (W22)
X402 2-pin plug, switch for front corner worklights (W19)
X433/1 3-pin plug (connection point, r.h. worklight on rear of cab roof; W19, W22)
X433/2 3-pin plug (connection point, l.h. worklight on rear of cab roof; W19, W22)
X434/1 3-pin plug (connection point, r.h. worklight on front of cab roof; W19, W21)
X434/2 3-pin plug (connection point, l.h. worklight on front of cab roof; W19, W21)
X452/1F1 2-pin plug for outer right worklight on front of cab roof (W21)
X452/1F2 2-pin plug for inner right worklight on front of cab roof (W21)
X452/2F1 2-pin plug for outer left worklight on front of cab roof (W21)
X452/2F2 2-pin plug for inner left worklight on front of cab roof (W21)
X472/1 4-pin plug, switch for worklights on rear of cab roof (W19)
X472/2 4-pin plug, switch for worklights on front of cab roof (W19)
Reference 240-10-009, SE8 - Front Loader Plug

General information
If the tractor has a front loader, this plug supplies electrical power to the front loader. The plug is located below the shift
console trim panel.
Theory of operation
Current flows from activated relay (K01/1) SE1 pins 30 and 87 via fuse (F06/06) to the front loader plug (X37).
LEGEND:
F06/06 Fuse (W08)
X37 2-pin plug for front loader (W08)
LEGEND:
F06/06 Fuse (W08)
Reference 240-10-010, SE9 - Radio, Dome Light and Console Light

General information
Radio
The radio is installed in the cab roof. Refer to the relevant operator′s instructions for information on how the radio functions.
Dome and console lights
The dome light can be turned on in two ways.
With the switch in position 1, the dome light is on regardless of door position (open or closed).
With the switch in position 2, the dome light comes on automatically when the left door is opened.
The console light is controlled by the headlight switch.
Theory of operation
Radio
Current flows from the key switch (S01) ELX pin to pin 86 on relay (K01/3). The relay switches pins 30 and 87 to power the
radio via fuse (F06/09). Current flows from pin C SE6 of light switch (S09) via fuse (F06/08) to the shift console light (E30), to
pressure gauge background light (E32) and to the radio light.
Dome light
Current flows from the battery positive terminal (G01) pin 30 SE1 to dome light (E29) via fuse (F06/15). When the l.h. cab door
is opened, the door switch (B28) is grounded and turns on the dome light. Activating switch (S35) turns on the dome light even
when the door is closed.
Possible faults in the radio circuit
Possible faults in the radio circuit

Radio not working (ignition and radio switched on) Circuit wiring broken
Radio working, radio lighting not working Fuse F06/08 or F04/12 (SE6) has blown
Possible faults with the dome light
Possible faults with the dome light

Bulb has failed
Light does not come on, regardless of switch position Defective switch
Circuit wiring broken
Faulty door switch or attachment

Light comes on only using light switch Broken wiring in door switch circuit
Poor door switch ground connection
Switch operation reversed Switch improperly connected
LEGEND:
A05 Left speaker (W19)
A06 Right speaker (W19)
A60 Radio (W19)
B28/LH Switch at left door (for dome light) (W19)
E29 Dome light (W19)
E30 Console light (W19)
E32 Background lighting for pressure gauge (W08)
F06/08 Fuse (W08)
F06/09 Fuse (W08)
F06/15 Fuse (W08)
S35 Dome light switch (W19)
W25 Antenna
LEGEND:
A05 Left speaker (W19)
A06 Right speaker (W19)
A60 Radio (W19)
B28/LH Switch at left door (for dome light) (W19)
E29 Dome light (W19)

E30 Console light (W19)
E32 Background lighting for pressure gauge (W08)
F06/08 Fuse (W08)
F06/09 Fuse (W08)
F06/15 Fuse (W08)
S35 Dome light switch (W19)
W25 Antenna
X283/1 1-pin plug (connection point for r.h. speaker; SE9)
X284/1 1-pin plug (left speaker wiring harness connection point; SE9)
X584 3-pin plug for dome light (W19)
X585 2-pin plug for console light (W19)
X612 8-pin plug for speakers (W19)
X613 8-pin plug for radio (W19)
Reference 240-10-011, SE10 - Fan and Air Conditioner

General information
The fan switch is located to the right of the operator in the roof panel. With ignition on, the fan can be adjusted to four speeds
by means of the fan switch. With fan switched on, the air conditioning can be adjusted to a specific temperature by means of
the rotary switch.
Theory of operation
→NOTE:
Power is removed from all electrical accessories powered via the key switch ELX pin (S01) SE1 during the
starting process.
Fan
Current flows from pin ELX SE1 of key switch (S01) to pin 86 of relay (K01/1). This relay activates pins 30 and 87.Current flows
from the battery positive terminal (G01) pin 30 SE1 to pin 86 of relay (K08/1) via fuses (F05/11) and (F06/06). This relay
activates pins 30 and 87.It provides power to fan motors (M07) and (M10) via fuses (F06/01) and (F06/02) and fan switch (S14).
Fan switch set to first stage:
Fan switch (S14) connects pins B and 1 and directs power to pin 1 on resistor (R3).Current flows via pin 3 of resistor (R03) to
the fan motors (M07) and (M10).
Fan switch set to second stage:
Fan switch set to third stage:
Fan switch set to fourth stage:
Fan switch (S14) connects pins B and 4 and directs power to pin 86 on relay (K08/2).This relay activates pins 30 and 87.Current
flows via fuse (F06/01) to the fan motors (M07) and (M10).
Air-conditioning system
When the fan is on, current flows via fuse (F06/02) and pins B and 1 of fan switch (S14) to compressor switch (S28). When
compressor switch (S28) is on, current flows to the thermostat switch (B14) and via pressure switch (B15) and fuse (F06/03) to
the compressor′s magnetic clutch (M02).
LEGEND:
B14 Thermostat switch (W19)
B15 Pressure switch (W19)
F06/01 Fuse (W08)
F06/02 Fuse (W08)
F06/03 Fuse (W08)
K08/1 Air-conditioner relay (W08)
K08/2 Fan relay (W08)
M02 Compressor clutch (W02)
M07 Fan motor (W19)
M10 Fan motor (W19)
R18 Fan resistors (W19)
S14 Fan switch (W19)
S28 Air-conditioner switch (W19)
LEGEND:
B14 Thermostat switch (W19)
B15 Pressure switch (W19)
F06/01 Fuse (W08)
F06/02 Fuse (W08)
F06/03 Fuse (W08)
K08/1 Air-conditioner relay (W08)
K08/2 Fan relay (W08)
M02 Compressor clutch (W02)
M07 Fan motor (W19)
M10 Fan motor (W19)
R18 Fan resistors (W19)
S14 Fan switch (W19)
S28 Air-conditioner switch (W19)
X28 2-pin plug for air-conditioner pressure switch (W19)
X45/1 1-pin plug for air-conditioner switch (W19)
X46 2-pin plug for fan motor (W19)
X48 6-pin plug for fan resistors (W19)
X72/1 1-pin plug for thermostat switch (W19)
X100 6-pin plug for fan switch (W19)
X130 1-pin plug for air-conditioner compressor clutch (W02)
X450 42-pin plug (engine connecting point; W02, W08)
Reference 240-10-012, SE11 - Windshield Wiper and Washer

General information
The windshield wiper is controlled by a switch on the right side in the multi-function unit. The first position operates the wiper
in intermittent mode (if equipped), the second position is the slow speed and the third position is the fast speed. The
windshield washer is activated by pushing the washer switch against the steering column. The reservoir and pump are located
at the rear of the cab, under the rear window.
Possible faults in the windshield wiper circuit
Possible faults in the windshield wiper circuit

Faulty intermittent wipe relay K26
Broken or shorted circuit wiring
Wiper does not work in any switch position
Faulty wiper switch
Faulty main (key) switch
Failed wiper motor
Fuse F05/08 has blown or missing

Broken circuit wiring
Wiper does not work in intermittent mode
Faulty intermittent wipe relay K26
Faulty windshield wiper switch
Fluid level is low or reservoir is empty

Washer not working
Faulty wiper switch
Faulty pump
Theory of operation
→NOTE:
starting process.
Wiper with intermittent wipe relay
Current flows from the key switch (S01) ELX pin SE1 to pin 86 on relay (K01/1). The relay switches pins 30 and 87. Current
flows via fuse (F06/04) to switch (S15) and to pin 53a of the wiper (M03). Depending on switch position, current flows via the
intermittent wipe relay to pins 53, 53b or 31b of the wiper.
Wiper without intermittent wipe relay
flows via fuse (F06/04) to switch (S15) and to pin 53 of the wiper (M03).Depending on the position of the switch, current flows
to pin 53b or 31b of the wiper.
Windshield washer
Current flows from windshield washer switch (S15) pin C to the windshield washer switch (S16) and the pump (M05).
SE11A - Functional schematic (PowrQuad Plus transmission)
LEGEND:
F06/04 Fuse (W08)
K26 Intermittent wipe relay (W18)
M03 Windshield wiper motor (W08)
M05 Windshield washer pump (W08)
S15 Windshield wiper switch (W08)
S16 Windshield washer switch (W08)
SE11A-Diagnostic schematic (PowrQuad Plus transmission)
LEGEND:
F06/04 Fuse (W08)
K26 Intermittent wipe relay (W18)
S16 Windshield washer switch (W08)
X38 4-pin plug for windshield wiper motor (W08)
X39 4-pin plug (windshield wiper connection point; W08, W18)
X63 1-pin plug for windshield washer (W18)
X285 2-pin plug for windshield washer pump (W08)
SE11B-Functional schematic (PowrQuad transmission)
LEGEND:
F06/04 Fuse (W08)
SE11B-Diagnostic schematic (PowrQuad transmission)
LEGEND:
F06/04 Fuse (W08)

MPQT With PowrQuad transmission only
EPQT With PowrQuad Plus transmission only
Reference 240-10-013, SE12 - Rear Window Wiper and Washer

General information
The rear window wiper is controlled by a rocker switch on the right side of the shift console. It has three switch positions,
namely OFF, ON and WASH. The washer is activated by pushing the washer switch. The water reservoir and pump are located
at the rear of the cab, under the rear window.
Theory of operation
→NOTE:
starting process.
Rear window wiper
flows via fuse (F06/05) to rear window washer switch (S120) and to pin 53a of the wiper (M04). When the switch is ON, current
flows to pin 53 of the wiper.
Rear window washer
Current flows from pin C of washer switch (S120) to pump (M06).
Possible faults in the rear window wiper circuit
Possible faults in the rear window wiper circuit
Faults Possible cause

Wiper does not work in any switch position
Faulty wiper switch
Fluid level is low or reservoir is empty

Washer not working
Faulty wiper switch
Faulty pump
LEGEND:
F06/05 Fuse (W08)
M04 Rear window wiper motor (W19)
M06 Rear window washer pump (W08)
S120 Rear window washer switch (W08)
LEGEND:
F06/05 Fuse (W08)
M04 Rear window wiper motor (W19)
M06 Rear window washer pump (W08)
S120 Rear window washer switch (W08)
X43 4-pin plug for rear window wiper motor (W19)

X44 2-pin plug for rear window washer pump (W08)
X620 5-pin plug for the switch of the rear window washer (W08)
Reference 240-10-014, SE13 - Beacon Light

General information
The beacon light is an additional hazard warning device for extremely slow or wide vehicles. The switch for the beacon light is
located in the center post to the right of the operator.
Theory of operation
Current flows from pins 30 and 87 on activated relay (K01/1) SE1 via fuse (F06/07) to the switch (S36). When the switch is on,
current flows to the indicator light in the switch and the beacon (E27); the beacon light indicator light then light up.
LEGEND:
E27 Beacon light (W19)
F06/07 Fuse (W08)
S36 Beacon light switch (W19)
LEGEND:
E27 Beacon light (W19)
F06/07 Fuse (W08)
S36 Beacon light switch (W19)
X99 3-pin plug for beacon light switch (W19)
X142/1 1-pin plug (beacon light connection point; W19)

Reference 240-10-015, SE14 - 3- and 7-Terminal Power Outlet Sockets

General information
The 3-terminal power outlet socket is to the right of the operator on the shift console. It can be used to power accessories
inside and outside the cab. The socket is connected to battery power via a relay and protected by fuse F05/15. The socket strip
is attached to the front of the shift console. It contains an additional six power outlets. The 7-terminal power outlet socket is
located at the rear of the tractor above the SCV units. It provides power for trailer lighting.
Theory of operation
Power outlet socket (3-terminal)
Current flows from pins 30 and 87 on activated relay (K01/3) SE1 via fuse (F06/11) SE4 to pin 86 on relay (K08/3).Current flows
from the battery positive terminal (G01) pin 30 SE1 to pin 30 of relay (K08/3) via fuse (F04/01). This relay switches pins 30 and
87 and provides current to pin 1 of the 3-terminal power outlet socket (X06) and to pin C of the power outlet strip (X304). At
the same time, pin 2 of 3-terminal socket (X06) and pin A of socket strip (X304) receive current via fuse (F04/02).
7-terminal power outlet socket
The 7-terminal socket is powered from Sections SE6a, SE16e and SE16j.
LEGEND:
F04/01 Fuse (W08)
F04/02 Fuse (W08)
K08/3 3-terminal socket relay (W08)

X05 7-terminal power outlet socket (W30)
X304 Power strip
LEGEND:
F04/01 Fuse (W08)
F04/02 Fuse (W08)
K08/3 3-terminal socket relay (W08)
X239 3-pin plug (connecting point for 3-terminal power outlet socket; W08, W14)
X304 Power strip
X430 42-pin plug (connecting point, harness for rear end of transmission; W08, W30)
Reference 240-10-016, SE15 - Electronic Hitch Control

Theory Of Operation
See Reference 270-10-020 , “Hitch Control - Operational Test”.
LEGEND:
A64 Basic control unit (BCU) (W08)
B19 Right draft sensor (W30)
B20 Left draft sensor (W30) (if equipped)
B21 Position sensor for hitch control (W30)
B26 Height sensitivity potentiometer (W08)
B27 Position feedback unit for hitch control (W08)
M08 Stepper motor for hitch control (W30)
S23 Right external control switch (W08)
S24 Quick withdrawal switch (W08)
S68 Left external control switch (W08)
LEGEND:
B19 Right draft sensor (W30)
B20 Left draft sensor (W30) (if equipped)
B21 Position sensor for hitch control (W30)
B26 Height sensitivity potentiometer (W08)
B27 Position feedback unit for hitch control (W08)
M08 Stepper motor for hitch control (W30)
S23 Right external control switch (W08)
S24 Quick withdrawal switch (W08)
S68 Left external control switch (W08)
X14/1 8-pin plug for position feedback unit of hitch control (W08)
X14/2 3-pin plug for height sensitivity potentiometer (W08)
X34 6-pin plug for right external control (W08)
X35 6-pin plug for left external control (W08)
X89 3-pin plug for left draft sensor (W30) (if equipped)
X90 3-pin plug for right draft sensor (W30)
X92 4-pin plug for hitch control stepper motor (W30)
X96 3-pin plug for hitch control position sensor (W30)
X616/1 32-pin plug for BCU (W08)
Reference 240-10-017, SE16A - Basic Control Unit (BCU) (Rear PTO and
External Control)
General information
Rear PTO
The rear PTO switch is located in the shift console. If the engine is stopped with the PTO engaged, the integral safety switch will
keep the PTO from re-engaging when the engine is restarted. The PTO must be disengaged and engaged again.
Remote control
The external control switches for the PTO are located on the rear fenders, on the left and right sides of the tractor. The PTO
preselector switch is to the right of the operator on the shift console. The switch is used to preselect PTO actuation via the PTO
switch or via the external switches.
Theory of operation
Rear PTO
From pin 87 of relay SE1 (K01/2), current flows via fuse (F04/09) to switch (S21).
Switch (S21) is activated. The electronic control unit (A64) powers the indicator light (H56) and solenoid valve (Y04).
Depending on which PTO is engaged, the indicator lights receive power from basic informator (P11) and light up.
→NOTE:
The PTO will not run if the engine is started with the PTO engaged. Switch (S21) must first be turned off
and then on.
Remote control
From pin 87 of relay SE1 (K01/2), current flows via fuse (F04/09) to switches (S44), (S45) and (S121).
Pin 2H3 of the Basic Control Unit (A64) receives current via PTO preselector switch (S45), and external switches (S44) and
(S121) are activated.
The Basic Control Unit (A64) receives current via external switch (S44) and (S121) and activates the rear PTO as required.
LEGEND:
F04/09 Fuse (W08)
H55 Indicator light, rear PTO preselector (W08)
H56 Indicator light for rear PTO (W08)
S21 Rear PTO switch (W08)
S40 Seat switch (W08)
S44 Left external control switch (for PTO) (W08)
S45 PTO preselector switch (W08)
S121 Right external control switch (for PTO) (W08)
Y04 Rear PTO solenoid valve (W30)
LEGEND:
F04/09 Fuse (W08)
H55 Indicator light, rear PTO preselector (W08)
H56 Indicator light for rear PTO (W08)
S21 Rear PTO switch (W08)
S40 Seat switch (W08)
S44 Left external control switch (for PTO) (W08)
S45 PTO preselector switch (W08)
S121 Right external control switch (for PTO) (W08)
X95 2-pin plug for rear PTO solenoid valve (W30)
X125 3-pin plug for rear PTO switch (W08)
X174 3-pin plug for l.h. switch for external control of PTO (W08)
X230 2-pin plug for seat switch (W08)
X243 3-pin plug for PTO preselector switch (W08)
X430 42-pin plug (transmission connecting point; W08, W30)
X623 3-pin plug for r.h. switch for external control of PTO (W08)
Y04 Rear PTO solenoid valve (W30)
Reference 240-10-018, SE16B - Basic Control Unit (BCU) (Front PTO)

General information
The front PTO switch is located in the shift console. If the engine is stopped with the PTO engaged, the integral safety switch
will keep the PTO from re-engaging when the engine is restarted. The PTO must be disengaged and engaged again.
Theory of operation
From pin 87 of relay SE1 (K01/2), current flows via fuse (F04/09) to switch (S06).
With ignition on, engine running and front PTO switched on:
Switch (S06) is activated. The electronic control unit (A64) powers the indicator light (H19) and solenoid valve (Y01).
→NOTE:
The PTO will not run if the engine is started with the PTO engaged. Switch (S06) must first be turned off
and then on.
LEGEND:
F04/09 Fuse (W08)
H19 Front PTO indicator light (W08)
S06 Front PTO switch (W08)
Y64 Front PTO solenoid valve (W07)
LEGEND:
F04/09 Fuse (W08)
H19 Front PTO indicator light (W08)
S06 Front PTO switch (W08)

X02 4-pin plug (connection point for front PTO harness; W02, W07)
X166 2-pin plug for front PTO solenoid (W07)
X311 2-pin plug for front PTO indicator light (W08)
X450 42-pin plug (engine connecting point; W02, W08)
X518 3-pin plug for front PTO switch (W08)
Y64 Front PTO solenoid valve (W07)
Reference 240-10-019, SE16C - Basic Control Unit (BCU) (Front-Wheel

Drive)
General information
The front-wheel drive switch is located in the shift console on the right-hand side of the operator.
When front-wheel drive is switched off, the switch interrupts current supply to solenoid valve and sends current to the indicator
light.
Theory of operation
Front-wheel drive not selected:
Current flows from pin 87 of relay (K01/2) SE1 via fuse (F04/09), switches (S05) and (S63) and the electronic control unit (A64)
to solenoid valve (Y03), thus switching off front-wheel drive.
Front-wheel drive selected:
Current flows from pin 87 of relay (K01/2) SE1 via fuse (F04/09), switches (S05) and (S63) and the electronic control unit (A64)
to indicator light (H09). No current is supplied to solenoid valve (Y03).
Front-wheel drive not selected, brakes actuated:
When the two brake light switches (B112) SE16 are activated simultaneously, the current flow to solenoid valve (Y03) is
interrupted and thus front-wheel drive is switched on.
LEGEND:
H09 Front-wheel drive indicator light (W08)
S05 [ Front-wheel drive switch (W08) Tractors with HMS ]
S63 [ Front-wheel drive switch (W08) Tractors without HMS ]
Y03 Front-wheel drive solenoid valve (W28)

LEGEND:
F04/09 Fuse (W08)
H09 Front-wheel drive indicator light (W08)
S05 [ Front-wheel drive switch (W08) Tractors with HMS ]
S63 [ Front-wheel drive switch (W08) Tractors without HMS ]
X91 2-pin plug for front-wheel drive solenoid valve (W28)

X245 3-pin plug for front-wheel drive switch (W08)
Y03 Front-wheel drive solenoid valve (W28)
Reference 240-10-020, SE16D - Basic Control Unit (BCU) (Differential

Lock)
General information
The differential lock switch is located in the shift console on the right-hand side of the operator. When the differential lock is
engaged, the solenoid and indicator light receive power from the electronic control unit. If one or both brake switches are
actuated, the differential lock automatically disengages.
Theory of operation
Differential lock engaged:
From pin 87 of relay SE1 (K01/2), current flows via fuse (F04/09) to switch (S22). Pressing the switch causes current to flow to
the electronic control unit (A64) to power solenoid valve (Y05) and indicator light (H17). The differential lock is engaged.
Differential lock engaged, brake applied:
If one of the two brake light switches (B112) SE16 is actuated, the electronic control (A64) unit interrupts the flow of current to
solenoid (Y05) and the differential lock is disengaged.
LEGEND:
H17 Differential lock indicator light (W08)
S22 Differential lock switch (W08)
Y05 Differential lock solenoid valve (W30)
LEGEND:
F04/09 Fuse (W08)
H17 Differential lock indicator light (W08)
S22 Differential lock switch (W08)

X87 2-pin plug for differential lock solenoid valve (W30)
X122 2-pin plug for differential lock switch (W08)
X430 42-pin plug (connection point for rear end of transmission; W08, W30)
Y05 Differential lock solenoid valve (W30)
Reference 240-10-021, SE16E - Basic Control Unit (BCU) (Hazard

Warning and Turn Signal Lights)
General information
Hazard warning lights
The hazard warning light switch is located in the instrument housing. It activates the right and left turn signals simultaneously,
regardless of what position the main (key) switch is in. The turn signal lights receive their flash-signals from the electronic
control unit.
Turn signal unit
Either there are two turn signal switches integrated into the multi-function unit or there is one turn signal switch on the l.h. side
of the steering column. Place the turn signal lever in the L or R position to activate the turn signals.
Theory of operation
Hazard warning lights
Hazard warning lights off:
Current flows from the SE1 battery positive terminal (G01) via fuses (F03/04) and (F03/07) to pin B or C of hazard warning light
switch (S62) or (S106), and thus to pin 2L1 on electronic control unit (A64).
Hazard warning lights on:
Current flows from the SE1 battery positive terminal (G01) via fuse (F04/16) to pin B or C of hazard warning light switch (S62)
or (S106), and thus to pin 2L1 on electronic control unit (A64). The control unit provides electrical power (flash pulses) to the
following lights:
Caution light (SE2)

STOP light (SE2)
Trailer turn signal indicator
Turn signal indicator
Hazard warning light indicator
Turn signal indicators
H34-turn signal light, front left
H35-turn signal light, rear left
H42-turn signal light, front right
H43-turn signal light, rear right
Turn signal unit
Current flows from pin 87 on relay (K01/2) SE1 via fuse (F04/09) to pin NO4 or 2 on turn-signal switches (S08/1) and (S08/2) or
(S08). Placing the turn signal lever in the L or R position causes the turn signal indicator lights and turn signal lights (H34, H35,
H42 and H43) to be supplied with current (flash pulses) from the electronic control unit; the lights then flash.
SE16E-Functional schematic
SE16E-Functional schematic
LEGEND:
F04/10 Fuse (W08)
F04/11 Fuse (W08)
H34 Left front turn signal (W20)
H35 Left rear turn signal (W08)
H42 Right front turn signal (W20)
H43 Right rear turn signal (W08)
S08 Turn signal switch (W08)
S08/1 Left-turn switch (W17)
S08/2 Right-turn switch (W17)
S62 Hazard warning light switch (W08)
SE16E-Diagnostic schematic
SE16E-Diagnostic schematic
LEGEND:
F04/09 Fuse (W08)
F04/10 Fuse (W08)
F04/11 Fuse (W08)
H34 Left front turn signal (W20)
H35 Left rear turn signal (W08)
H42 Right front turn signal (W20)
H43 Right rear turn signal (W08)
S08 Turn signal switch (W08)
S08/1 Left-turn switch (W17)
S08/2 Right-turn switch (W17)
X126 3-pin plug for hazard warning light switch (W08)
X442 6-pin plug (harness connecting point for turn-signal and clearance lights, right; W19, W20)
X443 6-pin plug (harness connecting point for turn-signal and clearance lights, left; W19, W20)
Reference 240-10-022, SE16F - Basic Control Unit (BCU) (Speed Sending

Units and Radar)
General information
Speed sending units
PTO speed senders (B06) and (B58), rev counter sender (B01) and ground speed sender (B35) all provide pulses to the basic
informator or instrument unit via electronic control unit (A64).
Radar
The radar sensor is on the right of the main frame. Ground speed is calculated by the electronic control unit (A64) based on a
value entered during calibration representing the radar frequency (cycles per second) per km/h (mph).
SE16F-Functional schematic
SE16F-Functional schematic
LEGEND:
B01 Sender for rev counter (W02)
B06 Rear PTO speed sender (W30)
B35 Wheel speed sending unit (W30)
B39 Radar sensor (W28)

B58 Front PTO speed sender (W07)
SE16F-Diagnostic schematic
SE16F-Diagnostic schematic
LEGEND:
B01 Sender for rev counter (W02)
B06 Rear PTO speed sender (W30)
B35 Wheel speed sending unit (W30)
B39 Radar sensor (W28)
B58 Front PTO speed sender (W07)
F04/09 Fuse (W08)
X30 4-pin plug for radar sensor (W28)
X76 2-pin plug for sending unit for rev counter (W02)
X88 2-pin plug for wheel speed sender (W30)
X94 2-pin plug for rear PTO speed sender (W30)
X167 2-pin plug for front PTO speed sending unit (W07)
X430 42-pin plug (connection point for rear end of transmission; W08, W30)
Reference 240-10-023, SE16G - Basic Control Unit (BCU) (Headland

Management System II)
General information
The Headland Management System (HMS II) switch (S43), record/save switch (S95) and program switch (S100) are all located
to the right of the operator on the shift console. Indicator lights (H82), (H83) and (H84) are located on the center post to the
right of the operator.
HMS II makes it possible to record and save sequences of functions that occur repeatedly and to call them up as programs as
and when they are required. Two such programs can be stored at any one time. Each of them can include up to 20 functions.
The programs remain in the memory until they are cancelled, even if the electrical current is switched off.
Recordings may be made of the functions of the following tractor sub-assemblies: differential lock, rockshaft, rear PTO, front
PTO, front-wheel drive and selective control valves.
The distance the tractor moves between functions is also stored. The recording is therefore not dependent on the tractor′s
speed.
SE16G-Functional schematic
SE16G-Functional schematic
LEGEND:
B142 Sending unit for cold-weather starting control (W02)
H82 HMS indicator light (W08)
H83 Indicator light for program 1 (W08)
K07/5 Alternator relay (W08)
K07/6 Relay for cold-weather starting control (W08)

R19 Terminating resistor (W08)
S43 HMS switch (W08)
S95 Record/save switch (W08)
S100 Program switch (W08)
Y52 Solenoid valve for cold-weather starting control (W02)
SE16G-Diagnostic schematic
SE16G-Diagnostic schematic
LEGEND:
B142 Sending unit for cold-weather starting control (W02)
F04/09 Fuse (W08)
H82 HMS indicator light (W08)
K07/5 Alternator relay (W08)
K07/6 Relay for cold-weather starting control (W08)
R19 Terminating resistor (W08)
S43 HMS switch (W08)
S95 Record/save switch (W08)
S100 Program switch (W08)
X242 3-pin plug for HMS switch (W08)
X440 3-pin plug for record/save switch (W08)
X471 4-pin plug for program switch (W08)
X649 2-pin plug for sending unit of cold weather starting control (W02)
X650 2-pin plug for solenoid valve of cold weather starting control (W02)
Y52 Solenoid valve for cold-weather starting control (W02)
Reference 240-10-024, SE16H - Basic Control Unit (BCU) (Power Supply,

Acoustic Alarm)
General information
Power supply
The BCU (A64) receives current via two fuses (F04/08) and (F04/16), with permanent battery current going to the one and
current from pin 87 on relay (K01/2) going to the other.
Acoustic alarm
Acoustic alarm (K01/4) is triggered by electronic control unit (A64) to indicate certain faults or draw attention to safety
information.
Fuse tester
There is a fuse tester in the load center (fuse box); it is located at position F06/13. If an intact fuse is inserted at this position,
acoustic alarm (K01/4) will emit a continuous signal. If a defective (blown) fuse is inserted, it will not emit any signal.
SE16H-Functional schematic
SE16H-Functional schematic
LEGEND:

F04/08 Fuse (W08)
F04/16 Fuse (W08)
F06/13 Fuse tester (W08)
K01/4 Acoustic alarm (W08)
SE16H-Diagnostic schematic
SE16H-Diagnostic schematic
LEGEND:
F04/08 Fuse (W08)
F04/16 Fuse (W08)
F06/13 Fuse tester (W08)
K01/4 Acoustic alarm (W08)
Reference 240-10-026, SE16J - Basic Control Unit (BCU) (Brake System

and Handbrake Monitor Unit)
General information
Brake system
The two brake light switches are connected to the master cylinder. With brakes applied, they supply current to the brake lights
and automatically switch the front wheel drive on and the differential lock off via the basic control unit.
Handbrake monitor unit
The handbrake lever is located on the left-hand side near the operator′s seat. The handbrake indicator light comes on when the
ignition is switched on and the handbrake is applied. Additionally, the acoustic alarm will sound if a gear or range is selected.
Theory of operation
Brake system
From pin 87 of relay SE1 (K01/2), current flows via fuse (F04/09) SE16A to the two brake switches (B112). When the brakes are
applied, power flows to light the brake lights (H32) and (H33). At the same time the power supply to the electronic control unit
is interrupted. The control unit interrupts the flow of power to solenoid (Y03) SE16C to engage the front-wheel drive system. In
addition, solenoid valve (Y05) SE16D is de-energized and the differential lock is disengaged.
→NOTE:
If the two brake switches are actuated simultaneously, front-wheel drive cuts in automatically.
→NOTE:
If one or both brake switches are actuated, the differential lock automatically disengages.
Handbrake monitor unit
With ignition on, handbrake applied and engine running:
From pin 87 of relay SE1 (K01/2), current flows via fuse (F03/03) SE16A to the sender (B37) for the handbrake indicator light.
The basic informator or instrument unit receives a signal from the electronic control unit to light the indicator light.
Ignition on, shift lever or reverse drive lever engaged, handbrake applied and engine on:
From pin 87 of relay SE1 (K01/2), current flows via fuse (F03/03) SE16A to the sender (B37) for the handbrake indicator light.
The basic informator or instrument unit receives a signal from the electronic control unit to light the indicator light.
Additionally, the electronic control unit grounds the acoustic alarm (K01/4) and the caution light.
SE16J-Functional schematic
SE16J-Functional schematic
LEGEND:
B112 Brake switch (W08)
F05/01 Fuse (W08)
H32 Left brake light (W08)
H33 Right brake light (W08)
SE16J-Diagnostic schematic
SE16J-Diagnostic schematic
LEGEND:
B112 Brake switch (W08)
F04/09 Fuse (W08)
F05/01 Fuse (W08)

H32 Left brake light (W08)
H33 Right brake light (W08)
X324 8-pin plug for brake switch (W08)
Reference 240-10-027, SE17 - Signal Socket and Service Plug

General information
Current flows from the battery′s positive terminal via fuse (F05/10) SE1 and pins 30 and 87 of relay (K01/3), then via fuse
(F06/11) to pin F of signal socket (X132).Implements are supplied with special control pulses by the electronic control unit via
the signal socket.
LEGEND:
X132 7-terminal signal socket (W08)
X571 9-pin service plug (W08)
LEGEND:
X132 7-terminal signal socket (W08)
X571 9-pin service plug (W08)
Reference 240-10-028, SE18 - Performance Monitor

General information
The performance monitor is located at the top of the right cab post and is connected directly to the tractor′s electronics
circuits. The performance monitor provides the following information:
Actual distance travelled

Actual ground speed
Area worked
Wheel slip in % with audible and visible alarms
Miscellaneous speeds
Theory of operation
From pin 87 of relay SE1 (K01/2), current flows via fuse (F04/06) to pin G on the performance monitor.
Instrument lighting
Current flows from pin C SE6 of light switch (S09) via SE9 fuse (F06/08) to performance monitor pin C. The intensity of the
display′s light can be adjusted.
SE18-Functional schematic (PowrQuad Plus transmission)
LEGEND:
F04/06 Fuse (W08)
F04/13 Fuse (W08)
P15 Performance monitor PRF (W19)
X474 2-pin plug for GreenStar (W19)
SE18-Diagnostic schematic (PowrQuad Plus transmission)
LEGEND:
F04/06 Fuse (W08)
F04/13 Fuse (W08)

P15 Performance monitor PRF (W19)
X486 10-pin plug (performance monitor connection point; W19)
Reference 240-10-033, SE22 - BUS Terminating Resistor

General information
A BUS terminating resistor (A61) is located to the right of the operator in the roof panel. The second BUS terminating resistor
(A62) is located behind the instrument panel to the right-hand side of the steering column.
SE22-Functional schematic (PowrQuad Plus transmission)
LEGEND:
A61 Bus terminating resistor (W19)
A62 Bus terminating resistor with power supply (W08)
F05/02 Fuse (W08)
K07/2 Diode for hazard warning lights (W08)
SE22-Diagnostic schematic (PowrQuad Plus transmission)
LEGEND:
A61 Bus terminating resistor (W19)
A62 Bus terminating resistor with power supply (W08)
F05/02 Fuse (W08)
K07/2 Diode for hazard warning lights (W08)

X614 6-pin plug for bus terminating resistor (W19)
Reference 240-10-035, SE26 - Transmission Control Unit (PowrQuad

Plus Transmission)
Theory Of Operation
Reference 255-20-001 , “PowrQuad and PowrQuad Plus Transmissions - Summary of References”.
SE26-Functional schematic up to serial no. 409632, with reverse drive lever without "N" indicator light
LEGEND:
A67 Control unit (EPC) (W08)
B65 Clutch pedal potentiometer (W13)
F05/04 Fuse (W08)
F05/05 Fuse (W08)
K07/4 Transmission enable relay (W08)
K08/4 Plug for "come home" mode (W08)
S72 Clutch switch (W13)
S81 Gear selection switch (W08)
Y32 K3 solenoid valve (W28)
Y38 Proportional valve for enable signal (W28)
SE26-Functional schematic-Contd. up to serial no. 409632, with reverse drive lever without "N" indicator light
SE26-Functional Schematic-Cont.
LEGEND:
A47 Reverse drive lever without "N" indicator light (W08)
B104 Sending unit for transmission speed (W28)
B105 Sending unit for enable pressure (W28)
F05/06 Fuse (W08)
S114 Park switch (W08)
Y33 Forward solenoid valve (W28)
Y36 Reverse solenoid valve (W28)
SE26-Diagnostic schematic up to serial no. 409632, with reverse drive lever without "N" indicator light
LEGEND:
A47 Reverse drive lever without "N" indicator light (W08)
F04/09 Fuse (W08)
F05/04 Fuse (W08)
F05/06 Fuse (W08)
X249/3 3-pin plug for gear selector switch (W08)
X322 6-pin plug (connection point for clutch sender harness; W08, W13)
X489 68-pin plug for Electronic PowrQuad Controller (EPC) (W08)
X490/1 8-pin plug for reverse drive lever (W08)
X499 2-pin plug for transmission speed sender (W28)
X503 3-pin plug for park switch (W08)
SE26-Diagnostic schematic-Contd. up to serial no. 409632, with reverse drive lever without "N" indicator light
LEGEND:
F05/05 Fuse (W08)
X328 6-pin plug for clutch pedal potentiometer (W13)
X459 3-pin plug for enable pressure sender (W28)
X492 2-pin plug for K3 solenoid valve (W28)
X493 2-pin plug for forward solenoid valve (W28)
X494 2-pin plug for reverse solenoid valve (W28)
X495 2-pin plug for enable signal proportional valve (W28)
SE26-Functional schematic up to serial no. 409632, with reverse drive lever with "N" indicator light
LEGEND:
F05/04 Fuse (W08)
F05/05 Fuse (W08)
SE26-Functional schematic-Contd. up to serial no. 409632, with reverse drive lever with "N" indicator light
LEGEND:
A68/1 Reverse drive lever with "N" indicator light (W08)
F05/06 Fuse (W08)
SE26-Diagnostic schematic up to serial no. 409632, with reverse drive lever with "N" indicator light
LEGEND:
F04/09 Fuse (W08)
F05/04 Fuse (W08)
F05/06 Fuse (W08)
SE26-Diagnostic schematic-Contd. up to serial no. 409632, with reverse drive lever with "N" indicator light
LEGEND:
F05/05 Fuse (W08)
SE26-Functional schematic from serial no. 409633
LEGEND:
F05/04 Fuse (W08)
F05/05 Fuse (W08)
SE26-Functional schematic-continued, from serial no. 409633
LEGEND:
F05/06 Fuse (W08)
SE26-Diagnostic schematic from serial no. 409633
LEGEND:
F04/09 Fuse (W08)
F05/04 Fuse (W08)
F05/06 Fuse (W08)
SE26-Diagnostic schematic-continued, from serial no. 409633
LEGEND:
F05/05 Fuse (W08)
SE26-Functional schematic from serial no. XXXXXX
LEGEND:
F05/04 Fuse (W08)
F05/05 Fuse (W08)
SE26-Functional schematic-continued, from serial no. XXXXXX
LEGEND:
SE26-Diagnostic schematic from serial no. XXXXXX
LEGEND:
F04/09 Fuse (W08)
F05/04 Fuse (W08)
F05/05 Fuse (W08)
SE26-Diagnostic schematic-continued, from serial no. XXXXXX
Section 240 - ELECTRICAL SYSTEM Group 15: Component Testing
LEGEND:
F05/05 Fuse (W08)
Group 15 - Component Testing

Reference 240-15-001, SE01 - Starting Motor and Charging Circuit
→NOTE:
Voltage tests/checks should always be made with respect to the tractor frame ground, that is, the meter
common lead (black) should be connected to the tractor frame. Make sure the meter lead makes good
contact with the tractor frame and paint, dirt or oil, etc. does not interfere with the connection.
When making voltage checks at a component, there should be source voltage on the source side of the component. With the
component activated, there should be zero volts on the ground side. If there is voltage on the ground side, with the component
activated, the ground circuit is either open or has excessive resistance.
Starter Checks (M01)

( 1 ) Voltage Check at Starting Motor
Action:
→NOTE:
Battery level of charge must be 12.4 volts (1.225 specific gravity)
Put transmission in neutral or park.
Voltages at pin 30 of starting motor and at battery positive terminal must be equal.
If the main (key) switch is turned to the START position, there should be battery voltage present at pin 50 on the starting
motor. If the starting motor turns, this voltage drops to 8.5 - 10.7 volts.
Result:
YES: GO TO 2
NO:Check harness and eliminate faults. GO TO 2
( 2 ) Operational Check of Starting Motor
Action:
→NOTE:
Battery level of charge must be 12.4 volts (1.225 specific gravity)
Put transmission in neutral or park.
Turn main switch to start position.
Engine should start within 4 to 10 seconds.
Result:
YES:Engine starts. Starting circuit OK.
NO:Cranking speed is slow. GO TO 4
NO:Starting motor does not operate. GO TO 3
NO:Starting motor operates but engine does not crank: Check starting motor pinion and replace if necessary.
( 3 ) Continuity Check of Solenoid Switch and Field Winding
Action:
→NOTE:
Disconnect pin 50 and harness before carrying out the continuity test.
Use a JT05791A multimeter to measure resistance between pin 50 of starting motor and starting motor housing:
Solenoid switch and field winding of starting motor (M01)

Solenoid switch and field winding: Resistance approx. 0.3 ohms
CAUTION:
Current draw of solenoid switch coil cannot be measured with the multimeter, as current peaks occur for
a short period of time. The multimeter would be destroyed by these current peaks.
The lead connected to pin 50 of the starting motor is not protected by a fuse and must never be
connected to ground during starting procedure, as this would burn the lead out.
Result:
YES:Starting motor solenoid switch and field winding OK. GO TO 5
NO:Solenoid switch or field winding interrupted: Remove starting motor and repair.
( 4 ) Causes for Low Starting Motor Cranking Speed
Action:
Battery level of charge is below 12.4 volts (1.225 specific gravity).

Engine oil has incorrect viscosity for temperatures below 0°C (32°F).
Greater than a 0.4 volt drop in battery positive cable while cranking engine.
Greater than a 0.7 volt drop in battery negative cable while cranking engine.
Greater than a 0.2 volt drop across starter solenoid switch terminals while cranking engine.
Poor starting motor housing ground.
Poor battery terminal connection.
Starting motor defective.
Result:
NO:Repair system and then GO TO 2
( 5 ) Causes for Starting Motor not Operating At All
Action:
Starting motor solenoid defective.

Poor starting motor solenoid ground.
Poor starting motor ground.
Starting motor defective.

Poor battery terminal connection.
Low voltage at starting motor battery terminal while cranking.
Low voltage at pin 50 of starting motor.
Result:
NO:Repair system and then GO TO 2
Alternator Checks (G02)

( 1 ) Check Alternator Output Voltage
Action:
Alternator output pin B+
With engine speed above 1500 rpm, the alternator indicator light should be OFF.
Connect red lead of digital multimeter to alternator output pin B+ (A) and black ground lead. Alternator output voltage with the
listed surface temperature should be:
On 90-, 115- and 150-amp alternators:
14.7-15.2 volts at -20°C (-4°F)

14.4-14.7 volts at 25°C (77°F)
14.0-14.5 volts at 50°C (122°F)
Result:
YES:Warning devices OFF and voltage OK, GO TO 3
NO:Warning devices ON or OFF and volts above spec, GO TO 2
NO:Warning devices ON or OFF and volts below spec, GO TO 3
( 2 ) Alternator Overcharging
Action:
Operator reports frequent addition of water to battery or battery boil dry.
a. Replace voltage regulator.
b. Recheck alternator output voltage with new regulator, see Step 5 .
Result:
YES: GO TO 1
( 3 ) Battery-Alternator Circuit Check
Action:
Alternator output pins B+ and D+
Engine must be OFF. Using a digital multimeter, check voltage at battery, alternator output pin B+ (A), and pin D+ (B).
→NOTE:
For checking lead D+ the main switch must be in position RUN.
Voltage at alternator pins should be 0.2 volts maximum below battery voltage.
→NOTE:
If battery voltage is below 12.3 volts, charge battery.
Result:
YES: GO TO 4
NO:Repair battery circuit, then GO TO 4
( 4 ) Exciter Circuit Check:
Action:
B+ and D+ terminal leads
Reconnect lead D+ to alternator.
With main switch ON connect digital multimeter to D+ (B), black lead to ground.
Voltage should be zero with main switch OFF. However, if the main switch is in RUN position, voltage must be 1 to 2 volts. With
engine running, voltage must be at least 13.5 volts.
Result:
YES: GO TO 5
NO:Repair circuit of main switch, then GO TO 5
( 5 ) Alternator Output Voltage Check:
Action:
Alternator output pin B+
Connect digital multimeter to alternator output pin B+ (A).
Run engine above 1500 rpm.
Output voltage should increase 1-2 volts above battery voltage.
→NOTE:
Voltage increase will be greater if battery voltage is below 12.3 volts.
Result:
YES: GO TO 9
NO: GO TO 6
( 6 ) Check for Electrical Leakage
Action:
Electrical leakage
IMPORTANT:
All consumers must be switched off, all switches must be in the OFF position, the cab door must be
closed and the engine must be shut off.
Disconnect the battery ground cable (-). All other ground leads must remain connected. Connect the digital multimeter to the
tractor′s frame and to the negative terminal (-) of the battery.
First select the maximum measuring range (10 amps). Select a lower measuring range if current draw is within a lower
measuring range.
Electrical leakage should be less than 100 mA.
Result:
YES: GO TO 8
NO: GO TO 7
( 7 ) Check for Electrical Leakage from System
Action:
Disconnect the battery ground cable (-). All other ground leads must remain connected. Connect the digital multimeter to the
tractor′s frame and to the negative terminal (-) of the battery.
Disconnect the components one at a time until leakage is less than 100 mA.
Reconnect each lead after check, and put the fuses and relays back in place.
Sequence for checking components
Sequence for checking components:
Alternator pin D+
Alternator pin B+
Starter solenoid
Starter relay
One at a time, pull each fuse out of the fuse boxes.
One at a time, pull each relay out of the relay boxes.
Check the circuit in which the leakage has been interrupted. Disconnect the leads to the components in this circuit. If the leak
still exists, the problem is a grounded or shorted circuit. If the leak does not exist, the problem is at one of the components.
Result:
YES: GO TO 9
NO: GO TO 8
( 8 ) Causes for Low Alternator Output:
Action:
Loose alternator belt or pulley. Inspect parts for wear and correct torque.
Loose hardware or connections.
Worn brushes or faulty rotor field circuit (see Step 11).
Rectifier diodes shorted or open (see step 12).
Stator winding shorted (see step 13).
Voltage regulator defective.
Result:
NO:Repair alternator, then GO TO 3
( 9 ) Alternator Check Results
Action:
If alternator checks out to be normal at this step and a problem has been corrected, the alternator is NORMAL.
If alternator checks out to be normal at this step without isolating a problem, but operator reports alternator warning activated,
problem may be intermittent or warning levels incorrect. Recheck alternator output capacity.
Result:
YES:End of test.
Battery Checks (G01)

( 1 ) Battery (G01) Inspection
Action:
Battery
CAUTION:
Review safety precautions before testing or charging the battery.
Check battery for:
cracked case
corroded terminals
loose terminals or battery posts
dirty battery
damp battery
Result:
NO:Correct all abnormal conditions, then GO TO 2
( 2 ) Check Electrolyte Level of All Cells
Action:
Adding distilled water to battery
→NOTE:
Open all cell plugs.
If level is below top of plates, add battery water to approximately 6 mm (1/4 in.) above plates.
→NOTE:
Add battery water to correct level just before releasing battery. Do NOT over-fill batteries.
Result:
YES:Electrolyte level above plates: GO TO 3
NO:Electrolyte level below plates: GO TO 5
( 3 ) Check Specific Gravity of Each Cell
Action:
Checking specific gravity
→NOTE:
If any cell is at or above 1.175 points, see result column. If all cells are below 1.175, GO TO 5
Result:
YES:ALL cells 1.225 or above and less than 50 points variation between cells, GO TO 8
NO:ANY cell below 1.225 and less than 50 points variation between cells, GO TO 4
NO:More than 50 points variation between cells: Replace battery and then GO TO 1
( 4 ) Check Battery Voltage
Action:
Surface charge must be removed before checking voltage of the battery.
To remove surface charge, ground battery negative terminal and turn light switch to position "4” (headlights and worklights)
for one minute. Then turn light switch OFF, wait one minute and check battery voltage.
Result:
YES:If battery = 12.4 volts or more, GO TO 8
NO:If battery = less than 12.4 volts, GO TO 5
( 5 ) Charge Battery
Action:
→NOTE:
When replacing battery or after cleaning battery terminals, use AR94760 electrical sealant, or equivalent,
around base of terminals.
[1] -
IMPORTANT:
Charger clamps must have a solid connection.
Connect a charger of 30 to 300 amp rating.
[2] - Start charger at a slow or low charging rate. Increase charging rate one selection at a time. Observe ammeter after 1
minute of each selection for a 10-amp charging rate. If necessary, select boost.
IMPORTANT:
The maximum charging time at the boost selection is 10 minutes for a conventional battery (20 minutes
for maintenance-free battery). Allow 5 minutes additional charging time for each 12°C (10°F) below 21°C
(70°F). If the charging rate is obtained before the specified time, see RESULTS.
Result:
YES:If battery did not require water at step(2) and is accepting charge of 10 amps, GO TO 7
YES:If battery required water at step(2) or all cells were below 1.175 but battery is accepting a charge of 10 amps, GO TO 8
NO:If battery is not accepting the required charging rate of 10 amps in the specified time, REPLACE the battery, then GO TO 1
( 6 ) Select Charging Rate
Action:
Checking specific gravity
Charge at 15 to 30 amps.
→NOTE:
Decrease charging rate if battery gases or bubbles excessively or the temperature of battery case is
uncomfortable to hold.
Check specific gravity after 30 minutes.
Result:
YES:Variation less than 50 points: GO TO 7
NO:Variation is 50 points or more: REPLACE battery, then GO TO 1
( 7 ) Charge Battery — Continued
Action:
Charge battery as specified to obtain a specific gravity reading of 1.230 to 1.265 points.
→NOTE:
Decrease charging rate if battery gases or bubbles excessively or the temperature of the battery case is
uncomfortable to hold.
[1] - If battery was discharged at a slow rate or the charging rate is unknown, adjust charging rate to 10-15 amps. Charging of
conventional batteries may require 6 to 12 hours (maintenance-free batteries may require 12 to 24 hours).
[2] - If battery was discharged at a fast rate, adjust charging rate to 20-30 amps. Charging of conventional batteries may
require 2 to 4 hours (maintenance-free batteries may require 4 to 8 hours).
Result:
YES:After charging, GO TO 8
( 8 ) Check Battery Condition
Action:
Check battery condition using FKM10409 load tester.
IMPORTANT:
Tester clamps must have a solid connection.
Adjust load (amp draw) to 1/2 the CCA rating of the battery (see following chart).
Observe voltage for 15-20 seconds and release load.
TEMPERATURE CORRECTION CHART
Temperature Correction Chart for Battery Load Test Voltage (Step(8) )
Temperature correction chart
°F °C 12-volt battery Battery CCA rating Volts
70 and above 21 and above 9.6 V 925 (AT116401) 12
40 4 9.3 V 700 (TY6095) 12
30 -1 9.1 V 950 (TY6128) 12
20 -7 8.9 V
10 -12 8.7 V
0 -18 8.5 V
Result:
YES:9.6 volts or above, battery is serviceable.
NO:Below 9.6 volts and battery was previously charged or all cells were 1.225 or above: Replace battery, then GO TO 1
NO:Below 9.6 volts and battery has not been charged, GO TO 6
Component Tests
Make the following resistance and/or current draw tests:
( 1 ) Neutral start switch (B36)
Action:
→NOTE:
Unplug the neutral start switch from the wiring harness.
Use a JT05791A multimeter to measure continuity between pins A and B of the switch.
Engaging a gear with the gear shift lever opens the switch. The switch must close when the gear shift lever is moved to neutral
or park position.
Neutral start switch (B36)

Gear engaged: Continuity A and B open
Neutral or park position: Continuity A and B closed
Result:
YES:Switch is in good condition.
NO:Replace the switch.
( 2 ) Diode for Electrical Starting Aid (D31)
Action:
→NOTE:
The diode must be disconnected from harness before the diode testing procedure is carried out.
Using the JT05791A multimeter, perform test on the diode at pins A and K. Connect red multimeter lead to pin A and the black
lead to pin K.
Diode for electrical starting aid (D31)

3-amp diode (pins A and K): Diode test 500 - 530 mV
→NOTE:
Perform diode test following instructions given in multimeter operator′s manual. Pin K is marked with a
white circle on the diode housing.
Result:
YES:3-amp diode is in good condition.
NO:Replace the diode.
( 3 ) Relay for Starting Motor and Electrical Starting Aid (K01, K36)
Action:
Disconnect starting motor relay or electrical starting aid relay from the wiring harness.
Use a JT05791A multimeter to measure resistance at the relay between pins 1 and 2:
Relay for Starting Motor and Electrical Starting Aid (K01, K36)
Relay coil: Resistance approx. 15.5 ohms
Relay coil de-energized: Continuity 3 and 4 open
Relay coil energized: Continuity 3 and 4 closed
There should never be any continuity between pins 1 and 3 or 2 and 4.
Result:
YES:The relay is in good condition.
NO:Replace the relay.
( 4 ) "ELX" Electronics Power Supply and "ACC" (Accessory) Relays (K01/1, K01/2, K01/3)
Action:
Remove whichever relay you want to check from the relevant relay box.
Use a JT05791A multimeter to measure resistance at the relay between pins 85 (2) and 86 (1):
Relays for power supply to electronics and accessories (K01/1, K01/2, K01/3)
Relay coil: Resistance approx. 75 - 90 ohms
Relay coil de-energized: Continuity 30 (3) and 87 (5) open
Continuity 30 (3) and 87A (4) closed
Relay coil energized: Continuity 30 (3) and 87 (5) closed
Continuity 30 (3) and 87A (4) open
There should never be any continuity between pins 87 (5) and 87A (4).
Result:
( 5 ) Diode for Power Supply to Electronics (K07/1)
Action:
Remove diode block for power supply to electronics from the relevant relay box.
Use a JT05791A multimeter to test the diode at pins 85 (2) and 86 (1), in the diode block. Connect red multimeter lead to pin
85 (2) and the black lead to pin 86 (1).
Diode for Power Supply to Electronics (K07/1)

1-amp diode (pins 86 (1) and 85 (2)): Diode test 540 - 570 mV
→NOTE:
Perform diode test following instructions given in multimeter operator′s manual. The pin assignment of
the diode block is displayed on its housing.
Result:
YES:Diode block is in good condition.
NO:Replace the diode block.
( 6 ) Fuel Preheater Relay (K07/3)
Action:
Remove the fuel preheater relay from the relevant relay box.
Fuel Preheater Relay (K07/3)

Result:
( 7 ) Injection Pump Shut-Off Valve (K24)
Action:
→NOTE:
Unplug the injection pump shut-off valve from the wiring harness.
Use a JT05791A multimeter to measure resistance between pin A on the valve and the valve housing:
Injection pump shut-off valve (K24)

Resistance value: Resistance approx. 30 ohms
Current draw: Current approx. 0.4 amps
Result:
YES:Shut-off valve is in good condition.
NO:Replace the shut-off valve.
( 8 ) Relay for Battery Cut-Off Switch (K48)
Action:
→NOTE:
Disconnect the relevant relay from the wiring harness.
Relay for Battery Cut-Off Switch (K48)

Result:
( 9 ) Fuel Preheater Element (R02)
Action:
→NOTE:
The heater element must be electrically removed from the circuit when performing resistance test.
Use a JT05791A multimeter to measure resistance between pins A and B:
Fuel Preheater Element (R02)

Heating coil: Resistance approx. 1 ohms
Result:
YES:Heating element is in good condition.
NO:Replace the heating element.
( 10 ) Heating Element for Electrical Starting Aid (R15)
Action:
CAUTION:
Do not apply battery voltage directly to the heating element, as the high power flow could result in
burning of the contacts.
Therefore only operate the heating element when installed and via the appropriate relay.
Measure current draw using JT02153 Current Clamp-On Probe.
→NOTE:
The heating element must be electrically removed from the circuit when resistance is measured.
Use a JT05791A multimeter to measure resistance between pin A on the heating element and the heating element housing.
Heating Element for Electrical Starting Aid (R15)

Heating coil: Resistance approx. 0.2 ohms
Current draw: Current approx. 60 amps
Power consumption: Power 1200 W
→NOTE:
By performing a visual check a defective heating element (removed) can be recognized in most cases by
burnt, melted or interrupted heater coils.
Result:
YES:Heating element is in good condition.
NO:Replace the heating element.
( 11 ) Main (Key) Switch (S01)
Action:
The following truth table defines main switch operation.
→NOTE:
The main switch must be electrically removed from the starting circuit when performing continuity tests.
Truth table for main (key) switch
Switch Terminal
Switch
ACC BAT1 BAT2 IGN ST AID GND ELX
Position
ACC X X X
OFF X X
X
RUN X X X X X
[ Push main switch in to activate ]
START X X X X X X
[ Push main switch in to activate ]
Result:
( 12 ) Battery Cut-Off Switch, Version 1 (S117)
Action:
→NOTE:
Disconnect the battery cut-off switch from the wiring harness.
The switch consists of two normally-opened contacts. When the switch is actuated, they must close.
Battery Cut-Off Switch, Version 1 (S117)

Switch not actuated: Continuity A and B open
Continuity C and D open
Switch actuated: Continuity A and B closed
Continuity C and D closed
Pins A and C and B and D should never indicate continuity.
Result:
( 13 ) Battery Cut-Off Switch, Version 2 (S125)
Action:
→NOTE:
Disconnect the battery cut-off switch from the wiring harness.
Use a JT05791A multimeter to measure for continuity between pins 3 and 4 and between pins 3 and 5:
The switch consists of a changeover contact. It must change over when actuated.
Battery Cut-Off Switch, Version 2 (S125)

Switch not actuated: Continuity 3 and 4 open
3 and 5 open
Switch at ON: Continuity 3 and 4 closed
3 and 5 open
Switch at OFF Continuity 3 and 4 open
3 and 5 closed
Pins 4 and 5 should never indicate continuity.
Result:
Reference 240-15-002, SE02 - Basic Informator or Instrument Unit

Component tests
( 1 ) Air Cleaner Restriction Warning Switch (B02)
Action:
→NOTE:
Unplug the air cleaner restriction indicator sender from the wiring harness.
Use a JT05791A multimeter to measure continuity between pins A and B of the sending unit.
When pressure-free, the sending unit is open. If the air inlet is blocked while the engine is running, the sending unit is forced to
close.
Air Cleaner Restriction Warning Switch (B02)

Switch open: Pressure below 5.9kPa (59mbar) (0.86psi)
Switch closed: Pressure 5.9-6.9kPa (59-69mbar) (0.86-1.0psi)
Result:
YES:Sending unit is in good condition.
NO:Replace the sending unit.
( 2 ) Fuel Gauge Sending Unit (B03)
Action:
→NOTE:
Unplug the fuel pump from the wiring harness.
Use a JT05791A multimeter to measure resistance between pins A and C on the plug of fuel gauge sender:
Fuel Gauge Sending Unit (B03)

Empty tank: Resistance 7.5 - 12.5 ohms
Full tank: Resistance 178 - 192 ohms
Result:
NO:Replace fuel transfer pump.
( 3 ) Engine oil pressure sending unit (B04)
Action:
→NOTE:
Unplug the engine oil pressure sending unit from the wiring harness.
Use a JT05791A multimeter to measure continuity between pin A and ground (housing) of the sending unit:
When pressure-free, the sending unit is open. It is forced to close while the engine is running.
Engine oil pressure sending unit (B04)

Switch open: Pressure below 38kPa (0.38bar) (5.5psi)
Switch closed: Pressure 38-73kPa (0.38-0,73bar) (5.5-10.5psi)
Result:
( 4 ) Sending unit for transmission oil filter restriction warning light (B07)
Action:
→NOTE:
Unplug the transmission oil filter restriction indicator sender from the wiring harness.
Use a JT05791A multimeter to measure for continuity between pins A and B on the sending unit:
When pressure-free, the sending unit is open. It is forced to close while the engine is running and the transmission oil filter is
full.
Sending unit for transmission oil filter restriction warning light (B07)
Switch open: Pressure below 448kPa (4.48bar) (65psi)
Switch closed: Pressure 448-827kPa (4.48-8.27bar) (65-120psi)
Result:
( 5 ) Coolant Temperature Sender (B08)
Action:
→NOTE:
Unplug the coolant temperature sending unit from the wiring harness.
Use a JT05791A multimeter to measure resistance between pins A and B on the sending unit:
The relevant resistance values should be registered at the following temperatures.
Coolant Temperature Sender (B08)
Resistance value: at 20°C (68°F) approx. 3512 ohms
at 50°C (155°F) approx. 980 ohms
Result:
( 6 ) Low-Temperature Switch (B29)
Action:
→NOTE:
Unplug the low-temperature switch from the wiring harness.
At the following temperatures, the low-temperature switch should close the contact.
Low-temperature switch (B29)

Switch closed: Temperature below 20°C (68°F)
Switch open: Temperature 25-31°C (77-88°F)
Result:
( 7 ) High-Temperature Switch (B30)
Action:
→NOTE:
Unplug the high-temperature switch from the wiring harness.
At the following temperatures, the high-temperature switch should close the contact.
High-Temperature Switch (B30)

Switch closed: Temperature below 97°C (207°F)
Switch open: Temperature 102-108°C (216-226°F)
Result:
( 8 ) Transmission Oil Pressure Sender (B31)
Action:
→NOTE:
Unplug the transmission oil pressure sender from the wiring harness.
Use a JT05791A multimeter to measure for continuity between pins A and B on the sending unit:
When pressure-free, the sending unit is closed. It is forced to open while the engine is running.
Sending unit for transmission oil pressure warning light (B31)

Switch closed: Pressure below 627kPa (6.27bar) (91psi)
Switch open: Pressure 630-1040kPa (6.3-10.4bar) (91-151psi)
Result:
( 9 ) Transmission Oil Temperature Sending Unit (B60)
Action:
→NOTE:
Unplug the sending unit for transmission oil temperature from the wiring harness.
The relevant resistance values should be registered at the following temperatures.
Transmission Oil Temperature Sending Unit (B60)

Resistance value: at 20°C (68°F) approx. 3512 ohms
Result:
( 10 ) Sending Unit for the Hydraulic Oil Filter Warning Light (B111)
Action:
→NOTE:
The hydraulic oil filter sender has to be operated with a 12-volt power supply on pin A (+12 volts) against
pin D (GND).
The hydraulic oil filter sender has two switches (pins B and D or C and D), for different switch points, depending on how high
the pressure happens to be.
Use a JT05791A multimeter to measure for continuity between pins B and D and pins C and D on the connector of the sending
unit:
When there is no pressure, both switch points are open to ground and are closed at different restriction levels of the hydraulic
oil filter.
Sending Unit for the Hydraulic Oil Filter Warning Light (B111)
Pins B and D not connected: Pressure below 330kPa (3.3bar) (47.9psi)
Pins B and D connected: Pressure 330-370kPa (3.3-3.7bar) (47.9-53.7psi)
Pins C and D not connected: Pressure below 400kPa (4.0bar) (58.0psi)
Pins C and D connected: Pressure 400-450kPa (4.0-4.5bar) (58.0-65.3psi)
Result:
( 11 ) Roll-Mode Switch (S32)
Action:
→NOTE:
Unplug the roll-mode switch from the wiring harness.
Use a JT05791A multimeter to measure for continuity between pins C1 and NC and between pins C1 and NO on the switch:
The switch consists of a changeover contact. When actuated, the switch must change over.
Roll-Mode Switch (S32)

Switch not actuated: Continuity C1 and NC closed
Continuity C1 and NO open
Switch actuated: Continuity C1 and NC open
Continuity C1 and NO closed
Pins NC and NO should never indicate continuity.
Result:
Reference 240-15-003, SE03 - Horn

Component checks
( 1 ) Horn (H01)
Action:
→NOTE:
Unplug the horn from the wiring harness.
Use a JT05791A multimeter
JT05791A
Multimeter
JT05791A
to measure resistance between pins A and B of the horn:

Horn (H01)
Horn coil: Resistance below 1 ohm
Result:
YES:Horn is OK.
NO:Replace horn.
( 2 ) Horn switch (S04)
Action:
→NOTE:
Unplug the horn switch from the wiring harness.
JT05791A
Multimeter
JT05791A
to measure continuity between pins A and B on the switch:
When not actuated, the switch is open. When actuated, the switch must close.
Horn switch (S04)

Result:
YES:Switch is OK.
Reference 240-15-004, SE04 - Cigarette Lighter and Operator′s Seat

Component checks
( 1 ) Seat with compressor and heater (A29)
Action:
→NOTE:
Unplug the operator′s seat from the wiring harness.
JT05791A
Multimeter
JT05791A
to measure for resistance between pins A and B on the plug at the operator′s seat:
Operator′s seat (A29)

Seat compressor and heating elements: Resistance approx. 0.6 ohms
Seat compressor: Resistance approx. 0.8 ohms
Heating element for seat: Resistance approx. 3.6 ohms
Heating element for backrest: Resistance approx. 3.6 ohms
Result:
YES:The operator′s seat is OK.
NO:Replace the relevant components.
( 2 ) Cigarette lighter (E05)
Action:
→NOTE:
Unplug the cigarette lighter from the wiring harness.
JT05791A
Multimeter
JT05791A
to measure resistance between pins A and B on the switch:

Cigarette lighter (E05)

Heating coil: Resistance approx. 0.6 ohms
Result:
YES:Cigarette lighter is OK.
NO:Replace the cigarette lighter.
Reference 240-15-005, SE06 - Lighting System

Component Tests
( 1 ) Relays for Full-Beam Headlights, Dipped-Beam Headlights and Worklights (K02/1, K02/2, K02/6, K02/7)
Action:
→NOTE:
Remove the relevant relay from the relay box.
Relays for Full-Beam Headlights, Dipped-Beam Headlights and Worklights (K02/1, K02/2, K02/6, K02/7)
Result:
( 2 ) Diode for Dipped- and Full-Beam Headlights (K07/1)
Action:
→NOTE:
Remove the relay for dipped-beam and full-beam headlights from the relevant relay box.
Diode for Dipped- and Full-Beam Headlights (K07/1)

→NOTE:
Result:
YES:3-amp diode is in good condition.

( 3 ) Light Switch (S09)
Action:
→NOTE:
Unplug the light switch from the wiring harness.
The following truth table defines the operation of the light switch.
Light switch positions and pins
Switches Switch pin
Location B H L M C
0 X X
1 X X X
2 X X X
3 X X X
Result:
( 4 ) Full-/Dipped-Beam Switch (S10)
Action:
→NOTE:
Unplug the switch for dipped-beam and full-beam headlights from the wiring harness.
Full-/Dipped-Beam Switch (S10)

Result:
( 5 ) Switch for Lights on Cab Frame (S11)
Action:
→NOTE:
Unplug the switch for lights on the cab frame from the wiring harness.
Use a JT05791A multimeter to measure for continuity between pins G and B and between pins G and J on the switch:
The switch consists of two normally-opened contacts. When the switch is actuated, they must close.
Switch for Lights on Cab Frame (S11)

Switch OFF: Continuity G and B open
Continuity G and J open
Switch ON: Continuity G and B closed
Continuity G and J closed
Pins B and J should never indicate continuity.
Result:
( 6 ) Flash-to-Pass Switch (S30)
Action:
→NOTE:
Unplug the flash-to-pass switch from the wiring harness.
When actuated, the switch must close.
Flash-to-Pass Switch (S30)

Result:
YES:The switch is in good condition.
Reference 240-15-006, SE07 — Worklights

Component Tests
Make the following resistance and/or current draw tests.
( 1 ) Relays for Worklights (K02/3, K02/4 and K02/5)
Action:
→NOTE:
Use a JT05791A
JT05791A
Multimeter
JT05791A
multimeter to measure resistance at the relay between pins 85 (2) and 86 (1).
Relays for Worklights (K02/3, K02/4 and K02/5)

Result:
( 2 ) Switch for Front Corner Worklights (S59)
Action:
→NOTE:
Unplug the worklight switch from the wiring harness.
JT05791A
Multimeter
JT05791A
When actuated, the switch must close.
Switch for Front Corner Worklights (S59)

Switch OFF: Continuity A and B open
Switch ON: Continuity A and B closed
Result:
( 3 ) Switches for Worklights at Front and Rear of Cab Roof (S92/1 and S92/2)
Action:
→NOTE:
Unplug the worklight switch from the wiring harness.
JT05791A
Multimeter
JT05791A
to measure for continuity between pins A and B and between pins C and D on the switch:
The switch has two positions. In position I, terminals C and D are connected. In position II, terminals A and B are connected as
well.
Switches for Worklights at Front and Rear of Cab Roof (S92/1 and S92/2)
Switch position I: Continuity A and B open
Switch position II: Continuity A and B closed
Pins B and C and B and D should never indicate continuity.
Result:
Reference 240-15-007, SE09 — Radio, Dome Light and Console Light

Component Tests
( 1 ) Door Switch for Dome Light (B28-LH)
Action:
→NOTE:
Unplug the door switch from the wiring harness.
JT05791A
Multimeter
JT05791A
to measure for continuity between pins C1 and NC2 and between pins C1 and NO4 on the switch:
Door Switch for Dome Light (B28-LH)

Switch not actuated: Continuity C1 and NC2 closed
Continuity C1 and NO4 open
Switch actuated: Continuity C1 and NC2 open
Continuity C1 and NO4 closed
Pins NC2 and NO4 should never indicate continuity.
Result:
YES:Door switch is in good condition.
NO:Replace door switch.
( 2 ) Dome Light Switch (S35)
Action:
→NOTE:
Unplug the dome light switch from the wiring harness.
JT05791A
Multimeter
JT05791A
to measure for continuity between pins 1 and 2 and between pins 2 and 3 on the switch:
The switch consists of a changeover contact with a mid-position. Three positions may be selected.
Dome Light Switch (S35)

Switch position 0: Continuity 1 and 2 open
Continuity 2 and 3 open
Switch position 1: Continuity 1 and 2 closed
Continuity 2 and 3 closed
Result:
Reference 240-15-008, SE10 — Fan and Air-Conditioning System

Component Tests
( 1 ) Thermostat Switch (B14)
Action:
→NOTE:
Unplug the thermostat switch from the wiring harness.
JT05791A
Multimeter
JT05791A
Electrical circuit and component tests.
to measure for continuity between pins A and B on the thermostat switch:
The switch point is variable, depending on whether the setting is WARM or COLD.
Thermostat Switch (B14)

Switch closed: Temperature from -2°C (28°F) to +18°C (64°F)
Switch open: Temperature below +4°C (39°F)
The temperature reading is the temperature of the sensor; this may deviate by several degrees in either direction.
Result:
NO:Replace switch.
( 2 ) Pressure Switch (B15)
Action:
→NOTE:
Unplug the pressure switch from the wiring harness.
The pressure switch consists of a low-pressure switch and high-pressure switch that are switched in series and cut off the
power supply to the compressor when certain values are reached.
JT05791A
Multimeter
JT05791A
to measure for continuity between pins A and B on the pressure switch:

Pressure Switch (B15)

Low-pressure switch closed: Pressure from 240 kPa (2.4 bar) (35 psi) max
Low-pressure switch open: Pressure less than 90-150 kPa (0.9-1.5 bar) (13-22 psi)
High-pressure switch closed: Pressure less than 1520-1880 kPa (15.2-18.8 bar) (220-273 psi)
High-pressure switch open: Pressure from 2420-2780 kPa (24.2-27.8 bar) (351-403 psi)
Current can pass through the switch only when the low-pressure and high-pressure switches are both closed at the same time.
Result:
NO:Replace switch.
( 3 ) Fan and Air Conditioner Relay (K08/1 and K08/2)
Action:
→NOTE:
Remove the relay for the fan and air-conditioning system from the relevant relay box.
Use a JT05791A
JT05791A
Multimeter
JT05791A
multimeter to measure resistance at the relay between terminals 85 (2) and 86 (1).
Fan and Air Conditioner Relay (K08/1 and K08/2)

Result:
( 4 ) Fan Motors (M07, M10)
Action:
→NOTE:
The fan motor undergoing the test must be electrically removed from the circuit when resistance is
measured.
JT05791A
Multimeter
JT05791A
to measure resistance between pins E and A:

Fan Motors (M07, M10)

Motor coil: Resistance approx. 1 ohm
Result:
YES:The fan motor is in good condition.
NO:Replace the fan motor.
( 5 ) Compressor Clutch (M02)
Action:
→NOTE:
The compressor clutch must be electrically removed from the circuit before resistance is checked.
JT05791A
Multimeter
JT05791A
to measure resistance between pin A and ground:

Compressor Clutch (M02)

Clutch coil: Resistance approx. 3.5 - 4.0 ohms
Result:
YES:The compressor clutch is in good condition.
NO:Replace the compressor clutch.
( 6 ) Resistor for Fan Motors (R18)
Action:
→NOTE:
The resistor must be electrically removed from the fan and air conditioning circuit when performing
resistance and continuity checks.
As described below, use a JT05791A multimeter
JT05791A
Multimeter
JT05791A
to measure resistance between the various pins:

Resistor for Fan Motors (R18)

Resistance: Pins 1 and 4 175 ohms
Pins 1 and 2 400 ohms
Result:
YES:The resistor is in good condition.
NO:Replace the resistor.
( 7 ) Fan Switch (S14)
Action:
→NOTE:
The switch must be electrically removed from the circuit when performing continuity tests.
The following truth table defines the operation of the fan switch.
Switch positions and pins on the fan switch
Switch
Switch pin
position
B 1 2 3 4
OFF
1st stage X X
2nd stage X X X
3rd stage X X X X
4th stage X X X X X
Result:
NO:Replace switch.
( 8 ) Air-Conditioner Switch (S28)
Action:
→NOTE:
Unplug the air-conditioner switch from the wiring harness.
JT05791A
Multimeter
JT05791A
Air-Conditioner Switch (S28)

Result:
NO:Replace switch.
Reference 240-15-009, SE11 and SE12 - Windshield Wiper and Washer

Component Tests
( 1 ) Wiper Motors for Windshield and Rear Window (M03 and M04)
Action:
→NOTE:
The wiper motor undergoing the test must be electrically removed from the circuit when resistance is
measured.
Use a JT05791A multimeter to measure resistance between pins A and B (for stage 1) and between A and C (for stage 2):
Wiper Motors for Windshield and Rear Window (M03 and M04)
Motor coil (stage 1): Resistance approx. 1.3 ohms
Motor coil (stage 2): Resistance approx. 1 ohms
Current draw (stage 1): Current approx. 1.4 amps
Current draw (stage 2): Current approx. 2.6 amps
Result:
YES:The motor is in good condition.
NO:Replace the motor.
( 2 ) Pumps for Windshield and Rear Window Washers (M05 and M06)
Action:
→NOTE:
The pump undergoing the test must be electrically removed from the circuit when resistance is
measured.
Use a JT05791A multimeter to measure resistance between pins E and A:
Washer Pumps (M05 and M06)

Motor coil: Resistance approx. 1 ohms
Result:
YES:The pump is in good condition.
NO:Replace the pump.
( 3 ) Windshield wiper switch (S15)
Action:
→NOTE:
The switch must be electrically removed from the starting circuit when performing continuity tests.
The following truth table defines the operation of the switch.
Switch positions and pins
Switch
Switch pin
position
B(+12 volts) H L M C
OFF X X X
Intermittent X X X
Slow wipe X X X
Fast wipe X X X
Result:
( 4 ) Windshield Washer Switch (S16)
Action:
→NOTE:
Unplug the windshield washer switch from the wiring harness.
JT05791A
Multimeter
JT05791A
Washer Switch (S16)
Result:
( 5 ) Switches for Windshield Wiper and Rear Window Wiper (S120, S122)
Action:
→NOTE:
The switch must be electrically removed from the circuit when performing continuity tests.
The following truth table defines the operation of the wiper switches:
Switch positions and pins on the wiper switches
Switch
Switch pin
position
A B C D E
OFF X X X
1st position X X X
2nd position X X X X
Result:
Reference 240-15-010, SE13 - Beacon Light

Component checks
( 1 ) Beacon Light Switch (S36)
Action:
→NOTE:
Unplug the beacon light switch from the wiring harness.
When actuated, the switch must close. The indicator light for the beacon light is located between pins B and C.
Beacon light switch (S36)

Switch ON: Continuity A and B closed
If pins B and C do not indicate continuity, the indicator light in the switch is defective.
Result:
Reference 240-15-011, SE14 — 3- and 7-Terminal Power Outlet Sockets

Component Tests
( 1 ) 3-Terminal Socket Relay (K08/3)
Action:
→NOTE:
Remove the relay for the 3-terminal power outlet socket from the relevant relay box.
Use a JT05791A
JT05791A
Multimeter
JT05791A
multimeter to measure resistance at the relay between pins 85 (2) and 86 (1).
3-Terminal Socket Relay (K08/3)

Result:

Reference 240-15-012, SE15 — Electronic Hitch Control

Component tests
( 1 ) Draft sensor (B19) and/or draft sensor (B20)
Action:
For information on checking the draft sensor, see Reference 270-15-151 , “Hitch - Testing and Adjusting the Draft Sensors”.
Result:
YES:The stepper motor is in good condition.
NO:Replace the stepper motor.
( 2 ) Stepper motor (M08)
Action:
→NOTE:
Unplug the stepper motor from the wiring harness before doing the resistance test.
Use a JT05791A
JT05791A
Multimeter
JT05791A
multimeter to measure resistance between pins A and B (motor coil 1) and between C and D (motor coil 2):
Stepper motor (M08)

Motor coil 1: Resistance approx. 1 to 1.3 ohms
Motor coil 2: Resistance approx. 1 to 1.3 ohms
Pins A/C, A/D, B/C and B/D should never indicate continuity.
Result:
YES:The stepper motor is in good condition.
NO:Replace the stepper motor.
( 3 ) Quick withdrawal switch (S24)
Action:
→NOTE:
Unplug the quick withdrawal switch from the wiring harness.
JT05791A
Multimeter
JT05791A
to measure for continuity between the pins on the switch:
The switch consists of a changeover contact with a mid-position. Three switch positions may be selected.
Quick withdrawal switch (S24)

Switch not actuated: Continuity D and F open
Continuity D and G open
Switch in "raise" position: Continuity D and F closed
Continuity D and G open
Switch in "lower" position: Continuity D and F open
Continuity D and G closed
Pins F and G should never indicate continuity.
Result:
( 4 ) Switches at left and right for external control of hitch (S68 and S23)
Action:
→NOTE:
Unplug the relevant remote control switch (hitch control) from the wiring harness.
JT05791A
Multimeter
JT05791A
to measure for continuity between the pins on the switch:
The switch consists of two internally switched changeover contacts with mid-positions. When actuated, the contacts must
change over.
Switches at left and right for external control of hitch (S68 and S23)
Switch not actuated: Continuity C and B closed
Continuity C and A open
Continuity D and F open
Continuity D and E closed
Switch in "raise" position: Continuity C and B open
Continuity C and A closed
Continuity D and F open
Switch in "lower" position: Continuity C and B closed
Continuity C and A open
Continuity D and F closed
Continuity D and E open
Pins C/D, B/F, B/E, A/F and A/E should never indicate continuity.
Result:
Reference 240-15-013, SE16A - Basic Control Unit (BCU) (Rear PTO and
External Control)
Component tests
( 1 ) Rear PTO Switch (S21)
Action:
→NOTE:
Unplug the rear PTO switch (on the r.h. side) or the switch for external control of the PTO (on the r.h.
side) from the wiring harness.
Use a JT05791A multimeter to measure for continuity between pins A and B and between pins A and C on the switch:
Rear PTO Switch (S21)

Switch not actuated: Continuity A and C closed
Continuity A and B open
Switch actuated: Continuity A and C open
Continuity A and B closed
Pins B and C should never indicate continuity.
Result:
( 2 ) Seat Switch (S40)
Action:
→NOTE:
Unplug the seat switch from the wiring harness.
Use a JT05791A multimeter to measure for continuity or resistance between pins A and B on the seat switch plug:
Seat Switch (S40)

Switch actuated: Resistance approx. 22 ohms
Result:
YES:The seat switch is in good condition.
NO:Replace seat switch.
( 3 ) Left and Right External Control Switches (for PTO) (S44, S121)
Action:
→NOTE:
Unplug the PTO external control switch from the wiring harness.
Left and Right External Control Switches (for PTO) (S44, S121)
Switch not actuated: Continuity A and B closed
Continuity A and C open
Switch actuated: Continuity A and B open
Continuity A and C closed
Result:
( 4 ) PTO Preselector Switch (S45)
Action:
→NOTE:
Unplug the PTO preselector switch from the wiring harness.
Use a JT05791A multimeter to measure for continuity between pins A and B and between pins B and C on the switch:
PTO Preselector Switch (S45)

Switch not actuated: Continuity B and C closed
Switch actuated: Continuity B and C open
Pins A and C should never indicate continuity.
Result:
( 5 ) Rear PTO Solenoid Valve (Y04)
Action:
→NOTE:
Unplug the rear PTO solenoid valve from the wiring harness.
Use a JT05791A multimeter to measure resistance between pins A and B on the solenoid valve:
Rear PTO Solenoid Valve (Y04)

Solenoid valve: Resistance approx. 10 - 12 ohms
Result:
YES:The solenoid valve is in good condition.
NO:Replace the solenoid valve.
Reference 240-15-014, SE16B - Basic Control Unit (BCU) (Front PTO)

Component tests
( 1 ) Front PTO Switch (S06)
Action:
→NOTE:
Unplug the front PTO switch from the wiring harness.
Front PTO switch (S06)

Result:
( 2 ) Front PTO solenoid valve (Y64)
Action:
→NOTE:
Unplug the front PTO solenoid valve from the wiring harness.
Front PTO solenoid valve (Y64)

Result:
Reference 240-15-015, SE16C - Basic Control Unit (BCU) (Front-Wheel

Drive)
Component checks
( 1 ) Front-wheel drive switch (S05)
Action:
→NOTE:
Unplug the front-wheel drive switch from the wiring harness.
JT05791A
Multimeter
JT05791A
to measure for continuity between pins A and C and between pins B and C on the switch.
The switch consists of a changeover contact with a mid-position. Three switch positions may be selected.
Front-wheel drive switch (S05)

Switch position OFF: Continuity A and C closed
Continuity B and C open
Switch position ON: Continuity A and C open
Switch position AUTO: Continuity A and C open
Continuity B and C closed
Pins A and B should never indicate continuity.
Result:
YES:Switch is OK.
( 2 ) Front-wheel drive switch (S63)
Action:
→NOTE:
Unplug the front-wheel drive switch from the wiring harness.
JT05791A
Multimeter
JT05791A
to measure for continuity between pins A and C and between pins B and C on the switch:
Front-wheel drive switch (S63)

Switch OFF: Continuity A and C closed
Switch ON: Continuity A and C open
Result:
YES:Switch is OK.
( 3 ) Front-wheel drive solenoid valve (Y03)
Action:
→NOTE:
Unplug the front-wheel drive solenoid valve from the wiring harness.
JT05791A
Multimeter
JT05791A
to measure resistance between pins A and B on the solenoid valve:

Front-wheel drive solenoid valve (Y03)

Current draw: Current approx. 1 amp
Result:
YES:The solenoid valve is OK.
Reference 240-15-016, SE16D — BCU (Differential Lock)

Component checks
Perform the following resistance and/or current draw tests:
( 1 ) Differential lock switch (S22)
Action:
→NOTE:
Unplug the differential lock switch from the wiring harness.
Use the JT05791A multimeter
JT05791A
Multimeter
JT05791A
to check for continuity between pin A and B of the switch:
The switch is open when not activated. When the switch is activated, it has to close.
Differential lock switch (S22)

Switch not activated: Continuity A and B open
Switch activated: Continuity A and B closed
Result:
YES:Switch is OK.
( 2 ) Differential lock solenoid (Y05)
Action:
→NOTE:
Unplug the differential lock solenoid from the wiring harness.
Use the JT05791A multimeter
JT05791A
Multimeter
JT05791A
to measure the resistance between pin A and B of the solenoid:

Differential lock solenoid (Y05)

Solenoid valve: Resistance approx. 10 - 12 Ω
Current draw: Current approx. 1 A
Result:
YES:Solenoid is OK.
NO:Replace the solenoid.
Reference 240-15-017, SE16E — Basic Control Unit (BCU) (Hazard

Warning and Turn Signal Lights)
Component Tests
( 1 ) Turn Signal Switch (S08)
Action:
→NOTE:
Unplug the turn signal switch from the wiring harness.
JT05791A
Multimeter
JT05791A
to measure for continuity between pins 1 and 2 and between pins 2 and 3 on the switch:
The switch consists of a changeover contact with a mid-position. Three positions may be selected.
Turn Signal Switch (S08)

Switch in OFF position: Continuity 1 and 2 open
Switch in LEFT position: Continuity 1 and 2 closed
Switch in RIGHT position: Continuity 1 and 2 open
Result:
( 2 ) Turn Signal Switches (S08/1, S08/2)
Action:
→NOTE:
Unplug the turn signal switch from the wiring harness.
JT05791A
Multimeter
JT05791A
to measure for continuity between pins C1 and NC2 and between pins C1 and NO4 on the switch:
The switch consists of two separate changeover contacts. When the L or R switch is actuated, the contacts must change over.
Turn Signal Switches (S08/1, S08/2)

Result:
( 3 ) Hazard Warning Light Switch (S62)
Action:
→NOTE:
Unplug the hazard warning light switch from the wiring harness.
JT05791A
Multimeter
JT05791A
to measure for continuity between pins A and B and between pins A and C on the switch:
Hazard Warning Light Switch (S62)

Switch OFF: Continuity A and C closed
Switch ON: Continuity A and C open
Result:
( 4 ) Hazard Warning Light Switch (S106)
Action:
→NOTE:
Unplug the hazard warning light switch from the wiring harness.
JT05791A
Multimeter
JT05791A
to measure for continuity between pins A and B and between pins A and C on the switch:
The switch consists of two changeover contacts. When actuated, the contacts must change over. The indicator light for the
hazard warning lights is located between pins D and F.
Hazard Warning Light Switch (S106)

Switch OFF: Continuity A and B closed
Continuity D and E open
Switch ON: Continuity A and B open
Pins B and C and B and D should never indicate continuity. If pins D and F do not indicate continuity, the indicator light in the
switch is defective.
Result:
Reference 240-15-018, SE16G - Basic Control Unit (BCU) (Headland

Management System)
Component Tests
( 1 ) Relay for Alternator and Cold-Weather Starting Aid (K07/5, K07/6)
Action:
Remove the alternator relay from the relevant relay box.
Relay for Alternator and Cold-Weather Starting Aid (K07/5, K07/6)

Result:
( 2 ) HMS switch (S43)
Action:
→NOTE:
Unplug the rear HMS switch from the wiring harness.
HMS switch (S43)

Result:
( 3 ) Record/save switch (S95)
Action:
→NOTE:
Unplug the record/save switch from the wiring harness.
Record/save switch (S95)

Result:
( 4 ) Program switch (S100)
Action:
→NOTE:
Unplug the program switch from the wiring harness.
Use a JT05791A multimeter to measure for continuity between the pins on the switch:
The switch consists of two internally switched changeover contacts with mid-positions. When actuated, the contacts must
change over.
Program switch (S100)

Switch not actuated: Continuity 1 and 2 closed
Switch position 1: Continuity 1 and 2 closed
Result:
( 5 ) Terminating resistor (R19)
Action:
→NOTE:
Unplug the terminating resistor from the wiring harness.
Use a JT05791A multimeter to measure resistance between pins A and B on the resistor:
Terminating resistor (R19)

Resistor: Resistance approx. 120 - 122 ohms
Result:
YES:The resistor is in good condition.
NO:Replace the resistor.
( 6 ) Solenoid valve for cold-weather starting control (Y52)
Action:
→NOTE:
Unplug the front PTO solenoid valve from the wiring harness.
Solenoid valve for cold-weather starting control (Y52)

Result:
Reference 240-15-019, SE16H - Basic Control Unit (BCU) (Power Supply,

Acoustic Alarm)
Component checks
( 1 ) Acoustic alarm (K01/4)
Action:
Pull the acoustic alarm out of the relevant relay box.
If 9 - 18 volts is supplied to pins 85 (-) and 86 (+) of the acoustic alarm unit, the alarm must emit a continuous signal and draw
current as follows:
Acoustic alarm (K01/4)

Current draw: Current approx. 15 mA
Continuous signal: Frequency approx. 2.8 - 3.8 kHz
Result:
YES:Acoustic alarm is OK.
NO:Replace the acoustic alarm.
Reference 240-15-021, SE16J — Basic Control Unit (BCU) (Brake System

and Handbrake Monitor Unit)
Component Tests
( 1 ) Handbrake Switch (B37)
Action:
→NOTE:
Unplug the handbrake switch from the wiring harness.
JT05791A
Multimeter
JT05791A
to measure for continuity between pins C1 and NC and between pins C1 and NO on the switch:
Handbrake Switch (B37)

Result:
( 2 ) Brake Switch (B112)
Action:
→NOTE:
Unplug the brake switch from the wiring harness.
JT05791A
Multimeter
JT05791A
to measure for continuity between pins A/B, pins A/C and pins A/D on the switch:
The switch consists of two changeover contacts which share a common connection.
Brake Switch (B112)

Brake not actuated: Continuity A and B open
Continuity A and D closed
Left brake actuated: Continuity A and B closed
Continuity A and D closed
Right brake actuated: Continuity A and B closed
Continuity A and D open
Both brakes actuated: Continuity A and B closed
Continuity A and D open
Pins B and C and B and D should never indicate continuity.
Result:
Reference 240-15-024, SE22 - CAN BUS Terminating Resistor

Component Tests
( 1 ) Diode for the hazard warning lights and power supply to the CAN BUS (K07/2)
Action:
Pull the diode block out of the relevant relay box.
Diode for hazard warning lights (K07/2)

Diode for the power supply to the CAN BUS (K07/2)

→NOTE:
Result:
YES:Diode block is in good condition.
Reference 240-15-026, SE26A - Transmission Control Unit (PowrQuad

Plus Transmission)
Component Tests
( 1 ) Multi-function unit (A47)
Action:
→NOTE:
Unplug the multi-function unit from the wiring harness.
Use a JT05791A multimeter to measure for resistance or continuity between the relevant pins:
Multi-function unit (A47)

Solenoid coil (pins F and G): Resistance approx. 8 ohms
Switch position F: Continuity A and B closed
Continuity C and E open
Switch position N: Continuity A and B open
Continuity C and E open
Switch position R: Continuity A and B closed
Continuity C and E closed
Pins D/E, A/C, B/D and B/E should never indicate continuity.
Result:
YES:The multi-function unit is in good condition.
NO:Replace the multi-function unit.
( 2 ) Transmission enable relay (K07/4)
Action:
→NOTE:
Transmission enable relay (K07/4)

Result:
( 3 ) Plug for "come home" mode (K08/4)
Action:
The "come-home" plug consists simply of a bridge that connects pins 86 (1) and 87 (5).
Plug for "come home" mode (K08/4)

Connection: Continuity 86 (1) and 87 (5)
Result:
YES:The "come-home" plug is in good condition.
NO:Replace the "come-home" plug.
( 4 ) Clutch switch (S72)
Action:
→NOTE:
Unplug the clutch switch from the wiring harness.
Use a JT05791A multimeter to measure for continuity between pins C1 and NC2 and between pins C1 and NO4 on the switch:
Clutch switch (S72)

Result:
( 5 ) Gear selector switch (S81)
Action:
→NOTE:
Unplug the gear selector switch from the wiring harness.
Use a JT05791A multimeter to measure for continuity between pins A and C and between pins B and C on the switch:
The switch consists of a changeover contact with a mid-position. Three switch positions may be selected. When released, the
switch returns to its centre position.
Gear selector switch (S81)

Switch in TORTOISE position: Continuity A and C closed
Switch in position CENTER: Continuity A and C open
Switch in HARE position: Continuity A and C open
Result:
( 6 ) Park lock switch (S114)
Action:
→NOTE:
Unplug the park lock switch from the wiring harness.
Park lock switch (S114)

Result:
( 7 ) Solenoid valves for forward and reverse travel (Y33, Y36)
Action:
→NOTE:
Unplug the relevant solenoid valve from the wiring harness.
Solenoid valves for forward and reverse travel (Y33, Y36)

Current draw: Current below 1 amp
Result:
( 8 ) Solenoid valves K1, K2, K3 (Y32, Y39, Y40)

[ Up to serial no. 409632 ]
Action:
→NOTE:
Solenoid valves K1, K2, K3 (Y32, Y39, Y40)

Result:
( 9 ) Proportional valve for enable signal (Y38)
Action:
→NOTE:
Unplug the proportional valve from the wiring harness.
Proportional valve for enable signal (Y38)

Solenoid valve: Resistance approx. 6 - 9.5 ohms
Current draw: Current approx. 0.2 - 0.8 amp
The control unit provides the proportional valve with a pulse-width modulated (PWM) power supply. The amperage determines
the rate of flow through the valve.
Result:
Section 240 - ELECTRICAL SYSTEM Group 25: Functional Schematics
( 10 ) Solenoid valves K1, K2 (Y62, Y63)

[ From serial no. 409633 ]
Action:
→NOTE:
Solenoid valves K1, K2 (Y62, Y63)

Result:
Group 25 - Functional Schematics

Reference 240-25-001, Circuit Diagram — Summary of References
Reference 210-15-001 , “General References (Summary)”
Reference 240-25-010 , “Fuses and Relays”

Reference 240-25-011 , “Designation of Parts Shown in Functional Schematic and Harness Diagram”
Reference 240-25-012 , “Designation of Sections Shown in Functional Schematic”
Reference 240-25-013 , “Wiring Harness Designations”
Reference 240-25-014 , “Functional Schematic (Complete Tractor)”
Reference 240-25-010, Fuses and Relays
IMPORTANT:
To prevent damage to the electrical system, never use a fuse with a rating higher than the one already
installed.
→NOTE:
Depending on how the tractor is equipped, it may not have all the fuses and relays shown below.
Fuse and relay box
Latches on fuse and relay boxes
The fuse and relay boxes are located underneath the storage rack.
Press down latches (A) and lift off the trim panel.
LEGEND:
A Relay box K01
B Relay box K02
C Fuse box F03
D Fuse box F04
E Fuse box F05
F Fuse box F06
G Relay box K07
H Relay box K08
Fuse and relay boxes
Relays (relay box K01)
Relay box K01
DEFINITIONS:
K01/1 Relay for accessories (plugs for front loader, beacon light, windshield/rear window wipers and washer system)
K01/2 Relay for electrical power supply
K01/3 Relay for accessories (horn, radio, cigarette lighter and operator′s seat)
K01/4 Acoustic alarm
Relay box K02
DEFINITIONS:
K02/1 Relay for dipped-beam headlights (main headlights)
K02/2 Relay for full-beam headlights (main headlights)
K02/3 Relay for worklights on front of cab roof
K02/4 Relay for worklights on rear of cab roof
K02/5 Relay for front corner worklights
K02/6 Relay for worklights or full-beam headlights (headlights on cab frame)
K02/7 Relay for dipped-beam headlights (headlights on cab frame)
Fuses (fuse box F03)
Fuse box F03
DEFINITIONS:
F03/01 10-amp, dipped-beam headlight, left
F03/02 10-amp, dipped-beam headlight, right
F03/03 10-amp, r.h. tail light, l.h. clearance light, license plate light on right
F03/04 10-amp, l.h. tail light, r.h. clearance light, license plate light on left
F03/05 10-amp, outer worklight on front of cab roof
F03/06 10-amp, inner worklight on front of cab roof
F03/07 10-amp, outer worklight on rear of cab roof
F03/08 10-amp, inner worklight on rear of cab roof
F03/09 10-amp, front corner worklight
F03/10 10-amp, worklights on cab frame
F03/11 10-amp, dipped beam, left light on cab frame
F03/12 10-amp, dipped beam, right light on cab frame
F03/13 30-amp, dipped beam (main headlights)
F03/14 15-amp, full-beam headlights
F03/15 30-amp, full-beam (lights on cab frame)
F03/16 15-amp, full-beam (lights on cab frame)
Fuse box F04
DEFINITIONS:
F04/01 10-amp, 3-terminal power outlet socket, socket strip (power supply)
F04/02 30-amp, 3-terminal power outlet socket, socket strip (battery voltage)
F04/03 20-amp, fuel preheater
F04/04 10-amp, instrument unit (battery voltage)
F04/05 10-amp, instrument unit/basic informator (power supply)
F04/06 10-amp, performance monitor (PRF)
F04/07 Vacant
F04/08 10-amp, Basic Control Unit (power supply)
10-amp, BCU controller (PTO, front-wheel drive, differential lock, HMS II, turn signal switch, handbrake, seat switch,
F04/09
radar)
F04/10 15-amp, left turn signal
F04/11 15-amp, right turn signal
F04/12 15-amp, light switch and flash-to-pass
F04/13 20-amp, GreenStar
F04/14 Vacant
F04/15 Vacant
DEFINITIONS:
F04/16 10-amp, BCU controller, hazard warning lights (battery voltage)
Fuse box F05
DEFINITIONS:
F05/01 15-amp, brake switch, brake light
F05/02 10-amp, CAN BUS terminator and service plug
F05/03 Vacant
F05/04 10-amp, EPC controller (power supply)
F05/05 10-amp, EPC controller (battery voltage)
F05/06 10-amp, EPC controller (power supply)
F05/07 Vacant
F05/08 10-amp, fuel pump, injection pump shut-off valve
F05/09 15-amp, main (key) switch (BAT terminals)
F05/10 30-amp, accessories (horn, radio, cigarette lighter and operator′s seat)
F05/11 30-amp, relay for accessories (front loader, beacon light, windshield/rear window wipers and washer system)
F05/12 30-amp, relay for power supply to electronics
F05/13 Vacant
F05/14 Vacant
DEFINITIONS:
F05/15 Vacant
F05/16 Vacant
Fuse box F06
DEFINITIONS:
F06/01 30-amp, fan, air-conditioning system
F06/02 20-amp, fan
F06/03 10-amp, air-conditioning system
F06/04 10-amp, windshield wiper and washer
F06/05 10-amp, rear window wiper and washer
F06/06 10-amp, front loader
F06/07 10-amp, beacon light
F06/08 10-amp, console light, background lighting for pressure gauge, radio and instruments
F06/09 10-amp, radio (power supply)
F06/10 10-amp, horn
F06/11 10-amp, cigarette lighter
F06/12 10-amp, operator′s seat
F06/13 Fuse tester (signal can be heard if fuse is intact)
DEFINITIONS:
F06/14 Vacant
F06/15 10-amp, dome light, radio (battery voltage)
F06/16 Vacant
Relay box K07
DEFINITIONS:
K07/1 3-amp, lighting diode
K07/1 1-amp, diode for power supply to electronics
K07/2 3-amp, CAN BUS diode
K07/2 1-amp, CAN BUS diode
K07/3 Fuel preheater relay
K07/4 Enable relay
K07/5 Alternator relay
K07/6 Relay for cold-weather starting aid
K07/7 Vacant
Relay box K08
DEFINITIONS:
K08/1 Relay for fan and air conditioning system
K08/2 Fan relay
K08/3 Relay for 3-terminal power outlet socket, power outlet strip
K08/4 Plug for "come home” mode
Main fuses
LEGEND:
A Main fuse (F13)
B Main fuse (F14)
Main fuses up to serial no. 436763
Main fuses from serial no. 436764
The main fuses are located on the right-hand side of the engine.
A = F13 - 70-amp, battery circuit (main power supply)
B = F14 - 70-amp, battery circuit (main power supply)
Fuse for heater element (electrical starting aid)

LEGEND:
A Fuse F09 for heater element (electrical starting aid)
Fuse for heater element (electrical starting aid) up to

serial no. 436763
Fuse for heater element (electrical starting aid) from

serial no. 436764
The fuse for the electrical starting aid heating element is on the right side of the engine.
A = F09 - 70-amp, heating element in electrical starting aid.
Fuse for indicator light (electrical starting aid)

LEGEND:
A Fuse F11 for indicator light (electrical starting aid)
Fuse for indicator light (electrical starting aid) up to

serial no. 436763
Fuse for indicator light (electrical starting aid) from

serial no. 436764
The fuse for the electrical starting aid indicator light is on the right side of the engine.
A = F11 - 10-amp, indicator light in electrical starting aid.
Fuse for the Indicator Light in the Switch that Operates the Battery Cut-Off Switch (Version 2)
LEGEND:
A Latches
B Covers
Fuse for the indicator light in the switch that operates
C
the battery cut-off switch (version 2) (F25)
Fuse for the Indicator Light in the Switch that Operates

the Battery Cut-Off Switch (Version 2)
Fuse for the Indicator Light in the Switch that Operates

the Battery Cut-Off Switch (Version 2)
The fuse for the indicator light in the switch that operates the battery cut-off switch (version 2) is located above the battery in
the cover of the battery cut-off relay.
Open latches (A) and remove covers (B).
C = F25 - 10-amp, indicator light in switch that operates the battery cut-off switch (version 2)
Additional fuse for front loader

LEGEND:
A Additional fuse for front loader
Additional fuse for front loader
The additional fuse for the front loader (up to serial no. 409408) is located below the shift console, where it is concealed behind
the floor-mat.
Pull the floor-mat away from the shift console.
→NOTE:
The 10-amp additional fuse for the front loader operates in tandem with 10-amp fuse F06/06, which is
located in the fuse box. In the event of failure, it is therefore impossible to tell which fuse has blown. For
this reason, this additional fuse must be replaced with a 30-amp fuse, so that the fuse in the fuse box
protects the circuit.
IMPORTANT:
THIS IS AN EXCEPTION! The front loader circuit is protected by a 10-amp fuse (F06/06) in the fuse box.
Normally, a fuse is never replaced with a fuse that has a higher rating.
Starting motor relay

LEGEND:
A Starting motor relay (K01)
Starter motor relay up to serial no. 436763
Starting motor relay from serial no. 436764
The starting motor relay is located under the cover on the right-hand side of the engine.
Relay for electrical starting aid

LEGEND:
A Relay K36, electrical starting aid
Relay for electrical starting aid (up to serial no. 436763)
Relay for electrical starting aid (from serial no. 436764)
The electrical starting aid relay is located under the cover on the right-hand side of the engine block.
Battery cut-off relay

LEGEND:
A Battery cut-off relay (version 1) (K50)
B Battery cut-off relay (version 2) (K56)
Battery cut-off relay (version 1)
Battery cut-off relay (version 2)
The battery cut-off relay is located under the cover above the battery.
Battery cut-off switch relay
LEGEND:
A Relay K48 for battery cut-off switch (version 1)
B Relay K57 for battery cut-off switch (version 2)
Relay for the battery cut-off switch (version 1)
Relay for the battery cut-off switch (version 2)
The relay for the battery cut-off switch is located above the battery.
Reference 240-25-011, Designation of Parts Shown in Functional

Schematic and Harness Diagram
DEFINITIONS:
A05 Left speaker (SE09; W19)
A06 Right speaker (SE09; W19)
A29 Seat with compressor and heater (SE04; W08)
A47 Reverse drive lever without "N" indicator light (SE26; W08)
A60 Radio (SE09; W19)
A61 Bus terminating resistor (SE22; W19)
A62 Bus terminating resistor with power supply (SE22; W08)
A64 Basic control unit (BCU) (SE15, SE16; W08)
A67 Electronic PowrQuad Controller (EPC) (SE26; W08)
A68/1 Reverse drive lever with "N" indicator light (SE26; W08)
A68/2 Reverse drive lever with "N" indicator light (SE26; W08)
B01 Rev counter sender (SE16F; W02)
B02 Restricted air cleaner indicator sender (SE02; W02)
B03 Fuel gauge sender (SE02; W28)
B04 Engine oil pressure sender (SE02; W02)
B06 Rear PTO speed sender (SE16F; W30)
B07 Oil filter warning light sender (SE02; W28)
B08 Coolant temperature gauge sender (SE02; W02)
B14 Thermostat switch (SE10; W19)
B15 Pressure switch (SE10; W19)
B19 Right draft sensor (SE15; W30)
B20 Left draft sensor (SE15; W30)
B21 Position sensor for hitch control (SE15; W30)
B26 Height sensitivity potentiometer (SE15; W08)
B27 Position feedback unit for hitch control (SE15; W08)
B28/LH Left door switch (for dome light) (SE09; W19)
B29 Low-temperature switch (SE02; W28)
B30 High-temperature switch (SE02; W28)
B31 Transmission oil pressure sender (SE02; W28)
B35 Wheel speed sender (SE16F; W30)
B36 Neutral start switch (SE01; W28)
B37 Handbrake switch (SE16J; W08)
B39 Radar sensor (SE16F; W28)
B58 Front PTO speed sender (SE16F; W07)
B60 Transmission oil temperature sender (SE02; W28)
B65 Clutch pedal potentiometer (SE26; W13)
B104 Transmission speed sender (SE26; W28)
B105 Enable pressure sender (SE26; W28)
B111 Hydraulic oil filter sender (SE02; W28)
B112 Brake switch (SE16J; W08)
B142 Sending unit for cold-weather starting control (SE16G; W02)
D31 Diode for electrical starting aid (SE01B; W01)
E01 Right headlight (SE06A; W04)
E02 Left headlight (SE06A; W04)
E03 Left clearance light (SE06A; W19)
E04 Right clearance light (SE06A; W19)
E05 Cigarette lighter (SE04; W08)
E07 Left cab frame worklight (SE06D; W20)
E08 Right cab frame worklight (SE06D; W20)
E09/L Worklight at left front corner (SE07; W04)
E09/R Worklight at right front corner (SE07; W04)
E11/1L Inner left worklight at rear of cab roof (SE07; W22)
E11/1R Inner right worklight at rear of cab roof (SE07; W22)
E11/2L Outer left worklight at rear of cab roof (SE07; W22)
E11/2R Outer right worklight at rear of cab roof (SE07; W22)
E13 Left tail light (SE06A; W08)
E14 Right tail light (SE06A; W08)
E18/1L Inner left worklight at front of cab roof (SE07; W21)
E18/1R Inner right worklight at front of cab roof (SE07; W21)
E18/2L Outer left worklight at front of cab roof (SE07; W21)
E18/2R Outer right worklight at front of cab roof (SE7; W21)
E20/R Right cab frame worklight (SE06C; W20)
E20/L Left cab frame worklight (SE06C; W20)
DEFINITIONS:
E21/1 License plate light (on left) (SE06A; W08)
E21/2 License plate light (on right) (SE06A; W08)
E27 Beacon light (SE13; W19)
E29 Dome light (SE09; W19)
E30 Shift console light (SE09; W19)
E32 Background lighting for pressure gauge (SE09; W08)
F03/01 Fuse (SE06A; W08)
F03/02 Fuse (SE06A; W08)
F03/03 Fuse (SE06A; W08)
F03/04 Fuse (SE06A; W08)
F03/05 Fuse (SE07; W08)
F03/06 Fuse (SE07; W08)
F03/07 Fuse (SE07; W08)
F03/08 Fuse (SE07; W08)
F03/09 Fuse (SE07; W08)
F03/10 Fuse (SE06C; W08)
F03/11 Fuse (SE06D; W08)
F03/12 Fuse (SE06D; W08)
F03/13 Fuse (SE06B, SE6C; W08)
F03/14 Fuse (SE06B, SE6C; W08)
F03/15 Fuse (SE06D; W08)
F03/16 Fuse (SE06D; W08)
F04/01 Fuse (SE14; W08)
F04/02 Fuse (SE14; W08)
F04/03 Fuse (SE1A; W08)
F04/04 Fuse (SE02; W08)
F04/05 Fuse (SE02; W08)
F04/06 Fuse (SE18; W08)
F04/08 Fuse (SE16H; W08)
F04/09 Fuse (SE16, SE26; W08)
F04/10 Fuse (SE16E; W08)
F04/11 Fuse (SE16E; W08)
F04/12 Fuse (SE06A; W08)
F04/13 Fuse (SE18; W08)
F04/16 Fuse (SE16H; W08)
F05/01 Fuse (SE16J; W08)
F05/02 Fuse (SE22; W08)
F05/04 Fuse (SE26; W08)
F05/05 Fuse (SE26; W08)
F05/06 Fuse (SE26; W08)
F05/09 Fuse (SE01; W08)
F05/10 Fuse (SE01; W08)
F05/11 Fuse (SE01; W08)
F05/12 Fuse (SE01; W08)
F06/01 Fuse (SE10; W08)
F06/02 Fuse (SE10; W08)
F06/03 Fuse (SE10; W08)
F06/04 Fuse (SE11A, SE11B; W08)
F06/05 Fuse (SE12; W08)
F06/06 Fuse (SE08; W08)
F06/07 Fuse (SE13; W08)
F06/08 Fuse (SE9; W08)
F06/09 Fuse (SE09; W08)
F06/10 Fuse (SE03; W08)
F06/11 Fuse (SE04; W08)
F06/12 Fuse (SE04; W08)
F06/13 Fuse tester (SE16H; W08)
F06/15 Fuse (SE09; W08)
F09 Fuse (SE01B; W01)
F11 Fuse (SE01B; W01)
F13 Fuse (SE01; W01 )
F14 Fuse (SE01; W01 )
F25 Fuse (SE01; W42)
G01 Battery (SE01; W01)
G02 Alternator (SE01; W01, W02)
H01 Horn (SE03; W02)
DEFINITIONS:
H09 Front-wheel drive indicator light (SE16C; W08)
H17 Differential lock indicator light (SE16D; W08)
H19 Front PTO indicator light (SE16B; W08)
H32 Left brake light (SE16J; W08)
H33 Right brake light (SE16J; W08)
H34 Left front turn signal (SE16E; W20)
H35 Left rear turn signal (SE16E; W08)
H42 Right front turn signal (SE16E; W20)
H43 Right rear turn signal (SE16E; W08)
H55 Rear PTO preselector indicator light (SE16A; W08)
H56 Rear PTO indicator light (SE16A; W08)
H77 Indicator light for electrical starting aid (SE01B; W08)
H82 Indicator light for HMS (SE16G; W08)
H83 Indicator light for program 1 (SE16G; W08)
H84 Indicator light for program 2 (SE16G; W08)
K01 Starting motor relay (SE01; W01)
K01/1 Accessory relay (SE01; W08)
K01/2 Electronic power supply relay (SE01; W08)
K01/3 Accessory relay (SE01; W08)
K01/4 Acoustic alarm (SE16H; W08)
K02/1 Low-beam headlight relay (SE06A; W08)
K02/2 High-beam headlight relay (SE06A; W08)
K02/3 Relay for front cab roof worklight (SE07; W08)
K02/4 Relay for rear cab roof worklight (SE07; W08)
K02/5 Relay for front corner worklights (SE07; W08)
K02/6 Relay for worklights or headlights (SE06C, SE06D; W08)
K02/7 Relay for light on cab frame (SE06D; W08)
K07/1 Diode for power supply to electronics (SE01; W08)
K07/1 Diode for low-beam and high-beam headlights (SE06A; W08)
K07/2 Diode for hazard warning lights (SE22; W08)
K07/3 Fuel preheater relay (SE01A; W08)
K07/4 Transmission enable relay (SE26; W08)
K07/5 Alternator relay (SE16G; W08)
K07/6 Relay for cold-weather starting aid (SE16G; W08)
K08/1 Air conditioner relay (SE10; W08)
K08/2 Fan relay (SE10; W08)
K08/3 Relay for 3-terminal power outlet socket (SE14; W08)
K08/4 Plug for "come-home" feature (SE26; W08)
K24 Injection pump shut-off valve (SE01; W02)
K26 Intermittent wipe relay (SE11A; W18)
K36 Diode for electrical starting aid (SE01B; W01)
K48 [ Relay for battery cut-off switch (version 1) (SE01; W42) Option ]
K50 [ Battery cut-off relay (version 1) (SE01; W01, W42) Option ]
K56 [ Battery cut-off relay (version 2) (SE01; W01, W42) Option ]
K57 [ Relay for battery cut-off switch (version 1) (SE01; W42) Option ]
M01 Starting motor (SE01; W02)

M02 Compressor clutch (SE10; W02)
M03 Windshield wiper motor (SE11A, SE11B; W08)
M04 Rear window wiper motor (SE12; W19)
M05 Windshield washer pump (SE11A, SE11B; W08)
M06 Rear window washer pump (SE12; W08)
M07 Fan motor (SE10; W19)
M08 Stepper motor for hitch control (SE15; W30)
M10 Fan motor (SE10; W19)
P11 Basic informator (BIF) (SE02; W08)
P15 Performance monitor (PRF) (SE18; W19)
P21 Instrument panel (SE02; W08)
R02 Fuel preheater heating element (SE01A; W02)
R15 Heating element for electrical starting aid (SE01B; W01)
R18 Fan resistors (SE10; W19)
R19 Terminating resistor (SE16G; W08)
S01 Main (key) switch (SE01; W08)
S04 Horn button (SE03; W08)
S05 [ Front-wheel drive switch (SE16C; W08) Tractors with HMS ]
S06 Front PTO switch (SE16B; W08)

S08 Turn-signal switch (SE16E; W08)
DEFINITIONS:
S08/1 Left turn-signal switch (SE16E; W17)
S08/2 Right turn-signal switch (SE16E; W17)
S09 Light switch (SE06A; W08)
S10 High/low-beam switch (SE06A; W08, W17)
S10/1 1-pin plug, switch for low and high-beam headlights (SE06A; W08, W17)
S11 Worklight switch (SE06C; SE06D; W19)
S14 Fan switch (SE10; W19)
S15 Windshield wiper switch (SE11A; W08)
S16 Windshield washer switch (SE11A; W08)
S21 Rear PTO switch (SE16A; W08)
S22 Differential lock switch (SE16D; W08)
S23 Right external control switch (SE15; W08)
S24 Switch for quick withdrawal (SE15; W08)
S28 Air-conditioner switch (SE10; W19)
S30 Flash-to-pass switch (SE06A; W17)
S32 Digital instrument set switch (SE02; W08)
S35 Dome light switch (SE09; W19)
S36 Beacon light switch (SE13; W19)
S40 Seat switch (SE16A; W08)
S43 Headland Management System switch (SE16G; W08)
S44 L.h. switch for external control of PTO (SE16A; W08)
S45 PTO preselector switch (SE16A; W08)
S59 Front corner worklight switch (SE07; W19)
S62 Hazard warning light switch (SE16E; W08)
S63 [ Front-wheel drive switch (SE16C; W08) Tractors without HMS ]
S68 Left external control switch (SE15; W08)

S72 Clutch switch (SE26; W13)
S81 Gear selector switch (SE26; W08)
S92/1 Switch for front cab roof worklight (SE07; W19)
S92/2 Switch for rear cab roof worklight (SE07; W19)
S95 Record/save switch (SE16G; W08)
S100 Program switch (SE16G; W08)
S106 Hazard warning light switch (SE16E; W08)
S114 Park switch (SE26; W08)
S117 [ Battery cut-off switch (version 1) (SE01; W42) Option ]
S120 Rear window washer switch (SE12; W08)

S121 R.h. switch for external control of PTO (SE16A; W08)
S122 Windshield wiper switch (SE11B; W18)
S125 [ Battery cut-off switch (version 2) (SE01; W42) Option ]
W25 Radio antenna (SE9; W19)

X14/1 8-pin plug for position feedback unit of hitch control (W08)
X14/2 3-pin plug for height sensitivity potentiometer (W08)
X25 26-pin plug for r.h. end of basic informator (W08)
X26 26-pin plug for l.h. end of basic informator (W08)
X28 2-pin plug for air-conditioner pressure switch (W19)
X30 4-pin plug for radar sensor (W28)
X34 6-pin plug for right external control (W08)
X35 6-pin plug for left external control (W08)
X43 4-pin plug for rear window wiper motor (W19)
X44 2-pin plug for rear window washer pump (W08)
X48 6-pin plug for fan resistors (W19)
DEFINITIONS:
X67 3-pin plug for right headlight (W04)
X68 3-pin plug for left headlight (W04)
X69/1 2-pin plug for worklight at right front corner (W04)
X69/2 2-pin plug for worklight at left front corner (W04)
X76 2-pin plug for sending unit for rev counter (W02)
X79 3-pin plug (fuel preheater element connection point; W02)
X81 1-pin plug for low-temperature switch (W28)
X82 Terminal with ring for high-temperature switch (W28)
X87 2-pin plug for differential lock solenoid valve (W30)
X88 2-pin plug for wheel speed sender (W30)
X89 3-pin plug for left draft sensor (W30)
X90 3-pin plug for right draft sensor (W30)
X91 2-pin plug for front-wheel drive solenoid valve (W28)
X92 4-pin plug for hitch control stepper motor (W30)
X94 2-pin plug for rear PTO speed sender (W30)
X95 2-pin plug for rear PTO solenoid valve (W30)
X96 3-pin plug for hitch control position sensor (W30)
X99 3-pin plug for beacon light switch (W19)
X100 6-pin plug for fan switch (W19)
X113/1 2-pin plug for license plate light (on left) (W08)
X113/2 2-pin plug for license plate light (on right) (W08)
X114/1F1 2-pin plug for outer right worklight on rear of cab roof (W22)
X114/1F2 2-pin plug for inner right worklight on rear of cab roof (W22)
X114/2F1 2-pin plug for outer left worklight on rear of cab roof (W22)
X114/2F2 2-pin plug for inner left worklight on rear of cab roof (W22)
X122 2-pin plug for differential lock switch (W08)
X125 3-pin plug for rear PTO switch (W08)
X128 2-pin plug for cigarette lighter (W08)
X130 1-pin plug for air-conditioner compressor clutch (W02)
X132 7-terminal signal socket (SE17; W08)
X155 2-pin plug for right cab frame worklight (W20)
X156 2-pin plug for left cab frame worklight (W20)
X166 2-pin plug for front PTO solenoid (W07)
X167 2-pin plug for front PTO speed sending unit (W07)
DEFINITIONS:
X174 3-pin plug for l.h. switch for external control of PTO (W08)
X230 2-pin plug for seat switch (W08)
X239 3-pin plug (connecting point for 3-terminal power outlet socket and power outlet socket strip; W08, W14)
X242 3-pin plug for HMS switch (W08)
X243 3-pin plug for PTO preselector switch (W08)
X245 3-pin plug for front-wheel drive switch (W08)
X304 Multiple power-outlet socket strip
X307 2-pin plug for transmission oil temperature sender (W28)
X311 2-pin plug for front PTO indicator light (W08)
X311/1 1-pin plug for rear PTO preselector indicator light (W08)
X324 8-pin plug for brake switch (W08)
X402 2-pin plug, switch for front corner worklights (W19)
X433/1 3-pin plug (connection point, r.h. worklight on rear of cab roof; W19, W22)
X433/2 3-pin plug (connection point, l.h. worklight on rear of cab roof; W19, W22)
X434/1 3-pin plug (connection point, r.h. worklight on front of cab roof; W19, W21)
X434/2 3-pin plug (connection point, l.h. worklight on front of cab roof; W19, W21)
X440 3-pin plug for record/save switch (W08)
X442 6-pin plug (connecting point for turn signal and clearance lights, right; W19, W20)
X452/1F1 2-pin plug for outer right worklight on front of cab roof (W21)
X452/1F2 2-pin plug for inner right worklight on front of cab roof (W21)
X452/2F1 2-pin plug for outer left worklight on front of cab roof (W21)
X452/2F2 2-pin plug for inner left worklight on front of cab roof (W21)
X471 4-pin plug for program switch (W08)
X472/1 4-pin plug, switch for worklights on rear of cab roof (W19)
X472/2 4-pin plug, switch for worklights on front of cab roof (W19)
X486 10-pin plug (performance monitor connection point; W19)
X488 2-pin plug for operator′s seat (W08)
X546 4-pin plug for hydraulic oil filter sender (W28)
X547 10-pin plug (starting aid connection point; W01, W02)
X571 9-pin service plug (SE17; W08)
X575 2-pin plug for fuel pump, version 1 (W02)
X575/1 1-pin plug for fuel pump, version 2 (W02)
X575/2 1-pin plug for fuel pump, version 2 (W02)
DEFINITIONS:
X579 2 terminals for indicator light of electrical starting aid (W08)
X584 3-pin plug for dome light (W19)
X585 2-pin plug for console light (W19)
X593 [ 4-pin plug for battery cut-off switch (version 1) (W42) Option ]
X612 8-pin plug for speakers (W19)

X613 8-pin plug for radio (W19)
X620 5-pin plug for the switch of the rear window washer (W08)
X623 3-pin plug for r.h. switch for external control of PTO (W08)
X649 2-pin plug for sending unit of cold weather starting control (W02)
X650 2-pin plug for solenoid valve of cold weather starting control (W02)
4-pin plug (connecting point - access-step light and battery cut-off switch (W35) to battery cut-off switch
X697
harness (W42))
XGND2 Ground point
XGND10 Cab roof ground point (W19)
XGND54 Ground point for wipers (W23)
XGND55 Ground point for battery
XGND57 Ground point for battery cut-off relay (W42)
Y01 Front PTO solenoid valve (SE16B; W07)
Y02 Fuel transfer pump (SE01; W02)
Y03 Front-wheel drive solenoid valve (SE16C; W28)
Y04 Rear PTO solenoid valve (SE16A; W30)
Y05 Differential lock solenoid valve (SE16D; W30)
Y32 K3 solenoid valve (SE26; W28)
Y33 Forward solenoid valve (SE26; W28)
Y36 Reverse solenoid valve (SE26; W28)
Y38 Proportional valve for enable signal (SE26; W28)
Y52 Solenoid valve for cold-weather starting aid (SE16G; W02)
Y64 Front PTO solenoid valve (SE16B; W07)
Reference 240-25-012, Designation of Sections Shown in Functional
Schematic
DEFINITIONS:
SE1 Starting motor and charging circuit
SE2 Instrument unit/basic informator
SE3 Horn
SE4 Cigarette lighter and operator′s seat
SE6 Lights
SE7 Worklights
SE9 Radio, dome and console lights
SE10 Fan and air-conditioning system
DEFINITIONS:
SE11 Windshield wiper and washer
SE12 Rear window wiper and washer
SE13 Beacon light
SE14 3- and 7-terminal power outlet sockets
SE15 Electronic rockshaft control
SE16 Basic control unit (BCU)
SE17 Signal socket and service plug
SE18 Performance monitor (PowrQuad Plus transmission)
SE22 BUS terminator and terminating resistor (PowrQuad Plus transmission)
SE26 Transmission control (PowrQuad Plus transmission)
Reference 240-25-013, Wiring Harness Designations
DEFINITIONS:
W01 Power supply and starting aid harness
W02 Engine harness
W04 Headlight harness
W07 Front PTO harness
W08 Cab harness
W13 Clutch sender harness
W14 3-terminal power outlet socket harness
W18 Windshield wiper switch harness
W19 Cab roof and fan wiring harness
W20 Turn signal and clearance light harness
W21 Harness for worklights at front of cab roof
W22 Harness for worklights at rear of cab roof
W23 Windshield wiper harness
W28 Harness at front end of transmission
W30 Harness at rear end of transmission
W31 Harness for 7-terminal power outlet socket
W42 Battery cut-off switch harness
W46 Front PTO adapter harness
Reference 240-25-014, Functional Schematic (Complete Tractor)

Functional schematic, complete tractor (SE1 with version 1 of battery cut-off switch)
Functional schematic SE1
Functional schematic, complete tractor (SE1 with version 2 of battery cut-off switch)
Functional schematic SE1A and SE1B (cont.)
Functional schematic SE1A, SE1B
Functional schematic (SE2; PowrQuad transmission) (cont.)
Functional schematic SE2; PowrQuad transmission
Functional schematic (SE2; PowrQuad transmission) (cont.)
Functional schematic SE2; PowrQuad transmission (cont.)
Functional schematic (SE2; PowrQuad Plus transmission) (cont.)
Functional schematic SE2; PowrQuad Plus transmission
Functional schematic (SE2; PowrQuad Plus transmission) (cont.)
Functional schematic SE2; PowrQuad Plus transmission (cont.)
Functional schematic SE3 and SE4 (cont.)
Functional schematic SE3 and SE4
Functional schematic SE6A and SE6B (cont.)
Functional schematic SE6A and SE6B
Functional schematic SE6C and SE6D (cont.)
Functional schematic SE6C, SE6D
Functional schematic SE7, SE8 and SE9 (cont.)
Functional schematic SE7, SE8 and SE9
Functional schematic SE10, SE11A and SE11B (cont.)
Functional schematic SE10, SE11A and SE11B
Functional schematic SE12, SE13 and SE14 (cont.)
Functional schematic SE12, SE13 and SE14
Functional Schematic-Cont. (SE15)
SE15 Schematic
Functional schematic SE16A, SE16B, SE16C and SE16D (cont.)
Functional schematic SE16A, SE16B, SE16C and SE16D
Functional schematic SE16E and SE16F (cont.)
Functional schematic SE16E and SE16F
Functional schematic SE16G and SE16H (cont.)
Functional schematic SE16G and SE16H
Functional schematic SE16J and SE17 (cont.)
Functional schematic SE16J and SE17
Functional schematic SE18 and SE22 (cont.)
Functional schematic SE18 and SE22
Functional schematic (SE26; PowrQuad Plus transmission up to serial no. 409632) (cont.)
Functional schematic (SE26; PowrQuad Plus transmission up to serial no. 409632) (cont.)
Functional schematic SE26 (cont.)
Functional schematic (SE26; PowrQuad Plus transmission from serial no. 409633) (cont.)
Functional schematic (SE26; PowrQuad Plus transmission from serial no. 409633) (cont.)
Functional schematic (SE26; PowrQuad Plus transmission from serial no. XXXXXX) (cont.)
Functional schematic (SE26; PowrQuad Plus transmission from serial no. XXXXXX) (cont.)
Section 240 - ELECTRICAL SYSTEM Group 26: Summary of Wiring Harnesses
Group 26 - Summary of Wiring Harnesses

Reference 240-26-001, Wiring Harnesses for Tractors with PowrQuad
Transmission — Summary of References
The wiring harnesses for tractors with PowrQuad transmission are dealt with at the following references:
Reference 240-26-011 , ”W01 — Wiring Harness - Power Supply and Starting Aid”
Reference 240-26-021 , ”W02 — Wiring Harness - Engine”
Reference 240-26-041 , ”W04 — Wiring Harness - Headlights”
Reference 240-26-072 , ”W07 — Wiring Harness - Front PTO”
Reference 240-26-081 , ”W08 — Wiring Harness - Cab, for Tractors with PowrQuad Transmission”
Reference 240-26-141 , ”W14 — Wiring Harness - 3-Terminal Power Outlet Socket”
Reference 240-26-191 , ”W19 — Wiring Harness - Cab Roof and Fan”
Reference 240-26-201 , ”W20 — Wiring Harness - Turn Signal and Clearance Lights”
Reference 240-26-211 , ”W21 — Wiring Harness - Worklights on Cab Roof, Adapter”
Reference 240-26-231 , ”W23 — Wiring Harness - Windshield Wiper, with Hinged Windshield”
Reference 240-26-281 , ”W28 — Wiring Harness - Front End of Transmission, for Tractors with PowrQuad Transmission”
Reference 240-26-301 , ”W30 — Wiring Harness - Rear End of Transmission”
Reference 240-26-421 , ”W42 — Wiring Harness - Battery Cut-Off Switch, Version 1”
W42 — Wiring Harness - Battery Cut-Off Switch, Version 2
Reference 240-26-461 , ”W46 — Wiring Harness - Front PTO, Adapter”

Transmission from Serial No. 436758 — Summary of References
The wiring harnesses for tractors with PowrQuad transmission from serial no. 436758 are dealt with at the following references:
W01 — Wiring Harness - Power Supply and Starting Aid from Serial No. 436764
Reference 240-26-021 , "W02 — Wiring Harness - Engine”
Reference 240-26-041 , "W04 — Wiring Harness - Headlights”
Reference 240-26-072 , "W07 — Wiring Harness - Front PTO”
W08 — Wiring Harness - Cab for Tractors with PowrQuad Transmission from Serial No. 436758
Reference 240-26-141 , "W14 — Wiring Harness - 3-Terminal Power Outlet Socket”
Reference 240-26-191 , "W19 — Wiring Harness - Cab Roof and Fan”
Reference 240-26-201 , "W20 — Wiring Harness - Turn Signal and Clearance Lights”
Reference 240-26-211 , "W21 — Wiring Harness - Worklights on Cab Roof, Adapter”
Reference 240-26-231 , "W23 — Wiring Harness - Windshield Wiper, with Hinged Windshield”
W28 — Front Transmission Wiring Harness for Tractors with PowrQuad Transmission from Serial No. 431378
Reference 240-26-301 , "W30 — Wiring Harness - Rear End of Transmission”
W42 — Wiring Harness - Battery Cut-Off Switch (Version 2)

Plus Transmission — Summary of References
The wiring harnesses for tractors with PowrQuad Plus transmission are dealt with at the following references:
Reference 240-26-011 , ”W01 — Wiring Harness - Power Supply and Starting Aid”
Reference 240-26-021 , ”W02 — Wiring Harness - Engine”
Reference 240-26-041 , ”W04 — Wiring Harness - Headlights”
Reference 240-26-072 , ”W07 — Wiring Harness - Front PTO”
Reference 240-26-082 , ”W08 — Wiring Harness - Cab, for Tractors with PowrQuad Plus Transmission”
Reference 240-26-131 , ”W13 — Wiring Harness - Clutch Sender”
Reference 240-26-141 , ”W14 — Wiring Harness - 3-Terminal Power Outlet Socket”
Reference 240-26-181 , ”W18 — Wiring Harness - Windshield Wiper Switch, Without Intermittent Wipe”
Reference 240-26-182 , ”W18 — Wiring Harness - Windshield Wiper Switch, With Intermittent Wipe”
Reference 240-26-191 , ”W19 — Wiring Harness - Cab Roof and Fan”
Reference 240-26-201 , ”W20 — Wiring Harness - Turn Signal and Clearance Lights”
Reference 240-26-211 , ”W21 — Wiring Harness - Worklights on Cab Roof, Adapter”
Reference 240-26-231 , ”W23 — Wiring Harness - Windshield Wiper, with Hinged Windshield”
Reference 240-26-282 , ”W28 — Wiring Harness - Front End of Transmission, for Tractors with PowrQuad Plus Transmission”
Reference 240-26-301 , ”W30 — Wiring Harness - Rear End of Transmission”
Reference 240-26-421 , ”W42 — Wiring Harness - Battery Cut-Off Switch, Version 1”
W42 — Wiring Harness - Battery Cut-Off Switch, Version 2
Section 240 - ELECTRICAL SYSTEM Group 26A: Wiring Harnesses

Plus Transmission from Serial No. 424816 - Summary of References
The wiring harnesses for tractors with PowrQuad Plus transmission from serial no. 424816 are dealt with at the following
references:
W01 - Power supply and starting aid harness from serial no. 436764
Reference 240-26-021 , “W02 - Wiring Harness - Engine”
Reference 240-26-041 , “W04 - Wiring Harness - Headlights”
Reference 240-26-072 , “W07 - Wiring Harness - Front PTO”
W08/1 - Cab harness, for tractors with PowrQuad Plus transmission, from serial no. 434662
Reference 240-26-131 , “W13 - Wiring Harness - Clutch Sender”
Reference 240-26-141 , “W14 - Wiring Harness - 3-Terminal Power Outlet Socket”
Reference 240-26-181 , “W18 - Wiring Harness - Windshield Wiper Switch, Without Intermittent Wipe”
Reference 240-26-182 , “W18 - Wiring Harness - Windshield Wiper Switch, With Intermittent Wipe”
Reference 240-26-191 , “W19 - Wiring Harness - Cab Roof and Fan”
Reference 240-26-201 , “W20 - Wiring Harness - Turn Signal and Clearance Lights”
Reference 240-26-211 , “W21 - Wiring Harness - Worklights on Cab Roof, Adapter”
Reference 240-26-231 , “W23 - Wiring Harness - Windshield Wiper, with Hinged Windshield”
W28/1 - Harness at front end of transmission, for tractors with PowrQuad Plus transmission, from serial no. 424816
Reference 240-26-301 , “W30 - Wiring Harness - Rear End of Transmission”
W42 - Wiring harness, battery cut-off switch (version 2)
Group 26A - Wiring Harnesses

Reference 240-26-011, W01 — Wiring Harness - Power Supply and
Starting Aid
W01 - Power supply and starting aid harness
D31
D31 Diode
D31
Terminal number Wire no. and cross section Color of wire To plug or component
A .......... 310XD-1 .......... black .......... K36-2
E .......... 395XB-1 .......... dark green .......... K36-1
F09
F09 Fuse for heater element (electrical starting aid)
F09
A .......... 002XD-10 .......... red .......... F14-E, F13-E, K01-3, G01+, G02-30
E .......... 352X-10 .......... red .......... K36-4
F11
F11 Fuse for electrical starting aid
F11
A .......... 342XB-1 .......... red .......... K36-3
E .......... 362X-1 .......... red .......... X547-C
F13
F13 Main fuse
F13
A .......... 042UJ-10 .......... red .......... X473-2
E .......... 002XC-10 .......... red .......... F14-E, F09-A, K01-3, G01+, G02-30
F14
F14 Main fuse
F14
A .......... 012UI-10 .......... red .......... X473-1
E .......... 002XB-10 .......... red .......... F13-E, F09-A, K01-3, G01+, G02-30
G01
G01 Terminal with ring, for positive terminal of battery
G01
+ .......... 002XF-25 .......... red .......... F14-E, F13-E, F09-A, K01-3, G02-30
G02
G02 Terminal with ring, for alternator
G02
30 .......... 002XG-25 .......... red .......... F14-E, F13-E, F09-A, K01-3, G01+
K01
K01 Starting motor relay
K01
1 .......... 506X-1.5 .......... light blue .......... X547-A
2 .......... 310XB-1.5 .......... black .......... X547-D, K36-2
3 .......... 002XE-2.5 .......... red .......... F14-E, F13-E, F09-A, G01+, G02-30
4 .......... 309X-2.5 .......... white .......... M01-50
K36
K36 Relay for Electrical Starting Aid
K36
1 .......... 355XA-1 .......... dark green .......... X547-B
1 .......... 395XB-1 .......... dark green .......... D31-E
2 .......... 310XA-1 .......... black .......... K01-2, X547-D
2 .......... 310XD-1 .......... black .......... D31-A
3 .......... 342XA-10 .......... red .......... R15-A
3 .......... 342XB-1 .......... red .......... F11-A
4 .......... 352X-10 .......... red .......... F09-E
M01
M01 Terminal with ring, for starting motor
M01
50 .......... 309X-2.5 .......... white .......... K01-4
R15
R15 Terminal with ring, heating element for electrical starting aid
R15
A .......... 342XA-10 .......... red .......... K36-3
X473
X473 2-pin plug — Connection point for power supply and starting aid wiring harness (W08)
X473
1 .......... 012UI-10 .......... red .......... F14-A
2 .......... 042UJ-10 .......... red .......... F13-A
X547
X547
A .......... 506X-1.5 .......... light blue .......... K01-1
B .......... 355XA-1 .......... dark green .......... K36-1
C .......... 362X-1 .......... red .......... F11-E
D .......... 310XC-1.5 .......... black .......... K01-2, K36-2
Reference 240-26-021, W02 - Wiring Harness - Engine
W02 - Engine wiring harness
G02
G02 Alternator
G2
D+ .......... 306C-1 .......... light blue .......... X450-15
K24
K24 Terminal with ring, for injection pump shut-off valve
K24
A .......... 322CB-1 .......... red .......... X450-21, X575-1
X02
X02 4-pin plug — Connection point for front PTO wiring harness (W07)
X02
A .......... 301C-1 .......... brown .......... X450-34
B .......... 531CA-1 .......... brown .......... X450-35
C .......... 607C-1 .......... purple .......... X450-26
D .......... 310CV-1 .......... black .......... XGND9, X547-D, X79-B, X650-B, X575-2
X66/1
X66/1 1-pin plug for horn
X66/1
A .......... 903CC-1 .......... orange .......... X450-16, X411-H
X66/2
X66/2 1-pin plug for horn
X66/2
A .......... 310CZ-1 .......... black .......... XGND9
X70/1
X70/1 1-pin plug, sending unit for air cleaner restriction warning light
X70/1
A .......... 310CQ-1 .......... black .......... XGND9
X70/2
X70/2 1-pin plug, sending unit for air cleaner restriction warning light
X70/2
A .......... 351C-1 .......... brown .......... X450-13
X76
X76 2-pin plug, engine speed sender
X76
A .......... 325C-1 .......... dark green .......... X450-9
B .......... 531CB-1 .......... brown .......... X450-10
X78
X78 1-pin plug, sending unit for engine oil pressure warning light
X78
A .......... 347C-1 .......... purple .......... X450-12
X79
X79 2-pin plug for fuel preheater element
X79
A .......... 264C-2.5 .......... yellow .......... X450-8
B .......... 310CX-2.5 .......... black .......... XGND9, X547-D, X02-D, X650-B, X575-2
X130
X130 1-pin plug for air conditioner compressor clutch
X130
A .......... 215C-1 .......... dark green .......... X450-25
X262
X262 2-pin plug for sending unit of coolant temperature gauge
X262
A .......... 329C-1 .......... white .......... X450-11
B .......... 050C-1 .......... black .......... X450-39
X305
X305 1-pin plug for voltage-to-ground on radiator
X305
A .......... 310CP-2.5 .......... black .......... XGND9
X411
X411 8-pin plug — Connection point for headlight wiring harness (W04)
X411
A .......... 111C-1 .......... brown .......... X450-20
B .......... 114C-1 .......... yellow .......... X450-33
C .......... 124C-1 .......... yellow .......... X450-4
D .......... 139CE-1 .......... white .......... X450-32, X411-E
E .......... 139CF-1 .......... white .......... X450-32, X411-D
F .......... 310CU-1 .......... black .......... XGND9
G .......... 310CT-1 .......... black .......... XGND9
H .......... 903CB-1 .......... orange .......... X450-16, X66/1-A
X450
X450 42-pin plug, connecting point for engine wiring harness (W08)
X450
1 .......... not used
2 .......... not used
3 .......... 385C-1 .......... dark green .......... X547-B
4 .......... 124C-1 .......... yellow .......... X411-C
5 .......... not used
6 .......... not used
7 .......... 506C-1.5 .......... light blue .......... X547-A
8 .......... 264C-2.5 .......... yellow .......... X79-A
9 .......... 325C-1 .......... dark green .......... X76-A
10 .......... 531CB-1 .......... brown .......... X76-B
11 .......... 329C-1 .......... white .......... X262-A
12 .......... 347C-1 .......... purple .......... X78-A
13 .......... 351C-1 .......... brown .......... X70/2-A
14 .......... 333C-1 .......... orange .......... X649-B
15 .......... 306C-1 .......... light blue .......... G02-D+
16 .......... 903CA-1 .......... orange .......... X411-H, X66/1-A
17 .......... 362C-1 .......... red .......... X547-C
18 .......... not used
19 .......... not used
20 .......... 111C-1 .......... brown .......... X411-A
21 .......... 322CA-1 .......... red .......... K24, X575-1
22 .......... not used
23 .......... not used
24 .......... not used
25 .......... 215C-1 .......... dark green .......... X130-A
26 .......... 607C-1 .......... purple .......... X02-C
27 .......... not used
28 .......... not used
29 .......... not used
30 .......... not used
31 .......... not used
32 .......... 139CA-1 .......... white .......... X411-D, X411-E
33 .......... 114C-1 .......... yellow .......... X411-B
34 .......... 301C-1 .......... brown .......... X02-A
35 .......... 531CA-1 .......... brown .......... X02-B
36 .......... not used
37 .......... not used
38 .......... not used
39 .......... 050C-1 .......... black .......... X262-B
40 .......... not used
41 .......... not used
42 .......... not used
X547
X547
A .......... 506C-1.5 .......... light blue .......... X450-7
B .......... 385C-1 .......... dark green .......... X450-3
C .......... 362C-1 .......... red .......... X450-17
D .......... 310CR-1.5 .......... black .......... XGND9, X02-D, X79-B, X650-B, X575-2
X575
X575 2-pin plug for fuel pump, version 1
X575
1 .......... 322CC-1 .......... red .......... X450-21, K24
2 .......... 310CI-1 .......... black .......... XGND9, X547-D, X02-D, X79-B, X650-B
X575/1
X575/1 1-pin plug for fuel pump, version 2
X575
1 .......... 310CI-1 .......... black .......... XGND9, X547-D, X02-D, X79-B, X650-B
X575/2
X575/2 1-pin plug for fuel pump, version 2
X575
1 .......... 322CC-1 .......... red .......... X450-21, K24
X649
X649 2-pin plug for cold-weather starting aid sending unit
X649
A .......... 334C-1 .......... yellow .......... X650-A
B .......... 333C-1 .......... orange .......... X450-14
X650
X650 2-pin plug for cold-weather starting aid solenoid valve
X650
A .......... 334C-1 .......... yellow .......... X649-A
B .......... 310CW-1 .......... black .......... XGND9, X547-D, X02-D, X79-B, X575-2
XGND9
XGND9 Ground point
XGND9
(-) .......... 310CB-4 .......... black .......... X547-D, X02-D, X79-B, X650-B, X575-2
(-) .......... 310CP-2.5 .......... black .......... X305-A
(-) .......... 310CQ-1 .......... black .......... X70/1-A
(-) .......... 310CT-1 .......... black .......... X411-G
(-) .......... 310CU-1 .......... black .......... X411-F
(-) .......... 310CZ-1 .......... black .......... X66/2-A
Reference 240-26-041, W04 — Wiring Harness - Headlights
W04 - Harness for headlights, with worklights on front corner
W04 - Headlight wiring harness
X67
X67 3-pin plug, for r.h. headlight
X67
A .......... 139VB-1 .......... white .......... X411-D
B .......... 114V-1 .......... yellow .......... X411-B
C .......... 310VG-1 .......... black .......... X69/2-B, X69/1-B, X68-C, X411-F, X411-G
X68
X68 3-pin plug, for l.h. headlight
X68
A .......... 139VA-1 .......... white .......... X411-E
B .......... 124V-1 .......... yellow .......... X411-C
C .......... 310VE-1 .......... black .......... X69/2-B, X69/1-B, X67-C, X411-F, X411-G
X69/1
X69/1 2-pin plug, worklight at r.h. front corner
X69/1
A .......... 111VC-1 .......... brown .......... X411-A, X69/2-A
B .......... 310VB-1 .......... black .......... X69/2-B, X68-C, X67-C, X411-F, X411-G
X69/2
X69/2 2-pin plug, worklight at l.h. front corner
X69/2
A .......... 111VB-1 .......... brown .......... X411-A, X69/1-A
B .......... 310VA-1 .......... black .......... X69/1-B, X68-C, X67-C, X411-F, X411-G
X411
X411 8-pin plug — Connection point for headlight wiring harness (W02)
X411
A .......... 111VA-1 .......... brown .......... X69/2-A, X69/1-A
B .......... 114V-1 .......... yellow .......... X67-B
C .......... 124V-1 .......... yellow .......... X68-B
D .......... 139VB-1 .......... white .......... X67-A
E .......... 139VA-1 .......... white .......... X68-A
F .......... 310VJ-1 .......... black .......... X69/2-B, X69/1-B, X68-C, X67-C, X411-G
G .......... 310VK-1 .......... black .......... X69/2-B, X69/1-B, X68-C, X67-C, X411-F
H .......... vacant
Reference 240-26-072, W07 — Wiring Harness - Front PTO
W07 - Front PTO wiring harness
X02
X02 4-pin plug — Connection point for front PTO wiring harness (W02)
X02
Terminal no. Wire no. and cross section Color of wire To plug or component
A .......... not used
B .......... not used
C .......... 607X-1 .......... purple .......... X705-1
D .......... 310X-1 .......... black .......... X705-2
X705
X705 2-pin plug for solenoid valve of front PTO
X705
1 .......... 607X-1 .......... purple .......... X02-C
2 .......... 310X-1 .......... black .......... X02-D
Reference 240-26-081, W08 — Wiring Harness - Cab (Tractors with

PowrQuad Transmission)
W08 - Wiring harness, cab (tractors with PowrQuad transmission)
B28/LH
B28/LH Dome light switch, left door
B28/LH
XGND5, K07/1-86, K07/3-85, K07/5-86, K08/1-85, K08/2-85, X500-1, X430-1, X474-B, K08/3-85, X120/2-
C1 .......... 310BN-1 .......... black ..........
A, X235-B, X617-1, X617-14, X38-4, K07/6-86
NC2 .......... 274A-1 .......... yellow .......... X400-28
NO4 .......... vacant
F03
F03 Fuses (fuse and relay boxes)
F03
F03/01A .......... 124AC-1 .......... yellow .......... X450-4
F03/01E .......... 164AB-1 .......... yellow .......... K02/7-87A, F03/02E, F03/13A
F03/02A .......... 114A-1 .......... yellow .......... X450-33
F03/02E .......... 164AC-1 .......... yellow .......... K02/7-87A, F03/01E, F03/13A
F03/03A .......... 118AA-1 .......... gray .......... X430-24, X106-B, X400-9, X113/2-A
F03/03E .......... 158AA-1 .......... gray .......... F03/04E, S09-C, F06/08E
F03/04A .......... 128AC-1 .......... gray .......... X400-10, X430-37, X113/1-A, X107-B
F03/04E .......... 158AC-1 .......... gray .......... F03/03E, S09-C, F06/08E
F03/05A .......... 132A-1 .......... red .......... X400-4
F03/05E .......... 198AB-1 .......... gray .......... F03/06E
F03/06A .......... 145A-1 .......... dark green .......... X400-3
F03/06E .......... 198AA-2.5 .......... gray .......... K02/3-87
F03/06E .......... 198AB-1 .......... gray .......... F03/05E
F03/07A .......... 162A-1 .......... red .......... X400-6
F03/07E .......... 197AB-1 .......... purple .......... F03/08E
F03/08A .......... 115A-1 .......... dark green .......... X400-5
F03/08E .......... 197AA-2.5 .......... purple .......... K02/4-87
F03/08E .......... 197AB-1 .......... purple .......... F03/07E
F03/09A .......... 179A-1 .......... white .......... X400-30
F03/09E .......... 199A-1 .......... white .......... K02/5-87
F03/10A .......... 177AC-1 .......... purple .......... K02/6-30, F03/16A
X473-1, F04/02E, F04/11E, F04/01E, F04/10E, K02/2-30, K02/1-30, F04/03E, F04/04E, K02/3-30,
F03/10E .......... 012AD-1 .......... red ..........
K02/4-30, K02/5-30, F06/15E, F04/12E, K08/1-30, F04/16E, F06/13E
F03/11A .......... 174A-1 .......... yellow .......... X400-26
F03/11E .......... 104AB-1 .......... yellow .......... F03/12E
F03/12A .......... 184AB-1 .......... yellow .......... X400-27
F03/12E .......... 104AA-2.5 .......... yellow .......... K02/7-87
F03/12E .......... 104AB-1 .......... yellow .......... F03/11E
F03/13A .......... 164AD-1.5 .......... yellow .......... K02/7-87A, F03/01E, F03/02E
F03/13E .......... 169AA-1.5 .......... white .......... K02/1-87, K02/7-30
F03/14A .......... 139AC-1.5 .......... white .......... F03/15A, X450-32
F03/14E .......... 167AC-1.5 .......... purple .......... K02/2-87, F03/16E
F03/15A .......... 139AD-1.5 .......... white .......... F03/14A, X450-32
F03/15E .......... 109A-1 .......... white .......... K02/6-87A
F03/16A .......... 177AB-1.5 .......... purple .......... K02/6-30, F03/10A
F03/16E .......... 167AB-1.5 .......... purple .......... K02/2-87, F03/14E
F04
F04
F04/01A .......... 292A-2.5 .......... red .......... K08/3-30
X473-1, F04/02E, F04/11E, F04/10E, K02/2-30, K02/1-30, F04/03E, F04/04E, K02/3-30, F03/10E,
F04/01E .......... 012AL-2.5 .......... red ..........
K02/4-30, K02/5-30, F06/15E, F04/12E, K08/1-30, F04/16E, F06/13E
F04/02A .......... 307A-2.5 .......... purple .......... X239-B
F04/02E .......... 012AV-2.5 .......... red ..........
K02/4-30, K02/5-30, F06/15E, F04/12E, K08/1-30, F04/16E, F06/13E
F04/03A .......... 332A-2.5 .......... red .......... K07/3-30
X473-1, F04/02E, F04/11E, F04/01E, F04/10E, K02/2-30, K02/1-30, F04/04E, K02/3-30, F03/10E,
F04/03E .......... 012AK-2.5 .......... red ..........
K02/4-30, K02/5-30, F06/15E, F04/12E, K08/1-30, F04/16E, F06/13E
F04/04A .......... 922A-1 .......... red .......... X616-8
X473-1, F04/02E, F04/11E, F04/01E, F04/10E, K02/2-30, K02/1-30, F04/03E, K02/3-30, F03/10E,
F04/04E .......... 012AJ-1 .......... red ..........
K02/4-30, K02/5-30, F06/15E, F04/12E, K08/1-30, F04/16E, F06/13E
F04/05A .......... 992AA-1 .......... red .......... X616-14, X500-37
F04/05E .......... 072AM-1 .......... red .......... F04/08E
F04/06A .......... vacant
F04/06E .......... vacant
F04/07A .......... vacant
F04/07E .......... vacant
F04
F04 Fuses (fuse and relay boxes), continued
F04
F04/08A .......... 882AA-1 .......... red .......... X616/2-2M1, X616/3-3G3
F04/08E .......... 072AJ-2.5 .......... red .......... F04/09E
F04/08E .......... 072AM-1 .......... red .......... F04/05E
F04/09A .......... 973AB-1 .......... orange .......... X245-C, S08-2, X230-A, X122/1-A, X125-A, X122/2-A, X518-A, X243-B, X174-A, X623-A
F04/09E .......... 072AD-2.5 .......... red .......... K01/2-87, F04/13E, F05/01E
F04/09E .......... 072AJ-2.5 .......... red .......... F04/08E
F04/10A .......... 122AA-2.5 .......... red .......... X616/1-1G2, X616/1-1H2
F04/10E .......... 012AT-2.5 .......... red ..........
K02/4-30, K02/5-30, F06/15E, F04/12E, K08/1-30, F04/16E, F06/13E
F04/11A .......... 182AA-2.5 .......... red .......... X616/1-1H1, X616/1-1G1
F04/11E .......... 012AU-2.5 .......... red ..........
K02/4-30, K02/5-30, F06/15E, F04/12E, K08/1-30, F04/16E, F06/13E
F04/12A .......... 152A-1.5 .......... red .......... S09-B
F04/12E .......... 012AC-1.5 .......... red ..........
F03/10E, K02/4-30, K02/5-30, F06/15E, K08/1-30, F04/16E, F06/13E
F04/13A .......... 981A-2.5 .......... brown .......... X474-A
F04/13E .......... 072AB-2.5 .......... red .......... K01/2-87, F05/01E, F04/09E
F04
F04
F04/14A .......... vacant
F04/14E .......... vacant
F04/15A .......... vacant
F04/15E .......... vacant
F04/16A .......... 571AA-1 .......... brown .......... X616/2-2L1, X516-C
F04/16E .......... 012AP-1 .......... red ..........
F03/10E, K02/4-30, K02/5-30, F06/15E, F04/12E, K08/1-30, F06/13E
F05
F05
F05/01A .......... 273A-1 .......... orange .......... X324-A
F05/01E .......... 072AC-2.5 .......... red .......... K01/2-87, F04/13E, F04/09E
F05/02A .......... vacant
F05/02E .......... vacant
F05/03A .......... vacant
F05/03E .......... vacant
F05/04A .......... vacant
F05/04E .......... vacant
F05/05A .......... vacant
F05/05E .......... vacant
F05/06A .......... vacant
F05/06E .......... vacant
F05/07A .......... vacant
F05/07E .......... vacant
F05/08A .......... 322AB-1 .......... red .......... X450-21, X500-12, X616-10
F05/08A .......... 322AE-1 .......... red .......... K07/6-30
F05/08E .......... 022AD-1 .......... red .......... S01-IGN, K07/3-86
F05/09A .......... 092AA-1.5 .......... red .......... S01-BAT1, S01-BAT2
F05/09E .......... 042AE-1.5 .......... red .......... X473-2, F05/10E, F05/12E, F05/11E
F05/10A .......... 272A-4 .......... red .......... K01/3-30
F05/10E .......... 042AC-4 .......... red .......... X473-2, F05/09E, F05/12E, F05/11E
F05/11A .......... 282A-4 .......... red .......... K01/1-30
F05/11E .......... 042AF-4 .......... red .......... X473-2, F05/09E, F05/10E, F05/12E
F05/12A .......... 902A-4 .......... red .......... K01/2-30
F05/12E .......... 042AD-4 .......... red .......... X473-2, F05/09E, F05/10E, F05/11E
F05/13A .......... vacant
F05/13E .......... vacant
F05/14A .......... vacant
F05/14E .......... vacant
F05/15A .......... vacant
F05/15E .......... vacant
F05/16A .......... vacant
F05/16E .......... vacant
F06
F06
F06/01A .......... 242A-4 .......... red .......... K08/2-30
F06/01E .......... 232AB-4 .......... red .......... K08/1-87, F06/02E
F06/02A .......... 247AA-2.5 .......... purple .......... X400-8
F06/02E .......... 232AC-2.5 .......... red .......... K08/1-87, F06/01E
F06/03A .......... 215A-1 .......... dark green .......... X450-25
F06/03E .......... 213A-1 .......... orange .......... X400-29
F06/04A .......... 236AB-1 .......... light blue .......... X38-1, X400-22, X629-E
F06/04E .......... 202AD-1 .......... red .......... F06/05E
F06/05A .......... 246AA-1 .......... light blue .......... X620-E, X400-16
F06/05E .......... 202AC-1 .......... red .......... F06/06E
F06/05E .......... 202AD-1 .......... red .......... F06/04E
F06/06A .......... 256AA-2.5 .......... light blue .......... X37-A, K08/1-86
F06/06E .......... 202AB-1.5 .......... red .......... F06/07E
F06/06E .......... 202AC-1 .......... red .......... F06/05E
F06/07A .......... 204A-1 .......... yellow .......... X400-33
F06/07E .......... 202AA-2.5 .......... red .......... K01/1-87
F06/07E .......... 202AB-1.5 .......... red .......... F06/06E
F06/08A .......... 138AB-1 .......... gray .......... X617-2, X400-14, X120/1-A
F06/08E .......... 158AE-1 .......... gray .......... F03/03E, F03/04E, S09-C
F06/09A .......... 257A-1 .......... purple .......... X400-24
F06/09E .......... 312AD-1 .......... red .......... F06/10E
F06/10A .......... 262A-1 .......... red .......... S04-A
F06/10E .......... 312AC-1 .......... red .......... F06/11E
F06/10E .......... 312AD-1 .......... red .......... F06/09E
F06/11A .......... 297AB-1 .......... purple .......... K08/3-86, X128-A
F06/11E .......... 312AB-1.5 .......... red .......... F06/12E
F06/11E .......... 312AC-1 .......... red .......... F06/10E
F06/12A .......... 293A-1 .......... orange .......... X488-A
F06/12E .......... 312AA-2.5 .......... red .......... K01/3-87
F06/12E .......... 312AB-1.5 .......... red .......... F06/11E
F06
F06
F06/13A .......... 228AA-1 .......... gray .......... K01/4-86, X616/2-2D3
F06/13E .......... 012AW-1 .......... red ..........
F03/10E, K02/4-30, K02/5-30, F06/15E, F04/12E, K08/1-30, F04/16E
F06/14A .......... vacant
F06/14E .......... vacant
F06/15A .......... 912AA-1 .......... red .......... X400-15, X571-B
F06/15E .......... 012AO-1 .......... red ..........
F03/10E, K02/4-30, K02/5-30, F04/12E, K08/1-30, F04/16E, F06/13E
F06/16A .......... vacant
F06/16E .......... vacant
K01
K01 Relays (fuse and relay boxes)
K01
K01/1 Accessory relay
K01/1
30 .......... 282A-4 .......... red .......... F05/11A
XGND5, X113/1-B, X107-D, K01/3-85, K02/1-85, K02/2-85, K02/3-85, K02/4-85, K02/5-85, K02/6-85, K02/7-85, X616-12,
85 .......... 310BH-1 .......... black ..........
X516-E, X579/2-A, X113/2-B, S01/1-A
86 .......... 192AC-1 .......... red .......... S01-ELX, K01/2-86
87 .......... 202AA-2.5 .......... red .......... F06/07E
87A .......... vacant
K01/2 Relay for power supply to electronics
K01/2
30 .......... 902A-4 .......... red .......... F05/12A
85 .......... 085A-1 .......... dark green .......... K07/1-85
86 .......... 192AB-1 .......... red .......... S01-ELX, K01/1-86
87 .......... 072AA-4 .......... red .......... F04/13E, F05/01E, F04/09E
87A .......... vacant
K01/3
30 .......... 272A-4 .......... red .......... F05/10A
85 .......... 310BC-1 .......... black ..........
X516-E, X579/2-A, X113/2-B, S01/1-A
86 .......... 212A-1 .......... red .......... S01-ACC
87 .......... 312AA-2.5 .......... red .......... F06/12E
87A .......... vacant
K01/4
30 .......... vacant
85 .......... 050AB-1 .......... black .......... XGND6
86 .......... 228AB-1 .......... gray .......... F06/13A, X616/2-2D3
87 .......... vacant
87A .......... vacant
K02
K02
K02/1 Relay for dipped-beam headlights
K02/1
X473-1, F04/02E, F04/11E, F04/01E, F04/10E, K02/2-30, F04/03E, F04/04E, K02/3-30, F03/10E, K02/4-30, K02/5-30,
30 .......... 012AH-1.5 .......... red ..........
F06/15E, F04/12E, K08/1-30, F04/16E, F06/13E
85 .......... 310BT-1 .......... black ..........
X516-E, X579/2-A, X113/2-B, S01/1-A
86 .......... 144A-1 .......... yellow .......... X10/2-A
87 .......... 169AB-1.5 .......... white .......... F03/13E, K02/7-30
87A .......... vacant
K02/2 Relay for full-beam headlights
K02/2
X473-1, F04/02E, F04/11E, F04/01E, F04/10E, K02/1-30, F04/03E, F04/04E, K02/3-30, F03/10E, K02/4-30, K02/5-30,
30 .......... 012AE-1.5 .......... red ..........
F06/15E, F04/12E, K08/1-30, F04/16E, F06/13E
85 .......... 310AE-1 .......... black ..........
X516-E, X579/2-A, X113/2-B, S01/1-A
86 .......... 159AA-1 .......... white .......... X10/3-A, X616-22
87 .......... 167AA-1.5 .......... purple .......... F03/16E, F03/14E
87A .......... vacant
K02
K02 Relays (fuse and relay boxes), continued
K02
K02/3 Relay for worklights at front of cab roof
K02/3
X473-1, F04/02E, F04/11E, F04/01E, F04/10E, K02/2-30, K02/1-30, F04/03E, F04/04E, F03/10E, K02/4-30, K02/5-30,
30 .......... 012AF-2.5 .......... red ..........
F06/15E, F04/12E, K08/1-30, F04/16E, F06/13E
XGND5, X113/1-B, X107-D, K01/1-85, K01/3-85, K02/1-85, K02/2-85, K02/4-85, K02/5-85, K02/6-85, K02/7-85,
85 .......... 310BM-1 .......... black ..........
X616-12, X516-E, X579/2-A, X113/2-B, S01/1-A
86 .......... 135AB-1 .......... dark green .......... S09-H, K07/1-87, K02/5-86, K02/4-86, X400-32, X617-21
87 .......... 198AA-2.5 .......... gray .......... F03/06E
87A .......... vacant
K02
K02
K02/4 Relay for worklights on rear of cab roof
K02/4
X473-1, F04/02E, F04/11E, F04/01E, F04/10E, K02/2-30, K02/1-30, F04/03E, F04/04E, K02/3-30, F03/10E, K02/5-30,
30 .......... 012AG-2.5 .......... red ..........
F06/15E, F04/12E, K08/1-30, F04/16E, F06/13E
85 .......... 310AJ-1 .......... black ..........
X616-12, X516-E, X579/2-A, X113/2-B, S01/1-A
86 .......... 135AE-1 .......... dark green .......... S09-H, K02/3-86, K07/1-87, K02/5-86, X400-32, X617-21
87 .......... 197AA-2.5 .......... purple .......... F03/08E
87A .......... vacant
K02
K02
K02/5 Relay for worklights on front corner
K02/5
30 .......... 012AN-1 .......... red ..........
F06/15E, F04/12E, K08/1-30, F04/16E, F06/13E
85 .......... 310BA-1 .......... black ..........
X616-12, X516-E, X579/2-A, X113/2-B, S01/1-A
86 .......... 135AF-1 .......... dark green .......... S09-H, K02/3-86, K07/1-87, K02/4-86, X400-32, X617-21
87 .......... 199A-1 .......... white .......... F03/09E
87A .......... vacant
K02/6 Relay for worklights or headlights on cab frame
K02/6
30 .......... 177AA-1.5 .......... purple .......... F03/16A, F03/10A
85 .......... 310BU-1 .......... black ..........
X516-E, X579/2-A, X113/2-B, S01/1-A
86 .......... 131AC-1 .......... brown .......... X400-34, K02/7-86
87 .......... 129AC-1.5 .......... white .......... X400-2
87A .......... 109A-1 .......... white .......... F03/15E
K02
K02
K02/7 Relay for headlights on cab frame
K02/7
30 .......... 169AC-1.5 .......... white .......... F03/13E, K02/1-87
85 .......... 310AV-1 .......... black ..........
X516-E, X579/2-A, X113/2-B, S01/1-A
86 .......... 131AB-1 .......... brown .......... X400-34, K02/6-86
87 .......... 104AA-2.5 .......... yellow .......... F03/12E
87A .......... 164AA-1 .......... yellow .......... F03/01E, F03/02E, F03/13A
K07
K07 Diodes and relays (fuse and relay boxes)
K07
K07/1 3-amp diode for dipped and full-beam headlights (terminal nos. 87 and 30)
K07/1 1-amp diode for power supply to electronics (terminal nos. 85 and 86)
K07/1
30 .......... 113AE-1 .......... orange .......... X400-31, S09-M, X10/1-A
85 .......... 085A-1 .......... dark green .......... K01/2-85
XGND5, K07/3-85, K07/5-86, K08/1-85, K08/2-85, X500-1, X430-1, X474-B, K08/3-85, X120/2-A, X235-B, X617-1,
86 .......... 310BO-1 .......... black ..........
X617-14, X38-4, B28/LH-C1, K07/6-86
87 .......... 135AC-1 .......... dark green .......... S09-H, K02/3-86, K02/5-86, K02/4-86, X400-32, X617-21
87A .......... vacant
K07/2 Vacant
K07/3
30 .......... 332A-2.5 .......... red .......... F04/03A
85 .......... 310BQ-1 .......... black ..........
X617-14, X38-4, B28/LH-C1, K07/6-86
86 .......... 022AB-1 .......... red .......... S01-IGN, F05/08E
87 .......... 264A-2.5 .......... yellow .......... X450-8
87A .......... vacant
K07/4 Vacant
K07
K07
K07/5 Cold weather starting aid relay
K07/5
30 .......... 306A-1 .......... light blue .......... X450-15
85 .......... 333AA-1 .......... orange .......... X450-14, K07/6-87
86 .......... 310BS-1 .......... black ..........
X617-14, X38-4, B28/LH-C1, K07/6-86
87 .......... 326A-1 .......... light blue .......... X617-25
87A .......... vacant
K07/6
30 .......... 322AE-1 .......... red .......... F05/08A
85 .......... 336A-0.5 .......... light blue .......... X616/2-2E1
XGND5, K07/1-86, K07/3-85, K07/5-86, K08/1-85, K08/2-85, X500-1, X430-1, X474-B, K08/3-85, X120/2-A, X235-B,
86 .......... 310AY-1 .......... black ..........
X617-1, X617-14, X38-4, B28/LH-C1
87 .......... 333AB-1 .......... orange .......... X450-14, K07/5-85
87A .......... vacant
K07/7 Vacant
K08
K08
K08/1 Relay for air conditioning system
K08/1
30 .......... 012AM-4 .......... red ..........
K02/5-30, F06/15E, F04/12E, F04/16E, F06/13E
85 .......... 310BP-1 .......... black ..........
X617-14, X38-4, B28/LH-C1, K07/6-86
86 .......... 256AC-1 .......... light blue .......... F06/06A, X37-A
87 .......... 232AA-4 .......... red .......... F06/01E, F06/02E
87A .......... vacant
K08/2 Fan relay
K08/2
30 .......... 242A-4 .......... red .......... F06/01A
85 .......... 310BY-1 .......... black ..........
X617-14, X38-4, B28/LH-C1, K07/6-86
86 .......... 210A-1 .......... black .......... X400-7
87 .......... 234A-2.5 .......... yellow .......... X400-1
87A .......... vacant
K08
K08
K08/3 Relay for 3-terminal power outlet socket
K08/3
30 .......... 292A-2.5 .......... red .......... F04/01A
XGND5, K07/1-86, K07/3-85, K07/5-86, K08/1-85, K08/2-85, X500-1, X430-1, X474-B, X120/2-A, X235-B, X617-1,
85 .......... 310BR-1 .......... black ..........
X617-14, X38-4, B28/LH-C1, K07/6-86
86 .......... 297AA-1 .......... purple .......... F06/11A, X128-A
87 .......... 412A-2.5 .......... red .......... X239-A
87A .......... vacant
K08/4 Vacant
R19
R19 - CAN BUS terminating resistor
R19
A .......... 934AO-0.5 .......... yellow .......... X616/2-2A1, X571-C
B .......... 935AO-0.5 .......... dark green .......... X616/2-2B1, X571-D
S01
S01 8-pin plug, main switch
S01
ACC .......... 212A-1 .......... red .......... K01/3-86
AID .......... 385A-1.5 .......... dark green .......... X450-3
BAT1 .......... 092AC-1.5 .......... red .......... F05/09A, S01-BAT2
BAT2 .......... 092AB-1.5 .......... red .......... F05/09A, S01-BAT1
ELX .......... 192AA-1 .......... red .......... K01/1-86, K01/2-86
GND .......... 320A-0.5 .......... black .......... X617-13
IGN .......... 022AA-1.5 .......... red .......... K07/3-86, F05/08E
ST .......... 311AA-1 .......... brown .......... X500-39
S01/1
S01/1 1-pin plug for main switch
S01/1
XGND5, X113/1-B, X107-D, K01/1-85, K01/3-85, K02/1-85, K02/2-85, K02/3-85, K02/4-85, K02/5-85,
A .......... 310BZ-1 .......... black ..........
K02/6-85, K02/7-85, X616-12, X516-E, X579/2-A, X113/2-B
S04
S04 2-pin plug for horn button
S04
A .......... 262A-1 .......... red .......... F06/10A
B .......... 903A-1 .......... orange .......... X450-16
S08
S08 3-Pin Plug, Turn Signal Switch
S08
1 .......... 155A-0.5 .......... dark green .......... X616/2-2F4
2 .......... 973AC-1 .......... orange .......... X245-C, F04/09A, X230-A, X122/1-A, X125-A, X122/2-A, X518-A, X243-B, X174-A, X623-A
3 .......... 127A-0.5 .......... purple .......... X616/2-2E4
S09
S09 5-pin plug, light switch
S09
B .......... 152A-1.5 .......... red .......... F04/12A
C .......... 158AD-1.5 .......... gray .......... F03/03E, F03/04E, F06/08E
H .......... 135AA-1.5 .......... dark green .......... K02/3-86, K07/1-87, K02/5-86, K02/4-86, X400-32, X617-21
L .......... vacant
M .......... 113AC-1.5 .......... orange .......... X400-31, K07/1-30, X10/1-A
X10/1
X10/1 1-pin plug for full/dipped-beam switch
X10/1
A .......... 113AD-1 .......... orange .......... X400-31, K07/1-30, S09-M
X10/2
X10/2
A .......... 144A-1 .......... yellow .......... K02/1-86
X10/3
X10/3
A .......... 159AB-1 .......... white .......... K02/2-86, X616-22
X14/1
X14/1 8-pin plug for feedback unit of hitch control
X14/1
A .......... 531AD-1 .......... brown .......... X616/3-3G4, X450-10, X14/2-A, X430-14, X450-35
B .......... 873AA-1 .......... orange .......... X616/3-3F2, X430-9, X14/2-C
C .......... 875A-0.5 .......... dark green .......... X616/3-3C3
D .......... 838A-0.5 .......... gray .......... X616/3-3E2
E .......... 877A-0.5 .......... purple .......... X616/3-3D2
F .......... 834A-0.5 .......... yellow .......... X616/3-3E1
G .......... 839A-0.5 .......... white .......... X616/3-3E3
H .......... 876A-0.5 .......... light blue .......... X616/3-3D1
X14/2
X14/2 3-pin plug for sensitivity potentiometer
X14/2
A .......... 531AH-0.5 .......... brown .......... X616/3-3G4, X450-10, X430-14, X14/1-A, X450-35
B .......... 869A-0.5 .......... white .......... X616/3-3C4
C .......... 873AE-0.5 .......... orange .......... X14/1-B, X616/3-3F2, X430-9
X34
X34 6-pin plug for remote-control switch of rockshaft control, right
X34
A .......... 846A-0.5 .......... light blue .......... X616/3-3A4
B .......... 843A-0.5 .......... orange .......... X616/3-3A3
C .......... 050AP-0.5 .......... black .......... XGND6, X35-C, X35-D, X34-D
D .......... 050AO-0.5 .......... black .......... XGND6, X35-C, X35-D, X34-C
E .......... 841A-0.5 .......... brown .......... X616/3-3A1
F .......... 844A-0.5 .......... yellow .......... X616/3-3A2
X35
X35 6-pin plug for remote-control switch of rockshaft control, left
X35
A .......... 821A-0.5 .......... brown .......... X616/3-3B2
B .......... 824A-0.5 .......... yellow .......... X616/3-3B1
C .......... 050AL-0.5 .......... black .......... XGND6, X35-D, X34-D, X34-C
D .......... 050AM-0.5 .......... black .......... XGND6, X35-C, X34-D, X34-C
E .......... 826A-0.5 .......... light blue .......... X616/3-3B3
F .......... 823A-0.5 .......... orange .......... X616/3-3B4
X37
X37 2-pin plug for front loader
X37
A .......... 256AB-1 .......... light blue .......... F06/06A, K08/1-86
B .......... 310BF-1 .......... black .......... XGND1, X518-F, X285-B, X44-B, X239-C, X128-B, X488-B, X106-D
X38
X38 4-pin plug for windshield wiper motor
X38
A .......... 236AA-1 .......... light blue .......... F06/04A, X400-22, X629-E
B .......... 235AB-1 .......... dark green .......... X629-B, X400-12
C .......... 224AA-1 .......... yellow .......... X629-A, X400-18
XGND5, K07/1-86, K07/3-85, K07/5-86, K08/1-85, K08/2-85, X500-1, X430-1, X474-B, K08/3-85,
D .......... 310AN-1 .......... black ..........
X120/2-A, X235-B, X617-1, X617-14, B28/LH-C1, K07/6-86
X44
X44 2-pin plug for rear window washer pump
X44
A .......... 258A-1 .......... gray .......... X620-C
B .......... 310AC-1 .......... black .......... XGND1, X518-F, X37-B, X285-B, X239-C, X128-B, X488-B, X106-D
X106
X106 4-pin plug for right tail, brake and turn signal lights
X106
A .......... 119A-0.5 .......... white .......... X616/1-1F1
B .......... 118AC-1 .......... gray .......... F03/03A, X430-24, X400-9, X113/2-A
C .......... 106AD-1 .......... light blue .......... X324-B, X430-25, X107-C
D .......... 310AG-1 .......... black .......... XGND1, X518-F, X37-B, X285-B, X44-B, X239-C, X128-B, X488-B
X107
X107 4-pin plug for left tail, brake and turn signal lights
X107
A .......... 126A-0.5 .......... light blue .......... X616/1-1F2
B .......... 128AD-1 .......... gray .......... X400-10, F03/04A, X430-37, X113/1-A
C .......... 106AB-1 .......... light blue .......... X324-B, X430-25, X106-C
XGND5, X113/1-B, K01/1-85, K01/3-85, K02/1-85, K02/2-85, K02/3-85, K02/4-85, K02/5-85, K02/6-85,
D .......... 310AR-1 .......... black ..........
K02/7-85, X616-12, X516-E, X579/2-A, X113/2-B, S01/1-A
X113/1
X113/1 2-pin plug for left license plate light
X113/1
A .......... 128AA-1 .......... gray .......... X400-10, F03/04A, X430-37, X107-B
XGND5, X107-D, K01/1-85, K01/3-85, K02/1-85, K02/2-85, K02/3-85, K02/4-85, K02/5-85, K02/6-85,
B .......... 310AQ-1 .......... black ..........
K02/7-85, X616-12, X516-E, X579/2-A, X113/2-B, S01/1-A
X113/2
X113/2 2-pin plug for right license plate light
X113/2
A .......... 118AE-1 .......... gray .......... F03/03A, X430-24, X106-B, X400-9
B .......... 310BV-1 .......... black ..........
K02/6-85, K02/7-85, X616-12, X516-E, X579/2-A, S01/1-A
X120/1
X120/1 1-pin plug for pressure gauge in air brake system
X120/1
A .......... 138AD-1 .......... gray .......... X617-2, F06/08A, X400-14
X120/2
X120/2
XGND5, K07/1-86, K07/3-85, K07/5-86, K08/1-85, K08/2-85, X500-1, X430-1, X474-B, K08/3-85, X235-B,
A .......... 310BE-1 .......... black ..........
X617-1, X617-14, X38-4, B28/LH-C1, K07/6-86
X122/1
X122/1 2-pin plug for differential lock switch
X122/1
A .......... 973AN-1 .......... orange .......... X245-C, S08-2, F04/09A, X230-A, X125-A, X122/2-A, X518-A, X243-B, X174-A, X623-A
B .......... 522AB-1 .......... red .......... X616/2-2H2, X122/2-B
X122/2
X122/2
A .......... 973AJ-1 .......... orange .......... X245-C, S08-2, F04/09A, X230-A, X122/1-A, X125-A, X518-A, X243-B, X174-A, X623-A
B .......... 522AC-1 .......... red .......... X616/2-2H2, X122/1-B
X125
X125 3-pin plug for rear PTO switch
X125
A .......... 973AI-1 .......... orange .......... X245-C, S08-2, F04/09A, X230-A, X122/1-A, X122/2-A, X518-A, X243-B, X174-A, X623-A
B .......... 525A-0.5 .......... dark green .......... X616/1-1E4
C .......... 586A-0.5 .......... light blue .......... X616/-2G2
X128
X128 2-pin plug for cigarette lighter
X128
A .......... 297AC-1 .......... purple .......... K08/3-86, F06/11A
B .......... 310AM-1 .......... black .......... XGND1, X518-F, X37-B, X285-B, X44-B, X239-C, X488-B, X106-D
X174
X174 3-pin plug for the remote-control switch of the rear PTO (switch on l.h. side)
X174
A .......... 973AQ-1 .......... orange .......... X245-C, S08-2, F04/09A, X230-A, X122/1-A, X125-A, X122/2-A, X518-A, X243-B, X623-A
B .......... 547A-0.5 .......... purple .......... X616/2-2G1
C .......... 528A-0.5 .......... gray .......... X616/2-2G4
X230
X230 2-pin plug for seat switch
X230
A .......... 973AL-0.5 .......... orange .......... X245-C, S08-2, F04/09A, X122/1-A, X125-A, X122/2-A, X518-A, X243-B, X174-A, X623-A
B .......... 907A-0.5 .......... purple .......... X616/3-3F3
X235
X235 2-Pin Plug for Handbrake Switch
X235
A .......... 906A-0.5 .......... light blue .......... X616-11
XGND5, K07/1-86, K07/3-85, K07/5-86, K08/1-85, K08/2-85, X500-1, X430-1, X474-B, K08/3-85,
B .......... 310BJ-1 .......... black ..........
X120/2-A, X617-1, X617-14, X38-4, B28/LH-C1, K07/6-86
X239
X239 3-pin plug — Connection point of harness for 3-terminal power outlet socket (W14)
X239
A .......... 412A-2.5 .......... red .......... K08/3-87
B .......... 307A-2.5 .......... purple .......... F04/02A
C .......... 310AX-2.5 .......... black .......... XGND1, X518-F, X37-B, X285-B, X44-B, X128-B, X488-B, X106-D
X243
X243 3-pin plug for rear PTO preselector switch
X243
A .......... 535A-0.5 .......... dark green .......... X616/2-2H3
B .......... 973AP-1 .......... orange .......... X245-C, S08-2, F04/09A, X230-A, X122/1-A, X125-A, X122/2-A, X518-A, X174-A, X623-A
C .......... 536A-0.5 .......... light blue .......... X616/2-2H1
X245
X245 3-pin plug for front-wheel drive switch
X245
A .......... 557A-0.5 .......... purple .......... X616/2-2K4
B .......... vacant
C .......... 973AE-1 .......... orange .......... S08-2, F04/09A, X230-A, X122/1-A, X125-A, X122/2-A, X518-A, X243-B, X174-A, X623-A
X285
X285 2-pin plug for windshield washer pump
X285
A .......... 208A-1 .......... gray .......... X629-C
B .......... 310AS-1 .......... black .......... XGND1, X518-F, X37-B, X44-B, X239-C, X128-B, X488-B, X106-D
X324
X324 8-pin plug for brake switch
X324
A .......... 273A-1 .......... orange .......... F05/01A
B .......... 106AA-1 .......... light blue .......... X430-25, X107-C, X106-C
C .......... 244A-0.5 .......... yellow .......... X616/2-2J2
D .......... 245A-0.5 .......... dark green .......... X616/2-2F3
E .......... vacant
F .......... vacant
G .......... vacant
H .......... vacant
X400
X400 42-pin plug — Connection point for cab roof wiring harness (W19)
X400
1 .......... 234A-2.5 .......... yellow .......... K08/2-87
2 .......... 129AC-1.5 .......... white .......... K02/6-87
3 .......... 145A-1 .......... dark green .......... F03/06A
4 .......... 132A-1 .......... red .......... F03/05A
5 .......... 115A-1 .......... dark green .......... F03/08A
6 .......... 162A-1 .......... red .......... F03/07A
7 .......... 210A-1 .......... black .......... K08/2-86
8 .......... 247AA-2.5 .......... purple .......... F06/02A
9 .......... 118AD-1 .......... gray .......... F03/03A, X430-24, X106-B, X113/2-A
10 .......... 128AF-1 .......... gray .......... F03/04A, X430-37, X113/1-A, X107-B
11 .......... vacant
12 .......... 235AC-1 .......... dark green .......... X629-B, X38-2
13 .......... vacant
14 .......... 138AC-1 .......... gray .......... X617-2, F06/08A, X120/1-A
15 .......... 912AB-1 .......... red .......... F06/15A, X571-B
16 .......... 246AC-1 .......... light blue .......... F06/05A, X620-E
17 .......... 275A-1 .......... dark green .......... X620-B
18 .......... 224AC-1 .......... yellow .......... X38-3, X629-A
19 .......... 294A-1 .......... yellow .......... X620-A
20 .......... vacant
21 .......... 050AW-1 .......... black .......... XGND6
22 .......... 236AC-1 .......... light blue .......... X38-1, F06/04A, X629-E
23 .......... 125AC-1 .......... dark green .......... X616-6, X616/1-1G4, X430-23, X616/1-1G3
24 .......... 257A-1 .......... purple .......... F06/09A
25 .......... 107AC-1 .......... purple .......... X616/1-1H4, X617-20, X430-26, X616/1-1H3
26 .......... 174A-1 .......... yellow .......... F03/11A
27 .......... 184AB-1 .......... yellow .......... F03/12A
28 .......... 274A-1 .......... yellow .......... B28/LH-NC2
29 .......... 213A-1 .......... orange .......... F06/03E
30 .......... 179A-1 .......... white .......... F03/09A
31 .......... 113AA-1 .......... orange .......... K07/1-30, S09-M, X10/1-A
32 .......... 135AH-1 .......... dark green .......... S09-H, K02/3-86, K07/1-87, K02/5-86, K02/4-86, X617-21
33 .......... 204A-1 .......... yellow .......... F06/07A
34 .......... 131AD-1 .......... brown .......... K02/7-86, K02/6-86
35 .......... 111A-1 .......... brown .......... X450-20
36 .......... vacant
37 .......... vacant
38 .......... vacant
39 .......... vacant
40 .......... vacant
41 .......... vacant
42 .......... vacant
X430
X430 42-pin plug — Connection point for harness at rear of transmission (W30)
X430
XGND5, K07/1-86, K07/3-85, K07/5-86, K08/1-85, K08/2-85, X500-1, X474-B, K08/3-85, X120/2-A,
1 .......... 310AF-4 .......... black ..........
X235-B, X617-1, X617-14, X38-4, B28/LH-C1, K07/6-86
2 .......... vacant
3 .......... vacant
4 .......... vacant
5 .......... vacant
6 .......... vacant
7 .......... vacant
8 .......... vacant
9 .......... 873AD-1 .......... orange .......... X14/1-B, X616/3-3F2, X14/2-C
10 .......... vacant
11 .......... 884A-0.5 .......... yellow .......... X616/3-3C2
12 .......... vacant
13 .......... vacant
14 .......... 531AC-1 .......... brown .......... X616/3-3G4, X450-10, X14/2-A, X14/1-A, X450-35
15 .......... 854A-1 .......... yellow .......... X616/3-3H2
16 .......... 855A-1 .......... dark green .......... X616/3-3G2
17 .......... vacant
18 .......... 878A-0.5 .......... gray .......... X616/3-3D4
19 .......... vacant
20 .......... vacant
21 .......... 858A-1 .......... gray .......... X616/3-3H1
22 .......... 859A-1 .......... white .......... X616/3-3G1
23 .......... 125AE-1 .......... dark green .......... X616-6, X616/1-1G4, X400-23, X616/1-1G3
24 .......... 118AB-1 .......... gray .......... F03/03A, X106-B, X400-9, X113/2-A
25 .......... 106AC-1 .......... light blue .......... X324-B, X107-C, X106-C
26 .......... 107AE-1 .......... purple .......... X616/1-1H4, X617-20, X400-25, X616/1-1H3
27 .......... vacant
28 .......... vacant
29 .......... vacant
30 .......... vacant
X430
X430 42-pin plug — Connection point for harness at rear of transmission (W30) - Continued
X430
31 .......... 575A-0.5 .......... dark green .......... X616/1-1E3
32 .......... 574A-0.5 .......... yellow .......... X616/1-1A3
33 .......... 527A-1 .......... purple .......... X616/2-2L4
34 .......... vacant
35 .......... vacant
36 .......... vacant
37 .......... 128AB-1 .......... gray .......... X400-10, F03/04A, X113/1-A, X107-B
38 .......... vacant
39 .......... vacant
40 .......... 502A-0.5 .......... red .......... X616/1-1A2
41 .......... vacant
42 .......... vacant
X450
X450
1 .......... vacant
2 .......... vacant
3 .......... 385A-1.5 .......... dark green .......... S01-AID
4 .......... 124AC-1 .......... yellow .......... F03/01A
5 .......... vacant
6 .......... vacant
7 .......... 506A-1 .......... light blue .......... X500-41
8 .......... 264A-2.5 .......... yellow .......... K07/3-87
9 .......... 325A-0.5 .......... dark green .......... X616/1-1A4
10 .......... 531AB-1 .......... brown .......... X616/3-3G4, X14/2-A, X430-14, X14/1-A, X450-35
11 .......... 329A-0.5 .......... white .......... X617-4
12 .......... 347A-0.5 .......... purple .......... X616-23
13 .......... 351A-0.5 .......... brown .......... X617-24
14 .......... 333AC-1 .......... orange .......... K07/5-85, K07/6-87
15 .......... 306A-1 .......... light blue .......... K07/5-30
16 .......... 903A-1 .......... orange .......... S04-B
17 .......... 362A-1 .......... red .......... X579/1-A
18 .......... vacant
19 .......... vacant
20 .......... 111A-1 .......... brown .......... X400-35
21 .......... 322AA-1 .......... red .......... F05/08A, X500-12, X616-10
22 .......... vacant
23 .......... vacant
24 .......... vacant
25 .......... 215A-1 .......... dark green .......... F06/03A
26 .......... 607AA-0.5 .......... purple .......... X616/1-1F3
27 .......... vacant
28 .......... vacant
29 .......... vacant
30 .......... vacant
31 .......... vacant
32 .......... 139AA-1 .......... white .......... F03/14A, F03/15A
33 .......... 114A-1 .......... yellow .......... F03/02A
34 .......... 301A-0.5 .......... brown .......... X616/1-1A1
35 .......... 531AJ-1 .......... brown .......... X616/3-3G4, X450-10, X14/2-A, X430-14, X14/1-A
36 .......... vacant
37 .......... vacant
38 .......... vacant
39 .......... 050AC-1 .......... black .......... XGND6
40 .......... vacant
41 .......... vacant
42 .......... vacant
X473
X473
F04/02E, F04/11E, F04/01E, F04/10E, K02/2-30, K02/1-30, F04/03E, F04/04E, K02/3-30, F03/10E,
1 .......... 012AA-10 .......... red ..........
K02/4-30, K02/5-30, F06/15E, F04/12E, K08/1-30, F04/16E, F06/13E
2 .......... 042AA-10 .......... red .......... F05/09E, F05/10E, F05/12E, F05/11E
X474
X474 2-pin plug for GreenStar
X474
A .......... 981A-2.5 .......... brown .......... F04/13A
XGND5, K07/1-86, K07/3-85, K07/5-86, K08/1-85, K08/2-85, X500-1, X430-1, K08/3-85, X120/2-A, X235-
B .......... 310AH-2.5 .......... black ..........
B, X617-1, X617-14, X38-4, B28/LH-C1, K07/6-86
X488
X488 2-pin plug for operator′s seat
X488
A .......... 293A-1 .......... orange .......... F06/12A
B .......... 310AT-1 .......... black .......... XGND1, X518-F, X37-B, X285-B, X44-B, X239-C, X128-B, X106-D
X500
X500 42-pin plug — Connection point for harness at front end of transmission (W28)
X500
XGND5, K07/1-86, K07/3-85, K07/5-86, K08/1-85, K08/2-85, X430-1, X474-B, K08/3-85, X120/2-A,
1 .......... 310AD-4 .......... black ..........
X235-B, X617-1, X617-14, X38-4, B28/LH-C1, K07/6-86
2 .......... vacant
3 .......... vacant
4 .......... vacant
5 .......... vacant
6 .......... vacant
7 .......... vacant
8 .......... vacant
9 .......... vacant
10 .......... not used ..........
11 .......... vacant
12 .......... 322AC-1 .......... red .......... X450-21, F05/08A, X616-10
13 .......... 555A-1 .......... dark green .......... X616/2-2L3
14 .......... 515A-0.5 .......... dark green .......... X616-24
15 .......... 602A-0.5 .......... red .......... X616-26
16 .......... 050AH-1 .......... black .......... XGND4
17 .......... vacant
18 .......... vacant
19 .......... vacant
20 .......... vacant
21 .......... vacant
22 .......... 353A-0.5 .......... orange .......... X616-17
23 .......... vacant
24 .......... vacant
25 .......... vacant
26 .......... vacant
27 .......... vacant
28 .......... vacant
29 .......... vacant
30 .......... vacant
31 .......... vacant
32 .......... vacant
33 .......... vacant
34 .......... vacant
35 .......... vacant
36 .......... vacant
37 .......... 992AB-1 .......... red .......... F04/05A, X616-14
38 .......... vacant
39 .......... 311AA-1 .......... brown .......... S01-ST
40 .......... 606A-0.5 .......... light blue .......... X617-22
41 .......... 506A-1 .......... light blue .......... X450-7
42 .......... vacant
X516
X516 6-pin plug for hazard warning light switch
X516
A .......... vacant
B .......... 102A-0.5 .......... red .......... X616/3-3F4
C .......... 571AC-1 .......... brown .......... F04/16A, X616/2-2L1
D .......... vacant
E .......... 310AL-1 .......... black ..........
K02/6-85, K02/7-85, X616-12, X579/2-A, X113/2-B, S01/1-A
F .......... 121A-0.5 .......... brown .......... X616/1-1C4
X518
X518 6-pin plug — Connection point for front PTO and adapter wiring harness (W46)
X518
A .......... 973AM-1 .......... orange .......... X245-C, S08-2, F04/09A, X230-A, X122/1-A, X125-A, X122/2-A, X243-B, X174-A, X623-A
B .......... 901A-0.5 .......... brown .......... X616/1-1F4
C .......... 904A-0.5 .......... yellow .......... X616/3-3F1
D .......... 178A-0.5 .......... gray .......... X616/1-1B4
E .......... vacant
F .......... 310AI-0.5 .......... black .......... XGND1, X37-B, X285-B, X44-B, X239-C, X128-B, X488-B, X106-D
X571
X571 9-terminal service socket (CAN BUS)
X571
A .......... 050AG-1 .......... black .......... XGND6
B .......... 912AC-1 .......... red .......... F06/15A, X400-15
C .......... 934AK-1 .......... yellow .......... X616/2-2A1, R19-A
D .......... 935AK-1 .......... dark green .......... X616/2-2B1, R19-B
E .......... vacant
F .......... vacant
G .......... vacant
H .......... vacant
J .......... vacant
X579/1
X579/1 1-pin plug for electrical starting aid indicator light
X579/1
A .......... 362A-1 .......... red .......... X450-17
X579/2
X579/2 1-pin plug for electrical starting aid indicator light
X579/2
A .......... 310AO-1 .......... black ..........
K02/6-85, K02/7-85, X616-12, X516-E, X113/2-B, S01/1-A
X616
X616 26-pin plug for instrument unit
X616
1 .......... 552A-0.5 .......... red .......... X616/1-1C1
2 .......... vacant
3 .......... vacant
4 .......... 927A-0.5 .......... purple .......... X616/1-1C2
5 .......... vacant
6 .......... 125AA-0.5 .......... dark green .......... X616/1-1G4, X400-23, X430-23, X616/1-1G3
7 .......... vacant
8 .......... 922AX-0.5 .......... red .......... F04/04A
9 .......... 517A-0.5 .......... purple .......... X616/1-1B2
10 .......... 322AD-0.5 .......... red .......... X450-21, F05/08A, X500-12
11 .......... 906A-0.5 .......... light blue .......... X235-A
12 .......... 310BK-0.5 .......... black ..........
K02/6-85, K02/7-85, X516-E, X579/2-A, X113/2-B, S01/1-A
13 .......... vacant
14 .......... 992AC-0.5 .......... red .......... F04/05A, X500-37
15 .......... vacant
16 .......... vacant
17 .......... 353A-0.5 .......... orange .......... X500-22
18 .......... vacant
19 .......... vacant
20 .......... vacant
21 .......... 501AC-0.5 .......... brown .......... X616/1-1E2
22 .......... 159AC-0.5 .......... white .......... K02/2-86, X10/3-A
23 .......... 347A-0.5 .......... purple .......... X450-12
24 .......... 515A-0.5 .......... dark green .......... X500-14
25 .......... vacant
26 .......... 602A-0.5 .......... red .......... X500-15
X616/1
X616/1 32-pin plug for basic control unit (BCU)
X616/1
1A1 .......... 301A-0.5 .......... brown .......... X450-34
1A2 .......... 502A-0.5 .......... red .......... X430-40
1A3 .......... 574A-0.5 .......... yellow .......... X430-32
1A4 .......... 325A-0.5 .......... dark green .......... X450-9
1B1 .......... vacant
1B2 .......... 517A-0.5 .......... purple .......... X616-9
1B3 .......... vacant
1B4 .......... 178A-0.5 .......... gray .......... X518-D
1C1 .......... 552A-0.5 .......... red .......... X616-1
1C2 .......... 927A-0.5 .......... purple .......... X616-4
1C3 .......... 815A-0.5 .......... dark green .......... X617-17
1C4 .......... 121A-0.5 .......... brown .......... X516-F
1D1 .......... vacant
1D2 .......... 523A-0.5 .......... orange .......... X617-10
1D3 .......... 814A-0.5 .......... yellow .......... X617-18
1D4 .......... 813A-0.5 .......... orange .......... X617-19
1E1 .......... 341A-0.5 .......... brown .......... X617-11
1E2 .......... 501AC-0.5 .......... brown .......... X616-21
1E3 .......... 575A-0.5 .......... dark green .......... X430-31
1E4 .......... 525A-0.5 .......... dark green .......... X125-B
1F1 .......... 119A-0.5 .......... white .......... X106-A
1F2 .......... 126A-0.5 .......... light blue .......... X107-A
1F3 .......... 607AA-0.5 .......... purple .......... X450-26
1F4 .......... 901A-0.5 .......... brown .......... X518-B
1G1 .......... 182AC-1 .......... red .......... F04/11A, X616/1-1H1
1G2 .......... 122AB-1 .......... red .......... F04/10A, X616/1-1H2
1G3 .......... 125AD-1 .......... dark green .......... X616-6, X616/1-1G4, X400-23, X430-23
1G4 .......... 125AB-1 .......... dark green .......... X616-6, X400-23, X430-23, X616/1-1G3
1H1 .......... 182AB-1 .......... red .......... F04/11A, X616/1-1G1
1H2 .......... 122AC-1 .......... red .......... F04/10A, X616/1-1G2
1H3 .......... 107AD-1 .......... purple .......... X616/1-1H4, X617-20, X400-25, X430-26
1H4 .......... 107AA-1 .......... purple .......... X617-20, X400-25, X430-26, X616/1-1H3
X616/2
X616/2
2A1 .......... 934AD-0.5 .......... yellow .......... R19-A, X571-C
2A2 .......... vacant
2A3 .......... 537A-0.5 .......... purple .......... X623-B
2A4 .......... vacant
2B1 .......... 935AD-0.5 .......... dark green .......... R19-B, X571-D
2B2 .......... vacant
2B3 .......... 538A-0.5 .......... gray .......... X623-C
2B4 .......... vacant
2C1 .......... vacant
2C2 .......... vacant
2C3 .......... vacant
2C4 .......... vacant
2D1 .......... 544A-0.5 .......... yellow .......... X616/2-2D2
2D2 .......... 544A-0.5 .......... yellow .......... X616/2-2D1
2D3 .......... 228AC-0.5 .......... gray .......... F06/13A, K01/4-86
2D4 .......... vacant
2E1 .......... 336A-0.5 .......... light blue .......... K07/6-85
2E2 .......... vacant
2E3 .......... vacant
2E4 .......... 127A-0.5 .......... purple .......... S08-3
2F1 .......... vacant
2F2 .......... vacant
2F3 .......... 245A-0.5 .......... dark green .......... X324-D
2F4 .......... 155A-0.5 .......... dark green .......... S08-1
2G1 .......... 547A-0.5 .......... purple .......... X174-B
2G2 .......... 586A-0.5 .......... gray .......... X125-C
2G3 .......... vacant
2G4 .......... 528A-0.5 .......... gray .......... X174-C
2H1 .......... 536A-0.5 .......... light blue .......... X243-C
2H2 .......... 522AA-0.5 .......... red .......... X122/1-B, X122/2-B
2H3 .......... 535A-0.5 .......... dark green .......... X243-A
2H4 .......... vacant
2J1 .......... vacant
2J2 .......... 244A-0.5 .......... yellow .......... X324-C
2J3 .......... vacant
2J4 .......... vacant
2K1 .......... vacant
2K2 .......... vacant
2K3 .......... vacant
2K4 .......... 557A-0.5 .......... purple .......... X245-A
2L1 .......... 571AB-1 .......... brown .......... F04/16A, X516-C
2L2 .......... 050AI-1 .......... black .......... XGND4
2L3 .......... 555A-1 .......... dark green .......... X500-13
2L4 .......... 527A-1 .......... purple .......... X430-33
2M1 .......... 882AB-1 .......... red .......... F04/08A, X616/3-3G3
2M2 .......... 050AJ-1 .......... black .......... XGND4
2M3 .......... vacant
2M4 .......... vacant
X616/3
X616/3
3A1 .......... 841A-0.5 .......... brown .......... X34-E
3A2 .......... 844A-0.5 .......... yellow .......... X34-F
3A3 .......... 843A-0.5 .......... orange .......... X34-B
3A4 .......... 846A-0.5 .......... light blue .......... X34-A
3B1 .......... 824A-0.5 .......... yellow .......... X35-B
3B2 .......... 821A-0.5 .......... brown .......... X35-A
3B3 .......... 826A-0.5 .......... light blue .......... X35-E
3B4 .......... 823A-0.5 .......... orange .......... X35-F
3C1 .......... vacant
3C2 .......... 884A-0.5 .......... yellow .......... X430-11
3C3 .......... 875A-0.5 .......... dark green .......... X14/1-C
3C4 .......... 869A-0.5 .......... white .......... X14/2-B
3D1 .......... 876A-0.5 .......... light blue .......... X14/1-H
3D2 .......... 877A-0.5 .......... purple .......... X14/1-E
3D3 .......... vacant
3D4 .......... 878A-0.5 .......... gray .......... X430-18
3E1 .......... 834A-0.5 .......... yellow .......... X14/1-F
3E2 .......... 838A-0.5 .......... gray .......... X14/1-D
3E3 .......... 839A-0.5 .......... white .......... X14/1-G
3E4 .......... vacant
3F1 .......... 904A-0.5 .......... yellow .......... X518-C
3F2 .......... 873AB-0.5 .......... orange .......... X14/1-B, X430-9, X14/2-C
3F3 .......... 907A-0.5 .......... purple .......... X230-B
3F4 .......... 102A-0.5 .......... red .......... X516-B
3G1 .......... 859A-1 .......... white .......... X430-22
3G2 .......... 855A-1 .......... dark green .......... X430-16
3G3 .......... 882AC-1 .......... red .......... F04/08A, X616/2-2M1
3G4 .......... 531AA-1 .......... brown .......... X450-10, X14/2-A, X430-14, X14/1-A, X450-35
3H1 .......... 858A-1 .......... gray .......... X430-21
3H2 .......... 854A-1 .......... yellow .......... X430-15
3H3 .......... vacant
3H4 .......... vacant
X617
X617 26-pin plug for instrument unit
X617
XGND5, K07/1-86, K07/3-85, K07/5-86, K08/1-85, K08/2-85, X500-1, X430-1, X474-B, K08/3-85,
1 .......... 310BW-0.5 .......... black ..........
X120/2-A, X235-B, X617-14, X38-4, B28/LH-C1, K07/6-86
2 .......... 138AA-0.5 .......... gray .......... F06/08A, X400-14, X120/1-A
3 .......... 050AU-0.5 .......... black .......... XGND4
4 .......... 329A-0.5 .......... white .......... X450-11
5 .......... vacant
6 .......... vacant
7 .......... vacant
8 .......... vacant
9 .......... vacant
10 .......... 523A-0.5 .......... orange .......... X616/1-1D2
11 .......... 341A-0.5 .......... brown .......... X616/1-1E1
12 .......... vacant
13 .......... 320A-0.5 .......... black .......... S01-GND
XGND5, K07/1-86, K07/3-85, K07/5-86, K08/1-85, K08/2-85, X500-1, X430-1, X474-B, K08/3-85,
14 .......... 310BD-0.5 .......... black ..........
X120/2-A, X235-B, X617-14, X38-4, B28/LH-C1, K07/6-86
15 .......... vacant
16 .......... vacant
17 .......... 815A-0.5 .......... dark green .......... X616/1-1C3
18 .......... 814A-0.5 .......... yellow .......... X616/1-1D3
19 .......... 813A-0.5 .......... orange .......... X616/1-1D4
20 .......... 107AB-0.5 .......... purple .......... X616/1-1H4, X400-25, X430-26, X616/1-1H3
21 .......... 135AG-0.5 .......... dark green .......... S09-H, K02/3-86, K07/1-87, K02/5-86, K02/4-86, X400-32
22 .......... 606A-0.5 .......... light blue .......... X500-40
23 .......... vacant
24 .......... 351A-0.5 .......... brown .......... X450-13
25 .......... 326AA-0.5 .......... light blue .......... K07/5-87
26 .......... vacant
X620
X620 6-pin plug for rear window wiper switch
X620
A .......... 294A-1 .......... yellow .......... X400-19
B .......... 275A-1 .......... dark green .......... X400-17
C .......... 258A-1 .......... gray .......... X44-A
D .......... vacant
E .......... 246AB-1 .......... light blue .......... F06/05A, X400-16
F .......... vacant
X623
X623 3-pin plug for the remote-control switch of the rear PTO (switch on r.h. side)
X623
A .......... 973AR-1 .......... orange .......... X245-C, S08-2, F04/09A, X230-A, X122/1-A, X125-A, X122/2-A, X518-A, X243-B, X174-A
B .......... 537A-0.5 .......... purple .......... X616/2-2A3
C .......... 538A-0.5 .......... gray .......... X616/2-2B3
X629
X629 6-pin plug for windshield wiper switch
X629
A .......... 224AB-1 .......... yellow .......... X38-3, X400-18
B .......... 235AA-1 .......... dark green .......... X38-2, X400-12
C .......... 208A-1 .......... gray .......... X285-A
D .......... vacant
E .......... 236AD-1 .......... light blue .......... X38-1, F06/04A, X400-22
F .......... vacant
XGND1
XGND1 Ground point
XGND1
(-) .......... 310AA-6 .......... black .......... X518-F, X37-B, X285-B, X44-B, X239-C, X128-B, X488-B, X106-D
XGND4
XGND4 Collective ground point for XGND43
XGND4
(-) .......... 050AN-4 .......... black .......... XGND43
(-) .......... 050AH-1 .......... black .......... X500-16
(-) .......... 050AU-0.5 .......... black .......... X617-3
(-) .......... 050AI-1 .......... black .......... X616/2-2L2
(-) .......... 050AJ-1 .......... black .......... X616/2-2M2
(-) .......... 050AD-1 .......... black .......... XGND47
XGND5
XGND5 Ground point
XGND5
Wire no. and cross

Terminal no. Color of wire To plug or component
section
X113/1-B, X107-D, K01/1-85, K01/3-85, K02/1-85, K02/2-85, K02/3-85, K02/4-85, K02/5-85, K02/6-85,
(-) .......... 310AB-6 .......... black ..........
K02/7-85, X616-12, X516-E, X579/2-A, X113/2-B, S01/1-A
K07/1-86, K07/3-85, K07/5-86, K08/1-85, K08/2-85, X500-1, X430-1, X474-B, K08/3-85, X120/2-A, X235-B,
(-) .......... 310AP-6 .......... black ..........
X617-1, X617-14, X38-4, B28/LH-C1, K07/6-86
XGND6
XGND6 Collective ground point for XGND43
XGND6
(-) .......... 050AT-4 .......... black .......... XGND43
(-) .......... 050AW-1 .......... black .......... X400-21
(-) .......... 050AC-1 .......... black .......... X450-39
(-) .......... 050AF-0.5 .......... black .......... X35-C, X35-D, X34-D, X34-C
(-) .......... 050AB-1 .......... black .......... K01/4-85
(-) .......... 050AG-1 .......... black .......... X571-A
XGND43
XGND43 Ground point (electronics)
XGND43
(-) .......... 050AN-4 .......... black .......... XGND4
(-) .......... 050AT-4 .......... black .......... XGND6
XGND47
XGND47 Ground point
XGND47
(-) .......... 050AD-1 .......... black .......... XGND4
Reference 240-26-082, W08 — Wiring Harness - Cab (Tractors with

PowrQuad Plus Transmission)
W08 - Wiring harness, cab (tractors with PowrQuad Plus transmission)
B28/LH
B28/LH Dome light switch, left door
B28/LH
XGND5, K07/1-86, K07/3-85, K07/5-86, K07/6-86, K08/1-85, K08/2-85, X500-1, X430-1, X474-B,
C1 .......... 310BN-1 .......... black ..........
K08/3-85, X120/2-A, X490/1-G, X25-1, X25-14, X38-4
NC2 .......... 274A-1 .......... yellow .......... X400-28
NO4 .......... not used
F03
F03
F03/01A .......... 124A-1 .......... yellow .......... X450-4
F03/02A .......... 114A-1 .......... yellow .......... X450-33
F03/03A .......... 118AA-1 .......... gray .......... X430-24, X106-B, X400-9, X113/2-A
F03/03E .......... 158AA-1 .......... gray .......... F03/04E, S09-C, F06/08E
F03/04A .......... 128AC-1 .......... gray .......... X400-10, X430-37, X113/1-A, X107-B
F03/04E .......... 158AC-1 .......... gray .......... F03/03E, S09-C, F06/08E
F03/05A .......... 132A-1 .......... red .......... X400-4
F03/05E .......... 198AB-1 .......... gray .......... F03/06E
F03/06A .......... 145A-1 .......... dark green .......... X400-3
F03/06E .......... 198AA-2.5 .......... gray .......... K02/3-87
F03/06E .......... 198AB-1 .......... gray .......... F03/05E
F03/07A .......... 162A-1 .......... red .......... X400-6
F03/07E .......... 197AB-1 .......... purple .......... F03/08E
F03/08A .......... 115A-1 .......... dark green .......... X400-5
F03/08E .......... 197AA-2.5 .......... purple .......... K02/4-87
F03/08E .......... 197AB-1 .......... purple .......... F03/07E
F03/09A .......... 179A-1 .......... white .......... X400-30
F03/09E .......... 199A-1 .......... white .......... K02/5-87
F03/10A .......... 177AC-1 .......... purple .......... K02/6-30, F03/16A
X473-1, F04/01E, F04/02E, F04/03E, F04/04E, F04/10E, F04/11E, F04/12E, F04/16E, F05/05E,
F03/10E .......... 012AD-1 .......... red ..........
F06/13E, F06/15E, K02/1-30, K02/2-30, K02/5-30, K03/3-30, K02/4-30, K08/1-30
F03/11A .......... 174A-1 .......... yellow .......... X400-26
F03/11E .......... 104AB-1 .......... yellow .......... F03/12E
F03/12A .......... 184A-1 .......... yellow .......... X400-27
F03/12E .......... 104AA-2.5 .......... yellow .......... K02/7-87
F03/12E .......... 104AB-1 .......... yellow .......... F03/11E
F03/13E .......... 169AA-1.5 .......... white .......... K02/1-87, K02/7-30
F03/14A .......... 139AC-1.5 .......... white .......... F03/15A, X450-32
F03/14E .......... 167AC-1.5 .......... purple .......... K02/2-87, F03/16E
F03/15A .......... 139AD-1.5 .......... white .......... F03/15A, X450-32
F03/15E .......... 109A-1 .......... white .......... K02/6-87A
F03/16A .......... 177AB-1.5 .......... purple .......... K02/6-30, F03/10A
F03/16E .......... 167AB-1.5 .......... purple .......... K02/2-87, F03/14E
F04
F04/01-F04/07
F04/01A .......... 292A-2.5 .......... red .......... K08/3-30
F04/01E .......... 012AL-2.5 .......... red ..........
F06/13E, F06/15E, K02/1-30, K02/2-30, K02/5-30, K03/3-30, K02/4-30, K08/1-30
F04/02A .......... 307A-2.5 .......... purple .......... X239-B
F04/02E .......... 012AV-2.5 .......... red ..........
F06/13E, F06/15E, K02/1-30, K02/2-30, K02/5-30, K03/3-30, K02/4-30, K08/1-30
F04/03A .......... 332A-2.5 .......... red .......... K07/3-30
F04/03E .......... 012AK-2.5 .......... red ..........
F06/13E, F06/15E, K02/1-30, K02/2-30, K02/5-30, K03/3-30, K02/4-30, K08/1-30
F04/04A .......... 922A-1 .......... red .......... X26-10
F04/04E .......... 012AJ-1 .......... red ..........
F06/13E, F06/15E, K02/1-30, K02/2-30, K02/5-30, K03/3-30, K02/4-30, K08/1-30
F04/05A .......... 992AA-1 .......... red .......... X26-14, X500-37
F04/05E .......... 072AL-1 .......... red .......... F04/06E
F04/06A .......... 971A-1 .......... brown .......... X400-20
F04/06E .......... 072AK-1.5 .......... red .......... F04/08E
F04/06E .......... 072AL-1 .......... red .......... F04/05E
F04/07A .......... not used
F04/07E .......... not used
F04
F04/08-F04/13
F04/08A .......... 882AA-1 .......... red .......... F04/08A, X616/2-2M1, X616/3-3G3
F04/08E .......... 072AJ-2.5 .......... red .......... F04/09E
F04/08E .......... 072AK-1.5 .......... red .......... F04/06E
X245-C, X487-F, X174-A, X430-35, X242-B, X230-A, X122/1-A, X125-A, X243-B, X500-18, X235-A,
F04/09A .......... 973AA-2.5 .......... orange ..........
X440-B, X127-A, X122/2-A, X471-2, X623-A
F04/09E .......... 072AD-2.5 .......... red .......... K01/2-87, F04-13E, F05-01E
F04/09E .......... 072AJ-2.5 .......... red .......... F04/08E
F04/10A .......... 122AB-2.5 .......... red .......... X616/1-1G2, X616/1-1H2
F04/10E .......... 012AT-2.5 .......... red ..........
F06/13E, F06/15E, K02/1-30, K02/2-30, K02/5-30, K03/3-30, K02/4-30, K08/1-30
F04/11A .......... 182AA-2.5 .......... red .......... X616/1-1H1, X616/1-1G1
F04/11E .......... 012AU-2.5 .......... red ..........
F06/13E, F06/15E, K02/1-30, K02/2-30, K02/5-30, K03/3-30, K02/4-30, K08/1-30
F04/12A .......... 152AA-1.5 .......... red .......... S09-B, X487-H
F04/12E .......... 012AC-1.5 .......... red ..........
F06/13E, F06/15E, K02/1-30, K02/2-30, K02/5-30, K03/3-30, K02/4-30, K08/1-30
F04/13A .......... 981A-2.5 .......... brown .......... X474-A
F04/13E .......... 072AB-2.5 .......... red .......... K01/2-87, F04/09E, F05-01E
F04
F04/14-F04/16
F04/14A .......... not used
F04/14E .......... not used
F04/15A .......... not used
F04/15E .......... not used
F04/16A .......... 571AA-1 .......... brown .......... X616/2-2L1, X126-B
F04/16E .......... 012AP-1 .......... red ..........
F06/13E, F06/15E, K02/1-30, K02/2-30, K02/5-30, K03/3-30, K02/4-30, K08/1-30
F05
F05/01-F05/12
F05/01A .......... 273A-1 .......... orange .......... X324-A
F05/01E .......... 072AC-2.5 .......... red .......... K01/2-87, F04/09E, F04-13E, F05-01E
F05/01E .......... 072AH-2.5 .......... red .......... F05/02E
F05/02A .......... 913A-1 .......... orange .......... K07/2-87
F05/02E .......... 072AG-1 .......... red .......... F05/04E
F05/02E .......... 072AH-2.5 .......... red .......... F05/01E
F05/03A .......... not used
F05/03E .......... not used
F05/04A .......... 572AE-1 .......... red .......... X489-23, X249/3-C, X490/1-C, K07/4-30, K08/4-87
F05/04E .......... 072AG-1 .......... red .......... F05/02E
F05/05A .......... 503A-1 .......... orange .......... X489-2
F05/05E .......... 012AI-1 .......... red ..........
F06/13E, F06/15E, K02/1-30, K02/2-30, K02/5-30, K03/3-30, K02/4-30, K08/1-30
F05/06A .......... 589A-1 .......... white .......... X490/1-A
F05/06E .......... 022AE-1 .......... red .......... S01-IGN, K07/3-86, F05/08E
F05/07A .......... not used
F05/07E .......... not used
F05/08A .......... 322AC-1 .......... red .......... X450-21, F05/08A, X500-12
F05/08A .......... 322AD-1 .......... red .......... K07/6-30
F05/08E .......... 022AD-1 .......... red .......... S01-IGN, K07/3-86, F05/06E
F05/09E .......... 042AE-1.5 .......... red .......... X473-2, F05/10E, F05/11E, F05/12E
F05/10A .......... 272A-4 .......... red .......... K01/3-30
F05/10E .......... 042AC-4 .......... red .......... X473-2, F05/09E, F05/11E, F05/12E
F05/11A .......... 282A-4 .......... red .......... K01/1-30
F05/11E .......... 042AF-4 .......... red .......... X473-2, F05/09E, F05/10E, F05/12E
F05/12A .......... 902A-4 .......... red .......... K01/2-30
F05/12E .......... 042AD-4 .......... red .......... X473-2, F05/09E, F05/10E, F05/11E
F05
F05/13-F05/16
F05/13A .......... not used
F05/13E .......... not used
F05/14A .......... not used
F05/14E .......... not used
F05/15A .......... not used
F05/15E .......... not used
F05/16A .......... not used
F05/16E .......... not used
F06
F06/01-F06/12
F06/01A .......... 242A-4 .......... red .......... K08/2-30
F06/01E .......... 232AB-4 .......... red .......... K08/1-87, F06/02E
F06/02A .......... 247AA-2.5 .......... purple .......... X400-8
F06/02E .......... 232AC-2.5 .......... red .......... K08/1-87, F06/01E
F06/03A .......... 215A-1 .......... dark green .......... X450-25
F06/03E .......... 213A-1 .......... orange .......... X400-29
F06/04A .......... 236AA-1 .......... light blue .......... X400-22, X38-1, X39-A
F06/04E .......... 202AD-1 .......... red .......... F06/05E
F06/05E .......... 202AC-1 .......... red .......... F06/06E
F06/05E .......... 202AD-1 .......... red .......... F06/04E
F06/06A .......... 256AA-2.5 .......... light blue .......... X37-A, K08/1-86
F06/06E .......... 202AB-1.5 .......... red .......... F06/07E
F06/06E .......... 202AC-1 .......... red .......... F06/05E
F06/07A .......... 204A-1 .......... yellow .......... X400-33
F06/07E .......... 202AA-2.5 .......... red .......... K01/1-87
F06/07E .......... 202AB-1.5 .......... red .......... F06/06E
F06/08A .......... 138AB-1 .......... gray .......... X25-2, X400-14, X120/1-A
F06/08E .......... 158AE-1 .......... gray .......... F03/03E, F03/04E, S09-C
F06/09A .......... 257A-1 .......... purple .......... X400-24
F06/09E .......... 312AD-1 .......... red .......... F06/10E
F06/10A .......... 262A-1 .......... red .......... X487-J
F06/10E .......... 312AC-1 .......... red .......... F06/11E
F06/10E .......... 312AD-1 .......... red .......... F06/09E
F06/11A .......... 297AB-1 .......... purple .......... K08/3-86, X128/1-A, X132-6
F06/11E .......... 312AB-1.5 .......... red .......... F06/12E
F06/11E .......... 312AC-1 .......... red .......... F06/10E
F06/12A .......... 293A-1 .......... orange .......... X488-A
F06/12E .......... 312AA-2.5 .......... red .......... K01/3-87
F06/12E .......... 312AB-1.5 .......... red .......... F06/11E
F06
F06/13-F06/16
F06/13A .......... 228AA-1 .......... gray .......... K01/4-86, X616/2-2D3
F06/13E .......... 012AW-1 .......... red ..........
F05/05E, F06/15E, K02/1-30, K02/2-30, K02/5-30, K03/3-30, K02/4-30, K08/1-30
F06/14A .......... not used
F06/14E .......... not used
F06/15A .......... 912AA-1 .......... red .......... X571-B, X400-15
F06/15E .......... 012AO-1 .......... red ..........
F05/05E, F06/13E, K02/1-30, K02/2-30, K02/5-30, K03/3-30, K02/4-30, K08/1-30
F06/16 .......... not used
F06/16 .......... not used
K01
K01
K01/1
30 .......... 282A-4 .......... red .......... F05/11A
85 .......... 310BH-1 .......... black .......... XGND5, X113/1-B, X113/2-B, X107-D, K01/3-85, H02/1-85, K02/2-85, K02/3-85, K02/4-85, K02/5-85, K02/6-85, K02/7-85
86 .......... 192AC-1 .......... red .......... S01-ELX, K01/2-86
87 .......... 202AA-2.5 .......... red .......... F06/07E
87A .......... not used
K01/2 Relay for power supply to electronics
K01/2
30 .......... 902A .......... red .......... F05/12A
85 .......... 085A-1 .......... dark green .......... K07/1-85
86 .......... 192AB-1 .......... red .......... S01-ELX, K01/1-86
87 .......... 072AA-4 .......... red .......... F04/09E, F04-13E, F05-01E
87A .......... not used
K01/3
30 .......... 272A-4 .......... red .......... F05/10A
85 .......... 310BC-1 .......... black .......... XGND5, X113/1-B, X113/2-B, X107-D, K01/1-85, H02/1-85, K02/2-85, K02/3-85, K02/4-85, K02/5-85, K02/6-85, K02/7-85
86 .......... 212A-1 .......... red .......... S01-ACC
87 .......... 312AA-2.5 .......... red .......... F06/12E
87A .......... not used
K01/4
30 .......... not used
85 .......... 050AB-1 .......... black .......... XGND43, X132-7, X400-21, X503-B, X450-39, X34-C, X34-D, X35-C, X35-D
86 .......... 228AB-1 .......... gray .......... F06/13A, X616/2-2D3
87 .......... not used
87A .......... not used
K02
K02
K02/1 Relay for low-beam headlights
K02/1
X473-1, F03/10E, F04/01E, F04/02E, F04/03E, F04/04E, F04/10E, F04/11E, F04/12E, F04/16E, F05/05E, F06/13E,
30 .......... 012AH-1.5 .......... red ..........
F06/15E, K02/2-30, K02/5-30, K03/3-30, K02/4-30, K08/1-30
85 .......... 310BT-1 .......... black .......... XGND5, X113/1-B, X113/2-B, X107-D, K01/1-85, K01/3-85, K02/2-85, K02/3-85, K02/4-85, K02/5-85, K02/6-85, K02/7-85
86 .......... 144A-1 .......... yellow .......... X487-B
87 .......... 169AB-1.5 .......... white .......... F03/13E, K02/7-30
87A .......... not used
K02/2 Relay for high-beam headlights
K02/2
30 .......... 012AE-1.5 .......... red ..........
F06/15E, K02/1-30, K02/5-30, K03/3-30, K02/4-30, K08/1-30
85 .......... 310AE-1 .......... black .......... XGND5, X113/1-B, X113/2-B, X107-D, K01/1-85, K01/3-85, K02/1-85, K02/3-85, K02/4-85, K02/5-85, K02/6-85, K02/7-85
86 .......... 159AA-1 .......... white .......... X487-C, X26-22
87 .......... 167AA-1.5 .......... purple .......... F03/16E, F03/14E
87A .......... not used
K02
K02
K02/3 Relay for worklights at front of cab roof
K02/3
30 .......... 012AF-2.5 .......... red ..........
F06/15E, K02/1-30, K02/2-30, K02/5-30, K02/4-30, K08/1-30
XGND5, X113/1-B, X113/2-B, X107-D, K01/1-85, K01/3-85, K02/1-85, K02/2-85, K02/4-85, K02/5-85, K02/6-85,
85 .......... 310BM-1 .......... black ..........
K02/7-85
86 .......... 135AB-1 .......... dark green .......... S09-H, K07/1-87, K02/5-86, K02/4-86, X25-21, X400-32
87 .......... 198AA-2.5 .......... gray .......... F03/06E
87A .......... not used
K02/4 Relay for worklights at rear of cab roof
K02/4
30 .......... 012AG-2.5 .......... red ..........
F06/15E, K02/1-30, K02/2-30, K02/5-30, K02/3-30, K08/1-30
85 .......... 310AJ-1 .......... black ..........
K02/7-85
86 .......... 135AE-1 .......... dark green .......... S09-H, K02/3-86, K07/1-87, K02/5-86, X25-21, X400-32
87 .......... 197AA-2.5 .......... purple .......... F03/08E
87A .......... not used
K02
K02
K02/5 Relay for worklights on front corner
K02/5
30 .......... 012AN-1 .......... red ..........
F06/15E, K02/1-30, K02/2-30, K02/3-30, K02/4-30, K08/1-30
85 .......... 310BA-1 .......... black ..........
K02/7-85
86 .......... 135AF-1 .......... dark green .......... S09-H, K02/3-86, K07/1-87, K02/4-86, X25-21, X400-32
87 .......... 199A-1 .......... white .......... F03/09E
87A .......... not used
K02/6 Relay for worklights or headlights on cab frame
K02/6
30 .......... 177AA-1.5 .......... purple .......... F03/16A, F03/10A
85 .......... 310BU-1 .......... black .......... XGND5, X113/1-B, X113/2-B, X107-D, K01/1-85, K01/3-85, K02/1-85, K02/2-85, K02/3-85, K02/4-85, K02/5-85, K02/7-85
86 .......... 131AC-1 .......... brown .......... X400-34, K02/7-86
87 .......... 129A-1.5 .......... white .......... X400-2
87A .......... 109A-1 .......... white .......... F03/15E
K02
K02
K02/7 Relay for headlights on cab frame
K02/7
30 .......... 169AC-1.5 .......... white .......... F03/13E, K02/1-87
85 .......... 310AV-1 .......... black .......... XGND5, X113/1-B, X113/2-B, X107-D, K01/1-85, K01/3-85, K02/1-85, K02/2-85, K02/3-85, K02/4-85, K02/5-85, K02/6-85
86 .......... 131AB-1 .......... brown .......... X400-34, K02/6-86
87 .......... 104AA-2.5 .......... yellow .......... F03/12E
87A .......... 164AA-1 .......... yellow .......... F03/01E, F03/02E, F03/13A
K07
K07
K07/1 3-amp diode for low and high-beam headlights (terminal nos. 87 and 30)
K07/1 1-amp diode for power supply to electronics (terminal nos. 85 and 86)
K07/1
30 .......... 113AC-1 .......... orange .......... S09-M, X400-31, X487-A
85 .......... 085A-1 .......... dark green .......... K01/2-85
XGND5, K07/3-85, K07/5-86, K07/6-86, K08/1-85, K08/2-85, X500-1, X430-1, X474-B, K08/3-85, X120/2-A, X490/1-G,
86 .......... 310BO-1 .......... black ..........
X25-1, X25-14, X38-4, B28/LH-C1
87 .......... 135AC-1 .......... dark green .......... S09-H, K02/3-86, K02/5-86, K02/4-86, X25-21, X400-32
87A .......... not used
K07/2 3-amp diode for hazard warning lights (terminal nos. 87 and 30)
K07/2 1-amp diode for hazard warning lights (terminal nos. 85 and 86)
K07/2
30 .......... 994AA-1 .......... yellow .......... X615-A
30 .......... 994AB-1 .......... yellow .......... K07/2-86
85 .......... 102AC-1 .......... red .......... X616/3-3F4, X126-A
86 .......... 994AB-1 .......... dark green .......... K07/2-30
87 .......... 913A-1 .......... orange .......... F05/02A
87A .......... not used
K07
K07 Diodes and relays (fuse and relay boxes), continued
K07
K07/3
30 .......... 332A-2.5 .......... red .......... F04/03A
85 .......... 310BQ-1 .......... black ..........
X25-1, X25-14, X38-4, B28/LH-C1
86 .......... 022AB-1 .......... red .......... S01-IGN, F05/06E, F05/08E
87 .......... 264A-2.5 .......... yellow .......... X450-8
87A .......... not used
K07/4 Transmission enable relay
K07/4
30 .......... 572AD-1 .......... red .......... F05/04A, X489-23, X249/3-C, X490/1-C, K08/4-87
85 .......... 560A-0.5 .......... black .......... X616/2-2E2
86 .......... 664AC-1 .......... yellow .......... X322-A, X489-64
87 .......... 553AA-1 .......... orange .......... X489-39, X489-40, K08/4-86
87A .......... not used
K07/5 Cold weather starting aid relay
K07/5
30 .......... 306A-1 .......... light blue .......... X450-15
85 .......... 333AA-1 .......... orange .......... K07/6-87, X450-14
86 .......... 310BS-1 .......... black ..........
X25-1, X25-14, X38-4, B28/LH-C1
87 .......... 326A-1 .......... light blue .......... X25-25
87A .......... not used
K07
K07 Diodes and relays (fuse and relay boxes), continued
K07
K07/6
30 .......... 322AD-1 .......... red .......... F05/08A
85 .......... 336A-0.5 .......... light blue .......... X616/2-2E1
86 .......... 310AW-1 .......... black ..........
X25-1, X25-14, X38-4, B28/LH-C1
87 .......... 333AB-1 .......... orange .......... K07/5-85, X450-14
87A .......... not used
K07/7 Vacant
K08
K08
K08/1 Relay for air conditioning system
K08/1
30 .......... 012AM-4 .......... red ..........
F06/15E, K02/1-30, K02/2-30, K02/5-30, K02/3-30, K02/4-30
85 .......... 310BP-1 .......... black ..........
X25-1, X25-14, X38-4, B28/LH-C1
86 .......... 256AC-1 .......... light blue .......... F06/06A, X37-A
87 .......... 232AA-4 .......... red .......... F06/01E, F06/02E
87A .......... not used
K08/2 Fan relay
K08/2
30 .......... 242A-4 .......... red .......... F06/01A
85 .......... 310BY-1 .......... black ..........
X25-1, X25-14, X38-4, B28/LH-C1
86 .......... 210A-1 .......... black .......... X400-7
87 .......... 234A-2.5 .......... yellow .......... X400-1
87A .......... not used
K08
K08
K08/3 Relay for 3-terminal power outlet socket
K08/3
30 .......... 292A-2.5 .......... red .......... F04/01A
XGND5, K07/1-86, K07/3-85, K07/5-86, K07/6-86, K08/1-85, K08/2-85, X500-1, X430-1, X474-B, X120/2-A, X490/1-G,
85 .......... 310BR-1 .......... black ..........
X25-1, X25-14, X38-4, B28/LH-C1
86 .......... 297AA-1 .......... purple .......... F06/11A, X128/1-A, X132-6
87 .......... 412A-2.5 .......... red .......... X239-A
87A .......... not used
K08/4 "Come Home" mode
K08/4
30 .......... not used
85 .......... not used
86 .......... 553AD-1 .......... orange .......... K07/4-87, X489-39, X489-40
87 .......... 572AK-1 .......... red .......... F05/04A, X489-23, X249/3-C, X490/1-C, K07/4-30
87A .......... not used
S01
S01 8-pin plug, main switch
S01
ACC .......... 212A-1 .......... red .......... K01/3-86
AID .......... 385A-1.5 .......... dark green .......... X450-3
BAT1 .......... 092AC-1.5 .......... red .......... F05/09A, S01-BAT2
BAT2 .......... 092AB-1.5 .......... red .......... F05/09A, S01-BAT1
ELX .......... 192AA-1.5 .......... red .......... K01/1-86, K01/2-86
GND .......... not used
IGN .......... 022AA-1.5 .......... red .......... K07/3-86, F05/06E, F05/08E
ST .......... 311AA-1 .......... brown .......... X450-7
S09
S09 5-pin plug, light switch
S09
B .......... 152AB-1.5 .......... red .......... F04/12A, X487-H
C .......... 158AD-1.5 .......... gray .......... F03/03E, F03/04E, F06/08E
L .......... not used
M .......... 113AA-1.5 .......... orange .......... X400-31, K07/1-30, X487-A
X14/1
X14/1 8-pin plug for feedback unit of hitch control
X14/1
A .......... 531AD-1 .......... brown .......... X430-14, X450-10, X500-17, X14/2-A, X616/3-3G4, X450-35
B .......... 873AA-1 .......... orange .......... X616/3-3F2, X430-9, X14/2-C
C .......... 875A-0.5 .......... dark green .......... X616/3-3C3
D .......... 838A-0.5 .......... gray .......... X616/3-2E2
E .......... 877A-0.5 .......... purple .......... X616/3-3D2
F .......... 834A-0.5 .......... yellow .......... X616/3-3E1
G .......... 839A-0.5 .......... white .......... X616/3-3E3
H .......... 876A-0.5 .......... light blue .......... X616/3-3D1
X14/2
X14/2 3-pin plug for sensitivity potentiometer
X14/2
A .......... 531AH-0.5 .......... brown .......... X430-14, X450-10, X500-17, X14/1-A, X616/3-3G4, X450-35
B .......... 869A-0.5 .......... white .......... X616/3-3C4
C .......... 873AE-0.5 .......... orange .......... X14/1-B, X616/3-3F2, X430-9
X20B
X20B 3-pin plug — Connection point for windshield washer switch harness (W18)
X20B
A .......... 208A-1 .......... gray .......... X285-A
B .......... 905A-0.5 .......... dark green .......... X25-6
XGND43, XGND47, X500-16, X571-A, X489-1, X489-24, X25-3, X400-36, X615-C, X616/2-2L2,
C .......... 050AM-1 .......... black ..........
X616/2-2M2
X25
X25 26-pin plug for basic informator (BIF)
X25
XGND5, K07/1-86, K07/3-85, K07/5-86, K07/6-86, K08/1-85, K08/2-85, X500-1, X430-1, X474-B,
1 .......... 310BW-0.5 .......... black ..........
K08/3-85, X120/2-A, X490/1-G, X25-14, X38-4, B28/LH-C1
2 .......... 138AA-0.5 .......... gray .......... F06/08A, X400-14, X120/1-A
XGND43, XGND47, X500-16, X571-A, X489-1, X489-24, X20B-C, X400-36, X615-C, X616/2-2L2,
3 .......... 050AS-0.5 .......... black ..........
X616/2-2M2
4 .......... 329A-0.5 .......... white .......... X450-11
5 .......... not used
6 .......... 905A-0.5 .......... dark green .......... X20B-B
7 .......... not used
8 .......... not used
9 .......... not used
10 .......... not used
11 .......... not used
12 .......... 149AA-0.5 .......... white .......... X616/2-2M4
13 .......... not used
XGND5, K07/1-86, K07/3-85, K07/5-86, K07/6-86, K08/1-85, K08/2-85, X500-1, X430-1, X474-B,
14 .......... 310BD-0.5 .......... black ..........
K08/3-85, X120/2-A, X490/1-G, X25-1, X38-4, B28/LH-C1
15 .......... 509A-0.5 .......... white .......... X500-36
16 .......... not used
17 .......... not used
18 .......... not used
19 .......... not used
20 .......... 107AB-0.5 .......... purple .......... X616/1-1H4, X400-25, X430-26, X616/1-1H3
21 .......... 135BG-0.5 .......... dark green .......... S09-H, K02/3-86, K07/1-87, K02/5-86, K02/4-86, X400-32
22 .......... 606A-0.5 .......... light blue .......... X500-40
23 .......... not used
24 .......... 351A-0.5 .......... brown .......... X450-13
25 .......... 326AA-0.5 .......... light blue .......... K07/5-87
26 .......... not used
X26
X26 26-pin plug for basic informator (BIF)
X26
1 .......... not used
2 .......... 156A-0.5 .......... light blue .......... X247-17
3 .......... 362A-0.5 .......... red .......... X450-17
4 .......... not used
5 .......... 153A-0.5 .......... orange .......... X247-22
7 .......... not used
8 .......... not used
9 .......... not used
10 .......... 922AX-0.5 .......... red .......... F04/04A
11 .......... not used
12 .......... not used
13 .......... not used
14 .......... 992AC-0.5 .......... red .......... F04/05A, X500-37
15 .......... 934AB-0.5 .......... yellow .......... X615-E, X571-C, X489-44, X616/2-2A1, X400-41
16 .......... 935AB-0.5 .......... dark green .......... X615-F, X571-D, X489-21, X616/2-2B1, X400-42
17 .......... 353A-0.5 .......... orange .......... X500-22
18 .......... not used
19 .......... not used
20 .......... not used
21 .......... not used
22 .......... 159AC-0.5 .......... white .......... K02/02-86, X487-C
23 .......... 347A-0.5 .......... purple .......... X450-12
24 .......... 515A-0.5 .......... dark green .......... X500-14
25 .......... 154A-0.5 .......... yellow .......... X247-13
26 .......... 602A-0.5 .......... red .......... X500-15
X34
X34 6-pin plug for remote-control switch of hitch control, right
X34
A .......... 846A-0.5 .......... light blue .......... X616/3-3A4
B .......... 843A-0.5 .......... orange .......... X616/3-3A3
C .......... 050AK-0.5 .......... black .......... XGND43, X132-7, K01/4-85, X400-21, X503-B, X450-39, X34-D, X35-C, X35-D
D .......... 050AE-0.5 .......... black .......... XGND43, X132-7, K01/4-85, X400-21, X503-B, X450-39, X34-C, X35-C, X35-D
E .......... 841A-0.5 .......... brown .......... X616/3-3A1
F .......... 844A-0.5 .......... yellow .......... X616/3-3A2
X35
X35 6-pin plug for remote-control switch of hitch control, left
X35
A .......... 821AA-0.5 .......... brown .......... X616/3-3A2
B .......... 824A-0.5 .......... yellow .......... X616/3-3A1
C .......... 050AA-0.5 .......... black .......... XGND43, X132-7, K01/4-85, X400-21, X503-B, X450-39, X34-C, X34-D, X35-D
D .......... 050AD-0.5 .......... black .......... XGND43, X132-7, K01/4-85, X400-21, X503-B, X450-39, X34-C, X34-D, X35-C
E .......... 826A-0.5 .......... light blue .......... X616/3-3B3
F .......... 823AA-0.5 .......... orange .......... X616/3-3B4
X37
X37 2-pin plug for front loader
X37
A .......... 256AB-1 .......... light blue .......... F06/06A, K08/1-86
B .......... 310BF-1 .......... black .......... XGND1, X247-16, X247-9, X247-1, X285-B, X128-B, X488-B, X106-D, X44-B, X239-C
X38
X38
1 .......... 236AC-1 .......... light blue .......... F06/04A, X400-22, X39-A
2 .......... 235AB-1 .......... dark green .......... X39-D, X400-12
3 .......... 224AB-1 .......... yellow .......... X39-B, X400-18
XGND5, K07/1-86, K07/3-85, K07/5-86, K07/6-86, K08/1-85, K08/2-85, X500-1, X430-1, X474-B,
4 .......... 310AN-1 .......... black ..........
K08/3-85, X120/2-A, X490/1-G, X25-1, X25-14, B28/LH-C1
X39
X39 4-pin plug — Connection point for windshield wiper switch harness (W18)
X39
A .......... 236AD-1 .......... light blue .......... F06/04A, X400-22, X38-1
B .......... 224AA-1 .......... yellow .......... X38-3, X400-18
C .......... not used
D .......... 235AA-1 .......... dark green .......... X38-2, X400-12
X44
X44 2-pin plug for rear window washer pump
X44
A .......... 258A-1 .......... gray .......... X620-C
B .......... 310AC-1 .......... black .......... XGND1, X247-16, X247-9, X247-1, X37-B, X285-B, X128-B, X488-B, X106-D, X239-C
X106
X106 4-pin plug for right tail, brake and turn signal lights
X106
A .......... 119A-0.5 .......... white .......... X616/1-1F1
B .......... 118AC-1 .......... gray .......... F03/03A, X430-24, X400-9, X113/2-A
D .......... 310AG-1 .......... black .......... XGND1, X247-16, X247-9, X247-1, X37-B, X285-B, X128-B, X488-B, X44-B, X239-C
X107
X107 4-pin plug for left tail, brake and turn signal lights
X107
A .......... 126A-0.5 .......... light blue .......... X616/1-1F2
B .......... 128AD-1 .......... gray .......... X400-10, F03/04A, X430-37, X113/1-A
XGND5, X113/1-B, X113/2-B, K01/1-85, K01/3-85, K02/1-85, K02/2-85, K02/3-85, K02/4-85,

D .......... 310AR-1 .......... black ..........
K02/5-85, K02/6-85, K02/7-85
X113/1
X113/1 2-pin plug for left license plate light
X113/1
A .......... 128AA-1 .......... gray .......... X400-10, F03/04A, X430-37, X107-B
B .......... 310AQ-1 .......... black ..........
K02/6-85, K02/7-85
X113/2
X113/2 2-pin plug for right license plate light
X113/2
A .......... 118AE-1 .......... gray .......... F03/03A, X430-24, X106-B, X400-9
B .......... 310BV-1 .......... black ..........
K02/6-85, K02/7-85
X120/1
X120/1
A .......... 138AD-1 .......... gray .......... X25-2, F06/08A, X400-14
X120/1
X120/2
XGND5, K07/1-86, K07/3-85, K07/5-86, K07/6-86, K08/1-85, K08/2-85, X500-1, X430-1, X474-B,
A .......... 310BE-1 .......... black ..........
K08/3-85, X490/1-G, X25-1, X25-14, X38-4, B28/LH-C1
X122/1
X122/1
F04/09A, X245-C, X487-F, X174-A, X430-35, X242-B, X230-A, X125-A, X243-B, X500-18, X235-A,
A .......... 973AN-1 .......... orange ..........
X440-B, X127-A, X122/2-A, X471-2, X623-A
B .......... 522AB-1 .......... red .......... X616/2-2H2, X122/2-B
X122/2
X122/2
F04/09A, X245-C, X487-F, X174-A, X430-35, X242-B, X230-A, X122/1-A, X125-A, X243-B, X500-18,
A .......... 973AO-1 .......... orange ..........
X235-A, X440-B, X127-A, X471-2, X623-A
B .......... 522AC-1 .......... red .......... X616/2-2H2, X122/1-B
X125
X125
F04/09A, X245-C, X487-F, X174-A, X430-35, X242-B, X230-A, X122/1-A, X243-B, X500-18,
A .......... 973AI-1 .......... orange ..........
X235-A, X440-B, X127-A, X122/2-A, X471-2, X623-A
B .......... 525A-0.5 .......... dark green .......... X616/1-1E4
C .......... 586A-0.5 .......... light blue .......... X616/2-2G2
X126
X126
A .......... 102AA-1 .......... red .......... X616/3-3F4, K07/2-85
B .......... 571AC-1 .......... brown .......... F04/16A, X616/2-2L1
C .......... not used
X127
X127 3-pin plug for front PTO switch
X127
A .......... 973AM-1 .......... orange ..........
X235-A, X440-B, X122/2-A, X471-2, X623-A
B .......... 901A-0.5 .......... brown .......... X616/1-1F4
C .......... 904A-0.5 .......... yellow .......... X616/3-3F1
X128
X128 2-pin plug for cigarette lighter
X128
A .......... 297AC-1 .......... purple .......... K08/3-86, F06/11A, X132-6
B .......... 310AM-1 .......... black .......... XGND1, X247-16, X247-9, X247-1, X37-B, X285-B, X488-B, X106-D, X44-B, X239-C
X132
X132 7-terminal signal socket
X132
1 .......... 512AG-1 .......... red .......... X500-42, X616/2-2D4
2 .......... 501AD-1 .......... brown .......... X489-27, X616/1-1E2
3 .......... 523AB-0.5 .......... orange .......... X616/1-1D2
4 .......... not used
5 .......... not used
6 .......... 297AD-1 .......... purple .......... K08/3-86, F06/11A, X128/1-A
7 .......... 050AV-1 .......... black .......... XGND43, K01/4-85, X400-21, X503-B, X450-39, X34-C, X34-D, X35-C, X35-D
X174
X174 3-pin plug for the remote-control switch of the rear PTO (switch on l.h. side)
X174
F04/09A, X245-C, X487-F, X430-35, X242-B, X230-A, X122/1-A, X125-A, X243-B, X500-18, X235-A,
A .......... 973AB-1 .......... orange ..........
X440-B, X127-A, X122/2-A, X471-2, X623-A
B .......... 547A-0.5 .......... purple .......... X616/2-2G1
C .......... 528A-0.5 .......... gray .......... X616/2-2G4
X230
X230
F04/09A, X245-C, X487-F, X174-A, X430-35, X242-B, X122/1-A, X125-A, X243-B, X500-18, X235-A,
A .......... 973AL-0.5 .......... orange ..........
X440-B, X127-A, X122/2-A, X471-2, X623-A
B .......... 807A-0.5 .......... purple .......... X616/3-3F3
X235
X235 2-pin plug for handbrake switch
X235
F04/09A, X245-C, X487-F, X174-A, X430-35, X242-B, X230-A, X122/1-A, X125-A, X243-B,
A .......... 973AJ-0.5 .......... orange ..........
X500-18, X440-B, X127-A, X122/2-A, X471-2, X623-A
B .......... 906A-0.5 .......... light blue .......... X616/2-2G3
X239
X239
A .......... 412A-2.5 .......... red .......... K08/3-87
B .......... 307A-2.5 .......... purple .......... F04/02A
C .......... 310AX-2.5 .......... black .......... XGND1, X247-16, X247-9, X247-1, X37-B, X285-B, X128-B, X488-B, X106-D, X44-B
X242
X242 3-pin plug for HMS switch
X242
A .......... 542A-0.5 .......... red .......... X616/2-2J4
F04/09A, X245-C, X487-F, X174-A, X430-35, X230-A, X122/1-A, X125-A, X243-B, X500-18, X235-A,
B .......... 973AF-1 .......... orange ..........
X440-B, X127-A, X122/2-A, X471-2, X623-A
C .......... not used
X243
X243 3-pin plug for rear PTO preselector switch
X243
A .......... 535A-0.5 .......... dark green .......... X616/2-2H3
F04/09A, X245-C, X487-F, X174-A, X430-35, X242-B, X230-A, X122/1-A, X125-A, X500-18,
B .......... 973AG-1 .......... orange ..........
X235-A, X440-B, X127-A, X122/2-A, X471-2, X623-A
C .......... 526A-0.5 .......... light blue .......... X616/2-2H1
X244
X245
A .......... 557A-0.5 .......... purple .......... X616/2-2K4
B .......... 511A-0.5 .......... brown .......... X616/2-2J1
F04/09A, X487-F, X174-A, X430-35, X242-B, X230-A, X122/1-A, X125-A, X243-B, X500-18, X235-A,
C .......... 973AE-1 .......... orange ..........
X440-B, X127-A, X122/2-A, X471-2, X623-A
X247
X247 26-pin plug for monitor unit
X247
1 .......... 310AK-0.5 .......... black .......... XGND1, X247-16, X247-9, X37-B, X285-B, X128-B, X488-B, X106-D, X44-B, X239-C
2 .......... not used
3 .......... 517A-0.5 .......... purple .......... X616/1-1B2
4 .......... 567A-0.5 .......... purple .......... X616/1-1B3
5 .......... 552A-0.5 .......... red .......... X616/1-1C1
6 .......... 927A-0.5 .......... purple .......... X616/1-1C2
7 .......... not used
8 .......... 178A-0.5 .......... gray .......... X616/1-1B4
9 .......... 310AZ-0.5 .......... black .......... XGND1, X247-16, X247-1, X37-B, X285-B, X128-B, X488-B, X106-D, X44-B, X239-C
10 .......... not used
11 .......... not used
12 .......... 813A-0.5 .......... orange .......... X616/1-1D4
13 .......... 154A-0.5 .......... yellow .......... X26-25
14 .......... 815A-0.5 .......... dark green .......... X616/1-1C3
15 .......... not used
16 .......... 310BK-0.5 .......... black .......... XGND1, X247-9, X247-1, X37-B, X285-B, X128-B, X488-B, X106-D, X44-B, X239-C
17 .......... 156A-0.5 .......... light blue .......... X26-2
18 .......... not used
19 .......... not used
20 .......... not used
21 .......... not used
22 .......... 153A-0.5 .......... orange .......... X26-5
23 .......... 814A-0.5 .......... yellow .......... X616/1-1D3
24 .......... not used
25 .......... not used
26 .......... not used
X249/3
X249/3 4-pin plug for gear selector switch
X249/3
A .......... 583AA-1 .......... orange .......... X489-41
B .......... 581AA-1 .......... brown .......... X489-55
C .......... 572AG-1 .......... red .......... F05/04A, X489-23, X490/1-C, K07/4-30, K08/4-87
D .......... not used
X285
X285 2-pin plug for windshield washer pump
X285
A .......... 208A-1 .......... gray .......... X20B-A
B .......... 310AS-1 .......... black .......... XGND1, X247-16, X247-9, X247-1, X37-B, X128-B, X488-B, X106-D, X44-B, X239-C
X322
X322 6-pin plug — Connection point for clutch sending unit harness (W13)
X322
A .......... 664AA-1 .......... yellow .......... X489-64, K07/4-86
B .......... 646A-1 .......... light blue .......... X489-11
C .......... 217A-1 .......... purple .......... X489-17
D .......... 241AA-1 .......... brown .......... X489-25, X500-20
E .......... 254A-1 .......... yellow .......... X489-16
F .......... 243AA-1 .......... orange .......... X489-22, X500-21
X324
X324 8-pin plug for brake switch
X324
A .......... 273A-1 .......... orange .......... F05/01A
C .......... 244A-0.5 .......... yellow .......... X616/2-2J2
D .......... 245A-0.5 .......... dark green .......... X616/2-2F3
E .......... not used
F .......... not used
G .......... not used
H .......... not used
X400
X400 42-pin plug — Connection point for cab roof and fan wiring harness (W19)
X400
1 .......... 234A-2.5 .......... yellow .......... K08/2-87
2 .......... 129A-1.5 .......... white .......... K02/6-87
3 .......... 145A-1 .......... dark green .......... F03/06A
4 .......... 132A-1 .......... red .......... F03/05A
5 .......... 115A-1 .......... dark green .......... F03/08A
6 .......... 162A-1 .......... red .......... F03/07A
7 .......... 210A-1 .......... black .......... K08/2-86
8 .......... 247AA-2.5 .......... purple .......... F06/02A
9 .......... 118AD-1 .......... gray .......... F03/03A, X430-24, X106-B, X113/2-A
10 .......... 128AF-1 .......... gray .......... F03/04A, X430-37, X113/1-A, X107-B
11 .......... not used
12 .......... 235AC-1 .......... dark green .......... X39-D, X38-2
13 .......... not used
14 .......... 138AC-1 .......... gray .......... X25-2, F06/08A, X120/1-A
15 .......... 912AC-1 .......... red .......... F06/15A, X571-B
17 .......... 275A-1 .......... dark green .......... X620-B
18 .......... 224AC-1 .......... yellow .......... X39-B, X38-3
19 .......... 294A-1 .......... yellow .......... X620-A
20 .......... 971A-1 .......... brown .......... F04/06A
21 .......... 050AW-1 .......... black .......... XGND43, X132-7, K01/4-85, X503-B, X450-39, X34-C, X34-D, X35-C, X35-D
22 .......... 236AB-1 .......... light blue .......... F06/04A, X38-1, X39-A
24 .......... 257A-1 .......... purple .......... F06/09A
25 .......... 107AC-1 .......... purple .......... X616/1-1H4, X25-20, X430-26, X616/1-1H3
26 .......... 174A-1 .......... yellow .......... F03/11A
27 .......... 184A-1 .......... yellow .......... F03/12A
28 .......... 274A-1 .......... yellow .......... B28/LH-NC2
29 .......... 213A-1 .......... orange .......... F06-03E
30 .......... 179A-1 .......... white .......... F03/09A
X400
X400 42-pin plug — Connection point for cab roof and fan wiring harness (W19), continued
X400
31 .......... 113AE-1 .......... orange .......... S09-M, K07/1-30, X487-A
33 .......... 204A-1 .......... yellow .......... F06/07A
34 .......... 131AD-1 .......... brown .......... K02/7-86, K02/6-86
35 .......... 111A-1 .......... brown .......... X450-20
XGND43, XGND47, X500-16, X571-A, X489-1, X489-24, X20B-C, X25-3, X615-C, X616/2-2L2,
36 .......... 050AP-1 .......... black ..........
X616/2-2M2
37 .......... not used
38 .......... not used
39 .......... 930AC-0.5 .......... black .......... X615-D
40 .......... 932AC-0.5 .......... red .......... X615-B
41 .......... 934AI-0.5 .......... yellow .......... X615-E, X26-15, X571-C, X489-44, X616/2-2A1
42 .......... 935AI-0.5 .......... dark green .......... X615-F, X26-16, X571-D, X489-21, X616/2-2B1
X430
X430
XGND5, K07/1-86, K07/3-85, K07/5-86, K07/6-86, K08/1-85, K08/2-85, X500-1, X474-B,

1 .......... 310AF-4 .......... black ..........
K08/3-85, X120/2-A, X490/1-G, X25-1, X25-14, X38-4, B28/LH-C1
2 .......... not used
3 .......... not used
4 .......... not used
5 .......... not used
6 .......... not used
7 .......... not used
8 .......... not used
9 .......... 873AD-1 .......... orange .......... X14/1-B, X616/3-3F2, X14/2-C
10 .......... not used
11 .......... 884A-0.5 .......... yellow .......... X616/3-3C2
12 .......... not used
13 .......... not used
14 .......... 531AC-1 .......... brown .......... X450-10, X500-17, X14/1-A, X14/2-A, X616/3-3G4, X450-35
15 .......... 854A-1 .......... yellow .......... X616/3-3H2
16 .......... 855A-1 .......... dark green .......... X616/3-3G2
17 .......... not used
18 .......... 878A-0.5 .......... gray .......... X616/3-3D4
19 .......... not used
20 .......... not used
21 .......... 858A-1 .......... gray .......... X616/3-3H1
22 .......... 859A-1 .......... white .......... X616/3-3G1
24 .......... 118AB-1 .......... gray .......... F03/03A, X106-B, X400-9, X113/2-A
26 .......... 107AE-1 .......... purple .......... X616/1-1H4, X25-20, X400-25, X616/1-1H3
27 .......... not used
28 .......... not used
29 .......... not used
30 .......... not used
X430
X430 42-pin plug — Connection point for harness at rear of transmission (W30) - Continued
X430
31 .......... 575A-0.5 .......... dark green .......... X616/1-1E3
32 .......... 574A-0.5 .......... yellow .......... X616/1-1A3
33 .......... 527A-1 .......... purple .......... X616/2-2L4
34 .......... not used
F04/09A, X245-C, X487-F, X174-A, X242-B, X230-A, X122/1-A, X125-A, X243-B, X500-18, X235-
35 .......... 973AD-0.5 .......... orange ..........
A, X440-B, X127-A, X122/2-A, X471-2, X623-A
36 .......... not used
37 .......... 128AB-1 .......... gray .......... X400-10, F03/04A, X113/1-A, X107-B
38 .......... not used
39 .......... not used
40 .......... 502A-0.5 .......... red .......... X616/1-1A2
41 .......... not used
42 .......... not used
X440
X440 3-pin plug for the record/save switch
X440
A .......... 532A-0.5 .......... red .......... X616/2-2K1
B .......... 973AK-1 .......... orange ..........
X235-A, X127-A, X122/2-A, X471-2, X623-A
C .......... not used
X450
X450
1 .......... not used
2 .......... not used
3 .......... 385A-1.5 .......... dark green .......... S01-AID
4 .......... 124A-1 .......... yellow .......... F03/01A
5 .......... not used
6 .......... not used
7 .......... 311AA-1 .......... brown .......... S01-ST
8 .......... 264A-2.5 .......... yellow .......... K07/3-87
9 .......... 325A-0.5 .......... dark green .......... X616/1-1A4
10 .......... 531AB-1 .......... brown .......... X430-14, X500-17, X14/1-A, X14/2-A, X616/3-3G4, X450-35
11 .......... 329A-0.5 .......... white .......... X25-4
12 .......... 347A-0.5 .......... purple .......... X26-23
13 .......... 351A-0.5 .......... brown .......... X25-24
14 .......... 333AC-1 .......... orange .......... K07/5-85, K07/6-87
15 .......... 306A-1 .......... light blue .......... K07/5-30
16 .......... 903A-1 .......... orange .......... X487-E
17 .......... 362A-0.5 .......... red .......... X26-3
18 .......... not used
19 .......... not used
20 .......... 111A-1 .......... brown .......... X400-35
21 .......... 322AB-1 .......... red .......... F05/08A, X500-12
22 .......... not used
23 .......... not used
24 .......... not used
25 .......... 215A-1 .......... dark green .......... F06/03A
26 .......... 607AA-0.5 .......... purple .......... X616/1-1F3
27 .......... not used
28 .......... not used
29 .......... not used
30 .......... not used
31 .......... not used
32 .......... 139AA-1 .......... white .......... F03/14A, F03/15A
33 .......... 114A-1 .......... yellow .......... F03-02A
34 .......... 301A-0.5 .......... brown .......... X616/1-1A1
35 .......... 531AJ-1 .......... brown .......... X430-14, X450-10, X500-17, X14/1-A, X14/2-A, X616/3-3G4
36 .......... not used
39 .......... 050AC-1 .......... black .......... XGND43, X132-7, K01/4-85, X400-21, X503-B, X34-C, X34-D, X35-C, X35-D
40 .......... not used
41 .......... not used
42 .......... not used
X471
X471 4-pin plug for program switch
X471
1 .......... 554A-0.5 .......... yellow .......... X616/2-2J3
2 .......... 973AP-0.5 .......... orange ..........
X235-A, X440-B, X127-A, X122/2-A, X623-A
3 .......... 551A-0.5 .......... brown .......... X616/2-2K3
4 .......... 559A-0.5 .......... white .......... X616/2-2K2
X473
X473
F03/10E, F04/01E, F04/02E, F04/03E, F04/04E, F04/10E, F04/11E, F04/12E, F04/16E, F05/05E,
1 .......... 012AA-10 .......... red ..........
F06/13E, F06/15E, K02/1-30, K02/2-30, K02/5-30, K02/3-30, K02/4-30, K08/1-30
2 .......... 042AA-10 .......... red .......... F05/09E, F05/10E, F05/11E, F05/12E
X474
X474 2-pin plug for GreenStar
X474
A .......... 981A-2.5 .......... brown .......... F04-13A
XGND5, K07/1-86, K07/3-85, K07/5-86, K07/6-86, K08/1-85, K08/2-85, X500-1, X430-1, K08/3-85,
B .......... 310AH-2.5 .......... black ..........
X120/2-A, X490/1-G, X25-1, X25-14, X38-4, B28/LH-C1
X487
X487 10-pin plug for multifunction unit
X487
A .......... 113AD-1 .......... orange .......... S09-M, X400-31, K07/1-30
B .......... 144A-1 .......... yellow .......... K02/1-86
C .......... 159AB-1 .......... white .......... K02/02-86, X26-22
D .......... 127A-0.5 .......... purple .......... X616/2-2E4
E .......... 903A-1 .......... orange .......... X450-16
F04/09A, X245-C, X174-A, X430-35, X242-B, X230-A, X122/1-A, X125-A, X243-B, X500-18,
F .......... 973AC-1 .......... orange ..........
X235-A, X440-B, X127-A, X122/2-A, X471-2, X623-A
G .......... 155A-0.5 .......... dark green .......... X616/2-2F4
H .......... 152AC-1 .......... red .......... F04/12A, S09-B, X487-H
J .......... 262A-1 .......... red .......... F06/10A
K .......... not used
X488
X488 2-pin plug for operator′s seat
X488
A .......... 293A-1 .......... orange .......... F06-12A
B .......... 310AT-1 .......... black .......... XGND1, X247-16, X247-9, X247-1, X37-B, X285-B, X128-B, X106-D, X44-B, X239-C
X489
X489 68-pin plug for EPC

X489
XGND43, XGND47, X500-16, X571-A, X489-24, X20B-C, X25-3, X400-36, X615-C, X616/2-2L2,
1 .......... 050AJ-1 .......... black ..........
X616/2-2M2
2 .......... 503A-1 .......... orange .......... F05-05A
3 .......... 614A-1 .......... yellow .......... X490/1-F
4 .......... not used
5 .......... 577A-1 .......... purple .......... X500-8
6 .......... not used
7 .......... 578A-1 .......... gray .......... X500-30
8 .......... not used
9 .......... 570A-1 .......... black .......... X500-27
10 .......... 579A-1 .......... white .......... X500-28
11 .......... 646A-1 .......... light blue .......... X322-B
12 .......... not used
13 .......... not used
14 .......... 549A-1 .......... white .......... X500-19
15 .......... not used
16 .......... 254A-1 .......... yellow .......... X322-E
17 .......... 217A-1 .......... purple .......... X322-C
18 .......... not used
19 .......... not used
20 .......... not used
21 .......... 935AF-0.5 .......... dark green .......... X615-F, X26-16, X571-D, X616/2-2B1, X400-42
22 .......... 243AB-1 .......... orange .......... X322-F, X500-21
23 .......... 572AA-1 .......... red .......... F05/04A, X249/3-C, X490/1-C, K07/4-30, K08/4-87
XGND43, XGND47, X500-16, X571-A, X489-1, X20B-C, X25-3, X400-36, X615-C, X616/2-2L2,
24 .......... 050AR-1 .......... black ..........
X616/2-2M2
25 .......... 241AB-1 .......... brown .......... X322-D, X500-20
26 .......... 341A-0.5 .......... brown .......... X616/1-1E1
27 .......... 501AF-1 .......... brown .......... X132-2, X616/1-1E2
28 .......... 564A-1 .......... yellow .......... X500-10
29 .......... not used
30 .......... not used
31 .......... not used
32 .......... not used
33 .......... not used
34 .......... not used
X489
X489 68-pin plug for EPC - Continued
X489
35 .......... 261A-1 .......... brown .......... X503-A
36 .......... not used
37 .......... 504A-1 .......... yellow .......... X489-46
38 .......... not used
39 .......... 553AB-1 .......... orange .......... K07/4-87, X489-40, K08/4-86
40 .......... 553AC-1 .......... orange .......... K07/4-87, X489-39, K08/4-86
41 .......... 583AA-1 .......... orange .......... X249/3-A
42 .......... not used
43 .......... not used
44 .......... 934AF-0.5 .......... yellow .......... X615-E, X26-15, X571-C, X616/2-2A1, X400-41
45 .......... not used
46 .......... 504A-1 .......... yellow .......... X489-37
47 .......... 590AC-1 .......... black .......... X616/2-2F1, X490/1-D
48 .......... not used
49 .......... not used
50 .......... not used
51 .......... not used
52 .......... 569AC-1 .......... white .......... X616/2-2F2, X490/1-E
53 .......... not used
54 .......... not used
55 .......... 581AA-1 .......... brown .......... X249/3-B
56 .......... not used
57 .......... not used
58 .......... not used
59 .......... not used
60 .......... 582A-1 .......... red .......... X500-32
61 .......... 580A-1 .......... black .......... X500-25
62 .......... not used
63 .......... not used
64 .......... 664AB-1 .......... yellow .......... X322-A, K07/4-86
65 .......... 561AB-1 .......... brown .......... X616/2-2E3, X490/1-B
66 .......... not used
67 .......... 584A-1 .......... yellow .......... X500-31
68 .......... not used
X490/1
X490/1 8-pin plug for electrical reverser control
X490/1
A .......... 589A-1 .......... white .......... F05-06A
B .......... 561AC-1 .......... brown .......... X616/2-2E3, X489-65
C .......... 572AF-1 .......... red .......... F05/04A, X489-23, X249/3-C, K07/4-30, K08/4-87
D .......... 590AB-1 .......... black .......... X616/2-2F1, X489-47
E .......... 569AB-1 .......... white .......... X616/2-2F2, X489-52
F .......... 614A-1 .......... yellow .......... X489-3
XGND5, K07/1-86, K07/3-85, K07/5-86, K07/6-86, K08/1-85, K08/2-85, X500-1, X430-1, X474-B,
G .......... 310BJ-1 .......... black ..........
K08/3-85, X120/2-A, X25-1, X25-14, X38-4, B28/LH-C1
H .......... not used
X500
X500
XGND5, K07/1-86, K07/3-85, K07/5-86, K07/6-86, K08/1-85, K08/2-85, X430-1, X474-B,

1 .......... 310AD-4 .......... black ..........
K08/3-85, X120/2-A, X490/1-G, X25-1, X25-14, X38-4, B28/LH-C1
2 .......... not used
3 .......... not used
4 .......... not used
5 .......... not used
6 .......... not used
7 .......... not used
8 .......... 577A-1 .......... purple .......... X489-5
9 .......... not used
10 .......... 564A-1 .......... yellow .......... X489-28
11 .......... not used
12 .......... 322AA-1 .......... red .......... X450-21, F05/08A
13 .......... 555A-1 .......... dark green .......... X616/2-2L3
14 .......... 515A-0.5 .......... dark green .......... X26-24
15 .......... 602A-0.5 .......... red .......... X26-26
XGND43, XGND47, X571-A, X489-1, X489-24, X20B-C, X25-3, X400-36, X615-C, X616/2-2L2,
16 .......... 050AH-1 .......... black ..........
X616/2-2M2
17 .......... 531AE-1 .......... brown .......... X430-14, X450-10, X14/1-A, X14/2-A, X616/3-3G4, X450-35
F04/09A, X245-C, X487-F, X174-A, X430-35, X242-B, X230-A, X122/1-A, X125-A, X243-B, X235-
18 .......... 973AH-1 .......... orange ..........
A, X440-B, X127-A, X122/2-A, X471-2, X623-A
19 .......... 549A-1 .......... white .......... X489-14
20 .......... 241AC-1 .......... brown .......... X322-D, X489-25
21 .......... 243AC-1 .......... orange .......... X322-F, X489-22
22 .......... 353A-0.5 .......... orange .......... X26-17
23 .......... not used
24 .......... not used
25 .......... 580A-1 .......... black .......... X489-61
26 .......... not used
27 .......... 570A-1 .......... black .......... X489-9
28 .......... 579A-1 .......... white .......... X489-10
29 .......... not used
30 .......... 578A-1 .......... gray .......... X489-7
X500
X500 42-pin plug — Connection point for harness at front end of transmission (W28) - Continued
X500
31 .......... 584A-1 .......... yellow .......... X489-67
32 .......... 582A-1 .......... red .......... X489-60
33 .......... not used
34 .......... not used
35 .......... not used
36 .......... 509A-0.5 .......... white .......... X25-15
37 .......... 992AB-1 .......... red .......... F04/05A, X26-14
38 .......... not used
39 .......... not used
40 .......... 606A-0.5 .......... light blue .......... X25-22
41 .......... not used
42 .......... 512AB-0.5 .......... red .......... X132-1, X616/2-2D4
X503
X503 2-pin plug for park lock switch
X503
A .......... 261A-1 .......... brown .......... X489-35
B .......... 050AQ-1 .......... black .......... XGND43, X132-7, K01/4-85, X400-21, X450-39, X34-C, X34-D, X35-C, X35-D
X571
X571 9-terminal service socket (CAN BUS)
X571
XGND43, XGND47, X500-16, X489-1, X489-24, X20B-C, X25-3, X400-36, X615-C, X616/2-2L2,
A .......... 050AG-1 .......... black ..........
X616/2-2M2
B .......... 912AB-1 .......... red .......... F06/15A, X400-15
C .......... 934AD-1 .......... yellow .......... X615-E, X26-15, X489-44, X616/2-2A1, X400-41
D .......... 935AD-1 .......... dark green .......... X615-F, X26-16, X489-21, X616/2-2B1, X400-42
E .......... not used
F .......... not used
G .......... not used
H .......... not used
J .......... not used
X615
X615 6-pin plug for CAN-BUS terminating resistor
X615
A .......... 994AA-1 .......... yellow .......... K07/2-30
B .......... 932AA-0.5 .......... red .......... X400-40
XGND43, XGND47, X500-16, X571-A, X489-1, X489-24, X20B-C, X25-3, X400-36, X616/2-2L2,
C .......... 050AO-1 .......... black ..........
X616/2-2M2
D .......... 930AA-0.5 .......... black .......... X400-39
E .......... 934AA-0.5 .......... yellow .......... X26-15, X571-C, X489-44, X616/2-2A1, X400-41
F .......... 935AA-0.5 .......... dark green .......... X26-16, X571-D, X489-21, X616/2-2B1, X400-42
X616/1
X616/1
1A1 .......... 301A-0.5 .......... brown .......... X450-34
1A2 .......... 502A-0.5 .......... red .......... X430-40
1A3 .......... 574A-0.5 .......... yellow .......... X430-32
1A4 .......... 325A-0.5 .......... dark green .......... X450-9
1B1 .......... not used
1B2 .......... 517A-0.5 .......... purple .......... X247-3
1B3 .......... 567A-0.5 .......... purple .......... X247-4
1B4 .......... 178A-0.5 .......... gray .......... X247-8
1C1 .......... 552A-0.5 .......... red .......... X247-5
1C2 .......... 927A-0.5 .......... purple .......... X247-6
1C3 .......... 815A-0.5 .......... dark green .......... X247-14
1C4 .......... not used
1D1 .......... not used
1D2 .......... 523AB-0.5 .......... orange .......... X132-2
1D3 .......... 814A-0.5 .......... yellow .......... X247-23
1D4 .......... 813A-0.5 .......... orange .......... X247-12
1E1 .......... 341A-0.5 .......... brown .......... X489-26
1E2 .......... 501AA-0.5 .......... brown .......... X132-2, X489-27
1E3 .......... 575A-0.5 .......... dark green .......... X430-31
1E4 .......... 525A-0.5 .......... dark green .......... X125-B
1F1 .......... 119A-0.5 .......... white .......... X106-A
1F2 .......... 126A-0.5 .......... light blue .......... X107-A
1F3 .......... 607AA-0.5 .......... purple .......... X450-26
1F4 .......... 901A-0.5 .......... brown .......... X127-B
1G1 .......... 182AC-1 .......... red .......... F04/11A, X616/1-1H1
1G2 .......... 122AA-1 .......... red .......... F04/10A, X616/1-1H2
1G3 .......... 125AF-1 .......... dark green .......... X26-6, X616/1-1G4, X400-23, X430-23
1H1 .......... 182AB-1 .......... red .......... F04/11A, X616/1-1G1
1H2 .......... 122AC-1 .......... red .......... X616/1-1G2, F04/10A
1H3 .......... 107AF-1 .......... purple .......... X616/1-1H4, X25-20, X400-25, X430-26
1H4 .......... 107AA-1 .......... purple .......... X25-20, X400-25, X430-26, X616/1-1H3
X616/2
X616/2
2A1 .......... 934AH-0.5 .......... yellow .......... X615-E, X26-15, X571-C, X489-44, X400-41
2A2 .......... not used
2A3 .......... 537A-0.5 .......... purple .......... X623-B
2A4 .......... not used
2B1 .......... 935AH-0.5 .......... dark green .......... X615-F, X26-16, X571-D, X489-21, X400-42
2B2 .......... not used
2B3 .......... 538A-0.5 .......... gray .......... X623-C
2B4 .......... not used
2C1 .......... not used
2C2 .......... not used
2C3 .......... not used
2C4 .......... not used
2D1 .......... 544A-0.5 .......... yellow .......... X616/2-2D2
2D2 .......... 544A-0.5 .......... yellow .......... X616/2-2D1
2D3 .......... 228AC-0.5 .......... gray .......... F06/13A, K01/4-86
2D4 .......... 512AA-0.5 .......... red .......... X500-42, X132-1
2E1 .......... 336A-0.5 .......... light blue .......... K07/6-85
2E2 .......... 560A-0.5 .......... black .......... K07/4-85
2E3 .......... 561A-0.5 .......... brown .......... X489-65, X490/1-B
2E4 .......... 127A-0.5 .......... purple .......... X487-D
2F1 .......... 590A-0.5 .......... black .......... X490/1-D, X489-47
2F2 .......... 569A-0.5 .......... white .......... X490/1-E, X489-52
2F3 .......... 245A-0.5 .......... dark green .......... X324-D
2F4 .......... 155A-0.5 .......... dark green .......... X487-G
2G1 .......... 547A-0.5 .......... purple .......... X174-B
2G2 .......... 586A-0.5 .......... light blue .......... X125-C
2G3 .......... 906A-0.5 .......... light blue .......... X235-B
2G4 .......... 528A-0.5 .......... gray .......... X174-C
2H1 .......... 526A-0.5 .......... light blue .......... X243-C
2H2 .......... 522AA-0.5 .......... red .......... X122/1-B, X122/2-B
2H3 .......... 535A-0.5 .......... dark green .......... X243-A
2H4 .......... not used
2J1 .......... 511A-0.5 .......... brown .......... X245-B
2J2 .......... 244A-0.5 .......... yellow .......... X324-C
2J3 .......... 554A-0.5 .......... yellow .......... X471-1
2J4 .......... 542A-0.5 .......... red .......... X242-A
2K1 .......... 532A-0.5 .......... red .......... X440-A
2K2 .......... 559A-0.5 .......... white .......... X471-4
2K3 .......... 551A-0.5 .......... brown .......... X471-3
2K4 .......... 557A-0.5 .......... purple .......... X245-A
X616/2
X616/2 48-pin plug for BCU, continued
X616/2
2L1 .......... 571AB-1 .......... brown .......... F04/16A, X126-B
XGND43, XGND47, X500-16, X571-A, X489-1, X489-24, X20B-C, X25-3, X400-36, X615-C,
2L2 .......... 050AI-1 .......... black ..........
X616/2-2M2
2L3 .......... 555A-1 .......... dark green .......... X500-13
2L4 .......... 527A-1 .......... purple .......... X430-33
2M1 .......... 882AB-1 .......... red .......... F04/08A, X616/3-3G3
XGND43, XGND47, X500-16, X571-A, X489-1, X489-24, X20B-C, X25-3, X400-36, X615-C,
2M2 .......... 050AX-1 .......... black ..........
X616/2-2L2
2M3 .......... not used
2M4 .......... 149AB-1 .......... white .......... X25-12
X616/3
X616/3
3A1 .......... 841A-0.5 .......... brown .......... X34-E
3A2 .......... 844A-0.5 .......... yellow .......... X34-F
3A3 .......... 843A-0.5 .......... orange .......... X34-B
3A4 .......... 846A-0.5 .......... light blue .......... X34-A
3B1 .......... 824A-0.5 .......... yellow .......... X35-B
3B2 .......... 821AA-0.5 .......... brown .......... X35-A
3B3 .......... 826A-0.5 .......... light blue .......... X35-E
3B4 .......... 823AA-0.5 .......... orange .......... X35-F
3C1 .......... not used
3C2 .......... 884A-0.5 .......... yellow .......... X430-11
3C3 .......... 875A-0.5 .......... dark green .......... X14/1-C
3C4 .......... 869A-0.5 .......... white .......... X14/2-B
3D1 .......... 876A-0.5 .......... light blue .......... X14/1-H
3D2 .......... 877A-0.5 .......... purple .......... X14/1-E
3D3 .......... not used
3D4 .......... 878A-0.5 .......... gray .......... X430-18
3E1 .......... 834A-0.5 .......... yellow .......... X14/1-F
3E2 .......... 838A-0.5 .......... gray .......... X14/1-D
3E3 .......... 839A-0.5 .......... white .......... X14/1-G
3E4 .......... not used
3F1 .......... 904A-0.5 .......... yellow .......... X127-C
3F2 .......... 873AB-0.5 .......... orange .......... X14/1-B, X430-9, X14/2-C
3F3 .......... 807A-0.5 .......... purple .......... X230-B
3F4 .......... 102AB-0.5 .......... red .......... K07/2-85, X126-A
3G1 .......... 859A-1 .......... white .......... X430-22
3G2 .......... 855A-1 .......... dark green .......... X430-16
3G3 .......... 882AC-1 .......... red .......... F04/08A, X616/2-2M1
3G4 .......... 531AA-1 .......... brown .......... X430-14, X450-10, X500-17, X14/1-A, X14/2-A, X450-35
3H1 .......... 858A-1 .......... gray .......... X430-21
3H2 .......... 854A-1 .......... yellow .......... X430-15
3H3 .......... not used
3H4 .......... not used
X620
X620 6-pin plug for rear window wiper switch
X620
A .......... 294A-1 .......... yellow .......... X400-19
B .......... 275A-1 .......... dark green .......... X400-17
C .......... 258A-1 .......... gray .......... X44-A
D .......... not used
F .......... not used
X623
X623 3-pin plug for the remote-control switch of the rear PTO (switch on r.h. side)
X623
A .......... 973AR-1 .......... orange ..........
X235-A, X440-B, X127-A, X122/2-A, X471-2
B .......... 537A-0.5 .......... purple .......... X616/2-2A3
C .......... 538A-0.5 .......... gray .......... X616/2-2B3
XGND1
XGND1 Ground point
XGND1
(-) .......... 310AA-6 .......... black .......... X247-16, X247-9, X247-1, X37-B, X285-B, X128-B, X488-B, X106-D, X44-B, X239-C
XGND5
XGND5 Ground point
XGND5
Wire no. and cross

Terminal number Color of wire To plug or component
section
X113/1-B, X113/2-B, X107-D, K01/1-85, K01/3-85, K02/1-85, K02/2-85, K02/3-85, K02/4-85, K02/5-85,
(-) .......... 310AB-6 .......... black ..........
K02/6-85, K02/7-85
K07/1-86, K07/3-85, K07/5-86, K07/6-86, K08/1-85, K08/2-85, X500-1, X430-1, X474-B, K08/3-85,
(-) .......... 310AP-6 .......... black ..........
X120/2-A, X490/1-G, X25-1, X25-14, X38-4, B28/LH-C1
XGND43
XGND43 Ground point (electronics)
XGND43
XGND47, X500-16, X571-A, X489-1, X489-24, X20B-C, X25-3, X400-36, X615-C, X616/2-2L2,
(-) .......... 050AN-6 .......... black ..........
X616/2-2M2
(-) .......... 050AT-6 .......... black .......... X132-7, K01/4-85, X400-21, X503-B, X450-39, X34-C, X34-D, X35-C, X35-D
XGND47
XGND47 Ground point
XGND47
XGND43, X500-16, X571-A, X489-1, X489-24, X20B-C, X25-3, X400-36, X615-C, X616/2-2L2,
(-) .......... 050AF-1 .......... black ..........
X616/2-2M2
Reference 240-26-131, W13 — Wiring Harness - Clutch Sender
W13 - Clutch sender wiring harness
S72
S72 Clutch switch
S72
C1 .......... 000-0,5 .......... black .......... X322-A
NC2 .......... 008-0,5 .......... gray .......... X322-B
NO4 .......... vacant
X322
X322 6-pin plug — Connection point for clutch sending unit harness (W08)
X322
A .......... 000-0,5 .......... black .......... S72-C1
B .......... 008-0,5 .......... gray .......... S72-NC2
C .......... 217X-0.5 .......... purple .......... X328-3
D .......... 241XA-0.5 .......... brown .......... X328-2, X328-5
E .......... 254X-0.5 .......... dark green .......... X328-4
F .......... 243XA-0.5 .......... orange .......... X328-1, X328-6
X328
X328 6-pin plug for clutch pedal potentiometer
X328
1 .......... 243XB-0.5 .......... orange .......... X322-F, X328-6
2 .......... 241XB-0.5 .......... brown .......... X322-D, X328-5
3 .......... 217X-0.5 .......... purple .......... X322-C
4 .......... 254X-0.5 .......... dark green .......... X322-E
5 .......... 241XC-0.5 .......... brown .......... X322-D, X328-2
6 .......... 243XC-0.5 .......... orange .......... X322-F, X328-1
Reference 240-26-141, W14 — Wiring Harness - 3-Terminal Power Outlet

Socket
W14 - Wiring harness for 3-terminal power outlet socket
X06-15
X06-15 1-pin plug for 3-terminal power outlet socket
X06-15
15 .......... 307HB-2.5 .......... yellow .......... X239-B
X06-31
X06-31
31 .......... 310HB-4 .......... black .......... X239-C
X06-82
X06-82
82 .......... 312HB-1.5 .......... red .......... X239-A
X239
X239
A .......... 312HB-1.5 .......... red .......... X06-82
B .......... 307HB-2.5 .......... purple .......... X06-15
C .......... 310HB-4 .......... black .......... X06-31
Reference 240-26-181, W18 — Wiring Harness - Windshield Wiper

Switch (Without Intermittent Wipe)
W18 - Wiper switch wiring harness without intermittent wipe
S15
S15 5-pin plug for windshield wiper switch
S15
B .......... 227-1 .......... purple .......... X39-A
C .......... 218-1 .......... gray .......... X64-A
H .......... 224-1 .......... yellow .......... X39-B
L .......... 235-1 .......... dark green .......... X39-D
M .......... 229-1 .......... white .......... X39-C
S31/C1
S31/C1 1-pin plug for digital instrument set switch
S31/C1
A .......... 310CM-1 .......... black .......... X20B-C
S31/NC2
S31/NC2 1-pin plug for digital instrument set switch
S31/NC2
A .......... 905-1 .......... dark green .......... X20B-B
X20B
X20B 3-pin plug — Connection point of harness for windshield washer switch (W08)
X20B
A .......... 208-1 .......... gray .......... X63-A
B .......... 905-1 .......... dark green .......... S31/NC2-A
C .......... 310CM-1 .......... black .......... S31/C1-A
X39
X39 4-pin plug — Connection point for windshield wiper harness (W08)
X39
A .......... 227-1 .......... purple .......... S15-B
B .......... 224-1 .......... yellow .......... S15-H
C .......... 229-1 .......... white .......... S15-M
D .......... 235-1 .......... dark green .......... S15-L
X63
X63 1-pin plug for windshield washer switch
X63
A .......... 208-1 .......... gray .......... X20B-A
X64
X64
A .......... 218-1 .......... gray .......... S15-C
Reference 240-26-182, W18 — Wiring Harness - Windshield Wiper

Switch (With Intermittent Wipe)
W18 - Wiper switch wiring harness with intermittent wipe
K26
K26 Interval relay

K26
1 .......... 227B-1 .......... purple .......... S15-B
2 .......... 233-1 .......... orange .......... S15-L
3 .......... 201-1 .......... brown .......... S15-M
4 .......... 216-1 .......... light blue .......... S15-H
5 .......... 050C-1 .......... black .......... X20B-C, S31-C
6 .......... 227A-1 .......... purple .......... X39-A
7 .......... 224-1 .......... yellow .......... X39-B
8 .......... 235-1 .......... dark green .......... X39-D
9 .......... 229-1 .......... white .......... X39-C
S15
S15 5-pin plug for windshield wiper switch
S15
B .......... 227B-1 .......... purple .......... K26-1
C .......... 218-1 .......... gray .......... X64-A
H .......... 216-1 .......... light blue .......... K26-4
L .......... 233-1 .......... orange .......... K26-2
M .......... 201-1 .......... brown .......... K26-3
S31/C1
S31/C1 1-pin plug for digital instrument set switch
S31/C1
A .......... 050C-1 .......... black .......... X20B-C, K26-5
S31/NC2
S31/NC2 1-pin plug for digital instrument set switch
S31/NC2
A .......... 905-1 .......... dark green .......... X20B-B
X20B
X20B 3-pin plug — Connection point of harness for windshield washer switch (W08)
X20B
A .......... 208-1 .......... gray .......... X63-A
B .......... 905-1 .......... dark green .......... S31/NC2-A
C .......... 050A-1 .......... black .......... S31/C1-A, K26-5
X39
X39 4-pin plug — Connection point for windshield wiper harness (W08)
X39
A .......... 227A-1 .......... purple .......... K26-6
B .......... 224-1 .......... yellow .......... K26-7
C .......... 229-1 .......... white .......... K26-9
D .......... 235-1 .......... dark green .......... K26-8
X63
X63
A .......... 208-1 .......... gray .......... X20B-A
X64
X64
A .......... 218-1 .......... gray .......... S15-C
Reference 240-26-191, W19 - Wiring Harness - Cab Roof and Fan
W19 - Cab roof and fan wiring harness
X28
X28 2-pin plug for air-conditioner pressure switch
X28
A .......... 205J-1 .......... dark green .......... X72/2-A
B .......... 213J-1 .......... orange .......... X400-29
X39
X39 4-pin plug — Connection point for windshield wiper harness W23 (with hinged windshield)
X39
A .......... 236J-1 .......... light blue .......... X400-22
B .......... 235J-1 .......... dark green .......... X400-12
C .......... 224J-1 .......... yellow .......... X400-18
D .......... 310JL-1 .......... black .......... XGND10/1, X142/2-A, X584-3, X443-F, X433/2-C, X434/2-C
X43
X43 4-pin plug for rear window wiper motor
X43
1 .......... 275J-1 .......... dark green .......... X400-17
2 .......... 310JA-1 .......... black .......... XGND10/1, X442-F, X434/1-C, X624-A, X47-B
3 .......... 294J-1 .......... yellow .......... X400-19
4 .......... 246J-1 .......... light blue .......... X400-16
X45/1
X45/1 1-pin plug for air conditioning system switch
X45/1
A .......... 226JC-1 .......... light blue .......... X100-1, X48-1
X45/2
X45/2 1-pin plug for air conditioning system switch
X45/2
A .......... 219J-1 .......... white .......... X72/1-A
X46
X46 2-pin plug for fan motor
X46
A .......... 234JD-2.5 .......... yellow .......... X400-1, X47-A, X48-3
B .......... 310JS-2.5 .......... black .......... XGND10/1
X47
X47 2-pin plug for fan motor
X47
A .......... 234JB-2.5 .......... yellow .......... X400-1, X48-3, X46-A
B .......... 310JW-2.5 .......... black .......... XGND10/1, X442-F, X434/1-C, X624-A, X47-B
X48
X48 4-pin plug for resistors
X48
1 .......... 226JB-1.5 .......... light blue .......... X100-1, X45/1-A
2 .......... 223J-2.5 .......... orange .......... X100-3
3 .......... 234JC-2.5 .......... yellow .......... X400-1, X47-A, X46-A
4 .......... 221J-1.5 .......... brown .......... X100-2
X72/1
X72/1 1-pin plug for thermostat switch
X72/1
A .......... 219J-1 .......... white .......... X45/2-A
X72/2
X72/2 1-pin plug for thermostat switch
X72/2
A .......... 205J-1 .......... dark green .......... X28-A
X99
X99 3-pin plug for beacon light switch
X99
A .......... 204J-1 .......... yellow .......... X400-33
B .......... 137J-1 .......... purple .......... X142/1-E
C .......... 310JR-1 .......... black .......... XGND10/1, X584-3, X443-F, X433/2-C, X434/2-C, X39-D
X100
X100 5-pin plug for fan switch
X100
1 .......... 226JA-1.5 .......... light blue .......... X48-1, X45/1-A
2 .......... 221J-1.5 .......... brown .......... X48-4
3 .......... 223J-2.5 .......... orange .......... X48-2
4 .......... 210J-1 .......... black .......... X400-7
B .......... 247J-2.5 .......... purple .......... X400-8
X101
X101 3-pin plug for switch of worklights or headlights on cab frame
X101
A .......... 135J-1 .......... dark green .......... X400-32
B .......... 131J-1 .......... brown .......... X400-34
C .......... 113J-1 .......... orange .......... X400-31
X113
X113 2-pin plug for license plate light (tractors with license plate light on roof only)
X113
A .......... 128JC-1 .......... gray .......... X442-C, X400-10
B .......... 310JZ-1 .......... black .......... XGND10/1, X584-3, X443-F, X433/2-C, X434/2-C, X39-D
X142/1
X142/1 Prewiring for beacon light
X142/1
A .......... 137J-1 .......... purple .......... X99-B
X142/2
X142/2 Ground terminal with ring for beacon light
X142/2
A .......... 310JV-1 .......... black .......... XGND10/1, X584-3, X443-F, X433/2-C, X434/2-C, X39-D
X158
X158/1 1-pin plug for radio antenna
X158
A .......... 269J-1 .......... white .......... X613-5
X283
X283/1 2-pin plug for left speaker
X283
A .......... 284J-1 .......... yellow .......... X612-6
B .......... 285J-1 .......... dark green .......... X612-5
X284
X284/1 2-pin plug for right speaker
X284
A .......... 283J-1 .......... orange .......... X612-3
B .......... 281J-1 .......... brown .......... X612-4
X400
X400 42-pin plug — Connection point for cab roof wiring harness (W08)
X400
1 .......... 234JA-4 .......... yellow .......... X47-A, X48-3, X46-A
2 .......... 129JD-1.5 .......... white .......... X443-A, X442-A
3 .......... 145J-1 .......... dark green .......... X472/1-A
4 .......... 132J-1 .......... red .......... X472/1-C
5 .......... 115J-1 .......... dark green .......... X472/2-A
6 .......... 162J-1 .......... red .......... X472/2-C
7 .......... 210J-1 .......... black .......... X100-4
8 .......... 247J-2.5 .......... purple .......... X100-B
9 .......... 118J-1 .......... gray .......... X443-C
10 .......... 128J-1 .......... gray .......... X442-C
11 .......... not used
12 .......... 235J-1 .......... dark green .......... X39-B
13 .......... not used
14 .......... 138JE-1 .......... gray .......... X585-A, X613-6, X486-C
15 .......... 912JE-1 .......... red .......... X584-2, X613-4
16 .......... 246J-1 .......... light blue .......... X43-4
17 .......... 275J-1 .......... dark green .......... X43-1
18 .......... 224J-1 .......... yellow .......... X39-C
19 .......... 294J-1 .......... yellow .......... X43-3
20 .......... 971J-1 .......... brown .......... X486-G
21 .......... 050J-1 .......... black .......... X486-D
22 .......... 236J-1 .......... light blue .......... X39-A
23 .......... 125J-1 .......... dark green .......... X443-D
24 .......... 257J-1 .......... purple .......... X613-7
25 .......... 107J-1 .......... purple .......... X442-D
26 .......... 174J-1 .......... yellow .......... X443-B
27 .......... 184J-1 .......... yellow .......... X442-B
28 .......... 274J-1 .......... yellow .......... X584-4
29 .......... 213J-1 .......... orange .......... X28-B
30 .......... 179J-1 .......... white .......... X402-A
31 .......... 113J-1 .......... orange .......... X101-C
32 .......... 135J-1 .......... dark green .......... X101-A
33 .......... 204J-1 .......... yellow .......... X99-A
34 .......... 131J-1 .......... brown .......... X101-B
35 .......... 111J-1 .......... brown .......... X402-B
36 .......... 250A-1 .......... black .......... XGND56
37 .......... not used
38 .......... not used
39 .......... 930JA-0.5 .......... black .......... X614-D
40 .......... 932JA-0.5 .......... red .......... X614-B
41 .......... 934JF-0.5 .......... yellow .......... X614-E, X486-H
42 .......... 935JE-0.5 .......... dark green .......... X614-F, X486-B
X402
X402 2-pin plug for front corner worklight switch
X402
A .......... 179J-1 .......... white .......... X400-30
B .......... 111J-1 .......... brown .......... X400-35
X433/1
X433/1 3-pin plug — Connection point of harness for worklights at rear right side of cab roof and adapter (W21)
X433/1
A .......... 187JB-1 .......... purple .......... X472/2-D, X433/2-A
B .......... 136JB-1 .......... light blue .......... X472/2-B, X433/2-B
C .......... 310JH-1 .......... black .......... XGND10/1
X433/2
X433/2 3-pin plug — Connection point of harness for worklights at rear left side of cab roof and adapter (W21)
X433/2
A .......... 187JC-1 .......... purple .......... X472/2-D, X433/1-A
B .......... 136JC-1 .......... light blue .......... X472/2-B, X433/1-B
C .......... 310JT-1 .......... black .......... XGND10/1, X142/2-A, X584-3, X443-F, X434/2-C, X39-D
X434/1
X434/1 3-pin plug — Connection point of harness for worklights at front right side of cab roof and adapter (W21)
X434/1
A .......... 147JB-1 .......... purple .......... X472/1-D, X434/2-A
B .......... 146JB-1.5 .......... light blue .......... X472/1-B, X434/2-B
C .......... 310JK-1 .......... black .......... XGND10/1, X442-F, X43-2, X624-A, X47-B
X434/2
X434/2 3-pin plug — Connection point of harness for worklights at front left side of cab roof and adapter (W21)
X434/2
A .......... 147JC-1 .......... purple .......... X472/1-D, X434/1-A
B .......... 146JC-1.5 .......... light blue .......... X472/1-B, X434/1-B
C .......... 310JQ-1 .......... black .......... XGND10/1, X142/2-A, X584-3, X443-F, X433/2-C, X39-D
X442
X442 6-pin plug — Connection point of harness for r.h. turn-signal and clearance lights (W20)
X442
A .......... 129JF-1 .......... white .......... X400-2, X443-A
B .......... 184J-1 .......... yellow .......... X400-27
C .......... 128J-1 .......... gray .......... X400-10
D .......... 107J-1 .......... purple .......... X400-25
E .......... not used
F .......... 310JC-1 .......... black .......... XGND10/1, X434/1-C, X43-2, X624-A, X47-B
X443
X443 6-pin plug — Connection point of harness for l.h. turn-signal and clearance lights (W20)
X443
A .......... 129JE-1 .......... white .......... X400-2, X442-A
B .......... 174J-1 .......... yellow .......... X400-26
C .......... 118J-1 .......... gray .......... X400-9
D .......... 125J-1 .......... dark green .......... X400-23
E .......... not used
F .......... 310JJ-1 .......... black .......... XGND10/1, X142/2-A, X584-3, X433/2-C, X434/2-C, X39-D
X472/1
X472/1 4-pin plug for switch that operates the worklights at front of cab roof
X472/1
A .......... 145J-1 .......... dark green .......... X400-3
B .......... 146JA-1 .......... light blue .......... X434/1-B, X434/2-B
C .......... 132J-1 .......... red .......... X400-4
D .......... 147JA-1 .......... purple .......... X434/1-A, X434/2-A
X472/2
X472/2 4-pin plug for switch that operates the worklights at rear of cab roof
X472/2
A .......... 115J-1 .......... dark green .......... X400-5
B .......... 136JA-1 .......... light blue .......... X433/1-B, X433/2-B
C .......... 162J-1 .......... red .......... X400-6
D .......... 187JA-1 .......... purple .......... X433/1-A, X433/2-A
X486
X486 10-pin plug for PRF (performance monitor)
X486
A .......... not used
B .......... 935JD-0.5 .......... dark green .......... X614-F, X400-42
C .......... 138JF-1 .......... gray .......... X585-A, X613-6, X400-14
D .......... 050J-1 .......... black .......... X400-21
E .......... not used
F .......... not used
G .......... 971J-1 .......... brown .......... X400-20
H .......... 934JD-0.5 .......... yellow .......... X614-E, X400-41
J .......... not used
K .......... not used
X584
X584 4-pin plug for dome light
X584
1 .......... not used
2 .......... 912JC-1 .......... red .......... X613-4, X400-15
3 .......... 310JM-1 .......... black .......... XGND10/1, X142/2-A, X443-F, X433/2-C, X434/2-C, X39-D
4 .......... 274J-1 .......... yellow .......... X400-28
X585
X585 2-pin plug for console light
X585
A .......... 138JC-1 .......... gray .......... X613-6, X400-14, X486-C
B .......... 310JI-1 .......... black .......... XGND10/1
X612
X612 8-pin plug for speakers
X612
1 .......... not used
2 .......... not used
3 .......... 283J-1 .......... orange .......... X284-A
4 .......... 281J-1 .......... brown .......... X284-B
5 .......... 285J-1 .......... dark green .......... X283-B
6 .......... 284J-1 .......... yellow .......... X283-A
7 .......... not used
8 .......... not used
X613
X613 8-pin plug for radio
X613
1 .......... not used
2 .......... not used
3 .......... not used
4 .......... 912JD-1 .......... red .......... X584-2, X400-15
5 .......... 269J-1 .......... white .......... X158-A
6 .......... 138JD-1 .......... gray .......... X585-A, X400-14, X486-C
7 .......... 257J-1 .......... purple .......... X400-24
8 .......... 310JU-1 .......... black .......... XGND10/1
X614
X614 6-pin plug for CAN-BUS terminating resistor
X614
A .......... not used
B .......... 932JB-0.5 .......... red .......... X400-40
C .......... not used
D .......... 930JB-0.5 .......... black .......... X400-39
E .......... 934JC-0.5 .......... yellow .......... X486-H, X400-41
F .......... 935JC-0.5 .......... dark green .......... X486-B, X400-42
X624
X624 Terminal with ring, for voltage-to-ground on radiator
X624
A .......... 310JN-1 .......... black .......... XGND10/1, X442-F, X434/1-C, X43-2, X47-B
XGND104
XGND10 Ground point
XGND10
(-) .......... 310JO-10 .......... black .......... XGND10/1
XGND10/1
XGND10/1 Collective ground point for XGND10
XGND10/1
(-) .......... 310JO-10 .......... black .......... XGND10
(-) .......... 310JI-1 .......... black .......... X585-B
(-) .......... 310JU-1 .......... black .......... X613-8
(-) .......... 310JS-2.5 .......... black .......... X46-B
(-) .......... 310JR-1 .......... black .......... X99-C
(-) .......... 310JH-1 .......... black .......... X433/1-C
(-) .......... 310JX-4 .......... black .......... X442-F, X434/1-C, X43-2, X624-A, X47-B
(-) .......... 310JY-4 .......... black .......... X142/2-A, X584-3, X443-F, X433/2-C, X434/2-C, X39-D
XGND56
XGND56 1-pin plug for radio antenna ground
XGND56
(-) .......... 250A-1 .......... black .......... X400-36
Reference 240-26-201, W20 — Wiring Harness - Turn Signal and

Clearance Lights
W20 - Wiring harness, l.h. turn signal and clearance light, with light on cab frame
W20 - Wiring harness, r.h. turn signal and clearance light, with light on cab frame
W20 - Wiring harness, l.h. turn signal and clearance light, with worklight on cab frame
W20 - Wiring harness, r.h. turn signal and clearance light, with worklight on cab frame
X108, X109
X108 3-pin plug for right turn signal and clearance lights
X108
A .......... 128XC-1 .......... gray .......... X442-C, X116-A
B .......... 107X-1 .......... purple .......... X442-D
C .......... 310XC-1 .......... black .......... X442-F, X115-B (X155-B)
X109 3-pin plug for left turn signal and clearance lights
X109
A .......... 128XC-1 .......... gray .......... X443-C, X111-A
B .......... 107X-1 .......... purple .......... X443-D
C .......... 310XC-1 .......... black .......... X443-F, X110-B (X155-B)
X110, X115, X155, X156
X110 2-pin plug for left cab frame light
X110
A .......... 129XA-1 .......... white .......... X443-A
B .......... 310XB-1 .......... black .......... X443-F, X109-C
X115 2-pin plug for right cab frame light
X115
A .......... 129XA-1 .......... white .......... X442-A
B .......... 310XB-1 .......... black .......... X442-F, X108-C
X155 2-pin plug for right worklight on cab frame
X155
A .......... 129XA-1 .......... white .......... X442-A
B .......... 310XB-1 .......... black .......... X442-F, X108-C
X156 2-pin plug for left worklight on cab frame
X156
A .......... 129XA-1 .......... white .......... X443-A
B .......... 310XB-1 .......... black .......... X443-F, X109-C
X111, X116
X111 2-pin plug for left cab frame light
X111
A .......... 128X-1 .......... gray .......... X443-C, X109-A
B .......... 184XA-1 .......... yellow .......... X443-B
X116 2-pin plug for right cab frame light
X116
A .......... 128X-1 .......... gray .......... X442-C, X108-A
B .......... 184XA-1 .......... yellow .......... X442-B
X442, X443
X442 6-pin plug — Connection point of harness for r.h. turn-signal and clearance lights (W19)
X442
A .......... 129XA-1 .......... white .......... X115-A (X155-A)
B .......... 184XA-1 .......... yellow .......... X116-B
C .......... 128XA-1 .......... gray .......... X116-A, X108-A
D .......... 107X-1 .......... purple .......... X108-B
E .......... vacant
F .......... 310XA-1 .......... black .......... X115-B (X155-B), X108-C
X443 6-pin plug — Connection point of harness for l.h. turn-signal and clearance lights (W19)
X443
A .......... 129XA-1 .......... white .......... X110-A (X156-A)
B .......... 184XA-1 .......... yellow .......... X111-B
C .......... 128XA-1 .......... gray .......... X110-A, X109-A
D .......... 107X-1 .......... purple .......... X109-B
E .......... vacant
F .......... 310XA-1 .......... black .......... X110-B (X156-B), X109-C
Reference 240-26-211, W21 — Wiring Harness - Cab Roof Worklights,

Adapter
W21 - Wiring harness for worklights on cab roof, adapter with one worklight connection
X433/1, X433/2, X434/1, X434/2
X433/1 3-pin plug — Connection point of harness for worklights at rear right side of cab roof (W19)
X433/1
A .......... 147OE-1 .......... purple .......... X114/1F1-A
B .......... vacant
C .......... 310OM-1 .......... black .......... X114/1F1-B
X433/2 3-pin plug — Connection point of harness for worklights at rear left side of cab roof (W19)
X433/2
A .......... 147OE-1 .......... purple .......... X114/2F1-A
B .......... vacant
C .......... 310OM-1 .......... black .......... X114/2F1-B
X434/1 3-pin plug — Connection point of harness for worklights at front right side of cab roof (W19)
X434/1
A .......... 147OE-1 .......... purple .......... X452/1F1-A
B .......... vacant
C .......... 310OM-1 .......... black .......... X452/1F1-B
X434/2 3-pin plug — Connection point of harness for worklights at front left side of cab roof (W19)
X434/2
A .......... 147OE-1 .......... purple .......... X452/2F1-A
B .......... vacant
C .......... 310OM-1 .......... black .......... X452/2F1-B
X114/1F1, X114/2F1, X452/1F1, X452/2F1
X114/1F1 2-pin plug for right worklight on rear of cab roof
X114/1F1
A .......... 147OE-1 .......... purple .......... X433/1-A
B .......... 310OM-1 .......... black .......... X433/1-C
X114/2F1 2-pin plug for left worklight on rear of cab roof
X114/2F1
A .......... 147OE-1 .......... purple .......... X433/2-A
B .......... 310OM-1 .......... black .......... X433/2-C
X452/1F1 2-pin plug for right worklight on front of cab roof
X452/1F1
A .......... 147OE-1 .......... purple .......... X434/1-A
B .......... 310OM-1 .......... black .......... X434/1-C
X452/2F1 2-pin plug for left worklight on front of cab roof
X452/2F1
A .......... 147OE-1 .......... purple .......... X434/2-A
B .......... 310OM-1 .......... black .......... X434/2-C
W21 - Wiring harness for worklights on cab roof, adapter with two worklight connections
X433/1, X433/2, X434/1, X434/2
X433/1 3-pin plug — Connection point of harness for worklights at rear right side of cab roof (W19)
X433/1
A .......... 147OD-1 .......... purple .......... X114/1F1-A
B .......... 146OB-1 .......... light blue .......... X114/1F2-A
C .......... 310OX-1 .......... black .......... X114/1F1-B, X114/1F2-B
X433/2 3-pin plug — Connection point of harness for worklights at rear left side of cab roof (W19)
X433/2
A .......... 147OD-1 .......... purple .......... X114/2F1-A
C .......... 310OX-1 .......... black .......... X114/2F1-B, X114/2F2-B
X434/1 3-pin plug — Connection point of harness for worklights at front right side of cab roof (W19)
X434/1
A .......... 147OD-1 .......... purple .......... X452/1F1-A
C .......... 310OX-1 .......... black .......... X452/1F1-B, X452/1F2-B
X434/2 3-pin plug — Connection point of harness for worklights at front left side of cab roof (W19)
X434/2
A .......... 147OD-1 .......... purple .......... X452/2F1-A
C .......... 310OX-1 .......... black .......... X452/2F1-B, X452/2F2-B
X114/1F1, X114/2F1, X452/1F1, X452/2F1
X114/1F1 2-pin plug for outer right worklight on rear of cab roof
X114/1F1
A .......... 147OD-1 .......... purple .......... X433/1-A
B .......... 310OL-1 .......... black .......... X433/1-C, X114/1F2-B
X114/2F1 2-pin plug for outer left worklight on rear of cab roof
X114/2F1
A .......... 147OD-1 .......... purple .......... X433/2-A
B .......... 310OL-1 .......... black .......... X433/2-C, X114/2F2-B
X452/1F1 2-pin plug for outer right worklight on front of cab roof
X452/1F1
A .......... 147OD-1 .......... purple .......... X434/1-A
B .......... 310OL-1 .......... black .......... X434/1-C, X452/1F2-B
X452/2F1 2-pin plug for outer left worklight on front of cab roof
X452/2F1
A .......... 147OD-1 .......... purple .......... X434/2-A
B .......... 310OL-1 .......... black .......... X434/2-C, X452/2F2-B
X114/1F2, X114/2F2, X452/1F2, X452/2F2
X114/1F2 2-pin plug for inner right worklight on rear of cab roof
X114/1F2
A .......... 146OB-1 .......... light blue .......... X433/1-B
B .......... 310OK-1 .......... black .......... X433/1-C, X1141F1-B
X114/2F2 2-pin plug for inner left worklight on rear of cab roof
X114/2F2
A .......... 146OB-1 .......... light blue .......... X433/2-B
B .......... 310OK-1 .......... black .......... X433/2-C, X114/2F1-B
X452/1F2 2-pin plug for inner right worklight on front of cab roof
X452/1F2
A .......... 146OB-1 .......... light blue .......... X434/1-B
B .......... 310OK-1 .......... black .......... X434/1-C, X452/1F1-B
X452/2F2 2-pin plug for inner left worklight on front of cab roof
X452/2F2
A .......... 146OB-1 .......... light blue .......... X434/2-B
B .......... 310OK-1 .......... black .......... X434/2-C, X452/2F1-B
Reference 240-26-231, W23 — Wiring Harness - Windshield Wiper (with

Hinged Windshield)
W23 - Windshield wiper (with hinged windshield)
X38
X38
1 .......... 235XA-1 .......... dark green .......... X39-B B
2 .......... 310XA-1 .......... black .......... X39-D D
3 .......... 224XA-1 .......... yellow .......... X39-C C
4 .......... 236XA-1 .......... light blue .......... X39-A A
X39
X39 4-pin plug — Connection point for windshield wiper harness W19 (with hinged windshield)
X39
A .......... 236XA-1 .......... light blue .......... X38-4 4
B .......... 235XA-1 .......... dark green .......... X38-1 1
C .......... 224XA-1 .......... yellow .......... X38-3 3
D .......... 310XA-1 .......... black .......... X38-2 2
Reference 240-26-281, W28 — Wiring Harness - Front End of

Transmission (Tractors with PowrQuad Transmission)
W28 - Wiring harness, front end of transmission (tractors with PowrQuad transmission)
X80
X80 2-pin plug, sending unit for oil filter restriction warning light
X80
A .......... 606D-1 .......... light blue .......... X500-40
B .......... 509D-1 .......... white .......... X81-A
X81
X81 1-pin plug, low temperature switch
X81
A .......... 509D-1 .......... white .......... X80-B
X82
X82 Terminal with ring, for high temperature switch
X82
A .......... 602D-1 .......... red .......... X500-15
X83
X83 2-pin plug, sending unit for engagement oil warning light
X83
A .......... 515D-1 .......... dark green .......... X500-14
B .......... 310DJ-1 .......... black .......... XGND46, X500-1, X86-C, X91-B
X86
X86 3-pin plug, sending unit for fuel gauge and fuel pump
X86
A .......... 353D-1 .......... orange .......... X500-22
B .......... 322D-1 .......... red .......... X500-12
C .......... 310DF-1 .......... black .......... XGND46, X83-B, X500-1, X91-B
X91
X91 2-pin plug for FWD solenoid valve
X91
A .......... 555D-1 .......... dark green .......... X500-13
B .......... 310DI-1 .......... black .......... XGND46, X83-B, X500-1, X86-C
X93
X93 2-pin plug for neutral start switch
X93
A .......... 506D-1 .......... light blue .......... X500-41
B .......... 311D-1 .......... brown .......... X500-39
X500
X500
1 .......... 310DW-4 .......... black .......... XGND46, X83-B, X86-C, X91-B
2 .......... vacant
3 .......... vacant
4 .......... vacant
5 .......... vacant
6 .......... vacant
7 .......... vacant
8 .......... vacant
9 .......... vacant
10 .......... vacant
11 .......... vacant
12 .......... 322D-1 .......... red .......... X86-B
13 .......... 555D-1 .......... dark green .......... X91-A
14 .......... 515D-1 .......... dark green .......... X83-A
15 .......... 602D-1 .......... red .......... X82-A
16 .......... vacant
17 .......... vacant
18 .......... vacant
19 .......... vacant
20 .......... vacant
21 .......... vacant
22 .......... 353D-1 .......... orange .......... X86-A
23 .......... vacant
24 .......... vacant
25 .......... vacant
26 .......... vacant
27 .......... vacant
28 .......... vacant
29 .......... vacant
30 .......... vacant
31 .......... vacant
32 .......... vacant
33 .......... vacant
34 .......... vacant
35 .......... vacant
36 .......... vacant
37 .......... vacant
38 .......... vacant
39 .......... 311D-1 .......... brown .......... X93-B
40 .......... 606D-1 .......... light blue .......... X80-A
41 .......... 506D-1 .......... light blue .......... X93-A
42 .......... vacant
XGND46
XGND46 Ground point
XGND46
A .......... 310DS-4 .......... black .......... X83-B, X500-1, X86-C, X91-B
Reference 240-26-282, W28 — Wiring Harness - Front End of

Transmission (Tractors with PowrQuad Plus Transmission)
W28 - Wiring harness, front end of transmission (tractors with PowrQuad Plus transmission)
X30
X30 Radar connection prewiring
X30
1 .......... 531D-0.5 .......... brown .......... X500-17
2 .......... 512D-0.5 .......... red .......... X500-42
3 .......... 973DB-0.5 .......... orange .......... X500-18, X30-4, X499-C
4 .......... 973DC-0.5 .......... orange .......... X500-18, X30-3, X499-C
X80
X80 2-pin plug for restriction warning switch at transmission oil filter
X80
A .......... 606DB-1 .......... light blue .......... X500-40, X546-B
B .......... 310DH-1 .......... black .......... XGND46, X497-B, X91-B, X496-B, X83-B, X494-B, X493-B, X500-1, X86-C, X492-B
X83
X83 2-pin plug, sending unit for engagement oil warning light
X83
A .......... 515D-1 .......... dark green .......... X500-14
B .......... 310DJ-1 .......... black .......... XGND46, X497-B, X91-B, X496-B, X494-B, X493-B, X500-1, X86-C, X492-B, X80-B
X86
X86 3-pin plug, sending unit for fuel gauge and fuel pump
X86
A .......... 353D-1 .......... orange .......... X500-22
B .......... 322D-1 .......... red .......... X500-12
C .......... 310DF-1 .......... black .......... XGND46, X497-B, X91-B, X496-B, X83-B, X494-B, X493-B, X500-1, X492-B, X80-B
X91
X91 2-pin plug for FWD solenoid valve
X91
A .......... 555D-1 .......... dark green .......... X500-13
B .......... 310DI-1 .......... black .......... XGND46, X497-B, X496-B, X83-B, X494-B, X493-B, X500-1, X86-C, X492-B, X80-B
X307
X307 2-pin plug for transmission oil temperature sender
X307
A .......... 602DC-1 .......... red .......... X500-15
B .......... 050DB-1 .......... black .......... X500-16, X546-D, X499-D
X459
X459 3-pin plug for enable pressure sender
X459
A .......... 241D-1 .......... brown .......... X500-20
B .......... 243D-1 .......... orange .......... X500-21
C .......... 549D-1 .......... white .......... X500-19
X492
X492 2-pin plug for solenoid valve K3 (Y32)
X492
A .......... 580D-1 .......... black .......... X500-25
B .......... 310DR-1 .......... black .......... XGND46, X497-B, X91-B, X496-B, X83-B, X494-B, X493-B, X500-1, X86-C, X80-B
X493
X493 2-pin plug for forward solenoid valve (Y33)
X493
A .......... 579D-1 .......... white .......... X500-28
B .......... 310DQ-1 .......... black .......... XGND46, X497-B, X91-B, X496-B, X83-B, X494-B, X500-1, X86-C, X492-B, X80-B
X494
X494 2-pin plug for reverse solenoid valve (Y36)
X494
A .......... 570D-1 .......... black .......... X500-27
B .......... 310DP-1 .......... black .......... XGND46, X497-B, X91-B, X496-B, X83-B, X493-B, X500-1, X86-C, X492-B, X80-B
X495
X495 2-pin plug for enable signal proportional valve (Y38)
X495
A .......... 577D-1 .......... purple .......... X500-8
B .......... 578D-1 .......... gray .......... X500-30
X496
X496
A .......... 582D-1 .......... red .......... X500-32
B .......... 310DK-1 .......... black .......... XGND46, X497-B, X91-B, X83-B, X494-B, X493-B, X500-1, X86-C, X492-B, X80-B
X497
X497
A .......... 584D-1 .......... yellow .......... X500-31
B .......... 310DL-1 .......... black .......... XGND46, X91-B, X496-B, X83-B, X494-B, X493-B, X500-1, X86-C, X492-B, X80-B
X499
X499 4-pin plug for transmission speed sender
X499
A .......... 564D-1 .......... yellow .......... X500-10
B .......... vacant
C .......... 973DD-1 .......... orange .......... X500-18, X30-3, X30-4
D .......... 050DD-1 .......... black .......... X500-16, X546-D, X307-B
X500
X500
1 .......... 310DW-4 .......... black .......... XGND46, X497-B, X91-B, X496-B, X83-B, X494-B, X493-B, X86-C, X492-B, X80-B
2 .......... vacant
3 .......... vacant
4 .......... vacant
5 .......... vacant
6 .......... vacant
7 .......... vacant
8 .......... 577D-1 .......... purple .......... X495-A
9 .......... vacant
10 .......... 564D-1 .......... yellow .......... X499-A
11 .......... vacant
12 .......... 322D-1 .......... red .......... X86-B
13 .......... 555D-1 .......... dark green .......... X91-A
14 .......... 515D-1 .......... dark green .......... X83-A
15 .......... 602DC-1 .......... red .......... X307-A
16 .......... 050DA-1 .......... black .......... X546-D, X307-B, X499-D
17 .......... 531D-0.5 .......... brown .......... X30-1
18 .......... 973DA-0.5 .......... orange .......... X30-3, X30-4, X499-C
19 .......... 549D-1 .......... white .......... X459-C
20 .......... 241D-1 .......... brown .......... X459-A
21 .......... 243D-1 .......... orange .......... X459-B
22 .......... 353D-1 .......... orange .......... X86-A
23 .......... vacant
24 .......... vacant
25 .......... 580D-1 .......... black .......... X492-A
26 .......... vacant
27 .......... 570D-1 .......... black .......... X494-A
28 .......... 579D-1 .......... white .......... X493-A
29 .......... vacant
30 .......... 578D-1 .......... gray .......... X495-B
31 .......... 584D-1 .......... yellow .......... X497-A
32 .......... 582D-1 .......... red .......... X496-A
33 .......... vacant
34 .......... vacant
35 .......... vacant
36 .......... 509D-1 .......... white .......... X546-C
37 .......... 992D-1 .......... red .......... X546-A
38 .......... vacant
39 .......... vacant
40 .......... 606DA-0.5 .......... light blue .......... X80-A, X546-B
41 .......... vacant
42 .......... 512D-0.5 .......... red .......... X30-2
X546
X546 4-pin plug for restriction warning switch at hydraulic oil filter
X546
A .......... 992D-1 .......... red .......... X500-37
B .......... 606DC-1 .......... light blue .......... X500-40, X80-A
C .......... 509D-1 .......... white .......... X500-36
D .......... 050DE-1 .......... black .......... X500-16, X307-B, X499-D
XGND46
XGND46 Ground point
XGND46
(-) .......... 310DS-4 .......... black .......... X497-B, X91-B, X496-B, X83-B, X494-B, X493-B, X500-1, X86-C, X492-B, X80-B
Reference 240-26-301, W30 - Wiring Harness - Rear End of Transmission
W30 - Wiring harness - Rear end of transmission
X05
X05 7-terminal socket
X05
31 .......... 310DT-2.5 .......... black .......... X430-1, X87-B, X95-B
54 .......... 106D-1 .......... light blue .......... X430-25
54A .......... not used
58L .......... 118D-1 .......... gray .......... X430-24
58R .......... 128D-1 .......... gray .......... X430-37
L .......... 125D-1 .......... dark green .......... X430-23
R .......... 107D-1 .......... purple .......... X430-26
X87
X87 2-pin plug for differential lock solenoid valve
X87
A .......... 527D-1 .......... purple .......... X430-33
B .......... 310DS-1 .......... black .......... X430-1, X95-B, X05-31
X88
X88 2-pin plug for wheel speed sending unit
X88
A .......... 502D-1 .......... red .......... X430-40
B .......... 531DD-1 .......... brown .......... X430-14, X94-B, X96-C, X90-C, X89-C
X89
X89 3-pin plug for left draft sensor (if equipped)
X89
A .......... 873DB-1 .......... orange .......... X430-9, X96-A, X90-A
B .......... 885D-1 .......... yellow .......... X430-13
C .......... 531DF-1 .......... brown .......... X430-14, X94-B, X88-B, X96-C, X90-C
X90
X90 3-pin plug for right draft sensor
X90
A .......... 873DC-1 .......... orange .......... X430-9, X96-A, X89-A
B .......... 884D-1 .......... yellow .......... X430-11
C .......... 531DG-1 .......... brown .......... X430-14, X94-B, X88-B, X96-C, X89-C
X92
X92 4-pin plug for hitch-control stepper motor
X92
A .......... 859D-0.5 .......... white .......... X430-22
B .......... 858D-0.5 .......... gray .......... X430-21
C .......... 855D-0.5 .......... dark green .......... X430-16
D .......... 854D-0.5 .......... yellow .......... X430-15
X94
X94 2-pin plug for rear PTO speed sender
X94
A .......... 574D-1 .......... yellow .......... X430-32
B .......... 531DB-1 .......... brown .......... X430-14, X88-B, X96-C, X90-C, X89-C
X94
X95 2-pin plug for rear PTO solenoid valve
X95
A .......... 575D-1 .......... dark green .......... X430-31
B .......... 310DW-1 .......... black .......... X430-1, X87-B, X05-31
X96
X96 3-pin plug for hitch-control position sensor
X96
A .......... 873DD-1 .......... orange .......... X430-9, X90-A, X89-A
B .......... 878D-1 .......... gray .......... X430-18
C .......... 531DE-1 .......... brown .......... X430-14, X94-B, X88-B, X90-C, X89-C
X430
X430
1 .......... 310DQ-4 .......... black .......... X87-B, X95-B, X05-31
2 .......... not used
3 .......... not used
4 .......... not used
5 .......... not used
6 .......... not used
7 .......... not used
8 .......... not used
9 .......... 873DA-1 .......... orange .......... X96-A, X90-A, X89-A
10 .......... not used
11 .......... 884D-1 .......... yellow .......... X90-B
12 .......... not used
13 .......... 885D-1 .......... green .......... X89-B
14 .......... 531DA-1 .......... brown .......... X88-B, X89-C, X90-C, X94-B, X96-C
15 .......... 854D-0.5 .......... yellow .......... X92-D
16 .......... 855D-0.5 .......... dark green .......... X92-C
17 .......... not used
18 .......... 878D-1 .......... gray .......... X96-B
19 .......... not used
20 .......... not used
21 .......... 858D-0.5 .......... gray .......... X92-B
22 .......... 859D-0.5 .......... white .......... X92-A
23 .......... 125D-1 .......... dark green .......... X05-L
24 .......... 118D-1 .......... gray .......... X05-58L
25 .......... 106D-1 .......... light blue .......... X05-54
26 .......... 107D-1 .......... purple .......... X05-R
27 .......... not used
28 .......... not used
29 .......... not used
30 .......... not used
31 .......... 575D-1 .......... dark green .......... X95-A
32 .......... 574D-1 .......... yellow .......... X94-A
33 .......... 527D-1 .......... purple .......... X87-A
34 .......... not used
35 .......... not used
36 .......... not used
37 .......... 128D-1 .......... gray .......... X05-58R
38 .......... not used
39 .......... not used
40 .......... 502D-1 .......... red .......... X88-A
41 .......... not used
42 .......... not used
Reference 240-26-421, W42 — Wiring Harness - Battery Cut-Off Switch

(Version 1)
W42 - Wiring harness, battery cut-off switch (version 1)
K24
K24 Terminal with ring, for injection pump shut-off valve
K24
A .......... 322U-1 .......... red .......... K48-2
K48
K48 - Relay for battery cut-off switch
K48
1 .......... 310UC-1 .......... black .......... XGND56
2 .......... 322U-1 .......... red .......... K24-A
3 .......... 310UD-4 .......... black .......... XGND56
4 .......... vacant
5 .......... 410UB-4 .......... black .......... XGND57
6 .......... vacant
7 .......... vacant
8 .......... vacant
9 .......... vacant
X593
X593 4-pin plug for switch of battery cut-off switch
X593
A .......... 410UA-1 .......... black .......... XGND57
B .......... 310UB-1 .......... black .......... XGND56
C .......... vacant
D .......... vacant
XGND56
XGND56 Ground point
XGND56
(-) .......... 310UB-1 .......... black .......... X593-B
(-) .......... 310UC-1 .......... black .......... K48-1
(-) .......... 310UD-4 .......... black .......... K48-3
XGND57
XGND57 Ground ring terminal for battery cut-off relay
XGND57
(-) .......... 410UA-1 .......... black .......... X593-A
(-) .......... 410UB-4 .......... black .......... K48-5
Reference 240-26-461, W46 — Wiring Harness - Front PTO, Adapter
W46 - Front PTO adapter harness
X127
X127
A .......... 973XM-1 .......... orange .......... X518-A X518F A
B .......... 901X-1 .......... brown .......... X518-B X518F B
C .......... 904X-1 .......... yellow .......... X518-C X518F C
X311/1
X311/1 1-pin plug for front PTO indicator light
X311/1
A .......... 178X-0.5 .......... gray .......... X518-D X518F D
X311/2
X311/2 1-pin plug for front PTO indicator light
X311/2
A .......... 310XK-0.5 .......... black .......... X518-F X518F F
Section 240 - ELECTRICAL SYSTEM Group 26B: Wiring Harnesses from Serial Number 424816
X518
X518 6-pin plug — Connection point for front PTO and adapter wiring harness (W08)
X518
A .......... 973XM-1 .......... orange .......... X127-A X127M A
B .......... 901X-1 .......... brown .......... X127-B X127M B
C .......... 904X-1 .......... yellow .......... X127-C X127M C
D .......... 178X-0.5 .......... gray .......... X311/1-A X311F-1 A
E .......... vacant
F .......... 310XK-0.5 .......... black .......... X311/2-B X311F-2 A
Group 26B - Wiring Harnesses from Serial Number 424816

W01 — Wiring Harness - Power Supply and Starting Aid from Serial No.
436764
W01 — Wiring Harness - Power Supply and Starting Aid from Serial No. 436764
LEGEND:
W01 — D31 Diode
W01 — F09 Fuse for heater element (electrical starting aid)
W01 — F11 Fuse for electrical starting aid
W01 — F13 Main fuse
W01 — F14 Main fuse
W01 — G02 Terminal with ring, for alternator
W01 — K01 Starting motor relay
W01 — K36 Relay for electrical starting aid
W01 — M01 Terminal with ring, starting motor
W01 — R15 Terminal with ring, for heater element (electrical starting aid)
W01 — X473 2-pin plug, connection point for power supply and starting aid wiring harness (W08)
List of references for Service ADVISOR
W01 — D31 - Diode

W01 — F09 - Fuse for heating element of electrical starting aid
W01 — F11 - Main fuse
W01 — G02 - Terminal with ring, for alternator
W01 — K01 - Starting motor relay
W01 — K36 - Relay for electrical starting aid
W01 — M01 - Terminal with ring, for starting motor
W01 — R15 - Terminal with ring, for heating element of electrical starting aid
W01 — X473 - 2-pin plug, connection point for power supply and starting aid harness (W08)
W01 — D31
W01 — D31 - Diode
Diode
W01 — D31 - Diode
W01 — D31 - Diode
A .......... 310XD-1 .......... black .......... K36-2
E .......... 395XB-1 .......... dark green .......... K36-1
W01 — F09
Fuse for heater element (electrical starting aid)
A .......... 352X-10 .......... red .......... K36-4
E .......... 002XD-10 .......... red .......... F14-E, F13-E, K01-3, G02-30
W01 — F11
W01 — F11 - Fuse for electrical starting aid
Fuse for electrical starting aid
A .......... 342XB-1 .......... red .......... K36-3
E .......... 362X-1 .......... red .......... X547-C
W01 — F13
Main fuse
A .......... 042UJ-10 .......... red .......... X473-2
E .......... 002XC-10 .......... red .......... F14-E, F09-E, K01-3, G02-30
W01 — F14
Main fuse
A .......... 012UI-10 .......... red .......... X473-1
E .......... 002XB-10 .......... red .......... F13-E, F09-E, K01-3, G02-30
W01 — G02
Terminal with ring, for alternator
30 .......... 002XG-16 .......... red .......... F14-E, F13-E, F09-E, K01-3
W01 — K01
Starting motor relay
1 .......... 506X-1 .......... light blue .......... X547-A
2 .......... 310XB-1.5 .......... black .......... X547-D, K36-2
3 .......... 002XE-2.5 .......... red .......... F14-E, F13-E, F09-E, G02-30
4 .......... 309X-2.5 .......... white .......... M01-50
W01 — K36
Relay for electrical starting aid
1 .......... 355XA-1 .......... dark green .......... X547-B
1 .......... 395XB-1 .......... dark green .......... D31-E
2 .......... 310XA-1 .......... black .......... K01-2, X547-D
2 .......... 310XD-1 .......... black .......... D31-A
3 .......... 342XA-10 .......... red .......... R15-A
3 .......... 342XB-1 .......... red .......... F11-A
4 .......... 352X-10 .......... red .......... F09-A
W01 — M01
Terminal with ring, starting motor
50 .......... 309X-2.5 .......... white .......... K01-4
W01 — R15
Terminal with ring, for heater element (electrical starting aid)
A .......... 342XA-10 .......... red .......... K36-3
W01 — X473
1 .......... 012UI-10 .......... red .......... F14-A
2 .......... 042UJ-10 .......... red .......... F13-A
W01 — X547
2-pin plug, connection point for power supply and starting aid wiring harness (W08)
A .......... 506X-1 .......... light blue .......... K01-1
B .......... 355XA-1 .......... dark green .......... K36-1
C .......... 362X-1 .......... red .......... F11-E
D .......... 310XC-1 .......... black .......... K01-2, K36-2
W08 — Wiring Harness - Cab for Tractors with PowrQuad Transmission

from Serial No. 436758
W08 — Wiring Harness - Cab for Tractors with PowrQuad Transmission from Serial No. 436758
LEGEND:
W08 — B28/LH Door switch for dome light, l.h.
W08 — F03 Fuses (fuse and relay boxes)

W08 — K01 Relays (fuse and relay boxes)
W08 — R19 CAN-BUS terminating resistor
W08 — S01 8-pin plug for main (key) switch
W08 — S01/1 1-pin plug for main (key) switch
W08 — S04 2-pin plug for horn button
W08 — S08 3-pin plug for turn signal switch
W08 — S09 5-pin plug for light switch
W08 — X10/1 1-pin plug for full/dipped beam headlight switch
W08 — X14/1 8-pin plug for position feedback unit of hitch control
W08 — X14/2 3-pin plug for sensitivity potentiometer
W08 — X34 6-pin plug for remote-control switch of rockshaft control, right
W08 — X35 6-pin plug for remote-control switch of rockshaft control, left
W08 — X37 2-pin plug for front loader
W08 — X38 4-pin plug for windshield wiper motor
W08 — X44 2-pin plug for rear window washer pump
W08 — X106 4-pin plug for right tail, brake and turn signal lights
W08 — X107 4-pin plug for left tail, brake and turn signal lights
W08 — X113/1 2-pin plug for license plate light (left)
W08 — X113/2 2-pin plug for license plate light (right)
W08 — X120/1 1-pin plug for air-brake pressure gauge
W08 — X120/2 1-pin plug for air-brake pressure gauge
W08 — X122/2 2-pin plug for differential lock switch
W08 — X125 3-pin plug for rear PTO switch
W08 — X127 3-pin plug for front PTO switch
W08 — X128 2-pin plug for cigarette lighter
W08 — X174 3-pin plug for the remote-control switch of the rear PTO (switch on l.h. side)
W08 — X230 2-pin plug for seat switch
W08 — X235 2-pin plug for handbrake switch
W08 — X239 3-pin plug, connection point of harness for 3-terminal power outlet socket (W14)
W08 — X243 3-pin plug for rear PTO preselector switch
W08 — X245 3-pin plug for front wheel drive switch
W08 — X285 2-pin plug for windshield washer pump
W08 — X311/1 1-pin plug for front PTO indicator light
W08 — X311/2 1-pin plug for front PTO indicator light
W08 — X324 8-pin plug for brake switch
W08 — X400 42-pin plug — Connection point for cab roof and fan wiring harness (W19)
W08 — X430 42-pin plug — Connection point for harness at rear of transmission (W30)
W08 — X450 42-pin plug — Connection point for engine wiring harness (W02)
W08 — X474 2-pin plug for GreenStar
W08 — X488 2-pin plug for operator′s seat
W08 — X500 42-pin plug, connection point for harness at front end of transmission (W28)
W08 — X516 6-pin plug for hazard warning light switch
W08 — X571 9-terminal service socket (CAN-BUS)
W08 — X579/1 1-pin plug for indicator light of electrical starting aid
W08 — X579/2 1-pin plug for indicator light of electrical starting aid
W08 — X616/1 32-pin plug for BCU
W08 — X617 26-pin plug for basic informator
W08 — X618 26-pin plug for basic informator
W08 — X620 6-pin plug for rear window wiper switch
W08 — X623 3-pin plug for the remote-control switch of the rear PTO (switch on r.h. side)
W08 — X629 6-pin plug for windshield wiper switch
W08 — XGND1 Ground point
W08 — XGND43 Ground point for electronics
W08 — B28/LH - Door switch for dome light, l.h.

W08 — F03 - Fuses (fuse and relay boxes)
W08 — K01 - Relays (fuse and relay boxes)
W08 — R19 - CAN-BUS terminating resistor
W08 — S01 - 8-pin plug for main (key) switch
W08 — S01/1 - 1-pin plug for main (key) switch
W08 — S04 - 2-pin plug for horn button
W08 — S08 - 3-pin plug for turn signal switch
W08 — S09 - 5-pin plug for light switch
W08 — X10/1 - 1-pin plug for full/dipped-beam switch
W08 — X14/1 - 8-pin plug for feedback unit of rockshaft control
W08 — X14/2 - 3-pin plug for sensitivity potentiometer
W08 — X34 - 6-pin plug for remote-control switch of rockshaft control, right
W08 — X35 - 6-pin plug for the remote-control switch of the rockshaft control, left
W08 — X37 - 2-pin plug for front loader
W08 — X38 - 4-pin plug for windshield wiper motor
W08 — X44 - 2-pin plug for rear window washer pump
W08 — X106 - 4-pin plug for tail, brake and turn signal lights, right
W08 — X107 - 4-pin plug for tail, brake and turn signal lights, left
W08 — X113/1 - 2-pin plug for license plate light (left)
W08 — X113/2 - 2-pin plug for license plate light (right)
W08 — X120/1 - 1-pin plug for air-brake pressure gauge
W08 — X122/2 - 2-pin plug for differential lock switch
W08 — X125 - 3-pin plug for rear PTO switch
W08 — X127 - 3-pin plug for front PTO switch
W08 — X128 - 2-pin plug for cigarette lighter
W08 — X174 - 3-pin plug for the remote-control switch of the rear PTO (switch on l.h. side)
W08 — X230 - 2-pin plug for seat switch
W08 — X235 - 2-pin plug for handbrake switch
W08 — X239 - 3-pin plug — connection point of harness for 3-terminal power outlet socket (W14)
W08 — X243 - 3-pin plug for rear PTO preselector switch
W08 — X245 - 3-pin plug for front-wheel drive switch
W08 — X285 - 2-pin plug for windshield washer pump
W08 — X311/1 - 1-pin plug for front PTO indicator light
W08 — X324 - 8-pin plug for brake switch
W08 — X400 - 42-pin plug — connection point for cab roof and fan wiring harness (W19)
W08 — X430 - 42-pin plug — Rear transmission wiring harness connection point (W30)
W08 — X450 - 42-pin plug — connection point for engine wiring harness (W02)
W08 — X473 - 2-pin plug, connecting point for power supply and starting aid wiring harness (W01)
W08 — X474 - 2-pin plug for GreenStar
W08 — X488 - 2-pin plug for operator′s seat
W08 — X500 - 42-pin plug - front transmission wiring harness connection point (W28)
W08 — X516 - 6-pin plug for hazard warning light switch
W08 — X571 - 9-terminal service socket (CAN-BUS)
W08 — X579/1 - 1-pin plug for indicator light of electrical starting aid
W08 — X616/1 - 32-pin plug for Basic Control Unit (BCU)
W08 — X617 - 26-pin plug for basic informator
W08 — X620 - 6-pin plug for rear window wiper switch

W08 — X623 - 3-pin plug for remote-control switch of rear PTO (switch on r.h. side)
W08 — X629 - 6-pin plug for windshield wiper switch
W08 — XGND1 - Ground point
W08 — XGND43 - Ground point (electronics)
W08 — B28/LH
Door switch for dome light, l.h.
XGND5, K07/1-86, X120/2-A, X235-B, X617-14, X617-1, X38-2, K07/6-86, K07/3-85, K07/5-86,
C1 .......... 310BN-1 .......... black ..........
K08/1-85, K08/2-85, X500-1, X430-1, X474-B, K08/3-85
NC2 .......... 274A-1 .......... yellow .......... X400-28
NO4 .......... not used
W08 — F03
Fuses (fuse and relay boxes)
F03/01A .......... 124AC-1 .......... yellow .......... X450-4
F03/01E .......... 164AB-1 .......... yellow .......... K02/7-87A, F03/02E, F03/13E
F03/02A .......... 114A-1 .......... yellow .......... X450-33
F03/02E .......... 164AC-1 .......... yellow .......... K02/7-87A, F03/01E, F03/13E
F03/03A .......... 118AA-1 .......... gray .......... X430-24, X106-B, X400-9, X113/2-A
F03/03E .......... 158AA-1 .......... gray .......... F03/04E, S09-C, F06/08E
F03/04A .......... 128AC-1 .......... gray .......... X400-10, X430-37, X113/1-A, X107-B
F03/04E .......... 158AC-1 .......... gray .......... F03/03E, S09-C, F06/08E
F03/05A .......... 132A-1 .......... red .......... X400-4
F03/05E .......... 198AB-1 .......... gray .......... F03/06E
F03/06A .......... 145A-1 .......... dark green .......... X400-3
F03/06E .......... 198AA-2.5 .......... gray .......... K02/3-87
F03/06E .......... 198AB-1 .......... gray .......... F03/05E
F03/07A .......... 162A-1 .......... red .......... X400-6
F03/07E .......... 197AB-1 .......... purple .......... F03/08E
F03/08A .......... 115A-1 .......... dark green .......... X400-5
F03/08E .......... 197AA-2.5 .......... purple .......... K02/4-87
F03/08E .......... 197AB-1 .......... purple .......... F03/07E
F03/09A .......... 179A-1 .......... white .......... X400-30
F03/09E .......... 199A-1 .......... white .......... K02/5-87
F03/10A .......... 177AC-1 .......... purple .......... K02/6-30, F03/16A
X473-1, F04/02E, K02/4-30, K02/5-30, F06/15E, F04/12E, F06/01E, F04/16E, F06/13E, F06/02E,
F03/10E .......... 012AD-1 .......... red ..........
F04/11E, F04/01E, F04/10E, K02/2-30, K02/1-30, F04/03E, F04/04E, K02/3-30
F03/11A .......... 174A-1 .......... yellow .......... X400-26
F03/11E .......... 104AB-1 .......... yellow .......... F03/12E
F03/12A .......... 184AB-1 .......... yellow .......... X400-27
F03/12E .......... 104AA-2.5 .......... yellow .......... K02/7-87
F03/12E .......... 104AB-1 .......... yellow .......... F03/11E
F03/13E .......... 169AA-1.5 .......... white .......... K02/1-87, K02/7-30
F03/14A .......... 139AC-1.5 .......... white .......... F03/15A, X450-32
F03/14E .......... 167AC-1.5 .......... purple .......... K02/2-87, F03/16E
F03/15A .......... 139AD-1.5 .......... white .......... F03/14A, X450-32
F03/15E .......... 109A-1 .......... white .......... K02/6-87A
F03/16A .......... 177AB-1.5 .......... purple .......... K02/6-30, F03/10A
F03/16E .......... 167AB-1.5 .......... purple .......... K02/2-87, F03/14E
W08 — F04
F04/01A .......... 292A-2.5 .......... red .......... K08/3-30
X473-1, F04/02E, F03/10E, K02/4-30, K02/5-30, F06/15E, F04/12E, F06/01E, F04/16E, F06/13E,
F04/01E .......... 012AL-2.5 .......... red ..........
F06/02E, F04/11E, F04/10E, K02/2-30, K02/1-30, F04/03E, F04/04E, K02/3-30
F04/02A .......... 307A-2.5 .......... purple .......... X239-B
X473-1, F03/10E, K02/4-30, K02/5-30, F06/15E, F04/12E, F06/01E, F04/16E, F06/13E, F06/02E,
F04/02E .......... 012AV-2.5 .......... red ..........
F04/11E, F04/01E, F04/10E, K02/2-30, K02/1-30, F04/03E, F04/04E, K02/3-30
F04/03A .......... 332A-2.5 .......... red .......... K07/3-30
F04/03E .......... 012AK-2.5 .......... red ..........
F06/02E, F04/11E, F04/01E, F04/10E, K02/2-30, K02/1-30, F04/04E, K02/3-30
F04/04A .......... 922A-1 .......... red .......... X618-8
F04/04E .......... 012AJ-1 .......... red ..........
F06/02E, F04/11E, F04/01E, F04/10E, K02/2-30, K02/1-30, F04/03E, K02/3-30
F04/05A .......... 992AA-1 .......... red .......... X618-14, X500-37
F04/05E .......... 072AM-1 .......... red .......... F04/08E
F04/06A .......... not used
F04/06E .......... not used
F04/07A .......... not used
F04/07E .......... not used
F04/08A .......... 882AA-1 .......... red .......... X616/2-2M1, X616/1-1G3
F04/08E .......... 072AJ-2.5 .......... red .......... F04/09E
F04/08E .......... 072AM-1 .......... red .......... F04/05E
F04/09A .......... 973AB-1 .......... orange .......... X245-C, S08-2, X230-A, X125-A, X122/2-A, X127-A, X243-B, X174-A, X623-A
F04/09E .......... 072AD-2.5 .......... red .......... K01/2-87, F04/13E, F05/01E
F04/09E .......... 072AJ-2.5 .......... red .......... F04/08E
F04/10A .......... 122AA-2.5 .......... red .......... X616/3-3G2, X616/3-3H2
F04/10E .......... 012AT-2.5 .......... red ..........
F06/02E, F04/11E, F04/01E, K02/2-30, K02/1-30, F04/03E, F04/04E, K02/3-30
F04/11A .......... 182AA-2.5 .......... red .......... X616/3-3H1, X616/3-3G1
F04/11E .......... 012AU-2.5 .......... red ..........
F06/02E, F04/01E, F04/10E, K02/2-30, K02/1-30, F04/03E, F04/04E, K02/3-30
F04/12A .......... 152A-1.5 .......... red .......... S09-B
F04/12E .......... 012AC-1.5 .......... red ..........
F04/11E, F04/01E, F04/10E, K02/2-30, K02/1-30, F04/03E, F04/04E, K02/3-30
F04/13A .......... 981A-2.5 .......... brown .......... X474-A
F04/13E .......... 072AB-2.5 .......... red .......... K01/2-87, F05/01E, F04/09E
F04/14A .......... not used
F04/14E .......... not used
F04/15A .......... not used
F04/15E .......... not used
F04/16A .......... 571AA-1 .......... brown .......... X616/2-2L1, X516-C
F04/16E .......... 012AP-1 .......... red ..........
F04/11E, F04/01E, F04/10E, K02/2-30, K02/1-30, F04/03E, F04/04E, K02/3-30
W08 — F05
F05/01A .......... 273A-1 .......... orange .......... X324-A
F05/01E .......... 072AC-2.5 .......... red .......... K01/2-87, F04/13E, F04/09E
F05/02A .......... not used
F05/02E .......... not used
F05/03A .......... not used
F05/03E .......... not used
F05/04A .......... not used
F05/04E .......... not used
F05/05A .......... not used
F05/05E .......... not used
F05/06A .......... not used
F05/06E .......... not used
F05/07A .......... not used
F05/07E .......... not used
F05/08A .......... 322AB-1 .......... red .......... X450-21, X500-12, X618-10
F05/08A .......... 322AE-1 .......... red .......... K07/6-30
F05/08E .......... 022AD-1 .......... red .......... S01-IGN, K07/3-86
F05/09E .......... 042AE-1.5 .......... red .......... X473-2, F05/10E, F05/12E, F05/11E
F05/10A .......... 272A-4 .......... red .......... K01/3-30
F05/10E .......... 042AC-4 .......... red .......... X473-2, F05/09E, F05/12E, F05/11E
F05/11A .......... 282A-4 .......... red .......... K01/1-30
F05/11E .......... 042AF-4 .......... red .......... X473-2, F05/09E, F05/10E, F05/12E
F05/12A .......... 902A-4 .......... red .......... K01/2-30
F05/12E .......... 042AD-4 .......... red .......... X473-2, F05/09E, F05/10E, F05/11E
F05/13A .......... not used
F05/13E .......... not used
F05/14A .......... not used
F05/14E .......... not used
F05/15A .......... not used
F05/15E .......... not used
F05/16A .......... not used
F05/16E .......... not used
W08 — F06
F06/01A .......... 242A-4 .......... red .......... K08/2-30
F06/01E .......... 012AM-4 .......... red ..........
F04/11E, F04/01E, F04/10E, K02/2-30, K02/1-30, F04/03E, F04/04E, K02/3-30
F06/02A .......... 232A-2.5 .......... red .......... K08/1-30
F06/02E .......... 012AY-2.5 .......... red ..........
F04/11E, F04/01E, F04/10E, K02/2-30, K02/1-30, F04/03E, F04/04E, K02/3-30
F06/03A .......... 215A-1 .......... dark green .......... X450-25
F06/03E .......... 213A-1 .......... orange .......... X400-29
F06/04A .......... 236AB-1 .......... light blue .......... X38-4, X400-22, X629-E
F06/04E .......... 202AD-1 .......... red .......... F06/05E
F06/04E .......... 202AE-1 .......... red .......... K08/1-86
F06/05E .......... 202AC-1 .......... red .......... F06/06E
F06/05E .......... 202AD-1 .......... red .......... F06/04E
F06/06A .......... 256A-1 .......... light blue .......... X37-A
F06/06E .......... 202AB-1.5 .......... red .......... F06/07E
F06/06E .......... 202AC-1 .......... red .......... F06/05E
F06/07A .......... 204A-1 .......... yellow .......... X400-33
F06/07E .......... 202AA-2.5 .......... red .......... K01/1-87
F06/07E .......... 202AB-1.5 .......... red .......... F06/06E
F06/08A .......... 138AB-1 .......... gray .......... X617-2, X400-14, X120/1-A
F06/08E .......... 158AE-1 .......... gray .......... F03/03E, F03/04E, S09-C
F06/09A .......... 257A-1 .......... purple .......... X400-24
F06/09E .......... 312AD-1 .......... red .......... F06/10E
F06/09E .......... 312AE-1 .......... red .......... K08/3-86
F06/10A .......... 262A-1 .......... red .......... S04-A
F06/10E .......... 312AC-1 .......... red .......... F06/11E
F06/10E .......... 312AD-1 .......... red .......... F06/09E
F06/11A .......... 297A-1 .......... purple .......... X128-A
F06/11E .......... 312AB-1.5 .......... red .......... F06/12E
F06/11E .......... 312AC-1 .......... red .......... F06/10E
F06/12A .......... 293A-1 .......... orange .......... X488-A
F06/12E .......... 312AA-2.5 .......... red .......... K01/3-87
F06/12E .......... 312AB-1.5 .......... red .......... F06/11E
F06/13A .......... 228AA-1 .......... gray .......... K01/4-86, X616/2-2D3
F06/13E .......... 012AW-1 .......... red ..........
F04/11E, F04/01E, F04/10E, K02/2-30, K02/1-30, F04/03E, F04/04E, K02/3-30
F06/14A .......... not used
F06/14E .......... not used
F06/15A .......... 912AA-1 .......... red .......... X400-15, X571-B
F06/15E .......... 012AO-1 .......... red ..........
F04/11E, F04/01E, F04/10E, K02/2-30, K02/1-30, F04/03E, F04/04E, K02/3-30
F06/16A .......... not used
F06/16E .......... not used
W08 — K01
Relays (fuse and relay boxes)
W08 — K01/1 - Accessory relay
30 (3) .......... 282A-4 .......... red .......... F05/11A
XGND5, X113/1-B, K02/6-85, K02/7-85, S01/1-A, X618-12, X516-E, X579/2-A, X113/2-B, X107-D,
85 (2) .......... 310BH-1 .......... black ..........
K01/3-85, K02/1-85, K02/2-85, K02/3-85, K02/4-85, K02/5-85
86 (1) .......... 192AC-1 .......... red .......... S01-ELX, K01/2-86
87 (5) .......... 202AA-2.5 .......... red .......... F06/07E
87A (4) .......... not used
W08 — K01/2 - Relay for power supply to electronics
30 (3) .......... 902A-4 .......... red .......... F05/12A
85 (2) .......... 085A-1 .......... dark green .......... K07/1-85
86 (1) .......... 192AB-1 .......... red .......... S01-ELX, K01/1-86
87 (5) .......... 072AA-4 .......... red .......... F04/13E, F05/01E, F04/09E
87A (4) .......... not used
30 (3) .......... 272A-4 .......... red .......... F05/10A
85 (2) .......... 310BC-1 .......... black ..........
K01/1-85, K02/1-85, K02/2-85, K02/3-85, K02/4-85, K02/5-85
86 (1) .......... 212A-1 .......... red .......... S01-ACC
87 (5) .......... 312AA-2.5 .......... red .......... F06/12E
87A (4) .......... not used
W08 — K01/4 - Acoustic alarm
30 (-) .......... not used
85 (-) .......... 050AB-1 .......... black .......... XGND6
86 (+) .......... 228AB-1 .......... gray .......... F06/13A, X616/2-2D3
87 .......... not used
87A .......... not used
W08 — K02
W08 — K02/1 - Relay for dipped-beam headlight
W08 — K02/1 - Relay for dipped-beam headlight
30 (3) .......... 012AH-1.5 .......... red ..........
F06/02E, F04/11E, F04/01E, F04/10E, K02/2-30, F04/03E, F04/04E, K02/3-30
85 (2) .......... 310BT-1 .......... black ..........
K01/1-85, K01/3-85, K02/2-85, K02/3-85, K02/4-85, K02/5-85
86 (1) .......... 144A-1 .......... yellow .......... X10/2-A
87 (5) .......... 169AB-1.5 .......... white .......... F03/13E, K02/7-30
87A (4) .......... not used
W08 — K02/2 - Relay for full-beam headlight
W08 — K02/2 - Relay for full-beam headlight
30 (3) .......... 012AE-1.5 .......... red ..........
F06/02E, F04/11E, F04/01E, F04/10E, K02/1-30, F04/03E, F04/04E, K02/3-30
85 (2) .......... 310AE-1 .......... black ..........
K01/1-85, K01/3-85, K02/1-85, K02/3-85, K02/4-85, K02/5-85
86 (1) .......... 159AA-1 .......... white .......... X10/3-A, X618-22
87 (5) .......... 167AA-1.5 .......... purple .......... F03/16E, F03/14E
87A (4) .......... not used
W08 — K02/3 - Relay for front worklights on cab roof
W08 — K02/3 - Relay for front worklights on cab roof
30 (3) .......... 012AF-2.5 .......... red ..........
F06/02E, F04/11E, F04/01E, F04/10E, K02/2-30, K02/1-30, F04/03E, F04/04E
85 (2) .......... 310BM-1 .......... black ..........
K01/1-85, K01/3-85, K02/1-85, K02/2-85, K02/4-85, K02/5-85
86 (1) .......... 135AB-1 .......... dark green .......... S09-H, K07/1-87, K02/5-86, K02/4-86, X400-32, X617-21
87 (5) .......... 198AA-2.5 .......... gray .......... F03/06E
87A (4) .......... not used
W08 — K02/4 - Relay for rear worklights on cab roof
W08 — K02/4 - Relay for rear worklights on cab roof
X473-1, F04/02E, F03/10E, K02/5-30, F06/15E, F04/12E, F06/01E, F04/16E, F06/13E, F06/02E,
30 (3) .......... 012AG-2.5 .......... red ..........
F04/11E, F04/01E, F04/10E, K02/2-30, K02/1-30, F04/03E, F04/04E, K02/3-30
85 (2) .......... 310AJ-1 .......... black ..........
K01/1-85, K01/3-85, K02/1-85, K02/2-85, K02/3-85, K02/5-85
86 (1) .......... 135AE-1 .......... dark green .......... S09-H, K02/3-86, K07/1-87, K02/5-86, X400-32, X617-21
87 (5) .......... 197AA-2.5 .......... purple .......... F03/08E
87A (4) .......... not used
W08 — K02/5 - Relay for front corner worklights
W08 — K02/5 - Relay for front corner worklights
X473-1, F04/02E, F03/10E, K02/4-30, F06/15E, F04/12E, F06/01E, F04/16E, F06/13E, F06/02E,
30 (3) .......... 012AN-1 .......... red ..........
F04/11E, F04/01E, F04/10E, K02/2-30, K02/1-30, F04/03E, F04/04E, K02/3-30
XGND5, X113/1-B, K02/6-85, K02/7-85, S01/1-A, X618-12, X516-E, X579/2-A, X113/2-B, X107-
85 (2) .......... 310BA-1 .......... black ..........
D, K01/1-85, K01/3-85, K02/1-85, K02/2-85, K02/3-85, K02/4-85
86 (1) .......... 135AF-1 .......... dark green .......... S09-H, K02/3-86, K07/1-87, K02/4-86, X400-32, X617-21
87 (5) .......... 199A-1 .......... white .......... F03/09E
87A (4) .......... not used
W08 — K02/6 - Relay for worklights or headlights on cab frame
W08 — K02/6 - Relay for worklights or headlights on cab frame
30 (3) .......... 177AA-1.5 .......... purple .......... F03/16A, F03/10A
XGND5, X113/1-B, K02/7-85, S01/1-A, X618-12, X516-E, X579/2-A, X113/2-B, X107-D, K01/1-85,
85 (2) .......... 310BU-1 .......... black ..........
K01/3-85, K02/1-85, K02/2-85, K02/3-85, K02/4-85, K02/5-85
86 (1) .......... 131AC-1 .......... brown .......... X400-34, K02/7-86
87 (5) .......... 129AC-1.5 .......... white .......... X400-2
87A (4) .......... 109A-1 .......... white .......... F03/15E
W08 — K02/7 - Relay for lights on cab frame
W08 — K02/7 - Relay for lights on cab frame
30 (3) .......... 169AC-1.5 .......... white .......... F03/13E, K02/1-87
XGND5, X113/1-B, K02/6-85, S01/1-A, X618-12, X516-E, X579/2-A, X113/2-B, X107-D, K01/1-85,
85 (2) .......... 310AV-1 .......... black ..........
K01/3-85, K02/1-85, K02/2-85, K02/3-85, K02/4-85, K02/5-85
86 (1) .......... 131AB-1 .......... brown .......... X400-34, K02/6-86
87 (5) .......... 104AA-2.5 .......... yellow .......... F03/12E
87A (4) .......... 164AA-1 .......... yellow .......... F03/01E, F03/02E, F03/13E
W08 — K07
W08 — K07/1 - 3-amp diode for dipped/full-beam headlights (pins 87 and 30) or 1-amp diode for
power supply to electronics (pins 85 and 86)
W08 — K07/1 - 3-amp diode for dipped/full-beam headlights (pins 87 and 30)
W08 — K07/1 - 1-amp diode for power supply to electronics (pins 85 and 86)
30 (3) .......... 113AE-1 .......... orange .......... X400-31, S09-M, X10/1-A
85 (2) .......... 085A-1 .......... dark green .......... K01/2-85
XGND5, X120/2-A, X235-B, X617-14, X617-1, X38-2, B28/LH-C1, K07/6-86, K07/3-85, K07/5-86,
86 (1) .......... 310BO-1 .......... black ..........
K08/1-85, K08/2-85, X500-1, X430-1, X474-B, K08/3-85
87 (5) .......... 135AC-1 .......... dark green .......... S09-H, K02/3-86, K02/5-86, K02/4-86, X400-32, X617-21
87A (4) .......... not used
W08 — K07/2 - not used
W08 — K07/3 - Fuel preheater relay
W08 — K07/3 - Fuel preheater relay
30 (3) .......... 332A-2.5 .......... red .......... F04/03A
XGND5, K07/1-86, X120/2-A, X235-B, X617-14, X617-1, X38-2, B28/LH-C1, K07/6-86, K07/5-86,
85 (2) .......... 310BQ-1 .......... black ..........
K08/1-85, K08/2-85, X500-1, X430-1, X474-B, K08/3-85
86 (1) .......... 022AB-1 .......... red .......... S01-IGN, F05/08E
87 (5) .......... 264A-2.5 .......... yellow .......... X450-8
87A (4) .......... not used
W08 — K07/5 - Relay for cold weather starting control
W08 — K07/5 - Relay for cold weather starting control
30 (3) .......... 306A-1 .......... light blue .......... X450-15
85 (2) .......... 333AA-1 .......... orange .......... K07/6-87, X450-14
86 (1) .......... 310BS-1 .......... black ..........
K08/1-85, K08/2-85, X500-1, X430-1, X474-B, K08/3-85
87 (5) .......... 326A-1 .......... light blue .......... X617-25
87A (4) .......... not used
W08 — K07/6 - Alternator relay
W08 — K07/6 - Alternator relay
30 (3) .......... 322AE-1 .......... red .......... F05/08A
85 (2) .......... 336A-0.5 .......... light blue .......... X616/2-2E1
86 (1) .......... 310AW-1 .......... black ..........
K08/1-85, K08/2-85, X500-1, X430-1, X474-B, K08/3-85
87 (5) .......... 333AB-1 .......... orange .......... K07/5-85, X450-14
87A (4) .......... not used
W08 — K08
W08 — K08/1 - Relay for air conditioning
30 (3) .......... 232A-2.5 .......... red .......... F06/02A
85 (2) .......... 310BP-1 .......... black ..........
K07/5-86, K08/2-85, X500-1, X430-1, X474-B, K08/3-85
86 (1) .......... 202AE-1 .......... red .......... F06/04E
87 (5) .......... 247A-2.5 .......... purple .......... X400-8
87A (4) .......... not used
30 (3) .......... 242A-4 .......... red .......... F06/01A
85 (2) .......... 310BY-1 .......... black ..........
K07/5-86, K08/1-85, X500-1, X430-1, X474-B, K08/3-85
86 (1) .......... 210A-1 .......... black .......... X400-7
87 (5) .......... 234A-4 .......... yellow .......... X400-1
87A (4) .......... not used
W08 — K08/3 - Relay for 3-terminal socket
W08 — K08/3 - Relay for 3-terminal socket
30 (3) .......... 292A-2.5 .......... red .......... F04/01A
85 (2) .......... 310BR-1 .......... black ..........
K07/5-86, K08/1-85, K08/2-85, X500-1, X430-1, X474-B
86 (1) .......... 312AE-1 .......... red .......... F06/09E
87 (5) .......... 412A-2.5 .......... red .......... X239-A
87A (4) .......... not used
W08 — R19
CAN-BUS terminating resistor
A .......... 934AO-0.5 .......... yellow .......... X616/2-2A1, X571-C
B .......... 935AO-0.5 .......... dark green .......... X616/2-2B1, X571-D
W08 — S01
8-pin plug for main (key) switch
ACC .......... 212A-1 .......... red .......... K01/3-86
AID .......... 385A-1.5 .......... dark green .......... X450-3
BAT1 .......... 092AC-1.5 .......... red .......... F05/09A, S01-BAT2
BAT2 .......... 092AB-1.5 .......... red .......... F05/09A, S01-BAT1
ELX .......... 192AA-1 .......... red .......... K01/1-86, K01/2-86
GND .......... 320A-0.5 .......... black .......... X617-13
IGN .......... 022AA-1.5 .......... red .......... K07/3-86, F05/08E
ST .......... 311AA-1 .......... brown .......... X500-39
W08 — S01/1
XGND5, X113/1-B, K02/6-85, K02/7-85, X618-12, X516-E, X579/2-A, X113/2-B, X107-D, K01/1-85,
A .......... 310BZ-1 .......... black ..........
K01/3-85, K02/1-85, K02/2-85, K02/3-85, K02/4-85, K02/5-85
W08 — S04
2-pin plug for horn button
A .......... 262A-1 .......... red .......... F06/10A
B .......... 903A-1 .......... orange .......... X450-16
W08 — S08
3-pin plug for turn signal switch
1 .......... 155A-0.5 .......... dark green .......... X616/2-2F4
2 .......... 973AC-1 .......... orange .......... X245-C, F04/09A, X230-A, X125-A, X122/2-A, X127-A, X243-B, X174-A, X623-A
3 .......... 127A-0.5 .......... purple .......... X616/2-2E4
W08 — S09
5-pin plug for light switch
B .......... 152A-1.5 .......... red .......... F04/12A
C .......... 158AD-1.5 .......... gray .......... F03/03E, F03/04E, F06/08E
L .......... not used
M .......... 113AC-1.5 .......... orange .......... X400-31, K07/1-30, X10/1-A
W08 — X10/1
1-pin plug for full/dipped beam headlight switch
X10/1
A .......... 113AD-1 .......... orange .......... X400-31, K07/1-30, S09-M
W08 — X10/2
A .......... 144A-1 .......... yellow .......... K02/1-86
W08 — X10/3
A .......... 159AB-1 .......... white .......... K02/2-86, X618-22
W08 — X14/1
W08 — X14/1 - 8-pin plug for position feedback unit of hitch control
8-pin plug for position feedback unit of hitch control
A .......... 531AD-1 .......... brown .......... X616/1-1G4, X450-10, X14/2-A, X430-14, X450-35
B .......... 873AA-1 .......... orange .......... X616/1-1F2, X430-9, X14/2-C
C .......... 875A-0.5 .......... dark green .......... X616/1-1C3
D .......... 838A-0.5 .......... gray .......... X616/1-1E2
E .......... 877A-0.5 .......... purple .......... X616/1-1D2
F .......... 834A-0.5 .......... yellow .......... X616/1-1E1
G .......... 839A-0.5 .......... white .......... X616/1-1E3
H .......... 876A-0.5 .......... light blue .......... X616/1-1D1
W08 — X14/2
3-pin plug for sensitivity potentiometer
A .......... 531AH-0.5 .......... brown .......... X616/1-1G4, X450-10, X430-14, X14/1-A, X450-35
B .......... 869A-0.5 .......... white .......... X616/1-1C4
C .......... 873AE-0.5 .......... orange .......... X14/1-B, X616/1-1F2, X430-9
W08 — X34
6-pin plug for remote-control switch of rockshaft control, right
A .......... 846A-0.5 .......... light blue .......... X616/1-1A4
B .......... 843A-0.5 .......... orange .......... X616/1-1A3
C .......... 050AP-0.5 .......... black .......... XGND6, X35-C, X35-D, X34-D
D .......... 050AO-0.5 .......... black .......... XGND6, X35-C, X35-D, X34-C
E .......... 841A-0.5 .......... brown .......... X616/1-1A1
F .......... 844A-0.5 .......... yellow .......... X616/1-1A2
W08 — X35
6-pin plug for remote-control switch of rockshaft control, left
A .......... 821A-0.5 .......... brown .......... X616/1-1B2
B .......... 824A-0.5 .......... yellow .......... X616/1-1B1
C .......... 050AL-0.5 .......... black .......... XGND6, X35-D, X34-D, X34-C
D .......... 050AM-0.5 .......... black .......... XGND6, X35-C, X34-D, X34-C
E .......... 826A-0.5 .......... light blue .......... X616/1-1B3
F .......... 823A-0.5 .......... orange .......... X616/1-1B4
W08 — X37
2-pin plug for front loader
A .......... 256A-1 .......... light blue .......... F06/06A
B .......... 310BF-1 .......... black .......... XGND1, X311/2-A, X285-B, X44-B, X239-C, X128-B, X488-B, X106-D
W08 — X38
4-pin plug for windshield wiper motor
1 .......... 235AB-1 .......... dark green .......... X629-B, X400-12
XGND5, K07/1-86, X120/2-A, X235-B, X617-14, X617-1, B28/LH-C1, K07/6-86, K07/3-85,

2 .......... 310AN-1 .......... black ..........
K07/5-86, K08/1-85, K08/2-85, X500-1, X430-1, X474-B, K08/3-85
3 .......... 224AA-1 .......... yellow .......... X629-A, X400-18
4 .......... 236AA-1 .......... light blue .......... F06/04A, X400-22, X629-E
W08 — X44
2-pin plug for rear window washer pump
A .......... 258A-1 .......... gray .......... X620-C
B .......... 310AC-1 .......... black .......... XGND1, X311/2-A, X37-B, X285-B, X239-C, X128-B, X488-B, X106-D
W08 — X106
4-pin plug for right tail, brake and turn signal lights
A .......... 119A-0.5 .......... white .......... X616/3-3F1
B .......... 118AC-1 .......... gray .......... F03/03A, X430-24, X400-9, X113/2-A
D .......... 310AG-1 .......... black .......... XGND1, X311/2-A, X37-B, X285-B, X44-B, X239-C, X128-B, X488-B
W08 — X107
4-pin plug for left tail, brake and turn signal lights
A .......... 126A-0.5 .......... light blue .......... X616/3-3F2
B .......... 128AD-1 .......... gray .......... X400-10, F03/04A, X430-37, X113/1-A
XGND5, X113/1-B, K02/6-85, K02/7-85, S01/1-A, X618-12, X516-E, X579/2-A, X113/2-B, K01/1-85,
D .......... 310AR-1 .......... black ..........
K01/3-85, K02/1-85, K02/2-85, K02/3-85, K02/4-85, K02/5-85
W08 — X113/1
2-pin plug for license plate light (left)
A .......... 128AA-1 .......... gray .......... X400-10, F03/04A, X430-37, X107-B
XGND5, K02/6-85, K02/7-85, S01/1-A, X618-12, X516-E, X579/2-A, X113/2-B, X107-D, K01/1-85,
B .......... 310AQ-1 .......... black ..........
K01/3-85, K02/1-85, K02/2-85, K02/3-85, K02/4-85, K02/5-85
W08 — X113/2
2-pin plug for license plate light (right)
A .......... 118AE-1 .......... gray .......... F03/03A, X430-24, X106-B, X400-9
XGND5, X113/1-B, K02/6-85, K02/7-85, S01/1-A, X618-12, X516-E, X579/2-A, X107-D, K01/1-85,
B .......... 310BV-1 .......... black ..........
K01/3-85, K02/1-85, K02/2-85, K02/3-85, K02/4-85, K02/5-85
W08 — X120/1
1-pin plug for air-brake pressure gauge
A .......... 138AD-1 .......... gray .......... X617-2, F06/08A, X400-14
W08 — X120/2
XGND5, K07/1-86, X235-B, X617-14, X617-1, X38-2, B28/LH-C1, K07/6-86, K07/3-85, K07/5-86,
A .......... 310BE-1 .......... black ..........
K08/1-85, K08/2-85, X500-1, X430-1, X474-B, K08/3-85
W08 — X122/2
2-pin plug for differential lock switch
A .......... 973AJ-1 .......... orange .......... X245-C, S08-2, F04/09A, X230-A, X125-A, X127-A, X243-B, X174-A, X623-A
B .......... 522A-0.5 .......... red .......... X616/2-2H2
W08 — X125
3-pin plug for rear PTO switch
A .......... 973AI-1 .......... orange .......... X245-C, S08-2, F04/09A, X230-A, X122/2-A, X127-A, X243-B, X174-A, X623-A
B .......... 525A-0.5 .......... dark green .......... X616/3-2H2
C .......... 586A-0.5 .......... light blue .......... X616/2-2G2
W08 — X127
3-pin plug for front PTO switch
A .......... 973AM-1 .......... orange .......... X245-C, S08-2, F04/09A, X230-A, X125-A, X122/2-A, X243-B, X174-A, X623-A
B .......... 901A-0.5 .......... brown .......... X616/3-3F4
C .......... 904A-0.5 .......... yellow .......... X616/1-1F1
W08 — X128
2-pin plug for cigarette lighter
A .......... 297A-1 .......... purple .......... F06/11A
B .......... 310AM-1 .......... black .......... XGND1, X311/2-A, X37-B, X285-B, X44-B, X239-C, X488-B, X106-D
W08 — X174
3-pin plug for the remote-control switch of the rear PTO (switch on l.h. side)
A .......... 973AQ-1 .......... orange .......... X245-C, S08-2, F04/09A, X230-A, X125-A, X122/2-A, X127-A, X243-B, X623-A
B .......... 547A-0.5 .......... purple .......... X616/2-2G1
C .......... 528A-0.5 .......... gray .......... X616/2-2G4
W08 — X230
2-pin plug for seat switch
A .......... 973AL-0.5 .......... orange .......... X245-C, S08-2, F04/09A, X125-A, X122/2-A, X127-A, X243-B, X174-A, X623-A
B .......... 907A-0.5 .......... purple .......... X616/1-1F3
W08 — X235
2-pin plug for handbrake switch
A .......... 906A-0.5 .......... light blue .......... X618-11
XGND5, K07/1-86, X120/2-A, X617-14, X617-1, X38-2, B28/LH-C1, K07/6-86, K07/3-85, K07/5-86,
B .......... 310BJ-1 .......... black ..........
K08/1-85, K08/2-85, X500-1, X430-1, X474-B, K08/3-85
W08 — X239
3-pin plug — Connection point of harness for 3-terminal power outlet socket (W14)
A .......... 412A-2.5 .......... red .......... K08/3-87
B .......... 307A-2.5 .......... purple .......... F04/02A
C .......... 310AX-2.5 .......... black .......... XGND1, X311/2-A, X37-B, X285-B, X44-B, X128-B, X488-B, X106-D
W08 — X243
3-pin plug for rear PTO preselector switch
A .......... 535A-0.5 .......... dark green .......... X616/2-2H3
B .......... 973AP-1 .......... orange .......... X245-C, S08-2, F04/09A, X230-A, X125-A, X122/2-A, X127-A, X174-A, X623-A
C .......... 536A-0.5 .......... light blue .......... X616/2-2H1
W08 — X245
3-pin plug for front wheel drive switch
A .......... 557A-0.5 .......... purple .......... X616/2-2K4
B .......... not used
C .......... 973AE-1 .......... orange .......... S08-2, F04/09A, X230-A, X125-A, X122/2-A, X127-A, X243-B, X174-A, X623-A
W08 — X285
2-pin plug for windshield washer pump
A .......... 208A-1 .......... gray .......... X629-C
B .......... 310AS-1 .......... black .......... XGND1, X311/2-A, X37-B, X44-B, X239-C, X128-B, X488-B, X106-D
W08 — X311/1
1-pin plug for front PTO indicator light
A .......... 178A-0.5 .......... gray .......... X616/3-3B4
W08 — X311/2
1-pin plug for front PTO indicator light
A .......... 310AI-0.5 .......... black .......... XGND1, X37-B, X285-B, X44-B, X239-C, X128-B, X488-B, X106-D
W08 — X324
8-pin plug for brake switch
A .......... 273A-1 .......... orange .......... F05/01A
C .......... 244A-0.5 .......... yellow .......... X616/2-2J2
D .......... 245A-0.5 .......... dark green .......... X616/2-2F3
E .......... not used
F .......... not used
G .......... not used
H .......... not used
W08 — X400
42-pin plug — Connection point for cab roof and fan wiring harness (W19)
1 .......... 234A-4 .......... yellow .......... K08/2-87
2 .......... 129AC-1.5 .......... white .......... K02/6-87
3 .......... 145A-1 .......... dark green .......... F03/06A
4 .......... 132A-1 .......... red .......... F03/05A
5 .......... 115A-1 .......... dark green .......... F03/08A
6 .......... 162A-1 .......... red .......... F03/07A
7 .......... 210A-1 .......... black .......... K08/2-86
8 .......... 247A-2.5 .......... purple .......... K08/1-87
9 .......... 118AD-1 .......... gray .......... F03/03A, X430-24, X106-B, X113/2-A
10 .......... 128AF-1 .......... gray .......... F03/04A, X430-37, X113/1-A, X107-B
11 .......... not used
12 .......... 235AC-1 .......... dark green .......... X629-B, X38-1
13 .......... not used
14 .......... 138AC-1 .......... gray .......... X617-2, F06/08A, X120/1-A
15 .......... 912AB-1 .......... red .......... F06/15A, X571-B
17 .......... 275A-1 .......... dark green .......... X620-B
18 .......... 224AC-1 .......... yellow .......... X38-3, X629-A
19 .......... 294A-1 .......... yellow .......... X620-A
20 .......... not used
21 .......... 050AW-1 .......... black .......... XGND6
22 .......... 236AC-1 .......... light blue .......... X38-4, F06/04A, X629-E
24 .......... 257A-1 .......... purple .......... F06/09A
25 .......... 107AC-1 .......... purple .......... X616/3-3H4, X617-20, X430-26, X616/3-3H3
26 .......... 174A-1 .......... yellow .......... F03/11A
27 .......... 184AB-1 .......... yellow .......... F03/12A
28 .......... 274A-1 .......... yellow .......... B28/LH-NC2
29 .......... 213A-1 .......... orange .......... F06/03E
30 .......... 179A-1 .......... white .......... F03/09A
31 .......... 113AA-1 .......... orange .......... K07/1-30, S09-M, X10/1-A
33 .......... 204A-1 .......... yellow .......... F06/07A
34 .......... 131AD-1 .......... brown .......... K02/7-86, K02/6-86
35 .......... 111A-1 .......... brown .......... X450-20
36 .......... not used
37 .......... not used
38 .......... not used
39 .......... not used
40 .......... not used
41 .......... not used
42 .......... not used
W08 - X430
W08 - X430 - 42-pin plug — Connection point for harness at rear of transmission (W30)
42-pin plug - Connection point for harness at rear of transmission (W30)
1 .......... 310AF-4 .......... black ..........
K07/5-86, K08/1-85, K08/2-85, X500-1, X474-B, K08/3-85
2 .......... not used
3 .......... not used
4 .......... not used
5 .......... not used
6 .......... not used
7 .......... not used
8 .......... not used
9 .......... 873AD-1 .......... orange .......... X14/1-B, X616/1-1F2, X14/2-C
10 .......... not used
11 .......... 884A-0.5 .......... yellow .......... X616/1-1C2
12 .......... not used
13 .......... 885A-0.5 .......... dark green .......... X616/1-1C1
14 .......... 531AC-1 .......... brown .......... X616/1-1G4, X450-10, X14/2-A, X14/1-A, X450-35
15 .......... 854A-1 .......... yellow .......... X616/1-1H2
16 .......... 855A-1 .......... dark green .......... X616/1-1G2
17 .......... not used
18 .......... 878A-0.5 .......... gray .......... X616/1-1D4
19 .......... not used
20 .......... not used
21 .......... 858A-1 .......... gray .......... X616/1-1H1
22 .......... 859A-1 .......... white .......... X616/1-1G1
24 .......... 118AB-1 .......... gray .......... F03/03A, X106-B, X400-9, X113/2-A
26 .......... 107AE-1 .......... purple .......... X616/3-3H4, X617-20, X400-25, X616/3-3H3
27 .......... not used
28 .......... not used
29 .......... not used
30 .......... not used
31 .......... 575A-0.5 .......... dark green .......... X616/3-3E3
32 .......... 574A-0.5 .......... yellow .......... X616/3-3A3
33 .......... 527A-1 .......... purple .......... X616/2-2L4
34 .......... not used
35 .......... not used
36 .......... not used
37 .......... 128AB-1 .......... gray .......... X400-10, F03/04A, X113/1-A, X107-B
38 .......... not used
39 .......... not used
40 .......... 502A-0.5 .......... red .......... X616/3-3A2
41 .......... not used
42 .......... not used
W08 — X450
W08 — X450 - 42-pin plug — Connection point for engine wiring harness (W02)
42-pin plug — Connection point for engine wiring harness (W02)
1 .......... not used
2 .......... not used
3 .......... 385A-1.5 .......... dark green .......... S01-AID
4 .......... 124AC-1 .......... yellow .......... F03/01A
5 .......... not used
6 .......... not used
7 .......... 506A-1 .......... light blue .......... X500-41
8 .......... 264A-2.5 .......... yellow .......... K07/3-87
9 .......... 325A-0.5 .......... dark green .......... X616/3-3A4
10 .......... 531AB-1 .......... brown .......... X616/1-1G4, X14/2-A, X430-14, X14/1-A, X450-35
11 .......... 329A-0.5 .......... white .......... X617-4
12 .......... 347A-0.5 .......... purple .......... X618-23
13 .......... 351A-0.5 .......... brown .......... X617-24
14 .......... 333AC-1 .......... orange .......... K07/5-85, K07/6-87
15 .......... 306A-1 .......... light blue .......... K07/5-30
16 .......... 903A-1 .......... orange .......... S04-B
17 .......... 362A-1 .......... red .......... X579/1-A
18 .......... not used
19 .......... not used
20 .......... 111A-1 .......... brown .......... X400-35
21 .......... 322AA-1 .......... red .......... F05/08A, X500-12, X618-10
22 .......... not used
23 .......... not used
24 .......... not used
25 .......... 215A-1 .......... dark green .......... F06/03A
26 .......... 607AA-0.5 .......... purple .......... X616/3-3F3
27 .......... not used
28 .......... not used
29 .......... not used
30 .......... not used
31 .......... not used
32 .......... 139AA-1 .......... white .......... F03/14A, F03/15A
33 .......... 114A-1 .......... yellow .......... F03/02A
34 .......... 301A-0.5 .......... brown .......... X616/3-3A1
35 .......... 531AJ-1 .......... brown .......... X616/1-1G4, X450-10, X14/2-A, X430-14, X14/1-A
36 .......... not used
37 .......... not used
38 .......... not used
39 .......... 050AC-1 .......... black .......... XGND6
40 .......... not used
41 .......... not used
42 .......... not used
W08 — X473
W08 — X473 - 2-pin plug, connecting point for power supply and starting aid wiring harness
(W01)
F04/02E, F03/10E, K02/4-30, K02/5-30, F06/15E, F04/12E, F06/01E, F04/16E, F06/13E, F06/02E,
1 .......... 012AA-10 .......... red ..........
F04/11E, F04/01E, F04/10E, K02/2-30, K02/1-30, F04/03E, F04/04E, K02/3-30
2 .......... 042AA-10 .......... red .......... F05/09E, F05/10E, F05/12E, F05/11E
W08 — X474
2-pin plug for GreenStar
A .......... 981A-2.5 .......... brown .......... F04/13A
B .......... 310AH-2.5 .......... black ..........
K07/5-86, K08/1-85, K08/2-85, X500-1, X430-1, K08/3-85
W08 — X488
2-pin plug for operator′s seat
A .......... 293A-1 .......... orange .......... F06/12A
B .......... 310AT-1 .......... black .......... XGND1, X311/2-A, X37-B, X285-B, X44-B, X239-C, X128-B, X106-D
W08 — X500
W08 — X500 - 42-pin plug — Connection point for harness at front end of transmission (W28)
42-pin plug — Connection point for harness at front end of transmission (W28)
1 .......... 310AD-4 .......... black ..........
K07/5-86, K08/1-85, K08/2-85, X430-1, X474-B, K08/3-85
2 .......... not used
3 .......... not used
4 .......... not used
5 .......... not used
6 .......... not used
7 .......... not used
8 .......... not used
9 .......... not used
10 .......... not used
11 .......... not used
12 .......... 322AC-1 .......... red .......... X450-21, F05/08A, X618-10
13 .......... 555A-1 .......... dark green .......... X616/2-2L3
14 .......... 515A-0.5 .......... dark green .......... X618-24
15 .......... 602A-0.5 .......... red .......... X618-26
16 .......... 050AH-1 .......... black .......... XGND4
17 .......... not used
18 .......... not used
19 .......... not used
20 .......... not used
21 .......... not used
22 .......... 353A-0.5 .......... orange .......... X618-17
23 .......... not used
24 .......... not used
25 .......... not used
26 .......... not used
27 .......... not used
28 .......... not used
29 .......... not used
30 .......... not used
31 .......... not used
32 .......... not used
33 .......... not used
34 .......... not used
35 .......... not used
36 .......... not used
37 .......... 992AB-1 .......... red .......... F04/05A, X618-14
38 .......... not used
39 .......... 311AA-1 .......... brown .......... S01-ST
40 .......... 606A-0.5 .......... light blue .......... X617-22
41 .......... 506A-1 .......... light blue .......... X450-7
42 .......... not used
W08 — X516
6-pin plug for hazard warning switch
A .......... not used
B .......... 102A-0.5 .......... red .......... X616/1-1F4
C .......... 571AC-1 .......... brown .......... F04/16A, X616/2-2L1
D .......... not used
XGND5, X113/1-B, K02/6-85, K02/7-85, S01/1-A, X618-12, X579/2-A, X113/2-B, X107-D, K01/1-85,
E .......... 310AL-1 .......... black ..........
K01/3-85, K02/1-85, K02/2-85, K02/3-85, K02/4-85, K02/5-85
F .......... 121A-0.5 .......... brown .......... X616/3-3C4
W08 — X571
9-terminal service socket (CAN BUS)
A .......... 050AG-1 .......... black .......... XGND6
B .......... 912AC-1 .......... red .......... F06/15A, X400-15
C .......... 934AK-1 .......... yellow .......... X616/2-2A1, R19-A
D .......... 935AK-1 .......... dark green .......... X616/2-2B1, R19-B
E .......... not used
F .......... not used
G .......... not used
H .......... not used
J .......... not used
W08 — X579/1
1-pin plug for indicator light of electrical starting aid
A .......... 362A-1 .......... red .......... X450-17
W08 — X579/2
1-pin plug for indicator light of electrical starting aid
XGND5, X113/1-B, K02/6-85, K02/7-85, S01/1-A, X618-12, X516-E, X113/2-B, X107-D, K01/1-85,
A .......... 310AO-1 .......... black ..........
K01/3-85, K02/1-85, K02/2-85, K02/3-85, K02/4-85, K02/5-85
W08 - X616/1
W08 - X616/1 - 32-pin plug for Basic Control Unit (BCU)
32-pin plug for BCU
1A1 .......... 841A-0.5 .......... brown .......... X34-E
1A2 .......... 844A-0.5 .......... yellow .......... X34-F
1A3 .......... 843A-0.5 .......... orange .......... X34-B
1A4 .......... 846A-0.5 .......... light blue .......... X34-A
1B1 .......... 824A-0.5 .......... yellow .......... X35-B
1B2 .......... 821A-0.5 .......... brown .......... X35-A
1B3 .......... 826A-0.5 .......... light blue .......... X35-E
1B4 .......... 823A-0.5 .......... orange .......... X35-F
1C1 .......... 885A-0.5 .......... dark green .......... X430-13
1C2 .......... 884A-0.5 .......... yellow .......... X430-11
1C3 .......... 875A-0.5 .......... dark green .......... X14/1-C
1C4 .......... 869A-0.5 .......... white .......... X14/2-B
1D1 .......... 876A-0.5 .......... light blue .......... X14/1-H
1D2 .......... 877A-0.5 .......... purple .......... X14/1-E
1D3 .......... not used
1D4 .......... 878A-0.5 .......... gray .......... X430-18
1E1 .......... 834A-0.5 .......... yellow .......... X14/1-F
1E2 .......... 838A-0.5 .......... gray .......... X14/1-D
1E3 .......... 839A-0.5 .......... white .......... X14/1-G
1E4 .......... not used
1F1 .......... 904A-0.5 .......... yellow .......... X127-C
1F2 .......... 873AB-0.5 .......... orange .......... X14/1-B, X430-9, X14/2-C
1F3 .......... 907A-0.5 .......... purple .......... X230-B
1F4 .......... 102A-0.5 .......... red .......... X516-B
1G1 .......... 859A-1 .......... white .......... X430-22
1G2 .......... 855A-1 .......... dark green .......... X430-16
1G3 .......... 882AC-1 .......... red .......... F04/08A, X616/2-2M1
1G4 .......... 531AA-1 .......... brown .......... X450-10, X14/2-A, X430-14, X14/1-A, X450-35
1H1 .......... 858A-1 .......... gray .......... X430-21
1H2 .......... 854A-1 .......... yellow .......... X430-15
1H3 .......... not used
1H4 .......... not used
W08 — X616/2
48-pin plug for BCU
2A1 .......... 934AD-0.5 .......... yellow .......... R19-A, X571-C
2A2 .......... not used
2A3 .......... 537A-0.5 .......... purple .......... X623-C
2A4 .......... not used
2B1 .......... 935AD-0.5 .......... dark green .......... R19-B, X571-D
2B2 .......... not used
2B3 .......... 538A-0.5 .......... gray .......... X623-B
2B4 .......... not used
2C1 .......... not used
2C2 .......... not used
2C3 .......... not used
2C4 .......... not used
2D1 .......... 544A-0.5 .......... yellow .......... X616/2-2D2
2D2 .......... 544A-0.5 .......... yellow .......... X616/2-2D1
2D3 .......... 228AC-0.5 .......... gray .......... F06/13A, K01/4-86
2D4 .......... not used
2E1 .......... 336A-0.5 .......... light blue .......... K07/6-85
2E2 .......... not used
2E3 .......... not used
2E4 .......... 127A-0.5 .......... purple .......... S08-3
2F1 .......... not used
2F2 .......... not used
2F3 .......... 245A-0.5 .......... dark green .......... X324-D
2F4 .......... 155A-0.5 .......... dark green .......... S08-1
2G1 .......... 547A-0.5 .......... purple .......... X174-B
2G2 .......... 586A-0.5 .......... light blue .......... X125-C
2G3 .......... not used
2G4 .......... 528A-0.5 .......... gray .......... X174-C
2H1 .......... 536A-0.5 .......... light blue .......... X243-C
2H2 .......... 522A-0.5 .......... red .......... X122/2-B
2H3 .......... 535A-0.5 .......... dark green .......... X243-A
2H4 .......... not used
2J1 .......... not used
2J2 .......... 244A-0.5 .......... yellow .......... X324-C
2J3 .......... not used
2J4 .......... not used
2K1 .......... not used
2K2 .......... not used
2K3 .......... not used
2K4 .......... 557A-0.5 .......... purple .......... X245-A
2L1 .......... 571AB-1 .......... brown .......... F04/16A, X516-C
2L2 .......... 050AI-1 .......... black .......... XGND4
2L3 .......... 555A-1 .......... dark green .......... X500-13
2L4 .......... 527A-1 .......... purple .......... X430-33
2M1 .......... 882AB-1 .......... red .......... F04/08A, X616/1-1G3
2M2 .......... 050AJ-1 .......... black .......... XGND4
2M3 .......... not used
2M4 .......... not used
W08 — X616/3
32-pin plug for BCU
3A1 .......... 301A-0.5 .......... brown .......... X450-34
3A2 .......... 502A-0.5 .......... red .......... X430-40
3A3 .......... 574A-0.5 .......... yellow .......... X430-32
3A4 .......... 325A-0.5 .......... dark green .......... X450-9
3B1 .......... not used
3B2 .......... 517A-0.5 .......... purple .......... X618-9
3B3 .......... not used
3B4 .......... 178A-0.5 .......... gray .......... X311/1-A
3C1 .......... 552A-0.5 .......... red .......... X618-1
3C2 .......... 927A-0.5 .......... purple .......... X618-4
3C3 .......... 815A-0.5 .......... dark green .......... X617-17
3C4 .......... 121A-0.5 .......... brown .......... X516-F
3D1 .......... not used
3D2 .......... 523A-0.5 .......... orange .......... X617-10
3D3 .......... 814A-0.5 .......... yellow .......... X617-18
3D4 .......... 813A-0.5 .......... orange .......... X617-19
3E1 .......... 341A-0.5 .......... brown .......... X617-11
3E2 .......... 501AC-0.5 .......... brown .......... X618-21
3E3 .......... 575A-0.5 .......... dark green .......... X430-31
3E4 .......... 525A-0.5 .......... dark green .......... X125-B
3F1 .......... 119A-0.5 .......... white .......... X106-A
3F2 .......... 126A-0.5 .......... light blue .......... X107-A
3F3 .......... 607AA-0.5 .......... purple .......... X450-26
3F4 .......... 901A-0.5 .......... brown .......... X127-B
3G1 .......... 182AC-1 .......... red .......... F04/11A, X616/3-3H1
3G2 .......... 122AB-1 .......... red .......... F04/10A, X616/3-3H2
3G3 .......... 125AD-1 .......... dark green .......... X618-6, X616/3-3G4, X400-23, X430-23
3H1 .......... 182AB-1 .......... red .......... F04/11A, X616/3-3G1
3H2 .......... 122AC-1 .......... red .......... F04/10A, X616/3-3G2
3H3 .......... 107AD-1 .......... purple .......... X616/3-3H4, X617-20, X400-25, X430-26
3H4 .......... 107AA-1 .......... purple .......... X617-20, X400-25, X430-26, X616/3-3H3
W08 — X617
26-pin plug for basic informator
XGND5, K07/1-86, X120/2-A, X235-B, X617-14, X38-2, B28/LH-C1, K07/6-86, K07/3-85,

1 .......... 310BW-0.5 .......... black ..........
K07/5-86, K08/1-85, K08/2-85, X500-1, X430-1, X474-B, K08/3-85
2 .......... 138AA-0.5 .......... gray .......... F06/08A, X400-14, X120/1-A
3 .......... 050AU-0.5 .......... black .......... XGND4
4 .......... 329A-0.5 .......... white .......... X450-11
5 .......... not used
6 .......... not used
7 .......... not used
8 .......... not used
9 .......... not used
10 .......... 523A-0.5 .......... orange .......... X616/3-3D2
11 .......... 341A-0.5 .......... brown .......... X616/3-3E1
12 .......... not used
13 .......... 320A-0.5 .......... black .......... S01-GND
XGND5, K07/1-86, X120/2-A, X235-B, X617-1, X38-2, B28/LH-C1, K07/6-86, K07/3-85, K07/5-86,
14 .......... 310BD-0.5 .......... black ..........
K08/1-85, K08/2-85, X500-1, X430-1, X474-B, K08/3-85
15 .......... not used
16 .......... not used
17 .......... 815A-0.5 .......... dark green .......... X616/3-3C3
18 .......... 814A-0.5 .......... yellow .......... X616/3-3D3
19 .......... 813A-0.5 .......... orange .......... X616/3-3D4
20 .......... 107AB-0.5 .......... purple .......... X616/3-3H4, X400-25, X430-26, X616/3-3H3
21 .......... 135AG-0.5 .......... dark green .......... S09-H, K02/3-86, K07/1-87, K02/5-86, K02/4-86, X400-32
22 .......... 606A-0.5 .......... light blue .......... X500-40
23 .......... not used
24 .......... 351A-0.5 .......... brown .......... X450-13
25 .......... 326AA-0.5 .......... light blue .......... K07/5-87
26 .......... not used
W08 — X618
26-pin plug for basic informator
1 .......... 552A-0.5 .......... red .......... X616/3-3C1
2 .......... not used
3 .......... not used
4 .......... 927A-0.5 .......... purple .......... X616/3-3C2
5 .......... not used
7 .......... not used
8 .......... 922AX-0.5 .......... red .......... F04/04A
9 .......... 517A-0.5 .......... purple .......... X616/3-3B2
10 .......... 322AD-0.5 .......... red .......... X450-21, F05/08A, X500-12
11 .......... 906A-0.5 .......... light blue .......... X235-A
XGND5, X113/1-B, K02/6-85, K02/7-85, S01/1-A, X516-E, X579/2-A, X113/2-B, X107-D,

12 .......... 310BK-0.5 .......... black ..........
K01/1-85, K01/3-85, K02/1-85, K02/2-85, K02/3-85, K02/4-85, K02/5-85
13 .......... not used
14 .......... 992AC-0.5 .......... red .......... F04/05A, X500-37
15 .......... not used
16 .......... not used
17 .......... 353A-0.5 .......... orange .......... X500-22
18 .......... not used
19 .......... not used
20 .......... not used
21 .......... 501AC-0.5 .......... brown .......... X616/3-3E2
22 .......... 159AC-0.5 .......... white .......... K02/2-86, X10/3-A
23 .......... 347A-0.5 .......... purple .......... X450-12
24 .......... 515A-0.5 .......... dark green .......... X500-14
25 .......... not used
26 .......... 602A-0.5 .......... red .......... X500-15
W08 — X620
6-pin plug for rear window wiper switch
A .......... 294A-1 .......... yellow .......... X400-19
B .......... 275A-1 .......... dark green .......... X400-17
C .......... 258A-1 .......... gray .......... X44-A
D .......... not used
E .......... 246AB-1 .......... light blue .......... SP246
F .......... not used
W08 — X623
3-pin plug for the remote-control switch of the rear PTO (switch on r.h. side)
A .......... 973AR-1 .......... orange .......... SP973
B .......... 538A-0.5 .......... gray .......... X616/2
C .......... 537A-0.5 .......... purple .......... X616/2
W08 — X629
6-pin plug for windshield wiper switch
A .......... 224AB-1 .......... yellow .......... SP224
B .......... 235AA-1 .......... dark green .......... SP235
C .......... 208A-1 .......... gray .......... X285
D .......... not used
E .......... 236AD-1 .......... light blue .......... X38-4, F06/04A, X400-22
F .......... not used
W08 — XGND1
Ground point
(-) .......... 310AA-6 .......... black .......... X311/2-A, X37-B, X285-B, X44-B, X239-C, X128-B, X488-B, X106-D
W08 — XGND4
W08 — XGND4 - Collective ground point for XGND43
Collective ground point for XGND43
(-) .......... 050AN-4 .......... black .......... XGND43
(-) .......... 050AH-1 .......... black .......... X500-16
(-) .......... 050AU-0.5 .......... black .......... X617-3
(-) .......... 050AJ-1 .......... black .......... X616/2-2M2
(-) .......... 050AD-1 .......... black .......... XGND47
(-) .......... 050AI-1 .......... black .......... X616/2-2L2
W08 — XGND5
Ground point
Wire no. and cross

Terminal number Color of wire To plug or component
section
X113/1-B, K02/6-85, K02/7-85, S01/1-A, X618-12, X516-E, X579/2-A, X113/2-B, X107-D, K01/1-85,
(-) .......... 310AB-6 .......... black ..........
K01/3-85, K02/1-85, K02/2-85, K02/3-85, K02/4-85, K02/5-85
K07/1-86, X120/2-A, X235-B, X617-14, X617-1, X38-2, B28/LH-C1, K07/6-86, K07/3-85, K07/5-86,
(-) .......... 310AP-6 .......... black ..........
K08/1-85, K08/2-85, X500-1, X430-1, X474-B, K08/3-85
W08 — XGND6
Collective ground point for XGND43
(-) .......... 050AT-4 .......... black .......... XGND43
(-) .......... 050AW-1 .......... black .......... X400-21
(-) .......... 050AC-1 .......... black .......... X450-39
(-) .......... 050AF-0.5 .......... black .......... X35-C, X35-D, X34-D, X34-C
(-) .......... 050AB-1 .......... black .......... K01/4-85
(-) .......... 050AG-1 .......... black .......... X571-A
W08 — XGND43
Ground point for electronics
(-) .......... 050AN-4 .......... black .......... XGND4
(-) .......... 050AT-4 .......... black .......... XGND6
W08 — XGND47
Ground point
(-) .......... 050AD-1 .......... black .......... XGND4
W08/1 — Wiring Harness - Cab for Tractors with PowrQuad Plus

Transmission from Serial No. 434662
W08/1 — Wiring Harness - Cab for Tractors with PowrQuad Plus Transmission from Serial No. 434662
LEGEND:
W08/1 — B28/LH Door switch for dome light, l.h.
W08/1 — F03 Fuses (fuse and relay boxes)

W08/1 — K01 Relays (fuse and relay boxes)
W08/1 — S01 8-pin plug for main (key) switch
W08/1 — S09 5-pin plug for light switch
W08/1 — X14/1 8-pin plug for position feedback unit of hitch control
W08/1 — X14/2 3-pin plug for sensitivity potentiometer
W08/1 — X20 3-pin plug — Connection point for windshield wiper switch harness (W18)
W08/1 — X25 26-pin plug for basic informator
W08/1 — X26 26-pin plug for basic informator
W08/1 — X34 6-pin plug for remote-control switch of rockshaft control, right
W08/1 — X35 6-pin plug for remote-control switch of rockshaft control, left
W08/1 — X37 2-pin plug for front loader
W08/1 — X38 4-pin plug for windshield wiper motor
W08/1 — X39 4-pin plug — Connection point for windshield wiper switch harness (W18)
W08/1 — X44 2-pin plug for rear window washer pump
W08/1 — X106 4-pin plug for right tail, brake and turn signal lights
W08/1 — X107 4-pin plug for left tail, brake and turn signal lights
W08/1 — X113/1 2-pin plug for license plate light, left
W08/1 — X113/2 2-pin plug for license plate light, right
W08/1 — X120/1 1-pin plug for air-brake pressure gauge
W08/1 — X120/2 1-pin plug for air-brake pressure gauge
W08/1 — X122/2 2-pin plug for differential lock switch
W08/1 — X125 3-pin plug for rear PTO switch
W08/1 — X126 3-pin plug for hazard warning light switch
W08/1 — X127 3-pin plug for front PTO switch
W08/1 — X128 2-pin plug for cigarette lighter
W08/1 — X132 7-pin signal socket
W08/1 — X174 3-pin plug for the remote-control switch of the rear PTO (switch on l.h. side)
W08/1 — X230 2-pin plug for seat switch
W08/1 — X235 2-pin plug for handbrake switch
W08/1 — X239 3-pin plug, connection point of harness for 3-terminal power outlet socket (W14)
W08/1 — X242 3-pin plug for HMS switch
W08/1 — X243 3-pin plug for rear PTO preselector switch
W08/1 — X245 3-pin plug for front wheel drive switch
W08/1 — X247 26-pin plug for monitor unit
W08/1 — X249/3 4-pin plug for gear selector switch
W08/1 — X285 2-pin plug for windshield washer pump
W08/1 — X322 6-pin plug — Connection point for clutch sending unit harness (W13)
W08/1 — X324 8-pin plug for brake switch
W08/1 — X400 42-pin plug — Connection point for cab roof and fan wiring harness (W19)
W08/1 — X430 42-pin plug — Connection point for harness at rear of transmission (W30)
W08/1 — X440 3-pin plug for record/save switch
W08/1 — X450 42-pin plug — Connection point for engine wiring harness (W02)
W08/1 — X471 4-pin plug for program switch
W08/1 — X473 2-pin plug, connection point for power supply and starting aid wiring harness (W01)
W08/1 — X474 2-pin plug for GreenStar
W08/1 — X487 10-pin plug for multifunction unit
W08/1 — X488 2-pin plug for operator′s seat
W08/1 — X489 68-pin plug for Electronic PowrQuad Controller (EPC)
W08/1 — X490/1 8-pin plug for electrical reverser
W08/1 — X500 42-pin plug, connection point for harness at front end of transmission (W28)
W08/1 — X503 2-pin plug for park lock switch
W08/1 — X571 9-terminal service socket (CAN-BUS)
W08/1 — X615 6-pin plug for CAN BUS terminator
W08/1 — X616/1 32-pin plug for BCU
W08/1 — X620 6-pin plug for rear window wiper switch
W08/1 — X623 3-pin plug for the remote-control switch of the rear PTO (switch on r.h. side)
W08/1 — XGND1 Ground point
W08/1 — XGND43 Ground point for electronics
W08/1 — B28/LH - Door switch for dome light, l.h.

W08/1 — F03 - Fuses (fuse and relay boxes)
W08/1 — K01 - Relays (fuse and relay boxes)
W08/1 — S01 - 8-pin plug for main (key) switch
W08/1 — S09 - 5-pin plug for light switch
W08/1 — X14/1 - 8-pin plug for feedback unit of rockshaft control
W08/1 — X14/2 - 3-pin plug for sensitivity potentiometer
W08/1 — X20 - 3-pin plug — Connection point for windshield wiper switch harness (W18)
W08/1 — X25 - 26-pin plug for basic informator (BIF)
W08/1 — X34 - 6-pin plug for remote-control switch of rockshaft control, right
W08/1 — X35 - 6-pin plug for the remote-control switch of the rockshaft control, left
W08/1 — X37 - 2-pin plug for front loader
W08/1 — X38 - 4-pin plug for windshield wiper motor
W08/1 — X39 -4-pin plug — Connection point for windshield wiper switch harness (W18)
W08/1 — X44 - 2-pin plug for rear window washer pump
W08/1 — X106 - 4-pin plug for tail, brake and turn signal lights, right
W08/1 — X107 - 4-pin plug for tail, brake and turn signal lights, left
W08/1 — X113/1 - 2-pin plug for license plate light (left)
W08/1 — X113/2 - 2-pin plug for license plate light (right)
W08/1 — X120/1 - 1-pin plug for air-brake pressure gauge
W08/1 — X122/2 - 2-pin plug for differential lock switch
W08/1 — X125 - 3-pin plug for rear PTO switch
W08/1 — X126 - 3-pin plug for hazard warning switch
W08/1 — X127 - 3-pin plug for front PTO switch
W08/1 — X128 - 2-pin plug for cigarette lighter
W08/1 — X132 - 7-pin signal socket
W08/1 — X174 - 3-pin plug for the remote-control switch of the rear PTO (switch on l.h. side)
W08/1 — X230 - 2-pin plug for seat switch
W08/1 — X235 - 2-pin plug for handbrake switch
W08/1 — X239 - 3-pin plug — connection point of harness for 3-terminal power outlet socket (W14)
W08/1 — X242 - 3-pin plug for HMS switch
W08/1 — X243 - 3-pin plug for rear PTO preselector switch
W08/1 — X245 - 3-pin plug for front-wheel drive switch
W08/1 — X247 - 26-pin plug for monitor unit
W08/1 — X249/3 4-pin plug for gear selector switch
W08/1 — X285 - 2-pin plug for windshield washer pump
W08/1 — X322 - 6-pin plug — Connection point for clutch sending unit harness (W13)
W08/1 — X324 - 8-pin plug for brake switch
W08/1 — X400 - 42-pin plug — connection point for cab roof and fan wiring harness (W19)
W08/1 — X430 - 42-pin plug — Connection point for harness at rear of transmission (W30)
W08/1 — X440 - 3-pin plug for the record/save switch
W08/1 — X450 - 42-pin plug — Connection point for engine wiring harness (W02)
W08/1 — X471 - 4-pin plug for program switch
W08/1 — X473 - 2-pin plug, connecting point for power supply and starting aid wiring harness (W01)
W08/1 — X474 - 2-pin plug for GreenStar
W08/1 — X487 - 10-pin plug for multifunction unit
W08/1 — X488 - 2-pin plug for operator′s seat
W08/1 — X489 - 68-pin plug for Electronic PowrQuad Controller (EPC)
W08/1 — X490/1 - 8-pin plug for electrical reverser control
W08/1 — X500 - 42-pin plug - front transmission wiring harness connection point (W28)
W08/1 — X503 - 2-pin plug for park lock switch
W08/1 — X571 - 9-terminal service socket (CAN-BUS)

W08/1 — X615 - 6-pin plug for CAN-BUS terminator
W08/1 — X616/1 - 32-pin plug for Basic Control Unit (BCU)
W08/1 — X620 - 6-pin plug for rear window wiper switch
W08/1 — X623 - 3-pin plug for remote-control switch of rear PTO (switch on r.h. side)
W08/1 — XGND1 - Ground point
W08/1 — XGND43 - Ground point (electronics)
W08/1 — B28/LH
Door switch for dome light, l.h.
XGND5, K07/1-86, X120/2-A, X490/1-G, X25-14, X25-1, X38-2, K07/6-86, K07/3-85, K07/5-86,
C1 .......... 310BN-1 .......... black ..........
K08/1-85, K08/2-85, X500-1, X430-1, X474-B, K08/3-85
NC2 .......... 274A-1 .......... yellow .......... X400-28
NO4 .......... not used
W08/1 — F03
F03/01A .......... 124A-1 .......... yellow .......... X450-4
F03/02A .......... 114A-1 .......... yellow .......... X450-33
F03/03A .......... 118AA-1 .......... gray .......... X430-24, X106-B, X400-9, X113/2-A
F03/03E .......... 158AA-1 .......... gray .......... F03/04E, S09-C, F06/08E
F03/04A .......... 128AC-1 .......... gray .......... X400-10, X430-37, X113/1-A, X107-B
F03/04E .......... 158AC-1 .......... gray .......... F03/03E, S09-C, F06/08E
F03/05A .......... 132A-1 .......... red .......... X400-4
F03/05E .......... 198AB-1 .......... gray .......... F03/06E
F03/06A .......... 145A-1 .......... dark green .......... X400-3
F03/06E .......... 198AA-2.5 .......... gray .......... K02/3-87
F03/06E .......... 198AB-1 .......... gray .......... F03/05E
F03/07A .......... 162A-1 .......... red .......... X400-6
F03/07E .......... 197AB-1 .......... purple .......... F03/08E
F03/08A .......... 115A-1 .......... dark green .......... X400-5
F03/08E .......... 197AA-2.5 .......... purple .......... K02/4-87
F03/08E .......... 197AB-1 .......... purple .......... F03/07E
F03/09A .......... 179A-1 .......... white .......... X400-30
F03/09E .......... 199A-1 .......... white .......... K02/5-87
F03/10A .......... 177AC-1 .......... purple .......... K02/6-30, F03/16A
X473-1, F04/02E, K02/3-30, K02/4-30, K02/5-30, F06/15E, F04/12E, F06/01E, F04/16E, F06/13E,
F03/10E .......... 012AD-1 .......... red ..........
F04/11E, F06/02E, F04/01E, F04/10E, K02/2-30, K02/1-30, F05/05E, F04/03E, F04/04E
F03/11A .......... 174A-1 .......... yellow .......... X400-26
F03/11E .......... 104AB-1 .......... yellow .......... F03/12E
F03/12A .......... 184A-1 .......... yellow .......... X400-27
F03/12E .......... 104AA-2.5 .......... yellow .......... K02/7-87
F03/12E .......... 104AB-1 .......... yellow .......... F03/11E
F03/13E .......... 169AA-1.5 .......... white .......... K02/1-87, K02/7-30
F03/14A .......... 139AC-1.5 .......... white .......... F03/15A, X450-32
F03/14E .......... 167AC-1.5 .......... purple .......... K02/2-87, F03/16E
F03/15A .......... 139AD-1.5 .......... white .......... F03/14A, X450-32
F03/15E .......... 109A-1 .......... white .......... K02/6-87A
F03/16A .......... 177AB-1.5 .......... purple .......... K02/6-30, F03/10A
F03/16E .......... 167AB-1.5 .......... purple .......... K02/2-87, F03/14E
W08/1 — F04
F04/01A .......... 292A-2.5 .......... red .......... K08/3-30
X473-1, F04/02E, K02/3-30, F03/10E, K02/4-30, K02/5-30, F06/15E, F04/12E, F06/01E, F04/16E,
F04/01E .......... 012AL-2.5 .......... red ..........
F04/02A .......... 307A-2.5 .......... purple .......... X239-B
X473-1, K02/3-30, F03/10E, K02/4-30, K02/5-30, F06/15E, F04/12E, F06/01E, F04/16E, F06/13E,
F04/02E .......... 012AV-2.5 .......... red ..........
F04/03A .......... 332A-2.5 .......... red .......... K07/3-30
F04/03E .......... 012AK-2.5 .......... red ..........
F06/13E, F04/11E, F06/02E, F04/01E, F04/10E, K02/2-30, K02/1-30, F05/05E, F04/04E
F04/04A .......... 922A-1 .......... red .......... X26-10
F04/04E .......... 012AJ-1 .......... red ..........
F04/05A .......... 992AA-1 .......... red .......... X26-14, X500-37
F04/05E .......... 072AL-1 .......... red .......... F04/06E
F04/06A .......... 971A-1 .......... brown .......... X400-20
F04/06E .......... 072AK-1.5 .......... red .......... F04/08E
F04/06E .......... 072AL-1 .......... red .......... F04/05E
F04/07A .......... not used
F04/07E .......... not used
F04/08A .......... 882AA-1 .......... red .......... X616/2-2M1, X616/1-1G3
F04/08E .......... 072AJ-2.5 .......... red .......... F04/09E
F04/08E .......... 072AK-1.5 .......... red .......... F04/06E
X245-C, X235-A, X440-B, X127-A, X122/2-A, X471-2, X623-A, X487-F, X174-A, X430-35, X242-B,
F04/09A .......... 973AA-2.5 .......... orange ..........
X230-A, X125-A, X243-B, X500-18
F04/09E .......... 072AD-2.5 .......... red .......... K01/2-87, F04/13E, F05/01E
F04/09E .......... 072AJ-2.5 .......... red .......... F04/08E
F04/10A .......... 122AB-2.5 .......... red .......... X616/3-3G2, X616/3-3H2
F04/10E .......... 012AT-2.5 .......... red ..........
F04/11A .......... 182AA-2.5 .......... red .......... X616/3-3H1, X616/3-3G1
F04/11E .......... 012AU-2.5 .......... red ..........
F04/12A .......... 152AA-1.5 .......... red .......... S09-B, X487-H
F04/12E .......... 012AC-1.5 .......... red ..........
F04/13A .......... 981A-2.5 .......... brown .......... X474-A
F04/13E .......... 072AB-2.5 .......... red .......... K01/2-87, F05/01E, F04/09E
F04/14A .......... not used
F04/14E .......... not used
F04/15A .......... not used
F04/15E .......... not used
F04/16A .......... 571AA-1 .......... brown .......... X616/2-2L1, X126-B
F04/16E .......... 012AP-1 .......... red ..........
W08/1 — F05
F05/01A .......... 273A-1 .......... orange .......... X324-A
F05/01E .......... 072AC-2.5 .......... red .......... K01/2-87, F04/13E, F04/09E
F05/01E .......... 072AH-2.5 .......... red .......... F05/02E
F05/02A .......... 913A-1 .......... orange .......... K07/2-87
F05/02E .......... 072AG-1 .......... red .......... F05/04E
F05/02E .......... 072AH-2.5 .......... red .......... F05/01E
F05/03A .......... not used
F05/03E .......... not used
F05/04A .......... 572AE-1 .......... red .......... X489-23, X249/3-C, X490/1-C, K07/4-30, K08/4-87
F05/04E .......... 072AG-1 .......... red .......... F05/02E
F05/05A .......... 503A-1 .......... orange .......... X489-23, X249/3-C, X490/1-C, K07/4-30, K08/4-87
F05/05E .......... 012AI-1 .......... red ..........
F05/06A .......... 589A-1 .......... white .......... X490/1-A
F05/06E .......... 022AE-1 .......... red .......... S01-IGN, K07/3-86, F05/08E
F05/07A .......... not used
F05/07E .......... not used
F05/08A .......... 322AC-1 .......... red .......... X450-21, X500-12
F05/08A .......... 322AE-1 .......... red .......... K07/6-30
F05/08E .......... 022AD-1 .......... red .......... S01-IGN, K07/3-86, F05/06E
F05/09E .......... 042AE-1.5 .......... red .......... X473-2, F05/10E, F05/12E, F05/11E
F05/10A .......... 272A-4 .......... red .......... K01/3-30
F05/10E .......... 042AC-4 .......... red .......... X473-2, F05/09E, F05/12E, F05/11E
F05/11A .......... 282A-4 .......... red .......... K01/1-30
F05/11E .......... 042AF-4 .......... red .......... X473-2, F05/09E, F05/10E, F05/12E
F05/12A .......... 902A-4 .......... red .......... K01/2-30
F05/12E .......... 042AD-4 .......... red .......... X473-2, F05/09E, F05/10E, F05/11E
F05/13A .......... not used
F05/13E .......... not used
F05/14A .......... not used
F05/14E .......... not used
F05/15A .......... not used
F05/15E .......... not used
F05/16A .......... not used
F05/16E .......... not used
W08/1 — F06
F06/01A .......... 242A-4 .......... red .......... K08/2-30
F06/01E .......... 012AM-4 .......... red ..........
F06/02A .......... 232AC-2.5 .......... red .......... K08/1-30
F06/02E .......... 012AY-2.5 .......... red ..........
F06/03A .......... 215A-1 .......... dark green .......... X450-25
F06/03E .......... 213A-1 .......... orange .......... X400-29
F06/04A .......... 236AA-1 .......... light blue .......... X400-22, X38F-4, X39-A
F06/04E .......... 202AD-1 .......... red .......... F06/05E
F06/04E .......... 202AE-1 .......... red .......... K08/1-86
F06/05E .......... 202AC-1 .......... red .......... F06/06E
F06/05E .......... 202AD-1 .......... red .......... F06/04E
F06/06A .......... 256A-1 .......... light blue .......... X37-A
F06/06E .......... 202AB-1.5 .......... red .......... F06/07E
F06/06E .......... 202AC-1 .......... red .......... F06/05E
F06/07A .......... 204A-1 .......... yellow .......... X400-33
F06/07E .......... 202AA-2.5 .......... red .......... K01/1-87
F06/07E .......... 202AB-1.5 .......... red .......... F06/06E
F06/08A .......... 138AB-1 .......... gray .......... X25-2, X400-14, X120/1-A
F06/08E .......... 158AE-1 .......... gray .......... F03/03E, F03/04E, S09-C
F06/09A .......... 257A-1 .......... purple .......... X400-24
F06/09E .......... 312AD-1 .......... red .......... F06/10E
F06/09E .......... 312AE-1 .......... red .......... K08/3-86
F06/10A .......... 262A-1 .......... red .......... X487-J
F06/10E .......... 312AC-1 .......... red .......... F06/11E
F06/10E .......... 312AD-1 .......... red .......... F06/09E
F06/11A .......... 297AB-1 .......... purple .......... X128-A, X132-6
F06/11E .......... 312AB-1.5 .......... red .......... F06/12E
F06/11E .......... 312AC-1 .......... red .......... F06/10E
F06/12A .......... 293A-1 .......... orange .......... X488-A
F06/12E .......... 312AA-2.5 .......... red .......... K01/3-87
F06/12E .......... 312AB-1.5 .......... red .......... F06/11E
F06/13A .......... 228AA-1 .......... gray .......... K01/4-86, X616/2-2D3
F06/13E .......... 012AW-1 .......... red ..........
F06/14A .......... not used
F06/14E .......... not used
F06/15A .......... 912AA-1 .......... red .......... X571-B, X400-15
F06/15E .......... 012AO-1 .......... red ..........
F06/16A .......... not used
F06/16E .......... not used
W08/1 — K01
W08/1 — K01/1 - Accessory relay
30 (3) .......... 282A-4 .......... red .......... F05/11A
XGND5, X113/1-B, K02/6-85, K02/7-85, X113/2-B, X107-D, K01/3-85, K02/1-85, K02/2-85, K02/3-85,
85 (2) .......... 310BH-1 .......... black ..........
K02/4-85, K02/5-85
86 (1) .......... 192AC-1 .......... red .......... S01-ELX, K01/2-86
87 (5) .......... 202AA-2.5 .......... red .......... F06/07E
87A (4) .......... not used
W08/1 — K01/2 - Relay for power supply to electronics
30 (3) .......... 902A-4 .......... red .......... F05/12A
85 (2) .......... 085A-1 .......... dark green .......... K07/1-85
86 (1) .......... 192AB-1 .......... red .......... S01-ELX, K01/1-86
87 (5) .......... 072AA-4 .......... red .......... F04/13E, F05/01E, F04/09E
87A (4) .......... not used
30 (3) .......... 272A-4 .......... red .......... F05/10A
85 (2) .......... 310BC-1 .......... black ..........
K02/4-85, K02/5-85
86 (1) .......... 212A-1 .......... red .......... S01-ACC
87 (5) .......... 312AA-2.5 .......... red .......... F06/12E
87A (4) .......... not used
W08/1 — K01/4 - Acoustic alarm
W08/1 — K01/4 - Acoustic alarm
30 (-) .......... not used
85 (-) .......... 050AB-1 .......... black .......... XGND43, X132-7, X400-21, X503-B, X450-39, X35-C, X35-D, X34-C, X34-D
86 (+) .......... 228AB-1 .......... gray .......... F06/13A, X616/2-2D3
87 .......... not used
87A .......... not used
W08/1 — K02
W08/1 — K02/1 - Relay for dipped-beam headlight
W08/1 — K02/1 - Relay for dipped-beam headlight
30 (3) .......... 012AH-1.5 .......... red ..........
F06/13E, F04/11E, F06/02E, F04/01E, F04/10E, K02/2-30, F05/05E, F04/03E, F04/04E
85 (2) .......... 310BT-1 .......... black ..........
K02/4-85, K02/5-85
86 (1) .......... 144A-1 .......... yellow .......... X487-B
87 (5) .......... 169AB-1.5 .......... white .......... F03/13E, K02/7-30
87A (4) .......... not used
W08/1 — K02/2 - Relay for full-beam headlight
W08/1 — K02/2 - Relay for full-beam headlight
30 (3) .......... 012AE-1.5 .......... red ..........
F06/13E, F04/11E, F06/02E, F04/01E, F04/10E, K02/1-30, F05/05E, F04/03E, F04/04E
85 (2) .......... 310AE-1 .......... black ..........
K02/4-85, K02/5-85
86 (1) .......... 159AA-1 .......... white .......... X487-C, X26-22
87 (5) .......... 167AA-1.5 .......... purple .......... F03/16E, F03/14E
87A (4) .......... not used
W08/1 — K02/3 - Relay for front worklights on cab roof
W08/1 — K02/3 - Relay for front worklights on cab roof
30 (3) .......... 012AF-2.5 .......... red ..........
XGND5, X113/1-B, K02/6-85, K02/7-85, X113/2-B, X107-D, K01/1-85, K01/3-85, K02/1-85,

85 (2) .......... 310BM-1 .......... black ..........
K02/2-85, K02/4-85, K02/5-85
86 (1) .......... 135AB-1 .......... dark green .......... S09-H, K07/1-87, K02/5-86, K02/4-86, X25-21, X400-32
87 (5) .......... 198AA-2.5 .......... gray .......... F03/06E
87A (4) .......... not used
W08/1 — K02/4 - Relay for rear worklights on cab roof
W08/1 — K02/4 - Relay for rear worklights on cab roof
X473-1, F04/02E, K02/3-30, F03/10E, K02/5-30, F06/15E, F04/12E, F06/01E, F04/16E, F06/13E,
30 (3) .......... 012AG-2.5 .......... red ..........

85 (2) .......... 310AJ-1 .......... black ..........
K02/2-85, K02/3-85, K02/5-85
86 (1) .......... 135AE-1 .......... dark green .......... S09-H, K02/3-86, K07/1-87, K02/5-86, X25-21, X400-32
87 (5) .......... 197AA-2.5 .......... purple .......... F03/08E
87A (4) .......... not used
W08/1 — K02/5 - Relay for front corner worklights
W08/1 — K02/5 - Relay for front corner worklights
X473-1, F04/02E, K02/3-30, F03/10E, K02/4-30, F06/15E, F04/12E, F06/01E, F04/16E, F06/13E,
30 (3) .......... 012AN-1 .......... red ..........

85 (2) .......... 310BA-1 .......... black ..........
K02/2-85, K02/3-85, K02/4-85
86 (1) .......... 135AF-1 .......... dark green .......... S09-H, K02/3-86, K07/1-87, K02/4-86, X25-21, X400-32
87 (5) .......... 199A-1 .......... white .......... F03/09E
87A (4) .......... not used
W08/1 — K02/6 - Relay for worklights or headlights on cab frame
W08/1 — K02/6 - Relay for worklights or headlights on cab frame
30 (3) .......... 177AA-1.5 .......... purple .......... F03/16A, F03/10A
XGND5, X113/1-B, K02/7-85, X113/2-B, X107-D, K01/1-85, K01/3-85, K02/1-85, K02/2-85, K02/3-85,
85 (2) .......... 310BU-1 .......... black ..........
K02/4-85, K02/5-85
86 (1) .......... 131AC-1 .......... brown .......... X400-34, K02/7-86
87 (5) .......... 129A-1.5 .......... white .......... X400-2
87A (4) .......... 109A-1 .......... white .......... F03/15E
W08/1 — K02/7 - Relay for lights on cab frame
W08/1 — K02/7 - Relay for lights on cab frame
30 (3) .......... 169AC-1.5 .......... white .......... F03/13E, K02/1-87
XGND5, X113/1-B, K02/6-85, X113/2-B, X107-D, K01/1-85, K01/3-85, K02/1-85, K02/2-85, K02/3-85,
85 (2) .......... 310AV-1 .......... black ..........
K02/4-85, K02/5-85
86 (1) .......... 131AB-1 .......... brown .......... X400-34, K02/6-86
87 (5) .......... 104AA-2.5 .......... yellow .......... F03/12E
87A (4) .......... 164AA-1 .......... yellow .......... F03/01E, F03/02E, F03/13A
W08/1 — K07
W08/1 — K07/1 - 3-amp diode for dipped/full-beam headlights (pins 87 and 30) or 1-amp diode
for power supply to electronics (pins 85 and 86)
W08/1 — K07/1 - 3-amp diode for dipped/full-beam headlights (pins 87 and 30)
W08/1 — K07/1 - 1-amp diode for power supply to electronics (pins 85 and 86)
30 (3) .......... 113AC-1 .......... orange .......... S09-M, X400-31, X487-A
85 (2) .......... 085A-1 .......... dark green .......... K01/1-85
XGND5, X120/2-A, X490/1-G, X25-14, X25-1, X38-2, B28/LH-C1, K07/6-86, K07/3-85, K07/5-86,
86 (1) .......... 310BO-1 .......... black ..........
K08/1-85, K08/2-85, X500-1, X430-1, X474-B, K08/3-85
87 (5) .......... 135AC-1 .......... dark green .......... S09-H, K02/3-86, K02/5-86, K02/4-86, X25-21, X400-32
87A (4) .......... not used
W08/1 — K07/2 - 3-amp diode for hazard warning lights (pins 87 and 30) or 1-amp diode for
hazard warning lights (pins 85 and 86)
W08/1 — K07/2 - 3-amp diode for hazard warning lights (pins 87 and 30)
W08/1 — K07/2 -1-amp diode for hazard warning lights (pins 85 and 86)
30 (3) .......... 994AA-1 .......... yellow .......... X615-A
30 (3) .......... 994AB-1 .......... yellow .......... K07/2-86
85 (2) .......... 102AC-1 .......... red .......... X126-A, X616/1-1A4
86 (1) .......... 994AB-1 .......... yellow .......... K07/2-30
87 (5) .......... 913A-1 .......... orange .......... F05/02A
87A (4) .......... not used
W08/1 — K07/3 - Fuel preheater relay
W08/1 — K07/3 - Fuel preheater relay
30 (3) .......... 332A-2.5 .......... red .......... F04/03A
XGND5, K07/1-86, X120/2-A, X490/1-G, X25-14, X25-1, X38-2, B28/LH-C1, K07/6-86, K07/5-86,
85 (2) .......... 310BQ-1 .......... black ..........
K08/1-85, K08/2-85, X500-1, X430-1, X474-B, K08/3-85
86 (1) .......... 022AB-1 .......... red .......... S01-IGN, F05/08E, F05/06E
87 (5) .......... 264A-2.5 .......... yellow .......... X450-8
87A (4) .......... not used
W08/1 — K07/4 - Transmission enable relay
W08/1 — K07/4 - Transmission enable relay
30 (3) .......... 572AD-1 .......... red .......... F05/04A, X489-23, X249/3-C, X490/1-C, K08/4-87
85 (2) .......... 560A-0.5 .......... black .......... X616/2-2E2
86 (1) .......... 664AC-1 .......... yellow .......... X322-A, X489-64
87 (5) .......... 553AA-1 .......... orange .......... X489-39, X489-40, K08/4-86
87A (4) .......... not used
W08/1 — K07/5 - Relay for cold weather starting control
W08/1 — K07/5 - Relay for cold weather starting control
30 (3) .......... 306A-1 .......... light blue .......... X450-15
85 (2) .......... 333AA-1 .......... orange .......... K07/6-87, X450-14
86 (1) .......... 310BS-1 .......... black ..........
K08/1-85, K08/2-85, X500-1, X430-1, X474-B, K08/3-85
87 (5) .......... 326A-1 .......... light blue .......... X25-25
87A (4) .......... not used
W08/1 — K07/6 - Alternator relay
W08/1 — K07/6 - Alternator relay
30 (3) .......... 322AE-1 .......... red .......... F05/08A
85 (2) .......... 336A-0.5 .......... light blue .......... X616/2-2E1
86 (1) .......... 310AW-1 .......... black ..........
K08/1-85, K08/2-85, X500-1, X430-1, X474-B, K08/3-85
87 (5) .......... 333AB-1 .......... orange .......... K07/5-85, X450-14
87A (4) .......... not used
W08/1 — K07/7 - not used
W08/1 — K07/7 - not used
W08/1 — K08
W08/1 — K08/1 - Relay for air conditioning
W08/1 — K08/1 - Relay for air conditioning
30 (3) .......... 232AC-2.5 .......... red .......... F06/02A
85 (2) .......... 310BP-1 .......... black ..........
K07/5-86, K08/2-85, X500-1, X430-1, X474-B, K08/3-85
86 (1) .......... 202AE-1 .......... red .......... F06/04E
87 (5) .......... 247A-2.5 .......... purple .......... X400-8
87A (4) .......... not used
W08/1 — K08/2 - Fan relay
30 (3) .......... 242A-4 .......... red .......... F06/01A
85 (2) .......... 310BY-1 .......... black ..........
K07/5-86, K08/1-85, X500-1, X430-1, X474-B, K08/3-85
86 (1) .......... 210A-1 .......... black .......... X400-7
87 (5) .......... 234A-4 .......... yellow .......... X400-1
87A (4) .......... not used
W08/1 — K08/3 - Relay for 3-terminal socket
W08/1 — K08/3 - Relay for 3-terminal socket
30 (3) .......... 292A-2.5 .......... red .......... F04/01A
85 (2) .......... 310BR-1 .......... black ..........
K07/5-86, K08/1-85, K08/2-85, X500-1, X430-1, X474-B
86 (1) .......... 312AE-1 .......... red .......... F06/09E
87 (5) .......... 412A-2.5 .......... red .......... X239-A
87A (4) .......... not used
W08/1 — K08/4 - Come-home mode
W08/1 — K08/4 - Come-home mode
30 (3) .......... not used
85 (2) .......... not used
86 (1) .......... 553AD-1 .......... orange .......... K07/4-87, X489-39, X489-40
87 (5) .......... 572AK-1 .......... red .......... F05/04A, X489-23, X249/3-C, X490/1-C, K07/4-30
87A (4) .......... not used
W08/1 — S01
ACC .......... 212A-1 .......... red .......... K01/3-86
AID .......... 385A-1.5 .......... dark green .......... X450-3
BAT1 .......... 092AC-1.5 .......... red .......... F05/09A, S01-BAT2
BAT2 .......... 092AB-1.5 .......... red .......... F05/09A, S01-BAT1
GND .......... not used
ELX .......... 192AA-1.5 .......... red .......... K01/1-86, K01/2-86
IGN .......... 022AA-1.5 .......... red .......... K07/3-86, F05/08E, F05/06E
ST .......... 311AA-1 .......... brown .......... X450-7
W08/1 — S09
5-pin plug for light switch
B .......... 152AB-1.5 .......... red .......... F04/12A, X487-H
C .......... 158AD-1.5 .......... gray .......... F03/03E, F03/04E, F06/08E
L .......... not used
M .......... 113AA-1.5 .......... orange .......... X400-31, K07/1-30, X487-A
W08/1 — X14/1
W08/1 — X14/1 - 8-pin plug for position feedback unit of hitch control
8-pin plug for position feedback unit of hitch control
A .......... 531AD-1 .......... brown .......... X430-14, X450-10, X500-17, X14/2-A, X616/1-1G4, X450-35
B .......... 873AA-1 .......... orange .......... X616/1-1F2, X430-9, X14/2-C
C .......... 875A-0.5 .......... dark green .......... X616/1-1C3
D .......... 838A-0.5 .......... gray .......... X6161-1E2
E .......... 877A-0.5 .......... purple .......... X6161-1D2
F .......... 834A-0.5 .......... yellow .......... X6161-1E1
G .......... 839A-0.5 .......... white .......... X6161-1E3
H .......... 876A-0.5 .......... light blue .......... X6161-1D1
W08/1 — X14/2
3-pin plug for sensitivity potentiometer
A .......... 531AH-0.5 .......... brown .......... X430-14, X450-10, X500-17, X616/1-1G4, X14/1-A, X450-35
B .......... 869A-0.5 .......... white .......... X616/1-1C4
C .......... 873AE-0.5 .......... orange .......... X14/1-B, X616/1-1F2, X430-9
W08/1 — X20
3-pin plug — Connection point for windshield wiper switch harness (W18)
A .......... 208A-1 .......... gray .......... X285-A
B .......... 905A-0.5 .......... dark green .......... X25-6
XGND43, X500-16, X400-36, XGND47, X616/2-2M2, X571-A, X489-24, X616/2-2L2, X489-1,

C .......... 050AM-1 .......... black ..........
X615-C, X25-3
W08/1 — X25
26-pin plug for basic informator (BIF)
XGND5, K07/1-86, X120/2-A, X490/1-G, X25-14, X38-2, B28/LH-C1, K07/6-86, K07/3-85,

1 .......... 310BW-0.5 .......... black ..........
K07/5-86, K08/1-85, K08/2-85, X500-1, X430-1, X474-B, K08/3-85
2 .......... 138AA-0.5 .......... gray .......... F06/08A, X400-14, X120/1-A
XGND43, X500-16, X400-36, XGND47, X616/2-2M2, X571-A, X489-24, X20-C, X616/2-2L2,

3 .......... 050AS-0.5 .......... black ..........
X489-1, X615-C
4 .......... 329A-0.5 .......... white .......... X450-11
5 .......... not used
6 .......... 905A-0.5 .......... dark green .......... X20-B
7 .......... not used
8 .......... not used
9 .......... not used
10 .......... not used
11 .......... not used
12 .......... 149AA-0.5 .......... white .......... X616/2-2M4
13 .......... not used

14 .......... 310BD-0.5 .......... black ..........
K07/5-86, K08/1-85, K08/2-85, X500-1, X430-1, X474-B, K08/3-85
15 .......... 509A-0.5 .......... white .......... X500-36
16 .......... not used
17 .......... not used
18 .......... not used
19 .......... not used
20 .......... not used
21 .......... 135BG-0.5 .......... dark green .......... S09-H, K02/3-86, K07/1-87, K02/5-86, K02/4-86, X400-32
22 .......... 606A-0.5 .......... light blue .......... X500-40
23 .......... not used
24 .......... 351A-0.5 .......... brown .......... X450-13
25 .......... 326AA-0.5 .......... light blue .......... K07/5-87
26 .......... not used
W08/1 — X26
26-pin plug for basic informator (BIF)
1 .......... not used
2 .......... 156A-0.5 .......... light blue .......... X247-17
3 .......... 362A-0.5 .......... red .......... X450-17
4 .......... not used
5 .......... 153A-0.5 .......... orange .......... X247-22
6 .......... not used
7 .......... not used
8 .......... not used
9 .......... not used
10 .......... 922AX-0.5 .......... red .......... F04/04A
11 .......... not used
12 .......... not used
13 .......... not used
14 .......... 992AC-0.5 .......... red .......... F04/05A, X500-37
15 .......... 934AB-0.5 .......... yellow .......... X615-E, X571-C, X489-44, X616/2-2A1, X400-41
16 .......... 935AB-0.5 .......... dark green .......... X615-F, X571-D, X489-21, X616/2-2B1, X400-42
17 .......... 353A-0.5 .......... orange .......... X500-22
18 .......... not used
19 .......... not used
20 .......... not used
21 .......... not used
22 .......... 159AC-0.5 .......... white .......... K02/2-86, X487-C
23 .......... 347A-0.5 .......... purple .......... X450-12
24 .......... 515A-0.5 .......... dark green .......... X500-14
25 .......... 154A-0.5 .......... yellow .......... X247-13
26 .......... 602A-0.5 .......... red .......... X500-15
W08/1 — X34
6-pin plug for remote-control switch of rockshaft control, right
A .......... 846A-0.5 .......... light blue .......... X616/1-1A4
B .......... 843A-0.5 .......... orange .......... X616/1-1A3
C .......... 050AK-0.5 .......... black .......... XGND43, X132-7, K01/4-85, X400-21, X503-B, X450-39, X35-C, X35-D, X34-D
D .......... 050AE-0.5 .......... black .......... XGND43, X132-7, K01/4-85, X400-21, X503-B, X450-39, X35-C, X35-D, X34-C
E .......... 841A-0.5 .......... brown .......... X616/1-1A1
F .......... 844A-0.5 .......... yellow .......... X616/1-1A2
W08/1 — X35
6-pin plug for remote-control switch of rockshaft control, left
A .......... 821AA-0.5 .......... brown .......... X616/1-1B2
B .......... 824A-0.5 .......... yellow .......... X616/1-1B1
C .......... 050AA-0.5 .......... black .......... XGND43, X132-7, K01/4-85, X400-21, X503-B, X450-39, X35-D, X34-C, X34-D
D .......... 050AD-0.5 .......... black .......... XGND43, X132-7, K01/4-85, X400-21, X503-B, X450-39, X35-C, X34-C, X34-D
E .......... 826A-0.5 .......... light blue .......... X616/1-1B3
F .......... 823AA-0.5 .......... orange .......... X616/1-1B4
W08/1 — X37
2-pin plug for front loader
A .......... 256A-1 .......... light blue .......... F06/06A
B .......... 310BF-1 .......... black .......... XGND1, X247-24, X488-B, X106-D, X247-16, X247-9, X247-1, X285-B, X44-B, X239-C, X128-B
W08/1 — X38
4-pin plug for windshield wiper motor
1 .......... 235AB-1 .......... dark green .......... X39-D, X400-12

2 .......... 310AN-1 .......... black ..........
K07/5-86, K08/1-85, K08/2-85, X500-1, X430-1, X474-B, K08/3-85
3 .......... 224AB-1 .......... yellow .......... X39-B, X400-18
4 .......... 236AC-1 .......... light blue .......... F06/04A, X400-22, X39-A
W08/1 — X39
4-pin plug — Connection point for windshield wiper switch harness (W18)
A .......... 236AD-1 .......... light blue .......... F06/04A, X400-22, X38F-4
B .......... 224AA-1 .......... yellow .......... X38-3, X400-18
C .......... not used
D .......... 235AA-1 .......... dark green .......... X38-1, X400-12
W08/1 — X44
2-pin plug for rear window washer pump
A .......... 258A-1 .......... gray .......... X620-C
B .......... 310AC-1 .......... black .......... XGND1, X247-24, X488-B, X106-D, X247-16, X247-9, X247-1, X37-B, X285-B, X239-C, X128-B
W08/1 — X106
4-pin plug for right tail, brake and turn signal lights
A .......... 119A-0.5 .......... white .......... X616/3-3F1
B .......... 118AC-1 .......... gray .......... F03/03A, X430-24, X400-9, X113/2-A
D .......... 310AG-1 .......... black .......... XGND1, X247-24, X488-B, X247-16, X247-9, X247-1, X37-B, X285-B, X44-B, X239-C, X128-B
W08/1 — X107
4-pin plug for left tail, brake and turn signal lights
A .......... 126A-0.5 .......... light blue .......... X616/-3-3F2
B .......... 128AD-1 .......... gray .......... X400-10, F03/04A, X430-37, X113/1-A
XGND5, X113/1-B, K02/6-85, K02/7-85, X113/2-B, K01/1-85, K01/3-85, K02/1-85, K02/2-85,

D .......... 310AR-1 .......... black ..........
K02/3-85, K02/4-85, K02/5-85
W08/1 — X113/1
2-pin plug for license plate light (left)
A .......... 128AA-1 .......... gray .......... X400-10, F03/04A, X430-37, X107-B
XGND5, K02/6-85, K02/7-85, X113/2-B, X107-D, K01/1-85, K01/3-85, K02/1-85, K02/2-85, K02/3-85,
B .......... 310AQ-1 .......... black ..........
K02/4-85, K02/5-85
W08/1 — X113/2
2-pin plug for license plate light (right)
A .......... 118AE-1 .......... gray .......... F03/03A, X430-24, X106-B, X400-9
XGND5, X113/1-B, K02/6-85, K02/7-85, X107-D, K01/1-85, K01/3-85, K02/1-85, K02/2-85, K02/3-85,
B .......... 310BV-1 .......... black ..........
K02/4-85, K02/5-85
W08/1 — X120/1
A .......... 138AD-1 .......... gray .......... X25-2, F06/08A, X400-14
W08/1 — X120/2
XGND5, K07/1-86, X490/1-G, X25-14, X25-1, X38-2, B28/LH-C1, K07/6-86, K07/3-85, K07/5-86,
A .......... 310BE-1 .......... black ..........
K08/1-85, K08/2-85, X500-1, X430-1, X474-B, K08/3-85
W08/1 — X122/2
2-pin plug for differential lock switch
F04/09A, X245-C, X235-A, X440-B, X127-A, X471-2, X623-A, X487-F, X174-A, X430-35, X242-B,
A .......... 973AO-1 .......... orange ..........
X230-A, X125-A, X243-B, X500-18
B .......... 522A-0.5 .......... red .......... X616/2-2H2
W08/1 — X125
3-pin plug for rear PTO switch
F04/09A, X245-C, X235-A, X440-B, X127-A, X122/2-A, X471-2, X623-A, X487-F, X174-A,
A .......... 973AI-1 .......... orange ..........
X430-35, X242-B, X230-A, X243-B, X500-18
B .......... 525A-0.5 .......... dark green .......... X616/3-3E4
C .......... 586A-0.5 .......... light blue .......... X616/2-2G2
W08/1 — X126
3-pin plug for hazard warning switch
A .......... 102AA-1 .......... red .......... X616/1-1A4, K07/2-85
B .......... 571AC-1 .......... brown .......... F04/16A, X616/2-2L1
C .......... not used
W08/1 — X127
3-pin plug for front PTO switch
F04/09A, X245-C, X235-A, X440-B, X122/2-A, X471-2, X623-A, X487-F, X174-A, X430-35, X242-B,
A .......... 973AM-1 .......... orange ..........
X230-A, X125-A, X243-B, X500-18
B .......... 901A-0.5 .......... brown .......... X616/3-3F4
C .......... 904A-0.5 .......... yellow .......... X616/1-1F1
W08/1 — X128
2-pin plug for cigarette lighter
A .......... 297AC-1 .......... purple .......... F06/11A, X132-6
B .......... 310AM-1 .......... black .......... XGND1, X247-24, X488-B, X106-D, X247-16, X247-9, X247-1, X37-B, X285-B, X44-B, X239-C
W08/1 — X132
7-pin signal socket
1 .......... 512AG-1 .......... red .......... X500-42, X616/2-2D4
2 .......... 501AD-1 .......... brown .......... X489-27, X616/3-2E3
3 .......... 523AB-0.5 .......... orange .......... X616/3-3D2
4 .......... not used
5 .......... not used
6 .......... 297AE-1 .......... purple .......... F06/11A, X128-A
7 .......... 050AV-1 .......... black .......... XGND43, K01/4-85, X400-21, X503-B, X450-39, X35-C, X35-D, X34-C, X34-D
W08/1 — X174
3-pin plug for the remote-control switch of the rear PTO (switch on l.h. side)
F04/09A, X245-C, X235-A, X440-B, X127-A, X122/2-A, X471-2, X623-A, X487-F, X430-35, X242-B,
A .......... 973AB-1 .......... orange ..........
X230-A, X125-A, X243-B, X500-18
B .......... 547A-0.5 .......... purple .......... X616/2-2G1
C .......... 528A-0.5 .......... gray .......... X616/2-2G4
W08/1 — X230
2-pin plug for seat switch
F04/09A, X245-C, X235-A, X440-B, X127-A, X122/2-A, X471-2, X623-A, X487-F, X174-A, X430-35,
A .......... 973AL-0.5 .......... orange ..........
X242-B, X125-A, X243-B, X500-18
B .......... 807A-0.5 .......... purple .......... X616/1-1F3
W08/1 — X235
2-pin plug for handbrake switch
F04/09A, X245-C, X440-B, X127-A, X122/2-A, X471-2, X623-A, X487-F, X174-A, X430-35, X242-B,
A .......... 973AJ-0.5 .......... orange ..........
X230-A, X125-A, X243-B, X500-18
B .......... 906A-0.5 .......... light blue .......... X616/2-2G3
W08/1 — X239
3-pin plug — Connection point of harness for 3-terminal power outlet socket (W14)
W08/1 — X239 - 3-pin plug — connection point of harness for 3-terminal power outlet socket
(W14)
A .......... 412A-2.5 .......... red .......... K08/3-87
B .......... 307A-2.5 .......... purple .......... F04/02A
C .......... 310AX-2.5 .......... black .......... XGND1, X247-24, X488-B, X106-D, X247-16, X247-9, X247-1, X37-B, X285-B, X44-B, X128-B
W08/1 — X242
2-pin plug for HMS switch
A .......... 542A-0.5 .......... red .......... X616/2-2J4
F04/09A, X245-C, X235-A, X440-B, X127-A, X122/2-A, X471-2, X623-A, X487-F, X174-A, X430-35, X230-
B .......... 973AF-1 .......... orange ..........
A, X125-A, X243-B, X500-18
W08/1 — X243
3-pin plug for rear PTO preselector switch
A .......... 535A-0.5 .......... dark green .......... X616/2-2H3
B .......... 973AG-1 .......... orange ..........
X430-35, X242-B, X230-A, X125-A, X500-18
C .......... 536A-0.5 .......... light blue .......... X616/2-2H1
W08/1 — X245
3-pin plug for front wheel drive switch
A .......... 557A-0.5 .......... purple .......... X616/2-2K4
B .......... 511A-0.5 .......... brown .......... X6162-2J1
F04/09A, X235-A, X440-B, X127-A, X122/2-A, X471-2, X623-A, X487-F, X174-A, X430-35, X242-B,
C .......... 973AE-1 .......... orange ..........
X230-A, X125-A, X243-B, X500-18
W08/1 — X247
26-pin plug for monitor unit
1 .......... 310AK-0.5 .......... black .......... XGND1, X247-24, X488-B, X106-D, X247-16, X247-9, X37-B, X285-B, X44-B, X239-C, X128-B
2 .......... not used
3 .......... 517A-0.5 .......... purple .......... X616/3-3B2
4 .......... 567A-0.5 .......... purple .......... X616/3-3B3
5 .......... 552A-0.5 .......... red .......... X616/3-3C1
6 .......... 927A-0.5 .......... purple .......... X616/3-3C2
7 .......... not used
8 .......... 178AA-0.5 .......... gray .......... X616/3-3B4
9 .......... 310AZ-0.5 .......... black .......... XGND1, X247-24, X488-B, X106-D, X247-16, X247-1, X37-B, X285-B, X44-B, X239-C, X128-B
10 .......... not used
11 .......... not used
12 .......... 813A-0.5 .......... orange .......... X616/3-3D4
13 .......... 154A-0.5 .......... yellow .......... X26-25
14 .......... 815A-0.5 .......... dark green .......... X616/3-3C3
15 .......... not used
16 .......... 310BK-0.5 .......... black .......... XGND1, X247-24, X488-B, X106-D, X247-9, X247-1, X37-B, X285-B, X44-B, X239-C, X128-B
17 .......... 156A-0.5 .......... light blue .......... X26-2
18 .......... not used
19 .......... not used
20 .......... not used
21 .......... not used
22 .......... 153A-0.5 .......... orange .......... X26-5
23 .......... 814A-0.5 .......... yellow .......... X616/3-3D3
24 .......... 310BG-0.5 .......... black .......... XGND1, X488-B, X106-D, X247-16, X247-9, X247-1, X37-B, X285-B, X44-B, X239-C, X128-B
25 .......... not used
26 .......... not used
W08/1 — X249/3
W08/1 — X249/3 - 4-pin plug for gear selector switch
4-pin plug for gear selector switch
A .......... 583AA-1 .......... orange .......... X489-41
B .......... 581AA-1 .......... brown .......... X489-55
C .......... 572AG-1 .......... red .......... F05/04A, X489-23, X490/1-C, K07/4-30, K08/4-87
D .......... not used
W08/1 — X285
2-pin plug for windshield washer pump
A .......... 208A-1 .......... gray .......... X20-A
B .......... 310AS-1 .......... black .......... XGND1, X247-24, X488-B, X106-D, X247-16, X247-9, X247-1, X37-B, X44-B, X239-C, X128-B
W08/1 — X322
6-pin plug — Connection point for clutch sending unit harness (W13)
A .......... 664AA-1 .......... yellow .......... X489-64, K07/4-86
B .......... 646A-1 .......... light blue .......... X489-11
C .......... 217A-1 .......... purple .......... X489-17
D .......... 241AA-1 .......... brown .......... X489-25, X500-20
E .......... 254A-1 .......... yellow .......... X489-16
F .......... 243AA-1 .......... orange .......... X489-22, X500-21
W08/1 — X324
8-pin plug for brake switch
A .......... 273A-1 .......... orange .......... F05/01A
C .......... 244A-0.5 .......... yellow .......... X616/2-2J2
D .......... 245A-0.5 .......... dark green .......... X616/2-2F3
E .......... not used
F .......... not used
G .......... not used
H .......... not used
W08/1 — X400
42-pin plug — Connection point for cab roof and fan wiring harness (W19)
1 .......... 234A-4 .......... yellow .......... K08/2-87
2 .......... 129A-1.5 .......... white .......... K02/6-87
3 .......... 145A-1 .......... dark green .......... F03/06A
4 .......... 132A-1 .......... red .......... F03/05A
5 .......... 115A-1 .......... dark green .......... F03/08A
6 .......... 162A-1 .......... red .......... F03/07A
7 .......... 210A-1 .......... black .......... K08/2-86
8 .......... 247A-2.5 .......... purple .......... K08/1-87
9 .......... 118AD-1 .......... gray .......... F03/03A, X430-24, X106-B, X113/2-A
10 .......... 128AF-1 .......... gray .......... F03/04A, X430-37, X113/1-A, X107-B
11 .......... not used
12 .......... 235AC-1 .......... dark green .......... X39-D, X38-1
13 .......... not used
14 .......... 138AC-1 .......... gray .......... X25-2, F06/08A, X120/1-A
15 .......... 912AC-1 .......... red .......... F06/15A, X571-B
17 .......... 275A-1 .......... dark green .......... X620-B
18 .......... 224AC-1 .......... yellow .......... X39-B, X38-3
19 .......... 294A-1 .......... yellow .......... X620-A
20 .......... 971A-1 .......... brown .......... F04/06A
21 .......... 050AW-1 .......... black .......... XGND43, X132-7, K01/4-85, X503-B, X450-39, X35-C, X35-D, X34-C, X34-D
22 .......... 236AB-1 .......... light blue .......... F06/04A, X38F-4, X39-A
23 .......... 125AC-1 .......... dark green .......... X616/3-3G4, X430-23, X616/3-3G3
24 .......... 257A-1 .......... purple .......... F04/09A
25 .......... 107AC-1 .......... purple .......... X616/3-3H4, X430-26, X616/3-3H3
26 .......... 174A-1 .......... yellow .......... F03/11A
27 .......... 184A-1 .......... yellow .......... F03/12A
28 .......... 274A-1 .......... yellow .......... B28/LH-NC2
29 .......... 213A-1 .......... orange .......... F06/03E
30 .......... 179A-1 .......... white .......... F03/09A
31 .......... 113AE-1 .......... orange .......... S09-M, K07/1-30, X487-A
33 .......... 204A-1 .......... yellow .......... F06/07A
34 .......... 131AD-1 .......... brown .......... K02/7-86, K02/6-86
35 .......... 111A-1 .......... brown .......... X450-20
XGND43, X500-16, XGND47, X616/2-2M2, X571-A, X489-24, X20-C, X616/2-2L2, X489-1, X615-
36 .......... 050AP-1 .......... black ..........
C, X25-3
37 .......... not used
38 .......... not used
39 .......... 930AC-0.5 .......... black .......... X615-D
40 .......... 932AC-0.5 .......... red .......... X615-B
41 .......... 934AI-0.5 .......... yellow .......... X615-E, X26-15, X571-C, X489-44, X616/2-2A1
42 .......... 935AI-0.5 .......... dark green .......... X615-F, X26-16, X571-D, X489-21, X616/2-2B1
W08/1 - X430
W08/1 - X430 - 42-pin plug — Connection point for harness at rear of transmission (W30)
42-pin plug - Connection point for harness at rear of transmission (W30)
1 .......... 310AF-4 .......... black ..........
K07/5-86, K08/1-85, K08/2-85, X500-1, X474-B, K08/3-85
2 .......... not used
3 .......... not used
4 .......... not used
5 .......... not used
6 .......... not used
7 .......... not used
8 .......... not used
9 .......... 873AD-1 .......... orange .......... X14/1-B, X616/1-1F2, X14/2-C
10 .......... not used
11 .......... 884A-0.5 .......... yellow .......... X616/1-1C2
12 .......... not used
13 .......... 885A-0.5 .......... dark green .......... X616/1-1C1
14 .......... 531AC-1 .......... brown .......... X450-10, X500-17, X14/2-A, X616/1-1G4, X14/1-A, X450-35
15 .......... 854A-1 .......... yellow .......... X616/1-1H2
16 .......... 855A-1 .......... dark green .......... X616/1-1G2
17 .......... not used
18 .......... 878A-0.5 .......... gray .......... X616/1-1D4
19 .......... not used
20 .......... not used
21 .......... 858A-1 .......... gray .......... X616/1-1H1
22 .......... 859A-1 .......... white .......... X616/1-1G1
23 .......... 125AE-1 .......... dark green .......... X616/3-3G4, X400-23, X616/3-3G3
24 .......... 118AB-1 .......... gray .......... F03/03A, X106-B, X400-9, X113/2-A
26 .......... 107AE-1 .......... purple .......... X616/3-3H4, X400-25, X616/3-3H3
27 .......... not used
28 .......... not used
29 .......... not used
30 .......... not used
31 .......... 575A-0.5 .......... dark green .......... X616/3-3E3
32 .......... 574A-0.5 .......... yellow .......... X616/3-3A3
33 .......... 527A-1 .......... purple .......... X616/2-2L4
34 .......... not used
F04/09A, X245-C, X235-A, X440-B, X127-A, X122/2-A, X471-2, X623-A, X487-F, X174-A, X242-B,
35 .......... 973AD-0.5 .......... orange ..........
X230-A, X125-A, X243-B, X500-18
36 .......... not used
37 .......... 128AB-1 .......... gray .......... X400-10, F03/04A, X113/1-A, X107-B
38 .......... not used
39 .......... not used
40 .......... 502A-0.5 .......... red .......... X616/3-3A2
41 .......... not used
42 .......... not used
W08/1 — X440
3-pin plug for record/save switch
A .......... 532A-0.5 .......... red .......... X616/2-2K1
F04/09A, X245-C, X235-A, X127-A, X122/2-A, X471-2, X623-A, X487-F, X174-A, X430-35, X242-B,
B .......... 973AK-1 .......... orange ..........
X230-A, X125-A, X243-B, X500-18
C .......... not used
W08/1 — X450
42-pin plug — Connection point for engine wiring harness (W02)
1 .......... not used
2 .......... not used
3 .......... 385A-1.5 .......... dark green .......... S01-AID
4 .......... 124A-1 .......... yellow .......... F03/01A
5 .......... not used
6 .......... not used
7 .......... 311AA-1 .......... brown .......... S01-ST
8 .......... 264A-2.5 .......... yellow .......... K07/3-87
9 .......... 325A-0.5 .......... dark green .......... X616/3-3A4
10 .......... 531AB-1 .......... brown .......... X430-14, X500-17, X14/2-A, X616/1-1G4, X14/1-A, X450-35
11 .......... 329A-0.5 .......... white .......... X25-4
12 .......... 347A-0.5 .......... purple .......... X26-23
13 .......... 351A-0.5 .......... brown .......... X25-24
14 .......... 333AC-1 .......... orange .......... K07/5-85, K07/6-87
15 .......... 306A-1 .......... light blue .......... K07/5-30
16 .......... 903A-1 .......... orange .......... X487-E
17 .......... 362A-0.5 .......... red .......... X26-3
18 .......... not used
19 .......... not used
20 .......... 111A-1 .......... brown .......... X400-35
21 .......... 322AB-1 .......... red .......... F05/08A, X500-12
22 .......... not used
23 .......... not used
24 .......... not used
25 .......... 215A-1 .......... dark green .......... F06/03A
26 .......... 607AA-0.5 .......... purple .......... X616/3-3F3
27 .......... not used
28 .......... not used
29 .......... not used
30 .......... not used
31 .......... not used
32 .......... 139AA-1 .......... white .......... F03/14A, F03/15A
33 .......... 114A-1 .......... yellow .......... F03/02A
34 .......... 301A-0.5 .......... brown .......... X616/3-3A1
35 .......... 531AJ-1 .......... brown .......... X430-14, X450-10, X500-17, X14/2-A, X616/1-1G4, X14/1-A
36 .......... not used
37 .......... not used
38 .......... not used
39 .......... 050AC-1 .......... black .......... XGND43, X132-7, K01/4-85, X400-21, X503-B, X35-C, X35-D, X34-C, X34-D
40 .......... not used
41 .......... not used
42 .......... not used
W08/1 — X471
4-pin plug for program switch
1 .......... 554A-0.5 .......... yellow .......... X616/2-2J3
F04/09A, X245-C, X235-A, X440-B, X127-A, X122/2-A, X623-A, X487-F, X174-A, X430-35, X242-B,
2 .......... 973AP-0.5 .......... orange ..........
X230-A, X125-A, X243-B, X500-18
3 .......... 551A-0.5 .......... brown .......... X616/2-2K3
4 .......... 559A-0.5 .......... white .......... X616/2-2K2
W08/1 — X473
W08/1 — X473 - 2-pin plug, connecting point for power supply and starting aid wiring harness
(W01)
F04/02E, K02/3-30, F03/10E, K02/4-30, K02/5-30, F06/15E, F04/12E, F06/01E, F04/16E, F06/13E,
1 .......... 012AA-10 .......... red ..........
2 .......... 042AA-10 .......... red .......... F05/09E, F05/10E, F05/12E, F05/11E
W08/1 — X474
2-pin plug for GreenStar
A .......... 981A-2.5 .......... brown .......... F04/13A
B .......... 310AH-2.5 .......... black ..........
K07/5-86, K08/1-85, K08/2-85, X500-1, X430-1, K08/3-85
W08/1 — X487
10-pin plug for multifunction unit
A .......... 113AD-1 .......... orange .......... S09-M, X400-31, K07/1-30
B .......... 144A-1 .......... yellow .......... K02/1-86
C .......... 159AB-1 .......... white .......... K02/2-86, X26-22
D .......... 127A-0.5 .......... purple .......... X616/2-2E4
E .......... 903A-1 .......... orange .......... X450-16
F04/09A, X245-C, X235-A, X440-B, X127-A, X122/2-A, X471-2, X623-A, X174-A, X430-35, X242-
F .......... 973AC-1 .......... orange ..........
B, X230-A, X125-A, X243-B, X500-18
G .......... 155A-0.5 .......... dark green .......... X616/2-2F4
H .......... 152AC-1 .......... red .......... F04/12A, S09-B
J .......... 262A-1 .......... red .......... F06/10A
K .......... not used
W08/1 — X488
2-pin plug for operator′s seat
A .......... 293A-1 .......... orange .......... F06/12A
B .......... 310AT-1 .......... black .......... XGND1, X247-24, X106-D, X247-16, X247-9, X247-1, X37-B, X285-B, X44-B, X239-C, X128-B
W08/1 — X489
68-pin plug for Electronic PowrQuad Controller (EPC)

1 .......... 050AJ-1 .......... black ..........
X615-C, X25-3
2 .......... 503A-1 .......... orange .......... F05/05A
3 .......... 614A-1 .......... yellow .......... X490/1-F
4 .......... not used
5 .......... 577A-1 .......... purple .......... X500-8
6 .......... not used
7 .......... 578A-1 .......... gray .......... X500-30
8 .......... not used
9 .......... 570A-1 .......... black .......... X500-27
10 .......... 579A-1 .......... white .......... X500-28
11 .......... 646A-1 .......... light blue .......... X322-B
12 .......... not used
13 .......... not used
14 .......... 549A-1 .......... white .......... X500-19
15 .......... not used
16 .......... 254A-1 .......... yellow .......... X322-3
17 .......... 217A-1 .......... purple .......... X322-C
18 .......... not used
19 .......... not used
20 .......... not used
21 .......... 935AF-0.5 .......... dark green .......... X615-F, X26-16, X571-D, X616/2-2B1, X400-42
22 .......... 243AB-1 .......... orange .......... X322-F, X500-21
23 .......... 572AA-1 .......... red .......... F05/04A, X249/3-C, X490/1-C, K07/4-30, K08/4-87
XGND43, X500-16, X400-36, XGND47, X616/2-2M2, X571-A, X20-C, X616/2-2L2, X489-1, X615-
24 .......... 050AR-1 .......... black ..........
C, X25-3
25 .......... 241AB-1 .......... brown .......... X322-D, X500-20
26 .......... 341A-0.5 .......... brown .......... X616/3-3E1
27 .......... 501AF-1 .......... brown .......... X132-2, X616/3-2E3
28 .......... 564A-1 .......... yellow .......... X500-10
29 .......... not used
30 .......... not used
31 .......... not used
32 .......... not used
33 .......... not used
34 .......... not used
35 .......... 261A-1 .......... brown .......... X503-A
36 .......... not used
37 .......... 504A-1 .......... yellow .......... X489-46
38 .......... not used
39 .......... 553AB-1 .......... orange .......... K07/4-87, X489-40, K08/4-86
40 .......... 553AC-1 .......... orange .......... K07/4-87, X489-39, K08/4-86
41 .......... 583AA-1 .......... orange .......... X249/3-A
42 .......... not used
43 .......... not used
44 .......... 934AF-0.5 .......... yellow .......... X615-E, X26-15, X571-C, X616/2-2A1, X400-41
45 .......... not used
46 .......... 504A-1 .......... yellow .......... X489-37
47 .......... 590AC-1 .......... black .......... X616/2-2F1, X490/1-D
48 .......... not used
49 .......... not used
50 .......... not used
51 .......... not used
52 .......... 569AC-1 .......... white .......... X616/2-2F2, X490/1-E
53 .......... not used
54 .......... not used
55 .......... 581AA-1 .......... brown .......... X249/3-B
56 .......... not used
57 .......... not used
58 .......... not used
59 .......... not used
60 .......... 582A-1 .......... red .......... X500-32
61 .......... 580A-1 .......... black .......... X500-25
62 .......... not used
63 .......... not used
64 .......... 664AB-1 .......... yellow .......... X322-A, K07/4-86
65 .......... 561AB-1 .......... brown .......... X616/2-2E3, X490/1-B
66 .......... not used
67 .......... 584A-1 .......... yellow .......... X500-31
68 .......... not used
W08/1 - X490/1
W08/1 - X490/1 - 8-pin plug for electrical reverser control
8-pin plug for electrical reverser control (A47 or A68/1)
W08/1 - X490/1 - 8-pin plug for electrical reverser control (A47 or A68/1)
A .......... 589A-1 .......... white .......... F05-06A
B .......... 561AC-1 .......... brown .......... X489-48
C .......... 572AF-1 .......... red .......... F05/04A, X489-23, X249/3-C, K07/4-30, K08/4-87
D .......... 590A-1 .......... black .......... X489-36
E .......... 569A-1 .......... white .......... X616/2-2F2, X489-38
F .......... 614AC-1 .......... yellow .......... X616/2-2E3, X489-54
XGND5, K07/1-86, K07/3-85, K07/5-86, K07/6-86, K08/1-85, K08/2-85, X500-1, X430-1, X474-B,
G .......... 310BJ-1 .......... black ..........
K08/3-85, X120/2-A, X25-1, X25-14, X38-4, B28/LH-C1
H .......... 572AF-1 .......... red .......... F05/04A, X489-23, X249/3-C, K07/4-30, K08/4-87
W08/1 - X490/1
X490/1
X490/1 8-pin plug for electrical reverser control (A68/2)
X490/1
A .......... not used
B .......... 561AC-1 .......... brown .......... X489-48
C .......... 594 yellow .......... X489-3
D .......... 590AB-1 .......... black .......... X489-36
E .......... 569AB-1 .......... white .......... X616/2-2F2, X489-38
F .......... 614A-1 .......... yellow .......... X616/2-2E3, X489-54
XGND5, K07/1-86, K07/3-85, K07/5-86, K07/6-86, K08/1-85, K08/2-85, X500-1, X430-1, X474-B,
G .......... 310BJ-1 .......... black ..........
K08/3-85, X120/2-A, X25-1, X25-14, X38-4, B28/LH-C1
H .......... 572AF-1 .......... red .......... F05/04A, X489-23, X249/3-C, K07/4-30, K08/4-87
W08/1 — X500
42-pin plug — Connection point for harness at front end of transmission (W28)
1 .......... 310AD-4 .......... black ..........
K07/5-86, K08/1-85, K08/2-85, X430-1, X474-B, K08/3-85
2 .......... not used
3 .......... not used
4 .......... not used
5 .......... not used
6 .......... not used
7 .......... not used
8 .......... 577A-1 .......... purple .......... X489-5
9 .......... not used
10 .......... 564A-1 .......... yellow .......... X489-28
11 .......... not used
12 .......... 322AA-1 .......... red .......... X450-21, F05/08A
13 .......... 555A-1 .......... dark green .......... X616/2-2L3
14 .......... 515A-0.5 .......... dark green .......... X26-24
15 .......... 602A-0.5 .......... red .......... X26-26
XGND43, X400-36, XGND47, X616/2-2M2, X571-A, X489-24, X20-C, X616/2-2L2, X489-1, X615-
16 .......... 050AH-1 .......... black ..........
C, X25-3
17 .......... 531AE-1 .......... brown .......... X430-14, X450-10, X14/2-A, X616/1-1G4, X14/1-A, X450-35
18 .......... 973AH-1 .......... orange ..........
X430-35, X242-B, X230-A, X125-A, X243-B
19 .......... 549A-1 .......... white .......... X489-14
20 .......... 241AC-1 .......... brown .......... X322-D, X489-25
21 .......... 243AC-1 .......... orange .......... X322-F, X489-22
22 .......... 353A-0.5 .......... orange .......... X26-17
23 .......... not used
24 .......... not used
25 .......... 580A-1 .......... black .......... X489-61
26 .......... not used
27 .......... 570A-1 .......... black .......... X489-9
28 .......... 579A-1 .......... white .......... X489-10
29 .......... not used
30 .......... 578A-1 .......... gray .......... X489-7
31 .......... 584A-1 .......... yellow .......... X489-67
32 .......... 582A-1 .......... red .......... X489-60
33 .......... not used
34 .......... not used
35 .......... not used
36 .......... 509A-0.5 .......... white .......... X25-15
37 .......... 992AB-1 .......... red .......... F04/05A, X26-14
38 .......... not used
39 .......... not used
40 .......... 606A-0.5 .......... light blue .......... X25-22
41 .......... not used
42 .......... 512AB-0.5 .......... red .......... X132-1, X616/2-2D4
W08/1 — X503
2-pin plug for park lock switch
A .......... 261A-1 .......... brown .......... X489-35
B .......... 050AQ-1 .......... black .......... XGND43, X132-7, K01/4-85, X400-21, X450-39, X35-C, X35-D, X34-C, X34-D
W08/1 — X571
9-terminal service socket (CAN BUS)
XGND43, X500-16, X400-36, XGND47, X616/2-2M2, X489-24, X20-C, X616/2-2L2, X489-1,

A .......... 050AG-1 .......... black ..........
X615-C, X25-3
B .......... 912AB-1 .......... red .......... F06/15A, X400-15
C .......... 934AD-1 .......... yellow .......... X615-E, X26-15, X489-44, X616/2-2A1, X400-41
D .......... 935AD-1 .......... dark green .......... X615-F, X26-16, X489-21, X616/2-2B1, X400-42
E .......... not used
F .......... not used
G .......... not used
H .......... not used
J .......... not used
W08/1 — X615
6-pin plug for CAN BUS terminator
A .......... 994AA-1 .......... yellow .......... K07/2-30
B .......... 932AA-0.5 .......... red .......... X400-40

C .......... 050AO-1 .......... black ..........
X489-1, X25-3
D .......... 930AA-0.5 .......... black .......... X400-39
E .......... 934AA-0.5 .......... yellow .......... X26-15, X571-C, X489-44, X616/2-2A1, X400-41
F .......... 935AA-0.5 .......... dark green .......... X26-16, X571-D, X489-21, X616/2-2B1, X400-42
W08/1 - X616/1
W08/1 - X616/1 - 32-pin plug for Basic Control Unit (BCU)
32-pin plug for BCU
1A1 .......... 841A-0.5 .......... brown .......... X34-E
1A2 .......... 844A-0.5 .......... yellow .......... X34-F
1A3 .......... 843A-0.5 .......... orange .......... X34-B
1A4 .......... 846A-0.5 .......... light blue .......... X34-A
1B1 .......... 824A-0.5 .......... yellow .......... X35-B
1B2 .......... 821AA-0.5 .......... brown .......... X35-A
1B3 .......... 826A-0.5 .......... light blue .......... X35-E
1B4 .......... 823AA-0.5 .......... orange .......... X35-F
1C1 .......... 885A-0.5 .......... dark green .......... X430-13
1C2 .......... 884A-0.5 .......... yellow .......... X430-11
1C3 .......... 875A-0.5 .......... dark green .......... X14/1-C
1C4 .......... 869A-0.5 .......... white .......... X14/2-B
1D1 .......... 876A-0.5 .......... light blue .......... X14/1-H
1D2 .......... 877A-0.5 .......... purple .......... X14/1-E
1D3 .......... not used
1D4 .......... 878A-0.5 .......... gray .......... X430-18
1E1 .......... 834A-0.5 .......... yellow .......... X14/1-F
1E2 .......... 838A-0.5 .......... gray .......... X14/1-D
1E3 .......... 839A-0.5 .......... white .......... X14/1-G
1E4 .......... not used
1F1 .......... 904A-0.5 .......... yellow .......... X127-C
1F2 .......... 873AB-0.5 .......... orange .......... X14/1-B, X430-9, X14/2-C
1F3 .......... 807A-0.5 .......... purple .......... X230-B
1F4 .......... 102AB-0.5 .......... red .......... X126-A, K07/2-85
1G1 .......... 859A-1 .......... white .......... X430-22
1G2 .......... 855A-1 .......... dark green .......... X430-16
1G3 .......... 882AC-1 .......... red .......... F04/08A, X616/2-2M1
1G4 .......... 531AA-1 .......... brown .......... X430-14, X450-10, X500-17, X14/2-A, X14/1-A, X450-35
1H1 .......... 858A-1 .......... gray .......... X430-21
1H2 .......... 854A-1 .......... yellow .......... X430-15
1H3 .......... not used
1H4 .......... not used
W08/1 — X616/2
48-pin plug for BCU
2A1 .......... 934AH-0.5 .......... yellow .......... X615-E, X26-15, X571-C, X489-44, X400-41
2A2 .......... not used ..........
2A3 .......... 537A-0.5 .......... purple .......... X623-C
2A4 .......... not used ..........
2B1 .......... 935AH-0.5 .......... dark green .......... X615-F, X26-16, X571-D, X489-21, X400-42
2B2 .......... not used
2B3 .......... 538A-0.5 .......... gray .......... X623-B
2B4 .......... not used
2C1 .......... not used
2C2 .......... not used
2C3 .......... not used
2C4 .......... not used
2D1 .......... 544A-0.5 .......... yellow .......... X616/2-2D2
2D2 .......... 544A-0.5 .......... yellow .......... X616/2-2D1
2D3 .......... 228AC-0.5 .......... gray .......... F06/13A, K01/4-86
2D4 .......... 512AA-0.5 .......... red .......... X500-42, X132-1
2E1 .......... 336A-0.5 .......... light blue .......... K07/6-85
2E2 .......... 560A-0.5 .......... black .......... K07/4-85
2E3 .......... 561A-0.5 .......... brown .......... X489-65, X490/1-B
2E4 .......... 127A-0.5 .......... purple .......... X487-D
2F1 .......... 590A-0.5 .......... black .......... X490/1-D, X489-47
2F2 .......... 569A-0.5 .......... white .......... X490/1-E, X489-52
2F3 .......... 245A-0.5 .......... dark green .......... X324-D
2F4 .......... 155A-0.5 .......... dark green .......... X487-G
2G1 .......... 547A-0.5 .......... purple .......... X174-B
2G2 .......... 586A-0.5 .......... light blue .......... X125-C
2G3 .......... 906A-0.5 .......... light blue .......... X235-B
2G4 .......... 528A-0.5 .......... gray .......... X174-C
2H1 .......... 536A-0.5 .......... light blue .......... X243-C
2H2 .......... 522A-0.5 .......... red .......... X122/2-B
2H3 .......... 535A-0.5 .......... dark green .......... X243-A
2H4 .......... not used
2J1 .......... 511A-0.5 .......... brown .......... X245-B
2J2 .......... 244A-0.5 .......... yellow .......... X324-C
2J3 .......... 554A-0.5 .......... yellow .......... X471-1
2J4 .......... 542A-0.5 .......... red .......... X242-A
2K1 .......... 532A-0.5 .......... red .......... X440-A
2K2 .......... 559A-0.5 .......... white .......... X471-4
2K3 .......... 551A-0.5 .......... brown .......... X471-3
2K4 .......... 557A-0.5 .......... purple .......... X245-A
2L1 .......... 571AB-1 .......... brown .......... F04/16A, X126-B
XGND43, X500-16, X400-36, XGND47, X616/2-2M2, X571-A, X489-24, X20-C, X489-1, X615-C,
2L2 .......... 050AI-1 .......... black ..........
X25-3
2L3 .......... 555A-1 .......... dark green .......... X500-13
2L4 .......... 527A-1 .......... purple .......... X430-33
2M1 .......... 882AB-1 .......... red .......... F04/08A, X616/1-1G3
XGND43, X500-16, X400-36, XGND47, X571-A, X489-24, X20-C, X616/2-2L2, X489-1, X615-C,
2M2 .......... 050AX-1 .......... black ..........
X25-3
2M3 .......... not used
2M4 .......... 149AB-1 .......... white .......... X25-12
W08/1 — X616/3
32-pin plug for BCU
3A1 .......... 301A-0.5 .......... brown .......... X450-34
3A2 .......... 502A-0.5 .......... red .......... X430-40
3A3 .......... 574A-0.5 .......... yellow .......... X430-32
3A4 .......... 325A-0.5 .......... dark green .......... X450-9
3B1 .......... not used
3B2 .......... 517A-0.5 .......... purple .......... X247-3
3B3 .......... 567A-0.5 .......... purple .......... X247-4
3B4 .......... 178AA-0.5 .......... gray .......... X247-8
3C1 .......... 552A-0.5 .......... red .......... X247-5
3C2 .......... 927A-0.5 .......... purple .......... X247-6
3C3 .......... 815A-0.5 .......... dark green .......... X247-14
3C4 .......... not used
3D1 .......... not used
3D2 .......... 523AB-0.5 .......... orange .......... X132-3
3D3 .......... 814A-0.5 .......... yellow .......... X247-23
3D4 .......... 813A-0.5 .......... orange .......... X247-12
3E1 .......... 341A-0.5 .......... brown .......... X489-26
3E2 .......... 501AA-0.5 .......... brown .......... X132-2, X489-27
3E3 .......... 575A-0.5 .......... dark green .......... X430-31
3E4 .......... 525A-0.5 .......... dark green .......... X125-B
3F1 .......... 119A-0.5 .......... white .......... X106-A
3F2 .......... 126A-0.5 .......... light blue .......... X107-A
3F3 .......... 607AA-0.5 .......... purple .......... X450-26
3F4 .......... 901A-0.5 .......... brown .......... X127-B
3G1 .......... 182AC-1 .......... red .......... F04/11A, X616/3-3H1
3G2 .......... 122AA-1 .......... red .......... F04/10A, X616/3-3H2
3G3 .......... 125AF-1 .......... dark green .......... X616/3-3G4, X400-23, X430-23
3G4 .......... 125AB-1 .......... dark green .......... X400-23, X430-23, X616/3-3G3
3H1 .......... 182AB-1 .......... red .......... F04/11A, X616/3-3G1
3H2 .......... 122AC-1 .......... red .......... X616/3-3G2, F04/10A
3H3 .......... 107AF-1 .......... purple .......... X616/3-3H4, X400-25, X430-26
3H4 .......... 107AA-1 .......... purple .......... X400-25, X430-26, X616/3-3H3
W08/1 — X620
6-pin plug for rear window wiper switch
A .......... 294A-1 .......... yellow .......... X400-19
B .......... 275A-1 .......... dark green .......... X400-17
C .......... 258A-1 .......... gray .......... X44-A
D .......... not used
F .......... not used
W08/1 — X623
3-pin plug for the remote-control switch of the rear PTO (switch on r.h. side)
F04/09A, X245-C, X235-A, X440-B, X127-A, X122/2-A, X471-2, X487-F, X174-A, X430-35, X242-B,
A .......... 973AR-1 .......... orange ..........
X230-A, X125-A, X243-B, X500-18
B .......... 538A-0.5 .......... gray .......... X616/2-2B3
C .......... 537A-0.5 .......... purple .......... X616/2-2A3
W08/1 — XGND1
Ground point
(-) .......... 310AA-6 .......... black .......... X247-24, X488-B, X106-D, X247-16, X247-9, X247-1, X37-B, X285-B, X44-B, X239-C, X128-B
W08/1 — XGND5
Ground point
X113/1-B, K02/6-85, K02/7-85, X113/2-B, X107-D, K01/1-85, K01/3-85, K02/1-85, K02/2-85,

(-) .......... 310AB-6 .......... black ..........
K02/3-85, K02/4-85, K02/5-85
K07/1-86, X120/2-A, X490/1-G, X25-14, X25-1, X38-2, B28/LH-C1, K07/6-86, K07/3-85, K07/5-86,
(-) .......... 310AP-6 .......... black ..........
K08/1-85, K08/2-85, X500-1, X430-1, X474-B, K08/3-85
W08/1 — XGND43
Ground point for electronics
X500-16, X400-36, XGND47, X616/2-2M2, X571-A, X489-24, X20-C, X616/2-2L2, X489-1, X615-C,
(-) .......... 050AN-6 .......... black ..........
X25-3
(-) .......... 050AT-6 .......... black .......... X132-7, K01/4-85, X400-21, X503-B, X450-39, X35-C, X35-D, X34-C, X34-D
W08/1 — XGND47
Ground point
XGND43, X500-16, X400-36, X616/2-2M2, X571-A, X489-24, X20-C, X616/2-2L2, X489-1, X615-C,
(-) .......... 050AF-1 .......... black ..........
X25-3
W28 — Front Transmission Wiring Harness for Tractors with PowrQuad

Transmission from Serial No. 431378
W28 — Front Transmission Wiring Harness for Tractors with PowrQuad Transmission from Serial No. 431378
LEGEND:
W28 — X80 2-pin plug for restriction warning switch at transmission oil filter
W28 — X81 1-pin plug for low-temperature switch
W28 — X82 Terminal with ring, for high-temperature switch
W28 — X83 2-pin plug for sending unit of engagement oil warning light
W28 — X86 2-pin plug for sending unit of fuel gauge
W28 — X91 2-pin plug for front-wheel drive solenoid valve
W28 — X93 2-pin plug for neutral start switch
W28 — X500 42-pin plug (connection point, harness at front end of transmission; W08)
W28 — X80 - 2-pin plug for restriction warning switch at transmission oil filter
W28 — X81 - 1-pin plug for low-temperature switch
W28 — X82 - Terminal with ring, for high-temperature switch
W28 — X83 - 2-pin plug for sending unit of engagement oil warning light
W28 — X86 - 2-pin plug for sending unit of fuel gauge
W28 — X91 - 2-pin plug for front-wheel drive solenoid valve
W28 — X93 - 2-pin plug for neutral start switch
W28 — X500 - 42-pin plug - front transmission harness connection point (W08)
W28 — X80
2-pin plug for restriction warning switch at transmission oil filter
A .......... 606D-1 .......... light blue .......... X500-40
B .......... 509D-1 .......... white .......... X81-A
W28 — X81

1-pin plug for low-temperature switch
A .......... 509D-1 .......... white .......... X80-B
W28 — X82
Terminal with ring, for high-temperature switch
A .......... 602D-1 .......... red .......... X500-15
W28 — X83
2-pin plug for sending unit of engagement oil warning light
A .......... 515D-1 .......... dark green .......... X500-14
B .......... 310DJ-1 .......... black .......... XGND46, X500-1, X86-A, X91-B
W28 — X86
2-pin plug for sending unit of fuel gauge
A .......... 310DF-1 .......... black .......... XGND46, X83-B, X500-1, X91-B
B .......... 353D-1 .......... orange .......... X500-22
W28 — X91
2-pin plug for front-wheel drive solenoid valve
A .......... 555D-1 .......... dark green .......... X500-13
B .......... 310DI-1 .......... black .......... XGND46, X83-B, X500-1, X86-A
W28 — X93
2-pin plug for neutral start switch
A .......... 506D-1 .......... light blue .......... X500-41
B .......... 311D-1 .......... brown .......... X500-39
W28 — X500
42-pin plug (connection point, harness at front end of transmission; W08)
1 .......... 310DW-4 .......... black .......... XGND46, X83-B, X86-A, X91-B
2 .......... not used
3 .......... not used
4 .......... not used
5 .......... not used
6 .......... not used
7 .......... not used
8 .......... not used
9 .......... not used
10 .......... not used
11 .......... not used
12 .......... not used
13 .......... 555D-1 .......... dark green .......... X91-A
14 .......... 515D-1 .......... dark green .......... X83-A
15 .......... 602D-1 .......... red .......... X82-A
16 .......... not used
17 .......... not used
18 .......... not used
19 .......... not used
20 .......... not used
21 .......... not used
22 .......... 353D-1 .......... orange .......... X86-B
23 .......... not used
24 .......... not used
25 .......... not used
26 .......... not used
27 .......... not used
28 .......... not used
29 .......... not used
30 .......... not used
31 .......... not used
32 .......... not used
33 .......... not used
34 .......... not used
35 .......... not used
36 .......... not used
37 .......... not used
38 .......... not used
39 .......... 311D-1 .......... brown .......... X93-B
40 .......... 606D-1 .......... light blue .......... X80-A
41 .......... 506D-1 .......... light blue .......... X93-A
42 .......... not used
W28 — XGND46
Ground point
(-) .......... 310DS-4 .......... black .......... X83-B, X500-1, X86-A, X91-B
W28/1 — Front Transmission Wiring Harness for Tractors with

PowrQuad Plus Transmission from Serial No. 424816
W28/1 — Front Transmission Wiring Harness for Tractors with PowrQuad Plus Transmission from Serial No.
424816
LEGEND:
W28/1 — X30 Prewiring for radar connection
W28/1 — X80 2-pin plug for restriction warning switch at transmission oil filter
W28/1 — X83 2-pin plug for sending unit of engagement oil warning light
W28/1 — X86 2-pin plug for sending unit of fuel gauge
W28/1 — X91 2-pin plug for front-wheel drive solenoid valve
W28/1 — X307 2-pin plug for transmission oil temperature sending unit
W28/1 — X459 3-pin plug for enable pressure sending unit
W28/1 — X493 2-pin plug for forward solenoid valve (Y33)
W28/1 — X494 2-pin plug for reverse solenoid valve (Y36)
W28/1 — X495 2-pin plug for enable signal proportional valve (Y38)
W28/1 — X499 4-pin plug for transmission speed sending unit
W28/1 — X500 42-pin plug (connection point, harness at front end of transmission; W08)
W28/1 — X546 4-pin plug for restriction warning switch at hydraulic oil filter
W28/1 — X701 2-pin plug for K1 solenoid valve (Y62)
W28/1 — X702 2-pin plug for K2 solenoid valve (Y63)
W28/1 — X30 - Prewiring for radar connection

W28/1 — X80 - 2-pin plug for restriction warning switch at transmission oil filter
W28/1 — X83 - 2-pin plug for sending unit of engagement oil warning light
W28/1 — X86 - 2-pin plug for sending unit of fuel gauge
W28/1 — X91 - 2-pin plug for front-wheel drive solenoid valve
W28/1 — X307 - 2-pin plug for transmission oil temperature sending unit
W28/1 — X459 - 3-pin plug for enable pressure sending unit
W28/1 — X493 - 2-pin plug for forward solenoid (Y33)
W28/1 — X494 - 2-pin plug for reverse solenoid (Y36)
W28/1 — X495 - 2-pin plug for enable signal proportional valve Y38)
W28/1 — X499 - 4-pin plug for transmission speed sending unit
W28/1 — X546 - 4-pin plug for restriction warning switch at hydraulic oil filter
W28/1 — X701 - 2-pin plug for K1 solenoid valve (Y62)
W28/1 — X702 - 2-pin plug for K2 solenoid valve (Y63)
W28/1 — X30
Prewiring for radar connection
1 .......... 531D-0.5 .......... brown .......... X500-17
2 .......... 512D-0.5 .......... red .......... X500-42
3 .......... 973DB-0.5 .......... orange .......... X500-18, X30-4, X499-C
4 .......... 973DC-0.5 .......... orange .......... X500-18, X30-3, X499-C
W28/1 — X80
2-pin plug for restriction warning switch at transmission oil filter
A .......... 606DB-1 .......... light blue .......... X500-40, X546-B
B .......... 310DH-1 .......... black .......... XGND46, X701-B, X83-B, X494-B, X493-B, X500-1, X86-A, X702-B, X91-B
W28/1 — X83
2-pin plug for sending unit of engagement oil warning light
A .......... 515D-1 .......... dark green .......... X500-14
B .......... 310DJ-1 .......... black .......... XGND46, X701-B, X494-B, X493-B, X500-1, X86-A, X702-B, X80-B, X91-B
W28/1 — X86
2-pin plug for sending unit of fuel gauge
A .......... 310DF-1 .......... black .......... XGND46, X701-B, X83-B, X494-B, X493-B, X500-1, X702-B, X80-B, X91-B
B .......... 353D-1 .......... orange .......... X500-22
W28/1 — X91
2-pin plug for front-wheel drive solenoid valve
A .......... 555D-1 .......... dark green .......... X500-13
B .......... 310DI-1 .......... black .......... XGND46, X701-B, X83-B, X494-B, X493-B, X500-1, X86-A, X702-B, X80-B
W28/1 — X307
2-pin plug for transmission oil temperature sending unit
A .......... 602DC-1 .......... red .......... X500-15
B .......... 050DB-1 .......... black .......... X500-16, X546-D, X499-D
W28/1 — X459
3-pin plug for enable pressure sending unit
A .......... 241D-1 .......... brown .......... X500-20
B .......... 243D-1 .......... orange .......... X500-21
C .......... 549D-1 .......... white .......... X500-19
W28/1 — X493
W28/1 — X493 - 2-pin plug for forward solenoid valve (Y33)
2-pin plug for forward solenoid valve (Y33)
A .......... 579D-1 .......... white .......... X500-28
B .......... 310DQ-1 .......... black .......... XGND46, X701-B, X83-B, X494-B, X500-1, X86-A, X702-B, X80-B, X91-B
W28/1 — X494
W28/1 — X494 - 2-pin plug for reverse solenoid valve (Y36)
2-pin plug for reverse solenoid valve (Y36)
A .......... 570D-1 .......... black .......... X500-27
B .......... 310DP-1 .......... black .......... XGND46, X701-B, X83-B, X493-B, X500-1, X86-A, X702-B, X80-B, X91-B
W28/1 — X495
2-pin plug for enable signal proportional valve (Y38)
A .......... 577D-1 .......... purple .......... X500-8
B .......... 578D-1 .......... gray .......... X500-30
W28/1 — X499
4-pin plug for transmission speed sending unit
A .......... 564D-1 .......... yellow .......... X500-10
B .......... not used
C .......... 973DD-1 .......... orange .......... X500-18, X30-3, X30-4
D .......... 050DD-1 .......... black .......... X500-16, X546-D, X307-B
W28/1 — X500
42-pin plug (connection point, harness at front end of transmission; W08)
1 .......... 310DW-4 .......... black .......... XGND46, X701-B, X83-B, X494-B, X493-B, X86-A, X702-B, X80-B, X91-B
2 .......... not used
3 .......... not used
4 .......... not used
5 .......... not used
6 .......... not used
7 .......... not used
8 .......... 577D-1 .......... purple .......... X495-A
9 .......... not used
10 .......... 564D-1 .......... yellow .......... X499-A
11 .......... not used
12 .......... not used
13 .......... 555D-1 .......... dark green .......... X91-A
14 .......... 515D-1 .......... dark green .......... X83-A
15 .......... 602DC-1 .......... red .......... X307-A
16 .......... 050DA-1 .......... black .......... X546-D, X307-B, X499-D
17 .......... 531D-0.5 .......... brown .......... X30-1
18 .......... 973DA-0.5 .......... orange .......... X30-3, X30-4, X499-C
19 .......... 549D-1 .......... white .......... X459-C
20 .......... 241D-1 .......... brown .......... X459-A
21 .......... 243D-1 .......... orange .......... X459-B
22 .......... 353D-1 .......... orange .......... X86-B
23 .......... not used
24 .......... not used
25 .......... 580D-1 .......... black .......... X702-A
26 .......... not used
27 .......... 570D-1 .......... black .......... X494-A
28 .......... 579D-1 .......... white .......... X493-A
29 .......... not used
30 .......... 578D-1 .......... gray .......... X495-B
31 .......... not used
32 .......... 582D-1 .......... red .......... X701-A
33 .......... not used
34 .......... not used
35 .......... not used
36 .......... 509D-1 .......... white .......... X546-C
37 .......... 992D-1 .......... red .......... X546-A
38 .......... not used
39 .......... not used
40 .......... 606DA-0.5 .......... light blue .......... X80-A, X546-B
41 .......... not used
42 .......... 512D-0.5 .......... red .......... X30-2
W28/1 — X546
4-pin plug for restriction warning switch at hydraulic oil filter
A .......... 992D-1 .......... red .......... X500-37
B .......... 606DC-1 .......... light blue .......... X500-40, X80-A
C .......... 509D-1 .......... white .......... X500-36
D .......... 050DE-1 .......... black .......... X500-16, X307-B, X499-D
W28/1 — X701
W28/1 — X701 - 2-pin plug for solenoid valve 1 (Y62)
2-pin plug for solenoid valve 1 (Y62)
A .......... 582D-1 .......... red .......... X500-32
B .......... 310DK-1 .......... black .......... XGND46, X83-B, X494-B, X493-B, X500-1, X86-A, X702-B, X80-B, X91-B
W28/1 — X702
2-pin plug for solenoid valve 2 (Y63)
A .......... 580D-1 .......... black .......... X500-25
B .......... 310DR-1 .......... black .......... XGND46, X701-B, X83-B, X494-B, X493-B, X500-1, X86-A, X80-B, X91-B
W28/1 — XGND46
Ground point
(-) .......... 310DS-4 .......... black .......... X701-B, X83-B, X494-B, X493-B, X500-1, X86-A, 702-B, X80-B, X91-B
LEGEND:
W42 — F25 Fuse for indicator light, switch of battery cut-off switch
W42 — K24/2 Terminal with ring, for injection pump shut-off valve
W42 — K56 Battery cut-off relay
W42 — K57 Relay for battery cut-off switch
W42 — X696 10-pin plug for switch of battery cut-off switch

W42 — F25 - Fuse for indicator light, switch of battery cut-off switch
W42 — K24/2 - Terminal with ring, for injection pump shut-off valve
W42 — K56 - Battery cut-off relay
W42 — K57 - Relay for battery cut-off switch
W42 — X696 - 10-pin plug for switch of battery cut-off switch
W42 — F25
Fuse for indicator light, switch of battery cut-off switch
A .......... 982U-1 .......... red .......... X696-6
E .......... 002U-1 .......... red .......... K56-88A
W42 — K24/2
Terminal with ring, for injection pump shut-off valve
A .......... 322UA-1 .......... red .......... K57-2
W42 — K56
Battery cut-off relay
85A .......... 410U-1 .......... black .......... X696-2
85B .......... 261U-1 .......... brown .......... X696-4
86 .......... vacant
88 .......... vacant
88A .......... 002U-1 .......... red .......... F25-E
W42 — K57
Relay for battery cut-off switch
1 (85) .......... 310UD-4 .......... black .......... XGND56
2 (86) .......... 322UA-1 .......... red .......... K24/2-A
3 (30) .......... 310UC-1 .......... black .......... XGND56
4 (87A) .......... 266U-1 .......... light blue .......... X696-3
5 (87) .......... vacant
W42 — X696
10-pin plug for switch of battery cut-off switch
1 .......... 310UB-1 .......... black .......... XGND56
2 .......... 410U-1 .......... black .......... K56-85A
3 .......... 266U-1 .......... light blue .......... K57-4
4 .......... 261U-1 .......... brown .......... K56-85B
5 .......... vacant
6 .......... 982U-1 .......... red .......... F25-A
7 .......... vacant
8 .......... vacant
9 .......... vacant
10 .......... vacant
ELECTRONIC CONTROL UNITS (g) by Belgreen v2.0
W42 — XGND56
Ground point
(-) .......... 310UB-1 .......... black .......... X696-1
(-) .......... 310UC-1 .......... black .......... K57-3
(-) .......... 310UD-4 .......... black .......... K57-1
Section 245 - ELECTRONIC CONTROL UNITS

Table of contents
Group 05 - Operation and General Information on Diagnostics ....................................................... 1
Reference 245-05-000, Operation and General Information on Diagnostics - Summary of References
....................................................................................................................................................... 1
Special Tools ......................................................................................................................................... 1
Dealer/service level .............................................................................................................................. 3
Canceling or completing the program mode ...................................................................................... 13
Instrument unit adjustment ................................................................................................................ 24
Reference 245-05-005, Driving in the Diagnostic Mode ..................................................................... 29
Reference 245-05-004, Electronic Control Units - Summary of Addresses ......................................... 29
Reference 245-05-010, BCU - Basic Control Unit - Summary of Addresses ........................................ 30
Reference 245-05-011, BIF - Basic Informator - Summary of Addresses ............................................ 34
Reference 245-05-012, EPC - Controller for PowrQuad Plus Transmission - Summary of Addresses
..................................................................................................................................................... 36
Reference 245-05-013, PRF - Performance Monitor - Summary of Addresses .................................... 38
Reference 245-05-006, Approved Software for Control Units ............................................................. 38
Reference 245-05-007, Electronic Control Units - Location and Allocation ......................................... 40
Group 20 - Data BUS Systems, Theory of Operation ........................................................................ 41
Reference 245-20-001, Data BUS Systems - Summary of References ............................................... 41
Reference 245-20-002, Data-BUS Systems ........................................................................................ 41
Reference 245-20-003, Operation of the CAN BUS System ................................................................ 42
Reference 245-20-011, CAN BUS Systems on Tractors with PowrQuad Transmission ........................ 45
Reference 245-20-012, CAN BUS Systems on Tractors with PowrQuad Plus Transmission ................ 46
Group BCU - BCU - Basic Control Unit ................................................................................................. 48
Address BCU248 - Tractor serial number ............................................................................................ 48
Address BCU185 - Input address for volume of lift cylinder ............................................................... 66
Reference 245-BCU-100, Preliminary Test of BCU Circuit ................................................................... 77
Operational test of rear PTO remote control on l.h. fender ................................................................ 78
Operational test on rear PTO remote control on r.h. fender ............................................................... 81
Operational test on rear PTO switch (S21) ......................................................................................... 84
Operational test for rear PTO preselector switch (S45) ...................................................................... 87
Operational test for front PTO switch (S06) ........................................................................................ 89
Operational test on front-wheel drive switch (S63) ............................................................................ 92
Operational test on front-wheel drive switch (S05) ............................................................................ 95
Operational test for differential lock switch (S22) .............................................................................. 98
Operational test for hazard warning light switch (S62) .................................................................... 100
Operational test for hazard warning light switch (S106) .................................................................. 103
Operational test for turn signal switch (S08) .................................................................................... 105
Operational test of wheel speed sending unit (B35) ......................................................................... 107
Operational test for record/save switch (S95) .................................................................................. 110
Operational test for HMS program switch (S100) ............................................................................. 113
Operational test for handbrake switch (B37) .................................................................................... 115
Operational test for engine speed sender (B01) ............................................................................... 117
Operational test of rear PTO speed sender (B06): ............................................................................ 120
Circuit/harness test for alternator relay (K07/6) ............................................................................... 123
Operational test on sensitivity potentiometer (B26) ........................................................................ 125
Operational test on depth-setting potentiometer (B27) ................................................................... 128
Operational test for position sensor (B21) ........................................................................................ 131
Operational test on rate-of-drop potentiometer (B27) ...................................................................... 134
Operational test on raise-limit potentiometer (B27) ......................................................................... 137
Operational test for rapid-raise switch (S24) .................................................................................... 140
Circuit/harness test for rear PTO solenoid valve (Y04) ..................................................................... 143
Circuit/harness test for front-wheel drive solenoid valve (Y03) ........................................................ 148
Circuit/harness test for differential lock solenoid valve (Y05) ........................................................... 153
Circuit/harness test for front PTO solenoid valve (Y01) .................................................................... 158
Operational test on r.h. draft sensor (B19) ....................................................................................... 163
Operational test for right remote control switch (S23) ..................................................................... 166
Operational test for left remote control switch (S68) ....................................................................... 169
Circuit/harness test for rockshaft control stepper motor (M08) ........................................................ 172
Operational test for HMS switch (S43) .............................................................................................. 174
Operational test on brake pedal switch (B112) ................................................................................ 177
Operational test on seat switch (S40) .............................................................................................. 180
Operational test on reverse drive lever (A47) .................................................................................. 183
Operational test on reverse drive lever (A68/1) ............................................................................... 186
Operational test for turn signal switch (S08) .................................................................................... 190
Reference 245-BCU-200, Theory of Operation (Basic Functions) ...................................................... 192
Reference 245-BCU-201, Theory of Operation (Hitch Control) ......................................................... 195
Group BIF - BIF - Basic Informator .................................................................................................... 197
Address BIF248 - Tractor serial number ........................................................................................... 197
Reference 245-BIF-100, Preliminary Test of BIF Circuit .................................................................... 201
Operational test for fuel gauge sender (B03) ................................................................................... 202
Operational test for sender (B08) of coolant temperature gauge ..................................................... 205
Operational test for hydraulic oil temperature sender (B60) ............................................................ 208
Operational test for engine oil pressure sender (B04) ...................................................................... 211
Operational test for transmission oil pressure sender (B31) ............................................................ 214
Operational test for sender (B02) of air cleaner restriction warning light ........................................ 217
Alternator D+ voltage, operational test ........................................................................................... 220
Sender (B07; oil filter restriction indicator light) .............................................................................. 222
Operational test for hydraulic oil filter, restriction warning switch (B111) ....................................... 225
Reference 245-BIF-200, Theory of Operation ................................................................................... 228
Group EPC - EPC - Control Unit for PowrQuad Plus Transmission ................................................ 230
Address EPC248 - Input address, serial number of current tractor ................................................... 230
Reference 245-EPC-002, EPC – Fine-Tuning ...................................................................................... 244
Reference 245-EPC-100, Test Procedure in the Event of Occasional EPC Circuit Problems .............. 246
Operational test on enable proportional solenoid valve (Y38) .......................................................... 248
Operational test on circuit of forward solenoid valve (Y33) .............................................................. 251
Operational test on circuit of reverse solenoid valve (Y36) .............................................................. 255
Operational test for solenoid valve K1 (Y40) circuit .......................................................................... 259
Operational test for circuit of solenoid valve K2 (Y39) ..................................................................... 263
Operational test for circuit of solenoid valve K3 (Y32) ..................................................................... 267
Operational test on transmission speed sender (B104) .................................................................... 271
Enable pressure sender (B105), operational test ............................................................................. 274
Operational test on clutch pedal switch (S72) .................................................................................. 278
Clutch pedal potentiometer (B65), operational test ......................................................................... 281
Upshift/downshift switch (S81), operational test .............................................................................. 285
Transmission enable relay (K07/4), operational test ........................................................................ 289
Circuit test for Come-Home plug (K08/4) .......................................................................................... 293
Operational test on reverse drive lever (A47) .................................................................................. 295
Park switch (S114), operational test ................................................................................................. 300
Solenoid valve 1 circuit (Y62), operational test ................................................................................ 306
Solenoid valve 2 circuit (Y63), operational test ................................................................................ 310
Reference 245-EPC-200, Theory of Operation .................................................................................. 318
Group PRF - PRF - Performance Monitor .......................................................................................... 321

Address PRF248 - Serial number of current tractor .......................................................................... 321
Reference 245-PRF-011, Calibration of Ground Speed Sensor (Radar) ............................................. 324
Reference 245-PRF-021, Setting Wheel Slip Back to Zero ................................................................ 326
Operational test of performance monitor ......................................................................................... 327
Reference 245-PRF-200, Theory of Operation .................................................................................. 329
Section 245 - ELECTRONIC CONTROL UNITS Group 05: Operation and General Information on Diagnostics
Group 05 - Operation and General Information on Diagnostics

Reference 245-05-000, Operation and General Information on
Diagnostics - Summary of References
Reference 245-05-001 , General Operation and Entering the Program Mode
Reference 245-05-002 , Accessing the Addresses and Diagnostic Trouble Codes
Reference 245-05-009 , Adjusting the Instrument Unit on Tractors with PowrQuad Transmission
Reference 245-05-005 , Driving in the Diagnostic Mode
Reference 245-05-004 , Electronic Control Units - Summary of Addresses
Reference 245-05-010 , BCU - Basic Control Unit - Summary of Addresses
Reference 245-05-011 , BIF - Basic Informator - Summary of Addresses
Reference 245-05-012 , EPC - Controller for PowrQuad Plus Transmission - Summary of Addresses
Reference 245-05-013 , PRF - Performance Monitor - Summary of Addresses
Reference 245-05-006 , Approved Software for Control Units
Reference 245-05-007 , Electronic Control Units - Location and Allocation
Special Tools
→NOTE:
Tool Catalog (MTC).
[ Performance monitor Available as spare part ]
RE200689
Performance monitor
Calibrating and testing electronic control units.
Test lead
KJD10292
Test lead
Calibrating and testing electronic control units (in conjunction with performance monitor RE200689).
Reference 245-05-001, General Operation and Entering the Program

Mode
LEGEND:
A “Service” button
B “2” button (up)
C “0” button (down)
D “Set/save” button
E “Clear” button
F “5” button
G Address
H1 Information (positions 1 - 5 on display)
Operating the performance monitor
Diagnosis with the performance monitor
General operating instructions
Entering the program mode Press and hold the “Service” button (A)
Selecting control units Press the “2” button (B) or the “0” button (C)
Confirming control units Press the "set/save" button (D)
Leaving the control unit Press the "Clear" button (E)
Selecting addresses (in increments of 1) Press the “2” button (B) or the “0” button (C)
Selecting addresses (in increments of 10) Press the “2” button (B) or the “0” button (C) and hold
Accessing an input address (INP) Press the "5" button (F)
Changing an input address (INP) Press the "set/save" button (D)
Inputting information (data in figures) Press the numbered buttons
Saving information Press the "set/save" button (D)
Canceling a procedure Press the "Clear" button (E)
Starting the calibration process (CAL) See relevant Groups in Section 245
Verifying the calibration value Press the "5" button (F)
Saving calibration See relevant Groups in Section 245
Clearing the diagnostic trouble codes Once “CLR?” has appeared on the display, press the "set/save" button (D)
LEGEND:
G Address
I Input address or calibratable address
Display on a performance monitor
Display on a performance monitor
Display
At first the
[ performance monitor (PRF) If equipped ]

shows “DIA”. Once a control unit has been selected and confirmed, the display changes.
The top row on the display is divided by a colon.
The three figures at the left of the top row show the address (G).
If it is an input address, the display alternates between the address and “INP” (I).
If it is a calibration address, the display alternates between the address and “CAL”.
Information (H1) is shown on the bottom line. If five figures are not enough, the three figures on the right of top row (H2) may
be used as well. The numbers shown (H1 and H2) illustrate the order of the display positions.
Performance monitor used for test purposes
Performance monitor used for test purposes
IMPORTANT:
Service ADVISOR or the performance monitor must be used for test purposes on tractors with PowrQuad
transmission, since no information can be accessed via the basic informator with which these tractors are
equipped.
→NOTE:
The performance monitor used for test purposes functions in the same way as a
[ performance monitor If equipped ]

that is installed permanently.
A performance monitor
[ Performance monitor Available as spare part ]
RE200689
Performance monitor
(A) used for test purposes is connected to service socket (C) via test lead
Test lead
KJD10292
Test lead
(B).
The power supply to the performance monitor can be cut off by disconnecting the test lead at connection (D). This is necessary
because the performance monitor receives its power via the service socket from the battery′s positive terminal and not via the
main (key) switch.
If test instructions ever tell you to switch the main (key) switch on or off, you must at the same time connect or disconnect the
test lead connection.
Panasonic Notebook Type CF-28
Diagnosis with Service ADVISOR:
For information on how to connect Service ADVISOR to the tractor, see installation instructions MHM767 in the “Publications” tab.
Diagnostic trouble codes for guided diagnosis are automatically accessed when the “Connected Diagnostic
Accessing diagnostic trouble codes while connection Trouble Codes” folder is opened at the “Diagnostics” tab.
is live A summary of diagnostic trouble codes can be viewed via “Access Diagnostic Trouble Codes” at the
“Readings” menu or via the “Access Diagnostic Trouble Codes” button at the “Connection - Readings” tab.
Clearing the diagnostic trouble codes Press the “Clear and Refresh” button.
Bringing the diagnostic trouble codes up to date

Switch off ignition and turn it on again after five seconds (re-initiate the control units), then press “Refresh”.
(refresh)
Access the address ( Select individual diagnostic address or identifying address via the main “Connected Data Points” folder or via
[ ROM ROM = Read-only memory address (Read-Only Memory) the folder for the relevant control unit at the “Connection - Readings” tab.
] Select all diagnostic or identification addresses of a controller by opening a basic template (no. 810 or 820) via
) during a Live session. the main “Predefined Readings Templates” folder or via the “Other” folder at the “Connection - Readings” tab.
Access an input address (

Select an individual input address via the main “Data Input Calibrations” folder or via the folder for the
[ INP INP = Input address (Input Address) ]
relevant control unit at the “Connection - Readings” tab.
) during a Live session.
Inputting information (data in figures) Key in the value (in figures) at “Desired Value”.
Saving information Press “Send”.
Select an individual input address via the main “Connected Data Points” folder or via the folder for the
Accessing an input address ( relevant control unit at the “Connection - Readings” tab.
[ ROM ROM = Read-only memory address (Read-Only Memory)
]
Select all input addresses of a controller by opening a basic template with an 800 number in the “Other”
) category via the main “Predefined Readings Templates” folder or via the “Other” folder at the “Connection -
Readings” tab.
Starting the calibration process (

Calibrations can be selected and performed via the main “Inter-active Calibrations” folder or via the folder for
[ CAL CAL = Calibration address (Calibration Address) ]
the relevant control unit at the “Calibrations” tab.
)
New software can be downloaded onto any of the programmable control units via the “Program Controller”
tab:
Reprogramming the controller (install new software
→NOTE:
on the controller)
When reprogramming electronic control units, always comply with the relevant instructions (e.g.
installation instructions, DTAC or PIP).
LEGEND:
A Roll-mode switch
B Turn signal lever
C Hazard warning light switch
1 Right-hand turn signal
2 Left-hand turn signal
Operating the digital display
Diagnosis with the digital display (on tractors with PowrQuad Plus transmission only)
Tractor with digital display, without HMS II Tractor with digital display and HMS II
Entering the program mode Pull and hold the roll mode switch (A)
Move turn-signal lever (B) once in direction 1 or 2, Move turn-signal lever (B) twice in brief succession in
Selecting control units
and pull it back again direction 1 or 2, and pull it back again
Confirming control units Switch the hazard warning light switch (C) on and off
Leaving the control unit Pull turn-signal lever (B) towards the steering wheel (flash-to-pass) for at least 2 seconds
Selecting addresses (in increments of 1)
Selecting addresses (in increments of 10) Move turn-signal lever (B) to 1 or 2, and leave it there
Selecting addresses (interrupting an increment of

Switch off turn signal lever (B)
10)
Accessing input addresses (INP) Pull turn signal lever (B) briefly towards the steering wheel (flash-to-pass)
Changing an input address (INP) Switch the hazard warning light switch (C) on and off
Selecting information (data in figures)
Switching from one item of information to the

Pull turn signal lever (B) briefly towards the steering wheel (flash-to-pass)
next (data in figures)
Saving information Switch the hazard warning light switch (C) on and off
Canceling a procedure Pull turn-signal lever (B) towards the steering wheel (flash-to-pass) for at least 2 seconds
Starting the calibration process (CAL) See relevant Groups in Section 245
Verifying the calibration value Pull turn signal lever (B) briefly towards the steering wheel (flash-to-pass)
Saving calibration See relevant Groups in Section 245
Clearing the diagnostic trouble codes Once “CLR?” has appeared on the display, switch the hazard warning light switch on and off
LEGEND:
C Address
D1 Information (positions 1 - 4 on display)
D2 Information (positions 5 - 7 on display)
D3 Information (position 8 on display)
F Input address or calibratable address
Dual Gauge II
Dual Gauge II
Dual Gauge II
At first the digital display shows “DIA”. Once a control unit has been selected and confirmed, the display changes.
The left end of the bottom line (C) on the digital display indicates the address.
If it is an input address, the display alternates between the address and “INP” (F).
If it is a calibration address, the display alternates between the address and “CAL”.
Information is shown in the middle line (D1). If four figures are not enough, the three figures in the top row (D2) and one figure
in the bottom row (D3) may be used as well. A flashing "1" to the right of display position 8 does not serve any meaningful
function. The numbers shown (D1, D2 and D3) illustrate the order of the display positions.
Entering the program mode
→NOTE:
Comply with the safety instructions in Section 210, Group 05.
( 1 ) Selecting the entry level
Action:
There are different entry levels for the diagnosis.
Customer level:
On this level, the diagnostic trouble codes and the addresses that are relevant to the customer are displayed.
Dealer and service level:

On this level, the diagnostic trouble codes and all addresses are displayed.
Result:
YES: GO TO: Customer level .
YES: GO TO: Dealer/service level .
Customer level
( 1 ) Entering program mode via the performance monitor
Action:
Performance monitor - entering program mode
The main (key) switch must be at “IGN” for longer than 8 seconds.
Hold the “Service” button until the display changes to “DIA ”.
→NOTE:
If a performance monitor is used for test purposes:

If test instructions ever tell you to switch the main (key) switch to “IGN” or “OFF”, you must at the same
time connect or disconnect the test lead connection.
Result:
YES:GO TO: Reference 245-05-002 , Accessing Addresses and Diagnostic Trouble Codes.
NO:Refer to the corresponding diagnostic manual.
( 2 ) Entering program mode using digital display (on tractors with PowrQuad Plus transmission only)
Action:
Digital display - entering program mode
The main (key) switch must be at “IGN” for longer than 4 seconds.
Actuate the roll-mode switch (RMS) (A), and hold it.
Hold RMS until the display changes to “DIA ”.
Result:
Dealer/service level
( 1 ) Entering program mode via the performance monitor
Action:
Turn the key switch to “OFF”.
Switch the main (key) switch to “IGN” and within 8 seconds press and hold the “Service” button.
→NOTE:
If the “Service” button is not pressed within 8 seconds, the customer level is automatically selected.
→NOTE:
The performance monitor automatically performs a self test and a bulb check (this takes about 2
seconds).
→NOTE:

Result:
( 2 ) Entering program mode by using the performance monitor with engine running
Action:
Start the engine.
Within 8 seconds press and hold the “Service” button.
→NOTE:
If the “Service” button is not pressed within 8 seconds, the customer level is automatically selected.
→NOTE:
The performance monitor automatically performs a self test and a bulb check (this takes about 2
seconds).
→NOTE:
Depending on the test to be performed, run the engine at 1200 rpm.

These tests will be specially identified.
→NOTE:

Result:
( 3 ) Entering program mode using digital display (on tractors with PowrQuad Plus transmission only)
Action:
Switch the main (key) switch to “IGN” and within 1 second (during the bulb check), press and hold the roll mode switch (RMS)
(A).
→NOTE:
If the RMS is pressed before or after the bulb check, the customer level is automatically selected.
Result:
( 4 ) Entering program mode using digital display with engine running (on tractors with PowrQuad Plus
transmission only)
Action:
Start the engine.
Wait until the bulb check starts.
As soon as the bulb check is active, press and hold the roll mode switch (RMS).
→NOTE:
If the RMS is pressed before or after the bulb check, the customer level is automatically selected.
→NOTE:
Depending on the test to be performed, run the engine at 1200 rpm.

These tests will be specially identified.
Result:
Reference 245-05-002, Accessing the Addresses and Diagnostic Trouble

Codes
Every control unit monitors certain electrical circuits within the network of circuits for which it is responsible and stores the
relevant diagnostic trouble code if there is a malfunction (error) or if the operator makes a mistake. However, not all of the
diagnostic trouble codes indicate a current problem, since most of the circuits are monitored only after or during activation
(function activated). To make sure that the diagnostic trouble code you are troubleshooting is “active”, you should proceed as
follows:
[1] - General procedure for dealing with diagnostic trouble codes:
Access diagnostic trouble codes

Note and clear the diagnostic trouble code(s)
Carry out an operational test (activate the circuit affected) or test drive the tractor
Switch off ignition and turn it on again after five seconds (re-initiate the control units)
Access the diagnostic trouble codes again and process them
If it is not possible to (re-)produce a relevant diagnostic code by means of a functional check and the problem is still
present in the circuit, deal with the codes you recorded earlier.
[2] - Procedure for dealing with diagnostic trouble codes using Service ADVISOR:
Access diagnostic trouble codes via the “Diagnostic” tab

“Active” diagnostic trouble codes take priority
If no "ACTIVE" diagnostic trouble codes are present:
Delete diagnostic trouble code(s)
Carry out an operational test (activate the circuit affected) or test drive the tractor
Switch off ignition and turn it on again after five seconds (re-initiate the control units)
If no active diagnostic trouble codes are present, deal with the "SAVED" codes
If it is not possible to (re-)produce a relevant diagnostic trouble code by means of a functional check or test-drive,
and the circuit problem persists, the cleared diagnostic trouble codes must be checked; if the codes are associated
with the problem on the tractor, they must be processed. See “ Processing cleared diagnostic trouble codes using
Service ADVISOR ”.
[3] - Processing cleared diagnostic trouble codes using Service ADVISOR:
→NOTE:
Cleared diagnostic trouble codes should only be dealt with if it is not possible to (re-)produce the
problem on the tractor (no active or saved codes are present after a functional test/test drive has been
carried out) and when the description of the diagnostic trouble code can be associated with the tractor
problem.
Every time a diagnostic trouble code is accessed, it is saved in Service ADVISOR in the “Readings Logs” of the job that is being
processed. Before it is cleared, the diagnostic trouble code status of the tractor can be accessed via the “Sessions” menu or
“Logs”.
[4] - Status of diagnostic trouble codes in Service ADVISOR:
Status: “ACTIVE” (priority 1):

Diagnostic trouble code cannot be cleared.
Current problem with the tractor.
Status: "SAVED" (priority 2):
Diagnostic trouble code can be cleared
Problem is presently not recognized by the control unit (e.g.: solenoid valve malfunction, switch or circuit not
activated at the moment).
Accessing the diagnostic trouble codes of all control units (ALL mode)
( 1 ) Accessing the ALL mode
Action:
Before entering the program mode, see Reference 245-05-001 , General Operation and Entering the Program Mode.
Performance monitor:
Press the “2” button or the “0” button.
Digital display: (on tractors with PowrQuad Plus transmission only)
Move the turn signal lever up or down (to positions for left or right turn signals).
Display:
- - - : ALL
Result:
YES:Entering the ALL-mode, GO TO: 2 .
( 2 ) Entering the ALL-mode
Action:
Press the "set/save" button.
Switch the hazard warning light switch on/off.
Display:
000 : ALL
Result:
YES:Checking the individual control units, GO TO: 3 .
YES:Exit the ALL mode, GO TO: 7 .
YES: GO TO: Canceling or completing the program mode .
( 3 ) Checking the individual control units
Action:
Display:
The first control unit appears on the display
e.g.:BCU : NONE
or
e.g.:BCU : CODE
Result:
YES:If display shows: “NONE”, GO TO: 4 .
NO:If display shows: “CODE”, GO TO: 5 .
( 4 ) No diagnostic trouble codes are stored (NONE)
Action:
The next control unit appears on the display.
The next control unit appears on the display.
Result:
YES:Check the next control unit, GO TO: 3 .
YES: GO TO: Accessing and confirming a control unit .
( 5 ) Diagnostic trouble codes are stored (CODE)
Action:
Display:
The first diagnostic trouble code appears on the display.

For an explanation of the diagnostic trouble codes, refer to the Diagnostic Manual, Section 211.
Press the "2" button.
Move the turn signal lever up.

Display:
The next diagnostic trouble code appears on the display.
Repeat this procedure until the display reads: ”CLR? ”
Result:
YES:Clear the diagnostic trouble codes, GO TO: 6 .
( 6 ) Clearing the diagnostic trouble codes
Action:
When “CLR?” appears on the display, press the set/save button.
When “CLR?” appears on the display, switch the hazard warning light switch on/off.
Display:
DONE
Result:
YES:Check the next control unit, GO TO: 3 .
( 7 ) Leave the ALL mode
Action:
Press the "Clear" button.
Pull the turn signal lever (flash-to-pass) towards the steering wheel for at least 2 seconds.
Display:
- - - : ALL
Result:
Accessing and confirming a control unit

( 1 ) Accessing a control unit
Action:
Keep pressing the “2” button until the desired control unit appears on the display.
Repeatedly move the turn signal lever upward (right turn signal position) until the desired control unit is displayed.
Display:
The control units appear on the display.
e.g.:- - - : BCU
→NOTE:
The 01 after the dot on the performance monitor display indicates how many times the control unit is
located on the BUS lines.
Abbreviations used in display
Abbreviations used in display
Display Meaning
BCU (Basic Control Unit / Hitch Control Unit) Basic control and hitch control unit
BIF (Basic Informator) Instrument unit
EPC (Electronic PowrQuad Controller) Control unit for PowrQuad Plus transmission
PRF (Performance Monitor) Performance monitor
DIA (Diagnosis) Diagnostic Procedure
NONE (None) No diagnostic trouble code stored
CODE (Code) Diagnostic trouble code stored
INP (Input) Input
CAL (Calibration) Calibration
EOC (End of Calibration) End of calibration
End (End) End of a sequence of numbers
Err (Error) Error
Result:
YES:Confirm the control unit, GO TO: 2 .
( 2 ) Confirming the control unit
Action:
Display:
e.g.:000 : BCU.01
Result:
YES:Changing the control units, GO TO: 3 .
YES: GO TO: Accessing diagnostic trouble codes of the individual control units .
YES: GO TO: Accessing addresses .
( 3 ) Changing the control unit
Action:
Display:
e.g.:- - - : BCU
Result:
YES:Access diagnostic trouble codes, GO TO: 1 .
Access diagnostic trouble codes of the individual control units

( 1 ) Accessing diagnostic trouble codes
Action:
Move the turn signal lever up (right turn signal position).
Display:
The display indicates whether diagnostic trouble codes have been saved in the selected control unit.
e.g.:BCU : NONE
or
e.g.:BCU : CODE
Result:
YES:If display shows: “NONE”, GO TO: 2 .
NO:If display shows: “CODE”, GO TO: 3 .
( 2 ) No diagnostic trouble codes are stored (NONE)
Action:
Move the turn signal lever up (right turn signal position).
Result:
( 3 ) Diagnostic trouble codes are stored (CODE)
Action:
Display:
The first diagnostic trouble code appears on the display.

For an explanation of the diagnostic trouble codes, refer to the Diagnostic Manual, Section 211.
Move the turn signal lever up.
Display:
The next diagnostic trouble code appears on the display.
Repeat this procedure until the display reads: ”CLR? ”
Result:
YES:Clear the diagnostic trouble codes, GO TO: 4 .
( 4 ) Clearing the diagnostic trouble codes
Action:
When “CLR?” appears on the display, press the set/save button.
When “CLR?” appears on the display, switch the hazard warning light switch on/off.
Display:
DONE
Result:
Accessing addresses
( 1 ) Selecting the desired address
Action:
To select the desired address from the address list, see Reference 245-05-004 , Electronic Control Units, Summary of
Addresses.
There are different types of addresses.
Display addresses: These addresses are only used to display information or for diagnostic purposes.
Input addresses: These are used to configure the control unit for the appropriate tractor model and installed accessories.
If it is an input address, this is indicated by “INP” in the display.
If it is an calibration address, this is indicated by “CAL” in the display.
Result:
YES:If it is a display address, GO TO: 2 .
YES:If it is an input address, GO TO: 3 .
( 2 ) Accessing addresses
Action:
Keep pressing the “2” button or the “0” button until the desired address appears.
Move the turn signal lever up or down (to positions for left or right turn signals) until the desired address appears.
Display:
The address appears in the display.
Service ADVISOR:
Select individual diagnostic address or identifying address via the main “Connected Data Points” folder or via the folder for the
relevant control unit at the “Connection - Readings” tab.
Select all diagnostic or identification addresses of a controller by opening a basic template (no. 810 or 820) via the main
“Predefined Readings Templates” folder or via the “Other” folder at the “Connection - Readings” tab.
Result:
( 3 ) Accessing input addresses
Action:
Keep pressing the “2” button or the “0” button until the desired input address appears.
Move the turn signal lever up or down (to positions for left or right turn signals) until the desired input address appears.
Display:
The input address appears in the display. Additionally “INP ” or “CAL ” is displayed.
Service ADVISOR:
Procedure
1. Select an individual input address via the main “Data Input Calibrations” folder or via the folder for the relevant control
unit at the “Connection - Readings” tab.
2. Key in the value (in figures) at “Desired Value”.
3. To save the desired value, press “Send”.
Result:
YES:Change input address, GO TO: 4
( 4 ) Change input address
Action:
Display:
All the display positions in the input address start to flash.
Result:
YES:Select information (data in figures), GO TO: 5
( 5 ) Selecting information (data in figures)
Action:
Enter the numerical data directly via the number keys.
After every input, the display automatically jumps to the next display position. All the display positions in the input address
flash during input.
To save this information, press the "set/save" key.
Move the turn signal lever up or down (to positions for left or right turn signals) until the desired numerical data appears.
Pull the turn signal lever (flash-to-pass) briefly towards the steering wheel.
The next display position starts to flash.
Continue this procedure until all positions display the correct value.
To save this information, turn the hazard warning light switch on/off.
Display:
The display positions on the display stop flashing.
Result:
YES: GO TO: Canceling or completing the program mode
Canceling or completing the program mode

( 1 ) Canceling the program mode
Action:
→NOTE:
Diagnosis, input or calibration can be canceled at any time. However, if any data has been changed but
not stored prior to ending input or calibration, these changes are lost.
Result:
YES:Input or calibration procedure is canceled. The original data or calibration values still apply.
( 2 ) Completing the program mode
Action:
→NOTE:
Diagnosis, input or calibration is completed when a procedure (diagnosis, input or calibration) has come
to an end and the data has been stored in the memory.
Keep pulling the turn signal lever (flash-to-pass) towards the steering wheel until the display shows the normal operating
mode.
or
Turn key switch off.
→NOTE:
Before you switch the main (key) switch on again, wait at least 5 seconds while an exchange of data
takes place between the control units.
Result:
YES:The control unit is now in its normal operating mode.
Reference 245-05-009, Adjusting the Instrument Unit on Tractors with

PowrQuad Transmission
In order for the instrument unit to give correct readings, you must key in the rolling radius for the size of tires used on the
tractor, the number of impulses per axle revolution, the creeper speed display, the impulses per engine revolution, the
impulses per rear PTO revolution, the units of measurement used in the display and the code number of the coolant
temperature sender.
Instrument unit adjustment

( 1 ) Commencing adjustment procedure
Action:
Access addressBCU038 (Basic functions, indicator light test).
Display:
0001
Change the figure from 0001 to 0000.
Display:
0000
Result:
YES: GO TO: 2
( 2 ) Check/alter rolling radius
Action:
Turn on the key switch.
After 10 seconds, the hour meter jumps to the figure for the current rolling radius (a flashing figure).
IMPORTANT:
If a number other than the one specified is displayed or keyed in, this will cause the ground speed display
to give a false reading.
Display:
e.g.:INP0 740.0
Table for adjusting the rolling radius
Rolling radius calibration table (5620 to 5820 tractors)
Tire size Input, address BCU056
13.6R38 00740.0
340/85R38 00740.0
12.4R36 00690.0
320/85R36 00690.0
540/65R34 00745.0
480/70R34 00745.0
16.9R34 00745.0
420/85R34 00745.0
540/65R30 00695.0
480/70R30 00695.0
16.9R30 00695.0
420/85R30 00695.0
14.9R30 00665.0
380/85R30 00665.0
Actuating the turn signal switch allows the displayed value to be changed.
L.h. turn signal = value decreases automatically.
R.h. turn signal = value increases automatically.
Switch off turn signal to stop the value from changing.
Actuate the differential lock switch.
The display stops flashing and shows the new value for one second.
The display jumps to the flashing value that represents impulses per axle revolution.
Result:
YES: GO TO: 3
( 3 ) Check/alter the impulses per axle revolution
Action:
IMPORTANT:
→NOTE:
For the calibration it is necessary to key in the transmission ratio of the front wheel drive gear pair fitted.
This value can be found on the transmission serial number plate. For “Location of transmission serial
number plate”, refer to the relevant operator′s manual.
Transmission ratio of 1.625: Input = 1370
Display:
e.g.:INP1 1370
Actuate the differential lock switch twice.
The display jumps to the flashing value that represents the creeper speed display.
Result:
YES: GO TO: 4
( 4 ) Check/alter the creeper speed display
Action:
IMPORTANT:
Display:
INP2 0
The display jumps to the flashing value that represents impulses per engine revolution.
Result:
YES: GO TO: 5
( 5 ) Check/alter the impulses per engine revolution
Action:
IMPORTANT:
If a number other than the one specified is displayed or keyed in, this will cause the rev counter to give a
false reading.
Display:
INP3 30
The display jumps to the flashing value that represents impulses per rear PTO revolution.
Result:
YES: GO TO: 6
( 6 ) Check/alter the impulses per rear PTO revolution
Action:
IMPORTANT:
If a number other than the one specified is displayed or keyed in, this will cause the rear PTO speed
display to give a false reading.
Display:
INP4 40
The display jumps to the flashing value that represents the units of measurement used on the display.
Result:
YES: GO TO: 7
( 7 ) Units of measurement used on the display
Action:
Display:
INP5 0 : Unit of measurement = mph and rpm.
INP5 1 : Unit of measurement = km/h and rpm.
The display jumps to the flashing value that represents code number of the coolant temperature sender.
Result:
YES: GO TO: 8
( 8 ) Check/alter the code for the coolant temperature sending unit
Action:
IMPORTANT:
If a number other than the one specified is displayed or keyed in, this will cause the coolant temperature
display to give a false reading.
Display:
INP6 1
Result:
YES: GO TO: 9
( 9 ) Ending the adjustment procedure
Action:
Access addressBCU038 (Basic functions, indicator light test).
Display:
0000
Change the figure from 0000 to 0001.
Display:
0001
IMPORTANT:
In address BCU038 (basic functions, bulb test) the numeric value must be 0001 otherwise an incorrect
numeric rolling radius value may be stored by actuating the turn signal switch or differential lock switch.
Result:
YES:You can exit the adjustment procedure at any time simply by switching off the key switch. This stores the most recent
numeric value in the memory.
Reference 245-05-005, Driving in the Diagnostic Mode

Entering diagnostic mode using digital display or performance monitor:
Tractors with PowrQuad Plus transmission (Control Unit EPC)
Tractors equipped with EPC for PowrQuad Plus transmission can be driven without any restriction when in diagnostic mode. All
diagnostic addresses available can be displayed on the go. It is possible to drive the tractor in diagnostic mode when in
dealer/service and customer level (see Reference 245-05-001 , General Operation and Entering Program Mode).
Reference 245-05-004, Electronic Control Units - Summary of Addresses

Reference 245-05-010 , BCU - Basic Control Unit - Summary of Addresses
Reference 245-05-011 , BIF - Basic Informator - Summary of Addresses
Reference 245-05-012 , EPC - Controller for PowrQuad Plus Transmission - Summary of Addresses
Reference 245-05-013 , PRF - Performance Monitor - Summary of Addresses
Reference 245-05-010, BCU - Basic Control Unit - Summary of Addresses

Table of BCU addresses
BCU - Basic Control Unit
Addresses
Number Type Description
BEEP = Test address with "beep" signal (Beep Address)

CAL = Calibration address (Calibration Address)
DIA = Diagnostic address (Diagnostic Address)
INP = Input address (Input Address)
NU = Address is not used (Not Used)
ROM = Read-only memory address (Read-Only Memory)
001 --- Diagnostic trouble codes (read or delete any codes that are stored in the memory)
002 BEEP If a switch changes position, a beep sound is heard and the associated address is displayed.
Basic functions, status:

• Engine speed sending unit (B01)
- 01XX = signal present
003 DIA/BEEP • Front PTO speed sending unit (B58)
- 0X1X = signal present
• Sending unit for rear PTO speed (B06)
- 0XX1 = signal present

• Wheel speed sending unit (B35)
004 DIA/BEEP - 001X = signal present
• Ground speed sending unit (radar sensor) (B39)
- 00X1 = signal present

• Left brake switch (B112)
005 DIA/BEEP
• Right brake switch (B112)
• Handbrake switch (B37 )

• Differential lock switch (S22)
006 DIA/BEEP
• Front-wheel drive switch ( S05, with HMS )
• Front-wheel drive switch ( S63, without HMS )

007 DIA/BEEP • Front PTO switch (S06)
• Rear PTO Switch (S21)

008 DIA/BEEP • PTO preselector switch (S45)
• Seat switch (S40)

009 DIA/BEEP • Rear PTO remote control switch on left fender (S44)
• Rear PTO remote control switch on right fender (S121)

• Turn signal switch (S08)
010 DIA/BEEP - Left turn signal light
- Right turn signal light
• Hazard warning light switch ( S62 or S106 )
Basic functions, fuse check:

012 DIA/BEEP • Fuse F04/10 (right turn-signal light)
• Fuse F04/11 (left turn-signal light)
013 NU Display address not used

014 DIA/BEEP • Switch for Headland Management System (HMS II) (S43)
• Record/save switch for Headland Management System (HMS II) (S95)

015 DIA/BEEP
• Program switch for Headland Management System (HMS II) (S100)

017 DIA/BEEP
Reverse drive lever ( A47 , A68/1 orA68/2 )
020 INP Basic functions, input address, sending unit for engine speed / impulses per engine revolution
021 INP Basic functions, input address, sending unit for rear PTO speed / impulses per PTO shaft revolution
022 INP Basic functions, input address, front-wheel drive control function
023 INP Basic functions, input address, sending unit for front PTO speed / impulses per PTO shaft revolution
024 INP Basic functions, input address, units of measurement used in displays
025 INP Basic functions, input address, selection of region
026 INP Basic functions, input address, acoustic signal that accompanies turn signals
Addresses
027 INP Basic functions, input address, front PTO control function
028 INP Basic functions, input address, rear PTO control function
029 INP Basic functions, input address, air brake system control function
030 INP Basic functions, input address, sensor diagnostics
031 INP Basic functions, input address, reverse drive lever control function
032 DIA Basic functions, system voltage, displayed in volts
034 NU Basic functions, input address,BCU034 - input address not used
035 INP Basic functions, input address, adjustment of service intervals
036 ROM Basic functions, time elapsed since last service (in hours)
037 INP Basic functions, input address, configuration of control displays
038 INP Basic functions, input address, indicator light bulb check
039 INP Basic functions, input address, rear PTO remote control switch
040 ROM Basic functions, number of starts
041 INP Basic functions, input address, smooth start-up phase for front PTO
042 INP Basic functions, input address, control function for front PTO modulation
043 INP Basic functions, input address, number of hours of operation
044 NU Basic functions, input address,BCU044 - input address not used
045 INP Basic functions, input address, handbrake control function
046 INP Basic functions, input address, control function for alternator
047 INP Basic functions, input address, parameter of control function for alternator and injection pump
048 INP Basic functions, input address, parameter 1 for front PTO modulation
056 INP Basic functions, input address, rolling radius
058 INP Basic functions, input address, sending unit for wheel speed / pulses per axle revolution
060 INP Basic functions, input address, calibration factor for travel speed (radar)
062 DIA Basic functions, wheel speed in km/h
064 DIA Basic functions, travel speed (radar) in km/h
066 INP Basic functions, input address, mode for HMS II
067 NU Basic functions, for internal processing only
068 INP Basic functions, input address,automatic front-wheel drive shut-off
070 NU Basic functions, input address,automatic differential lock shut-off
072 NU Basic functions, for internal processing only
077 INP Basic functions, input address, tractor configuration
078 INP Basic functions, input address, engine control function
100 NU Hitch, for internal processing only
101 INP Hitch, input address, select/deselect leak-off function of hitch valve
103 DIA/BEEP Hitch, signal voltage of quick withdrawal switch (S24)
104 DIA/BEEP Hitch, signal voltage of left draft sensor (B20)
105 DIA/BEEP Hitch, signal voltage of right draft sensor (B19)
106 DIA/BEEP Hitch, signal voltage of sensitivity potentiometer (B26)
107 DIA/BEEP Hitch, signal voltage of depth setting potentiometer (B27)
108 DIA/BEEP Hitch, signal voltage of position sensor (B21)
Addresses
109 DIA/BEEP Hitch, signal voltage of raise limit potentiometer (B27)
110 DIA/BEEP Hitch, signal voltage of rate-of-drop potentiometer (B27)
Hitch, status:
112 DIA/BEEP
Remote control switch (S68) on left fender, in "raise" position
Hitch, status:
113 DIA/BEEP
Remote control switch (S23) on right fender, in "raise" position
Hitch, status:
114 DIA/BEEP
Remote control switch (S68) on left fender, in "lower" position
Hitch, status:
115 DIA/BEEP
Remote control switch (S23) on right fender, in "lower" position
Hitch, supply voltage:

- of control potentiometer (B27) (depth setting, rate-of-drop, raise limit)
116 DIA - of sensitivity control (B26)
- of draft sensors (B19/B20) and
- of position sensor (B21)
Hitch,
118 INP
Prescribed code numbers, “quick withdrawal” and “hitch dampening”
Hitch,
119 DIA
Current position of stepper motor (in steps)
Hitch,
120 DIA
Percentage of distance raise/lower valve is opened at the current position of the stepper motor
Hitch,
121 ROM
code numbers, amplifying value "quick withdrawal”
122 CAL Hitch, calibration of hitch control
123 --- Hitch, diagnostic trouble codes, any diagnostic trouble codes that are stored during calibration procedure; read or delete.
124
to NU Hitch, for internal processing only
137
138 INP Hitch, input address, leak-off function of hitch valve (adjusting stepper motor steps)
139
144
145 INP Hitch, input address, select/deselect hitch control
146
153
154 INP Hitch, input address, leak-off function of hitch valve (adjusting the timing)
165 INP Hitch, input address, adjusting the raising speed
167 INP Hitch, input address, adjusting the hitch equipment
168
173
174 INP Hitch, input address, index for load control
175
184
185 INP Hitch, input address, index of lift cylinder volume
186
199
227 ROM Part number for boot block program
228 ROM Hitch, software version number
229 ROM EOL parameter part number
230 ROM EOL parameter version number
Addresses
231 ROM Part number of operating system
232 ROM Version number of operating system
233 ROM Software part number
234 ROM Software version number
235 ROM BCU part number
236 ROM BCU serial number
247 INP Input address, model designation of current tractor
248 INP Input address, serial number of current tractor
249 ROM Model designation of original tractor
250 ROM Serial number of original tractor
Reference 245-05-011, BIF - Basic Informator - Summary of Addresses

Table of addresses for Basic Informator (BIF)
BIF - Basic Informator
Addresses
Number Description

Timing signal and status:

• Turn signal switch (S08) ,
005 DIA/BEEP
• Light switch (S09) ,
• Roll-mode switch (RMS) (S32) .
006 DIA/BEEP Electrical starting aid
Indicator light status:

008 DIA/BEEP • High-beam headlights,
• Worklights
Indicator light status:

• 1000 rpm rear PTO speed,
009 DIA/BEEP
• 540E rpm rear PTO speed,
• 540 rpm rear PTO speed
Sending unit status:

• Transmission oil pressure (B31)
012 DIA/BEEP
• Transmission oil restriction (B07) ,
• Air cleaner (B02) .

013 DIA/BEEP • Hydraulic oil filter restriction (B111) ,
• Engine oil pressure (B04) .
014 DIA/BEEP Status of “come-home” feature
015 DIA Transmission oil temperature, displayed in volts
016 DIA Level of fuel in tank, displayed in volts
017 DIA Alternator D+ voltage, displayed in volts
018 DIA Coolant temperature, displayed in volts
022 INP Input address, gear indication on digital display
023 INP Input address, worklight alarm threshold
024 INP Input address, units of measurement used in displays
027 INP Input address, indicator light bulb check
028 INP Input address, clock operation
029 INP Input address, electrical starting aid
031 DIA Level of fuel in tank, displayed in %
032 DIA Battery voltage, displayed in volts
033 DIA Transmission oil temperature, displayed in °C
034 DIA Coolant temperature, displayed in °C
035 INP Input address, instrument lighting brightness
036 INP Input address, selecting the information source for engine oil pressure and coolant temperature
037 INP Input address, ground speed sending unit
038 INP Input address, language selection
039 INP Input address, rear PTO speed display
060 INP Input address, front PTO control function
066 INP Input address, databus control function
BIF - Basic Informator
Addresses
Number Description
231 ROM Part number of operating system
235 ROM Part number of basic informator
236 ROM Serial no. of basic informator
Reference 245-05-012, EPC - Controller for PowrQuad Plus Transmission

- Summary of Addresses
Table of addresses for EPC (control unit for PowrQuad Plus transmission)
EPC - Control Unit for PowrQuad Plus Transmission
Addresses

Test address with “beep” signal

002 DIA/BEEP
If a switch changes position, a beep sound is heard and the associated address is displayed.
003 DIA/BEEP As for address 002, but engine speed, transmission speed and travel speed are NOT taken into consideration

004 DIA/BEEP • Sending unit for engine speed (B01) ,
• Sending unit for transmission speed (B104)
Status:
• Reverse drive lever A47 , A68/1 or A68/2
[ from tractor serial no. XXXXXX ]
- Forward switch
007 DIA/BEEP
- Reverse switch
- Not-neutral switch
- Neutral switch
• Park lock switch (S114)
Switch status:
008 DIA/BEEP • Switch for shifting up a gear (S81) ,
• Switch for shifting down a gear (S81)
Status:
• Clutch switch (S72)
• Internal power supply from proportional valve for enable signal (Y38)
009 DIA/BEEP
• Internal power supply from forward solenoid (Y33) and reverse solenoid (Y36)
• Power supply (ELX), displayed in volts
• Battery voltage
Status:
Clutch switch (S72)
010 DIA/BEEP
Signal voltage:
Clutch pedal potentiometer (B65), channel 1
Status:
Clutch switch (S72)
011 DIA/BEEP
Signal voltage:
Clutch pedal potentiometer (B65), channel 2
Signal voltage:
012 DIA/BEEP • Clutch pedal potentiometer (B65), channel 2
• Clutch pedal potentiometer (B65), channel 1
• Enable pressure sending unit (B105) , display in volts

013 DIA/BEEP
• Enable pressure sending unit (B105) , display in kPa
014 DIA Transmission speed (B104) , displayed in rpm
015 NU Vacant diagnostic address
Prescribed code number, clutch pressure in kPa

021 DIA
Currently measured enable pressure in kPa
026 INP Input address, reverse drive lever, configuration
028 INP Input address, tractor model, configuration
029 INP Input address, Engine Integrated Shifting (EIS), configuration
030 INP Input address, pulses per engine revolution, configuration
033 INP Input address, system pressure, configuration
035 INP Input address, temperature difference where other types of hydraulic oil are used instead of J20C, configuration
036 ROM Hydraulic oil temperature, displayed in °C
037 INP Input address, hydraulic oils used as an alternative to J20C, configuration
038 CAL Calibration address, transmission, calibration procedure
Addresses
039 ROM Display of calibrated values for filling pressure and filling time of the elements
040 INP Input address, Forward clutch, fill pressure in kPa
041 INP Input address, Reverse clutch, fill pressure in kPa
042 INP Input address, Forward clutch, fill time in msec
043 INP Input address, Reverse clutch, fill time in msec
047 INP Input address, automatic deletion of diagnostic trouble codes, configuration
134 INP Input address, pulses at sending unit for transmission speed (B104), configuration
135 INP Input address, transmission functions, activate/de-activate
136 INP Input address, starting with gear engaged, configuration
137 INP Input address, number of gear selection valves, configuration
156 INP Vacant input address
225 ROM Configuration, part number (software)
226 ROM Configuration, version number (software)
227 ROM Part number for boot block program (software)
228 ROM Version number for boot block program (software)
235 ROM Control unit part number
236 ROM Control unit serial number
237 ROM Complete software part number
238 ROM Complete software version number
Reference 245-05-013, PRF - Performance Monitor - Summary of

Addresses
Table of addresses for the performance monitor (PRF)
PRF - Performance Monitor
Addresses

005 DIA CAN-bus voltage to ground CAN- (in volts)
006 DIA CAN-bus voltage to ground CAN+ (in volts)
007 DIA System voltage, displayed in volts
Keypad status:
• First row:
- “Area” button,
- “Implement” button,
- “% slip” button.
010 DIA/BEEP • Second row:
- “Distance covered” button,
- “Area / H” button,
- “Speed” button.
→NOTE:
Keep the "area" button pressed while checking the buttons in the top two rows. This prevents the address from changing.
Keypad status :
• Third row:
- “Width” button,
- “PTO speed” button,
- “Service” button.
011 DIA/BEEP • Fourth row:
- “Background lighting” button,
- “Zero” button,
- “Set/save” button.
→NOTE:
Keep the "width" button pressed while checking the buttons in the bottom two rows. This prevents the address from changing.
Status:
012 DIA/BEEP • Headlight switch (S09),
• Implement switch (X545)
020 INP Input address, databus control function
022 INP Input address, brightness of lighting
023 INP Input address, setting the implement control arrow
060 INP Input address, ground speed sensor
070 INP Input address, automatic deletion of diagnostic trouble codes
102 ROM Established parameter
235 ROM Performance monitor part number
236 ROM Performance monitor serial number
Reference 245-05-006, Approved Software for Control Units
IMPORTANT:
When reprogramming electronic control units, always comply with the relevant instructions (e.g.
installation instructions, DTAC or PIP).
IMPORTANT:
Do NOT reprogram the control unit if the version numbers of the new and current software are identical,
or if the control unit is already programmed with a newer software version.
→NOTE:
New software always includes the properties that were newly introduced with the previous software.
However, not all software versions can be used on every tractor.
→NOTE:
The software for reprogramming is either supplied with the Service ADVISOR data DVD, or else it must be
downloaded from John Deere′s Intranet (John Deere Custom Performance (Software Delivery System)).
→NOTE:
To locate the control units, see ” Reference 245-05-007 , Electronic Control Units - Location and
Allocation”.
For the current summary of software, see MHM982 in PATHWAYS or DTAC.
Section 245 - ELECTRONIC CONTROL UNITS Group 20: Data BUS Systems, Theory of Operation
Reference 245-05-007, Electronic Control Units - Location and Allocation
5020 series
5020 series
5020 series
Control unit 5620 5720 5820
BCU X X X
BIF With PowrQuad Plus transmission only With PowrQuad Plus transmission only With PowrQuad Plus transmission only
PRF [ Optional with PowrQuad Plus transmission only ] [ Optional with PowrQuad Plus transmission only ] [ Optional with PowrQuad Plus transmission only ]
EPC Tractor with PowrQuad Plus transmission Tractor with PowrQuad Plus transmission Tractor with PowrQuad Plus transmission
Group 20 - Data BUS Systems, Theory of Operation

Reference 245-20-001, Data BUS Systems - Summary of References
Reference 245-20-002 , Data-BUS System
Reference 245-20-003 , Operation of the CAN BUS System
Reference 245-20-011 , CAN-BUS Systems on Tractors with PowrQuad Transmission
Reference 245-20-012 , CAN-BUS Systems on Tractors with PowrQuad Plus Transmission
Reference 245-20-002, Data-BUS Systems

Depending on tractor equipment, up to four electronic control units (listed below) are available.
These are:
BCU - Basic control unit / hitch control unit

BIF - Basic informator (instrument unit)
EPC - Control unit for PowrQuad Plus transmission
PRF - Performance monitor
Each of these electronic control units fulfils one or more of the following functions:
- MONITORING the status of in-circuit components (switches, sensors, potentiometers etc.).
- CONTROLLING the functions of an electrical circuit.
- DISPLAYING the circuit/system data.
The electronic control units are connected to each other via a data BUS (CAN
[ CAN (Controller Area Network) ]

-BUS
[ BUS (Binary Unit System) ]
).
The data BUS system forms a communication network for data-sharing.
The lines that link up the elements of a data BUS system are known as communication lines. To protect these lines, they are
surrounded by a live wire and a ground wire. Additionally these lines have been twisted together.
Reference 245-20-003, Operation of the CAN BUS System
CAN BUS Data Frame
Data frame (1)

Transmission of data via the CAN BUS takes place within a data frame. This data frame consists of seven fields that follow on
one from the other.
Start signal (2)

Indicates the start of a data frame.
Identification (3)
In this field, the priority of the message, the sending control unit and the receiving control unit are defined.
Control field (4)

Indicates the size of data field that follows.
Data field (5)

Contains the actual data.
Check field (6)

The control unit receiving a message must identify the check bit in this field. This serves to identify transmission errors.
Confirmation field (7)

Once the control unit has identified the check bit, it returns a confirmation to the sending control unit that the data has been
received without error.
End signal (8)

Indicates the end of the data frame.
Since the control units share the same BUS system, it occurs that several control units try to send data via the communication
lines at the same time. In this case, only the message with the highest priority is transmitted. All other control units cancel the
transmission and wait until the communication lines are available again.
To reduce electromagnetic interference, the communication lines are twisted with a live wire and a ground wire. If an error still
occurs during the transmission, the control unit will detect this error and re-send the message.
The lines involved in the 29-bit CAN BUS system are:

930 screen GND
932 screen+
934 CAN-
935 CAN+
One terminating resistor is located at each end of the communication lines to reduce interference on the CAN BUS. The
terminating resistors are of the same design, however, the passive terminating resistors are connected to 4 lines and the
active terminating resistors are connected to 6 lines. The active terminating resistor supplies additional voltage to the CAN BUS
system.
29-Bit CAN-BUS terminating resistor (6-terminal) in cab wiring harness, for tractors with PowrQuad Plus
transmission (W08)
29-bit CAN-BUS terminating resistor (4-terminal) in cab roof and fan wiring harness (W19)
CAN-BUS system on tractors with PowrQuad Plus transmission
In the 29-Bit CAN-BUS system, the 6-terminal terminating resistor (A62) (A) is located in the cowl on the right-hand side of the
steering column.
The 4-terminal terminating resistor (A61) (B) is located in the cab roof below the right-hand loudspeaker.
For removal of the terminating resistors, see “Replace the Terminating Resistors” , Section 90, Group 05.
29-Bit CAN-BUS terminating resistor in cab wiring harness, for tractors with PowrQuad transmission (W08)
CAN-BUS system on tractors with PowrQuad transmission
The lines involved in the 29-bit CAN BUS system are:

934 CAN-
935 CAN+
In the 29-Bit CAN-BUS system, the terminating resistor (R19) (A) is located behind the service socket.
Reference 245-20-011, CAN BUS Systems on Tractors with PowrQuad

Transmission
CAN-BUS systems on tractors with PowrQuad transmission
Plug layout - CAN-BUS systems on tractors with PowrQuad transmission
Plug layout - CAN-BUS systems on tractors with PowrQuad transmission
Part designation Plug Terminal no. Lead no. Function
X616/2 2A1 934 CAN+ (29-bit)

A64 - BCU control unit
X616/2 2B1 935 CAN- (29-bit)
R19 A 934 CAN+ (29-bit)

R19 - CAN BUS terminating resistor
R19 B 935 CAN- (29-bit)
X400 39 930 CAN shield -

X400 40 932 CAN shield +
X400 - 42-pin plug — Cab roof wiring harness connection point (W08 - W19)
X400 41 934 CAN+ (29-bit)
X400 42 935 CAN- (29-bit)
X571 C 934 CAN+ (29-bit)

X571 - 9-terminal service socket
X571 D 935 CAN- (29-bit)
Reference 245-20-012, CAN BUS Systems on Tractors with PowrQuad

Plus Transmission
CAN-BUS systems on tractors with PowrQuad Plus transmission
Plug layout - CAN-BUS systems on tractors with PowrQuad Plus transmission
Plug layout - CAN-BUS systems on tractors with PowrQuad Plus transmission
X489 21 935 CAN- (29-bit)

A46 - EPC control unit
X489 44 934 CAN+ (29-bit)
X614 B 932 CAN shield +

X614 D 930 CAN shield -
A61 - CAN BUS terminating resistor
X614 E 934 CAN+ (29-bit)
X614 F 935 CAN- (29-bit)
X615 A 994 Voltage supply F05/02

X615 B 932 CAN shield +
X615 C 050 Voltage supply GND
A61 - CAN BUS terminating resistor
X615 D 930 CAN shield -
X615 E 934 CAN+ (29-bit)
X615 F 935 CAN- (29-bit)
X616/2 2A1 934 CAN+ (29-bit)

A64 - BCU control unit
X616/2 2B1 935 CAN- (29-bit)
X26 15 934 CAN+ (29-bit)

P11 - BIF — Basic informator
X26 16 935 CAN- (29-bit)
X486 B 935 CAN- (29-bit)

P15 - PRF — Performance monitor
X486 H 934 CAN+ (29-bit)
Section 245 - ELECTRONIC CONTROL UNITS Group BCU: BCU - Basic Control Unit
X400 39 930 CAN shield -

X400 40 932 CAN shield +
X400 - 42-pin plug — Cab roof wiring harness connection point (W08 - W19)
X400 41 934 CAN+ (29-bit)
X400 42 935 CAN- (29-bit)
X571 C 934 CAN+ (29-bit)

X571 - 9-terminal service socket
X571 D 935 CAN- (29-bit)
Group BCU - BCU - Basic Control Unit

Reference 245-BCU-001, Calibration and Input Addresses of Basic
Functions
( 1 ) Procedure
Action:
Before entering the program mode and accessing the relevant addresses, see Reference 245-05-002 , Accessing the Addresses
and Diagnostic Trouble Codes.
Result:
YES:GO TO: Accessing addresses.
Address BCU020 - Basic functions, engine speed sending unit/impulses

per rev.
( 1 ) AddressBCU020
Action:
All tractor models: Input = 130
Result:
YES:Confirm the input.
NO:Correct the input.
Address BCU021 - Basic functions, rear PTO speed sending

unit/impulses per rev.
( 1 ) AddressBCU021
Action:
Input = 040
Result:
Address BCU022 - Basic functions, front-wheel drive control function

( 1 ) AddressBCU022
Action:
Without front-wheel drive: Input = 0
With front-wheel drive: Input = 1
Result:
Address BCU023 - Basic functions, front PTO speed sending

unit/impulses per rev.
( 1 ) AddressBCU023
Action:
Input for John Deere front PTO = 040
Result:
Address BCU024 - Basic functions, units of measurement used in display

( 1 ) AddressBCU024
Action:
Customary units (mph; ft; etc.): Input = 0
Metric units (km/h, m, etc.): Input = 1
Result:
Address BCU025 - Basic functions, selection of region

( 1 ) AddressBCU025
Action:
North America: Input = 0
Europe: Input = 1
Result:
Address BCU026 - Basic functions, audible indication of turn signal

( 1 ) AddressBCU026
Action:
Turn signal without audible indication: Input = 0
Turn signal with audible indication: Input = 1
Result:
Address BCU027 - Basic functions, front PTO control function

( 1 ) AddressBCU027
Action:
Without front PTO: Input = 0
With front PTO: Input = 1
Result:
Address BCU028 - Basic functions, rear PTO control function

( 1 ) AddressBCU028
Action:
Without rear PTO: Input = 0
With rear PTO: Input = 1
Result:
Address BCU029 - Basic functions, air brake system control function

( 1 ) AddressBCU029
Action:
Without air brake system: Input = 0
With air brake system: Input = 1
Result:
Address BCU030 - Basic functions, sensor diagnostics

( 1 ) AddressBCU030
Action:
Engine speed sending unit
Activate diagnostic procedure: Input = XXX1

[ with inductive sender only ]
De-activate diagnostic procedure: Input = XXX0
[ with Hall-type sender only or if no sender is equipped ]
→NOTE:
X stands for a displayed digit.
Result:
Action:
Wheel speed sending unit
Activate diagnostic procedure: Input = XX1X
De-activate diagnostic procedure: Input = XX0X
→NOTE:
Result:
Action:
Rear PTO speed sending unit
Activate diagnostic procedure: Input = X1XX
De-activate diagnostic procedure: Input = X0XX
→NOTE:
Result:
Action:
Front PTO speed sending unit
Activate diagnostic procedure: Input = 1XXX
De-activate diagnostic procedure: Input = 0XXX
→NOTE:
Result:
Address BCU031 - Basic functions, reverse drive lever control function

( 1 ) AddressBCU031
Action:
Tractors with PowrQuad transmission: Input = 0
Tractors with PowrQuad Plus transmission: Input = 1
Result:
Address BCU034 - vacant input address

( 1 ) Address BCU034
Action:
Result:
Address BCU035 - Basic functions, service interval setting

After the time period (operating hours) elapses, an acoustic signal is heard.
( 1 ) AddressBCU035
Action:
Input = 250
→NOTE:
Input with Service ADVISOR ™ : Key in 2500 for 250.0 hours of operation. The last digit is always the one
to the right of the decimal point.
Result:
Address BCU037 - Basic functions, configuration of control displays

( 1 ) AddressBCU037
Action:
Result:
Address BCU038 - Basic functions, indicator light test

( 1 ) AddressBCU038
Action:
All the indicator lights are powered for 2 seconds: Input = 000
No indicator light test: Input = 001
Result:
Address BCU039 - Basic functions, rear PTO remote control switch

( 1 ) AddressBCU039
Action:
R.h. switch
Not equipped with r.h. switch: Input = X0X
Equipped with r.h. switch: Input = X1X
→NOTE:
Result:
Action:
L.h. switch
Not equipped with l.h. switch: Input = 0XX
Equipped with l.h. switch: Input = 1XX
→NOTE:
Result:
Address BCU041 - Basic functions, smooth start-up phase for front PTO
( 1 ) AddressBCU041
Action:
Smooth start-up phase in seconds: Input = 0004.00 (factory setting)
Smooth start-up phase time values can be entered from 1.5 to 6 seconds in increments of 0.25 seconds.
The time value specified influences the start-up phase until full front PTO speed is reached.
→NOTE:
Front PTO modulation must be switched on at address BCU042.
Result:
Address BCU042 - Basic functions, control function for front PTO

modulation
( 1 ) AddressBCU042
Action:
Smooth start-up phase of front PTO disabled via modulation. Input = 0
Smooth start-up phase of front PTO enabled via modulation: Input = 1
→NOTE:
Activation delay must be enabled in address BCU046.
→NOTE:
Smooth start-up is only possible if the front PTO is equipped with a proportional valve. With standard
solenoid valves the front PTO will not operate when smooth start-up is activated.
Result:
Address BCU043 - Basic functions, number of operating hours

( 1 ) AddressBCU043
Action:
Input XXXXX.X
→NOTE:
→NOTE:
Modifications can only be carried out during the first 25 hours of operation.
→NOTE:
Input with Service ADVISOR ™ : Key in 5000 for 500.0 hours of operation. The last digit is always the one
to the right of the decimal point.
Result:
Address BCU044 - vacant input address

( 1 ) BCU044
Action:
Result:
Address BCU045 - Basic functions, handbrake control function

( 1 ) AddressBCU045
Action:
Result:
Address BCU046 - Basic functions, alternator control function

With activation delay enabled, the alternator is only switched on at an engine speed of 800 rpm (depending on setting at
address BCU047).
( 1 ) AddressBCU046
Action:
Activation delay off: Input = 0
Activation delay on: Input = 1
Result:
Address BCU047 - Basic functions, parameter of control function for

alternator and injection pump
The parameter influences the rate at which fuel is injected by the injection pump, and the point in time at which it is injected.
In addition, the alternator is not switched on until a certain engine speed has been reached.
( 1 ) AddressBCU047
Action:
Input = 0800 (standard value)
Engine speeds between 500 and 1000 rpm can be entered in increments of 50 rpm.
→NOTE:
Activation delay must be enabled in address BCU046.
Result:
Address BCU048 - Basic functions, parameter 1 for front PTO

modulation
( 1 ) AddressBCU048
Action:
Level 1 of pulse width modulation: Input = 0033 (factory setting)

Values between 5 and 95% of pulse width modulation (PWM) level can be entered.
Parameters for modulation
LEGEND:
A Short start-up phase
B Factory setting
C Long start-up phase
→NOTE:
The input value must be less than the value at address BCU049. If input value needs to be increased, the
pulse width modulation level at address BCU049 must be increased first.
Result:

modulation
( 1 ) AddressBCU049
Action:
LEGEND:
B Factory setting
→NOTE:
The input value must be less than the value at address BCU050 and more than the value at address
BCU048. If input value needs to be increased, the pulse width modulation level at address BCU050 must
be increased first.
Result:

modulation
( 1 ) AddressBCU050
Action:
LEGEND:
B Factory setting
→NOTE:
The input value must be less than the value at address BCU052 and more than the value at address
BCU049. If input value needs to be increased, the pulse width modulation level at address BCU052 must
be increased first.
Result:

modulation
( 1 ) AddressBCU051
Action:
LEGEND:
B Factory setting
→NOTE:
An input value of 60% of pulse width modulation is recommended, and it should not be exceeded to avoid
malfunctions.
Result:

modulation
( 1 ) AddressBCU052
Action:
LEGEND:
B Factory setting
→NOTE:
An input value of 60% of pulse width modulation is recommended, and it should not be exceeded to avoid
malfunctions. If input value needs to be decreased, the pulse width modulation level at address BCU050
must be decreased first.
Result:
Address BCU056 - Basic functions, rolling radius

( 1 ) AddressBCU056
Action:
Input = 00XXX.0 (see table)
→NOTE:
→NOTE:
Input with Service ADVISOR ™ : Key in 7400 for 740.0 mm. The last digit is always the one to the right of
the decimal point.
13.6R38 00740.0
340/85R38 00740.0
12.4R36 00690.0
320/85R36 00690.0
540/65R34 00745.0
480/70R34 00745.0
16.9R34 00745.0
420/85R34 00745.0
540/65R30 00695.0
480/70R30 00695.0
16.9R30 00695.0
420/85R30 00695.0
14.9R30 00665.0
380/85R30 00665.0
Result:
Address BCU058 - Basic functions, wheel speed sending unit/impulses

per rev.
( 1 ) AddressBCU058
Action:
→NOTE:
For the calibration it is necessary to key in the transmission ratio of the front wheel drive gear pair fitted.
This value can be found on the transmission serial number plate. For “Location of transmission serial
number plate”, refer to the relevant operator′s manual.
Result:
Address BCU060 - Basic functions, calibration factor for travel speed

(radar)
( 1 ) AddressBCU060
Action:
Input = 5742
Result:
Address BCU066 - Basic functions, mode for HMS II

( 1 ) AddressBCU066
Action:
→NOTE:
This address must be reset every time the BCU is replaced with a new one; reset the address according to
whether the tractor has HMS II or not.
All tractor models without HMS II: Input = 0000
All tractor models with HMS II: Input = 0111
Result:
Address BCU068 - Automatic front-wheel drive shut-off

The front wheel drive is shut off automatically when the speed set at this address is exceeded; it is switched on again when the
speed drops below 2 km/h. This function is only available in conjunction with HMS.
( 1 ) AddressBCU068
Action:
Speed at which the front-wheel drive is shut off: Input = 23 (factory setting)
Result:
Address BCU070 - Automatic disengagement of differential lock

The differential lock is disengaged automatically when the speed set at this address is exceeded.
( 1 ) BCU070
Action:
Speed at which the differential lock is disengaged: Input = 12 (factory setting)
Result:
Address BCU077 - Basic functions, tractor configuration

No input required if not equipped with Engine Control Unit (ECU).
( 1 ) AddressBCU077
Action:
Input = 0000
Result:
Address BCU078 - Basic functions, engine control function

No input required if not equipped with Engine Control Unit (ECU).
( 1 ) AddressBCU078
Action:
Input = 0000
Result:
Address BCU247 - Tractor model designation

( 1 ) AddressBCU247
Action:
e.g.: 5620 tractor: Input = 005620
Result:
Address BCU248 - Tractor serial number

( 1 ) AddressBCU248
Action:
e.g.: Serial number 123456: Input = 123456
Result:
Reference 245-BCU-002, Calibration and Input Addresses of Hitch

Control
→NOTE:
Before accessing the addresses, see Reference 245-05-002 , "Accessing the Addresses and Diagnostic
Trouble Codes".
If the control unit (BCU) is ever replaced with a new one, before you calibrate the hitch control at address BCU122 you must
check and/or enter the specific tractor model data both at “hitch control” input addresses 167, 174 and 185 and at the relevant
“basic function” input addresses.
For "basic function" input addresses, see Reference 245-BCU-001 in this Group.
Address BCU101 - Input address for leak-off function of hitch valve

on/off
→NOTE:
Only activate the leak-off function if it is certain that the oil leakage actually occurs in the hitch valve. If
this is not the case, this function must be de-activated.
Address available from software version no. 521.
See addressBCU234 .
Using this address, the leak-off function is turned on or off. Set the appropriate values at addresses BCU138 and BCU154.
On some hitch valves a small amount of oil leakage into sump is possible. Therefore it may happen that the hitch stops shortly
before the preselected position is reached (especially under heavy load) and the resulting low oil flow leaks off. The position
sensor detects that the desired position is not reached yet and the stepper motor keeps the raise valve open for a few steps.
The result is a permanent audible oil flow. The leak-off function interrupts the power supply to the stepper motor as soon as the
number of steps falls below a certain amount (adjustable at address BCU138) and the hitch position does not change within a
certain time (adjustable at address BCU154).
( 1 ) AddressBCU101
Action:
Leak-off function switched off: Input = 0 (standard value)
Leak-off function switched on: Input = 1
Result:
YES:End of input.
Address BCU122 - Hitch control calibration

Calibrations should be performed if one or more hitch components have been replaced or readjusted, and in the event of
improper operation.
An operator′s error (e.g. “raise” switch pressed instead of “lower” switch) during calibration procedure does not have any
consequences; the calibration can be continued after the correct switch is pressed.
Should a malfunction occur during calibration, “Err” and the relevant diagnostic trouble code are displayed. The diagnostic
codes are stored in address 001 or 123 and displayed again, once the calibration procedure is completed. Calibration can be
canceled or continued at this point. If calibration is continued, the control unit uses the values of a previous calibration that was
completed successfully for the incorrect calibration step. In other circumstances, a standard value is used.
Calibration can be canceled at any time; if a digital display is equipped: Pull the turn signal lever towards the steering wheel
(flash-to-pass) for at least 2 seconds; or, if a performance monitor is equipped: Press the "Clear" button. The values calibrated
up to the abortion are stored.
After the calibration procedure has been completed successfully, all diagnostic trouble codes in address 001 or 123 are
automatically deleted.
CAUTION:
Always engage the park lock when performing tests with the engine running.
CAUTION:
CAUTION:
When testing the hitch, the lift arms pose a risk of injury as they rise. For this reason, stay clear of the
lift arm and draft link areas.
IMPORTANT:
During calibration the pickup hitch lift links, if equipped, must be removed from the lift arms of the hitch.
→NOTE:
Interactive calibration possible with Service ADVISOR
→NOTE:
Hitch responses during calibration are not normal reactions.
→NOTE:
Live with safety:
See “Safety Measures” in Section 210, Group 05.

See 270-15-001 , Safety Measures for Hydraulic Checks.
( 1 ) Preliminary work
Action:
IMPORTANT:
Warm the hydraulic oil to at least 40°C (100°F), see Reference 270-15-010 .
→NOTE:
Keep a notepad and pencil ready to note the figures displayed at the end of calibration.
→NOTE:
Before starting the calibration procedure, measure and note the piston diameter of the lift cylinders. You
will need the piston diameter during calibration.
Fully lower hitch and apply a load of approx. 50 kg (110 lb).
Turn the key switch off.
Hitch Controls
Sensitivity control
Set hitch controls:
Depth stop (E) adjusted to 9.

Depth control (A) to 0 (not in transport lock position).
Raise limit control (D) fully to the right.
Rate-of-drop control (C) fully to the right.
Sensitivity control (fig. 2) fully to the right.
Raise/lower control switch (B) in neutral.
Result:
YES: GO TO 2
( 2 ) Accessing the input and calibration addresses

Action:
→NOTE:
During calibration, run the engine at 1200 rpm.
Check that addressesBCU167 ,BCU174 andBCU185 have the correct values.
Entering program mode and accessing the relevant address, see Reference 245-05-002 , “Accessing Addresses and Diagnostic
Trouble Codes”.
Result:
YES: GO TO 3
( 3 ) Entering calibration mode; address BCU122
Action:
→NOTE:
If no distinction is made at "Display:” between performance monitor and digital display, the performance
monitor display is always shown.
→NOTE:
XXXXX in "Display:" stands for a variable.
Access calibration addressBCU122 .
Input
Digital display: 000 BCU Performance monitor: 000:BCU.01
Move the turn signal lever up (right turn signal position) until display reads: Keep pressing the “2” button until display reads:
122/CAL: (display alternately reads 122 and CAL)
Result:
YES: GO TO 4
( 4 ) Calibrate volume of lift cylinder
Action:
→NOTE:
Some of the displays are numbered so that they can be identified. With a performance monitor, the
number appears at the end of the top line. With a digital display, the number appears at the beginning of
the bottom line (after "Data:"). In the text below, this number appears in brackets after "Display”.
Input
Digital display: Performance monitor:
Operate the hazard warning light switch (on/off). Press "Save" button.
Display:
122:XXXXX (index, volume of lift cylinder)
Piston diameter or tractor model designation must correspond with the index displayed (XXXXX).
Index table
Tractors: 5620, 5720 and 5820
Piston of lift cylinder, dia. Index displayed
65 mm 00024
70 mm 00052
75 mm 00080
Result:
YES: GO TO 5
NO:Display not correct: Correct index of lift cylinder volume in address 185, see Reference 245-05-002 , “Accessing the
Addresses and Diagnostic Trouble Codes”. Repeat the calibration afterwards.
( 5 ) Calibration of the depth setting control
Action:
Input
Actuate the flash-to-pass switch once (less than 2 seconds). Press "5” button.
Display (2):
122:XXX.XX (output voltage, depth adjustment control in position "0")
Press raise/lower control switch in position "raise” for a short period of time and release it. The value will be stored.
Display (2): Stored value
Result:
YES: GO TO 6
( 6 ) Calibration of raise/lower control switch
Action:
Press raise/lower control switch in position “lower” for a short period of time and release it.
Display (3):
122:00011 (switch value OK)
Result:
YES: GO TO 7
( 7 ) Calibration of position and draft sensors
Action:
7a - Calibration of position sensor, hitch in end position (raise)
Press raise/lower control switch in position “raise” and hold it until the hitch is in end position (raise), then release control
switch. After control switch has been released the value is stored.
Display (4):
122:XXX.XX (output voltage position sensor, hitch in end position (raise)
Result:
YES:GO TO 7b
Action:
7b - Calibration of position sensor, hitch in end position (lower)
Press raise/lower control switch in position “lower” and hold it until the hitch is in end position (lower), then release control
switch. After control switch has been released the value is stored.
Display (5):
122:XXX.XX (output voltage position sensor, hitch in end position (lower)
After the value has been stored, the display changes over to the values automatically determined by the draft sensors.
Result:
YES:GO TO 7c
Action:
7c - Draft sensors
Display:
122:XXX (output voltage, right draft sensor)
XXX.XX (output voltage, l.h. draft sensor, if equipped)
Press raise/lower control switch in position “raise” (until hitch starts moving), then release it. Values of the draft sensors are
stored.
Display: Stored values of draft sensors
Display changes automatically and shows the hydraulic oil temperature.
→NOTE:
The hydraulic oil temperature is only displayed on tractors with PowrQuad Plus transmission.
Display (7):
122:XXXXX (desired value for calibration is 40°C; 100°F min.)
Hitch moves to center position.
Result:
YES: GO TO 8
( 8 ) Calibration of lowering/raise valve
Action:
8a - Calibrating the lowering valve
Actuate the “lower” switch, until the hitch moves downwards, then release.
Display (8):
122:XXXXX (steps of the stepper motor, lowering deadband)
If 00000 is displayed, lowering valve is calibrated and the value stored.
Result:
YES:GO TO 8b
Action:
8b - Calibrating the raise valve
Press raise/lower control switch in position “raise” (until hitch starts moving), then release it.
Display (9):
122:XXXXX (steps of the stepper motor, raising deadband)
When 00000 appears, the raising valve is calibrated and the value is stored.
Result:
YES: GO TO 9
( 9 ) End of calibration
Action:
Press raise/lower control switch in position “lower” for a short period of time and release it.
Calibration is complete.
If malfunctions occurred during calibration procedure, “Err” is displayed and then the corresponding diagnostic trouble codes.
Subsequently “EOC” is displayed and then successively the stored values (XXXXX).
Display and explanation
Display Explanation/Note
122:
If malfunctions occurred during calibration procedure "Err" is displayed and then the corresponding diagnostic trouble codes.
Err
122:
End of calibration.
EOC
122:
Output voltage, depth adjustment control in position 0.
XXX.XX
Output voltage, position sensor with hitch in end position:

122:XXX
Raise.
XXX.XX
Lower.
122:XXX Output voltage, r.h. draft sensor.

XXX.XX Output voltage, l.h. draft sensor (if equipped).
Stepper motor deadband steps (play between cam and raise/lower valve spool):
122:XXX
Deadband step (lowering)
XXXXX
Deadband step (raising)
Five-digit display of hitch components:

X = 0 = Component does not exist
X = 1 = Component does exist
Component position (from left to right):
122:
1st digit: Sensitivity control
XXXXX
2nd digit: L.h. draft sensor
3rd digit: R.h. draft sensor
4th digit: Remote control switch on l.h. fender
5th digit: Remote control switch on r.h. fender
122:
Version number of hitch control software.
XXXXX
122:
The calibration procedure is complete.
donE
Terminate calibration procedure:
Input
Operate the hazard warning light switch (on/off). Press "Save" button.
Display: 122/CAL: (display alternately reads 122 and CAL)
Key switch off.
→NOTE:
After the calibration procedure has been completed successfully, all diagnostic trouble codes in address
001 or 123 are automatically deleted.
→NOTE:
Address 123 only displays diagnostic trouble codes generated during hitch calibration procedure. During
the procedure, diagnostic trouble codes in address 123 can be deleted by pressing key "5" on
performance monitor or, if equipped with digital display, by operating the hazard warning light switch
(on/off).
Result:
YES:Calibration complete.After calibration has been successfully completed, no diagnostic trouble codes must be stored in
address 001 or 123 of hitch control.
NO:Access diagnostic trouble codes in address 001 or 123, see Reference 245-05-002 , "Accessing Addresses and Diagnostic
Trouble Codes". Rectify the faults and repeat calibration procedure.

(adjusting stepper motor steps)
See addressBCU234 .
At this address it is possible to adjust the number of steps above deadband from which the stepper motor will return to neutral.
( 1 ) AddressBCU138
Action:
Factory setting: Input = 2
Values between 1 and 4 (steps of stepper motor) can be entered. This setting does not take effect until the leak-off function is
switched on at address BCU101. For detailed information about the leak-off function, refer to address BCU101.
Result:
YES:End of input.
Address BCU145 - Input address for hitch control on/off

See addressBCU234 .
On tractors without hitch, the hitch control can be switched off at this address. Only if the BCU does not recognize any hitch
control signals (signals from hitch control sensors and switches).
( 1 ) AddressBCU145
Action:
Hitch control present on tractor and switched on: Input = 0
Hitch control not present on tractor and switched off: Input = 1
Result:
YES:End of input.

(adjusting time)
See addressBCU234 .
At this address it is possible to adjust the time (in seconds) during which no change of hitch position is detected by the position
sensor before the stepper motor returns to neutral.
( 1 ) AddressBCU154
Action:
Factory setting: Input = 8
The minimum setting must be at least 4 seconds. This setting does not take effect until the leak-off function is switched on at
address BCU101. For detailed information about the leak-off function, refer to address BCU101.
Result:
YES:End of input.
Address BCU165 - Input address for rate of rise

In this address, you can set the rate at which the hitch rises. This setting applies only if the hitch is raised via the control switch
(rocker switch).
( 1 ) AddressBCU165
Action:
Input = 255 (factory setting)
Values between 000 (min.) and 255 (max.) may be entered.
Result:
YES:End of input.
Address BCU167 - Input address for hitch components
→NOTE:
In the factory the appropriate key numbers have already been entered in the BCU supplied.
The input only needs to be carried out if the control unit has been replaced.
( 1 ) AddressBCU167
Action:
Enter the five-digit code number of appropriate hitch component:
0 = Component does not exist

1 = Component does exist
Components from left to right:
Input
Display position Component Code number
1 Sensitivity control 0 or 1
2 L.h. draft sensor 0 or 1
3 R.h. draft sensor 0 or 1
4 Remote control switch on l.h. fender 0
Display position Component Code number
5 Remote control switch on r.h. fender 0 or 1
Result:
YES:End of input.
Address BCU174 - Input address for load control index
→NOTE:
In the factory the appropriate index has already been put in the BCU supplied.
The input of load control index only needs to be carried out if the control unit has been replaced.
( 1 ) AddressBCU174
Action:
Enter specified index.
Index
Tractors: 5620 5720 5820
Index: 333 316 276
Result:
YES:End of input.
Address BCU185 - Input address for volume of lift cylinder
→NOTE:
In the factory the appropriate index has already been put in the BCU supplied.
The input of volume of lift cylinder index only needs to be carried out if the control unit has been replaced.
( 1 ) AddressBCU185
Action:
Measure diameter of lift cylinder piston and enter specified index.
Index table
Tractors: 5620, 5720 and 5820
Piston of lift cylinder, dia. Index
65 mm 24
70 mm 52
75 mm 80
Result:
YES:End of input.
Reference 245-BCU-100, Preliminary Test of BCU Circuit

Problem:
Most wiring harness problems are caused by connector problems (contacts loose/bad/slid back) and/or bad ground connections.
Procedure
Before a detailed circuit check is performed and in the event of occasional circuit problems (loose contacts), all the
"accessible” components of the respective circuit must be checked.
1. Harness test in diagnostic mode:

Access addressBCU002 and tug gently on the relevant harness (plug connection) to ascertain if the contacts are
loose/poor.
→NOTE: A defect in the harness (connection, lead or component) is indicated by an audible
signal (beep) and the relevant diagnostic address appears in the display.
Access addressBCU003 and ascertain loose/bad connections by a test drive.
2. Visual inspection on relevant electrical circuit components:
Check the connections for loose, widened, slid-back or corroded contacts.
The mating surfaces of ground contacts and the appropriate fixing element are to be checked for damage
(corrosion, paint, deformation) and torques.
Reference 245-BCU-101, Circuit Test for Rear PTO Remote Control

Switch on L.h. Fender (S44)
Lead layout for rear PTO remote control switch on l.h. fender (S44)
LEGEND:
S44 Switch for rear PTO remote control, l.h.
X174 3-pin plug for rear PTO remote control switch
X616/2 48-pin plug of basic control unit (BCU)
F04/09 Fuse
W08 Cab wiring harness
BCU Basic control unit
Circuit/harness test for rear PTO remote control on l.h. fender
General information:
The function of the rear PTO remote control switch is available only in conjunction with the HMS package; it is activated in BCU
addresses 39 and 66. This switch is a two-way switch.
Instructions for diagnosis:
For functional schematic, see:
• Reference 240-10-017 , "SE16A - Basic control unit (BCU) (rear PTO and remote control)”
For component location and pin arrangement, see:
• Reference 240-26-001 , Wiring Harnesses for Tractors with PowrQuad Transmission - Summary of References.
• Reference 240-26-003 , Wiring Harnesses for Tractors with PowrQuad Transmission from Serial No. 436758 - Summary of
References
• Reference 240-26-002 , Wiring Harnesses for Tractors with PowrQuad Plus Transmission - Summary of References
• Reference 240-26-004 , Wiring Harnesses for Tractors with PowrQuad Plus Transmission (from Serial Number 434662) -
Summary of References.
Circuit/harness test:
Most wiring harness problems are caused by connector problems (contacts loose/bad/slid back) and/or bad ground
connections.Before a detailed circuit check is performed andin the event of occasional circuit problems (loose
contacts), all components of the respective circuit must be checked (see procedure for "Preliminary Check of BCU Circuit” in
Section 245, Group BCU).
IMPORTANT:
When ignition is ON, disconnected plugs may cause additional diagnostic trouble codes. The fault
memory must be cleared once the circuit/harness test has been completed.
( 1 ) Check the wiring harness
Action:
1.1 - Harness test:
Perform test on plug X174 (cab harness W08).

Disconnect the 3-pin plug (X174) for rear PTO remote control switch on l.h. fender (S44).
Access addressBCU009 .
Address BCU009 - Harness test for various signals at the rear PTO remote control switch on the l.h. fender (S44)
Plug disconnected: Status 00XX
Pin A (lead 973, positive, 12 volts) bypassed to pin B (lead 528; rear PTO remote control actuated) Status 10XX
Pin A (lead 973, positive, 12 volts) bypassed to pin C (lead 547; rear PTO remote control not actuated) Status 01XX
Result:
YES:Replace the rear PTO remote control switch and carry out an operational test.
NO:GO TO 1.2.
Action:
1.2 - Check the supply voltage:
Use a JT05791A multimeter to check the supply voltage at plug X174:
Supply voltage for PTO remote control switch at plug X174

between pin A (lead 973, positive; 12 volt) and any suitable ground point: Voltage 12 volts
Result:
YES:Check signal lead circuit (leads 547 and 528) (see drawing for layout of leads). Repair as needed and carry out an
operational test.
NO:Check power supply circuit (fuse F04/9 and positive lead 973) (see drawing for layout of leads). Repair as needed and carry
out an operational test.
Operational test of rear PTO remote control on l.h. fender

( 1 ) Checking the combination of switch signals in diagnostic address BCU009
Action:
BCU09 - Status, rear PTO remote control switch on left fender (S44)
Rear PTO remote control not actuated: Status 01XX
Rear PTO remote control actuated: Status 10XX
Result:
YES:Diagnosis completed.
NO:GO TO: Circuit/harness test for rear PTO remote control on l.h. fender .
Reference 245-BCU-102, Circuit Test for Rear PTO Remote Control

Switch on R.h. Fender (S121)
Lead layout for rear PTO remote control switch on r.h. fender (S121)
LEGEND:
S121 Switch for rear PTO remote control, r.h.
X623 3-pin plug for rear PTO remote control switch
F04/09 Fuse
Circuit/harness test for rear PTO remote control on r.h. fender
The function of the rear PTO remote control switch is available only in conjunction with the HMS package; it is activated in BCU
addresses 39 and 66. This switch is a two-way switch.
• Reference 240-10-017 , ”SE16A-Basic Control unit (BCU) (Rear PTO and External Control)”
contacts), all components of the respective circuit must be checked (see procedure for ”Preliminary Check of BCU Circuit” in
IMPORTANT:
( 1 ) Check the harness
Action:
1.1 - Harness test:

Disconnect the 3-pin plug (X623) for rear PTO remote control switch on r.h. fender (S121).
Address BCU009 - Harness test for various signals at the rear PTO remote control switch on the r.h. fender (S121)
Plug disconnected: Status XX00
Pin A (lead 973, positive, 12 volts) bypassed to pin B (lead 537; rear PTO remote control actuated) Status XX10
Pin A (lead 973, positive, 12 volts) bypassed to pin C (lead 538; rear PTO remote control not actuated) Status XX01
Result:
YES:Replace the rear PTO remote control switch and carry out an operational test.
NO:GO TO 1.2.
Action:
Supply voltage for PTO remote control switch at plug X174

between pin A (lead 973, 12-volt positive) and any suitable ground point: Voltage 12 volts
Result:
operational test.
Operational test on rear PTO remote control on r.h. fender

Action:
BCU09 - Status, rear PTO remote control switch on right fender (S121)
Rear PTO remote control not actuated: Status XX01
Rear PTO remote control actuated: Status XX10
Result:
NO:GO TO: Circuit/harness test for rear PTO remote control on r.h. fender .
Reference 245-BCU-103, Circuit Test for Rear PTO Switch (S21)
Lead layout for rear PTO switch (S21)
LEGEND:
S21 Rear PTO switch
F04/09 Fuse
Circuit/harness test for rear PTO switch
Two-way switch S21 is provided with a 12-volt power supply via fuse F04/9.
References
IMPORTANT:
( 1 ) Check the harness (shift console harness W10)
Action:
1.1 - Harness test:
This test must be performed at plug X125 (shift console harness W10).
Disconnect the 3-pin plug (X125) for rear PTO switch (S21).
Address BCU007 - Harness test for various signals at the rear PTO switch
Pin A (lead 973, positive, 12 volts) bypassed to pin B (lead 525; rear PTO engaged) Status XX10
Pin A (lead 973, positive, 12 volts) bypassed to pin C (lead 586; rear PTO disengaged) Status XX01
Result:
YES:Replace the rear PTO switch and carry out an operational test.
NO:GO TO 1.2.
Action:
Use a JT05791A multimeter to check the power supply at plug X125:
Power supply for rear PTO switch to plug X125

Result:
YES:Check signal voltage circuit (leads 525 and 586) (see drawing for layout of leads). Repair as needed and carry out an
operational test.
Operational test on rear PTO switch (S21)

( 1 ) Check combination of signals in diagnostic address BCU007
Action:
BCU007 - Status, rear PTO switch (S21)

Rear PTO disengaged: Status XX01
Rear PTO engaged: Status XX10
Result:
NO:GO TO: Circuit/harness test for rear PTO switch .
Reference 245-BCU-104, Circuit Test for PTO Preselector Switch (S45)
Lead layout for PTO preselector switch
LEGEND:
S45 PTO preselector switch
X243 3-pin plug for PTO preselector switch
F04/09 Fuse
Circuit/harness test for rear PTO preselector switch (S45)
Remote control of the rear PTO is activated via the PTO preselector switch. The two-way switch is provided with a 12-volt power
supply via fuse F04/9.
IMPORTANT:
Action:
1.1 - Harness test:
This test must be performed at plug X243.

Disconnect the 3-pin plug (X243) for PTO preselector switch S45.
Address BCU008 - Harness test for various signals at the PTO preselector switch (S45)
Plug disconnected: Status X00X
Pin B (lead 973, positive, 12 volts) bypassed to pin A (lead 535; rear PTO preselection ON) Status X10X
Pin B (lead 973, positive, 12 volts) bypassed to pin C (lead 536; rear PTO preselection OFF) Status X01X
Result:
YES:Replace the PTO preselector switch and carry out an operational test.
NO:GO TO 1.2.
Action:
Power supply for PTO preselector switch to plug X243

between pin B (lead 973, positive, 12 volts) and any suitable ground point: Voltage 12 volts
Result:
operational test.
NO:Check power supply circuit (fuse F04/09 and positive lead 973) (see drawing for layout of leads). Repair as needed and
carry out an operational test.
Operational test for rear PTO preselector switch (S45)

Action:
BCU08 - Status, rear PTO preselector switch (S45)

Rear PTO preselection ON: Status X10X
Rear PTO preselection OFF: Status X01X
Result:
NO:GO TO: Circuit/harness test for rear PTO preselector switch (S45) .
Reference 245-BCU-106, Circuit Test for Front PTO Switch (S06)
Lead layout for front PTO switch
LEGEND:
S06 Front PTO switch
F04/09 Fuse
Circuit/harness test for front PTO switch (S06)
Two-way switch (S06) is provided with a 12-volt power supply via fuse F04/9.
• Reference 240-10-018 , ”SE16B-Basic Control Unit (BCU) (Front PTO)”
IMPORTANT:
Action:
1.1 - Harness test:
This test must be performed at plug X127 (shift console harness W10).
Disconnect the 3-pin plug (X127) for front PTO switch (S06).
Address BCU007 - Harness test for various signals at the front PTO switch
Pin A (lead 973, positive, 12 volts) bypassed to pin B (lead 901; switch closed) Status 10XX
Pin A (lead 973, positive; 12 volts) bypassed to pin C (lead 904; switch open) Status 01XX
Result:
YES:Replace the front PTO switch and carry out an operational test.
NO:GO TO 1.2.
Action:
Power supply for PTO switch to plug X125

Result:
YES:Check signal voltage circuit (leads 901 and 904) (see drawing for layout of leads). Repair as needed and carry out an
operational test.
Operational test for front PTO switch (S06)

( 1 ) Check the front PTO switch in diagnostic address BCU007
Action:
BCU007 - Status, front PTO switch (S06)

Front PTO disengaged: Status 01XX
Front PTO engaged: Status 10XX
Result:
NO:GO TO: Circuit/harness test for front PTO switch (S06) .
Reference 245-BCU-107, Circuit Test for Front-Wheel Drive Switch (S63)

(without HMS II)
Lead layout for front-wheel drive switch (S63) (without HMS II)
LEGEND:
F04/09 Fuse
Circuit/harness test for front-wheel drive switch (S63) (without HMS II)
Switch (S06) is provided with a 12-volt power supply via fuse F04/9.
• Reference 240-10-019 , "SE16C-Basic Control Unit (BCU) (Front-Wheel Drive)”.
References
IMPORTANT:
Action:
1.1 - Harness test:
Perform this test on plug X245 (cab harness W08).

Disconnect the 3-pin plug (X245) for front-wheel drive switch S63.
Address BCU006 - Harness test for various signals at the front-wheel drive switch
Pin C (lead 973, positive, 12 volts) bypassed to pin A (lead 557; brake-assist position) Status XX01
Result:
YES:Replace the front-wheel drive switch and carry out an operational test.
NO:GO TO 1.2.
Action:
Power supply for front-wheel drive switch to plug X245

between pin C (lead 973, positive, 12 volts) and any suitable ground point: Voltage 12 volts
Result:
YES:Check signal lead circuit (lead 557) (see illustration for layout of leads). Repair as needed and carry out an operational
test.
Operational test on front-wheel drive switch (S63)

Action:
Access addressBCU006 :
BCU006 - Status, front-wheel drive switch (S63)

Switch in brake-assist position: Status XX01
Switch in front-wheel drive position: Status XX00
Result:
NO:GO TO: Circuit/harness test for front-wheel drive switch (S63) (without HMS II) .
Reference 245-BCU-108, Circuit Test for Front-Wheel Drive Switch (S05)

(with HMS II)
Lead layout for front-wheel drive switch (S05) (with HMS II)
LEGEND:
F04/09 Fuse
Circuit test for front-wheel drive switch (S05) (with HMS II)
The two-way switch is provided with a 12-volt power supply via fuse F04/9.
• Reference 240-10-019 , "SE16C-Basic Control Unit (BCU) (Front-Wheel Drive)”.
References
IMPORTANT:
Action:
1.1 - Harness test:

Disconnect the 3-pin plug (X245) for front-wheel drive switch S05.
Address BCU006 - Harness test for various signals at the front-wheel drive switch
Plug disconnected (front-wheel drive position): Status XX00
Pin C (lead 973, positive, 12 volts) bypassed to pin A (lead 557; brake-assist position) Status XX01
Pin C (lead 973, positive, 12 volts) bypassed to pin B (lead 511; automatic position) Status XX10
Result:
YES:Replace the front-wheel drive switch and carry out an operational test.
NO:GO TO 1.2.
Action:
Power supply for front-wheel drive switch to plug X245

between pin C (lead 973, positive, 12 volts) and any suitable ground point: Voltage 12 volts
Result:
operational test.
Operational test on front-wheel drive switch (S05)

Action:
BCU006 - Status, front-wheel drive switch (S05)

Switch in brake-assist position: Status XX01
Switch in front-wheel drive position: Status XX00
Switch in automatic position: Status XX10
Result:
NO:GO TO: Circuit/harness test for front-wheel drive switch (S05) (with HMS II) .
Reference 245-BCU-109, Circuit Test for Differential Lock Switch (S22)
Lead layout for differential lock switch
LEGEND:
S22 Differential lock switch
X122-1 2-pin plug for differential lock switch
F04/09 Fuse
Circuit/harness test for differential lock switch (S22)
• Reference 240-10-020 , "SE16D-Basic Control Unit (BCU) (Differential Lock)”
IMPORTANT:
Action:
1.1 - Harness test:

Disconnect 2-pin plug (X122) for differential lock switch (S22).
Address BCU006 - Harness test for various signals at the differential lock switch
Plug disconnected: Status 0XXX
Pin A (lead 973, positive: 12 volts) bypassed to pin B (lead 522; switch ON) Status 1XXX
Result:
YES:Replace the differential lock switch and carry out an operational test.
NO:GO TO 1.2.
Action:
Power supply for differential lock switch to plug X122

Result:
test.
Operational test for differential lock switch (S22)

Action:
BCU006 - Status, differential lock switch (S22)

Differential lock switch OFF: Status 0XXX
Differential lock switch ON: Status 1XXX
Result:
NO:GO TO: Circuit/harness test for differential lock switch (S22) .
Reference 245-BCU-110, Circuit Test for Hazard Warning Light Switch

(S62)
Lead layout for hazard warning light switch (S62)
LEGEND:
F04/16 Fuse
Circuit/harness test for hazard warning switch (S62) ECE
The hazard warning light switch is provided with a 12-volt power supply via fuse F04/16.
• Reference 240-10-021 , "SE16E - BCU (Hazard Warning and Turn Signal Lights)”
References
IMPORTANT:
Action:
1.1 - Harness test:

Disconnect the 3-pin plug (X126) for hazard warning switch (S62).
Address BCU010 - Harness test for various signals at the cab harness
Plug disconnected: Status XXX0
Pin B (lead 182, positive, 12 volts) bypassed to pin A (lead 102; switch closed) Status XXX1
Result:
YES:Replace the hazard warning light switch and carry out an operational test.
NO:GO TO 1.2.
Action:
Power supply for hazard warning light switch to plug X126

Result:
YES:Check signal voltage circuit (lead 102) (see illustration for layout of leads). Repair as needed and carry out an operational
test.
Operational test for hazard warning light switch (S62)

( 1 ) Checking the combination of signals in diagnostic address BCU010
Action:
BCU010 - Status, hazard warning light switch (S62)

Hazard warning light switch not actuated: Status XXX0
Hazard warning light switch actuated: Status XXX1
Result:
NO:GO TO: Circuit/harness test for hazard warning light switch (S62) .
Reference 245-BCU-111, Circuit Test for Hazard Warning Light Switch

(S106)
Lead layout for hazard warning light switch
LEGEND:
S106 Hazard warning light switch
F04/16 Fuse
Circuit/harness test for hazard warning light switch (S106)
The hazard warning light switch is provided with a 12-volt power supply via fuse F04/16.
• Reference 240-10-021 , ”SE16E-BCU (Hazard Warning and Turn Signal Lights)”

• Reference 240-26-002 , Wiring Harnesses for Tractors with PowrQuad Plus Transmission — Summary of References.
• Reference 240-26-001 , Wiring Harnesses for Tractors with PowrQuad Transmission — Summary of References.
IMPORTANT:
Action:
1.1 - Harness test:
• Disconnect the 6-pin plug (X516 ) for hazard warning light switch (S106).
• This test must be performed at plug X516.
Address BCU010 — Harness test for various signals at the hazard warning light switch
Pin C (lead 571, positive, 12 volts) bypassed to pin B (lead 102; switch closed) Status XXX1
Result:
YES:Replace the hazard warning light switch and carry out an operational test.
NO:GO TO 1.2.
Action:
Power supply for hazard warning light switch to plug X516

between pin C (lead 571, 12-volt positive) and any suitable ground point: Voltage 12 volts
Result:
YES:Check signal voltage circuit (lead 102) (see illustration for layout of leads). Repair as needed and carry out an operational
test.
Operational test for hazard warning light switch (S106)

Action:
BCU010 –– Status, hazard warning light switch (S106)

Hazard warning light switch not actuated: Status XXX0
Hazard warning light switch actuated: Status XXX1
Result:
NO:GO TO: Circuit/harness test for hazard warning light switch (S106) .
Reference 245-BCU-112, Circuit Test for Turn Signal Switch (S08)
Layout of leads for turn signal switch
LEGEND:
X487 10-pin plug for turn signal switch
F04/09 Fuse
Circuit/harness test for turn signal switch (S08)
The turn signal switch is provided with a 12-volt power supply via fuse F04/9.
IMPORTANT:
Action:
1.1 - Harness test:

Disconnect the 10-pin plug (X487) for turn signal switch (S08).
Address BCU010 - Harness test for various signals at the turn signal switch
Pin F (lead 973, positive, 12 volts) bypassed to pin G (lead 155; LEFT turn signal) Status X10X
Pin F (lead 973, positive, 12 volts) bypassed to pin D (lead 127; RIGHT turn signal) Status X01X
Result:
YES:Replace the turn signal switch and carry out an operational test.
NO:GO TO 1.2.
Action:
Power supply for turn signal switch to plug X126

between pin F (lead 973, positive; 12 volt) and any suitable ground point: Voltage 12 volts
Result:
YES:Check signal voltage circuit (leads 155, 127). Repair as needed and repeat the test.
NO:Check the power supply circuit (fuse F04/9; positive lead 973). Repair as needed and repeat the test.
Operational test for turn signal switch (S08)

Action:
BCU010 - Status, turn signal switch (S08)

Turn-signal lever not actuated: Status X00X
LEFT turn signal: Status X10X
RIGHT turn signal: Status X01X
Result:
NO:GO TO: Circuit/harness test for turn signal switch (S08) .
Reference 245-BCU-115, Circuit Test for Wheel Speed Sending Unit

(B35)
Layout of leads for wheel speed sending unit
LEGEND:
X88 4-pin plug for wheel speed sending unit
X430F 42-pin plug, connecting point between W30 and W08
X430M 42-pin plug, connecting point between W08 and W30
W08 Cab harness
W30 Wiring harness at rear end of transmission
Circuit/harness test for wheel speed sending unit (B35)
The wheel-speed sending unit is a magnet-type unit.
• Reference 240-10-022 , “SE16F-Basic Control Unit (BCU) (Speed Sender and Radar)”

Circuit/harness test
contacts), all components of the respective circuit must be checked (see procedure for “Preliminary Check of BCU Circuit” in
IMPORTANT:
( 1 ) Check wheel speed sending unit (B35)
Action:
1.1 - Check resistance:
• Pull out plug X88 (for wheel-speed sending unit B35).
• Use a JT05791A multimeter to measure resistance at wheel-speed sending unit B35:
Resistance of wheel speed sending unit B35 up to serial no. 402836

between Pin A (lead 502) and Pin B (lead 531): Resistance 670 ohms at 20°C (68°F)
Resistance of wheel speed sending unit B35 from serial no. 402837
Result:
YES:GO TO 1.2.
NO:Replace the wheel speed sending unit with a new one and carry out an operational test.
Action:
1.2 - Checking that the sender is operating properly:
• Pull out plug X88 (for wheel-speed sending unit B35).
• Remove sending unit B35.
• Connect JT05791A multimeter to the sending unit (to measure voltage).
• Move a screwdriver back and forth in front of the sending unit and look for the voltage reading to change as the screwdriver
is moved in front of the sending unit.
Result:
YES:Check leads 502 and/or 531 (see drawing for layout of leads). Repair as needed and carry out an operational check.
NO:Replace the wheel speed sending unit with a new one and carry out an operational test.
Operational test of wheel speed sending unit (B35)

Action:
BCU004 –– Status, wheel speed sender (B35)

No signal detected (tractor is stationary): Status XX0X
Signal detected by sender (during travel): Status XX1X
Result:
NO:GO TO: Circuit/harness test for wheel speed sender (B35) .
Reference 245-BCU-117, Circuit Test for Record/Save Switch (S95)
Layout of leads for record/save switch (S95)
LEGEND:
S95 Record/save switch
X440 3-pin plug for record/save switch
F04/09 Fuse
Circuit/harness test for record/save switch
• Reference 240-10-023 , "SE16G-Basic control unit (BCU) (Headland Management System II)”.
References
IMPORTANT:
Action:
1.1 - Harness test:

Disconnect the 3-pin plug (X440) for the record/save switch (S95).
Address BCU014 - Harness test for various signals at the record/save switch
Plug disconnected: Status XX0X
Pin A (lead 973, positive, 12 volts) bypassed to pin B (lead 522; record/save switch in ON position) Status XX1X
Result:
YES:Replace the record/save switch and carry out an operational test.
NO:GO TO 1.2.
Action:
Supply voltage for record/save switch to plug X440

Result:
test.
Operational test for record/save switch (S95)

Action:
BCU014 - Status of record/save switch (S95)

Record/save switch OFF: Status XX0X
Record/save switch ON: Status XX1X
Result:
NO:GO TO: Circuit/harness test for record/save switch .
Reference 245-BCU-118, Circuit Test for HMS Program Switch (S100)
Layout of leads for HMS program switch
LEGEND:
S100 HMS program switch
X471 4-pin plug for HMS program switch
F04/09 Fuse
Circuit/harness test for HMS program switch (S100).
IMPORTANT:
Action:
1.1 - Harness test:

Disconnect the 4-pin plug (X471) for HMS program switch (S100).
Address BCU015 - Harness test for various signals at the HMS program switch
Plug disconnected: Status X000
Pin 2 (lead 973, positive; 12 volts) bypassed to pin 3 (lead 551; neutral): Status X101
Pin 2 (lead 973, positive, 12 volts) bypassed to pin 1 (lead 554; program 1) Status X110
Pin 2 (lead 973, positive, 12 volts) bypassed to pin 4 (lead 559; program 2) Status X011
Result:
YES:Replace the HMS program switch and carry out an operational test.
NO:GO TO 1.2.
Action:
Supply voltage for HMS program switch to plug X471

Result:
YES:Check signal voltage circuit (leads 551, 559 and 554) (see drawing for layout of leads). Repair as needed and carry out an
operational test.
Operational test for HMS program switch (S100)

Action:
BCU015 - Status, HMS program switch (S100)

HMS program switch in neutral position: Status X101
HMS program switch in position for program 1: Status X110
HMS program switch in position for program 2: Status X011
Result:
NO:GO TO: Circuit/harness test for HMS program switch (S100) .
Reference 245-BCU-119, Circuit Test for Handbrake Switch (B37)
Layout of leads for handbrake switch
LEGEND:
X235 4-pin plug for handbrake switch
F04/09 Fuse
Circuit/harness test for handbrake switch (B37)
Switch (B37) is provided with a 12-volt power supply via fuse F04/9.
• Reference 240-10-026 , "SE16J - Basic Control Unit (BCU) (Brake System and Handbrake Monitor Unit)”
IMPORTANT:
Action:
1.1 - Harness test:

Disconnect the 2-pin plug (X235) for handbrake switch (B37).
Address BCU005 - Harness test for various signals at the handbrake switch
Plug disconnected (handbrake applied): Status XXX0
Pin A (lead 973, positive, 12 volts) bypassed to pin B (lead 906; handbrake not applied) Status XXX1
Result:
YES:Replace the handbrake switch and carry out an operational test.
NO:GO TO 1.2.
Action:
Supply voltage for handbrake switch to plug X235

Result:
test.
Operational test for handbrake switch (B37)

Action:
BCU005 - Handbrake switch status (B37)

Handbrake released: Status XXX1
Handbrake applied: Status XXX0
Result:
NO:GO TO: Circuit/harness test for handbrake switch (B37) .
Reference 245-BCU-120, Circuit Test for Engine Speed Sender (B01)
Layout of leads for engine speed sender
LEGEND:
B01 Engine speed sender
X76 2-pin plug for engine speed sender
W02 Engine wiring harness
Circuit/harness test for engine speed sender (B01)
Engine speed sender (B01) is a magnet-type unit.
• Reference 240-10-022 , ”SE16F-Basic Control Unit (BCU) (Speed Sender and Radar)”

IMPORTANT:
( 1 ) Check engine speed sender (B01)
Action:
• Pull out plug X76 for engine speed sender (B01).
• Use a JT05791A multimeter to measure resistance at engine speed sender (B01):
Resistance at engine speed sender (B01)

Result:
YES:GO TO 1.2.
NO:Replace the engine speed sender and carry out an operational test.
Action:
• Pull out plug X76 for engine speed sender (B01).
• Remove sending unit B01.
• Connect JT05791A multimeter to the sender (to measure voltage).
• Move a screwdriver back and forth in front of the sensor and look for the voltage reading on JT05791A multimeter to change
as the screwdriver is moved in front of the sensor.
Result:
YES:Check leads 325 and/or 531 (see drawing for layout of leads). Repair as needed and carry out an operational test.
NO:Replace the engine speed sender and carry out an operational test.
Operational test for engine speed sender (B01)

Action:
BCU003 — Status, engine speed sender (B01)
No signal detected (tractor is stationary): Status X0XX
Signal detected by sender (during travel): Status X1XX
Result:
NO:GO TO: Circuit/Harness Test for Engine Speed Sender (B01) .
Reference 245-BCU-121, Circuit Test for Rear PTO Speed Sender (B06)
Layout of leads for rear PTO speed sender
LEGEND:
X94 4-pin plug for rear PTO speed sender
X430/1 42-pin plug, connecting point between W08 and W02
W08 Cab harness
Circuit/harness test for rear PTO speed sender (B06)
The rear PTO speed sender is a magnet-type unit.
• Reference 240-10-022 , “SE16F-Basic Control Unit (BCU) (Speed Sender and Radar)”

IMPORTANT:
( 1 ) Check rear PTO speed sender (B06)
Action:
• Pull out plug X94 for rear PTO speed sender (B06).
• Use a JT05791A multimeter to measure resistance at rear PTO speed sender B06:
Resistance at rear PTO speed sender (B06) up to serial no. 402836

Resistance at rear PTO speed sender (B06) from serial no. 402837
Result:
YES:GO TO 1.2.
NO:Replace the rear PTO speed sender and carry out an operational test.
Action:
• Pull out plug X94 for rear PTO speed sender (B06).
• Remove sender B06.
• Connect JT05791A multimeter to the sender (to measure voltage).
• Move a screwdriver back and forth in front of the sending unit and look for the voltage reading to change as the screwdriver
is moved in front of the sending unit.
Result:
YES:Check leads 574 and/or 531 (see drawing for layout of leads). Repair as needed and carry out an operational check.
NO:Replace the rear PTO speed sender and carry out an operational test.
Operational test of rear PTO speed sender (B06):

Action:
BCU003 — Status, rear PTO speed sender (B06)

No signal detected (rear PTO switched off): Status XXX0
Signal from sender detected (rear PTO turning): Status XXX1
Result:
NO:GO TO: Circuit/harness test for rear PTO speed sender (B06) .
Reference 245-BCU-122, Circuit Test for Alternator Relay (K07/6)
Layout of leads for alternator relay (K07/6)
LEGEND:
K07/6 Position of alternator relay
W08 Cab harness
Circuit/harness test for alternator relay (K07/6)
The alternator relay is a mini-relay.
• Reference 240-10-023 , “SE16G - BCU (Headland Management System HMS II)”
• Reference 240-10-001 , “Electrical Circuit Checks - Summary of References”

• Reference 240-26-002 , Wiring Harnesses for Tractors with PowrQuad Plus Transmission - Summary of References.
• Reference 240-25-001 , Functional Schematic - Summary of References
IMPORTANT:
( 1 ) Check alternator relay (K07/6)
Action:
• Disconnect plug X616/2 for alternator relay (K07/6) at BCU.
• Use a JT05791A multimeter to measure resistance at base of alternator relay (K07/6).
• Check ground connection of alternator relay (K07/6).
Result:
YES: GO TO 2
NO:Check signal lead 336 (see illustration for layout of leads). Repair as needed and carry out an operational check.Check
ground circuit (lead 310) (see drawing for layout of leads). Repair as needed and carry out an operational check.
( 2 ) Check alternator and injection pump control functions
Action:
Access addressBCU046, "Alternator and injection pump adjustment” .
BCU046 — Basic functions, alternator control function, configuration

Activation delay off: Status XXX0
Activation delay on: Status XXX1
BCU047 — Parameter of control function for alternator and injection pump

• 500 to 1000 rpm, adjustable in increments of 50 rpm• 700 rpm are recommended Status 0000
Result:
NO:Replace alternator relay (K07/6) and delete the diagnostic trouble code.
Reference 245-BCU-123, Circuit Test on Sensitivity Potentiometer (B26)
Layout of leads for sensitivity potentiometer (B26)
LEGEND:
B26 Sensitivity potentiometer
X14-2 3-pin plug for sensitivity potentiometer
Circuit/harness test for sensitivity potentiometer
• Reference 240-10-016 , "SE15 - Electronic Hitch Control”
References
IMPORTANT:
( 1 ) Check the harness in diagnostic mode (shift console harness W10)
Action:
1.1 - Harness test:
This test must be performed at plug X14-2 (shift console harness W10).
Pull out the 3-pin plug (X14-2) for the sensitivity potentiometer (B26).
Address BCU106 - Harness test for sensitivity potentiometer (B26)

Plug X14-2 disconnected: Voltage 0.00 volts
Pin C (lead 873, positive) bypassed to pin B (lead 869; signal lead) Voltage 5.00 volts
Result:
YES:Repair the sensitivity potentiometer (B26) as needed and carry out an operational test.
NO:GO TO 1.2.
Action:
Use a JT05791A multimeter to check the power supply voltage on plug X14-2 (shift console harness W10).
Supply voltage of sensitivity potentiometer (B26)

between pin C (lead 873, positive) and pin A (lead 531, ground): Voltage 5 volts
Result:
YES: GO TO 2 .
NO:Check power supply circuit (positive lead 873) (see drawing for layout of leads). Repair as needed and carry out an
operational test.
( 2 ) Check the harness in diagnostic mode (cab harness W08)
Action:
Harness test:

Disconnect the 24-pin plug (X422; connecting point for shift console harness).
Address BCU106 - Harness test for sensitivity potentiometer (B26)

Plug X422 disconnected: Voltage 0.00 volts
Pin 11 (lead 873, positive) bypassed to pin 13 (lead 869; signal lead) Voltage 5.00 volts
Result:
YES:Check signal lead 869 in cab wiring harness W08 (see drawing for layout of leads). Repair as needed and carry out an
operational test.
NO:Check signal lead 869 in shift console wiring harness W10 (see drawing for layout of leads). Repair as needed and carry out
an operational test.
Operational test on sensitivity potentiometer (B26)

( 1 ) Check the voltages at the potentiometer in diagnostic address BCU106
Action:
→NOTE:
Slowly turn the potentiometer through its full range. Do not exceed the maximum voltage or go below
the minimum voltage (see below). An acoustic signal or sudden voltage change while the pedal is
actuated indicates a defective potentiometer.
BCU106 - Voltage, sensitivity potentiometer (B26)

Position 1: Minimum voltage 0.25 volts
Position 5: Maximum voltage 4.75 volts
Result:
NO:GO TO: Circuit/harness test for sensitivity potentiometer .
Reference 245-BCU-126, Circuit Test for Depth-Setting Potentiometer

(B27)
Layout of leads for depth-setting potentiometer (B27)
LEGEND:
X14-1 8-pin plug for depth-setting potentiometer
Circuit/harness test for depth-setting potentiometer
References
IMPORTANT:
Action:
1.1 - Harness test:
Disconnect the 8-pin plug (X14-1) for the depth-setting potentiometer (B27).
Address BCU107 - Harness test, depth-setting potentiometer (B27)

Result:
YES:Repair the depth-setting potentiometer (B27) as needed and carry out an operational test.
NO:GO TO 1.2.
Action:
Supply voltage of depth-setting potentiometer (B27)

Result:
YES: GO TO 2 .
operational test.
( 2 ) Check the harness (cab harness W08)
Action:
Harness test:

Address BCU107 - Harness test, depth-setting potentiometer (B27)

Result:
operational test.
Operational test on depth-setting potentiometer (B27)

Action:
→NOTE:
BCU107 - Voltage, depth-setting potentiometer (B27)

Result:
NO:GO TO: Circuit/harness test for depth-setting potentiometer .
Reference 245-BCU-127, Circuit Test for Position Sensor (B21)
Layout of leads for position sensor (B21)
LEGEND:
X96 3-pin plug, position sensor
Circuit/harness test for position sensor
References
IMPORTANT:
( 1 ) Check the harness (W30 at rear end of transmission)
Action:
1.1 - Harness test:
This test must be performed at plug X96 (harness W30 at rear end of transmission).
Disconnect the 3-pin plug (X96) for position sensor (B21).
Address BCU108 - Harness test for position sensor (B21)

Pin A (lead 873, positive) bypassed to pin B (lead 878; signal lead) Voltage 5.00 volts
Result:
YES:Recondition the position sensor as needed and carry out an operational test.
NO:GO TO 1.2.
Action:
Use a JT05791A multimeter to check the power supply at plug X96 (wiring harness W30 at rear end of transmission).
Power supply to position sensor (B21)

between pin A (lead 873, positive) and pin C (lead 531, ground): Voltage 5 volts
Result:
YES: GO TO 2 .
operational test.
Action:
Harness test:

Pull out the 42-pin plug (X430; connecting point for shift console harness).
Address BCU108 - Harness test for position sensor (B21)

Result:
operational test.
NO:Check signal lead 878 in transmission wiring harness W30 (see drawing for layout of leads). Repair as needed and carry out
Operational test for position sensor (B21)

Action:
→NOTE:
BCU108 - Voltage, position sensor (B21)

Rockshaft fully raised: Minimum voltage between 0.5 and 1.5 volts
Rockshaft fully lowered: Maximum voltage between 3.5 and 4.5 volts
Result:
NO:GO TO: Circuit/harness test for position sensor (B21) .
Reference 245-BCU-128, Circuit Test on Rate-of-Drop Potentiometer

(B27)
Layout of leads for rate-of-drop potentiometer (B27)
LEGEND:
X14-1 8-pin plug for rate-of-drop potentiometer
Circuit/harness test for rate-of-drop potentiometer
References
IMPORTANT:
Action:
1.1 - Harness test:
Disconnect the 3-pin plug (X14-2) for the rate-of-drop potentiometer (B27).
Address BCU110 - Harness test for rate-of-drop potentiometer (B27)

Result:
YES:Repair the rate-of-drop potentiometer (B27) as needed and carry out an operational test.
NO:GO TO 1.2.
Action:
Supply voltage, rate-of-drop potentiometer (B27)

Result:
YES: GO TO 2 .
operational test.
Action:
Harness test:

Address BCU110 - Harness test for rate-of-drop potentiometer (B27)

Plug X422 disconnected. Voltage 0.00 volts
Result:
operational test.
Operational test on rate-of-drop potentiometer (B27)

Action:
→NOTE:
BCU110 - Voltage, rate-of-drop potentiometer (B27)

Result:
NO:GO TO: Circuit/harness test for rate-of-drop potentiometer .
Reference 245-BCU-130, Circuit Test on Raise-Limit Potentiometer (B27)
Layout of leads for raise-limit potentiometer
LEGEND:
X14-1 8-pin plug for raise-limit potentiometer
Circuit/harness test for raise-limit potentiometer (B27)

IMPORTANT:
Action:
1.1 - Harness test:
Disconnect the 8-pin plug (X14-1) for the raise-limit potentiometer (B27).
Address BCU109 — Harness test for raise-limit potentiometer (B27)
Result:
YES:Repair the raise-limit potentiometer (B27) as needed and carry out an operational test.
NO:GO TO 1.2.
Action:
Supply voltage, raise-limit potentiometer (B27)

Result:
YES: GO TO 2 .
operational test.
Action:
Harness test:

Address BCU110 — Harness test for raise-limit potentiometer (B27)

Result:
operational test.
Operational test on raise-limit potentiometer (B27)

Action:
→NOTE:
BCU109 — Voltage, raise-limit potentiometer (B27)

Result:
NO:GO TO: Circuit/harness test for raise-limit potentiometer (B27) .
Reference 245-BCU-132, Circuit Test for Rapid-Raise Switch (S24)
Layout of leads for rapid-raise switch
LEGEND:
X14-1 8-pin plug for rapid-raise switch
Circuit/harness test, potentiometer for rapid-raise switch (S24)

IMPORTANT:
Action:
1.1 - Harness test:
Disconnect the 8-pin plug (X14-1) for rapid-raise switch (S24).
Address BCU103 — Harness test for rapid-raise switch (S24)

Pin F (lead 834, "raise") bypassed to pin D (lead 838; signal lead) Voltage 9.00 volts
Pin G (lead 839, "lower") bypassed to pin D (lead 838; signal lead) Voltage 3.00 volts
Result:
YES:Repair the rapid-raise switch (S24) as needed and carry out an operational test.
NO:GO TO 1.2.
Action:
Supply voltage for rapid-raise switch (S24)

between pin D (lead 838, positive) and any suitable ground point: Voltage 6.00 volts
Result:
YES: GO TO 2 .
NO:Check circuit (lead 838) (see drawing for layout of leads). Repair as needed and carry out an operational test.
Action:
Harness test:

Address BCU110 — Harness test for rapid-raise switch (S24)

Pin 15 (lead 834, "raise") bypassed to pin 14 (lead 838) Voltage 9.00 volts
Pin 16 (lead 839, "lower") bypassed to pin 14 (lead 838) Voltage 3.00 volts
Result:
YES:Check leads 834 and 839 in cab wiring harness W08 (see drawing for layout of leads). Repair as needed and carry out an
operational test.
NO:Check leads 834 and 839 in shift console wiring harness W10 (see drawing for layout of leads). Repair as needed and carry
Operational test for rapid-raise switch (S24)

Action:
BCU103 — Voltage for rapid-raise switch (S24)

Switch not actuated: Voltage 6.00 volts
Switch in "raise" position: Voltage 9.00 volts
Switch in "lower" position: Voltage 3.00 volts
Result:
NO:GO TO: Circuit/harness test for rapid-raise switch (S24) .
Reference 245-BCU-134, Circuit Test for Rear PTO Solenoid Valve (Y04)
Layout of leads for rear PTO solenoid valve
LEGEND:
Y04 Rear PTO solenoid valve
X95 2-pin plug for rear PTO solenoid valve
XGND1 Collective ground point
Circuit/harness test for rear PTO solenoid valve (Y04)

IMPORTANT:
( 1 ) Check solenoid coil Y04
Action:
→NOTE:
The solenoid valve being tested must be electrically removed from its circuit before resistance or
continuity checks are performed on it.
Ignition OFF.
Pull connector X95 (harness W30 at rear end of transmission) out of solenoid valve.
Measure between pin A and pin B at solenoid valve.
Solenoid valve Y04

Coil: Resistance 10 - 12 ohms at 20°C (68°F)
Result:
YES: GO TO 2 .
NO:Replace coil with a new one and carry out an operational test.
( 2 ) Check power supply for solenoid valve
Action:
Disconnect solenoid valve connector X95 and install adapter wiring harness DFLX14.
Solenoid adapter harness
Additional connector
LEGEND:
A JDG774 test harness
B Additional connector for checking current strength
1 57M7315 connector (2 used)
3 R104846 sleeve terminal (1 used)
4 57M7266 female terminal (1 used)
5 57M7267 male terminal (1 used)
6 R104919 pin terminal (1 used)
DFLX14
Order JDG774 test harness through normal parts channels. The additional connector must be installed between the solenoid
plug (cable to pin A) and the measuring plug. The additional connector can be used to check current strength at the solenoids
as well as voltages.
2.1 – Check supply voltage:
Ignition ON. Use a JT05791A multimeter at the measuring plug on adapter wiring harness DFLX14 to measure voltage between
pins A and B.
Solenoid valve Y04 (supply voltage)

Ignition ON: Voltage 12 volts
Result:
YES:GO TO 2.2.
NO:Check positive lead 575 (see drawing for layout of leads). Repair as needed and carry out an operational test.
Action:
2.2 - Amperage check:
IMPORTANT:
Connect the JT05791A multimeter between the additional connection of test wiring harness DFLX14
before actuating the PTO switch, otherwise the BCU will detect an open circuit and immediately interrupt
the power supply to the solenoid.
• Disconnect the extra plug for checking amperage from adapter harness DFLX14.
LEGEND:
DFLX14
• Use the JT05791A multimeter to measure between the connections.
Solenoid valve Y04 (amperage)

Rear PTO engaged: Amperage 1 - 1.2 amps at 20°C (68°F) and 12-volt rated voltage
Result:
YES:Check all relevant connectors of the solenoid valve circuit for bad, loose, widened or corroded contacts:
OK:All connectors are OK: Replace solenoid valve Y04 and carry out an operational test.
NO:Check ground lead 310 (see drawing for layout of leads). Repair as needed and carry out an operational test.
Reference 245-BCU-135, Circuit Test for Front-Wheel Drive Solenoid

Valve (Y03)
Layout of leads for front-wheel drive solenoid valve
LEGEND:
Y03 Front-wheel drive solenoid valve
X91 2-pin plug for front-wheel drive solenoid valve
W28 Wiring harness at front end of transmission
Circuit/harness test for front-wheel drive solenoid valve (Y03)
• Reference 240-10-019 , ”SE16C-Basic Control Unit (BCU) (Front-Wheel Drive)”.
IMPORTANT:
Action:
→NOTE:
The solenoid being tested must be electrically removed from its circuit before resistance or continuity
checks are performed on it.
Ignition OFF.
Pull connector X91 (harness W28 at front end of transmission) out of solenoid valve.
Solenoid valve Y03

Result:
YES: GO TO 2 .
Action:
Harness for testing solenoid valves
LEGEND:
DFLX14
pins A and B.

Result:
YES:GO TO 2.2.
Action:
2.2 - Amperage check:
IMPORTANT:
LEGEND:
DFLX14

Rear PTO engaged Amperage 1 - 1.2 amps at 20°C (68°F) and 12-volt rated voltage
Result:
OK:All connectors are OK: Replace solenoid Y03 and carry out an operational test.
Reference 245-BCU-136, Circuit Test for Differential Lock Solenoid Valve

(Y05)
Layout of leads for differential lock solenoid valve
LEGEND:
X87 2-pin plug for differential lock solenoid valve
Circuit/harness test for differential lock solenoid valve (Y05)
• Reference 240-10-020 , "SE16D-Basic Control Unit (BCU) (Differential Lock)”

IMPORTANT:
( 1 ) Solenoid coil (Y05) check
Action:
→NOTE:
Ignition OFF.
Pull connector X87 (harness W30 at rear end of transmission) out of solenoid valve.
Solenoid valve Y05

Result:
YES: GO TO 2 .
Action:
LEGEND:
DFLX14
pins A and B.

Result:
YES:GO TO 2.2.
Action:
2.2 - Amperage check
IMPORTANT:
LEGEND:
DFLX14

Rear PTO engaged Amperage 1 - 1.2 amps at 20°C (68°F) and 12-volt rated voltage
Result:
OK:All connectors are OK: Replace solenoid valve Y05 and carry out an operational test.
Reference 245-BCU-137, Circuit Test for Front PTO Solenoid Valve (Y01)
Layout of leads
LEGEND:
X166 4-pin plug for front PTO speed sender
X2 4-pin plug, connecting point between W07 and W02
W07 Front PTO wiring harness
Circuit/harness test for front PTO solenoid valve (Y01)
• Reference 240-10-018 , "SE16B-Basic Control Unit (BCU) (Front PTO)”

IMPORTANT:
Action:
→NOTE:
Ignition OFF.
Pull connector X2 (front PTO harness W07) out of solenoid valve.
Solenoid valve Y01

Result:
YES: GO TO 2 .
Action:
LEGEND:
DFLX14
pins A and B.

Result:
YES:GO TO 2.2.
Action:
2.2 - Amperage check
IMPORTANT:
LEGEND:
DFLX14

Rear PTO engaged current 1 - 1.2 amps at 20°C (68°F) and 12-volt rated voltage
Result:
OK:All connectors are OK: Replace solenoid Y01 and carry out an operational test.
Reference 245-BCU-138, Circuit Test on R.h. Draft Sensor (B19)
Layout of leads for r.h. draft sensor (B19)
LEGEND:
X90 3-pin plug for right draft sensor
Circuit/harness test for the draft sensor
• Reference 240-10-016 , ”SE15 - Electronic Hitch Control”
IMPORTANT:
( 1 ) Check the harness (W30 at rear end of transmission)
Action:
1.1 - Harness test
Disconnect the 3-pin plug (X90) for the r.h. draft sensor (B19).
This test must be performed at plug X90 (harness W30 at rear end of transmission).
Address BCU105 - Harness test for r.h. draft sensor (B19)

Pin A (lead 873, positive) bypassed to pin B (lead 884; signal lead) Voltage 5.00 volts
Result:
YES:Repair the draft sensor as needed and carry out an operational test.
NO:GO TO 1.2.
Action:
1.2 - Check the supply voltage
Use a JT05791A multimeter to check the supply voltage at plug X90 (harness W30 at rear end of transmission):
Supply voltage for r.h. draft sensor (B19)

between pin A (lead 873, positive) and pin C (lead 531, ground): Voltage 5 volts
Result:
YES: GO TO 2 .
operational test.
Action:
Harness test:
• Pull out the 42-pin plug (X430; connecting point for shift console harness).
• Perform test on plug X430 (cab harness W08).
Address BCU105 - Harness test for r.h. draft sensor (B19)

Result:
operational test.
NO:Check signal lead 884 in transmission wiring harness W30 (see drawing for layout of leads). Repair as needed and carry out
Operational test on r.h. draft sensor (B19)

( 1 ) Check signal voltage at diagnostic address BCU105
Action:
IMPORTANT:
Check signal voltage of draft sensor (not under load). There should not be any draft links attached to the
draft sensor′s bearing pin.
BCU105 - Voltage, r.h. draft sensor (B19)

Output signal, draft sensor: Voltage 2.40 - 2.60 volts
Result:
NO:GO TO: Circuit/harness test for r.h. draft sensor (B19) .
Reference 245-BCU-141, Circuit Test for Right Remote Control Switch

(S23)
Layout of leads for right remote control switch (S23)
LEGEND:
S23 Remote control switch, right
X34 6-pin plug, right remote control switch
Circuit/harness test for right remote control switch
IMPORTANT:
Action:
1.1 - Harness test
X34 - 6-pin plug, right remote control switch

Address BCU113 - Harness test for right remote control switch (S23)
Plug X34 disconnected: Status 00X
Pin C (lead 050, ground) bypassed to pin A (lead 846; signal lead) Status 01X
Pin C (lead 050, ground) bypassed to pin B (lead 843; signal lead) Status 10X
Result:
YES:GO TO 1.2.
NO:Check signal leads 846 and/or 843 in cab wiring harness W08 (see drawing for layout of leads). Repair as needed and carry
Action:
1.2 - Harness test
X34 - 6-pin plug, right remote control switch

Address BCU115 - Harness test for right remote control switch (S23)
Plug X34 disconnected: Status 00X
Pin D (lead 050, ground) bypassed to pin F (lead 844; signal lead) Status 01X
Pin D (lead 050, ground) bypassed to pin E (lead 841; signal lead) Status 10X
Result:
YES:Repair the remote control switch as needed and carry out an operational test.
Operational test for right remote control switch (S23)

( 1 ) Checking the combination of signals in diagnostic addresses BCU113 and 115.
Action:
1.1 - Checking the "raise" function
BCU113 - Status, right remote control switch (S23)

Switch not actuated Status X01
Switch at "raise" Status X10
Result:
YES:GO TO: 1.2.
NO:GO TO: Circuit/harness test for right remote control switch (S23) .
Action:
1.2 - Checking the "lower" function
BCU115 - Status, right remote control switch (S23)

Switch at "lower" Status X10
Result:
NO:GO TO: Circuit/harness test for right remote control switch (S23) .
Reference 245-BCU-142, Circuit Test for Left Remote Control Switch

(S68)
Layout of leads for left remote control switch (S68)
LEGEND:
S68 Remote control switch, left
X35 6-pin plug, left remote control switch
Circuit/harness test for left remote control switch
IMPORTANT:
Action:
1.1 - Harness test

Address BCU112 - Harness test for left remote control switch (S68)
Plug X35 disconnected: Status X00
Pin D (lead 050, ground) bypassed to pin F (lead 823; signal lead) Status X01
Pin D (lead 050, ground) bypassed to pin E (lead 826; signal lead) Status X10
Result:
YES:GO TO 1.2.
Action:
1.2 - Harness test

Address BCU114 - Harness test for left remote control switch (S68)
Plug X35 disconnected: Status X00
Pin C (lead 050, ground) bypassed to pin A (lead 824; signal lead) Status X01
Pin C (lead 050, ground) bypassed to pin B (lead 821; signal lead) Status X10
Result:
YES:Repair the remote control switch as needed and carry out an operational test.
Operational test for left remote control switch (S68)

( 1 ) Checking the combination of signals in diagnostic addresses BCU112 and 114.
Action:
1.1 - Checking the "raise" function
BCU112 - Status, left remote control switch (S68)

Switch at "raise" Status X10
Result:
YES:GO TO: 1.2.
NO:GO TO: Circuit/harness test for left remote control switch (S68) .
Action:
1.2 - Checking the "lower" function
BCU114 - Status, left remote control switch (S68)

Switch at "lower" Status X10
Result:
NO:GO TO: Circuit/harness test for left remote control switch (S68) .
Reference 245-BCU-143, Circuit Test for Rockshaft Control Stepper

Motor (M08)
Layout of leads for rockshaft control stepper motor
LEGEND:
M08 Rockshaft control stepper motor
X92 4-pin plug, rockshaft control stepper motor
Circuit/harness test for rockshaft control stepper motor (M08)

IMPORTANT:
( 1 ) Check the rockshaft control stepper motor (M08)
Action:
Disconnect plug X92
Use a JT05791A multimeter to measure resistance at the stepper motor between pins A and B and between pins C and D.
Rockshaft control stepper motor (M08)

Coil 1 (pins A and B): Resistance 1.2 +/- 0.12 ohms
Coil 2 (pins C and D): Resistance 1.2 +/- 0.12 ohms
Result:
YES:Check control lead circuit (control leads 859, 858, 855 and 554) (see drawing for layout of leads). Repair as needed and
NO:Replace rockshaft control stepper motor (M08) and carry out an operational test.
Reference 245-BCU-145, Circuit Test for HMS Switch (S43)
Layout of leads for HMS switch (S43)
LEGEND:
S43 HMS switch
X242 3-pin plug, HMS switch
F04/9 Fuse
Circuit/harness test for HMS switch (S43)
References
IMPORTANT:
Action:
1.1 - Harness test

Disconnect the 3-pin plug (X242) for HMS switch (S43).
Address BCU014 - Harness test for various signals at the HMS switch
Plug disconnected: Status XX0X
Pin A (lead 973, positive, 12 volts) bypassed to pin B (lead 522; HMS switch in ON position) Status XX1X
Result:
YES:Replace the HMS switch and carry out an operational test.
NO:GO TO 1.2.
Action:
Use a JT05791A multimeter to check the supply voltage at plug X242.
Power supply for HMS switch to plug X242

Result:
test.
Operational test for HMS switch (S43)

Action:
BCU014 - Status, HMS switch

HMS switch OFF: Status XX0X
HMS switch ON: Status XX1X
Result:
NO:GO TO: Circuit/harness test for HMS switch (S43) .
Reference 245-BCU-146, Circuit Test for Brake Pedal Switch (B112)
Layout of leads for brake pedal switch (B112)
LEGEND:
B112 Brake pedal switch
X05 7-pin plug for trailer socket
X106 4-pin brake light plug
X107 4-pin brake light plug
X324 8-pin plug for brake pedal switch
X430 42-pin plug between harness W08 and harness W30
F05/01 Fuse
W30 Harness at rear end of transmission
Circuit/harness test for brake pedal switch (B112)
Switch B112 is provided with a 12-volt power supply via fuse F05/01.
• Reference 240-10-026 , SE16J-Basic Control Unit (BCU) (Braking System and Handbrake Monitor Unit).
IMPORTANT:
Action:
1.1 - Harness test:
• Pull out the 8-pin plug (X324) for brake pedal switch (B112).
Address BCU005 - Harness test for various signals at the brake pedal switch (B112)
Pin A (lead 273, 12-volt positive) bypassed to pin C (lead 244; left brake pedal) Status X10X
Pin A (lead 273, 12-volt positive) bypassed to pin D (lead 245; right brake pedal) Status X01X
Result:
YES:Remove brake pedal switch (B112) and do an operational test as described at Reference 240-15-021 , SE16J - Basic
Control Unit (BCU) (Brake System and Handbrake Monitor Unit); replace with a new switch if necessary.
NO:GO TO 1.2.
Action:
Supply voltage for brake pedal switch at plug X324

Result:
YES:Check signal lead circuit (lead 244 or 245). Recondition as needed and repeat the test.
NO:Check the power supply circuit (fuse F05/01; positive lead 273). Recondition as needed and repeat the test.
Operational test on brake pedal switch (B112)

Action:
BCU 005 - Status of brake pedal switch (B112)

Left brake pedal not activated: Status X1XX
Left brake pedal activated: Status X0XX
Right brake pedal not activated: Status XX1X
Right brake pedal activated: Status XX0X
Result:
NO:GO TO: Circuit/harness test for brake pedal switch (B112) .
Reference 245-BCU-147, Circuit Test for Seat Switch (S40)
Layout for leads for seat switch (S40):
LEGEND:
F04/09 Fuse
Circuit/harness test for seat switch (S40)
Switch S40 is provided with a 12-volt power supply via fuse F04/09.
• Reference 240-10-017 , SE16A-Basic Control unit (BCU) (Rear PTO and External Control).
References
IMPORTANT:
Action:
1.1 - Harness test:
• Disconnect the 2-pin plug (X230) for seat switch (S40).
• Perform this test on plug X230 (cab harness W08).
Address BCU008 - Harness test for various signals at the seat switch (S40)
Pin A (lead 973, positive: 12 volts) bypassed to pin B (lead 807; seat switch signal) Status XXX1
Result:
YES:Remove seat switch (S40) and do an operational test as described at Reference 240-15-013 , SE16A - Basic Control Unit
(BCU) (Rear PTO and External Control); replace with a new switch if necessary.
NO:GO TO 1.2
Action:
Power supply for seat switch to plug X230

Result:
YES:Check the signal lead circuit (lead 807). Repair as needed and repeat the test.
Operational test on seat switch (S40)

( 1 ) Checking the input signal from the seat switch in diagnostic address BCU008
Action:
BCU 008 - Status of seat switch (S40)
Seat vacant: Status XXX0
Seat occupied: Status XXX1
Result:
NO:GO TO: Circuit/harness test for seat switch (S40)
Reference 245-BCU-148, Circuit Test for Reverse Drive Lever without N

Indicator Light (A47)
Layout of leads for reverse drive lever (A47) (without "N" indicator light).
LEGEND:
EPC Transmission control unit
F05/4 Fuse
F05/6 Fuse
W08 Cab harness
X489 68-pin plug for Electronic PowrQuad Controller (EPC)
X490/1 8-pin plug for reverse drive lever
XGND5 Ground point
Circuit/harness test for reverse drive lever (A47)
The signals (forward, reverse and not-neutral) of reverse drive lever (A47) are registered by Hall sensors. The basic control unit
(BCU) needs the forward/reverse signal to provide a ground connection for coil circuit of transmission enable relay K07/4.
The detent coil in reverse drive lever (A47) ensures that lever (A47) is held in its forward or reverse position provided a correct
forward or reverse signal has been received.


• Reference 240-10-024 , SE16H - BCU (Power Supply, Acoustic Alarm).
• Reference 240-10-035 , SE26-Transmission Control.
Section 245, Group BCU.
IMPORTANT:
When ignition is "ON", disconnected plugs may cause additional diagnostic trouble codes. The fault
( 1 ) Check fuses
Action:
Check the fuses:
F05/04
F05/06
Result:
YES: GO TO 2 .
NO:Replace the fuses with new ones and carry out an “Operational test on reverse drive lever (A47)” .
( 2 ) Check the harness in diagnostic mode
Action:
2.1 - Harness test in diagnostic mode (address BCU017):
• Pull out the 8-pin plug for reverse drive lever (X490/1; in cab harness W08).
X490/1 - 8-pin plug for reverse drive lever
• This test must be performed at plug X490/1.
• Access addressBCU017 :
Address BCU017 - Harness test for reverse drive lever (A47)

Plug disconnected: Status 0000
Pin C (lead 572, 12 volts positive) bypassed to pin D (lead 590, forward) Status 0100
Pin C (lead 572, 12 volts positive) bypassed to pin E (lead 569, reverse) Status 0001
Result:
YES:Harness is OK: Repair the reverse drive lever as needed and carry out an "Operational test for reverse drive lever (A47)" .
NO:GO TO 2.2.
Action:
Use a JT05791A multimeter to check the supply voltage at plug X490/1 (cowl harness W09):
Power supply for reverse drive lever (forward and reverse)

Power supply for reverse drive lever (not neutral)

Result:
YES:Check faulty signal lead(s) in cab wiring harness W08 (see illustration for layout of leads). Repair as needed and carry out
a "Reverse drive lever (A47) operational test" .
NO:Check the power supply circuit (positive leads 572 and 589) (see illustration for layout of leads). Repair as needed and
carry out a "Reverse drive lever (A47) operational test" .
Operational test on reverse drive lever (A47)

( 1 ) Checking the reverse drive lever (A47)
Action:
BCU017 - Status, reverse drive lever signals (A47)

Reverse drive lever in neutral: Status 0000
Reverse drive lever in forward position: Status 0110
Reverse drive lever in reverse position: Status 0011
Result:
YES:• Diagnosis completed.• Type of error indicates a loose contact, Circuit/harness test for detent coil on reverse drive lever
(A47) .
NO: Circuit/harness test for reverse drive lever (A47) .
Reference 245-BCU-149, Circuit Test for Reverse Drive Lever with N

Indicator Light (A68/1)
Layout of leads for reverse drive lever (A68/1) (with "N" indicator light)
LEGEND:
F05/4 Fuse
F05/6 Fuse
W08 Cab harness
XGND5 Ground point
Circuit/harness test for reverse drive lever (A68/1)
The signals (forward, reverse and not-neutral) of reverse drive lever (A68/1) are registered by Hall sensors. The transmission
control unit (EPC) needs the forward/reverse signal to provide a ground connection for coil circuit of transmission enable relay
K07/4.

• Reference 240-10-024 , SE16H - BCU (Power Supply, Acoustic Alarm).
Section 245, Group BCU.
IMPORTANT:
( 1 ) Check fuses
Action:
Check the fuses:
F05/04
F05/06
Result:
YES: GO TO 2 .
NO:Replace the fuses with new ones and carry out an “Operational test on reverse drive lever (A68/1)” .
Action:
• Perform test on plug X490/1 (cab harness W08).
• Access addressBCU017 .
Address BCU017 - Harness test for reverse drive lever (A68/1)

Plug disconnected: Status 0000
Pin C (lead 572, 12 volts positive) bypassed to pin D (lead 590, forward) Status 0100
Pin C (lead 572, 12 volts positive) bypassed to pin E (lead 569, reverse) Status 0001
Result:
YES: GO TO 4 .
NO: GO TO 3 .
( 3 ) Checking the supply voltage
Action:
Use a JT05791A multimeter to check the supply voltage at plug X490/1:

Power supply for reverse drive lever (not neutral)

Result:
a “Reverse drive lever (A68/1) operational test” .
carry out a “Reverse drive lever (A68/1) operational test” .
( 4 ) Check circuit of resistor in reverse drive lever (A68/1)
Action:

Harness test for resistor in reverse drive lever (A68/1)

Check for continuity between pin G (lead 310, ground) and any suitable ground point Status Continuity present
Check for continuity between pin F (lead 614, positive) and pin 3 on EPC plug X489 Status Continuity present
Result:
NO:Check power supply circuit (ground point XGND5, supply lead 614 and ground lead 310) (see illustration for layout of
leads). Repair as needed and carry out a “Reverse drive lever (A68/1) operational test” .
Operational test on reverse drive lever (A68/1)

( 1 ) Checking the reverse drive lever (A68/1)
Action:
BCU017 - Status, reverse drive lever signals (A68/1)

Reverse drive lever in neutral: Status 0000
Reverse drive lever in forward position: Status 0110
Reverse drive lever in reverse position: Status 0011
Result:
YES:• Diagnosis completed.

• Type of error indicates a loose contact, Circuit/harness test for reverse drive lever (A68/1) .
NO: Circuit/harness test for reverse drive lever (A68/1) .
Reference 245-BCU-175, Circuit Test for Turn Signal Switch (S08) –

Tractors with PowrQuad Transmission
Layout of leads for turn signal switch
LEGEND:
S08 3-pin plug for turn signal switch
F04/09 Fuse
Circuit/harness test for turn signal switch (S08)
The turn signal switch is provided with a 12-volt power supply via fuse F04/9.
IMPORTANT:
Action:
1.1 - Harness test
• Disconnect the 3-pin plug (S08) for turn signal switch.
• This test must be performed at plug S08.
Address BCU010 - Harness test for various signals at the turn signal switch
Pin 2 (lead 973, positive, 12 volts) bypassed to pin 1 (lead 155; LEFT turn signal) Status X10X
Pin 2 (lead 973, positive, 12 volts) bypassed to pin 3 (lead 127; RIGHT turn signal) Status X01X
Result:
YES:Replace the turn signal switch and carry out an operational test.
NO:GO TO 1.2.
Action:
Use a JT05791A multimeter to check the power supply at plug S08.
Supply voltage for turn signal switch to plug S08

between pin 2 (lead 973, positive; 12 volt) and any suitable ground point: Voltage 12 volts
Result:
YES:Check signal voltage circuit (leads 155, 127). Repair as needed and repeat the test.
Operational test for turn signal switch (S08)

Action:
BCU010 - Status, turn signal switch (S08)

Turn-signal lever not actuated: Status X00X
LEFT turn signal: Status X10X
RIGHT turn signal: Status X01X
Result:
NO:GO TO: Circuit/harness test for turn signal switch (S08) .
Reference 245-BCU-200, Theory of Operation (Basic Functions)
Basic function control elements only
LEGEND:
A46 Control unit for PowrQuad Plus transmission
A64 Basic control unit
B01 Engine speed sending unit
B06 Rear PTO speed sending unit
B35 Wheel speed sending unit
B37 Handbrake switch
B39 Travel speed sending unit (radar)
B58 Front PTO speed sending unit
B112 Brake switch
H09 Front-wheel drive indicator light
H17 Differential lock indicator light
H19 Front PTO indicator light
H34 L.h. front turn signal light
H35 L.h. rear turn signal light
H42 R.h. front turn signal light
H43 R.h. rear turn signal light
H55 PTO preselector indicator light
H56 Rear PTO indicator light
H82 HMS indicator light
H83 Program 1 indicator light
H84 Program 2 indicator light
K07/4 Enable relay (on tractors with PowrQuad Plus transmission only)
K07/6 Relay for cold-weather starting aid
P11 Basic informator BIF (on tractors with PowrQuad Plus transmission only)
P21 Instrument unit (on tractors with PowrQuad transmission only)
S05 Front-wheel drive switch (on tractors with HMS only)
S06 Front PTO switch
S08 Turn signal switch
S21 Rear PTO switch
S22 Differential lock switch
S40 Seat switch
S43 Headland Management System (HMS) switch
S44 Switch for rear PTO remote control, l.h.
S45 PTO preselector switch
S62 Hazard warning light switch (on tractors with PowrQuad Plus transmission only)
S63 Front-wheel drive switch (on tractors without HMS only)
S95 Record/save switch
S100 Program switch
S106 Hazard warning light switch (on tractors with PowrQuad transmission only)
S121 Switch for PTO remote control, r.h.
X132 7-terminal signal socket
X234 Connecting point, 7-terminal socket
Y01 Front PTO solenoid valve
Y03 Front-wheel drive solenoid valve
Y04 Rear PTO solenoid valve
Y05 Differential lock solenoid valve
BIF Basic informator (on tractors with PowrQuad Plus transmission only)
EPC Control unit for PowrQuad Plus transmission
A Power supply for Basic Control Unit (BCU)
B CAN BUS lines
C Current in
BCU - Basic Control Unit (BCU), basic functions
→NOTE:
The text below describes the basic functions. For description of hitch control refer to Reference 245-
BCU-201 , Theory of Operation (Hitch Control)" in this Group.
[1] - General information:
BCU, general information
General information
Function: The BCU is responsible for controlling the basic functions of the tractor and the hitch.
Location: On the l.h. side below the operator′s seat
The BCU is responsible or controlling the electronics. The control unit receives and processes data and then makes this information available to other
electronic control units.
The following systems are also controlled:
• Acoustic alarm:
System diagnostics (diagnostic addresses) in the control unit allow a warning tone to be emitted when:
- The turn signals flash (this function can be set on or off),
- The handbrake is applied,
- The rear PTO remote control is activated while the engine is running,
- HMS is activated and deactivated,
- Reaching or exceeding a service interval.
• Speed-dependent engagement and disengagement of front wheel drive (with front-wheel drive switch in AUTO position):
- front wheel drive is disengaged above 23 km/h (14 mph),
- front wheel drive is re-engaged below 21 km/h (13 mph).
• Engagement of front-wheel drive when brakes are applied (with front-wheel drive switch in off position):
Front-wheel drive is always engaged during braking with brake pedals locked together.
• Speed-dependent engagement and disengagement of differential lock:
- differential lock is disengaged above 12 km/h (7.5 mph).
Manual engagement is possible only at speeds below 12 km/h (7.5 mph).
Description:
• Control of rear PTO and rear PTO remote control.
• Control of front PTO.
• Speed-dependent turn signal deactivation:
Automatic de-activation during brief turn signal activation (under 1 second). The de-activation interval is speed dependent.
• Headland Management System (HMS):
The switch activates automatic engagement and disengagement of differential lock, front-wheel drive and rear PTO.
• Alternator control.
• Transmission enable relay control depending on reverse drive lever position.
• Measurement of wheel speed:
Speed is processed on the basis of wheel revolutions per minute and tire size, and then passed on to the basic informator (BIF) and other control
units.
• Ground speed measurement:
Ground speed is measured using radar. The results are displayed on the performance monitor.
• Engine speed:
Engine speed is taken from the engine speed sender (B01), processed by the control unit and sent to the basic informator (BIF) and other control
units.
• Signal socket:
Receptacle for controlling implements using ground speed and PTO speed information.
[2] - Diagnostic program information:
BCU, diagnostic program information
Diagnostic program information
Input addresses See: Reference 245-BCU-001 , Calibration and Input Addresses of Basic Functions.
Diagnostic addresses (DIA) and output addresses (ROM) See: Reference 245-05-010 , Basic Control Unit - Summary of Addresses.
Interactive calibration: ---
Interactive test: ---
Reference 245-BCU-201, Theory of Operation (Hitch Control)
Only hitch controls shown
LEGEND:
A Depth setting control
B Rate-of-drop control
C Raise-limit control
A64 BCU (basic control unit)
B19 Draft sensor, right
B20 Draft sensor, left (if equipped)
B21 Hitch control position sensor
B26 Sensitivity potentiometer
B27 Operation unit
S24 Rapid-raise switch
S23 Remote control switch, right
S68 Remote control switch, left
Section 245 - ELECTRONIC CONTROL UNITS Group BIF: BIF - Basic Informator
M08 Stepper motor for hitch control
BCU - Basic Control Unit, hitch control
→NOTE:
The text below describes the hitch control. For description of basic functions, see Reference 245-BCU-200
in this Group.
BCU, general information
General information
The BCU monitors and controls the position, mixed and draft control of the hitch. Desired and actual values are determined, analysed and
Function:
coordinated.
The desired values (voltage signals) are sent to the BCU via the various hitch control circuits (depth control (A), height-limit control (C), rate-of-drop
control (B), draft sensitivity control (B19 and B20) and switch (S24)).
During operation, the current lift arm position - via the position sensor circuit (B21) - and the draft resistance of an implement - via draft sensor circuit
Description: - is transmitted to the BCU as actual value or as corresponding voltage signal.
These voltage signals are processed in the BCU. Desired and actual values are compared. If deviations occur a corresponding control pulse is sent to
the stepper motor (M08). The stepper motor opens the raise or lower valve in accordance with the control pulse in hitch valve. This causes the lift
arms to rise or lower until desired and actual values are matching.
BCU, diagnostic program information
Input addresses See: Reference 245-BCU-002 , Calibration and Input Addresses of Hitch Control.
Diagnostic addresses (DIA) and output addresses (ROM) See: Reference 245-05-010 , Basic Control Unit - Summary of Addresses.
Interactive calibration: Interactive calibration possible with Service ADVISOR.
Group BIF - BIF - Basic Informator

Reference 245-BIF-001, Calibration and Input Addresses
( 1 ) Procedure
Action:
Before entering the program mode and accessing the relevant addresses, see Reference 245-05-002 , “Accessing the
Addresses and Diagnostic Trouble Codes”.
Result:
Address BIF022 - Gear indicator in digital display

( 1 ) AddressBIF022
Action:
Without gear indicator for PowrQuad transmission: Input = 0
With gear indicator for PowrQuad Plus transmission: Input = 1
Result:
NO:Correct the input
Address BIF023 - Worklight alarm

( 1 ) AddressBIF023
Action:
Input = 023
Enter the value for the speed in km/h at which the alarm should be activated.
Result:
Address BIF024 - Units of measurement used in displays

( 1 ) AddressBIF024
Action:
Customary units (mph, ft; etc.): Input = 0
Metric units (km/h, m, etc.): Input = 1
Result:
Address BIF027 - Indicator light test

( 1 ) AddressBIF027
Action:
All the indicator lights are powered for 2 seconds: Input = 000
Rear PTO speed indicator lights (1000, 540E and 540) are excluded from the bulb test. All the other indicator lights are
powered for 2 seconds: Input = 001
Result:
Address BIF028 - Clock operation

( 1 ) AddressBIF028
Action:
The clock is inoperative and will not be displayed: Input = 0
The clock is activated and time is displayed using the 12-hour system: Input = 1
The clock is activated and time is displayed using the 24-hour system: Input = 2
Result:
Address BIF029 - Electrical starting aid

( 1 ) AddressBIF029
Action:
All tractor models without starting aid: Input = 0
All tractor models with starting aid: Input = 2
Result:
Address BIF035 - Instrument lighting brightness

( 1 ) AddressBIF035
Action:
→NOTE:
The value is a percentage. Values between 0 (dim) and 100 (bright) can be entered.
Result:
Address BIF036 - Select the information source for engine oil pressure
and coolant temperature
( 1 ) AddressBIF036
Action:
Assessment of sender signals directly from the coolant temperature sensor and engine oil pressure sender: Input = 0
→NOTE:
This address is associated with address BIF066.
Result:
Address BIF037 - Ground speed sending unit

( 1 ) AddressBIF037
Action:
Inductive sender (all tractor models without creeper): Input = 0
Hall sender (all tractor models with creeper): Input = 1
Radar (all tractors with radar): Input = 2
Result:
Address BIF038 - Language selection

Only with standard instrument unit with operator information.
( 1 ) AddressBIF038
Action:
English, symbols and diagnostic trouble codes: Input = 0
German, symbols and diagnostic trouble codes: Input = 1
French, symbols and diagnostic trouble codes: Input = 2

Spanish, symbols and diagnostic trouble codes: Input = 3
No text, symbols and diagnostic trouble codes: Input = 4
Result:
Address BIF039 - Rear PTO speed indication

Adjusting display type for analog speed display.
( 1 ) AddressBIF039
Action:
No analog indication: Input = 0
Primarily analog PTO speed indication: Input = 1
Primarily analog engine speed indication: Input = 2
Result:
Address BIF060 - Front PTO control function

( 1 ) AddressBIF060
Action:
Without front PTO: Input = 0
With front PTO: Input = 1
Result:
Address BIF066 - Data Bus control function

( 1 ) AddressBIF066
Action:
Transmission of data records on data bus: Input = 003
→NOTE:
This address is associated with address BIF036 and is important for communication with the Basic Control
Unit (BCU).
Result:
Address BIF247 - Tractor model designation

( 1 ) AddressBIF247
Action:
E.g.: 5620 tractor: Input = 005620
Result:
Address BIF248 - Tractor serial number

( 1 ) AddressBIF248
Action:
E.g.: Serial number 123456: Input = 123456
Result:
Reference 245-BIF-100, Preliminary Test of BIF Circuit

Problem:
Most wiring harness problems are caused by connector problems (contacts loose/bad/slid back) and/or bad ground connections.
Procedure
Before a detailed circuit check is performed and in the case of occasional circuit problems (loose contacts), all the “accessible”
components of the respective circuit must be checked.
1. Harness test in diagnostic mode:

Access addressBIF002 and tug gently on the relevant harness (plug connection) to ascertain if the contacts are
loose/poor.
signal (“beep”) and the relevant diagnostic address appears in the display.
2. Visual check on relevant electrical circuit components:
The mating surfaces of ground contacts and the appropriate fixing element are to be checked for damage
Reference 245-BIF-101, Circuit Test for Fuel Gauge Sending Unit (B03)
Layout of leads for fuel gauge sending unit
LEGEND:
X86 3-pin plug, fuel gauge sending unit
X26 26-pin plug, basic informator
F05/08 10-amp fuse
W28 Front part of transmission wiring harness
Circuit/harness test for fuel gauge sender (B03)
• Reference 240-10-004 , "SE2-Basic Informator/Instrument Unit"

contacts), all components of the respective circuit must be checked (see procedure for "Preliminary Check of BIF Circuit" in
Section 245, Group BIF).
IMPORTANT:
( 1 ) Check the harness (W28 at front end of transmission)
Action:
1.1 - Harness test:
• Disconnect the 3-pin plug (X86) of the fuel gauge sending unit (B03).
• This test must be performed at plug X86 (harness W28 at front end of transmission).
Access addressBIF016 .
BIF016 — Voltage, fuel gauge sender (B03)

Plug disconnected (tank full): Voltage 0 volts
Pin B (lead 322, signal lead) bypassed to pin C (ground): Voltage 12 volts
Result:
YES:Replace the fuel gauge sender with a new one and carry out an operational test.
NO:GO TO 1.2
Action:
Power supply, fuel gauge sending unit at plug X86

between pin D (lead 322) and any suitable ground point: Voltage 12 volts
Result:
YES: GO TO 2 .
NO:Check signal lead circuit (lead 353) (see illustration for layout of leads). Repair as needed and carry out an operational test.
( 2 ) Check fuel gauge sender (B03)
Action:
Use a JT05791A multimeter to measure resistance between terminals A and C on the fuel gauge sending unit:
Fuel gauge sender (B03)

Empty tank: Resistance 10 (+/- 2.5) ohms
Full tank: Resistance 180 (+12/- 2) ohms
Result:
NO:Replace the sender and repeat the test.
Operational test for fuel gauge sender (B03)

( 1 ) Checking the fuel level in diagnostic address BIF031
Action:
1.1 - Fuel level in percent:
Access addressBIF031 and compare the displayed fuel tank level with actual level in fuel tank:
BIF031 –– Status, fuel gauge sender (B03) in %

Fuel tank level: Percentage between 0 and 100
Result:
NO:GO TO: Circuit/harness test for fuel gauge sender (B03)
Reference 245-BIF-102, Circuit Test for Coolant Temperature Gauge

Sender (B08)
Layout of leads for coolant temperature gauge sender
LEGEND:
X262 2-pin plug, sender for coolant temperature gauge
Circuit/harness test for coolant temperature sender (B08)

IMPORTANT:
( 1 ) Checking the wiring harness (engine harness W02)
Action:
1.1 - Harness test:
• Disconnect the 2-pin plug (X262) of the coolant temperature sender.
• Perform this test on plug X262 (engine harness W02).
BIF034 — Voltage, coolant temperature sender (B08)

Plug disconnected: Voltage 4 volts
Pin A (lead 329, signal lead) bypassed to pin B (ground): Voltage 0 volts
Result:
YES:Replace the coolant temperature sender with a new one and carry out an operational test.
NO:GO TO 1.2
Action:
Supply voltage for coolant temperature sender at plug X262

between pin A (lead 329) and any suitable ground point: Voltage 4 volts
Result:
YES: GO TO 2 .
( 2 ) Checking the coolant temperature sender (B08)
Action:
→NOTE:
The values are only correct when the sender is removed from the circuit.
Coolant temperature sender (B08)
Coolant temperature sender (B08)
Temperature in °C Resistance in ohms Temperature in °C Resistance in ohms
-40 99301 45 1194
-35 72883 50 979
-30 52586 55 808
-25 38485 60 670
-20 28512 65 559
-15 21386 70 468
-10 16134 75 394
-5 12230 80 333
0 9401 85 283
5 7273 90 241
10 5661 95 207
15 4441 100 178
20 3512 105 153
25 2796 110 133
30 2239 115 115
35 1806 120 100
40 1465 125 88
Result:
Operational test for sender (B08) of coolant temperature gauge

( 1 ) Checking the temperature values of coolant temperature sender (B08) in diagnostic address BIF034
Action:
BIF034 — Status, coolant temperature sender (B08) in °C

Coolant temperature: Temperature (in °C) between -040 and +113
Result:
YES:BIF temperature reading does correspond to actual coolant temperature
NO:BIF temperature reading does NOT correspond to actual engine coolant temperature: GO TO: Circuit/Harness test for
Coolant Temperature Sender (B08)
Reference 245-BIF-103, Circuit Test for Hydraulic Oil Temperature

Sender (B60)
Layout of leads for hydraulic oil temperature sender
LEGEND:
X307 2-pin plug, hydraulic oil temperature sender
Hydraulic oil temperature sender (B60), circuit/harness test


IMPORTANT:
Action:
1.1 - Harness test:
• Disconnect the 2-pin plug (X307) of the sender for the hydraulic oil temperature gauge.
BIF015 — Voltage, hydraulic oil temperature sender (B60)

Plug disconnected: Voltage 4 volts
Pin A (lead 602, signal lead) bypassed to pin B (ground): Voltage 0 volts
Result:
YES:Replace the hydraulic oil temperature sender with a new one and carry out an operational test.
NO:GO TO 1.2
Action:
Supply voltage for hydraulic oil temperature at plug X307

between pin A (lead 602) and any suitable ground point: Voltage 4 volts
Result:
YES: GO TO 2 .
( 2 ) Checking the hydraulic oil temperature sender (B60)
Action:
→NOTE:
The values are only correct when the sender is removed from the circuit.
Hydraulic oil temperature sender (B60)
Hydraulic oil temperature sender (B60)
Temperature in °C Resistance in ohms Temperature in °C Resistance in ohms
-40 99301 45 1194
-35 72883 50 979
-30 52586 55 808
-25 38485 60 670
-20 28512 65 559
-15 21386 70 468
-10 16134 75 394
-5 12230 80 333
0 9401 85 283
5 7273 90 241
10 5661 95 207
15 4441 100 178
20 3512 105 153
25 2796 110 133
30 2239 115 115
35 1806 120 100
40 1465 125 88
Result:
Operational test for hydraulic oil temperature sender (B60)

( 1 ) Checking hydraulic oil temperature sender (B60) in diagnostic address BIF033
Action:
BIF033 — Status, hydraulic oil temperature sender (B60) in °C

Hydraulic oil temperature Temperature (050 is equivalent to 50°C) between -040 and +105
Result:
NO:Address BIF033 displays the wrong value. GO TO: Circuit/harness test for hydraulic oil temperature sender (B60) .
Reference 245-BIF-104, Circuit Test for Engine Oil Pressure Sender

(B04)
Layout of leads for engine oil pressure sender
LEGEND:
X78 1-pin plug for engine oil pressure sender
Circuit/harness test for engine oil pressure sender (B04)
When pressure-free, the engine oil pressure sender (B04) directs ground current to the input side of the BIF.

IMPORTANT:
Action:
1.1 - Harness test:
• Disconnect the 1-pin plug (X78) for engine oil pressure sender (B04).
Address BIF013 — Harness test for various signals at the engine oil pressure sender
Pin A (lead 347, signal lead) bypassed to any suitable ground point Status XX0
Result:
YES:Replace the engine oil pressure sender and carry out an operational test.
NO:GO TO 1.2.
Action:
Supply voltage for engine oil pressure sender at plug X78

between pin A (lead 347, signal lead) and any suitable ground point: Voltage 5 volts
Result:
YES:Replace the engine oil pressure sender and carry out an operational test.
Operational test for engine oil pressure sender (B04)

( 1 ) Checking engine oil pressure sender (B04) in diagnostic address BIF013
Action:
BIF013 — Status, engine oil pressure sender (B04)
Engine not running: Status (pressure) XX1 (no pressure, sender is closed)
Engine running: Status (pressure) XX0 (pressure in circuit, sender is open)
Result:
NO:GO TO: Circuit/Harness test for Engine Oil Pressure Sender (B04) .
Reference 245-BIF-105, Circuit Test for Transmission Oil Pressure

Sender (B31)
Layout of leads for transmission oil pressure sender
LEGEND:
X83 2-pin plug for transmission oil pressure sender
Circuit/harness test for transmission oil pressure sender (B31)
When pressure-free, the transmission oil pressure sender (B31) directs ground current to the input side of the BIF.

IMPORTANT:
Action:
1.1 - Harness test:
• Disconnect the 2-pin plug (X83) of transmission oil pressure sender (B31).
Address BIF012 — Harness test for various signals at the transmission oil pressure sender
Pin A (lead 515, signal lead) bypassed to pin B (lead 310, ground) Status 0XX
Result:
YES:Replace the transmission oil pressure sender and carry out an operational test.
NO:GO TO 1.2.
Action:
Supply voltage for transmission oil pressure sender at plug X83

Result:
YES:Check ground lead circuit (lead 310) (see illustration for layout of leads). Repair as needed and carry out an operational
test.
Operational test for transmission oil pressure sender (B31)

( 1 ) Checking transmission oil pressure sender (B31) in diagnostic address BIF012
Action:
BIF012 — Status, transmission oil pressure sender (B31)

Engine not running: Status (pressure) 1XX (no pressure, sender is closed)
Engine running: Status (pressure) 0XX (Pressure in circuit, Sender is OPEN)
Result:
NO:GO TO: Circuit/harness test for transmission oil pressure sender (B31) .
Reference 245-BIF-106, Circuit Test of Sender for Restricted Air Cleaner

Warning Light (B02)
Layout of leads, sender for restricted air cleaner warning light
LEGEND:
X70 2-pin plug, sender for restricted air cleaner warning light
Circuit/harness test for sender (B02; restricted air cleaner warning
light)
When pressure-free, the air cleaner restriction warning light (B02) directs ground current to the input side of the BIF.

IMPORTANT:
Action:
1.1 - Harness test:
• Disconnect the 2-pin plug (X70) for the sender (B02) of the air cleaner restriction warning light.
Address BIF012 — Harness test for various signals at the sender of the air cleaner restriction warning light
Pin A (lead 351, signal lead) bypassed to pin B (lead 310, ground) Status XX0
Result:
YES:Replace the sender of the air cleaner restriction warning light with a new one and perform an operational test.
NO:GO TO 1.2.
Action:
Supply voltage for sender of air cleaner restriction warning light at plug X70
Result:
YES:Check ground lead circuit (lead 310) (see illustration for layout of leads). Repair as needed and carry out an operational
test.
Operational test for sender (B02) of air cleaner restriction warning light
( 1 ) Checking the sender (B02; restricted air cleaner warning light) in diagnostic address BIF012
Action:
BIF012 — Status, sender (B02) for air cleaner restriction warning light
Air cleaner restricted: Status XX0
Air cleaner not restricted: Status XX1
Result:
NO:GO TO: Circuit/harness test for sender (B02; restricted air cleaner warning light) .
Reference 245-BIF-107, Circuit Test for Alternator D+ Voltage
Layout of leads for alternator D+ voltage
LEGEND:
G2-1 1-pin plug for alternator D+ voltage
BIF Basic informator
Circuit/harness test for alternator D+ voltage
The BIF measures the D+ voltage of the alternator.
For functional schematic refer to:
• Reference 240-10-004 , ”SE2-Basic Informator”
For component location and pin arrangement, refer to:

connections.Before a detailed circuit check is performed andin the case of occasional circuit problems (loose
contacts), all components of the respective circuit must be checked (see procedure for Preliminary Check of BIF Circuit in
IMPORTANT:
( 1 ) Checking the alternator
Action:
• Use a JT05791A multimeter to check the D+ voltage at pin G02/1 of the alternator:
BIF032 — Voltage, alternator D+ voltage

With engine running at low idle, between pin G02/1 and any suitable ground point: Voltage between 11.2 and 15.4 volts
Engine running at 1500 rpm, between pin G02/1 and any suitable ground point: Voltage between 12.5 and 15.4 volts
Result:
YES:Check circuit for D+ voltage lead (lead 326) (see illustration for layout of leads). Repair as needed and carry out an
operational test.
NO:Replace the alternator with a new one and repeat the operational test.
Alternator D+ voltage, operational test

( 1 ) Checking the alternator D+ voltage in diagnostic address BIF032
Action:
BIF032 — Voltage, alternator D+ voltage

Engine running at low idle: Voltage between 11.2 and 15.4 volts
Engine running at 1500 rpm: Voltage between 12.5 and 15.4 volts
Result:
NO:GO TO: Circuit/harness test for alternator D+ voltage
Reference 245-BIF-108, Circuit Test of Sender for Restricted Oil Filter

Warning Light (B07)
Layout of leads for sender (oil filter restriction warning light)
LEGEND:
X80 2-pin plug, sender for restricted oil filter warning light
Circuit/harness test for sender (B07; restricted oil filter warning light)
When pressure-free, the oil filter restriction warning light (B07) directs ground current to the input side of the BIF.

IMPORTANT:
Action:
1.1 - Harness test:
• Disconnect the 2-pin plug (X80) for the sender (B07) of the oil filter restriction warning light.
Address BIF012 — Harness test for various signals at the sender of the oil filter restriction warning light
Pin A (lead 606, signal lead) bypassed to pin B (ground lead): Status X0X
Result:
YES:Replace the sender of the oil filter restriction warning light with a new one and perform an operational test.
NO:GO TO 1.2.
Action:
Supply voltage for sender of oil filter restriction warning light at plug X80
Result:
YES:Replace the sender of the oil filter restriction warning light with a new one and perform an operational test.
Sender (B07; oil filter restriction indicator light)

( 1 ) Checking the sender (B07; restricted oil filter warning light) in diagnostic address BIF012
Action:
BIF013 — Status, oil filter indicator light sender (B07)
Filter clogged: Status (pressure) X1X (Pressure in circuit, Sender is CLOSED)
Filter not clogged: Status (pressure) X0X (No pressure in circuit, Sender is OPEN)
Result:
NO:GO TO: Circuit/harness test for sender (B07; restricted oil filter warning light) .
Reference 245-BIF-110, Circuit Test for Switch that Warns of a

Restriction at Hydraulic Oil Filter (B111)
Layout of leads for switch that warns of a restriction at the hydraulic oil filter
LEGEND:
X546 4-pin plug for switch that warns of a restriction at the hydraulic oil filter
Circuit/harness test for restriction warning switch at hydraulic oil filter
(B111)

IMPORTANT:
Action:
1.1 - Harness test:
• Disconnect 4-pin plug (X546) for the switch (B111) that warns of restriction at the hydraulic oil filter.
BIF012 — Status, restriction switch in hydraulic oil filter (B111)

Pin B (lead 606, signal lead) bypassed to pin D (ground lead): Status X1X

Pin C (lead 509, signal lead) bypassed to pin D (ground lead): Status 1XX
Result:
YES:Replace the switch (B111) that warns of restriction at the hydraulic oil filter, and carry out an operational test.
NO:GO TO 1.2.
Action:
Supply voltage for switch that warns of restriction at hydraulic oil filter, at plug X546
between pin B (lead 606, signal lead) and any suitable ground point: Voltage 5 volts
between pin C (lead 509, signal lead) and any suitable ground point: Voltage 5 volts
Result:
YES:Replace the switch (B111) that warns of restriction at the hydraulic oil filter, and carry out an operational test.
NO:Check signal lead circuit (leads 606 and 509) (see illustration for layout of leads). Repair as needed and carry out an
operational test.
Operational test for hydraulic oil filter, restriction warning switch

(B111)
( 1 ) Checking the restriction warning switch (B111) in the hydraulic oil filter in diagnostic address BIF012
Action:

Engine not running: Status (pressure) X1X (No pressure, Sender is closed)
Engine running: Status (pressure) X0X (Pressure in circuit, Sender is OPEN)
Result:
NO:GO TO: Circuit/harness test for switch (B111) that warns of restriction at the hydraulic oil filter .
Reference 245-BIF-200, Theory of Operation
Basic informator (BIF)
LEGEND:
A64 Basic control unit (BCU)
B02 Air cleaner indicator sending unit
Section 245 - ELECTRONIC CONTROL UNITS Group EPC: EPC - Control Unit for PowrQuad Plus Transmission
B03 Fuel gauge sending unit

B04 Sending unit, engine oil pressure light
B07 Transmission oil filter restriction switch
B08 Sending unit for coolant temperature
B29 Low temperature switch
[ With PowrQuad transmission only ]
B30 High temperature switch

B31 Transmission oil pressure sending unit
B60 Transmission oil temperature sending unit
B111 Transmission oil filter restriction switch

P11 Basic informator BIF

P21 Basic informator BIF

S09 Light switch
S10 High/low beam switch
S30 Flash-to-pass switch
S32 Roll-mode switch (RMS)
H22 540 rpm rear PTO speed indicator light

H23 1000 rpm rear PTO speed indicator light

H24 540E rpm rear PTO speed indicator light

A Basic informator BIF (instrument unit) power supply
B CAN BUS lines
BIF - Basic informator
→NOTE:
The digital displays on basic informator (BIF) and performance monitor (PRF) show the same information,
the only difference is the location of the values shown.
BIF, general information
General information
Function: The basic informator (BIF) controls the display, indicators and instruments
Location: In front of the operator, behind the steering wheel.
The basic informator (BIF) collects and processes data and converts this information into values for use by the digital screen, gauges and indicator
lights.
The digital display shows data and values processed by the control unit.
The basic informator also receives a diagnostic program. Diagnostic trouble codes, switch and sending unit status, voltage, speeds, part number,
Description:
software version, tractor model and tractor serial number information can be queried.
The diagnostic mode is activated by holding the roll-mode-switch (RMS), by pressing the service key on the performance monitor (PRF) or by using
Service ADVISOR ™ .
Tests and adjustments are performed directly on the tractor using the digital display or the performance monitor.
BIF, diagnostic program information
Input addresses See: Reference 245-BIF-001 , Calibration and Input Addresses.
Diagnostic addresses (DIA) and output addresses (ROM) See: Reference 245-05-011 , BIF - Basic Informator - Summary of Addresses
Group EPC - EPC - Control Unit for PowrQuad Plus Transmission

Reference 245-EPC-001, Calibration and Input Addresses
CAUTION:
Stay a safe distance away while calibration is taking place. Make sure that no-one is put at risk.
→NOTE:
Entering program mode and accessing the address, see Reference 245-05-002 , Accessing the Addresses
→NOTE:
All digits denoted as "standard values" apply to new or not calibrated control units. Depending on tractor
model and conditions these values may not need to be modified. If the "standard value" does not apply,
the applicable other value must be entered.
Address EPC026 - Input address, reverse drive lever, configuration

( 1 ) AddressEPC026
Action:
Enter applicable code number.
Input address EPC026
Standard value = 001
Input 000 For reverse drive lever without N indicator light (A47) or with N indicator light (A68/1)
Input 001 Reverse drive lever with N indicator light (A68/2) on tractors from serial no. XXXXXX
→NOTE:
Check if configuration is correct by using the internal diagnostic function, see Reference 245-05-004 ,
"Electronic Control Units, Summary of Addresses", under "EPC — Control Unit for PowrQuad Plus
Transmission", Address 007.
Result:
YES:End of input.
Address EPC028 - Input address, tractor model, configuration

( 1 ) AddressEPC028
Action:
Input Address EPC028
Input 056 For tractor model 5620
Result:
YES:End of input.
Address EPC029 - Input address, Engine Integrated Shifting (EIS),

configuration
( 1 ) AddressEPC029
Action:
For tractor models 5620 - 5820: Input = 0
Result:
YES:End of input.
Address EPC030 - Input address, pulses per engine revolution,

configuration
( 1 ) AddressEPC030
Action:
For tractor models 5620 - 5820: Input = 030
Result:
YES:End of input.
Address EPC033 - Input address, system pressure, configuration

( 1 ) AddressEPC033
Action:
For tractor models 5620 - 5820 with 1200 kPa (12 bar; 175 psi) system pressure: Input = 012
Result:
YES:End of input.
Address EPC035 - Input address, temperature difference where other

types of hydraulic oil are used instead of J20C, configuration
→NOTE:
If an hydraulic oil other than J20C is used, "001" must be entered in address EPC037.
( 1 ) AddressEPC035
Action:
Standard value: Input = 014
The temperature difference implies the difference in viscosity in comparison with J20C.
If the viscosity characteristics of the oil used arelower than those of J20C, key in theabsolute value of this difference in
viscosity.The range in values that may be keyed in for viscosity characteristics at address EPC035 is between 000 and
127.
If the viscosity characteristics of the oil used arehigher than those of J20C, key in128 plus the absolute value of this
difference in viscosity.The range in values that may be keyed in for viscosity characteristics higher than those of J20C at
address EPC035 is between 128 and 255.
To select the temperature difference of the alternative oil, key in 001 at address EPC037 before transmission calibration
or the EPC makes use of the J20C characteristics.
Result:
YES:End of input.
Address EPC037 - Input address for hydraulic oils used as an alternative

to J20C, configuration
( 1 ) AddressEPC037
Action:
→NOTE:
Enter "000" for HY-GARD ™ J20C warm-weather oil or "001" for HY-GARD ™ J20D thin cold-weather oil.
For J20C hydraulic oil: Input = 0
For other hydraulic oils: Input = 1
Result:
YES:End of input.
Address EPC038 - Calibration address, transmission calibration
CAUTION:
Take safety precautions! See Reference 270-15-001 .
CAUTION:
Keep at a safe distance when calibrating!
→NOTE:
Interactive calibration possible with Service ADVISOR
→NOTE:
Entering program mode and accessing the address, see Reference 245-05-002 , Accessing the Addresses
→NOTE:
All digits denoted as "standard values" apply to new or not calibrated control units. Depending on tractor
model and conditions these values may not need to be modified. If the "standard value" does not apply,
the applicable other value must be entered.
→NOTE:
Once address EPC038 is activated, the operator must not select functions that affect the engine power
output. Failure to do so can lead to calibration errors, and proper transmission operation is no longer
ensured.
During calibration procedure the following functions should NOT be operated:
Switch the air-conditioning on or off

Steering
Hitch
Brakes (neither foot- nor handbrake)
Clutch (except when continuing with calibration after an error had occurred)
Selective control valves (except for warming up hydraulic oil)
Engaging/disengaging front or rear PTO
Engaging/disengaging front-wheel drive
Engaging/disengaging differential lock
( 1 ) Address EPC038 - Transmission calibration, requirements
Action:
[1] - Heat hydraulic oil to a temperature between 55°C (130°F) and not more than 70°C (160°F) See Reference 270-15-010 ,
Heating Up Hydraulic Oil.
→NOTE:
Heat hydraulic oil to slightly more than 55°C (130°F) to avoid temperature to drop below specified value
until calibration procedure is started.
Oil temperature in °C is displayed in address EPC036.
→NOTE:
Tractor can be driven in address EPC036.
[2] - Once hydraulic oil temperature is between 55°C (130°F) and not more than 70°C (160°F), park tractor on level ground.
Move reverse drive lever to neutral position, range shift lever to park position and disengage handbrake.
IMPORTANT:
The tractor must not move while in neutral, as movement of the machine during calibration causes a
calibration error.
Result:
YES: GO TO 2 .
NO:Repeat procedure.
( 2 ) Select address EPC037
Action:
Input in address EPC037 must be confirmed in order to perform address EPC038 calibration.
IMPORTANT:
Even if the correct value is already displayed in address EPC037 it must be entered again to perform
address EPC038 calibration.
IMPORTANT:
Only proceed to address EPC038 after the value has been confirmed in address EPC037.
Input 000 For J20C hydraulic oil
Input 001 For other hydraulic oils
Result:
YES: GO TO 3 .
NO:Repeat procedure.
( 3 ) Entering the program mode
Action:
Entering program mode and accessing the relevant address, see Reference 245-05-002 , “Accessing Addresses and Diagnostic
Trouble Codes”.
IMPORTANT:
During calibration, run the engine at 2100 ± 50 rpm.
Result:
YES: GO TO 4 .
( 4 ) Entering calibration mode; address EPC038
Action:
Digital display : 000 EPC
Move the turn signal lever up (right turn signal position) until display reads: 038.
Display: 038/CAL (display alternately reads 038 or CAL)
Performance monitor : 000:EPC.01
Keep pressing the "2" button until display reads: 038.
Display: 038/CAL (display alternately reads 038 or CAL)
Result:
YES: GO TO 5 .
NO:Access the diagnostic trouble codes, see Reference 245-05-002 , "Accessing the Addresses and Diagnostic Trouble Codes"
in this Section, Group 05.
( 5 ) Calibration instructions and error messages
Action:
With the performance monitor: Calibration can be started by pressing the "set/save" key.
With the digital display: Calibration can be started by switching the hazard warning light switch on/off.
The display shows calibrated elements, instructions for the operator and malfunctions that have occurred.
Instructions and error messages
Display Meaning Instruction
With the performance monitor: Calibration can be started by pressing

the "set/save" key.
"tCAL" Transmission calibration is not activated at this time.
With the digital display: Calibration can be started by switching the
hazard warning light switch on/off.
With the performance monitor: Calibration can be started by pressing

the "set/save" key.
"Abrt" Transmission calibration has been aborted by the operator
With the digital display: Calibration can be started by switching the
hazard warning light switch on/off.
Type of hydraulic oil has not been entered in address EPC037 before
"OiL" and then
the calibration was started in address EPC038. Specify the hydraulic oil type in EPC037. Re-start calibration.
"tCAL"
Calibration is aborted.
"OiL" and then Oil temperature not in specified range. Heat oil to specified temperature. For calibration, oil temperature must be
a number Value in display indicates present oil temperature. between 55°C (130°F) and 70°C (160°F).
Tractor model designation not entered in address EPC028.

"CnFg" Specify the tractor model in address EPC028. Re-start calibration.
Either ground speed or transmission speed is present during

Park tractor on level ground as movement of the machine during calibration
"SPd" calibration.
causes a calibration error. Re-start calibration.
Display Meaning Instruction
Clutch pedal depressed during calibration. For the period of time,

clutch pedal is depressed, calibration procedure is interrupted.
"CLU" Release the clutch pedal and re-start calibration.
If the clutch pedal is pressed down for longer than 4 seconds,
calibration is aborted.
"Eng" Engine speed is not set in the specified range. Set engine speed to 2100 ± 50 rpm.
Access the diagnostic trouble codes.

Either a proportional valve malfunction has occurred or a diagnostic
"Er01" See Reference 245-05-002 , "Accessing the Addresses and Diagnostic
trouble code is stored.
Trouble Codes".
Access the diagnostic trouble codes.

No transmission shaft movement during transmission speed sensor
"Er02" See Reference 245-05-002 , "Accessing the Addresses and Diagnostic
test.
Trouble Codes".
Either foot- or handbrake applied during calibration. Release foot- or handbrake. Re-start calibration.
If the operator has not made a mistake, diagnostic trouble codes are Access the diagnostic trouble codes.
"Er03" stored. See Reference 245-05-002 , "Accessing the Addresses and Diagnostic
The "come-home" mode is activated. Trouble Codes".
Calibration is aborted. To de-activate the "come-home" mode, see the Operator′s Manual.
Request to move reverse drive lever to neutral position during

"nEU " Move reverse drive lever to neutral position
calibration procedure
Request to move reverse drive lever to forward position during

"For" Move reverse drive lever to forward position
Request to move reverse drive lever to reverse position during

"rEu" Move reverse drive lever to reverse position
Request to move range-shift lever to park lock position during As a first step, the range-shift lever must be moved to its park lock position.
calibration procedure. "For" appears in display to indicate that the reverse drive lever must be
This display appears when control unit currently recognizes no signal moved to forward position.
"PAr"
from transmission speed sensor. Pressure at proportional valve rises slowly until transmission speed sensor
Control unit carries out a test in order to find out whether a signal recognizes a signal.
from transmission speed sensor is available. If any trouble is encountered, "Er02" is displayed. Calibration is aborted.
Request to move range shift lever to range "A" position during

"A" calibration procedure. Move range shift lever to range "A" position.
This display only appears if transmission speed sensor test was ok.
The intermission can last up to three seconds depending on the time

"_ _ _ _" Calibration is interrupted between the individual steps
required to stabilize the system between the individual steps.
"F" Forward clutch elements are calibrated. No action required.
"r" Reverse brake elements are calibrated. No action required.
If no diagnostic trouble code appears,with performance monitor: Press

"set/save" key in order to store the calibration data.
If no diagnostic trouble code appears,with digital display: Switch hazard
warning light switch on/off in order to store the calibration data.
" EOC" Calibration is complete. If a diagnostic trouble code does appear,with performance monitor:
Press "clear" to leave the calibration procedure. Data is not stored.
If a diagnostic trouble code does appear,with digital display: Pull turn
signal lever (flash-to-pass) towards the steering wheel for at least 2
seconds to leave the calibration procedure. Data is not stored.
If "L", "H", "F", "S" or "d" appears after "F" or "r" is displayed, the corresponding elements could not be calibrated.
In order to carry on with the calibration of the next element, depress clutch pedal once and release again.
→NOTE: Write down all error messages (" F H", " R L" etc.). Before calibration is completed, repair all
elements which have not been calibrated.
Instructions and error messages
Display Meaning
" F L" Forward clutch engaged with minimum pressure.
" F H" Forward clutch not engaged with max. pressure
" F F" Forward clutch engaged in minimum fill time.
" F S" Forward clutch not engaged in maximum fill time
" F d" Between first calibration and test calibration a considerable pressure or volume difference at forward clutch occurs.
" R L" Reverse brake engaged with minimum pressure.
" R H" Reverse brake not engaged with maximum pressure.
" R F" Reverse brake engaged in minimum fill time.
" R S" Reverse brake not engaged in maximum fill time.
Display Meaning
" R d" Between first calibration and test calibration a considerable pressure or volume difference at reverse brake occurs.
When "EOC" appears, calibration procedure is completed.
If a malfunction is displayed during calibration, the new data are not stored.
IMPORTANT:
With performance monitor press "set/save" key to store the calibration data.
With the digital display: Switch hazard warning light switch on/off to store the calibrated data.
→NOTE:
After the storing procedure is completed, transmission will automatically be shifted to neutral position.
If needed, fine-tuning of the transmission modulation is possible, see Reference 245-EPC-002, "Fine-
Tuning the EPC" .
Result:
YES:When "EOC" appears, calibration procedure is completed.With the performance monitor: Press "set/save" key in order
to store the calibration data.With the digital display: Switch hazard warning light switch on/off in order to store the
calibration data.
NO:If a malfunction is displayed during calibration, the new data are not stored.With the performance monitor: Press
"clear" to leave the calibration procedure. Data is not stored.With the digital display: Pull turn signal lever (flash-to-pass)
towards the steering wheel for at least 2 seconds to leave the calibration procedure. Data is not stored.
Address EPC040 - Input address, forward clutch, filling pressure in kPa,

configuration
Address EPC040 is available as an input address only in conjunction with software from version number 14.
For software version number, see addressEPC234 .
The value typed in at this address indicates filling pressure at the forward clutch in kPa.
IMPORTANT:
The value that appears on the display is adopted automatically during calibration. This value should be
changed only in exceptional circumstances.
( 1 ) AddressEPC040
Action:
Before typing in the relevant code number, see fine-tuning of the transmission modulation at Reference 245-EPC-002, "Fine-
Tuning the EPC" .
Result:
YES:End of input.
Address EPC041 - Input address, reverse clutch, filling pressure in kPa,

configuration
The value typed in at this address indicates filling pressure at the reverse clutch in kPa.
IMPORTANT:
( 1 ) AddressEPC041
Action:
Tuning the EPC" .
Result:
YES:End of input.
Address EPC042 - Input address, forward clutch, filling pressure in

msec, configuration
The value typed in at this address indicates filling time at the forward clutch in msec.
IMPORTANT:
( 1 ) AddressEPC042
Action:
Tuning the EPC" .
→NOTE:
If the value is read out using the basic informator or performance monitor, multiply the displayed value
by the factor 10. If, for example, a value of 11 is displayed, this corresponds to a filling time of 110 msec.
If the data are read out using Service ADVISOR, or calibration is performed using Service ADVISOR, the
real value appears on the display.
Result:
YES:End of input.
Address EPC043 - Input address, reverse clutch, filling time in msec,

configuration
The value typed in at this address indicates filling time at the reverse clutch in msec.
IMPORTANT:
( 1 ) AddressEPC043
Action:
Tuning the EPC" .
→NOTE:
If the value is read out using the basic informator or performance monitor, multiply the displayed value
by the factor 10. If, for example, a value of 11 is displayed, this corresponds to a filling time of 110 msec.
If the data are read out using Service ADVISOR, or calibration is performed using Service ADVISOR, the
real value appears on the display.
Result:
YES:End of input.
Address EPC047 - Input address, automatic deletion of diagnostic

trouble codes, configuration
The entered value in this address indicates the number of operating hours after which the diagnostic trouble codes are
automatically deleted. These codes are deleted in the order in which they were stored.
( 1 ) AddressEPC047
Action:
Only values between "000" and "255" can be entered.
Result:
YES:End of input.
Address EPC134 - Input address, impulses at sending unit for

transmission speed (B104), configuration
The value entered indicates how many impulses per axle revolution the sending unit must process. The value corresponds with
the number of teeth on the pickup disk.
( 1 ) AddressEPC134
Action:
For tractor models 5620-5820 with 4 ranges: Input = 050
Result:
YES:End of input.
Address EPC135 - Input address, transmission functions, activation/de-

activation
The various transmission functions can be activated or de-activated using this address.
( 1 ) AddressEPC135
Action:
Input Address EPC135
Input XXX1X Automatic speed matching activated
Input XXXX1 Manual speed selection activated
Example: When00011 (the standard value) is displayed, automatic speed matching and manual speed selection are both
activated.
Result:
YES:End of input.
Address EPC136 - Input address, starting in gear, configuration

In this address, you can set the gear that will engage automatically after the ignition is switched ON. The factory setting is 1st
gear.
( 1 ) AddressEPC136
Action:
Setting for EPC136
Standard value = 1
Input 0 Starting in the gear that was engaged when the engine was shut down.
Input 1 Starting in 1st gear.
Input 2 Starting in 2nd gear.
Input 3 Starting in 3rd gear.
Input 4 Starting in 4th gear.
Example: When1 (the standard value) is displayed, automatic gear preselection is activated and the tractor automatically
starts in 1st gear.
Result:
YES:End of input.
Address EPC137 - Input address, number of speed valves, configuration

( 1 ) AddressEPC137
Action:
Input 3 3 speed valves (tractors up to serial no. 409632) only).
Input 2 2 speed valves (tractors from serial no. 409633 only).
Result:
YES:End of input.
Address EPC156 - Vacant input address

( 1 ) Address EPC156
Action:
Input value has no influence on transmission operation
Result:
YES:End of input.

Action:
Result:
YES:End of input.

Action:
Result:
YES:End of input.

Action:
Result:
YES:End of input.

Action:
Result:
YES:End of input.
Address EPC164 — Vacant input address

Action:
Result:
YES:End of input.
Address EPC247 - Input address, model designation of current tractor

( 1 ) AddressEPC247
Action:
Input the tractor model designation.
e.g.: Tractor model designation 5820: Input = 00005820
Result:
YES:End of input.
Address EPC248 - Input address, serial number of current tractor

( 1 ) AddressEPC248
Action:
Enter tractor serial number.
e.g.: Tractor serial number 333444: Input = 00333444
Result:
YES:End of input.
Reference 245-EPC-002, EPC – Fine-Tuning
→NOTE:
Clutch modulation and how the tractor behaves when changing direction can be fine-tuned via Service
ADVISOR as follows:
Fine-tuning, which involves changing the values directly in input addresses EPC040, EPC041, EPC042
and EPC043.
Fine-tuning after successful calibration of transmission (EPC calibration with Service ADVISOR:
"PowrQuad Plus or AutoQuad transmission calibration - EPC038").
→NOTE:
It is possible to change the values directly in input addresses EPC40 to EPC43 only from version 13.05 of
the EPC software.
Fine-tuning the EPC allows the modulation characteristics defined by automatic calibration to be altered, thus adapting them to
specific requirements. Using Service ADVISOR, forward modulation (forward filling pressure and filling time) and reverse
modulation (reverse filling pressure and filling time) can be altered retrospectively. After each alteration, a test drive must be
carried out.
Limiting values for fine-tuning:
Forward filling pressure and reverse filling pressure (EPC040 and EPC041) :
Maximum value: 600 kPa (87 psi).
Minimum value: 51 kPa (7.4 psi).
Maximum alteration per input: up to +/- 25 kPa (3.6 psi).
Forward filling time and reverse filling time (EPC042 and EPC043):
Maximum value: 300 msec.
Minimum value: 0 msec.
Maximum alteration per input: up to +/- 20 msec in increments of 10.
→NOTE:
If the limiting values or maximum alteration per input are exceeded, a Service ADVISOR error message
appears and the existing setting remains in force.
CAUTION:
At settings close to the limits, the changes in how the tractor behaves when pulling away and changing
direction are drastic.
IMPORTANT:
Changing the filling pressures and times has a long-term effect on the following modulation procedures:
Modulation when changing direction of travel with the reverse drive lever (without the clutch pedal
being actuated).
Modulation when changing direction of travel with the reverse drive lever (with the clutch pedal
being actuated).
Clutch pedal modulation when pulling away.
Modulation when changing ranges.
→NOTE:
If the EPC is fine-tuned, test-drive the tractor several times to check the behaviour of all the modulation
characteristics mentioned above.
Effects of altering the filling pressure/time
Effects of altering the filling pressure/time
Advantage Disadvantage Clutch pedal travel
Increasing filling pressure Improves clutch pedal modulation Changing direction of travel is adversely affected is reduced
Decreasing filling pressure Changing direction of travel is favourably affected Worsens clutch pedal modulation is increased
Improves clutch pedal modulation and changing direction

Increasing filling time Clutch engages too early or too late is increased
of travel
Should be done only if the clutch engages too early or too Worsens clutch pedal modulation and changing
Decreasing filling time is reduced
late direction of travel
Standard calibration values for 5620, 5720 and 5820 tractors:
Standard calibration values for 5620, 5720 and 5820 tractors
Standard calibration values
Tractor model Filling pressures and times Standard value
5620, 5720 and 5820 Forward filling pressure 235 kPa
5620, 5720 and 5820 Reverse filling pressure 170 kPa
5620, 5720 and 5820 Forward filling time 110 msec
5620, 5720 and 5820 Reverse filling time 160 msec
Reference 245-EPC-100, Test Procedure in the Event of Occasional EPC

Circuit Problems
[1] - Problem:
Intermittent electrical failures (loose connections) are usually caused by wiring harness, pin or connector problems. Most wiring
harness problems are caused by connector problems (contacts loose/bad/slid back) and/or bad ground connections.
[2] - Procedure:
Before a detailed circuit check is performed and in the event of occasional circuit problems (loose contacts), all the "accessible"
components of the respective circuits must be checked.
1. Harness test in diagnostic (beep) mode (see EPC Beep-Mode ):

Access addressEPC002 and tug gently on the relevant harness (plug connection) to ascertain if the contacts are
loose/poor.
Access addressEPC003 and ascertain loose/bad connections by means of a test drive.
2. Visual inspection on relevant electrical circuit components:
The mating surfaces of ground contacts and the appropriate fixing elements are to be checked for damage
Check if harnesses or connectors are obstructed by mechanical parts.
Check harnesses for missing or poor fasteners. Wiring harnesses that are too loose or too tight may lead to worn or
damaged cables.
[3] - EPC beep mode:
The diagnostic (beep) mode (address EPC002) can facilitate the system diagnosis as described below:
Operational check of components included in the control unit circuit.

Detection of defective instruments, harnesses and connectors.
The following EPC addresses support the diagnostic (beep) mode:
Table of addresses for EPC (control unit for PowrQuad Plus transmission)
Addresses Description
Test address with ”beep” signal

002
If a switch changes position a beep sound is heard and the associated address is displayed
003 As for address 002, but engine speed, transmission speed and travel speed are NOT taken into consideration
Status, engine speed (B01)

004 Status, transmission speed (B104)
Status, travel speed (B84)
Status, forward switch (A47 or A68/1)

Status, reverse switch (A47 or A68/1)
007
Status, not-neutral switch (A47 or A68/1)
Status, park lock switch (S114)
Status, switch for shifting up a gear (S81)

008
Status, switch for shifting down a gear (S81)
Status, clutch pedal switch (S72)

Status, internal power supply from enable proportional solenoid (Y38)
009 Status, internal power supply from forward solenoid (Y33) and reverse solenoid (Y36)
Status, power supply (ELX)
Status, battery voltage
Addresses Description

010
Signal voltage, clutch pedal potentiometer (B65), channel 1

011

012
Voltage at enable pressure sending unit (B105)

013
Pressure at enable pressure sending unit (B105)
014 Transmission speed (B104)
Prescribed code number, clutch pressure

021
Current clutch pressure (measured)
Reference 245-EPC-101, Circuit Test for Enable Proportional Solenoid

Valve (Y38)
Layout of leads for enable proportional solenoid valve (Y38)
LEGEND:
W08 Cab harness
X495 2-pin plug for enable proportional solenoid valve
Y38 Enable proportional solenoid valve
Circuit/harness test for proportional enable solenoid valve (Y38)
The EPC controller monitors and controls the enable proportional solenoid valve (Y38) via positive lead 577. Modulation of
enable proportional solenoid valve (Y38) is accomplished via clutch pedal potentiometer (B65). Proportional solenoid valve
(Y38) receives electrical power from the EPC only under the following conditions:
• Engine is running.
• Range lever (gear lever) set to any position other than "park".
• The EPC receives a valid direction signal ("not-neutral" signal together with "forward" or "reverse" signal from the reverse
drive lever).
• The EPC receives a signal from the clutch pedal switch (pin 64). The clutch pedal should not be actuated (switch is closed).
• The EPC receives a transmission enable signal (pins 39 and 40).

• There is no electrical problem with the enable proportional solenoid valve, forward solenoid valve or reverse solenoid valve.

For functional schematic see:
contacts), all components of the respective circuit must be checked (see "Test Procedure in the Event of Occasional EPC
Circuit Problems" in Section 245, Group EPC).
IMPORTANT:
( 1 ) Check resistance at proportional solenoid valve Y38
Action:
Check resistance of proportional solenoid valve (Y38) in harness W28 (at front end of transmission):
• Ignition OFF.
• Pull the 2-pin plug (X495) out of harness W28 (front end of transmission).
• Measure resistance between pins A and B at the solenoid.
Enable proportional solenoid valve Y38

Coil: Resistance 7.25 +/- 0.5 ohms at 20°C (68°F)
Result:
YES:Check positive lead 577 and ground lead 578 for the proportional solenoid valve (see illustration for layout of leads).
Repair as needed and carry out an operational check.
NO:Replace the enable proportional solenoid valve (Y38) and carry out an "Operational Test for Enable Proportional Solenoid
Valve (Y38)" .
Operational test on enable proportional solenoid valve (Y38)

( 1 ) Check clutch charge pressure
Action:
→NOTE:
Diagnostic address EPC013 shows the actual clutch charge pressure at the enable proportional solenoid
valve (Y38). The clutch charge pressure is dependent on the position of the clutch pedal and the position
of the reverse drive lever. There is only clutch charge pressure if the reverse drive lever is set to the
forward or reverse position after a valid engine start (reverse drive lever and range shift lever in neutral)
and if the clutch pedal is not actuated. The clutch charge pressure builds up slowly (modulating),
depending on the engine speed, until the max. transmission system pressure has been reached.
CAUTION:
This test must be performed with the engine running and the range lever (gear lever) in neutral.
Access addressEPC013 :
EPC013 - Pressure, sending unit for enable pressure (B105)

Reverse drive lever in neutral position and clutch pedal not pressed: Minimum pressure approx. 0 kPa (display: XXXX0000)
Reverse drive lever in forward or reverse position and clutch pedal not pressed: Maximum pressure 1200 kPa (display: XXXX1200)
Slowly depress clutch pedal (clutch pressure decreases depending on the clutch pedal position): Displayed pressure range 1200 - 0 kPa
Result:
YES:• Test completed.

• Type of error indicates a loose contact, GO TO: Circuit/harness test for proportional enable solenoid valve (Y38) .
NO: Circuit/harness test for proportional enable solenoid valve (Y38) .
Reference 245-EPC-102, Circuit Test for Forward Solenoid Valve (Y33)
Layout of leads for forward solenoid valve (Y33)
LEGEND:
W08 Cab harness
X493 2-pin plug for forward solenoid valve
XGND46 Ground point
Y33 Forward solenoid valve
Circuit/harness test for forward solenoid valve (Y33)
The EPC monitors and controls the forward solenoid valve (Y33). If a circuit problem occurs at the forward solenoid valve, the
EPC transmission controller also cuts off the power supply to the enable proportional solenoid valve (Y38). Forward solenoid
valve (Y33) receives electrical power from the EPC only under the following conditions:
• The EPC receives the reverse drive lever signals "forward" (pin 47) and "not-neutral" (pin 65).
• The EPC receives a signal from the clutch pedal switch (pin 64). The switch should be closed (clutch pedal not depressed).
• There is no problem in the circuit of the forward solenoid valve.

IMPORTANT:
( 1 ) Check resistance at forward solenoid valve (Y33)
Action:
Check resistance at forward solenoid valve (Y33) in harness W28 (at front end of transmission):
• Ignition OFF.
Forward solenoid valve Y33 (resistance)

Resistance check (measure with ignition off): Solenoid resistance 15 (+/- 5) ohms at 20°C (68°F)
Result:
YES: GO TO 2 .
NO:Replace forward solenoid valve (Y33) and perform an "Operational test for circuit of forward solenoid valve (Y33)" .
( 2 ) Check the power supply for forward solenoid valve (Y33)
Action:
CAUTION:
Check the power supply at harness W28 (front end of transmission):
Perform check as follows:
1. Ignition OFF.
2. Disconnect solenoid valve connector X493 and install adapter wiring harness DFLX14 ( Reference 299-05-016 ).
→NOTE: EPC will immediately interrupt the power supply in the following cases:
• Harness interrupted (disconnected or defective lead).
• Defective solenoid valve.
3. Start the engine.

4. Move range shift lever (gear shift lever) to neutral and move the reverse drive lever to forward travel.
Forward solenoid valve Y33 (power supply)

Reverse drive lever in neutral: Voltage 0 volts
Reverse drive lever in forward position: System voltage 12 volts
Result:
YES: GO TO 3 .
NO:Check positive lead 579 and ground lead 310 (see illustration for layout of leads). Recondition as required and perform an
"Operational test on circuit of forward solenoid valve (Y33)" .
( 3 ) Check the amperage for forward solenoid valve (Y33)
Action:
CAUTION:
Check the amperage at harness W28 (front end of transmission):
Disconnect additional plug for amperage-measurement at adapter wiring harness DFLX14 and measure with a JT05791A
multimeter between connections.
Forward solenoid valve Y33 (amperage)

Reverse drive lever in forward position: Amperage 1 - 1.2 amps at 20°C (68°F) and 12-volt rated voltage
Result:
NO:Check connection at ground point XGND46. Check lead 310 (see illustration for layout of leads). Recondition as required
and perform an "Operational test on circuit of forward solenoid valve (Y33)" .
Operational test on circuit of forward solenoid valve (Y33)

( 1 ) Checking the enable pressure
Action:
→NOTE:
The transmission control unit (EPC) provides electrical power to the enable proportional solenoid valve
(Y38) only if there is no problem in the circuit of the direction solenoid valves (forward and reverse).
CAUTION:
Access addressEPC013 .

Reverse drive lever in forward position and clutch pedal not pressed: Maximum pressure 1200 kPa (display: XXXX1200)
Result:

• Type of error indicates a loose contact, GO TO: Circuit/harness test for forward solenoid valve (Y33) .
NO:GO TO: Circuit/harness test for forward solenoid valve (Y33) .
Reference 245-EPC-103, Circuit Test for Reverse Solenoid Valve (Y36)
Layout of leads for reverse solenoid valve (Y36)
LEGEND:
W08 Cab harness
X494 2-pin plug for reverse solenoid valve
XGND46 Ground point
Y36 Reverse solenoid valve
Circuit/harness test for reverse solenoid valve (Y36)
The EPC monitors and controls the reverse solenoid valve (Y36). If a circuit problem occurs at the reverse solenoid valve, the
EPC transmission controller also cuts off the power supply to the enable proportional solenoid valve (Y38). Reverse solenoid
valve (Y36) receives electrical power from the EPC only under the following conditions:
• The EPC receives the reverse drive lever signals "reverse" (pin 52) and "not-neutral" (pin 65).
• The EPC receives a signal from the clutch pedal switch (pin 64). The switch should be closed (clutch pedal not depressed).
• There is no problem in the circuit of the reverse solenoid valve.

IMPORTANT:
( 1 ) Check resistance at reverse solenoid valve (Y36)
Action:
Check resistance at reverse solenoid valve (Y36) in harness W28 (at front end of transmission):
• Ignition OFF.
Reverse solenoid valve Y36 (resistance)

Result:
YES: GO TO 2 .
NO:Replace reverse solenoid valve (Y36) and perform an "Operational test on cicuit of reverse solenoid valve (Y36)" .
( 2 ) Check the power supply for reverse solenoid valve (Y36)
Action:
CAUTION:
1. Ignition OFF.

4. Move reverse drive lever to the reverse position.
Reverse solenoid valve Y36 (supply voltage)

Reverse drive lever in neutral: Voltage 0 volts
Reverse drive lever in reverse position: System voltage 12 volts
Result:
YES: GO TO 3 .
NO:Check positive lead 570 and ground lead 310 (see illustration for layout of leads). Recondition as required and perform an
"Operational test on the circuit of reverse solenoid valve (Y36)" .
( 3 ) Check the amperage for reverse solenoid valve (Y36)
Action:
CAUTION:
Reverse solenoid valve Y36 (amperage)

Reverse drive lever in reverse position: Amperage 1 - 1.2 amps at 20°C (68°F) and 12-volt rated voltage
Result:
and perform an "Operational test on the circuit of reverse solenoid valve (Y36)" .
Operational test on circuit of reverse solenoid valve (Y36)

( 1 ) Checking the enable pressure
Action:
→NOTE:
The transmission control unit (EPC) provides electrical power to the enable proportional solenoid valve
(Y38) only if there is no problem in the circuit of the direction solenoid valves (forward and reverse).
CAUTION:

Reverse drive lever in reverse position and clutch pedal not pressed: Maximum pressure 1200 kPa (display: XXXX1200)
Result:

• Type of error indicates a loose contact, GO TO: Circuit/harness test for reverse solenoid valve (Y36) .
NO:GO TO: Circuit/harness test for reverse solenoid valve (Y36) .
Reference 245-EPC-104, Circuit Test for K1 Solenoid Valve (Y40)
Layout of leads for K1 solenoid valve (Y40)
LEGEND:
W08 Cab harness
X497 2-pin plug for solenoid valve K1
XGND46 Ground point
Y40 Solenoid valve K1
Circuit/harness test for K1 solenoid valve (Y40)
The EPC monitors and controls the K1 solenoid valve. The K1 solenoid valve is responsible for shifting to 1st gear, and, together
with the K2 solenoid valve, it is also responsible for shifting to 2nd gear. If a circuit problem occurs, the EPC transmission
controller shuts off the power supply to the K1 solenoid valve.

IMPORTANT:
( 1 ) Check resistance at K1 solenoid valve (Y40)
Action:
Check resistance at K1 solenoid valve in harness W28 (at front end of transmission):
• Ignition OFF.
K1 solenoid valve Y40 (resistance)

Result:
YES: GO TO 2 .
NO:Replace K1 solenoid valve (Y40) and perform "Solenoid valve K1 (Y40) circuit, operational test" .
( 2 ) Check supply voltage for K1 solenoid valve (Y40)
Action:
IMPORTANT:
Perform this test with the ignition turned on (but engine OFF).
1. Ignition OFF.
3. Turn on ignition.
Measure voltage between pins A and B at the adapter wiring harness.
K1 solenoid valve Y40 (supply voltage)
Voltage with solenoid valve de-activated (3rd and 4th gears): Voltage 0 volts
Voltage with solenoid valve activated (1st or 2nd gear): Voltage 12 volts
Result:
YES: GO TO 3 .
NO:Check positive lead 584 and ground lead 310 (see illustration for layout of leads). Recondition as required and perform
"Operational test for circuit of K1 solenoid valve (Y40)" .
( 3 ) Check amperage for K1 solenoid valve (Y40)
Action:
IMPORTANT:
K1 solenoid valve Y40 (amperage)

Amperage with solenoid valve activated (1st or 2nd gear): Amperage 1 - 1.2 amps at 20°C (68°F) and 12-volt rated voltage
Result:
and perform "Operational test for circuit of K1 solenoid valve (Y40)" .
Operational test for solenoid valve K1 (Y40) circuit

( 1 ) Check transmission speed
Action:
IMPORTANT:
Perform the test only while the engine is running and range-shift (gear-shift) lever is in neutral.
• Use the hand throttle to set engine speed to 1000 rpm.
• Select 1st gear.
• Access addressEPC014 .
EPC014 - Speed, transmission speed sender (B104)

Move the reverse drive lever to forward (clutch pedal not pressed): Speed (with engine speed at 1000 rpm in 1st gear) approx. 566 rpm
→NOTE:
The K1 solenoid valve is supplied with power by the transmission control unit (EPC) in 1st and 2nd gears
only. In 1st gear, the ratio of engine speed to transmission speed is 1:1.767. In 2nd gear, the ratio is
1:1.466.
Gear shift (voltage supply to solenoid valves)
Gear shift
Gear K1 K2 K3
First gear active active
Second gear active
Third gear
Fourth gear active
Engine speed to transmission speed ratio
Gear Ratio
First gear 1.767
Second gear 1.466
Third gear 1.225
Fourth gear 1.0
Result:

• Type of error indicates a loose contact, GO TO: Circuit/harness test for K1 solenoid valve (Y40) .
NO:GO TO: Circuit/harness test for K1 solenoid valve (Y40) .
LEGEND:
W08 Cab harness
XGND46 Ground point
The EPC monitors and controls the K2 solenoid valve. The K2 solenoid valve is responsible for shifting to 2nd gear. If a circuit
problem occurs, the EPC transmission controller shuts off the power supply to the K2 solenoid valve.

IMPORTANT:
Action:
• Ignition OFF.

Result:
YES: GO TO 2 .
NO:Replace K2 solenoid valve (Y39) and perform "K2 solenoid valve (Y39) circuit, operational test" .
( 2 ) Check the supply voltage for K2 solenoid valve (Y39)
Action:
IMPORTANT:
1. Ignition OFF.
Voltage with solenoid valve de-activated (1st, 3rd and 4th gears): Voltage 0 volts
Voltage with solenoid valve activated (2nd gear): Voltage 12 volts
Result:
YES: GO TO 3 .
( 3 ) Check the amperage for K2 solenoid valve (Y39)
Action:
IMPORTANT:

Amperage with solenoid valve activated (2nd gear): Amperage 1 - 1.2 amps at 20°C (68°F) and 12-volt rated voltage
Result:
Operational test for circuit of solenoid valve K2 (Y39)

Action:
IMPORTANT:
• Select 2nd gear.

Move the reverse drive lever to forward (clutch pedal not pressed): Speed (with engine speed at 1000 rpm in 2nd gear) approx. 682 rpm
→NOTE:
The K2 solenoid valve is supplied with power by the transmission control unit (EPC) in 2nd gear only.
Together with the K1 solenoid valve, the K2 solenoid valve is responsible for shifting to 2nd gear. In 2nd
gear, the ratio of engine speed to transmission speed is 1:1.466.
Gear shift
Gear K1 K2 K3
Second gear active
Third gear
Fourth gear active
Gear Ratio
First gear 1.767
Second gear 1.466
Third gear 1.225
Fourth gear 1.0
Result:

LEGEND:
W08 Cab harness
XGND46 Ground point
The EPC monitors and controls the K3 solenoid valve. The K3 solenoid valve is responsible for shifting to 4th gear. If a circuit
problem occurs, the EPC transmission controller shuts off the power supply to the K3 solenoid valve.

IMPORTANT:
Action:
• Ignition OFF.

Result:
YES: GO TO 2 .
NO:Replace K3 solenoid valve (Y32) and perform "K3 solenoid valve (Y32) circuit, operational test" .
( 2 ) Check supply voltage for K3 solenoid valve (Y32)
Action:
IMPORTANT:
1. Ignition OFF.
Voltage with solenoid valve de-activated (1st, 2nd and 3rd gears): Voltage 0 volts
Voltage with solenoid valve activated (4th gear): Voltage 12 volts
Result:
YES: GO TO 3 .
( 3 ) Check amperage for K3 solenoid valve (Y32)
Action:
IMPORTANT:

Amperage with solenoid valve activated (4th gear): Amperage 1 - 1.2 amps at 20°C (68°F) and 12-volt rated voltage
Result:
Operational test for circuit of solenoid valve K3 (Y32)

Action:
IMPORTANT:
• Select 4th gear.

Move the reverse drive lever to forward (clutch pedal not pressed): Speed (with engine speed at 1000 rpm in 4th gear) 1000 rpm
→NOTE:
The K3 solenoid valve is supplied with power by the transmission control unit (EPC) in 4th gear only. In
4th gear, the ratio of engine speed to transmission speed is 1:1. In other words, the engine speed on the
display matches the transmission speed shown in address EPC014 exactly.
Gear shift
Gear K1 K2 K3
Second gear active
Third gear
Fourth gear active
Gear Ratio
First gear 1.767
Second gear 1.466
Third gear 1.225
Fourth gear 1.0
Result:

Reference 245-EPC-107, Circuit Test for Transmission Speed Sender

(B104)
Layout of leads for transmission speed sender (B104)
LEGEND:
B104 Sending unit for transmission speed
F04/9 Fuse
W08 Cab harness
X499 4-pin plug for transmission speed sender
XGND43 Ground point
Circuit/harness test for transmission speed sender (B104)
Transmission speed is calculated by a Hall-type sender (B104). Transmission speed sender B104 is located on the top right of
the range shift housing (viewed in direction of travel).

IMPORTANT:
( 1 ) Checking the transmission speed sender (B104)
Action:
• Remove transmission speed sender B104 (on plug X499 in harness W28 at the front end of the transmission).
• Put plug X499 back in place.
• Move a wrench rapidly back and forth in front of the Hall sending unit. The display should alternate between "0" and "1".
EPC004 - Status, transmission speed sender (B104)

Signal exists: Status (signal alternates between 0 and 1) X1XXXXXX
X0XXXXXX
Result:
YES:Check the connections for loose, widened, slid-back or corroded contacts (see table for layout of leads).
OK:All connectors are OK: Replace transmission speed sender and perform "Operational test for transmission speed sender
(B104)" .
NO: GO TO 2 .
( 2 ) Check supply voltage for transmission speed sender
Action:
Check the supply voltage:
Use a JT05791A multimeter to check the supply voltage at plug X499 (harness W28 at front end of transmission).
Supply voltage for transmission speed sender B104

between pin C (lead 973, positive) and pin D (lead 050; ground): Voltage 12 volts
Result:
YES:Check signal lead 564 (see illustration for layout of leads). Recondition as required and perform a "Operational test for
transmission speed sender (B104)" .
OK:All connectors are OK: Replace transmission speed sender and perform "Operational test for transmission speed sender
(B104)" .
NO:Check the power supply circuit (fuse F04/09, ground point XGND43, lead 973 and/or ground lead 050) (see illustration for
layout of leads). Recondition as required and perform a "Operational test for transmission speed sender (B104)" .
Operational test on transmission speed sender (B104)

( 1 ) Checking the transmission speed sender (B104)
Action:
IMPORTANT:

Move the reverse drive lever to forward (clutch pedal not pressed): Speed (with engine speed at 1000 rpm in 4th gear) 1000 rpm
→NOTE:
Engine speed matches transmission speed only in 4th gear.
Result:

• Type of error indicates a loose contact, GO TO: Circuit/harness test for transmission speed sender (B104) .
NO:GO TO: Circuit/harness test for transmission speed sender (B104) .
Reference 245-EPC-108, Circuit Test for Enable Pressure Sender (B105)
Layout of leads for enable pressure sender (B105)
LEGEND:
B105 Enable pressure sender
W08 Cab harness
X459 3-pin plug for enable pressure sender
Circuit/harness test for enable pressure sender (B105)
Enable pressure sender B105 measures the clutch charge pressure (transmission oil pressure) at enable proportional solenoid
valve Y38. The enable pressure sender is located on the front cover of the transmission, close to reverse solenoid valve Y36. Its
5-volt power supply (positive lead and ground lead) is controlled by the EPC transmission controller and is also the power
supply for clutch pedal potentiometer B65.


IMPORTANT:
( 1 ) Check the supply voltage
Action:
Checking the supply voltage at enable pressure sender (B105):
Pull the 3-pin plug (X459) for enable pressure sender (B105) out of harness W28 (front end of transmission).
Use a JT05791A multimeter to measure the supply voltage between pins A and B of plug X459:
Supply voltage for enable pressure sender (B105)

between pin A (ground lead 241) and pin B (positive lead 243): Voltage 5 volts
Result:
YES:Check signal lead 549, GO TO 2 .
NO:Check the power supply circuit (leads 243 and 241) (see illustration for layout of leads). Recondition as required and do an
"Operational test for enable pressure sender (B105)" .
( 2 ) Signal lead 549 check
Action:
2.1 - Harness test for harness W28 (at front end of transmission):
• Access addressEPC013 :
EPC013 - Voltage, sending unit for enable pressure (B105)

Plug disconnected: Voltage range between 0.5 and 0.55 volts (display: 0050XXXX at 0.5 V)
Pin B (lead 243, positive) bypassed to pin C (signal lead 549): Voltage approx. 5 volts (display: 0500XXXX)
Result:
YES:Repair the enable pressure sender (B105) if needed and perform an "Operational test for enable pressure sender (B105)" .
NO:GO TO 2.2.
Action:
2.2 - Harness test on cab harness W08:
• Pull the 42-pin plug (X500) for enable pressure sender (B105) out between harness W28 at front end of transmission and cab
harness W08.

Plug disconnected: Voltage range between 0.5 and 0.55 volts (display: 0050XXXX at 0.5 V)
Pin 21 (lead 243, positive) bypassed to pin 19 (signal lead 549): Voltage approx. 5 volts (display: 0500XXXX)
Result:
YES:Check signal lead 549 in wiring harness W28 at front end of transmission (see illustration for layout of leads). Recondition
as required and do an "Operational test for enable pressure sender (B105)" .
NO:Check signal lead 549 in cab wiring harness W08 (see illustration for layout of leads). Recondition as required and do an
"Operational test for enable pressure sender (B105)" .
Enable pressure sender (B105), operational test

( 1 ) Checking the voltage at the enable pressure sending unit (B105)
Action:
• Ignition ON (engine OFF).

Ignition ON (engine OFF): Voltage range between 0.5 and 0.55 volts (display: 0050XXXX at 0.5 V)
Result:
YES: GO TO 2 .
NO:GO TO: Circuit/harness test for enable pressure sender (B105) .
( 2 ) Checking the pressure range of the enable pressure sender (B105)
Action:
→NOTE:
Diagnostic address EPC013 shows the actual clutch charge pressure at the enable proportional solenoid
valve (Y38). The clutch charge pressure is dependent on the position of the clutch pedal and the position
of the reverse drive lever. There is only clutch charge pressure if the reverse drive lever is set to the
forward or reverse position after a valid engine start (reverse drive lever in neutral) and if the clutch
pedal is not actuated. The clutch charge pressure builds up slowly (modulating), depending on the engine
speed, until the max. transmission system pressure has been reached.
CAUTION:

Reverse drive lever in forward or reverse position and clutch pedal not pressed: Maximum pressure 1200 kPa (display: XXXX1200)
Result:
YES:Test completed.
NO:See diagnostic procedure for diagnostic trouble code (Diagnostic Manual, Section 211, Group EPC):• EPC 306050.03 -
Transmission Enable Pressure Too High .• EPC 306051.04 - Transmission Enable Pressure Too Low .
Reference 245-EPC-109, Circuit Test for Clutch Pedal Switch (S72)
Layout of leads for clutch pedal switch (S72)
LEGEND:
S72 Clutch pedal switch
W08 Cab harness
Circuit/harness test for clutch pedal switch (S72)
The EPC controls the signal from the clutch pedal switch (S72). The supply voltage (positive lead) for the clutch pedal switch
(S72) is provided by the transmission control unit (EPC). The transmission control unit (EPC) only delivers a 12-volt power
supply for the clutch pedal switch when
• Range lever (gear lever) is not in park position.
• Transmission control unit (EPC) recognizes a valid travel direction signal.
• There is no electrical problem with ground engagement (BCU engages ground) for the transmission enable relay K07/4.
• Transmission enable relay K07/4 is not defective.
The clutch pedal switch (S72) is closed if the clutch pedal is not pressed.

IMPORTANT:
( 1 ) Checking the clutch pedal switch S72
Action:
• Ignition OFF.
• Pull out 6-pin plug X322 (connecting point between W13 and W08).
• Perform test on plug X322 (clutch sender harness W13).
• Use the JT05791A multimeter to measure continuity between pin A and pin B on plug X322:
Clutch pedal switch (S72)

Clutch pedal not depressed: Continuity present
Depress clutch pedal. Continuity not present
Result:
YES:Check positive lead 646 and signal lead 664 in cab wiring harness W08 (see illustration for layout of leads). Recondition as
required and do an "Operational test for clutch pedal switch (S72)" .
NO:Repair clutch pedal switch S72 and/or clutch sender (harness W13) as needed and carry out an "Operational test for clutch
pedal switch (S72)" .
Operational test on clutch pedal switch (S72)

( 1 ) Checking circuit of clutch pedal switch (S72) at diagnostic address EPC009
Action:
CAUTION:
EPC009 - Status, clutch pedal switch (S72)

Reverse drive lever in forward or reverse position and clutch pedal not pressed: Status 1XXXXXXX
Reverse drive lever in forward or reverse position and clutch pedal pressed: Status 0XXXXXXX
Result:

• Type of error indicates a loose contact, GO TO: Circuit/harness test for clutch pedal switch (S72) .
NO:GO TO: Circuit/harness test for clutch pedal switch (S72) .
Reference 245-EPC-110, Circuit Test for Clutch Pedal Potentiometer

(B65)
Layout of leads for clutch pedal potentiometer (B65)
LEGEND:
B65 Clutch pedal potentiometer
W08 Cab harness
X328 6-pin plug for clutch pedal potentiometer
Circuit/harness test for clutch pedal potentiometer (B65)
The EPC transmission control unit controls the signals (channel 1 and channel 2) of the clutch pedal potentiometer (B65). The
voltage at channel 1 must be double the voltage of channel 2. The supply voltage (positive lead and ground lead) for the clutch
pedal potentiometer (B65) is provided by the transmission control unit (EPC). The clutch pedal potentiometer (B65) is
responsible for the modulation of enable proportional solenoid valve (Y38).

IMPORTANT:
( 1 ) Check the harness in diagnostic mode (clutch sender harness W13)
Action:
• At clutch sender harness W13, pull out the 6-pin plug (X328; for clutch pedal potentiometer B65).
• Perform test on plug X328 (clutch sender harness W13).
1.1 – Harness test for channel 1 of the clutch pedal potentiometer:
EPC012 - Voltage, clutch pedal potentiometer (B65; channel 1)

Plug disconnected: Voltage 0 volts (display: 0000XXXX)
Pin 6 (lead 243, positive) bypassed to pin 4 (lead 254, channel 1): Voltage 5 volts (display: 0500XXXX)

Plug disconnected: Voltage 0 volts (display: XXXX0000)
Pin 1 (lead 243, positive) bypassed to pin 3 (lead 217, channel 2): Voltage 5 volts (display: XXXX0500)
Result:
YES:Recondition the clutch pedal potentiometer B65 as required and do an "Operational test for clutch pedal potentiometer
(B65)" .
NO:GO TO 1.3.
Action:
Use a JT05791A multimeter to check the supply voltage at plug X328 (clutch sender harness W13):
Supply voltage for clutch pedal potentiometer B65

between pin 1 (lead 243, positive) and pin 2 (lead 241; ground): Voltage 5 volts
between pin 6 (lead 243, positive) and pin 5 (lead 241; ground): Voltage 5 volts
Result:
YES: GO TO 2 .
NO:Check the power supply circuit (leads 243 and 241) (see illustration for layout of leads). Recondition as required and do an
"Operational test for clutch pedal potentiometer (B65)" .
Action:
• At cab harness W08, pull out the 6-pin plug (X322) that is the connecting point between W13 and W08.

Plug disconnected: Voltage 0 volts (display: 0000XXXX)
Pin F (lead 243, positive) bypassed to pin E (lead 254, channel 1): Voltage 5 volts (display: 0500XXXX)

Plug disconnected: Voltage 0 volts (display: XXXX0000)
Pin F (lead 243, positive) bypassed to pin C (lead 217, channel 2): Voltage 5 volts (display: XXXX0500)
Result:
YES:Check signal leads 254 and/or 217 in clutch sender harness W13 (see illustration for layout of leads). Recondition as
required and do an "Operational test for clutch pedal potentiometer (B65)" .
NO:Check signal leads 254 and/or 217 in cab wiring harness W08 (see illustration for layout of leads). Recondition as required
and do an "Operational test for clutch pedal potentiometer (B65)" .
Clutch pedal potentiometer (B65), operational test

( 1 ) Checking voltage range of potentiometer (B65) at diagnostic address EPC012
Action:
→NOTE:
Slowly depress the clutch pedal all the way. An acoustic signal or sudden voltage change while the brake
is actuated indicates a defective potentiometer.
The voltage at channel 1 must be double the voltage of channel 2.
1.1 – Check channel 1 of the clutch pedal potentiometer:
EPC012 - Voltage, channel 1 of the clutch pedal potentiometer (B65)

Clutch pedal not depressed: Minimum voltage 0.5 volts (display: 0050XXXX)
Clutch pedal depressed: Maximum voltage 4.5 volts (display: 0450XXXX)
1.2 – Check channel 2 of the clutch pedal potentiometer:
EPC012 - Voltage, channel 2 of the clutch pedal potentiometer (B65)

Clutch pedal not depressed: Minimum voltage 0.25 volts (display: XXXX0025)
Clutch pedal depressed: Maximum voltage 2.25 volts (display: XXXX0225)
Result:

• Type of error indicates a loose contact, GO TO: Circuit/harness test for clutch pedal potentiometer (B65) .
NO:GO TO: Circuit/harness test for clutch pedal potentiometer (B65) .
Reference 245-EPC-111, Circuit Test for Upshift/Downshift Switch (S81)
Layout of leads for upshift/downshift switch (S81) without multi-function lever
LEGEND:
F05/4 Fuse
S81 Upshift/downshift switch
W08 Cab harness
X249 3-pin plug for upshift/downshift switch
Layout of leads for upshift/downshift switches (S81/1 and S81/2) with multi-function lever
LEGEND:
F05/4 Fuse
S81/1 Switch for up- and downshift on gear-shift lever
S81/2 Switch for up- and downshift on multi-function lever
W08 Cab harness
X249 3-pin plug for upshift/downshift switch
Circuit/harness test for upshift/downshift switches (S81)
IMPORTANT:
When ignition is “ON”, disconnected plugs may cause additional diagnostic trouble codes. The fault
( 1 ) Check harness (W08) in diagnostic mode
Action:
• Ignition OFF.
• Pull out the 3-pin plug (X249) between switch (S81) and the cab wiring harness W08.
• Ignition ON.
Address EPC008 - Harness test for upshift switch (S81)

Plug X249 disconnected: Status XXXX0XXX
Pin C (12 volts, positive) bypassed to pin B (lead 581, upshift) Status XXXX1XXX
Address EPC008 - Harness test for downshift switch (S81)

Plug X249 disconnected: Status XXXXX0XX
Pin C (12 volts, positive) bypassed to pin A (lead 583, downshift) Status XXXXX1XX
Result:
YES: GO TO 3 .
NO: GO TO 2 .

Action:
Use a JT05791A multimeter to check the supply voltage at plug X249 (on cab harness W08):
Supply voltage for upshift/downshift switch (S81)

Result:
YES:Check signal lead 581 and/or 583 in cab wiring harness W08 (see illustration 1 or 2 for layout of leads). Recondition as
required and perform "Operational test for upshift/downshift switch (S81)" .
NO:Check fuse F05/4 and power supply circuit (lead 572) (see illustration 1 or 2 for layout of leads). Recondition as required
and perform "Operational test for upshift/downshift switch (S81)" .
( 3 ) Repairing the gear-shift lever
Action:
If the tractor is equipped only with upshift/downshift switch (S81) on the gear-shift lever:
Repair the upshift/downshift switch (S81) on the gear-shift lever as necessary.
If the tractor is equipped with an upshift/downshift switch on the gear-shift lever (S81/1) and multi-function lever (S81/2):
Repair the upshift/downshift switch (S81/1) on the gear-shift lever as necessary.

Repair the upshift/downshift switch (S81/2) on the mult-function lever as necessary.
Repair the Y-shaped adapter harness between plug X249 and the plugs on the gear-shift lever as necessary.
Result:
YES:After repairing, perform an “Operational test for upshift/downshift switch (S81)” .
Upshift/downshift switch (S81), operational test

If the tractor is equipped only with upshift/downshift switch (S81) on the gear-shift lever: GO TO 1 .
If the tractor is equipped with an upshift/downshift switch on the gear-shift lever (S81/1) and multi-function lever (S81/2): GO
TO 2 .
( 1 ) Checking the circuit of the switch for upshift/downshift (S81)
Action:
EPC008 - Status, upshift switch (S81)

Upshift switch (S81) not pressed: Status XXXX0XXX
Press upshift switch (S81) for more than 2 seconds: Status XXXX1XXX
EPC008 - Status, downshift switch (S81)

Downshift switch (S81) not pressed: Status XXXXX0XX
Press downshift switch (S81) for more than 2 seconds: Status XXXXX1XX
Result:

• Type of error indicates a loose contact, GO TO: Circuit/harness test for upshift/downshift switch (S81) .
NO:GO TO: Circuit/harness test for upshift/downshift switch (S81) .
( 2 ) Checking the circuit of the switch for upshift/downshift on the gear-shift lever (S81/1)
Action:
EPC008 - Status, upshift switch (S81/1)

Upshift switch (S81/1) not pressed: Status XXXX0XXX
Press upshift switch (S81/1) for more than 2 seconds: Status XXXX1XXX
EPC008 - Status, downshift switch (S81/1)

Downshift switch (S81/1) not pressed: Status XXXXX0XX
Press downshift switch (S81/1) for more than 2 seconds: Status XXXXX1XX
Result:
YES:• GO TO 3 .
( 3 ) Checking the circuit of the switch for upshift/downshift on the multi-function lever (S81/2)
Action:
EPC008 - Status, upshift switch (S81/2)

Upshift switch (S81/2) not pressed: Status XXXX0XXX
Press upshift switch (S81/2) for more than 2 seconds: Status XXXX1XXX
EPC008 - Status, downshift switch (S81/2)

Downshift switch (S81/2) not pressed: Status XXXXX0XX
Press downshift switch (S81/2) for more than 2 seconds: Status XXXXX1XX
Result:

Reference 245-EPC-112, Circuit Test for Transmission Enable Relay

(K07/4)
Layout of leads for transmission enable relay (K07/4)
LEGEND:
F05/4 Fuse
W08 Cab harness
Circuit/harness test for transmission enable relay (K07/4)
The EPC transmission control unit controls the transmission enable signals (lead 553 on pins 39 and 40). The transmission
control unit only receives the transmission enable signals (pins 39 and 40) from transmission enable relay K07/4 under the
following conditions:
• The EPC receives a valid direction signal ("not-neutral" signal together with "forward" or "reverse" signal from the reverse
drive lever).
• The EPC receives a signal from the clutch pedal switch (pin 64). The clutch pedal should not be actuated (switch is closed).
The EPC transmission control unit needs the transmission enable signals in order to provide the enable proportional solenoid
valve Y38, the forward solenoid valve Y33 and the reverse solenoid valve with voltage.

contacts), all components of the respective circuit must be checked (see “Test Procedure in the Event of Occasional EPC
Circuit Problems” in Section 245, Group EPC).
IMPORTANT:
( 1 ) Checking transmission enable relay (K07/4)
Action:
Use a JT05791A multimeter to check transmission enable relay K07/4:
Transmission enable relay (K07/4)

between pins 85 (2) and 86 (1): Resistance at relay coil approx. 75 - 90 ohms
Result:
YES: GO TO 2 .
NO:Replace transmission enable relay (K07/4) with a new one and perform an “Operational test for transmission enable relay
(K07/4)” .
( 2 ) Checking transmission enable signal (lead 553)
Action:
Check the transmission enable signal with the plug for come-home mode:
Remove transmission enable relay K07/4 from fuse box.

Reconnect plug for come-home K08/4 from “RUN” mode to “COME-HOME” mode.
Ignition ON.
EPC009 - Status, transmission enable signal (output signal of transmission enable relay K07/4)
Transmission enable signal received: Status X11XXXXX
Result:
YES: GO TO 3 .
NO:Check fuse F05/4, output lead 553 and power supply lead 572 (see illustration for layout of leads). Recondition as required
and perform “Operational test for transmission enable relay (K07/4)” .
( 3 ) Checking coil circuit for transmission enable relay
Action:
Install transmission enable relay K07/4 in fuse box and reconnect plug for come-home (K08/4) in the “RUN” mode.
Perform the test only while the engine is running and range-shift lever is in neutral.

Result:
YES:Check leads 560 and 664 (see illustration for layout of leads).
NO:Check the circuit of the clutch pedal switch, GO TO: Circuit/harness test for clutch pedal switch (S72) .
Transmission enable relay (K07/4), operational test

( 1 ) Checking the clutch pedal switch
Action:
CAUTION:

Result:
YES: GO TO 2 .
NO:Check the circuit of the clutch pedal switch, GO TO: Circuit/harness test for clutch pedal switch (S72) .
( 2 ) Checking the direction signals to the BCU
Action:
BCU017 — Status, reverse drive lever switch

Reverse drive lever in forward position: Status X110
Reverse drive lever in reverse position: Status X011
Reverse drive lever in neutral position: Status X000
Result:
YES: GO TO 3 .
NO:Check reverse drive lever:

• Check reverse drive lever (A47) without “N” indicator light, GO TO: Circuit test for reverse drive lever (A47) .
• Check reverse drive lever (A68/1) with “N” indicator light, GO TO: Circuit test for reverse drive lever (A68/1) .
( 3 ) Checking the circuit of the transmission enable relay
Action:
CAUTION:
EPC009 - Status, transmission enable signal (output signal of transmission enable relay K07/4)
Reverse drive lever in neutral position and clutch pedal not pressed: Status X00XXXXX
Reverse drive lever in forward or reverse position and clutch pedal not pressed: Status X11XXXXX
Reverse drive lever in forward or reverse position and clutch pedal pressed: Status X00XXXXX
Result:

• Type of error indicates a loose contact, GO TO: Circuit/harness test for transmission enable relay (K07/4) .
NO:GO TO: Circuit/harness test for transmission enable relay (K07/4) .
Reference 245-EPC-113, Circuit Test for Come-Home Plug (K08/4)
Layout of leads for Come-Home plug (K08/4)
LEGEND:
F05/4 Fuse
K08/4 Plug for "come home" mode
W08 Cab harness
Circuit test for Come-Home plug (K08/4)
Re-connecting the come-home plug K08/4 enables you to drive the tractor even if there are certain electrical defects. It is
possible to drive the tractor in COME-HOME mode if there are the following defects:
• defective transmission enable relay (K07/4).
• defective ground lead for transmission enable relay K07/4 (controlled by BCU).

IMPORTANT:
( 1 ) Operational test for Come-Home plug (K08/4)
Action:
• Ignition OFF.
• Reconnect come-home plug K08/4 from “RUN” mode to “COME-HOME” mode.
EPC009 - Status, transmission enable signal

Come-home plug K08/4 in “RUN” position: Status X00XXXXX
Come-home plug K08/4 in “COME HOME” position: Status X11XXXXX
Result:
YES:Test completed.
NO:Check fuse F05/4, positive lead 572 and/or signal lead 553 (see illustration for layout of leads).
Reference 245-EPC-114, Circuit Test for Reverse Drive Lever without N

Indicator Light (A47)
Layout of leads for reverse drive lever (A47) (without "N" indicator light)
LEGEND:
F05/4 Fuse
F05/6 Fuse
W08 Cab harness
XGND5 Ground point
Circuit/harness test for reverse drive lever (A47)
The signals (forward, reverse and not-neutral) of reverse drive lever (A47) are registered by Hall sensors. The transmission
control unit (EPC) needs the forward/reverse signal in order to
• supply clutch pedal switch S72 with power.
• supply the coil circuit of the transmission enable relay K07/4 with power.
• supply the enable proportional solenoid valve (Y38) and the forward/reverse solenoid valve with power.
The detent coil in reverse drive lever (A47) ensures that lever (A47) is held in its forward or reverse position provided a correct
forward or reverse signal has been received.

IMPORTANT:
( 1 ) Check fuses
Action:
Check the fuses:
F05/04
F05/06
Result:
YES: GO TO 2 .
NO:Replace the fuses with new ones and carry out an “Operational test on reverse drive lever (A47)” .
Action:
2.1 - Harness test in diagnostic mode (address EPC007):
• This test must be performed at plug X490/1.
Address EPC007 - Harness test for reverse drive lever (A47)

Plug disconnected: Status 000XXXXX
Pin C (lead 572, 12 volts positive) bypassed to pin D (lead 590, forward) Status 1XXXXXXX
Pin C (lead 572, 12 volts positive) bypassed to pin E (lead 569, reverse) Status X1XXXXXX
Pin A (lead 589, 12 volts positive) bypassed to pin B (lead 561, not-neutral): Status XX1XXXXX
Result:
YES:Harness is OK: Repair the reverse drive lever as needed and carry out an "Operational test for reverse drive lever (A47)" .
NO:GO TO 2.2.
Action:
Use a JT05791A multimeter to check the supply voltage at plug X490/1 (cowl harness W09):

Power supply for reverse drive lever (not-neutral)

Result:
a "Reverse drive lever (A47) operational test" .
carry out a "Reverse drive lever (A47) operational test" .
Circuit/harness test for detent coil in reverse drive lever (A47)

The detent coil is responsible for holding the reverse drive lever in a certain position (forward or reverse). The detent coil is
supplied with power by the EPC via lead (614). The detent coil receives ground current from ground point XGND5. The EPC
transmission controller directs supply voltage to the detent coil under the following circumstances:
• The "come-home" plug is not reconnected (plug is in RUN mode).
• Range lever is set to any position other than "park".
• The neutral signal is received (reverse drive lever is in its neutral position and not moved to "forward" or "reverse" until 2
seconds have elapsed).

IMPORTANT:
( 1 ) Check the detent coil in the reverse drive lever
Action:
• This test must be performed at plug X490/1 (on side nearest the reverse drive lever).
• Measure resistance at plug X490/1 between pins F and G.
Resistance of detent coil in reverse drive lever

Resistance between pins F and G at plug X490/1: Resistance approx. 8 ohms
Result:
YES:Check power supply circuit (ground point XGND5, supply lead 614 and ground lead 310) (see illustration for layout of
leads). Repair as needed and carry out a "Reverse drive lever (A47) operational test" .
NO:Reverse drive lever (A47) is defective. Repair as needed and carry out a "Reverse drive lever (A47) operational test" .
Operational test on reverse drive lever (A47)

( 1 ) Checking the reverse drive lever (A47)
Action:
Access addressEPC007 :
EPC007 - Status, reverse drive lever signals (A47)

Reverse drive lever in neutral: Forward switch status 0XXXXXXX
Reverse switch status X0XXXXXX
Status of not-neutral switch XX0XXXXX
Reverse drive lever in forward position: Forward switch status 1XXXXXXX
Reverse drive lever in reverse position: Forward switch status 0XXXXXXX
Result:
YES:• GO TO 2 .
• Type of error indicates a loose contact, Circuit/harness test for reverse drive lever (A47) .
NO: Circuit/harness test for reverse drive lever (A47) .
( 2 ) Check the detent coil in the reverse drive lever
Action:
→NOTE:
As a rule, an operational test on the detent coil must be performed with the gearshift lever in neutral.
Detent coil test

Reverse drive lever in neutral: Status of detent coil not activated
Reverse drive lever in "forward" or "reverse": Status of detent coil activated (reverse drive lever remains in "forward" or "reverse")
Result:

• Type of error indicates a loose contact, Circuit/harness test for detent coil on reverse drive lever (A47) .
NO: Circuit/harness test for detent coil on reverse drive lever (A47) .
Reference 245-EPC-115, Circuit Test for Park Switch (S114)
Layout of leads for park switch (S114)
LEGEND:
S114 Park switch
W08 Cab harness
X503 2-pin plug for park switch
XGND43 Ground point
Circuit/harness test for park switch (S114)
The EPC transmission control unit does not receive any signal (=ground) from park switch (S114) via signal lead 261 unless the
park switch is closed (range shift lever in park position).

IMPORTANT:
Action:
Harness test in diagnostic mode (address EPC007):
• Pull the 2-pin plug (X503; for park switch S114) out of cab harness W08.
EPC007 - Status, park switch (S114)

Plug disconnected: Status XXXXX0XX
Pin A bypassed to pin B: Status XXXXX1XX
Result:
YES:Repair park switch (S114) as required and perform an “Operational test for park switch (S114)” .
NO:Check ground lead 050 and signal lead 261 in cab wiring harness W08 (see illustration for layout of leads). Recondition as
required and perform an “Operational test for park switch (S114)” .
Park switch (S114), operational test

( 1 ) Checking the park switch circuit at address EPC007
Action:
EPC007 - Status, park switch (S114)

Range lever set to park position: Status XXXXX1XX
Range lever not set to park position: Status XXXXX0XX
Result:

• Type of error indicates a loose contact, GO TO: Circuit/harness test for park switch (S114) .
NO:GO TO: Circuit/harness test for park switch (S114) .
Reference 245-EPC-116, Circuit Test for Reverse Drive Lever with N

LEGEND:
F05/4 Fuse
F05/6 Fuse
W08 Cab harness
XGND5 Ground point
The signals (forward, reverse and not-neutral) of reverse drive lever (A68/1) are registered by Hall sensors. The EPC
transmission controller needs the forward/reverse signal in order to:


IMPORTANT:
( 1 ) Check fuses
Action:
Check the fuses:
F05/04
F05/06
Result:
YES: GO TO 2 .
Action:
Address EPC007 - Harness test for reverse drive lever (A68/1)

Pin C (lead 572, 12 volts positive) bypassed to pin D (lead 590, forward) Status 1XXXXXXX
Pin C (lead 572, 12 volts positive) bypassed to pin E (lead 569, reverse) Status X1XXXXXX
Pin A (lead 589, 12 volts positive) bypassed to pin B (lead 561, not-neutral): Status XX1XXXXX
Result:
YES: GO TO 4 .
NO: GO TO 3 .
Action:

Power supply for reverse drive lever (not-neutral)

Result:
“Reverse drive lever (A68/1) operational test” .
carry out “Reverse drive lever (A68/1) operational test” .
( 4 ) Check circuit of N indicator light in reverse drive lever (A68/1)
Action:
N indicator light of reverse drive lever (A68/1), harness test

Result:
NO:Check indicator light circuit (ground point XGND5, supply lead 614 and ground lead 310) (see illustration for layout of
leads). Repair as needed and carry out “Reverse drive lever (A68/1) operational test” .

Action:
EPC007 - Status, reverse drive lever signals (A68/1)

Result:

Reference 245-EPC-117, Circuit Test for Solenoid Valve 1 (Y62)
Layout of leads for solenoid valve 1 (Y62)
LEGEND:
W08 Cab harness
X701 2-pin plug for solenoid valve 1
XGND46 Ground point
Y62 Solenoid valve 1
Circuit/harness test for solenoid valve 1 (Y62)
The EPC monitors and controls solenoid valve 1. Solenoid valve 1 is supplied with power by the transmission control unit (EPC)
in 1st and 4th gears only. Together with solenoid valve 2, solenoid valve 1 is responsible for shifting to 1st gear. If a circuit
problem occurs, the EPC transmission controller shuts off the power supply to the solenoid valve 1.


IMPORTANT:
( 1 ) Check resistance of solenoid valve 1 (Y62)
Action:
Check resistance at solenoid valve 1 in harness W28 (at front end of transmission):
• Ignition OFF.
X701 - 2-pin plug for solenoid valve 1
Solenoid valve 1 (Y62), resistance

Resistance check (measure with ignition off): Solenoid resistance 15 +/-5 ohms at 20°C (68°F)
Result:
YES: GO TO 2 .
NO:Replace solenoid valve 1 (Y62) and perform an "Operational test for solenoid valve 1 circuit (Y62)" .
( 2 ) Check supply voltage for solenoid valve 1 (Y62)
Action:
IMPORTANT:
1. Ignition OFF.
Solenoid valve 1 (Y62), power supply

Voltage with solenoid valve de-activated (2nd or 3rd gear): Voltage 0 volts
Voltage with solenoid valve activated (4th gear): Voltage 12 volts
Result:
YES: GO TO 3 .
"Operational test for solenoid valve 1 circuit (Y62)" .
( 3 ) Check amperage for solenoid valve 1 (Y62)
Action:
IMPORTANT:
Solenoid valve 1 (Y62), amperage

Amperage with solenoid valve activated (4th gear): Amperage 1 - 1.2 amps at 20°C (68°F) and 12-volt rated voltage
Result:
YES:Check all relevant connectors of the solenoid valve circuit for bad, loose, widened or corroded contacts.
and perform "Operational test for solenoid valve 1 circuit (Y62)" .
Solenoid valve 1 circuit (Y62), operational test

( 1 ) Check solenoid valve 1 (Y62)
Action:
CAUTION:

Move the reverse drive lever to forward (clutch pedal not pressed): Speed (with engine speed at 1000 rpm in 4th gear) approx. 1000 rpm
→NOTE:
Solenoid valve 1 is supplied with power by the transmission control unit (EPC) in 1st and 4th gears only.
Together with solenoid valve 2, solenoid valve 1 is responsible for shifting to 1st gear. In 1st gear, the
ratio of engine speed to transmission speed is 1:1.767. In 4th gear, the ratio of engine speed to
transmission speed is 1:1.
Gear Solenoid valve 1 Solenoid valve 2
Second gear active
Third gear
Fourth gear active
Engine speed to transmission speed ratio (forward travel)
Gear Ratio
First gear 1.767
Second gear 1.466
Third gear 1.225
Fourth gear 1.0
Result:

• Type of error indicates a loose contact, GO TO: Circuit/harness test for solenoid valve 1 (Y62) , 245-EPC.
NO:GO TO: Circuit/harness test for solenoid valve 1 (Y62) , 245-EPC.
Reference 245-EPC-118, Circuit Test for Solenoid Valve 2 (Y63)
Layout of leads for solenoid valve 2 (Y63)
LEGEND:
W08 Cab harness
X702 2-pin plug for solenoid valve 2
XGND46 Ground point
Y63 Solenoid valve 2
Circuit/harness test for solenoid valve 2 (Y63)
The EPC monitors and controls solenoid valve 2. The solenoid valve 2 is supplied with power by the transmission control unit
(EPC) in 1st or 2nd gear only. Together with solenoid valve 1, solenoid valve 2 is responsible for shifting to 1st gear. If a circuit
problem occurs, the EPC transmission controller shuts off the power supply to the solenoid valve 2.


IMPORTANT:
( 1 ) Check resistance of solenoid valve 2 (Y63)
Action:
Check resistance at solenoid valve 2 in harness W28 (at front end of transmission):
• Ignition OFF.
X702 - 2-pin plug for solenoid valve 2
• Measure resistance between pins A and B at the solenoid valve:
Solenoid valve 2 (Y63), resistance

Resistance check (measure with ignition off): Solenoid resistance 15 +/-5 ohms at 20°C (68°F)
Result:
YES: GO TO 2 .
NO:Replace solenoid valve 2 (Y63) and perform an "Operational test for solenoid valve 2 circuit (Y63)" .
( 2 ) Check supply voltage for solenoid valve 2 (Y63)
Action:
IMPORTANT:
1. Ignition OFF.
Solenoid valve 2 (Y63), power supply

Voltage with solenoid valve de-activated (3rd or 4th gear): Voltage 0 volts
Voltage with solenoid valve activated (2nd gear): Voltage 12 volts
Result:
YES: GO TO 3 .
"Operational test for solenoid valve 2 circuit (Y63)" .
( 3 ) Check amperage for solenoid valve 2 (Y63)
Action:
IMPORTANT:
Solenoid valve 2 (Y63), amperage

Amperage with solenoid valve activated (2nd gear): Amperage 1 - 1.2 amps at 20°C (68°F) and 12-volt rated voltage
Result:
YES:Check all relevant connectors of the solenoid valve circuit for bad, loose, widened or corroded contacts.
and perform "Operational test for solenoid valve 2 circuit (Y63)" .
Solenoid valve 2 circuit (Y63), operational test

( 1 ) Check solenoid valve 2 (Y63)
Action:
CAUTION:
• Select 2nd gear.

Move the reverse drive lever to forward (clutch pedal not pressed): Speed (with engine speed at 1000 rpm in 2nd gear) approx. 682 rpm
→NOTE:
The solenoid valve 2 is supplied with power by the transmission control unit (EPC) in 1st or 2nd gear only.
Together with solenoid valve 1, solenoid valve 2 is responsible for shifting to 1st gear. In 1st gear, the
ratio of engine speed to transmission speed is 1:1.767. In 2nd gear, the ratio of engine speed to
transmission speed is 1:1.466.
Gear Solenoid valve 1 Solenoid valve 2
Second gear active
Third gear
Fourth gear active
Gear Ratio
First gear 1.767
Second gear 1.466
Third gear 1.225
Fourth gear 1.0
Result:

• Type of error indicates a loose contact, GO TO: Circuit/harness test for solenoid valve 2 (Y63) , in 245-EPC.
NO:GO TO: Circuit/harness test for solenoid valve 2 (Y63) , in 245-EPC.
Reference 245-EPC-119, Circuit Test for Reverse Drive Lever with N

LEGEND:
F05/4 Fuse
W08 Cab harness
XGND5 Ground point
The signals (forward, reverse and not-neutral) of reverse drive lever (A68/2) are registered by Hall sensors. The EPC
transmission controller needs the forward/reverse signal in order to:
The reverse drive lever (A68/2) is also equipped with a neutral switch (microswitch) which senses the neutral position of the
lever.

IMPORTANT:
( 1 ) Check fuses
Action:
Check the fuses:
F05/04
Result:
YES: GO TO 2 .
Action:
Address EPC007 - Harness test for reverse drive lever (A68/2)

Pin H (lead 572, 12 volts positive) bypassed to pin D (lead 590, forward) Status 1XXXXXXX
Pin H (lead 572, 12 volts positive) bypassed to pin E (lead 569, reverse) Status X1XXXXXX
Pin H (lead 572, 12 volts positive) bypassed to pin B (lead 561, not-neutral): Status XX1XXXXX
Result:
YES: GO TO 4 .
NO: GO TO 3 .
Action:
Power supply for reverse drive lever

between pin H (lead 572, 12-volt positive) and any suitable ground point: Voltage 12 volts
Result:
a “Reverse drive lever (A68/2) operational test” .
NO:Check the power supply circuit (positive lead 572) (see illustration for layout of leads). Repair as needed and carry out
“Reverse drive lever (A68/2) operational test” .
( 4 ) Check circuit of neutral switch in reverse drive lever (A68/2)
Action:
Harness test for neutral switch in reverse drive lever (A68/2)

Result:
NO:Check power supply circuit (ground point XGND5, supply lead 614 and ground lead 310) (see illustration for layout of
leads). Repair as needed and carry out “Reverse drive lever (A68/2) operational test” .

Action:
EPC007 - Status, reverse drive lever signals (A68/2)

Status, neutral switch XXX0XXXX
Result:

Reference 245-EPC-200, Theory of Operation
Diagram, control unit (EPC) up to tractor ser. no. 409632
LEGEND:
A47 Reverse drive lever without "N" indicator light
A67 Control unit (EPC)
A68/1 Reverse drive lever with "N" indicator light
B105 Enable pressure sending unit

S81 Gear selector switch
S114 Park switch
Y32 K3 solenoid valve
Y38 Proportional valve for enable signal
934 (CAN) BUS lead
935 (CAN) BUS lead
Section 245 - ELECTRONIC CONTROL UNITS Group PRF: PRF - Performance Monitor
Diagram, control unit (EPC) from tractor ser. no. 409633
LEGEND:
A67 Control unit (EPC)
B105 Enable pressure sending unit
S81 Gear selector switch
S114 Park switch
Y38 Proportional valve for enable signal
934 (CAN) BUS lead
935 (CAN) BUS lead
Control unit (EPC)
EPC, general information
General information
Function: Control unit (EPC) monitors, coordinates and controls all functions necessary for the transmission.
The EPC receives signals and commands from various switches and sending units of PowrQuad Plus or AutoQuad transmission. These signals are
processed by the control unit and appropriate commands are sent to the solenoid valves:
• Solenoid valve Y33 (forward)
• Solenoid valve Y36 (reverse)
• Proportional solenoid valve Y38 (modulation)
• Solenoid valve Y32 (C3 clutch)
[ up to tractor serial no. 409632 ]
Description: • Solenoid valve Y39 (C2 clutch)
[ from tractor serial no. 409633 ]
[ from tractor serial no. 409633 ]
EPC, diagnostic program information
Input addresses See: Reference 245-EPC-001 , Calibration and Input Addresses.
Diagnostic addresses (DIA) and output addresses (ROM) See: Reference 245-05-012 , Summary of Addresses.
Interactive calibration: Interactive calibration possible with Service ADVISOR
Interactive test: EPC fine-tuning
Group PRF - PRF - Performance Monitor

Reference 245-PRF-001, Calibration and Input Addresses
( 1 ) Procedure
Action:
Before entering the program mode and accessing the relevant addresses, see Reference 245-05-002 , Accessing the Addresses
Result:
Address PRF020 - Data Bus control function

( 1 ) AddressPRF020
Action:
Result:
Address PRF022 - Brightness of lighting

( 1 ) AddressPRF022
Action:
The value is a percentage. Values between 0 (dim) and 255 (bright) can be entered.
Result:
Address PRF023 - Setting the implement control arrow

( 1 ) AddressPRF023
Action:
Hitch position sensor: Input = 033 (factory setting)
Implement switch or "implement" key on performance monitor: Input = 040
Auto-search mode: Input = 255
Result:
Address PRF060 - Ground speed sensor

( 1 ) AddressPRF060
Action:
Input = 0
Result:
Address PRF070 - Automatic deletion of diagnostic trouble codes

The entered value indicates the number of hours after which the diagnostic trouble codes are automatically deleted.
( 1 ) AddressPRF070
Action:
Input: 040 (factory setting)
The possible input values are 0 - 255 hours.
Result:
Address PRF247 - Model designation of current tractor

( 1 ) AddressPRF247
Action:
E.g.: 5620 tractor: Input = 005620
Result:
Address PRF248 - Serial number of current tractor

( 1 ) AddressPRF248
Action:
e.g.: Serial number 123456: Input = 123456
Result:
Reference 245-PRF-011, Calibration of Ground Speed Sensor (Radar)

LEGEND:
A Display field
B Radar symbol
C Implement key
D Distance key
E Speed key
F Implement indicator
G Symbols
Performance monitor
CAUTION:
To avoid possible eye damage do not look directly into sensor face.
Mark a 122 meter (400 ft) straight-line course (start and finish lines).
— Rear PTO must be switched off.
— Pressdistance key (D) andspeed key (E) and hold them both down until"- - -" appears in display field (A) and the"ft"
and"m" symbols (G) start to flash. The implement arrow (F) should be pointing up.
— Drive the tractor at a speed of approximately 3.2 km/h (2 mph). As the tractor crosses the start-line, press theimplement
key (C), to point the indicator arrow to the down position.
— Press theimplement key (C) as you cross the finish-line to change the arrow to the up position.
Display will alternate between "122 m" and "400 ft" when calibration is successful.
→NOTE:
"E r r" will flash on display if calibration was not performed correctly. Previous calibration values will stay
in memory.
Press the ground speed key to return the display to "ground speed".
→NOTE:
The function for the ground speed sensor can also be checked using the BCU (see relevant Diagnostic
Manual).
→NOTE:
When the ground speed sensor is calibrated, the value at BCU calibration address 060 on the BCU
automatically changes.
Reference 245-PRF-021, Setting Wheel Slip Back to Zero

LEGEND:
A % slip switch
B Zero key
C Display field
Performance monitor
CAUTION:
To avoid possible eye damage do not look directly into sensor face.
→NOTE:
Before setting wheel slip back to zero, you should calibrate the ground speed sensor. See Reference 245-
PRF-011 "Calibrating the ground speed sensor (radar)".
The ground speed sensor (radar sensor) must be fully operational, otherwise the correct ground speed will not be registered. If
true ground speed is not available, "---" will be displayed.
— Drive the tractor at a speed of approximately 8 km/h (5 mph).
— Press the% slip switch (A).
— Press thezero key (B) and hold it down until"C A L" is displayed in field (C). After approx. 2 seconds, the display changes to
"0".
→NOTE:
"E r r" will flash on display if wheel slip is not returned to zero successfully. Previous value will stay in
memory.
Reference 245-PRF-101, Circuit Test for Keypad Operation

Operational test of performance monitor
( 1 ) Checking keypad status (top)
Action:
→NOTE:
When testing the keys in the top two rows, always keep the "Area" key pressed. This prevents the
address from changing.
Access addressPRF 10 :
PRF 10 –– Status, keypad status (top)

No key pressed: Status 000000
“Area (1)” key pressed: Status XXXXX1
“Implement (2)” key pressed: Status XXXX1X
“% Slip (3)” key pressed: Status XXX1XX
“Distance (4)” key pressed: Status XX1XXX
“Area / H (5)” pressed: Status X1XXXX
“Vehicle Speed (6)” key pressed: Status 1XXXXX
Result:
YES: GO TO 2 .
NO:Replace the performance monitor and repeat the test.
( 2 ) Checking keypad status (bottom)
Action:
→NOTE:
When testing the keys in the bottom two rows, always keep the "Width" key pressed. This prevents the
address from changing.
Access addressPRF 11 :
PRF 11 –– Status, keypad status (bottom)

No key pressed: Status 000000
“Width (7)” key pressed: Status XXXXX1
“Service (8)” key pressed: Status XXXX1X
“PTO Speed (9)” key pressed: Status XXX1XX
“Backlight” key pressed: Status XX1XXX
“Zero (0)” key pressed: Status X1XXXX
“Set/Save” key pressed: Status 1XXXXX
Result:
YES:Diagnostics completed.
NO:Replace the performance monitor and repeat the test.

Reference 245-PRF-200, Theory of Operation
Performance monitor (PRF)
LEGEND:
P15 Performance monitor (PRF)
S09 Light switch
X545 2-pin plug for implement switch (if equipped)
A Performance monitor (PRF) power supply
B CAN BUS lines
Performance monitor
POWRQUAD AND POWRQUAD PLUS TRANSMISSIONS (g) by Belgreen v2.0
PRF, general information
General information
The performance monitor (PRF) displays information related to various speeds, area, distance, time and alarm data.
Function:
The performance monitor can also be used for diagnostics and calibration of the various electronic control units.
Location: In the operator′s cab on the r.h. A-post
Area, wheel slip, slip alarm, width, implement indicator, distance, brightness of display and service can be adjusted or preset.
Wheel slip and keypad backlight brightness are shown in percent.
A radar sensor is required for an accurate calculation of wheel slip, area covered, distance or speed. Without a radar sensor, these values are
calculated based on wheel speed.
Description:
The desired information is called up by accessing a diagnostics address or calibration address.
Among other functions, the diagnostic program is used for system diagnosis. Diagnostic trouble codes, switch status, voltages, part number, software
version, tractor model and tractor serial number information can be queried.
The diagnostic program is activated by pressing the service key on the performance monitor (PRF), or via the Service ADVISOR ™ .
PRF, diagnostic program information
Input addresses See: Reference 245-PRF-001 , Calibration and Input Addresses.
Diagnostic addresses (DIA) and output addresses (ROM) See: Reference 245-05-013 , Performance Monitor - Summary of Addresses.
See:
Other functions: • Reference 245-PRF-011 , Calibration of ground speed sensor (radar).
• Reference 245-PRF-021 , Setting wheel slip back to zero.
Section 255 - POWRQUAD AND POWRQUAD PLUS TRANSMISSIONS

Table of contents
Group 05 - Introductory Checks ............................................................................................................. 1
Preliminary checks ............................................................................................................................... 1
Group 10 - Operational Check-Out ........................................................................................................ 5
Operational checks ............................................................................................................................... 5
Group 15 - Tests and Adjustments ...................................................................................................... 11
Reference 255-15-000, PowrQuad Transmission — Summary of References ..................................... 11
Reference 255-15-030, Special Tools ................................................................................................. 11
System check ..................................................................................................................................... 12
Reference 255-15-002, PowrQuad Transmission — Test Ports ........................................................... 18
Reference 255-15-003, PowrQuad Transmission — Checking Rate of Flow at Cooler ........................ 20
Reference 255-15-021, PowrQuad Transmission — Check Cooler Relief Valve .................................. 24
Reference 255-15-004, PowrQuad Transmission — Checking System Pressure ................................. 28
Reference 255-15-005, PowrQuad Transmission—Checking Lube Oil Pressure .................................. 29
Reference 255-15-006, PowrQuad Transmission—Checking Cooling Oil Pressure (Forward Clutch)
..................................................................................................................................................... 30
Reference 255-15-007, PowrQuad Transmission — Checking Cooling Oil Pressure (Reverse Brake)
..................................................................................................................................................... 32
Reference 255-15-008, PowrQuad Transmission—Checking Pressure at Forward Clutch ................... 33
Reference 255-15-009, PowrQuad Transmission — Checking Pressure at Reverse Brake .................. 34
Reference 255-15-010, PowrQuad Transmission — Checking Pressure at B1 Brake .......................... 35
Reference 255-15-013, PowrQuad Transmission — Checking Pressure at C4 Clutch ......................... 39
Reference 255-15-014, PowrQuad Transmission—Adjusting System Pressure ................................... 41
Reference 255-15-015, PowrQuad Transmission — Test Result Table ................................................ 43
Reference 255-15-016, PowrQuad Transmission — Adjusting the Reverse Drive Linkage ................. 44
Reference 255-15-017, PowrQuad Transmission — Checking and Adjusting the Shift Units .............. 46
Reference 255-15-018, Adjusting the Reverse Drive Lever (Reverser Control on Steering Column)
..................................................................................................................................................... 49
Reference 255-15-019, PowrQuad Transmission — Adjusting the Clutch Pedal ................................. 51
Reference 255-15-025, Reduction Gear - Adjusting the Shift Linkage ................................................ 52
Group 20 - Theory of Operation ........................................................................................................... 54
Reference 255-20-001, PowrQuad and PowrQuad Plus Transmissions — Summary of References
..................................................................................................................................................... 54
Reference 255-20-050, PowrQuad Transmission — Layout ................................................................ 55
Reference 255-20-100, PowrQuad Module — Layout ......................................................................... 57
Reference 255-20-280, PowrQuad Module—Sectional and 3D View ................................................... 59
Reference 255-20-290, PowrQuad Module — Location of Valves, Sensors and Switches ................... 64
Reference 255-20-110, PowrQuad Module—Element Engagement Chart .......................................... 72
Reference 255-20-120, PowrQuad Module—Pneumatic Pump ............................................................ 73
Reference 255-20-130, PowrQuad Module—Transmission Oil Pump .................................................. 75
Reference 255-20-140, PowrQuad Module—Pressure-Regulating Valve and Filter Relief Valve ......... 77
Reference 255-20-150, PowrQuad Module—Overspeed Relief Valve and Anti-Cavitation Check Valve
..................................................................................................................................................... 82
Reference 255-20-160, PowrQuad Module—Clutch Cooling Components .......................................... 83
Reference 255-20-170, PowrQuad Module—Clutch Cooling Valve (Forward/Reverse) ....................... 83
Reference 255-20-180, PowrQuad Module—System 1 Oil and System 2 Oil ...................................... 83
Reference 255-20-190, PowrQuad Module—Hydraulic Schematic, Mechanically Actuated PowrQuad
Module ......................................................................................................................................... 84
Reference 255-20-200, PowrQuad Module—Operation of Forward/Reverse Modulation, Mechanically
Actuated PowrQuad Module ........................................................................................................ 86

Reference 255-20-210, PowrQuad Module—Neutral Start Circuit, Mechanically Actuated PowrQuad
Module ......................................................................................................................................... 89
Reference 255-20-220, PowrQuad Module—Operation of Gear-to-Gear Modulation, Mechanically
Reference 255-20-230, PowrQuad Module—Hydraulic Schematic, Electrically Actuated PowrQuad
Module ......................................................................................................................................... 93
Reference 255-20-240, PowrQuad Module—Operation of Forward/Reverse Modulation, Electrically
Reference 255-20-250, PowrQuad Module — Operation of Gear-to-Gear Modulation, Electrically
Actuated PowrQuad Module ...................................................................................................... 101
Reference 255-20-260, PowrQuad Module—Reverse Drive Lever and Gear Shift Lever, Mechanically
Actuated PowrQuad Module ...................................................................................................... 105
Reference 255-20-270, PowrQuad Module — Reverse Drive Lever and Range Shift Lever with Gearshift
Switches, Electrically Actuated PowrQuad Module .................................................................... 105
Reference 255-20-400, PowrQuad Plus Transmission — Summary of Transmission Versions .......... 107
Reference 255-20-410, PowrQuad Plus Transmission—Sub-Assemblies ........................................... 107
Reference 255-20-420, PowrQuad Plus Transmission — Description of Shift Functions ................... 107
Reference 255-20-440, PowrQuad Plus Transmission — Description of Clutch Actuation ................ 108
Reference 255-20-500 — Range Transmission, Layout .................................................................... 109
Reference 255-20-510 — Range Transmission, Power Flow ............................................................. 110
Reference 255-20-520—Range Transmission, Park Lock .................................................................. 114
Reference 255-20-800, Reduction Gear—Operation ......................................................................... 115
Reference 255-20-810, Reduction Gear — Power Flow .................................................................... 117
Section 255 - POWRQUAD AND POWRQUAD PLUS TRANSMISSIONS Group 05: Introductory Checks
Group 05 - Introductory Checks

Reference 255-05-001, Introductory Checks for Transmission and
Hydraulic Diagnosis
CAUTION:
The following tests are used for step-by-step troubleshooting without tools. They should enable the isolation of faults in the
hydraulic system, transmission oil circuit and power train.
Preliminary checks
( 1 ) General information
Action:
General information
Ask operator
How is machine performing?

When does it malfunction?
In what applications?
Checking the service records of the tractor
Has all maintenance been performed properly?

Are unusual or similar instances recorded in the service record?
Do a visual check on the tractor
Visual check
Linkages and bowden cables should not jam and must not be broken or accidentally disconnected.
Drive elements such as poly-V-belts or shafts must not be torn, broken or damaged.
Oil lines and pressure hoses must not be bent, trapped or damaged.
Electrical connections, fuses and cables must not be rusty, loose or damaged.
Result:
YES: GO TO 2.
NO:Rectify the fault.
( 2 ) Checking the condition of the hydraulic oil
Action:
Low oil level in reservoir
Is the oil level too low?
Possible causes:
Improper service intervals

External leaks (loss of oil)
Milky/contaminated oil
Is the oil milky or dirty?
Possible causes:
Water in oil (milky)

Filter failure (dirty)
Mechanical failure (metallic particles)
Discolored/overheated oil
Is the oil discoloured or does it smell burnt (overheated oil)?
Possible causes:
Internal leaks
Bent oil lines

Plugged oil cooler
Wrong oil viscosity
Mechanical failure.
Result:
YES: GO TO 3.
( 3 ) Checking the tractor for external leaks with the engine shut off
Action:
→NOTE:
If possible, do this check with the tractor at its operating temperature. Before doing the check, switch on
the engine and deliberately engage and disengage all tractor components in turn, including the steering,
rockshaft, SCVs, brakes, differential lock, front-wheel drive and PTO.
Checking the tractor for external leaks
Possible causes:
Broken lines, ruptured hoses or loose connections

Cracks or porous areas in the housing
Leaks at shaft sealing rings, O-rings or gaskets
Result:
YES: GO TO 4.
( 4 ) Checking the tractor for internal leaks or overheated oil with the engine running
Action:
CAUTION:
Make sure that the tractor will remain immobilized for the duration of the test. Move the gear-shift lever
to its "park" position and the range shift lever to its "neutral" position.
→NOTE:
If possible, do this check with the tractor at its operating temperature.
Section 255 - POWRQUAD AND POWRQUAD PLUS TRANSMISSIONS Group 10: Operational Check-Out
Checking the tractor for internal leaks or overheated oil
Start the engine and run it at a speed of 1000 rpm. Deliberately engage and disengage all tractor components including the
steering, rockshaft, SCVs, brakes, differential lock, front-wheel drive and PTO.
• Be alert for gurgling noises, overheated oil lines or components, and for any other conditions that could indicate a problem or
help identify it.
Possible causes:
Internal leaks
Bent oil lines
Clogged oil cooler
Wrong oil viscosity
Mechanical failure
Result:
YES:Preliminary checks completed.

Reference 255-10-001, PowrQuad Transmission — Operational Check-
Out
The following tests represent a step-by-step approach to troubleshooting.Proceeding from the introductory checks , the
purpose of these tables is to help locate faults in the transmission circuit and power train.
See Reference 255-05-001 , "Introductory Checks for Transmission and Hydraulic Diagnosis".
CAUTION:
Operational checks
( 1 ) Check the neutral start circuit
Action:
With mechanically actuated PowrQuad transmission
The mechanically actuated PowrQuad transmission has a neutral start switch that is actuated via the forward/reverse valve.
Use the reverse drive lever to select forward and reverse travel, and try to start the engine.
• Engine must only start if reverse drive lever is in neutral position. If a direction of travel is selected, the engine must not
start.
• If the engine does start with a direction of travel selected, check the settings of the reverse drive linkage and reverse drive
lever. Also check the neutral start switch itself.
With electrically actuated PowrQuad transmission
With the electrically actuated PowrQuad transmission, the neutral start circuit is monitored by the EPC (electronic control unit),
i.e. there is no neutral start switch.
• If there is a fault in the neutral start circuit, the engine can be started but the tractor is nevertheless immobilized.
• In the event of a fault, check the electronics.
Result:
YES: GO TO 2 .
NO:With mechanically actuated PowrQuad transmission, see the following references: Reference 255-15-016 ,
"PowrQuad Transmission — Adjusting the Reverse Drive Linkage" Reference 255-15-018 , "Adjusting the Reverse Drive Lever
(Reverser Control on Steering Column)" Reference 255-15-017 , "PowrQuad Transmission — Checking and Adjusting the Shift
Units"Neutral start switchRefer to "Neutral start switch, replacing (with mech. actuated PowrQuad module)" in the relevant
Technical Manual "Repair", Section 55, Group 10.With electrically actuated PowrQuad transmission, see the following
references: Reference 245-05-001 , "General Operation and Entering the Program Mode". Reference 245-05-002 , "Accessing
Addresses and Diagnostic Trouble Codes".
( 2 ) Check if the vehicle′s clutch separates properly
Action:
→NOTE:
Perform this test when oil is cold.
[1] - Run the engine at a speed of 1500 rpm.
[2] - Fully depress clutch pedal.
[3] - Engage 1st gear and range A.
[4] - Move the reverse drive lever to the "forward" position.
• The tractor must not move while the clutch pedal is depressed.
Result:
YES: GO TO 3.
NO:With mechanically actuated PowrQuad transmission, see reference "Adjusting the clutch pedal (PowrQuad transmission)" in
the relevant Technical Manual "Repair", Section 55, Group 05.With electrically actuated PowrQuad transmission, see
the following references: Reference 245-05-001 , "General Operation and Entering the Program Mode". Reference
245-05-002 , "Accessing Addresses and Diagnostic Trouble Codes".
( 3 ) Check vehicle′s clutch for slippage
Action:
[2] - Depress the clutch pedal.
[3] - Engage 4th gear and range D.
[5] - Depress brake pedal and slowly release clutch pedal.
• The engine must cut out.
Result:
YES: GO TO 4.
NO:See Reference 255-15-001 , "PowrQuad Transmission — System Check".
( 4 ) Check slip phase of the vehicle′s clutch
Action:
[1] - Drive tractor on a slope (ramp) and bring it to a standstill.
[2] - Carefully hold the tractor on the clutch so that it does not roll away.
• It should be possible to modulate the clutch′s slip phase precisely using the clutch pedal. The tractor must not roll away.
Result:
YES: GO TO 5.
NO:See Reference 255-15-001 , "PowrQuad Transmission — System Check".With electrically actuated PowrQuad
transmission, see the following references: Reference 245-05-001 , "General Operation and Entering the Program Mode".
Reference 245-05-002 , "Accessing Addresses and Diagnostic Trouble Codes".
( 5 ) Checking the park lock
Action:
[2] - Move the gear shift lever or range shift lever to its "park" position.
[3] - Move reverse drive lever to neutral position
[4] - Slowly release the brake pedal.
[5] - Park lock must engage and the tractor must not roll away.
• If it does roll away, check the setting of the park lock.
Result:
YES: GO TO 6.
NO:See Reference 255-15-017 , "PowrQuad Transmission — Checking and Adjusting the Shift Units"
( 6 ) Checking neutral-to-gear modulation
Action:
[3] - Move the reverse drive lever to "forward" position (clutch pedal NOT depressed).
• A modulated engagement of forward clutch should not take longer than 2 seconds and not be excessively aggressive.
→NOTE:
Neutral-to-gear modulation is also influenced by the following factors, which should also be taken into
consideration when performing this check: tire size, tire pressure, extra weight, front-wheel drive, engine
speed, oil temperature and oil viscosity.
Result:
YES: GO TO 7.
( 7 ) Checking forward/reverse modulation
Action:
[2] - Move the reverse drive lever from "forward" to "reverse" (clutch pedal NOT depressed).
• Modulated movement from "forward" to "reverse" should not take longer than 2 seconds and not be excessively aggressive.
→NOTE:
Forward/reverse modulation is also influenced by the following factors, which should also be taken into
consideration when performing this check: tire size, tire pressure, extra weight, front-wheel drive, engine
speed, oil temperature and oil viscosity.
Result:
YES: GO TO 8.
( 8 ) Gear-to-gear modulation check
Action:
Change up and down through the forward and reverse gears (up from 1st to 4th and down from 4th to 1st).
Modulated gear-to-gear engagement should not take longer than 0.6—0.75 seconds.
• Shifting up should not be excessively aggressive; shifting down will be slightly more aggressive (jerky) than shifting up.
Result:
YES: GO TO 9.
( 9 ) Checking front-wheel drive
Action:
[5] - Turn the steering wheel to full lock and slowly drive the tractor in a circle.
[6] - Engage front-wheel drive. The front-wheel drive indicator light should light up.
[7] - When front-wheel drive is switched on or off, there should be a perceptible reaction at the front axle.
Result:
YES: GO TO 10.
NO:See Reference 256-15-001 , "Drive Systems — System Check".
( 10 ) Checking the differential lock
Action:
[5] - Turn the steering wheel to full lock and slowly drive the tractor in a circle.
[6] - Engage differential lock. The differential lock indicator light should light up.
[7] - Disengage the differential lock. The differential lock indicator light should go out.
[8] - When differential lock is switched on or off, there should be a perceptible reaction at the front axle.
Result:
YES: GO TO 11.
( 11 ) Checking the rear PTO
Action:
CAUTION:
Make sure that the tractor will remain immobilized for the duration of the test. Move the range shift
lever to its "park" position. Move the reverse drive lever to its neutral position.
Section 255 - POWRQUAD AND POWRQUAD PLUS TRANSMISSIONS Group 15: Tests and Adjustments
[1] - Start the engine.
→NOTE:
The PTO may rotate slightly before full system pressure has been achieved at the PTO brake.
[2] - With PTO switched off, run engine over its entire speed range. PTO should NOT rotate.
[3] - Engage PTO. The PTO indicator light should light up. PTO engagement should not be too aggressive. When the PTO is
turning, no unusual noises should occur.
[4] - Disengage the PTO.
With engine running at maximum speed, the PTO should come to a complete stop within 7 seconds.
[5] - If the engine is shut off while the PTO is running, the PTO should switch off automatically.
Result:
YES: GO TO 12.
( 12 ) Transmission (test drive)
Action:
Test drive the tractor, selecting each gear in turn in each of the ranges, at different engine speeds and both in forward and
reverse.
• The ranges must be shifted via the clutch.
• The gears and directions of travel may be changed without actuating the clutch pedal.
• All gears and ranges should engage smoothly.
• None of the gears or ranges should "jump" out.
• The shift levers must not bind or interfere with the shift gate.
• No unusual noises should occur. To make it easier to identify the noise of the gears meshing, simulate a load on the gears by
lightly applying the brake.
Deliberately engage and disengage all tractor components including the steering, brakes, rockshaft, SCVs, differential lock,
front-wheel drive and PTO.
• Be alert for gurgling noises and other conditions that could indicate a problem or help identify it.
Result:
YES:Operational check is completed.
NO:See Reference 255-15-016 , "PowrQuad Transmission — Adjusting the Reverse Drive Linkage"See Reference 255-15-017 ,
"PowrQuad Transmission — Checking and Adjusting the Shift Units"See Reference 255-15-018 , "Adjusting the Reverse Drive
Lever (Reverser Control on Steering Column)".

Reference 255-15-000, PowrQuad Transmission — Summary of
References
Tests and adjustments of the PowrQuad and PowrQuad Plus transmissions are dealt with at the following reference points:
Reference 255-15-030, "Special Tools"

Reference 255-15-001 , "PowrQuad Transmission — System Check".
Reference 255-15-002 , "PowrQuad Transmission — Test Ports".
Reference 255-15-003 , "PowrQuad Transmission — Checking Rate of Flow at Cooler".
Reference 255-15-004 , "PowrQuad Transmission — Checking System Pressure".
Reference 255-15-005 , "PowrQuad Transmission — Checking Lube Oil Pressure".
Reference 255-15-006 , "PowrQuad Transmission — Checking Cooling Oil Pressure (Forward Clutch)".
Reference 255-15-007 , "PowrQuad Transmission — Checking Cooling Oil Pressure (Reverse Brake)".
Reference 255-15-008 , "PowrQuad Transmission — Checking Pressure at Forward Clutch".
Reference 255-15-009 , "PowrQuad Transmission — Checking Pressure at Reverse Brake".
Reference 255-15-010 , "PowrQuad Transmission — Checking Pressure at B1 Brake".
Reference 255-15-013 , "PowrQuad Transmission — Checking Pressure at C4 Clutch".
Reference 255-15-014 , "PowrQuad Transmission — Adjusting System Pressure"
Reference 255-15-015 , "PowrQuad Transmission — Test Result Table".
Reference 255-15-016 , "PowrQuad Transmission — Adjusting the Reverse Drive Linkage"
Reference 255-15-017 , "PowrQuad Transmission — Checking and Adjusting the Shift Units"
Reference 255-15-018 , "Adjusting the Reverse Drive Lever (Reverser Control on Steering Column)"
Reference 255-15-019 , "PowrQuad Transmission — Adjusting the Clutch Pedal"
Reference 255-15-021 , "PowrQuad Transmission — Check Cooler Relief Valve".
→NOTE:
Order tools from the U.S. SERVICEGARD ™ or European Microfiche Tool Catalogs.
Flow measurement system
FKM10472
Measuring rates of flow
Pressure measuring system (stage 1)
FKM10470
Pressure tests
Reference 255-15-001, PowrQuad Transmission — System Check
CAUTION:
Whenever performing checks on the transmission circuit, always observe the relevant safety
precautions. See Reference 270-15-001 , ”Safety Measures for Hydraulic Checks”.
The following tests represent a step-by-step approach to troubleshooting.
IMPORTANT:
When troubleshooting, always start at the beginning and perform the checks in the sequence in which
they are listed here. Comply with all specifications.
The results of the tests should be recorded in the test result table. See Reference 255-15-015 , ”PowrQuad Transmission —
Test Result Table”
For further information, see Reference 210-15-001 , ”General References (Summary)”.
System check
( 1 ) Preconditions for proper system checking procedure
Action:
To ensure that the system is checked properly, do the following checks first.
See Reference 255-05-001 , ”Introductory Checks for Transmission and Hydraulic Diagnosis”.
See Reference 255-10-001 , ”PowrQuad Transmission — Operational Check”.
Result:
YES: GO TO 2.
NO:If possible, rectify any faults that become apparent prior to doing the system check proper.
( 2 ) Checking the temperature of the transmission oil
Action:
Transmission oil temperature during pressure checks Temperature min. 45°C
min. 113°F
Result:
YES: GO TO 3.
NO:See Reference 270-15-010 , ”Heating Up Hydraulic Oil”.
( 3 ) System pressure check
Action:
See Reference 255-15-004 , ”PowrQuad Transmission — Checking System Pressure”.
System pressure at 1000 rpm Pressure min. 950 kPa
min. 9.5 bar
min. 138 psi
System pressure at 2300 rpm Pressure 1200 kPa
12 bar
175 psi
• Adjust system (engagement) pressure if it is not within specification.
• If system pressure cannot be adjusted properly, check the components that are dependent on system pressure.
• Also, before checking or reconditioning the transmission oil pump, check the primary filter screen in the differential housing
for blockage, and check the rate of flow at the transmission oil pump.
Result:
YES: GO TO 4.
NO:See Reference 255-15-014 , ”PowrQuad Transmission — Adjusting System Pressure”.
( 4 ) Check components dependent on system pressure
Action:
See Reference 255-15-004 , ”PowrQuad Transmission — Checking System Pressure”.
System pressure at 2300 rpm Pressure 1200 kPa
12 bar
175 psi
• If system pressure falls when any of these components are switched on or off, there must be excessive leakage in the system
affected; check the relevant system.
Result:
YES: GO TO 5.
NO:See Reference 256-15-002 , ”Checking Pressure at the Front-Wheel Drive Clutch”.See Reference 256-15-003 , ”Checking
Pressure at the Hydraulic Differential Lock”.See Reference 256-15-004 , ”Checking Pressure at the Rear PTO”.
( 5 ) Lube oil pressure check
Action:
See Reference 255-15-005 , ”PowrQuad Transmission — Checking Lube Oil Pressure”.
Lube oil pressure at 1000 rpm Pressure min. 72 kPa
min. 0.72 bar
min. 10 psi
Lube oil pressure at 2300 rpm Pressure between 180 and 280 kPa
between 1.8 and 2.8 bar
between 26 and 40 psi
Result:
YES: GO TO 6.
NO:Check lube oil relief valve, refer to ”Removing and Installing Valves in the Front Valve Housing” in the relevant Technical
Manual ”Repair”, Section 55, Group 10.
( 6 ) Cooling oil pressure check (forward clutch)
Action:
See Reference 255-15-006 , ”PowrQuad Transmission — Checking Cooling Oil Pressure (Forward Clutch)”.
Cooling oil pressure (forward clutch) Pressure at 2300 rpm between 130 and 230 kPa
Result:
YES: GO TO 7.
NO:Check cooling oil control valves and clutch cooling valve, refer to ”Removing and Installing the Valves in the Shift Valve
Housing” in the relevant Technical Manual ”Repair”, Section 55, Group 10.
( 7 ) Cooling oil pressure check (reverse brake)
Action:
See Reference 255-15-007 , ”PowrQuad Transmission — Checking Cooling Oil Pressure (Reverse Brake)”.
Cooling oil pressure (reverse brake) Pressure at 2300 rpm between 130 and 230 kPa
Result:
YES: GO TO 8.
NO:Check cooling oil control valves and clutch cooling valve, refer to ”Removing and Installing the Valves in the Shift Valve
Housing” in the relevant Technical Manual ”Repair”, Section 55, Group 10.
( 8 ) Pressure at the forward clutch, check
Action:
See Reference 255-15-008 , ”PowrQuad Transmission — Checking Pressure at Forward Clutch”.
Pressure at the forward clutch Pressure at 2300 rpm 1200 kPa
12 bar
175 psi
Result:
YES: GO TO 9.
NO:See Reference 255-15-004 , ”PowrQuad Transmission — Checking System Pressure”.
NO:See Reference 255-15-005 , ”PowrQuad Transmission — Checking Lube Oil Pressure”.
( 9 ) Pressure at the reverse brake, check
Action:
See Reference 255-15-009 , ”PowrQuad Transmission — Checking Pressure at Reverse Brake”.
Pressure at the reverse brake Pressure at 2300 rpm 1200 kPa
12 bar
175 psi
Result:
YES: GO TO 10.
( 10 ) Pressure at the B1 brake, check
Action:
See Reference 255-15-010 , ”PowrQuad Transmission — Checking Pressure at B1 Brake”.
Pressure at the B1 brake Pressure at 2300 rpm 1200 kPa
12 bar
175 psi
Result:
YES: GO TO 11.
Action:
12 bar
175 psi
Result:
YES: GO TO 12.
Action:
12 bar
175 psi
Result:
YES: GO TO 13.
( 13 ) Pressure at the C4 clutch, check
Action:
Reference 255-15-013 , ”PowrQuad Transmission — Checking Pressure at C4 Clutch”.
Pressure at the C4 clutch Pressure at 2300 rpm 1200 kPa
12 bar
175 psi
Result:
YES: GO TO 14.
( 14 ) Cooler, checking rate of flow
Action:
See Reference 255-15-003 , ”PowrQuad Transmission — Checking Rate of Flow at Cooler”.
The delivery rate of the transmission oil pump is as follows:
Delivery rate of transmission oil pump Delivery rate at 2300 rpm 60 liters per minute
15.8 U.S. gpm
Flow rate at cooler at 1000 rpm Flow rate at least 15.9 liters per minute
at least 4.2 U.S. gpm
Flow rate at cooler at 2300 rpm Flow rate 54 liters per minute
14.2 U.S. gpm
• When each of these is switched on and off, the flow rate must not drop by more than 2 liters per minute (0.53 U.S. gpm) in
relation to the flow rate measured previously.
• If the flow rate drops too much when any of these systems are switched on or off, there must be excessive leakage in the
system affected; the relevant system must be checked.
• If the rate of flow is still not to specification even after the systems have been checked, check the primary filter screen in the
differential housing for blockage before checking or reconditioning the transmission oil pump.
Result:
YES: GO TO 15.
NO:See Reference 256-15-001 , ”Drive Systems — System Check”.See Reference 255-15-021 , ”PowrQuad Transmission —
Check Cooler Relief Valve”.
( 15 ) Check cooler relief valve
Action:
See Reference 255-15-021 , ”PowrQuad Transmission — Check Cooler Relief Valve”.
Opening pressure, cooler relief valve Opening pressure at 2300 rpm 950 kPa
9.5 bar
138 psi
• Pressure may rise to 950 kPa (9.5 bar; 138 psi).
• If pressure rises higher, check or recondition the cooler relief valve.
Result:
YES:System check is completed.
NO:Check cooler relief valve.
Reference 255-15-002, PowrQuad Transmission — Test Ports
→NOTE:
Test ports are identical regardless of whether the PowrQuad module is actuated electrically or
mechanically.
Electrically actuated PowrQuad module
LEGEND:
A C4 clutch
B B3 brake
C B2 brake
D B1 brake
E Lube oil pressure (port located in pressure line)

F Cooling oil pressure (forward clutch)
G Cooling oil pressure (reverse brake)
H Pressure at the reverse brake
I Pressure at the forward clutch
LEGEND:
A Test port for system pressure
Mechanically actuated PowrQuad module
LEGEND:
Reference 255-15-003, PowrQuad Transmission — Checking Rate of

Flow at Cooler
CAUTION:
Make sure that the tractor will remain immobilized for the duration of the test. Move reverse drive lever
to neutral and range shift lever into park position.
Tractors without air-conditioning system
Tractors with air-conditioning system
To check the rate of flow, install the FKM10472 flow tester downstream from the oil cooler. Make sure the direction of flow is
correct.
[1] - Prepare the flow tester for connection. Quick-couplers (F) must be taken off.
FKM10471
Pressure measuring system FKM10471
SensoControl© measurement unit for testing hydraulic systems
Flow-rate measuring system
FKM10472
Flow measurement system FKM10472
LEGEND:
A FKM10472-1 flow turbine
B FKM10472-2 connecting cable
C FKM10472-3 1/4-in. coupler
D FKM10472-4 temperature sensor
E FKM10472-5 hose (2 used)
F FKM10472-6 quick coupler (2 used)
G FKM10472-7 two-way fitting
H FKM10472-8 restrictor
I FKM10472-9 sealing ring (2 used)
J FKM10472-10 restriction fitting (2 used)
FKM10472-11 carrying case
SensoControl© measurement unit for hydraulic system flow testing, consisting of:
LEGEND:
E FKM10472-5 hose (2 used)
G FKM10472-7 two-way fitting
[2] -
Hose connector KJD10495
Take off the quick couplers and install KJD10495 hose connectors securely on the hoses of the FKM10472 flow tester.
[3] - Use oil pressure hoses (L111095) to connect the FKM10472 flow tester as shown. Make sure the direction of flow is
correct. Fully open the restrictor on the tester.
[4] - Heat hydraulic oil to 45°C (113°F).
[5] - Run the engine at 1000 rpm.
[6] - Read the rate of flow.
Rate of flow at cooler at 1000 rpm min. 15.9 liters per minute
at least 5.2 U.S. gpm
[7] - Measure the flow rate with the clutch pedal depressed.
[8] - Release the clutch pedal and check the flow rate once again. The flow rate with the clutch pedal released may drop by 2
liters per minute (0.53 U.S. gpm) in relation to the flow rate with the pedal depressed.
[9] - One at a time, switch rear PTO, differential lock and front-wheel drive on and off.
• When each of these is switched on and off, the flow rate may drop by 2 liters per minute (0.53 U.S. gpm) in relation to the
flow rate measured previously.
[10] - When the check is completed, remove the flow rate measuring system. Install a new connecting hose, and tighten it.
See reference "Installing Oil Hoses" , Section 10, Group 05.
Reference 255-15-021, PowrQuad Transmission — Check Cooler Relief

Valve
CAUTION:
Tractors without air-conditioning system
Tractors with air-conditioning system
To check the rate of flow, install the FKM10472 flow tester downstream from the oil cooler. Make sure the direction of flow is
correct.
[1] - Prepare the flow tester for connection. Quick-couplers (F) must be taken off.
FKM10471
Pressure measuring system FKM10471
SensoControl© measurement unit for testing hydraulic systems
System for measuring rate of through-flow
FKM10472
LEGEND:
E FKM10472-5 hose, 2 meters long (2 used)
G FKM10472-7 2-way fitting
LEGEND:
[2] -
Hose connector KJD10495
Take off the quick couplers and install KJD10495 hose connectors securely on the hoses of the FKM10472 flow tester.
[3] - Use oil pressure hoses (L111095) to connect the FKM10472 flow tester as shown. Make sure the direction of flow is
correct. Fully open the restrictor on the tester.
[6] - Slowly close the restrictor on the flow tester. As the restrictor closes, the rate of flow decreases. At the same time,
pressure rises until the cooler relief valve opens.
Opening pressure, cooler relief valve Opening pressure at 2300 rpm 950 kPa
9.5 bar
138 psi
• If pressure rises higher or relief valve does not open, recondition the cooler relief valve.
[7] - When the check is completed, remove the flow rate measuring system. Install a new connecting hose, and tighten it.
Refer to "Installing Oil Hoses" in the relevant Technical Manual "Repair", Section 10, Group 05.
Reference 255-15-004, PowrQuad Transmission — Checking System

Pressure
For the illustration of the test ports, see Reference 255-15-002 , ”PowrQuad Transmission — Test Ports”.
CAUTION:
[1] -
LEGEND:
Mechanically actuated PowrQuad module
Connect the FKM10470 pressure measuring system (Stage 1)
FKM10470
Pressure tests
to test port (A; for system pressure).
[3] - Read pressure.
Checking system pressure Pressure at 2300 rpm 1200 kPa
12 bar
175 psi
[4] - In this step, a check is made on the components that are dependent on system pressure. One at a time, switch rear PTO,
differential lock and front-wheel drive on and off.
• System (engagement) pressure must not drop when any of these are switched on or off.
• If system pressure falls when any of these components are switched on or off, there must be excessive leakage in the system
affected; check the relevant system.
Reference 255-15-005, PowrQuad Transmission—Checking Lube Oil

Pressure
For the illustration of the test ports, see Reference 255-15-002 , PowrQuad Transmission—Test Ports.
CAUTION:
[1] -
Checking lube oil pressure
FKM10470
Pressure tests
to the test port for lube oil pressure.
Checking lube oil pressure Pressure at 1000 rpm min. 72 kPa
min. 0.72 bar
min. 10 psi
Checking lube oil pressure Pressure at 2300 rpm between 180 and 280 kPa
[4] - Upon completion of the test, install and tighten plug.
Plug Torque 20 N˙m
15 lb-ft
Reference 255-15-006, PowrQuad Transmission—Checking Cooling Oil

Pressure (Forward Clutch)
CAUTION:
and range shift lever to neutral.
[1] -
Cooling oil pressure check (forward clutch)
FKM10470
Pressure tests
to the test port for cooling oil pressure (forward clutch).
[2] - Run the engine at a speed of 2300 1/min.
[3] - Reverse drive lever in forward position:
Cooling oil pressure check (forward clutch) Pressure at 2300 rpm between 130 and 230 kPa
Plug Torque 20 N˙m
15 lb-ft
Reference 255-15-007, PowrQuad Transmission — Checking Cooling Oil

Pressure (Reverse Brake)
CAUTION:
[1] -
Cooling oil pressure check (reverse brake)
Remove the u.j. shaft of the front-wheel drive axle; refer to ”Remove U.j. Shaft (Front-Wheel Drive)” in the relevant Technical
[2] - Connect the FKM10470 pressure measuring system (Stage 1)
FKM10470
Pressure tests
to the test port for cooling oil pressure (reverse brake).
[4] - Reverse drive lever in rearward position:
Cooling oil pressure check (reverse brake) Pressure at 2300 rpm between 130 and 230 kPa
Plug Torque 20 N˙m
15 lb-ft
[7] - Install the u.j. shaft of the front-wheel drive axle; refer to ”Install U.j. Shaft (Front-Wheel Drive)” in the relevant Technical
Reference 255-15-008, PowrQuad Transmission—Checking Pressure at

Forward Clutch
CAUTION:
[1] -
Pressure at the forward clutch, check
FKM10470
Pressure tests
to the test port for pressure at the forward clutch.
[3] - Reverse drive lever in forward position:
Pressure at the forward clutch, check Pressure at 2300 rpm 1200 kPa
12 bar
175 psi
Plug Torque 20 N˙m
15 lb-ft
Reference 255-15-009, PowrQuad Transmission — Checking Pressure at

Reverse Brake
CAUTION:
[1] -
Temperature sensor at reverse brake
Pressure at the reverse brake, check
FKM10470
Pressure tests
to the test port for pressure at the reverse brake.
→NOTE:
With electrically actuated PowrQuad module a temperature sensor is installed at the point where the
reverse brake pressure is measured. Remove the temperature sensor (A) before installing the tester.
[3] - Reverse drive lever in rearward position:
Pressure at the reverse brake, check Pressure at 2300 rpm 1200 kPa
12 bar
175 psi
[5] - Upon completion of the test, remove the tester. Install and tighten the temperature sensor.
Temperature sensor Torque 4 to 7 N˙m
3 to 5 lb-ft

B1 Brake
CAUTION:
[1] -
Pressure at the B1 brake, check
FKM10470
Pressure tests
to the test port for the B1 brake.
[3] - Engage the first gear.

Pressure at the B1 brake, check Pressure at 2300 rpm 1200 kPa
12 bar
175 psi
Plug Torque 20 N˙m
15 lb-ft

B2 Brake
CAUTION:
[1] -
Connect the FKM10470 pressure measuring system (Stage 1) to the test port for the B2 brake.
FKM10470
Pressure tests
[3] - Engage the second gear.
12 bar
175 psi
Plug Torque 20 N˙m
15 lb-ft

B3 Brake
CAUTION:
[1] -
Connect the FKM10470 pressure measuring system (Stage 1) to the test port for the B3 brake.
FKM10470
Pressure tests
[3] - Engage the third gear.
12 bar
175 psi
Plug Torque 20 N˙m
15 lb-ft

C4 Clutch
CAUTION:
[1] -
Pressure at the C4 clutch, check
Remove plug (A).
[2] -
LEGEND:
A Test port (AL80099)
[ Available as spare part ]
B Copper washer (commercial)
C Hydraulic hose (AL157636)
D Elbow fitting (38H5016)

To connect the pressure measuring system, install an elbow fitting and a pressure hose. Use a commercial copper washer as
seal between the test port and the hydraulic hose.
[3] -
FKM10470
Pressure tests
to the test port for the C4 clutch.
[5] - Engage the fourth gear.
Pressure at the C4 clutch, check Pressure at 2300 rpm 1200 kPa
12 bar
175 psi
Plug Torque 20 N˙m
15 lb-ft
Reference 255-15-014, PowrQuad Transmission—Adjusting System

Pressure
[1] -
→NOTE:
System pressure adjustment is the same regardless of whether the PowrQuad module is actuated
electrically or mechanically.
Adjusting system pressure
LEGEND:
A Electrically actuated PowrQuad module
B Pressure-regulating valve
C Spring
D Shim
E O-ring
F Plug
Remove plug (F).
[2] - Take out the pressure-regulating valve and do a visual inspection. If necessary, repair the parts.
[3] -
→NOTE:
Each shim alters the pressure by 60 kPa (0.6 bar; 8.7 psi). Removing shims will lower the pressure.
Adding shims will increase the pressure.
Adjust system pressure by adding or removing shims (D).
[4] - Install and tighten plug (F).
Pressure-regulating valve, plug Torque 30 N˙m
22 lb-ft
Reference 255-15-015, PowrQuad Transmission — Test Result Table

Test result table
Results of checks on PowrQuad transmission
Owner: Date:
Model: Tractor serial no.: Operating hours:
Transmission problem:
Checks at 1000 rpm Specification Actual result
°C (
Transmission oil temperature: 45°C (113°F)
°F)
liters per minute (

Check rate of flow at cooler: at least 15.9 L/min (4.2 U.S. gpm)
gpm)
kPa (
Check system pressure: at least 950 kPa (9.5 bar; 138 psi)
bar,
psi)
kPa (
Check lube oil pressure: at least 72 kPa (0.72 bar; 10 psi)

bar,
psi)
Checks at 2300 rpm Specification Actual result
°C (
Transmission oil temperature: 45°C (113°F)
°F)
kPa (
Check cooler relief valve: 950 kPa (9.5 bar; 130 psi) opening pressure
bar,
psi)
kPa (
Check system pressure: 1200 kPa (12 bars; 175 psi)

bar,
psi)
kPa (
Check lube oil pressure: between 180 kPa (1.8 bar; 26 psi) and 280 kPa (2.8 bar; 40 psi)
bar,
psi)
kPa (
Cooling oil pressure check (forward clutch) between 130 kPa (1.3 bar; 19 psi) and 230 kPa (2.3 bar; 33 psi)
bar,
psi)
kPa (
Cooling oil pressure check (reverse brake) between 130 kPa (1.3 bar; 19 psi) and 230 kPa (2.3 bar; 33 psi)
bar,
psi)
kPa (
Check the pressure at the forward clutch 1200 kPa (12 bars; 175 psi)
bar,
psi)
kPa (
Check the pressure at the reverse brake 1200 kPa (12 bars; 175 psi)
bar,
psi)
kPa (
Check pressure at the B1 brake 1200 kPa (12 bars; 175 psi)
bar,
psi)
kPa (
bar,
psi)
kPa (
bar,
psi)
kPa (
Check pressure at the C4 clutch 1200 kPa (12 bars; 175 psi)
bar,
psi)
Reference 255-15-016, PowrQuad Transmission — Adjusting the Reverse

Drive Linkage
CAUTION:
Do not perform any adjustments with the engine running, as the tractor could move unexpectedly.
Switch off the ignition and remove the key.
CAUTION:
Move reverse drive lever to neutral and range shift lever into park position.
→NOTE:
The length of the reverse drive linkage can also be determined and adjusted when removed.
[1] -
Reverse drive linkage, adjusting
Measure the length (a) of the reverse drive linkage.
[2] - Adjust the reverse drive linkage to the specified length using the yokes as required.
Adjusting the reverse drive linkage, without reduction gear Specified length (a) 545 mm
21.48 in.
Adjusting the reverse drive linkage, with reduction gear Specified length (a) 642 mm
25.28 in.
Reference 255-15-017, PowrQuad Transmission — Checking and

Adjusting the Shift Units
CAUTION:
Do not adjust the shift linkage with engine running because the tractor might move unexpectedly. Turn
off engine and remove key.
LEGEND:
A Gear lever
C Bowden cable, 1st to 4th gears
Shift lever
Adjusting the gear shift
Checking and adjusting the gear shift linkage (mechanical actuation)
[1] - Actuate the gear shift lever (A).
• All gears (1-2-3-4) should be selectable.
• The shift lever must not bump, jam or catch against the shift gate.
[2] - If necessary, disengage bowden cable (C). Adjust it by turning the yoke.
→NOTE:
Slacken off the yoke′s locknut before disengaging the bowden cable.
[3] - Engage the bowden cable and lock it with the locknut.
[4] - Re-check the adjustment.
Checking and adjusting the range shift linkage

LEGEND:
A Range lever
B Bowden cable, ranges A and B
C Bowden cable, ranges C and D
Range lever
Adjusting the range shift lever
[1] - Move range shift lever (A) back and forth in the neutral zone.
• Shift lever must neither catch nor touch the shifting gate.
Use range shift lever to select each range and the park lock.
• The shift lever must not bump, jam or catch against the shift gate.
[2] - If necessary, move range shift lever (A) to neutral position and disconnect bowden cables (B) and (C).
→NOTE:
[3] - Leave range shift lever (A) in neutral position. To make the adjustment, pull gently on the cable yoke so that the free play
before actuation (approx. 2 mm; 0.08 in.) is removed from the cable.
[4] - Hold the cable in this position (free of play) and turn the yoke until the yoke′s holes and shift quadrants are precisely
aligned.
[5] - Engage the bowden cable and lock it with the locknut.
[7] - Adjust the park lock.
Adjusting the park lock

LEGEND:
A Range lever
B Bowden cable, park lock
Range lever
Adjusting the park lock
[1] - Make sure that the range shift lever is adjusted correctly.
[2] - Move range shift lever (A) to neutral.
[3] - Disengage park lock bowden cable (B).
→NOTE:
[4] - Leave range shift lever in neutral. To make the adjustment, pull gently on the cable yoke (B) so that the free play before
actuation (approx. 2 mm; 0.08 in.) is removed from the cable.
[5] - Hold the cable in this position (free of play) and turn the yoke until the yoke′s holes and shift quadrants are precisely
aligned.
It must be possible to move the lever from its park lock position to range shift without the lever catching or dragging.
Checking the park lock
[2] - Shift lever to the "park" position.
[3] - Release the brake pedal.
[4] - Park lock must engage and the tractor must not roll away.
CAUTION:
If the tractor does roll away, the park lock must be checked on the transmission end and the cause must
be identified.
Reference 255-15-018, Adjusting the Reverse Drive Lever (Reverser

Control on Steering Column)
CAUTION:
Do not perform any adjustments with the engine running, as the tractor could move unexpectedly.
Switch off the ignition and remove the key.
[1] -
Reverse drive lever in neutral position
Bowden cable
Make sure that the reverse drive linkage is adjusted correctly.
[2] - Move the gear shift lever to neutral.
[3] - Pull the reverse drive lever upwards.
[4] - Neutral for the reverse drive lever must be exactly in the center (see arrow). It must be possible to engage both forward
and reverse.
[5] - If required, disconnect bowden cable (A). Turn the yoke until neutral for the reverse drive lever is exactly in the center.
Engage the bowden cable and check that the adjustment is correct.
Reference 255-15-019, PowrQuad Transmission — Adjusting the Clutch

Pedal
Depress the clutch pedal and measure the distance
Adjusting screw and locknut
[1] - Disconnect the clutch cable′s yoke.
[2] - Depress clutch pedal completely, then push it up completely. Measure distance "a".
To determine distance "a", place a ruler at lower pedal stop and measure the distance from the lower bore edge (with clutch
pedal at lower stop) to the lower bore edge (with clutch pedal at upper stop).
Measure distance "a".
Adjusting travel of clutch pedal Space 51 ± 1 mm
2.01 ± 0.04 in.
[3] - Adjust distance "a" by means of adjusting screw (B). Tighten locknut (A).
Locknut, adjusting screw for clutch pedal travel Final torque 15 N˙m
11 lb-ft
[4] - Re-check distance "a".
[5] - Raise the clutch pedal to the upper stop and turn the operating cable yoke until bores of yoke and pedal are aligned. Re-
connect and secure yoke.
Reference 255-15-025, Reduction Gear - Adjusting the Shift Linkage

[1] -
Reduction gear actuating lever
Adjusting the bowden cable
At lever (B) of the reduction gear, disengage the bowden cable.
[2] - Move lever (B) to the position shown.
[3] - Move lever (A) in the direction shown.
Section 255 - POWRQUAD AND POWRQUAD PLUS TRANSMISSIONS Group 20: Theory of Operation
[4] - At the ball-end, adjust the length of the bowden cable until it can be secured to lever (B) without tension being applied.
Then secure the ball-end and tighten locknut (C).
[5] - Make sure it can be shifted properly; make any adjustment that may be necessary.

Reference 255-20-001, PowrQuad and PowrQuad Plus Transmissions —
Summary of References
ThePowrQuad transmission consists of the following sub-assemblies: PowrQuad module, range transmission and (if equipped)
the reduction gear.
ThePowrQuad Plus transmission consists of the following sub-assemblies: PowrQuad module, sub-assemblies for PowrQuad
Plus, range transmission and (if equipped) the reduction gear.
Operation of the PowrQuad and PowrQuad Plus transmissions is dealt with at the following reference points:
PowrQuad transmission
Reference 255-20-050 , ”PowrQuad Transmission — Layout”
PowrQuad Module
Reference 255-20-100 , ”PowrQuad Module — Layout”
Reference 255-20-110 , ”PowrQuad Module — Element Engagement Chart”
Reference 255-20-120 , ”PowrQuad Module — Pneumatic Pump”
Reference 255-20-130 , ”PowrQuad Module — Transmission Oil Pump”
Reference 255-20-140 , ”PowrQuad Module — Pressure-Regulating Valve and Filter Relief Valve”
Reference 255-20-150 , ”PowrQuad Module — Overspeed Relief Valve and Anti-Cavitation Check Valve”
Reference 255-20-160 , ”PowrQuad Module — Clutch Cooling Components”
Reference 255-20-170 , ”PowrQuad Module — Clutch Cooling Valve (Forward/Reverse)”
Reference 255-20-180 , ”PowrQuad Module — System 1 Oil and System 2 Oil”
Reference 255-20-190 , ”PowrQuad Module — Hydraulic Schematic, Mechanically Actuated PowrQuad Module”
Reference 255-20-200 , ”PowrQuad Module — Operation of Forward/Reverse Modulation, Mechanically Actuated PowrQuad
Module”
Reference 255-20-210 , ”PowrQuad Module — Neutral Start Circuit, Mechanically Actuated PowrQuad Module”
Reference 255-20-220 , ”PowrQuad Module — Operation of Gear-to-Gear Modulation, Mechanically Actuated PowrQuad Module”
Reference 255-20-230 , ”PowrQuad Module — Hydraulic Schematic, Electrically Actuated PowrQuad Module”
Reference 255-20-240 , ”PowrQuad Module — Operation of Forward/Reverse Modulation, Electrically Actuated PowrQuad
Module”
Reference 255-20-250 , ”PowrQuad Module — Operation of Gear-to-Gear Modulation, Electrically Actuated PowrQuad Module”
Reference 255-20-260 , ”PowrQuad Module — Reverse Drive Lever and Gear Shift Lever, Mechanically Actuated PowrQuad
Module”
Reference 255-20-270 , ”PowrQuad Module — Reverse Drive Lever and Range Shift Lever with Gearshift Switches, Electrically
Actuated PowrQuad Module”
Reference 255-20-280 , PowrQuad Module—Sectional and 3D View
Reference 255-20-290 , ”PowrQuad Module—Location of Valves, Sensors and Switches”
Sub-assemblies for PowrQuad Plus transmission
Reference 255-20-400 , ”PowrQuad Plus Transmission — Summary of Transmission Versions”
Reference 255-20-410 , ”PowrQuad Plus Transmission — Sub-Assemblies”
Reference 255-20-420 , ”PowrQuad Plus Transmission — Description of Shift Functions”
Reference 255-20-440 , ”PowrQuad Plus Transmission — Description of Clutch Actuation”
Range Transmission
Reference 255-20-500 , ”Range Transmission, Layout”
Reference 255-20-510 , ”Range Transmission, Power Flow”
Reference 255-20-520 , ”Range Transmission, Park Lock”
Reduction gear
Reference 255-20-800 , ”Reduction Gear — Operation”
Reference 255-20-810 , ”Reduction Gear — Power Flow”
Reference 255-20-050, PowrQuad Transmission — Layout
PowrQuad Transmission — Layout
LEGEND:
A PowrQuad module
B Reduction gear
C Range transmission
D Differential housing
E PTO housing
5620, 5720 and 5820 tractors
The PowrQuad transmission in the 5620, 5720 and 5820 tractors consists of two primary components, the PowrQuad module
and the range transmission.
An optional reduction gear may also be installed.
The PowrQuad module contains a single compound speed planetary, a forward clutch and a reverse brake. The disk clutch and
brake are supplied with oil under pressure. The PowrQuad module selects 1st through 4th gears and the forward, neutral and
reverse directions of travel.
The range transmission contains a drive shaft, differential drive shaft, range gears and synchromesh units.
The range transmission is used to select 4 ranges (A to D).
Reference 255-20-100, PowrQuad Module — Layout
LEGEND:
A Reverse brake housing
B Planetary gear housing and C4 clutch
C B2-B3 brake housing
D B1 brake housing
E Front transmission cover
F Front valve housing
G Transmission oil filter housing
H Control valve housing
→NOTE:
Layout is the same regardless of whether the PowrQuad module is actuated electrically or mechanically.
Transmission oil filter housing (G) is attached to the front valve housing (F). Next comes the front transmission cover (E).
Control valve housing (H) is located on front transmission cover (E). The brake housings for B1 (D) and B2-B3 (C) are also
connected to the front transmission cover (E).
The planet gear housing and C4 clutch (B) is located behind the brake housings for B1 (D) and B2-B3 (C). After the planet gear
housing with C4 clutch (B) comes the reverse brake housing (A). Reverse brake housing (A) is then either installed directly on
the range transmission or on a reduction gear.
The PowrQuad module is a hydraulically controlled module containing planetary assemblies, each of which produce four fully
modulated speeds in either forward or reverse directions. The module also contains its own transmission oil pump, which
provides oil to the clutches and brakes as well as for cooling and lubrication purposes. In addition, the pump supplies oil under
pressure to operate the differential lock, rear PTO and front PTO. The differential housing serves as an oil reservoir.
Furthermore, there is a small pneumatic pump to assist in the evacuation of excess oil from the transmission module.
Reference 255-20-280, PowrQuad Module—Sectional and 3D View

PowrQuad Module—Sectional View
PowrQuad module—Sectional view
LEGEND:
1 Reverse brake housing
2 Reverse brake piston
3 Ring gear
4 Planetary gear
5 Pressure plate with disk pack, reverse brake
6 Forward clutch with planetary carrier, reverse brake
7 Planetary gear housing and C4 clutch
8 Clutch hub
9 Forward clutch
10 Forward clutch piston
11 B2-B3 brake housing
12 3rd gear piston
13 2nd gear piston
14 Separator plate
[ From tractor ser. no. 411806, the separator plate is replaced by two thinner plates ]
15 B1 brake housing
16 1st gear piston
17 Front transmission cover
18 Transmission oil pump
19 Pneumatic pump
20 Front valve housing
21 Transmission input shaft
22 Planetary input gear
23 Planetary carrier
24 Planetary gear
25 3rd gear sun gear
26 2nd gear sun gear
27 1st gear sun gear
28 Clutch hub
29 C4 piston
30 C4 clutch drum
31 Drive shaft
32 PTO driveline
33 Transmission output shaft
PowrQuad Module—3D View
PowrQuad Module—3D View
LEGEND:
1 Reverse brake piston
2 Ring gear
3 Outer planetary gear
4 Inner planetary gear
5 Pressure plate with disk pack, reverse brake
6 Forward clutch with planetary carrier, reverse brake
7 Piston with overspeed relief valve, forward clutch
8 Suction valve
9 C4 clutch drum
10 Piston with anti-cavitation check valve C4
11 3rd gear piston
12 2nd gear piston
13 1st gear piston
14 Planetary gear
15 Planetary carrier
16 Planetary input gear
17 Pneumatic pump
18 Transmission input shaft
19 Transmission oil pump
20 3rd gear sun gear
21 2nd gear sun gear
22 1st gear sun gear
23 Drive shaft
24 PTO driveline
25 Transmission output shaft
Reference 255-20-290, PowrQuad Module — Location of Valves, Sensors

and Switches
Electrically Actuated PowrQuad Module
Location of valves, sensors and switches
LEGEND:
A Pressure switch for system pressure
B Transmission oil filter by-pass valve
C Pressure switch for the transmission oil filter restriction indicator
D Cooling oil control valves and clutch cooling valve
E Forward solenoid (Y33) and shift valve (forward)
F Reverse solenoid (Y36) and shift valve (reverse)
G Pressure switch for clutch pressure
H Lube oil relief valve
I Cooler relief valve
LEGEND:
A K3 solenoid (Y32) and B3-C4 shift valve
[ The K3 solenoid valve (Y32) is omitted from tractor serial no. 409633 ]
B K2 solenoid (Y39) and B2-B3 shift valve
C K1 solenoid (Y40) and B1-B2 shift valve
LEGEND:
A Return valve, gear-to-gear modulation
B Gear-to-gear modulator valve and accumulator (gear-to-gear modulation)
C Pressure control valve
D Enable proportional solenoid (Y38)
E Cooling oil control valves and clutch cooling valve
F Temperature sensor for low temperature
LEGEND:
1 Pressure switch for system pressure
2 Pressure sensor for clutch pressure
3 Pressure switch for the transmission oil filter restriction indicator
4 Temperature sensor
5 O-ring
6 Elbow fitting (transmission with option housing only)
Mechanically Actuated PowrQuad Module
LEGEND:
A Pressure switch for system pressure
B Transmission oil filter by-pass valve
C Pressure switch for the transmission oil filter restriction indicator
D Adjustable restrictor
F Sump valve
G Modulator valve
H Neutral start switch
I Temperature switch for high temperature
J Lube oil relief valve
K Cooler relief valve
LEGEND:
A K3 B3-C4 shift valve
B K2 B2-B3 shift valve
C K1 B1-B2 shift valve
LEGEND:
A Return valve, gear-to-gear modulation
B Gear-to-gear modulator valve and accumulator (gear-to-gear modulation)
C Pressure-regulating valve
D Accumulator, forward/reverse modulation
F Sump valve
G Forward/reverse modulator valve
H Temperature switch for low temperature
I Forward/reverse valve
J Engagement override valve
LEGEND:
1 Temperature switch (high temperature)
2 Pressure switch for system pressure
3 Neutral start switch
4 Pressure switch for the transmission oil filter restriction indicator
5 Temperature switch (low temperature)
6 O-ring
Reference 255-20-110, PowrQuad Module—Element Engagement Chart
→NOTE:
The chart shows which elements are engaged for each speed.
Element engagement chart
B1 B2 B3 C4 Forward clutch Reverse brake
1st forward • •
2nd forward • •
3rd forward • •
4th forward • •
1st reverse • •
2nd reverse • •
3rd reverse • •
4th reverse • •
Reference 255-20-120, PowrQuad Module—Pneumatic Pump
Operation of pneumatic pump
LEGEND:
A Spring
B Piston
C Lower ball
D Follower
E Input shaft
Pump piston (B) is controlled by a spring (A) located above it and by a follower (D) located underneath it. The follower is driven
by a cam located on input shaft (E). When the follower (D) is going down (intake stroke), the air travels through a slot and hole
on the bottom of the piston. The lower ball (C) is free floating and allows the air to pass by and fill the area inside the piston
(B).
Operation of pneumatic pump
LEGEND:
A Upper ball
B Lower ball
C Follower
D Input shaft
Once the follower (C) starts upward (exhaust stroke), gravity and compressed air seat the lower ball (B) over the piston hole. At
the same time the upper ball (A) unseats against light spring pressure and the piston pressurizes the inside cavity of the
PowrQuad transmission. Due to this pressure of 6.9 - 13.8 kPa (0.069 - 0.138 bar; 1 - 2 psi), oil can be expelled from the
transmission more easily.
→NOTE:
The two balls always travel in opposite directions on both the intake and exhaust stroke.
Reference 255-20-130, PowrQuad Module—Transmission Oil Pump
Transmission oil pump, operation with Power Reverser
LEGEND:
A Housing
B Input gear
C Toothed ring
D Suction chamber
E From return
F Crescent-shaped separator
G Pressure chamber
H To transmission oil filter
K Pressure-free oil
L Pilot oil pressure
The transmission oil pump is located on the rear of the transmission front cover.
The transmission pump is a gear pump with crescent-shaped separator. It consists primarily of housing (A), internally toothed
ring (C) and an externally toothed input gear (B) which is driven from the engine via the clutch drive shaft.
Suction chamber (D) is located on the side where the teeth unmesh to generate low pressure. Oil is drawn in through the
primary filter and trapped between the teeth and crescent-shaped separator (F) before being conveyed to pressure chamber
(G). The meshing teeth in the pressure chamber expel the oil and force it out of the pump. The oil then flows from the
transmission oil pump to the transmission oil filter.
Pump delivery is as follows:
56 liters per min. (14.8 U.S. gpm)

65 liters per min. (17.2 U.S gpm) (optional)
Reference 255-20-140, PowrQuad Module—Pressure-Regulating Valve

and Filter Relief Valve
Valve operation—normal tractor operation
LEGEND:
A System 2 oil
B System 1 oil
C Return
D Cooler relief valve
E Cooling oil
F Transmission lube
G Return
H Pressure-regulating valve
I Filter relief valve
J Press. sending unit, oil filter restrict. warning light
K Restrictor
L Transmission oil filter
M Oil cooler
N Transmission oil pump
O Lube relief valve
P Return
Q Filter screen
R Main oil reservoir (return)

S System 1 oil
T System 2 oil
U Lube/cooling oil
V Pressure-free oil
Illustration shows tractor in normal operation
Transmission oil pump (N) ingests oil from the main oil reservoir (R) and pumps it through the transmission oil filter (L). Then
the oil presses against the spring on pressure regulating valve (H).
From a pressure of 1200 kPa (12 bar; 175 psi), the valve is in its end position and opens a passage to the oil cooler. The oil
pressure can rise no further and remains at this level (system pressure).
The oil that flows directly from the transmission oil pump to the other valves has priority and is available even when system
pressure has not been reached. This oil is designatedsystem 1 oil .
The oil that flows through the pressure regulating valve to the other valves only becomes available after system pressure has
been reached. This oil is designatedsystem 2 oil .
The oil that flows from the pressure regulating valve through the oil cooler is used to lubricate the transmission (F) and cool the
disk clutch or disk brake (E).
Filter relief valve (I) is intended to relieve the transmission oil filter whenever necessary. The valve is operated by a difference
in pressure.
Oil that has passed through the transmission oil filter flows to the spring end of the filter relief valve. Oil that has NOT flowed
through the transmission oil filter flows to the other end of the valve.
The illustration shows the normal operating condition (i.e. with clean transmission oil). The difference in pressure is less than
300 kPa (3 bar; 44 psi). The spring on the filter relief valve holds the valve spool in its neutral position and all the passages are
closed.
Operation of the cooler relief valve
Once system pressure has been reached, oil flows through a passage in pressure regulating valve (H) to the oil cooler (M) and
to the cooler relief valve (D). The cooler relief valve protects the oil cooler by preventing the pressure from rising too high.
The cooler relief valve is operated by pressure. From a pressure of 950 kPa (9.5 bar; 138 psi), the spring force of the valve is
overcome and oil flows directly to lubricate the transmission (F) and to cool the disk clutch or disk brake (E).
Operation of the lube relief valve
Lube relief valve (O) is intended to limit lube oil pressure to 250 kPa (2.5 bar; 36 psi).
The lube relief valve is operated by pressure. From a pressure of 250 kPa (2.5 bar; 36 psi), the spring force of the valve is
overcome and oil flows through the relief valve to the transmission pump inlet (short circuit). When lube oil pressure drops
below 250 kPa (2.5 bar; 36 psi), the valve closes again.
Valve operation—oil filter clogged
LEGEND:
A System 2 oil
B System 1 oil
C Return
E Cooling oil
F Transmission lube
G Return
K Restrictor
M Oil cooler
O Lube relief valve
P Return
Q Filter screen
S System 1 oil
T System 2 oil
U Lube/cooling oil
V Pressure-free oil
Illustration shows the situation when transmission oil filter is clogged
If the transmission oil filter (L) is clogged, pressure rises before the transmission oil filter.
Behind the filter, pressure drops.
This difference in pressure actuates the filter relief valve (I).
When the difference in pressure is between 300 and 450 kPa (3 and 4.5 bar; 44 and 65 psi), the filter relief valve moves
against the spring. An oil passage opens to the pressure sending unit (J) for oil filter restriction warning light. The warning light
lights up. The transmission oil filter must be replaced.
Valve operation—extremely clogged oil filter
LEGEND:
A+B Oil under pressure
C Return
E Cooling oil
F Transmission lube
G Return

K Restrictor
M Oil cooler
O Lube relief valve
P Return
Q Filter screen
S Oil under pressure
T Lube/cooling oil
U Pressure-free oil
Illustration shows the situation with extreme clogging of transmission oil filter (emergency situation)
If transmission oil filter (L) is not changed when the oil filter restriction warning light comes on, the filter becomes more and
more clogged.
Oil pressure before the transmission oil filter continues to increase. At the same time, the pressure behind the filter drops even
further.
From a difference in pressure of 450 kPa (4.5 bar; 65 psi), filter relief valve (I) switches to its 3rd stage and the oil flows directly
to pressure regulating valve (H). This oil is unfiltered. Impurities in the oil may lead to damage at the valves.
From a difference in pressure of 500 kPa (5 bar; 73 psi), filter relief valve (I) switches to its 4th stage and oil can flow through
an oil passage to lubricate the transmission. This reduces oil pressure as well as ensuring lubrication.
Because of the low pressure behind the transmission oil filter, the pressure regulating valve cannot operate. The spring on the
pressure regulating valve holds the valve spool in its 1st stage position. With the spool in this position, it is possible for
unfiltered oil from the filter relief valve to penetrate into the entire system.
With the pressure regulating valve in the position shown, no oil can flow to the oil cooler, and this prevents the pressure from
dropping further. The transmission is lubricated by the filter relief valve, which also provides cooling for the disk clutch or disk
brake.
The fact that oil flows through the pressure regulating valve means that the oil pressure behind the transmission oil filter may
rise slightly, and the filter relief valve moves back and forth between the 3rd and 4th stages.
Reference 255-20-150, PowrQuad Module—Overspeed Relief Valve and

Anti-Cavitation Check Valve
Overspeed relief valve and anti-cavitation check valve
LEGEND:
A Overspeed relief valve or anti-cavitation check valve
B Centrifugal force
C Clutch piston
D Housing
E Air suction valve
F In-flow of air
Overspeed relief valve
With the forward clutch disengaged, oil in the passage to the clutch piston is normally pressure-free.
When rated speed is exceeded, the clutch piston may be moved by the centrifugal force acting on the oil. In this situation, the
overspeed relief valve opens despite the pressure of the spring and the oil can flow as return oil.
The spring prevents the clutch from emptying when its speed of rotation is low. If the clutch were to empty completely, it would
take too long to re-activate it.
The reverse brake does not rotate like the forward clutch, so it does not require an overspeed relief valve.
Anti-cavitation check valve
As the C4 clutch rotates, centrifugal force would cause the oil already in it to press against the clutch. This would cause self-
activation.
To prevent such self-activation, the anti-cavitation check valve opens whenever the clutch is disengaged.
There is in this case no need for a spring like the one in the overspeed relief valve described above, which permits opening
only after a certain speed of rotation is reached.
Air suction valve
The air suction valve fulfils the same function both for the forward clutch and the C4 clutch.
When the overspeed relief valve of the forward clutch or the anti-cavitation valve of the C4 clutch is open, a slight low pressure
is formed in the oil passage as a result of oil flowing to the sump. As a result, the air suction valve opens and air can flow into
the oil passage.
Reference 255-20-160, PowrQuad Module—Clutch Cooling Components

The cooling circuit consists of the following components:
Clutch pedal valve

Engagement override valve
Forward/reverse valve
Forward/reverse cooling control valves
Clutch cooling valve
Oil cooler
If the clutch pedal valve and engagement override valve are tripped, oil under pressure flows to the forward/reverse valve.
When the forward/reverse valve is actuated, oil under pressure flows to the disk clutch or reverse brake and the relevant
cooling oil control valve is actuated.
When actuated, the cooling oil control valve trips the clutch cooling valve.
Oil from the oil cooler flows via the clutch cooling oil to the disk clutch or reverse brake.
Reference 255-20-170, PowrQuad Module—Clutch Cooling Valve

(Forward/Reverse)
The position of the clutch cooling valve depends on the position of the relevant cooling control valve. Only the element that is
currently engaged (forward clutch or reverse brake) actually receives cooling oil.
Reference 255-20-180, PowrQuad Module—System 1 Oil and System 2

Oil
System 1 oil
System 1 oil comes directly from the transmission oil filter and acts on the pressure-regulating valve. This oil is used to control
the engagement override valve, return valve, accumulators and the various other valves.
System 2 oil
System 2 oil pressure becomes available when system 1 pressure reaches 1200 kPa (12 bar; 175 psi) and a passage opens
through the pressure-regulating valve.
It is used to engage the clutch and brake elements (B1, B2, B3, C4, forward clutch and reverse brake).
Reference 255-20-190, PowrQuad Module—Hydraulic Schematic, Mechanically Actuated PowrQuad Module
Hydraulic schematic with mech. actuated PowrQuad module
LEGEND:
1 Planetary gear housing
2 Overspeed relief valve, forward clutch
3 Forward clutch
4 Forward clutch module lube
6 Cooling oil control valve (forward clutch)
7 Clutch cooling valve
8 Cooling oil control valve (reverse brake)
9 Reverse brake module lube
10 Reverse brake
12 Gear-to-gear modulator valve
13 Accumulator, gear-to-gear modulation
14 Return valve, gear-to-gear modulation
15 Pressure switch, system pressure
16 Pressure-regulating valve
17 Speed valve
18 Clutch pedal
19 Clutch pedal valve
21 Oil cooler
22 Lube oil relief valve
23 Cooler relief valve
24 High return
25 Engagement override valve
26 Sump valve
27 Accumulator, forward/reverse modulation
28 Forward/reverse modulator valve
29 Forward/reverse valve
30 Transmission oil filter housing
31 Transmission oil filter
32 Pressure switch, transmission oil filter restriction
33 Transmission oil filter by-pass valve
34 Transmission lube pump
35 High temperature switch
36 Inlet screen
37 B1-B2 shift valve
39 B3-C4 shift valve
40 Module lube
41 Shift valve housing
42 C4 clutch
43 Anti-cavitation check valve, C4 clutch
45 B2 brake
46 B3 brake
47 B1 brake housing
48 B1 brake
49 Mid-return
50 Suction valve, forward clutch
51 Suction valve, C4 clutch
52 Adjustable restrictor
53 Low temperature switch
54 Lube oil, differential drive shaft
55 Test port for forward clutch
56 Test port for forward clutch cooling
57 Test port for reverse clutch cooling
58 Test port for reverse brake
59 Test port for B1 brake
62 Test port for C4 clutch
63 Test port, lube oil pressure
64 Test port for system (engagement) pressure
Reference 255-20-200, PowrQuad Module—Operation of

Forward/Reverse Modulation, Mechanically Actuated PowrQuad Module
→NOTE:
The hydraulic schematic shows the reverse drive lever in neutral and the engine shut off.
Forward/reverse modulation with mech. actuated PowrQuad module
LEGEND:
A Clutch pedal
B Clutch pedal valve
C High return
D Engagement override valve
E Return valve, forward/reverse modulation
F Forward/reverse valve
G System 2 oil
H Forward/reverse modulator valve
I Accumulator, forward/reverse modulation
J Cooling oil control valve (reverse brake)
K Clutch cooling valve
L Module lube
M Reverse brake
N Reverse brake module lube
O Forward clutch module lube
P Cooling oil control valve (forward clutch)
Q Forward clutch
R Overspeed relief valve
S System 1 oil
The reverse drive lever controls forward/reverse valve (F).
In this case, three positions are provided. From bottom to top: forward, neutral and reverse.
If the reverse drive lever is in neutral when the engine is started, a direction of travel can then be selected and the tractor can
be driven.
If the reverse drive lever is NOT in neutral when the engine is started, engagement override valve (D) prevents forward clutch
(Q) and reverse brake (M) from being supplied with pressure oil (system 2 oil). It is therefore not possible to drive the tractor.
In order for the forward clutch (Q) or reverse brake (M) to be supplied with oil under pressure, the engine must be started from
neutral, or at least for the reverse drive lever to have been in neutral once.
→NOTE:
A modulated shift normally takes between 2 and 3.5 seconds.
When clutch pedal (A) is not depressed, clutch pedal valve (B) is in the position shown, allowing system 2 oil (G) to flow via
engagement override valve (D) and forward/reverse valve (F) to the forward clutch (Q) or reverse brake (M).
If clutch pedal (A) is depressed, thus actuating clutch pedal valve (B), system 2 oil (G) flows to sump either in a restricted form
(position 2) or fully.
Engine starting and reverse drive lever in neutral
The reverse drive lever (F) is now in its neutral (mid) position.
The pressure that acts on the spring end of engagement override valve (D), and the pressure that acts on return valve (E)
flows via forward/reverse valve (F) to the return.
Forward clutch (Q) and reverse brake (M) are connected to the return via forward/reverse valve (F).
System 1 oil (S) acts on engagement override valve (D), causing it to move downward despite the spring.
System 1 oil (S) acts on return valve (E), causing it to move to the left.
Return valve (E) is it its r.h. position. In this position, the oil in accumulator (I) empties into the sump. Emptying is
accelerated by the spring at accumulator (I) and the system 1 oil.
System 2 oil (G) flows via clutch pedal valve (B), is restricted and moves modulator valve (H) to the left despite the
spring. Thus the oil in the accumulator empties into the sump more quickly.System 2 oil (G) flows via clutch pedal valve
(B) and the actuated engagement override valve (D) to forward/reverse valve (F) and remains present there.
The engine is running and the reverse drive lever is moved to the reverse position
→NOTE:
The initial situation is “Engine starting and reverse drive lever in neutral”.
→NOTE:
The following explanation applies for shifting to a reverse gear. Forward shift is similar except that the
forward/reverse valve (F) moves in the opposite direction in order to connect reverse brake (M) with the
return and to engage forward clutch (Q).
The reverse drive lever (F) is now in its reverse (bottom) position.The return connection is closed.
System 1 oil pressure moves return valve (E) to the right.
Accumulator (I) fills up with system 1 oil (S) and modulator valve (H) is moved to the right.
→NOTE: Modulation time (i.e. the time take to empty and fill the accumulator) is defined by the
adjustable restrictor.
System 2 oil (G) flows via modulator valve (H), clutch pedal valve (B) and the actuated engagement override valve (D) to
forward/reverse valve (F). From forward/reverse valve (F), the oil then flows to reverse brake (M), which it engages.
Once reverse brake (M) is engaged, cooling oil control valve (J) and clutch cooling valve (K) move upward. Cooling oil from
module lube (L) flows to reverse brake module lube (N).
Engine starting and reverse drive lever in reverse
The reverse drive lever (F) is now in its reverse (bottom) position.The return connection is closed.
As the return connection is closed, system 1 oil (S) trips return valve (E) and assists the spring end of engagement
override valve (D).Thanks to the assistance of the spring, engagement override valve (D) is NOT moved down.
Accumulator (I) fills up with system 1 oil (S) and modulator valve (H) is moved to the right.
System 2 oil (G) flows via modulator valve (H) and clutch pedal valve (B) to engagement override valve (D), where it
remains present. None of the system 2 oil (G) reaches forward/reverse valve (F), so it cannot reach reverse brake (M)
either. The tractor does not move.
Activating forward/reverse via neutral
→NOTE:
The tractor was started with a direction of travel (forward or reverse) already selected. In order for the
tractor to drive, the reverse drive lever must have been in its neutral position at least once.
The reverse drive lever (F) is now in its neutral (mid) position.The oil under pressure that acts on return valve (E) and the
spring end of engagement override valve (D) flows via forward/reverse valve (F) to the sump.
System 1 oil (S) moves engagement override valve (D) downward despite the spring.
System 1 oil (S) acts on return valve (E), causing it to move to the left.
Return valve (E) is it its r.h. position. In this position, accumulator (I) empties into the sump. Emptying is accelerated by
the spring at accumulator (I) and the system 1 oil.
System 2 oil (G) flows via clutch pedal valve (B), is restricted and moves modulator valve (H) to the left despite the
spring. Thus the oil in the accumulator empties into the sump more quickly.System 2 oil (G) flows via clutch pedal valve
(B) and the actuated engagement override valve (D) to forward/reverse valve (F) and remains present there.
Reference 255-20-210, PowrQuad Module—Neutral Start Circuit,

Mechanically Actuated PowrQuad Module
The engagement override valve is controlled by the forward/reverse valve.
Operation if start-up occurs while in neutral: System 1 oil overcomes spring pressure at 400 kPa (4 bar; 58 psi) to provide
passage for clutch pressure to the forward/reverse valve.
Operation if start-up occurs in gear: System 1 oil flows through the forward/reverse valve and EOV to assist EOV spring. This
spring shuts off clutch pressure at the EOV and opens a connection between the element and "high return" (via the
forward/reverse valve and EOV).
Moving the engagement override valve (EOV) — stages
Path from forward/reverse valve to spring end of EOV

Stage 1 Closed
Path from forward/reverse valve to “high return”
400 kPa
Path from clutch pressure to forward/reverse valve
Stage 2 4 bar
Path from spring side of EOV to “high return”
58 psi
→NOTE:
The term "high return" is used because the dumping to return is physically located in a high position.
This allows the elements and lines to stay nearly full of oil so the element fill time is considerably
shorter. The two trigger valves dump to the regular return. The C 4 element dumps to return through the
clutch oil manifold at a point whose height is between regular and high return. Hence the term "mid-
return". This allows some oil to stay in the line but protects from self-activation of C 4 . All other valving is
considered to be high return.
Reverse travel after tractor has been started in neutral
System 1 oil acts on the top end of the EOV, forcing the valve upward despite spring pressure. System 1 oil also flows (only
when in forward or reverse) to and through the forward/reverse valve to the spring end of the EOV. Since the EOV has been
moved upward, oil cannot act on the spring end of the valve. A path is now open for clutch oil to flow through the EOV to the
forward/reverse valve and on to the reverse brake piston.
Reference 255-20-220, PowrQuad Module—Operation of Gear-to-Gear

Modulation, Mechanically Actuated PowrQuad Module
→NOTE:
The hydraulic schematic shows the gearshift lever in 3rd gear and the engine shut off.
Gear-to-gear modulation with mech. actuated PowrQuad module
LEGEND:
A Gear-to-gear modulator valve
B System 2 oil
C System 1 oil
D Accumulator, gear-to-gear modulation
E Return valve, gear-to-gear modulation
F Speed valve
G B1-B2 shift valve
H B2-B3 shift valve
I B3-C4 shift valve
J Mid-return
K High return
L C4 clutch
M Anti-cavitation check valve
N B2 brake
O B3 brake
P B1 brake
The gearshift lever controls speed valve (F).
In this case, four positions are provided. From left to right: fourth, third, second and first gears.
Shift valves (G, H and I) are controlled in accordance with the position of speed valve (F).
If the engine is started with the gearshift lever in the position for third gear (as shown), system 1 oil (C) does not actuate any of
the shift valves.
System 2 oil (B) is directed via gear-to-gear modulator valve (A) and shift valves (H) and (I) to the B3 brake (O), which it
engages.
Thanks to modulation (modulator valve (A), accumulator (D) and return valve (E)), shifting from one gear to another can be
achieved without depressing the clutch pedal.
→NOTE:
A modulated shift normally takes between 0.4 and 1.2 seconds.
Engine running and gearshift lever in first gear
Speed valve (F) is moved all the way left to the position for first gear.
System 1 oil (C) re-inforces the spring of return valve (E) and holds it in the top position.
From return valve (E), system 1 oil (C) flows to shift valves (I), (H) and (G).
System 1 oil (C) flows via speed valve (F) and acts on shift valves (G) and (H). The shift valves are moved up despite the
springs.
System 2 oil (B) flows via modulator valve (A) and fills accumulator (D).
From modulator valve (A), system 2 oil (B) flows via the actuated shift valves (H) and (G) to the B1 brake (P). Oil pressure
causes the B1 brake (P) to engage.
C4 clutch (L) is connected to mid-return (J) via shift valve (I), which is not actuated.
B2 brake (N) and B3 brake (O) are connected to the high return (K) via the two shift valves (H) and (G), which are
actuated.
Shifting from first to second gear
→NOTE:
The initial situation is "Engine running and gearshift lever in first gear".
Speed valve (F) is moved to the position for second gear (second position from the right).
System 1 oil (C), which has forced shift valve (G) up despite the spring, flows into the high return (K). As a result, shift
valve (G) is moved downward by its spring.
As shift valve (G) is half-way through its movement, the following happens:
System 1 oil pressure at shift valve (G) flows into high return (K). The spring on return valve (E) is no longer assisted
by system 1 oil.The pressure in accumulator (D) moves return valve (E) upward despite the spring.
The system 2 oil pressure that is present at shift valve (G) cannot flow away. As a result, the pressure that has built
up moves modulator valve (A) downward.
The system 2 pressure oil flows into the return via modulator valve (A).
Accumulator (D) empties via return valve (E).
Now in a pressure-free condition, modulator valve (A) moves upward and return valve (E) moves downward.
Shifting to second gear
→NOTE:
The initial situation is "Shifting from first to second gear".

When shift valve (G) is in its bottom position, oil under pressure flows from B1 brake (P) into high return (K).
System 2 oil (B) flows via modulator valve (A), fills accumulator (D) and acts on return valve (E).
System 1 oil (C) flows via return valve (E) and assists the spring.
System 2 oil (B) flows via modulator valve (A), shift valve (H) (which is actuated) and shift valve (G) (which is not
actuated) to the B2 brake (N).Oil pressure causes the B2 brake (N) to engage.
Shifting to third and fourth gears
The procedures for shifting to third and fourth gears can be determined from the descriptions above. The only differences are
which shift valves are actuated and which elements engage.
Reference 255-20-230, PowrQuad Module—Hydraulic Schematic,

Electrically Actuated PowrQuad Module
Electrically actuated PowrQuad module (3 speed valves K1, K2, K3 up to tractor serial no. 409632)
Electrically actuated PowrQuad module (3 speed valves K1, K2, K3 up to tractor serial no. 409632)
LEGEND:
3 Forward clutch
10 Reverse brake
20 Oil cooler
21 High return
22 Reverse solenoid (Y36)
23 Reverse shift valve
24 Forward solenoid (Y33)
25 Forward shift valve
26 Enable proportional solenoid (Y38)
32 Temperature sensor / test port for reverse brake
33 Inlet screen
34 K1 solenoid valve (Y40)
40 Module lube
42 C4 clutch
45 B2 brake
46 B3 brake
47 B1 brake housing
48 B1 brake
49 Mid-return
50 Enable pressure switch
56 Test port for reverse brake
Electrically actuated PowrQuad module (with 2 speed valves designated "solenoid valve 1" and "solenoid valve
2" from tractor serial no. 409633)
Electrically actuated PowrQuad module (with 2 speed valves designated "solenoid valve 1" and "solenoid valve 2" from tractor serial no. 409633)
LEGEND:
3 Forward clutch
10 Reverse brake
20 Oil cooler
21 High return
22 Reverse solenoid (Y36)
23 Reverse shift valve
24 Forward solenoid (Y33)
25 Forward shift valve
26 Enable proportional solenoid (Y38)
32 Temperature sensor / test port for reverse brake
33 Inlet screen
34 Solenoid valve 2 (Y63)
36 Solenoid valve 1 (Y62)
39 Module lube
41 C4 clutch
44 B2 brake
45 B3 brake
46 B1 brake housing
47 B1 brake
48 Mid-return
49 Enable pressure switch
55 Test port for reverse clutch cooling
Reference 255-20-240, PowrQuad Module—Operation of

Forward/Reverse Modulation, Electrically Actuated PowrQuad Module
→NOTE:
The hydraulic schematic shows the reverse drive lever in neutral and the engine shut off.
Forward/reverse modulation with electr. actuated PowrQuad module
LEGEND:
A Overspeed relief valve
B Forward clutch
C Cooling oil control valve (forward clutch)
D Forward clutch module lube
E Cooling oil connection
F Reverse brake module lube
G Clutch cooling valve
H Reverse brake
I Cooling oil control valve (reverse brake)
J Reverse shift valve
K Reverse solenoid (Y36)
L System 1 oil
M Forward shift valve
N Forward solenoid (Y33)
O Enable proportional solenoid (Y38)
P System 2 oil
Solenoid valves (K) and (N) and proportional valve (O) are actuated via the EPC control unit acting in response to the reverse
drive lever.
For forward travel, forward clutch (B) must be engaged. In this case, proportional valve (O), solenoid valve (N) and shift valve
(M) must all be actuated.
For reverse travel, reverse brake (H) must be engaged. In this case, proportional valve (O), solenoid valve (K) and shift valve (J)
must all be actuated.
If the reverse drive lever is in neutral when the engine is started, a direction of travel can then be selected and the tractor can
be driven.
If the reverse drive lever is NOT in neutral when the engine is started, the EPC control unit prevents the relevant solenoid
valves (K) and (N) and the proportional solenoid (O) from moving. Forward clutch (B) and reverse brake (H) do not receive any
oil under pressure (system 2 oil). It is therefore not possible to drive the tractor.
In order for the forward clutch (B) or reverse brake (H) to be supplied with oil under pressure, the engine must be started from
neutral.
A modulated shift from forward to reverse (via neutral) is permitted by proportional solenoid (O).
→NOTE:
A modulated shift normally takes between 2 and 3.5 seconds.
Engine starting and reverse drive lever in neutral
System 1 oil (L) is present at solenoid valves (K) and (N).

System 2 oil (P) is present at proportional solenoid (O).
As solenoid valves (K) and (N) are not actuated, pilot oil from shift valves (J) and (M) can flow into the return.
Shift valves (J) and (M) are held in their bottom position by springs. Pressure oil at forward clutch (B) or at reverse brake
(H) flows via shift valves (J) and (M) to the return.
Proportional solenoid (O) is held in its top position by spring force. System 2 oil that is present at shift valves (J) and (M)
flows via proportional solenoid (O) to the return.
The engine is running and the reverse drive lever is moved to the reverse position
→NOTE:
The initial situation is “Engine starting and reverse drive lever in neutral”.
The following explanation applies for shifting to a reverse gear. Shifting to a forward gear is the same,
except that solenoid valve (N) and shift valve (M) are actuated. For this reason, in this case reverse brake
(H) is connected to the return and forward clutch (Q) is engaged by oil pressure.
The EPC control unit moves solenoid valve (K) and proportional solenoid (O).
System 1 oil (L) flows via solenoid valve (K) (which is actuated) to shift valve (J). Oil pressure moves shift valve (J) to its
top position despite the spring.
System 2 oil (P) flows via proportional solenoid (O) and shift valve (J) to the reverse brake (H). The oil pressure engages
reverse brake (H).
Oil that is present at forward clutch (Q) flows via shift valve (M) (which is not actuated) to the return.
Engine starting and reverse drive lever in forward or reverse
The engine starts, but since a direction of travel is selected, the EPC control unit does not send any power to the relevant
solenoid valves (K) and (N) or to the proportional solenoid (O).
System 1 oil (L) is present at solenoid valves (K) and (N).

System 2 oil (P) is present at proportional solenoid (O).
Activating forward/reverse via neutral
→NOTE:
The tractor was started with a direction of travel (forward or reverse) already selected. In order for the
tractor to drive, the reverse drive lever must have been in its neutral position at least once.
In neutral, the EPC control unit sends power to the relevant solenoid valves (K) or (N) and to the proportional solenoid (O).
Depending on which direction of travel is selected, either solenoid valve (K) or solenoid valve (N) will open.System 1 oil
(L) controls the relevant shift valve (J) or (N).
Over a certain period of time, a series of pulses cause proportional solenoid (O) to gradually open the oil passage for
system 2 oil (P).This gradual opening permits “modulated shifting”, because the full pressure of the oil does not affect the
relevant element all at one time.
Reference 255-20-250, PowrQuad Module — Operation of Gear-to-Gear

Modulation, Electrically Actuated PowrQuad Module
→NOTE:
These charts show which solenoid valves are supplied with power for each speed.
3 solenoid valves up to tractor serial no. 409632
K1 solenoid valve (Y40) K2 solenoid valve (Y39) K3 solenoid valve (Y32)
1st Gear • •
2nd Gear •
3rd Gear
4th Gear •
2 solenoid valves from tractor serial no. 409633
Solenoid valve 1 (Y62) Solenoid valve 2 (Y63)
1st Gear • •
2nd Gear •
3rd Gear
4th Gear •
→NOTE:
This chart shows which elements are engaged for each speed.
Element engagement chart
B1 B2 B3 C4 Forward clutch Reverse brake
1st forward • •
2nd forward • •
3rd forward • •
4th forward • •
1st reverse • •
2nd reverse • •
3rd reverse • •
4th reverse • •
→NOTE:
The hydraulic schematic shows the positions of the solenoid valves in 3rd gear (engine shut off).
Gear engagement controlled by 3 solenoid valves, up to tractor ser. no. 409632
Gear engagement controlled by 3 solenoid valves
LEGEND:
B System 2 oil
C System 1 oil
D Return valve, gear-to-gear modulation
E Accumulator, gear-to-gear modulation
F B1-B2 shift valve
G K1 solenoid valve (Y40)
H K2 solenoid valve (Y39)
I B2-B3 shift valve
J K3 solenoid valve (Y32)
K B3-C4 shift valve
L Mid-return
M High return
N B3 brake
O C4 clutch
P Anti-cavitation check valve
Q B2 brake
R B1 brake
Solenoid valves (G) (H) and (J) are actuated via the EPC control unit acting in response to the two switches on the range-shift
lever.
If the engine is started with the transmission in the position for third gear (as shown), system 1 oil (C) does not actuate any of
the shift valves.
System 2 oil (B) is directed via gear-to-gear modulator valve (A) and shift valves (I) and (K) to the B3 brake (N), which it
engages.
Thanks to modulation (modulator valve (A), accumulator (E) and return valve (D)), shifting from one gear to another can be
Gear engagement controlled by 2 solenoid valves, from tractor ser. no. 409633
Gear engagement controlled by 2 solenoid valves
LEGEND:
B System 2 oil
C System 1 oil
D Return valve, gear-to-gear modulation
E Accumulator, gear-to-gear modulation
F B1-B2 shift valve
G Solenoid valve 2 (Y63)
H Solenoid valve 1 (Y62)
I B2-B3 shift valve
K B3-C4 shift valve
L Mid-return
M High return
N B3 brake
O C4 clutch
P Anti-cavitation check valve
Q B2 brake
R B1 brake
Solenoid valves (G) and (H) are actuated via the EPC control unit acting in response to the two switches on the range-shift
lever.
If the engine is started with the transmission in the position for third gear (as shown), system 1 oil (C) does not actuate any of
the shift valves.
System 2 oil (B) is directed via gear-to-gear modulator valve (A) and shift valves (I) and (K) to the B3 brake (N), which it
engages.
Thanks to modulation (modulator valve (A), accumulator (E) and return valve (D)), shifting from one gear to another can be
Engine running and first gear engaged
The EPC control unit moves solenoid valves (G) and (H).
System 1 oil (C) re-inforces the spring of return valve (D) and holds it in the top position.
From return valve (D), system 1 oil (C) flows to shift valves (F), (I) and (K).
System 1 oil (C) flows via solenoid valves (G) and (H) and acts on shift valves (F) and (I). The shift valves are moved up
despite the springs.
System 2 oil (B) flows via modulator valve (A) and fills accumulator (E).
From modulator valve (A), system 2 oil (B) flows via the actuated shift valves (I) and (F) to the B1 brake (R). Oil pressure
causes the B1 brake (R) to engage.
C4 clutch (O) is connected to mid-return (L) via shift valve (K), which is not actuated.
B2 brake (Q) and B3 brake (N) are connected to the high return (M) via the two shift valves (I) and (F), which are
actuated.
Shifting from first to second gear
→NOTE:
The initial situation is ”Engine running and first gear engaged”
The EPC control unit cuts off the power supply to solenoid valve (G). Solenoid valve (H) remains actuated.
System 1 oil (C), which has forced shift valve (F) up despite the spring, flows into the high return (M). As a result, shift
valve (F) is moved downward by its spring.
As shift valve (F) is half-way through its movement, the following happens:
System 1 oil pressure at shift valve (F) flows into high return (M). The spring on return valve (D) is no longer assisted
by system 1 oil.The pressure in accumulator (E) moves return valve (D) upward despite the spring.
The system 2 oil pressure that is present at shift valve (F) cannot flow away. As a result, the pressure that has built
up moves modulator valve (A) downward.
The system 2 pressure oil flows into the return via modulator valve (A).
Accumulator (E) empties via return valve (D).
Now in a pressure-free condition, modulator valve (A) moves upward and return valve (D) moves downward.
Shifting to second gear
→NOTE:
The initial situation is ”Shifting from first to second gear”.
When shift valve (F) is in its bottom position, oil under pressure flows from B1 brake (R) into high return (M).
System 2 oil (B) flows via modulator valve (A), fills accumulator (E) and acts on return valve (D).
System 1 oil (C) flows via return valve (D) and assists the spring.
System 2 oil (B) flows via modulator valve (A), shift valve (I) (which is actuated) and shift valve (F) (which is not actuated)
to the B2 brake (Q).Oil pressure causes the B2 brake (Q) to engage.
Shifting to third and fourth gears
The procedures for shifting to third and fourth gears can be determined from the descriptions above. The only differences are
which shift valves are actuated and which elements engage (see charts).
Reference 255-20-260, PowrQuad Module—Reverse Drive Lever and

Gear Shift Lever, Mechanically Actuated PowrQuad Module
Reverse Drive Lever
LEGEND:
A Reverse drive lever in “forward” position
B Reverse drive lever in “neutral” position
C Reverse drive lever in “reverse” position
D Reverse drive lever
Reverse Drive Lever
The reverse drive lever (D) can be moved to three positions (forward, neutral and reverse).
• The tractor can only be started with reverse drive lever in “neutral” position.
While the tractor is in motion, it is possible to change from one direction to the other directly without pressing the clutch pedal,
simply by moving the lever through “neutral”.
Gear Shift Lever
Gear shift lever
Gear shift lever (A) selects gears 1 to 4. The clutch need not be used for this.
While the tractor is in motion, it is possible to change from one gear to the next directly without pressing the clutch pedal.
• The clutch pedal must be depressed to change the ranges.
Reference 255-20-270, PowrQuad Module — Reverse Drive Lever and

Range Shift Lever with Gearshift Switches, Electrically Actuated
PowrQuad Module
Reverse drive lever
LEGEND:
A Reverse drive lever in ”forward” position
B Reverse drive lever in ”neutral” position
C Reverse drive lever in ”reverse” position
D Reverse drive lever
Reverse drive lever
The reverse drive lever (D) can be moved to three positions (forward, neutral and reverse).
• The tractor can only be started with reverse drive lever in ”neutral” position.
While the tractor is in motion, it is possible to change from one direction to the other directly without pressing the clutch pedal,
simply by moving the lever through ”neutral”.
Electric gearshifting at range shift lever
Range shift lever with gearshift switches
On range shift lever (A) there are two gearshift switches (B) used to change gears 1 to 4 up or down. There is no need to use
the clutch for this.
Reference 255-20-400, PowrQuad Plus Transmission — Summary of

Transmission Versions
Summary of transmission versions
PowrQuad transmission PowrQuad Plus Transmission (Control Unit EPC)
Mechanical PowrQuad module •
Electrical PowrQuad module •
Comparison of transmission versions
Mechanical reverser control Electrical reverser control Mechanical gear shifting Electrical gear shifting
PowrQuad transmission • •
PowrQuad Plus transmission • •
Reference 255-20-410, PowrQuad Plus Transmission—Sub-Assemblies

PowrQuad Plus Transmission
Electrically actuated PowrQuad module:On the electrically actuated PowrQuad module, the disk clutches and brakes are
engaged by solenoid valves and proportional solenoids that are actuated by oil under pressure.
Range shift lever with gearshift switches:The switches on the range shift lever can be used to change each gear up and
down.
Sending units for transmission and engine speeds:The sending units transmit the current transmission and engine speeds
to the EPC control unit.
The EPC control unit processes and controls all the signals needed for the various transmission functions.
Reference 255-20-420, PowrQuad Plus Transmission — Description of

Shift Functions
→NOTE:
On the PowrQuad Plus transmission, the electrically actuated PowrQuad module serves as the basic
component.
What follows is a description of the various transmission and shift functions.
Electric gearshifting at range shift lever
Range shift lever with gearshift switches
On range shift lever (A) there are two gearshift switches (B) used to change gears 1 to 4 up or down. There is no need to use
the clutch for this.
Automatic speed matching
When the clutch pedal is depressed, the engine speed is compared to the transmission speed. When shifting to another range,
the ratio between engine and transmission speeds changes.
The EPC control unit processes and controls the signals needed for automatic speed matching or shifting into the best gear.
Reference 255-20-440, PowrQuad Plus Transmission — Description of

Clutch Actuation
Clutch actuation
Clutch actuation
Depending on the position of the clutch pedal (A), the clutch potentiometer (B) sends a signal to the EPC control unit.
The EPC control unit processes and controls all the signals needed for the appropriate modulation of the clutch.
If the clutch pedal is fully depressed, the power flow is interrupted by means of the clutch pedal switch (C) or the EPC control
unit.
Reference 255-20-500 — Range Transmission, Layout

Layout (16-speed transmission)
Range transmission, layout of 16-speed transmission
LEGEND:
A Drive shaft
B Gear, range D
C Synchronizer, ranges C and D
D Gear, range C
E Gear, range B
F Synchronizer, ranges A and B
G Gear, range A
H Front-wheel drive gear
I Differential drive shaft
The transmission housing contains the drive shaft (A), differential drive shaft (I), parking lock and shift elements.
The drive shaft is a one-piece unit, i.e. the individual gears are interlocked. The differential drive shaft holds the A, B, C and D
range gears, the synchronizers (C and F) and the front-wheel drive gear (H). The range gears can turn freely on the differential
drive shaft. The synchronizing units and the front wheel drive gear are connected to the differential drive shaft. The drive shaft
gears mesh with the range gears on the differential drive shaft.
Torque is transferred from the PowrQuad module to the drive shaft (A). The drive shaft drives the individual range gears. If the
synchronizer units are in neutral, all range gears turn freely on the differential drive shaft. The differential drive shaft does not
turn. If a synchronizer unit is moved to a shift position, the associated range gear will be solidly engaged on the shaft. This
allows torque to be transmitted to the differential drive shaft. From the differential drive shaft, torque is transmitted to the ring
gear and to the front-wheel drive clutch
[ If equipped ]
.
Reference 255-20-510 — Range Transmission, Power Flow

Power flow in range A (16-speed transmission)
Range transmission, power flow in range A (16-speed transmission)
When shifted, the synchronizer (F) shift collar connects the A range gear (G) to the differential drive shaft (I). The other range
gears continue to rotate freely on the differential drive shaft.
Torque is transferred from the drive shaft (A) via the A range gear and synchronizer unit to the differential drive shaft. From the
differential drive shaft, torque is transmitted to the ring gear. Similarly, the front-wheel drive gear (H) transmits torque to the
front wheel drive clutch.
Power flow in range B (16-speed transmission)
Range transmission, power flow in range B (16-speed transmission)
When shifted, the synchronizer (F) shift collar connects the B range gear (E) to the differential drive shaft (I). The other range
Torque is transferred from the drive shaft (A) via the B range gear and synchronizer unit to the differential drive shaft. From the
Power flow in range C (16-speed transmission)
Range transmission, power flow in range C (16-speed transmission)
When shifted, the synchronizer (C) shift collar connects the C range gear (D) to the differential drive shaft (I). The other range
Torque is transferred from the drive shaft (A) via the C range gear and synchronizer unit to the differential drive shaft. From the
Power flow in range D (16-speed transmission)
Range transmission, power flow in range D (16-speed transmission)
When shifted, the synchronizer (C) shift collar connects the D range gear (B) to the differential drive shaft (I). The other range
Torque is transferred from the drive shaft (A) via the D range gear and synchronizer unit to the differential drive shaft. From
the differential drive shaft, torque is transmitted to the ring gear. Similarly, the front-wheel drive gear (H) transmits torque to
the front wheel drive clutch.
Reference 255-20-520—Range Transmission, Park Lock
Range transmission (5620-5820 tractors) — park lock
LEGEND:
A Lever
B Shifter shaft
C Shifter shaft cam
D Roller
E Bearing quill
F Spring
G Front-wheel drive gear
H Locking pawl
When park lock is engaged, shifter shaft (B) rotates and cam (C) exerts pressure on roller (D) of locking pawl (H). The locking
pawl is moved towards front wheel drive gear (G), causing the pawl and gear splines to mesh.
When park lock is disengaged, the cam no longer exerts pressure on roller of locking pawl. Spring (F) moves the locking pawl
back to disengaged position.
Reference 255-20-800, Reduction Gear—Operation
Reduction gear — operation
LEGEND:
A Reduction gear drive shaft
B Gear transmission drive shaft
C Reduction gear countershaft
D Output gearwheel of reduction gear
E Input gearwheel of reduction gear
F Output gearwheel of range transmission
G Range transmission drive shaft
H Needle bearing
I Toothed ring
J Shift collar support
K Shift collar
L Gearwheel
M Shifter fork
The reduction gear is located in the option housing. Its primary components are drive shaft (A) and countershaft (C). The drive
shaft is driven by the drive shaft of gear transmission (B).
The reduction gear is engaged and disengaged via shift collar (K). With the reduction gear engaged, speed is reduced at a ratio
of approx. 2.3 : 1.
Regardless of transmission version, the reduction gear may be engaged in any of the ranges.
Reference 255-20-810, Reduction Gear — Power Flow

Power flow with reduction gear disengaged
Power flow with reduction gear disengaged
LEGEND:
H Needle bearing
I Toothed ring
K Shift collar
L Gearwheel
M Shifter fork
Shift collar (K) meshes securely both with drive shaft (A) and toothed ring (I).
Toothed ring (I) then transmits energy via its internal splines to the range transmission drive shaft (G).
In this situation, gearwheel (L) can turn freely on shaft (A).
Power flow with reduction gear engaged
Power flow with reduction gear engaged
LEGEND:
DRIVE SYSTEMS (g) by Belgreen v2.0
H Needle bearing
I Toothed ring
K Shift collar
L Gearwheel
M Shifter fork
When the reduction gear is engaged, shift collar (K) connects its support (J) with gearwheel (L). Gearwheel (L) drives the output
gearwheel (D) of countershaft (C). Input gearwheel (E) transmits the energy to range transmission drive shaft (G).
Thanks to needle bearing (H), shafts (A) and (G) can rotate freely, completely independently of one another.
Section 256 - DRIVE SYSTEMS

Table of contents
Operational check ................................................................................................................................ 1
Group 15 - Tests and Adjustments ........................................................................................................ 4
Reference 256-15-000, Drive Systems — Summary of References ...................................................... 4
System check ....................................................................................................................................... 6
Reference 256-15-002, Checking Pressure at the Front-Wheel Drive Clutch ...................................... 11
Reference 256-15-003, Checking Pressure at the Hydraulic Differential Lock .................................... 12
Reference 256-15-004, Checking Pressure at the Rear PTO ............................................................... 14
Reference 256-15-005, Checking Pressure at the Front PTO .............................................................. 18
Reference 256-15-006, Drive Systems — Test Result Table ............................................................... 20
Reference 256-20-001, Drive Systems — Summary of References .................................................... 21
Reference 256-20-100, Front-Wheel Drive Clutch—Layout ................................................................ 22
Reference 256-20-110, Front-Wheel Drive Clutch—Oil and Power Flows ........................................... 23
Reference 256-20-120, Front-Wheel Drive Clutch — Cooling and Lubrication .................................... 26
Reference 256-20-200, Differential—Layout ...................................................................................... 27
Reference 256-20-220, Differential — Power Flows ............................................................................ 29
Reference 256-20-230, Differential—Oil-Flows ................................................................................... 31
Reference 256-20-300, Final Drives—Operation and Layout .............................................................. 34
Reference 256-20-400, Rear PTO Options—Description ..................................................................... 35
Reference 256-20-410, Rear PTO Options—PTO Modulating Valve and Solenoid Valve ..................... 37
Reference 256-20-420, Rear PTO Options—PTO Clutch and PTO Brake ............................................. 39
Reference 256-20-440, Rear PTO Options — Power Flows ................................................................. 40
Reference 256-20-500, Front PTO Options — Operation .................................................................... 45
Reference 256-20-510, Front PTO Options — Description, Hydraulic Circuit ...................................... 47
Reference 256-20-520, Front PTO Options — Solenoid Valve ............................................................. 47
Reference 256-20-530, Front PTO Options — Hydraulic Pump ........................................................... 48
Reference 256-20-540, Front PTO Options — Oil Cooler ..................................................................... 48
Section 256 - DRIVE SYSTEMS Group 10: Operational Check-Out

Reference 256-10-001, Drive Systems — Operational Check
Always begin with this group to identify a failure. The step-by-step procedures will provide a quick check of the system. No
tools are required to perform these checks. A level area with space for driving is necessary.
Always begin at the first step and follow the sequence from left to right. Read each step completely before performing the
check. Concentrate only on the check you are performing.
Disregard signals from unrelated components.
Complete all checks before making repairs, unless instructed otherwise in right column.
The engine and other major components must be at operating temperature for some checks.
CAUTION:
Perform checks in an open area. The tractor may move of its own accord during testing.
Operational check
( 1 ) Checking the preconditions for proper operation of the hydraulic system
Action:
See Reference 255-05-001 , ”Introductory Checks for Transmission and Hydraulic Diagnosis”.
Result:
YES: GO TO 2 .
NO:Take remedial action as necessary.
( 2 ) Checking front-wheel drive
Action:
[1] - With front-wheel drive switched on, drive the tractor straight ahead at a speed of approx. 6 km/h (3.7 mph); engine speed
should be 1000—1100 rpm.
[2] - Turn the steering wheel sharply in either direction and stop the tractor by pressing the clutch pedal.
[3] - Watch the front-end of the tractor and disengage front-wheel drive.
Once front-wheel drive is disengaged, the front-end of the tractor should move slightly in the direction in which the steering
wheel is turned.
→NOTE:
This check can also be performed from reverse travel.
Result:
YES: GO TO 3 .
Section 256 - DRIVE SYSTEMS Group 10: Operational Check-Out
( 3 ) Checking the differential lock
Action:
[1] - Drive the tractor straight ahead at a speed of approx. 6 km/h (3.7 mph). Engine speed should be 1000 rpm.
[2] - Engage the differential lock and turn the steering wheel sharply in either direction.
The tractor should continue to move straight ahead.
[3] - Disengage the differential lock by pressing one of the brake pedals (or both of them together).
The tractor should make a normal turn.
Result:
YES: GO TO 4 .
( 4 ) Checking the front PTO
Action:
[1] - With PTO switched off at the actuating knob in the cab, run the engine in all speed ranges.
IMPORTANT:
PTO should NOT rotate.
[2] - Engage PTO.
→NOTE:
The PTO should not engage with a jerk (i.e. without modulation). No unusual noises should occur.
PTO should rotate.
CAUTION:
If the engine is shut off while the PTO is running and then restarted, the PTO will not re-engage. Even so,
the relevant indicator light remains on.
[3] - Disengage PTO.
With engine running at maximum speed, the PTO should come to a complete stop within 7 seconds (without implement).
Result:
YES: GO TO 5 .
( 5 ) Check the rear PTO
Section 256 - DRIVE SYSTEMS Group 15: Tests and Adjustments
Action:
[1] - With PTO switched ”OFF”, run engine in all speed ranges.
IMPORTANT:
PTO should NOT rotate.
[2] - Engage PTO.
→NOTE:
The PTO should not engage with a jerk (i.e. without modulation). No unusual noises should occur.
PTO should rotate.
CAUTION:
If the engine is shut off while the PTO is running and then restarted, the PTO will not re-engage. Even so,
the relevant indicator light remains on.
With engine running at maximum speed, the PTO should come to a complete stop within 7 seconds (without implement).
Result:
YES:End of test procedure.

Reference 256-15-000, Drive Systems — Summary of References
Operation of the drive systems is dealt with at the following reference points:
Reference 256-15-001 , ”Drive Systems — System Check”

Reference 256-15-010, ”Special Tools”
Reference 256-15-002 , ”Checking Pressure at the Front-Wheel Drive Clutch”
Reference 256-15-003 , ”Checking Pressure at the Hydraulic Differential Lock”
Reference 256-15-004 , ”Checking Pressure at the Rear PTO”
Reference 256-15-005 , ”Checking Pressure at the Front PTO”
Reference 256-15-006 , ”Drive Systems — Test Result Table”
→NOTE:
Tool Catalog (MTC).
FKM10470
FKM10470, pressure measuring system (Stage 1)
Pressure tests
Universal hydraulic test kit
FKM10002
FKM10002
Pressure tests
FKM10205
Pressure tests
Reference 256-15-001, Drive Systems — System Check
CAUTION:
Whenever performing checks on the transmission circuit, always observe the relevant safety
precautions. See Reference 270-15-001 , "Safety Measures for Hydraulic Checks".
The following tests represent a step-by-step approach to troubleshooting.
IMPORTANT:
The results of the tests should be recorded in the test result table (see Reference 256-15-006 , "Drive Systems — Test Result
Table").
For further information, see Reference 210-15-001 , "General References (Summary)".
System check
( 1 ) Checking the diagnostic trouble codes
Action:
See Reference 245-05-002 , "Accessing the Addresses and Diagnostic Trouble Codes".
Make sure that none of the diagnostic trouble codes apply to electrical faults (e.g. a shorted circuit).
Result:
YES: GO TO 2
NO:Rectify the electrical fault.
Action:
Result:
YES: GO TO 3
NO:Take remedial action as necessary.
( 3 ) Checking the temperature of the hydraulic oil
Action:
Ascertain the temperature of the hydraulic oil.
Hydraulic oil temperature during pressure checks Temperature min. 40°C
min. 105°F
Result:
YES: GO TO 4
NO:Heat up the hydraulic oil. See Reference 270-15-010 , "Heating up the Hydraulic Oil".
( 4 ) Check system pressure — PowrQuad transmission
Action:
Connect the tester (see Reference 255-15-004 , "PowrQuad Transmission—Checking System Pressure").
Engine speed: 2300 rpm
PowrQuad transmission, system pressure: 1200 kPa (12 bar; 175 psi)
Result:
YES: GO TO 5
NO:In the relevant Section and Group, adjust system pressure.
( 5 ) Checking pressure at the front-wheel drive clutch
Action:
Checking pressure at the front-wheel drive clutch
Connect the tester to the test port (see Reference 256-15-002 , "Checking Pressure at the Front-Wheel Drive Clutch").
Front-wheel drive clutch, pressure: 1200 kPa (12 bars; 175 psi)
Result:
YES: GO TO 6
NO:1. Check the associated circuit if there is a pressure reading with the front wheel drive engaged or no pressure reading
with the front-wheel drive disengaged.
NO:2. If there is no electrical fault, the spool is jammed in the solenoid valve. Repair the solenoid valve.
NO:3. Repair the front-wheel drive clutch if there is no pressure reading when the front-wheel drive is engaged but the unit is
still not operating properly.
( 6 ) Checking pressure at the hydraulic differential lock
Action:
Checking pressure at the hydraulic differential lock
Connect the tester to the test port (see Reference 256-15-003 , "Checking Pressure at the Hydraulic Differential Lock").
Hydraulic differential lock, pressure: 1200 kPa (12 bars; 175 psi)
Result:
YES: GO TO 7
NO:1. Check the associated circuit if there is a pressure reading with the differential lock disengaged or no pressure reading
with the differential lock engaged.
NO:2. If there is no electrical fault, the spool is jammed in the solenoid valve. Repair the solenoid valve.
NO:3. If the pressure reading is acceptable with the differential lock engaged but the system is not operating correctly, repair
the differential lock.
( 7 ) Checking pressure at the rear PTO
Action:
7.1 - Checking pressure at the rear PTO brake
Checking pressure at the rear PTO brake
Connect the tester to the test port (see Reference 256-15-004 , "Checking Pressure at the Rear PTO").
Rear PTO: off
Rear PTO brake, pressure: 1200 kPa (12 bars; 175 psi)
Result:
YES:GO TO 7.2
NO:1. If there is no pressure reading, check the rear PTO solenoid valve; see Reference 240-15-013 , "SE16A — Basic Control
Unit (BCU) (Rear PTO and External Control)".
NO:2. If rear PTO solenoid valve is performing properly, repair rear PTO modulating valve (see "Recondition PTO Modulating
Valve" in Section 56, Group 30).3. If the pressure reading is acceptable but the PTO shaft is turning, repair PTO brake (see
"Rear PTO Options — Reconditioning (Summary of References)" , in Section 56, Group 30).
Action:
7.2 - Checking pressure at the rear PTO clutch
Checking pressure at the rear PTO clutch
Connect the tester to the test port (see Reference 256-15-004 , "Checking Pressure at the Rear PTO").
Rear PTO: on
Rear PTO clutch, pressure: 1200 kPa (12 bars; 175 psi)
Result:
YES: GO TO 8
NO:1. If there is no pressure reading, check the rear PTO solenoid valve; see Reference 240-15-013 , "SE16A — Basic Control
Unit (BCU) (Rear PTO and External Control)".
NO:2. If rear PTO solenoid valve is performing properly, repair rear PTO modulating valve (see "Recondition PTO Modulating
Valve" in Section 56, Group 30).
NO:3. If the pressure reading is acceptable but the PTO is not performing properly, repair PTO (see "Rear PTO Options —
Reconditioning (Summary of References)" , in Section 56, Group 30).
( 8 ) Check system pressure — front PTO
Action:
Check system pressure — front PTO
Connect the tester to the test port (see Reference 256-15-005 , "Checking Pressure at the Front PTO").
Engine speed: 1000 - 2300 rpm
PTO: On and off
System pressure, front PTO: 2000 kPa (20 bar; 290 psi)
Result:
YES: GO TO 9
NO:1. If no or no sufficient pressure is indicated and a loud pump suction noise can be heard, check the oil screen.
NO:2. If pressure is only indicated when the PTO is engaged, check solenoid valve.
NO:3. If no or no sufficient pressure is indicated, the pump must be replaced.
( 9 ) Checking pressure at the front PTO clutch
Action:
Checking pressure at the front PTO clutch
Connect the tester to the test port (see Reference 256-15-005 , "Checking Pressure at the Front PTO").
PTO: On
Clutch pressure, front PTO: 2000 kPa (20 bar; 290 psi)
IMPORTANT:
Pressure at PTO clutch must increase in steps but nevertheless quickly.
Result:
YES:End of test.
NO:1. If enough pressure is indicated at the PTO clutch, but the clutch is slipping, the clutch must be repaired.
NO:2. Check the associated circuit if there is a pressure reading with the PTO clutch engaged and disengaged.
NO:3. If there is no electrical fault, repair solenoid valve.
NO:4. If no or no sufficient pressure is indicated at the PTO clutch, check the solenoid valve. If the solenoid valve is not
damaged, replace the PTO clutch seals.
NO:5. If the pressure at PTO clutch only builds up slowly, the BCU modulation must be checked. If the modulation is OK, repair
solenoid valve.
Reference 256-15-002, Checking Pressure at the Front-Wheel Drive

Clutch
[1] -
FKM10470 tester on front-wheel drive clutch
FKM10470
Pressure tests
to the test port.
[2] - Run the engine at the specified speed.
[3] - Engage the front-wheel drive and observe the pressure reading.
→NOTE:
There should be no pressure shown when the front-wheel drive is engaged.
[4] - Disengage the front-wheel drive and observe the pressure reading.
Front-wheel drive clutch Pressure at 2300 rpm 1200 kPa
12 bar
175 psi
Reference 256-15-003, Checking Pressure at the Hydraulic Differential

Lock
[1] - Remove plug (A).
Plug at hydraulic differential lock
FKM10470 tester on the hydraulic differential lock
[2] - Connect the FKM10470 pressure measuring system (Stage 1) to the test port.
FKM10470
Pressure tests
[4] - Measure the pressure with the differential lock disengaged.
→NOTE:
There should be no pressure shown when the differential lock is disengaged.
[5] - Engage the differential lock and observe the pressure reading.
Hydraulic differential lock Pressure at 2300 rpm 1200 kPa
12 bar
175 psi
Reference 256-15-004, Checking Pressure at the Rear PTO

Checking pressure at the PTO brake
[1] -
FKM10470 tester on PTO modulating valve ”BRAKE”
Connect the FKM10470 pressure measuring system (Stage 1) to the test port marked ”BRAKE”.
FKM10470
Pressure tests
[3] - Measure the pressure with the PTO disengaged.
Rear PTO brake Pressure at 2300 rpm 1200 kPa
12 bar
175 psi
[4] - Measure the pressure with the PTO engaged.
→NOTE:
There should be no pressure shown when the PTO is engaged.
Checking pressure at the PTO clutch
[1] -
→NOTE:
Check the PTO brake system pressure before checking the PTO clutch system pressure.
FKM10470 tester on PTO modulating valve ”CLUTCH”
Connect the FKM10470 pressure measuring system (Stage 1) to the test port marked ”CLUTCH”.
FKM10470
Pressure tests
→NOTE:
There should be no pressure shown when the PTO is disengaged.
[4] - Engage the PTO and observe the pressure reading.
Rear PTO clutch Pressure at 2300 rpm 1200 kPa
12 bar
175 psi
Checking the operation of the PTO modulating valve
[1] -
Universal pressure tester FKM10002 at PTO modulating valve ”CLUTCH” and ”BRAKE”
Connect universal pressure test kit FKM10002
FKM10002
FKM10002
Pressure tests
to PTO clutch and PTO brake test ports (marked "CLUTCH" and "BRAKE" respectively).
[3] - Engage PTO.
→NOTE:
Pressure gauge connected to PTO clutch (”CLUTCH”) should show pressure.
→NOTE:
PTO clutch pressure must drop to zero before pressure gauge connected to PTO brake shows any
pressure.
IMPORTANT:
No pressure overlap should be observed when engaging and disengaging PTO.
Reference 256-15-005, Checking Pressure at the Front PTO

[1] -
Front PTO check
Connect the FKM10205 universal pressure tester to the PTO clutch (A) and PTO system pressure (B) test ports.
FKM10205
FKM10205
Pressure tests
[2] - Run the engine at 1000 - 2300 rpm.
System pressure, front PTO Pressure at 1000 - 2300 rpm 2000 kPa
20 bar
290 psi
Clutch pressure, front PTO Pressure at 1000 - 2300 rpm The pressure should be zero.
[4] - Engage the PTO and observe the pressure reading.
System pressure, front PTO Pressure at 1000 - 2300 rpm 2000 kPa
20 bar
290 psi
Clutch pressure, front PTO Pressure at 1000 - 2300 rpm 2000 kPa
20 bar
290 psi
IMPORTANT:
Pressure at PTO clutch must increase in steps but nevertheless quickly.
→NOTE:
When engaging and disengaging, the system pressure may drop slightly for a short time.
Section 256 - DRIVE SYSTEMS Group 20: Theory of Operation
Reference 256-15-006, Drive Systems — Test Result Table

Test result table
Record of test results obtained when checking the drive systems
Owner: Date:
Model: Tractor serial no.: Operating hours:
Problem:
Specification Actual result
°C (
Transmission oil temperature 40°C (105°F)
°F)
kPa (
System pressure—PowrQuad transmission 1200 kPa (12 bar; 175 psi)

bar,
psi)
kPa (
Front wheel drive clutch 1200 kPa (12 bar; 175 psi)
bar,
psi)
kPa (
Hydraulic differential lock 1200 kPa (12 bar; 175 psi)

bar,
psi
kPa (
Rear PTO 1200 kPa (12 bar; 175 psi)

bar,
psi
kPa (
System pressure—front PTO 2000 kPa (20 bar; 290 psi)

bar,
psi
kPa (
Clutch pressure—front PTO 2000 kPa (20 bar; 290 psi)

bar,
psi

Reference 256-20-001, Drive Systems — Summary of References
The term "drive systems" covers the following components:
Differential, final drives and rear PTO, plus the front-wheel drive clutch (if equipped).
Operation of the drive systems is dealt with at the following reference points:
Front-wheel drive clutch
Reference 256-20-100 , ”Front-Wheel Drive Clutch — Layout”

Reference 256-20-110 , ”Front-Wheel Drive Clutch — Oil and Power Flows”
Reference 256-20-120 , ”Front-Wheel Drive Clutch — Cooling and Lubrication”
Differential
Reference 256-20-200 , ”Differential — Layout”

Reference 256-20-220 , ”Differential — Power Flows”
Reference 256-20-230 , ”Differential — Oil Flows”
Final drives
Reference 256-20-300 , ”Differential — Operation and Layout”
Rear PTO options
Reference 256-20-400 , ”Rear PTO Options — Description”

Reference 256-20-410 , ”Rear PTO Options — PTO Modulating Valve and Solenoid Valve”
Reference 256-20-420 , ”Rear PTO Options — PTO Clutch and PTO Brake”
Reference 256-20-440 , ”Rear PTO Options — Power Flows”
Front PTO
Reference 256-20-500 , ”Front PTO Options — Operation”

Reference 256-20-510 , ”Front PTO Options — Description, Hydraulic Circuit”
Reference 256-20-520 , ”Front PTO Options — Solenoid Valve”
Reference 256-20-530 , ”Front PTO Options — Hydraulic Pump”
Reference 256-20-540 , ”Front PTO Options — Oil Cooler”
Reference 256-20-100, Front-Wheel Drive Clutch—Layout
Layout of front-wheel drive clutch
LEGEND:
A Clutch shaft
B Bearing quill
C Belleville spring (2 used)
D Piston
E Disk pack
F Double gear
G Housing
H Check valve (3 used)
I Clutch drum and gear
J Oil transfer plate
The front-wheel drive clutch is attached to the bottom of the range transmission. When the front-wheel drive is engaged,
torque is transferred from the range transmission via the front-wheel drive clutch to the universal drive shaft which directly
drives the front-wheel drive axle.
The primary components of the front wheel-drive clutch are the clutch shaft (A), clutch drum (I), disk pack (E), Belleville springs
(C) and piston (D).
The front-wheel drive is mechanically engaged by a spring and hydraulically disengaged by oil pressure. When the front-wheel
drive is engaged a solenoid interrupts the flow of oil to the front-wheel drive clutch.
Reference 256-20-110, Front-Wheel Drive Clutch—Oil and Power Flows

Oil-flow and power-flow with front-wheel drive engaged
Oil and power flow (front-wheel drive engaged)
LEGEND:
A Clutch shaft
B Belleville spring (2 used)
C Piston
D Disk pack
E Check valve (2 used)
F Clutch drum with gear
G Double gear
H Oil transfer plate
I Check valve
J Inlet from pressure regulating valve
K Control spool
L Magnetic core
M Spring
N Solenoid valve
O Return line to sump
P Power-flow
Q Pilot oil
R Pressure-free oil
When front wheel drive is engaged, no current passes through the coil of solenoid valve (N). It therefore has no electro-
magnetic effect. Spring (M) presses against magnetic core (L) and spool (K) remains in its initial position. The pilot oil from the
pressure regulating valve reaches the solenoid valve but cannot flow any further.
The oil inside the clutch drum is pressure-free and can flow back to the sump via the solenoid valve. Belleville springs (B) press
the piston (C) against the disk pack (D), which is thus compressed. This creates a connection between the externally splined
disks driven by clutch drum (F), and the internally splined disks connected to clutch shaft (A).
Power is transmitted from the range transmission via double gear (G) to clutch drum (F). Disk pack (D) transmits the power
further to clutch shaft (A), which then drives the universal jointed shaft.
Front-wheel drive is always engaged when the engine is shut off, as the transmission pump does not pump oil in this state.
Oil-flow and power-flow with front-wheel drive disengaged
When front wheel drive is disengaged, current flows through the coil of solenoid valve (N). The electro-magnetic effect
energizes magnetic core (L), which moves towards the coil. Spool (K), which is directly connected to the magnetic core, also
moves in the same direction. Pilot oil from the pressure regulating valve flows via the solenoid valve into the interior of the
front-wheel drive clutch.
Piston (C) moves and presses against the Belleville springs (B). The disk pack is released. There is no longer any connection
between the externally splined disks driven by clutch drum (F) and the internally splined disks connected to clutch shaft (A).
Clutch drum (F) is free to rotate on the clutch shaft.
Oil and power flow (front-wheel drive engaged)
LEGEND:
A Clutch shaft
B Belleville spring (2 used)
C Piston
D Disk pack
E Check valve (2 used)
F Clutch drum with gear
G Double gear
H Oil transfer plate
I Check valve
J Inlet from pressure regulating valve

K Control spool
L Magnetic core
M Spring
N Solenoid valve
O Return line to sump
P Power-flow
Q Pilot oil
R Pressure-free oil
Reference 256-20-120, Front-Wheel Drive Clutch — Cooling and
Lubrication
Front-wheel drive clutch — cooling and lubrication
There is oil (not illustrated) inside the front-wheel drive clutch housing. Oil can therefore reach the gears, the taper roller
bearings and the outside of the front-wheel drive clutch, thus providing cooling and lubrication.
The three small vanes on oil transfer plate (H) also force oil through the opened check valves (E) and into the inside of the
clutch. At the same time, oil can escape through the opened check valve (I). There is therefore always a circular flow of oil
when front-wheel drive is engaged.
When front-wheel drive is disengaged, pressure oil reaches the inside of the clutch. The check valves close. This prevents the
oil transfer plate from sending any more oil into the clutch. When front-wheel drive is engaged, the oil in the clutch becomes
pressure-free. The check valves open and oil from the oil transfer plate can once again flow through the clutch.
Reference 256-20-200, Differential—Layout
Differential—Layout
LEGEND:
A Bevel gear case
B Ring gear
C Piston housing
D Left drive shaft
E Bearing housing
F Drive bevel gear (2 used)
G Differential pinions (4 used)
H Hub
I Disk pack
J Piston
K Right bearing quill
L Right drive shaft
The main components of the differential are the bevel gear case (A), ring gear (B), drive bevel gears (F) and differential pinions
(G).
The ring gear meshes with the bevel gear on the differential drive shaft. Drive bevel gears (F), which are fitted to final drive
shafts (D) and (L), transmit torque via the planetary bevel gear and the rear axle to the drive wheels.
A hydraulic differential lock is incorporated to prevent one wheel from spinning in difficult traction conditions.
Reference 256-20-220, Differential — Power Flows

Power flow when moving straight ahead
Power flow when moving straight ahead
LEGEND:
A Drive pinions
B Differential pinions
C Differential drive shaft with bevel gear
D Ring gear
When the tractor is moving straight ahead, driven ring gear (D), the differential housing with bevel pinions (B), and drive
pinions (A) with the final drive shafts all turn at the same speed. Differential pinions (B) do not turn around their own axis.
The two wheels are driven with equal power and at equal speed.
Power flow when cornering
Power flow when cornering
LEGEND:
A Drive pinions
B Differential pinions
C Differential drive shaft with bevel gear
D Ring gear
When the tractor turns a sharp corner, only the driven ring gear and the differential housing with its pinions rotate at the same
speed. As the right wheel - and thus the right drive bevel gear - are stationary, the differential pinions must idle with the right
drive pinion. As they do so, they rotate around their own axes. The left drive bevel gear meshes with the rotating bevel pinions.
This produces an additional drive for the left drive pinion, which normally turns idly with the ring gear when the tractor is
moving straight ahead.
As a result, the left-hand drive pinion with the final drive shaft makes two revolutions during each revolution of the ring gear.
Thus, if the drive wheels have unequal resistance applied to them, the wheel with the least resistance turns faster. As one
wheel turns faster, the other turns slower by the same amount.
Reference 256-20-230, Differential—Oil-Flows

Oil-flow with differential lock engaged
Oil-flow with differential lock engaged
LEGEND:
A Solenoid valve
B Spring
C Magnetic core
D Spool
E Inlet from pressure regulating valve
F Return line to sump
G Piston
H Disk pack
I Piston housing
J Hub
K Spring (4 used)
L Pilot oil
M Pressure-free oil
When the differential lock is engaged, current flows through the coil of solenoid valve (A). The electro-magnetic effect
energizes magnetic core (C), which moves towards the coil. Spool (D), which is directly connected to the magnetic core, also
moves in the same direction.
Oil from the pressure regulating valve flows via the solenoid valve to piston (G) of the differential lock. Disk pack (H) is
compressed, thus forming a connection between hub (J) and piston housing (I). This prevents the final drive shafts — and the
bevel gears attached to them — from turning independently. The two rear axles of the tractor are now positively joined
together and the drive wheels turn at the same speed.
Oil-flow with differential lock disengaged
Oil-flow with differential lock disengaged
LEGEND:
A Solenoid valve
B Spring
C Magnetic core
D Spool
E Inlet from pressure regulating valve
F Return line to sump
G Piston
H Disk pack
I Piston housing
J Hub
L Pilot oil
M Pressure-free oil
When traction has been restored, the differential lock is disengaged by depressing brake pedal. Current stops flowing through
the coil of solenoid valve (A) and there is no electro-magnetic effect. Spring (B) forces magnetic core (C) and spool (D) back to
their initial positions.
Pilot oil from the pressure regulating valve reaches the solenoid valve but cannot go any further. The oil behind piston (G)
becomes pressure-free and flows back via the solenoid valve to the sump. The piston returns to its initial point and disk pack
(H) comes free once again.
It is once again possible for the two final drive shafts to rotate independently and the two rear axles of the tractor can turn at
different speeds.
Reference 256-20-300, Final Drives—Operation and Layout
Final Drives—Operation and Layout
LEGEND:
A Final drive shaft
B Ring gear
C Planet pinion (3 used)
D Planet pinion carrier
E Final drive housing
F Rear axle
The final drives primarily consist of the final drive housing (E), planetary and rear axle (F).
The planetary is driven by the final drive shaft (A) which acts as a sun gear.
When the final drive shaft (sun gear) rotates, the planet pinions (C) roll around the ring gear teeth (B). This allows the planet
pinion carrier (D) and the rear axle to rotate in the same direction as the sun gear. This provides a low-speed, high-torque
driving force to the drive wheels.
Reference 256-20-400, Rear PTO Options—Description
Rear PTO options
LEGEND:
A Input shaft
B Clutch hub
C Disk pack
D Clutch drum
E Drive shaft
F Output shaft
G PTO stub shaft
The tractor may be equipped with the following rear PTO options:
540 rpm
540/1000 rpm
540/540E/1000 rpm
Speed is changed by actuating the shifter forks.
All PTO options are independent, i.e. they can be engaged independently of the ground drive.
Power flows from input shaft (A) to clutch hub (B). With the clutch engaged (by oil pressure), power is transmitted via disk pack
(C) and clutch drum (D) to drive shaft (E), then via output shaft (F) to PTO stub shaft (G).
The PTO is engaged electro-hydraulically via a solenoid valve.
→NOTE:
The drawing shows the 540/540E/1000 rpm PTO. The arrow points in direction of forward travel.
Reference 256-20-410, Rear PTO Options—PTO Modulating Valve and

Solenoid Valve
PTO modulating valve and solenoid valve
LEGEND:
A Oil passage
B Solenoid valve
C Oil passage
D Spool
E Spring
F Spring
G Piston
H Orifice
K Pressure oil passage
L From transmission oil pump
M From PTO brake
N To sump
O To PTO clutch
P Pilot oil pressure
Q Return oil
When engaging PTO, the spool of solenoid valve (B) is attracted by the magnet and opens the passage (K) to the PTO
modulating valve.
As a result, pressure oil is directed to passage (A) and at the same time through oil passage (C) behind spool (D). The two
springs (E) and (F) are compressed gradually. The spool then interrupts the flow of oil. Through orifice (H) a controlled amount
of pressure oil flows behind piston (G) which moves spool (D) back to home position. The passage to the PTO clutch is open
again. In this way “grabbing” of the PTO is prevented and smooth engagement is ensured. Return oil from the PTO brake flows
to the sump via the solenoid valve spool.
When disengaging PTO, the solenoid valve spool is moved to home position by a spring. Thus the passage to PTO brake is
opened. At the same time the passage from PTO clutch to sump is opened.
Reference 256-20-420, Rear PTO Options—PTO Clutch and PTO Brake
PTO clutch and PTO brake
LEGEND:
A Input shaft
B Solenoid valve
C Disk pack
D Belleville spring (3 used)
E Piston
F Clutch drum
G Clutch hub
PTO clutch
The PTO clutch is a hydraulically operated disk clutch. It is driven from the engine by an input shaft (A). Depending on the
position of solenoid valve (B), pressure oil is routed to the PTO brake or via the modulating valve to the PTO clutch.
Belleville springs (D) keep piston (E) in its home position. When the PTO is engaged, pressure oil flows to the piston and disk
pack (C) is pressed together. The compressed disk pack (C) forms a power-transmitting junction between the clutch drum (F)
and the clutch hub (G). Thus torque is transmitted to the PTO gear train.
PTO brake
When the PTO is disengaged, the flow of oil to the PTO clutch is interrupted and pressure oil passes directly from the solenoid
valve behind PTO brake piston (E). The brake ring is pressed against the clutch drum (F) and the PTO stops.
Reference 256-20-440, Rear PTO Options — Power Flows

PTO power flow (540 rpm; 3-speed)
LEGEND:
A Through-drive shaft
B Clutch hub
C Disk pack
D Clutch drum
E Drive shaft
F Gear (540 rpm)
I Shift collar (540 rpm)
K Output shaft
L PTO stub shaft
N Shift fork (540 rpm)
From through-drive shaft (A) and clutch hub (B), power flows directly to drive shaft (E) via disk pack (C) and clutch drum (D).
The drive shaft transmits power to whichever of gears (F), (G) or (H) is currently connected to output shaft (K) via shift collars
(I) or (J with 540E/1000 rpm).
In this way power is directed to the PTO stub shaft (L).
PTO power flow (540E rpm; 3-speed)
LEGEND:
B Clutch hub
C Disk pack
D Clutch drum
E Drive shaft
H Gear (540E rpm)
J Shift collar (540E/1000 rpm)
K Output shaft
L PTO stub shaft
M Shift fork (540E/1000 rpm)
O Shift collar carrier (540E/1000 rpm)
PTO power flow (1000 rpm; shiftable; 3-speed)
LEGEND:
B Clutch hub
C Disk pack
D Clutch drum
E Drive shaft
G Gear (1000 rpm)
J Shift collar (540E/1000 rpm)
K Output shaft
L PTO stub shaft
M Shift fork (540E/1000 rpm)
O Shift collar carrier (540E/1000 rpm)
LEGEND:
B Clutch hub
C Disk pack
D Clutch drum
E Drive shaft
F Gear (540 rpm)
G Shift collar (540/540E rpm)
H Shift collar carrier (540/540E rpm)
I Output shaft
K Shift fork (540/540E rpm)
J PTO stub shaft
From through-drive shaft (A) and clutch hub (B), power flows directly to drive shaft (E) via disk pack (C) and clutch drum (D).
The drive shaft transmits power to whichever of gears (F) or (L with 540E rpm) is currently connected to output shaft (I) via
shift collar (G) and shift collar carrier (H).
In this way power is directed to the PTO stub shaft (J).
PTO power flow (540E rpm; shiftable; 2-speed)
LEGEND:
B Clutch hub
C Disk pack
D Clutch drum
E Drive shaft
G Shift collar (540/540E rpm)
H Shift collar carrier (540/540E rpm)
I Output shaft
K Shift fork (540/540E rpm)
L Gear (540E rpm)
J PTO stub shaft
Reference 256-20-500, Front PTO Options — Operation

The front PTO is an independent unit, i.e. it can be engaged independently of the ground drive.
Front PTO, sectional view
LEGEND:
A Input shaft
B Clutch drum
C Output shaft
D Thrust washer
E Hydraulic pump
F Oil screen
G Solenoid valve
H Pressure piston
I PTO brake
J Pressure plate
K Spring
L Disk pack
M Input flange
It is driven directly by the engine crankshaft and rotates clockwise (seen in the direction of forward travel). At an engine speed
of 2190 rpm the PTO shaft reaches its rated speed of 1000 rpm.
Output shaft (C) has an 1 3/8" DIN 9611 PTO profile and is thus compatible with most implements.
The PTO hydraulic circuit is independent of the tractor′s hydraulic circuit. The necessary oil for shifting procedures and
lubrification is supplied via an integrated hydraulic pump (E).
The PTO is engaged electro-hydraulically via solenoid valve (G). First pressure oil from the hydraulic pump is directed behind
the pressure piston (H). The piston compresses the disk pack (L) and power (torque) is transmitted to the output shaft (C).
To obtain a smooth engagement procedure, solenoid valve (G) is electronically modulated (controlled by the basic control unit
BCU).
When the solenoid valve is switched off, a pressure-free connection between clutch piston and sump is formed. The piston is
pushed back by the springs (K) and the disk pack does not transmit power any more. The return movement of piston (H) forces
the PTO brake (I) against the PTO housing thus preventing the output shaft (C) from turning.
The approximate shaft stop time is 1.5 seconds if no implements are attached.
Front PTO power flow (1000 rpm)
Power is transmitted from engine crankshaft via input flange (M) directly to input shaft (A). The input shaft transmits the power
via clutch drum (B) and disk pack (L) to the output shaft (C).
Reference 256-20-510, Front PTO Options — Description, Hydraulic

Circuit
Hydraulic diagram
LEGEND:
A Oil screen
B Integral hydraulic pump
C Solenoid valve
D Brake, spring loaded
E Hydraulic clutch
F Pressure control valve
G Cooler relief valve (600 kPa; 6 bar; 87 psi)
H Oil cooler
I Sump
The front PTO hydraulic circuit operates autonomously and is therefore independent from the tractor′s hydraulic system.
The hydraulic pump (B) is located in the front PTO housing and delivers oil (depending on engine speed). Through oil screen (A)
the hydraulic pump draws oil from sump (I) and directs it to solenoid valve (C) and pressure control valve (F). At a system
pressure of 2000 kPa (20 bar; 290 psi) the pressure control valve opens and directs excess oil to the sump via the oil cooler
(H).
If an excess pressure of 600 kPa (6 bar; 87 psi) is exceeded, the cooler relief valve (G) opens an the oil flows directly to the
sump.
PTO OFF: The oil passage to the PTO clutch piston is connected (pressure-free) to the sump via solenoid valve (C). The return
springs open clutch (E) and at the same time brake (D) is actuated.
PTO ON: Pressure oil flows to the PTO clutch piston via solenoid valve (C). Brake (D) is released and clutch (E) is closed.
Reference 256-20-520, Front PTO Options — Solenoid Valve
Solenoid valve
Solenoid valve (B) is installed in the housing of the hydraulic pump (A). It is electrically activated via the basic control unit
(BCU), When engaging PTO, the spool of solenoid valve is attracted by the magnet and gradually opens the passage to the
pressure piston of the clutch.
Modulation is controlled electronically via the basic control unit (BCU) enabling smooth PTO engagement.
When the PTO is disengaged, a spring returns the solenoid spool to its original position to open a pressure-free oil passage
between pressure piston and sump.
Reference 256-20-530, Front PTO Options — Hydraulic Pump
Hydraulic pump
The hydraulic pump (A) is a gear-type pump. Integrated in its housing are an oil screen (B), a pressure control valve and a
cooler relief valve. It is permanently driven via the ring gear on the clutch drum. An oil screen is located in the circuit before
the pump. The pump draws oil from the sump through the screen. At an engine speed of 2185 rpm the oil flow rate to pressure
relief valve and solenoid valve is approximately 3.8 l/min (1.0 gpm).
Reference 256-20-540, Front PTO Options — Oil Cooler
Front PTO oil cooler
STEERING AND BRAKES (g) by Belgreen v2.0
The front PTO oil cooler (A) is located ahead of the engine oil cooler. The amount of oil remaining after the PTO clutch has been
supplied flows through the oil cooler to the sump via the pressure relief valve.
A cooler relief valve is located in the circuit before the oil cooler. It is installed within the hydraulic pump housing, and its
purpose is to limit the pressure in the oil cooler to 600 kPa (6 bar; 87 psi).
Section 260 - STEERING AND BRAKES

Table of contents
Group 05 - Troubleshooting ................................................................................................................... 1
Reference 260-05-010, Hydrostatic Steering ....................................................................................... 1
Reference 260-05-020, Hydraulic Brakes ............................................................................................. 2
Reference 260-05-030, Handbrake ....................................................................................................... 2
Reference 260-05-040, Hydraulic Trailer Brake .................................................................................... 2
Reference 260-05-050, Air Brakes ........................................................................................................ 2
Reference 260-10-001, Safety Information .......................................................................................... 3
Reference 260-10-010, Steering Check ................................................................................................ 3
Reference 260-10-020, Brake Check .................................................................................................... 5
Reference 260-15-001, Tests and Adjustments — Summary of References ......................................... 7
Reference 260-15-020, Connecting SensoControl Test Equipment .................................................... 11
Reference 260-15-030, Specifications ................................................................................................ 12
Introductory checks ............................................................................................................................ 13
Reference 260-15-050, Checking the Brake System .......................................................................... 18
Reference 260-15-060, Bleeding the Brakes ...................................................................................... 20
Reference 260-15-070, Adjusting the Brake Pedals and Switches ...................................................... 23
Reference 260-15-080, Checking the Handbrake ............................................................................... 24
Reference 260-15-090, Checking the Trailer Brake Valve .................................................................. 26
Reference 260-15-100, Adjusting the Trailer Brake Valve .................................................................. 29
Preliminary checks ............................................................................................................................. 31
Reference 260-15-110, Checking the Air Brake (Visual Inspection) ................................................... 35
Reference 260-15-120, Checking the System for Leaks ..................................................................... 35
Reference 260-15-130, Checking the Coupling End (Supply) ............................................................. 36
Reference 260-15-150, Checking the Dual-Line Brake ....................................................................... 37
Reference 260-15-160, Checking the Single-Line Brake ..................................................................... 39
Reference 260-15-170, Adjusting the Handbrake when Air Brakes are Equipped .............................. 41
Reference 260-15-180, Checking the Pressure-Regulating Valve and Air-Brake Fill Time .................. 43
Reference 260-20-001, Theory of Operation — Summary of References ........................................... 44
Reference 260-20-010, Description of Steering System, Operation ................................................... 45
Reference 260-20-030, Brake Valve, Operation ................................................................................. 51
Reference 260-20-031, Two-Stage Brake Valve ................................................................................. 54
Reference 260-20-040, Rear Wheel Brakes, Operation ...................................................................... 62
Reference 260-20-050, Handbrake, Description ................................................................................. 62
Reference 260-20-060, Trailer Brake Valve, Description .................................................................... 64
Reference 260-20-080, Description of Air Brake System .................................................................... 67
Section 260 - STEERING AND BRAKES Group 05: Troubleshooting
Group 05 - Troubleshooting
Reference 260-05-010, Hydrostatic Steering
Symptom Problem Solution
The steering wheel is
stiff but steering is No oil pressure Do a hydraulic test. See Reference 270-15-020 , Checking the PC Hydraulic System.
operational
Leaking or missing valve ball (check Exchange steering valve. See reference “Removing the Steering Valve” at Section 60,
valve) Group 05 in the relevant "Repair" Manual.
Exchange steering valve. See reference “Removing the Steering Valve” at Section 60,
Inner and outer spool too stiff
Group 05 in the relevant "Repair" Manual.
Recondition the front axle. See the relevant Component Technical Manual for front-wheel
Stiff front axle components
drive axles.
Steering faulty or
Hydraulic pump is defective Do a hydraulic test. See Reference 270-15-020 , Checking the PC Hydraulic System.
inoperative
Fault in inlet priority valve Do a hydraulic test. See Reference 270-15-020 , Checking the PC Hydraulic System.
Steering pressure too low due to

Steering is stiff or noisy crushed hoses or a fault at the Do a hydraulic test. See Reference 270-15-020 , Checking the PC Hydraulic System.
steering valve
Excessive steering wheel Exchange steering valve. See reference “Removing the Steering Valve” at Section 60,
Worn rotor splines
play Group 05 in the relevant "Repair" Manual.
Rotor shaft upper flange worn or rotor Exchange steering valve. See reference “Removing the Steering Valve” at Section 60,
shaft broken Group 05 in the relevant "Repair" Manual.
Leaf springs broken or lack tension
Worn rotor shaft splines
The steering wheel turns

by itself and wheel Exchange steering valve. See reference “Removing the Steering Valve” at Section 60,
Weak or broken leaf springs
position must constantly Group 05 in the relevant "Repair" Manual.
be corrected
Steering wheel does not Exchange steering valve. See reference “Removing the Steering Valve” at Section 60,
Inner and outer spool binding
return to center position Group 05 in the relevant "Repair" Manual.
Leak between outer spool and Exchange steering valve. See reference “Removing the Steering Valve” at Section 60,
housing Group 05 in the relevant "Repair" Manual.
Tighten the wheel attaching bolts. See reference “Reconditioning the Front and Rear
Front wheels vibrate Wheel attaching bolts are loose
Wheels” at Section 80, Group 15 in the relevant "Repair" manual.
Tie-rod joints broken
drive axles.
Worn wheel bearings
drive axles.
Steering wheel “kicks Incorrect rotor shaft to rotor Exchange steering valve. See reference “Removing the Steering Valve” at Section 60,
back” adjustment Group 05 in the relevant "Repair" Manual.
Steering wheel does not

return to center Contamination or particles between Exchange steering valve. See reference “Removing the Steering Valve” at Section 60,
position, tends to turn inner and outer spool Group 05 in the relevant "Repair" Manual.
by itself
Weak or broken leaf springs
Inadequate steering
assist, possibly only on Insufficient pump pressure Do a hydraulic test. See Reference 270-15-020 , Checking the PC Hydraulic System.
one side
Excessive internal leakage in steering Exchange steering valve. See reference “Removing the Steering Valve” at Section 60,
valve Group 05 in the relevant "Repair" Manual.
Recondition the steering cylinder. See reference “Removing the Steering Cylinder” in the
Steering cylinder leakage
relevant Component Technical Manual for front-wheel drive axles.
Steering wheel turns

Extremely high leakage rate in Recondition the steering cylinder. See reference “Removing the Steering Cylinder” in the
continuously, no stops
steering cylinder relevant Component Technical Manual for front-wheel drive axles.
felt
Rotor and rotor ring extremely worn
Extremely high leakage rate between

inner and outer spool, and/or between Exchange steering valve. See reference “Removing the Steering Valve” at Section 60,
outer spool and steering valve Group 05 in the relevant "Repair" Manual.
housing
Steering column broken or splines Exchange the steering column. See reference “Reconditioning the Steering Column” at
damaged Section 60, Group 05 in the relevant "Repair" Manual.
Section 260 - STEERING AND BRAKES Group 10: Operational Check-Out
Reference 260-05-020, Hydraulic Brakes

No clearance between brake Adjust the brake pedals. See Reference 260-15-070, “Adjusting the
Brakes lock up
pedals and brake valve plunger Brake Pedals and Switches” .
Brake pedals drop quickly;

Bleed the brakes. See Reference 260-15-060, “Bleeding the Brakes”
rapid pumping can build Air in brake system
.
up pressure
Brake pedals drop quickly;

even rapid pumping does Loose connections, brake lines or
Tighten the components involved, or replace them with new ones
not build up any lasting bleed screws
pressure
Recondition the rear brakes. See reference “Removing the Rear

Defective rear brake sealing rings
Brakes” at Section 60, Group 20 in the relevant "Repair" Manual.
Recondition the brake valve. See reference “Disassembling the

Leaks inside the brake valve Brake Valve” at Section 60, Group 15 in the relevant "Repair"
Manual.
Both brake pedals stay up

Recondition the brake valve. See reference “Disassembling the
when applied but one Defective compensation valve in
Brake Valve” at Section 60, Group 15 in the relevant "Repair"
pedal drops to floor when brake valve
Manual.
applied alone
Worn rear brake components or

Brakes actuate normally Recondition the rear brakes. See reference “Removing the Rear
contamination between
but lack effect Brakes” at Section 60, Group 20 in the relevant "Repair" Manual.
components
Loud noise when braking Recondition the rear brakes. See reference “Removing the Rear
Worn rear brake components
and lack of braking effect Brakes” at Section 60, Group 20 in the relevant "Repair" Manual.
Unusual “rattle” when Incorrect or contaminated Change hydraulic oil. See reference “Capacities” at Section 10,
braking hydraulic oil Group 05 in the relevant "Repair" Manual.
Check valve of hydraulic trailer Replace the check valve. See reference “Changing the Trailer Brake
brake valve defective Valve” at Section 60, Group 30 in the relevant "Repair" Manual.
Reference 260-05-030, Handbrake

Inadequate braking Adjust the handbrake. See Reference 260-15-080, “Checking the Handbrake”
Handbrake not set correctly
effect .
Recondition the handbrake. See reference “Removing the Handbrake” at

Brake disks on handbrake worn
Section 60, Group 25 in the relevant "Repair" Manual.
Reference 260-05-040, Hydraulic Trailer Brake

Inadequate braking Check the trailer brake valve. See Reference 260-15-090, “Checking the
Insufficient oil pressure, or no
effect, or no braking Trailer Brake Valve” . Do a hydraulic test. See Reference 270-15-020 ,
oil pressure at all
effect at all Checking the PC Hydraulic System.
Clean the trailer brake valve or replace it with a new one. See reference
Trailer brake valve clogged or
“Hydraulic Trailer Brake - Summary of References” at Section 60, Group 30
defective
in the relevant "Repair" Manual.
Failure of the trailer brake Recondition the trailer brake.
Trailer brake and tractor Clean the trailer brake valve or replace it with a new one. See reference
Trailer brake valve clogged or
brake not working “Hydraulic Trailer Brake - Summary of References” at Section 60, Group 30
defective
together in the relevant "Repair" Manual.
Unusual “rattle” when Check valve of hydraulic Replace the check valve. See reference “Changing the Check Valve” at
braking trailer brake valve defective Section 60, Group 30 in the relevant "Repair" Manual.
Reference 260-05-050, Air Brakes

Operating pressure too Test the air brake system. See Reference 260-15-120, “Checking the System
Leaks in air brake system
low for Leaks” .
Compressor drive belt Replace belt. See reference Changing the Drive Belt at Section 30, Group 20
defective in the relevant "Repair" Manual.
Replace compressor. See reference “Changing the Compressor” at Section

Compressor defective
60, Group 35 in the relevant "Repair" Manual.
Operating pressure drops Test the air brake system. See Reference 260-15-120, “Checking the System
Leaks in air brake system
too rapidly for Leaks” .
Pressure not correct when Handbrake incorrectly Adjust the handbrake. See Reference 260-15-170, “Adjusting the Handbrake
handbrake is applied adjusted and Air Brakes” .

Reference 260-10-001, Safety Information
CAUTION:
Whenever performing these checks, always observe the relevant safety precautions. See Section 210,
Group 05.
When doing the checks listed below, be sure to check all functions; this will draw attention to any faults that are present.
IMPORTANT:
they are listed here. Even if you do encounter a fault, carry on with the operational checks just the same.
For further information, see Reference 210-15-001 , General References (Summary).
Reference 260-10-010, Steering Check
CAUTION:
Always perform this test out of doors and ensure that no lives are put at risk.
[1] - Make sure tire inflation is correct, front ballasting is not excessive and implements are properly fitted and adjusted.
[2] - Check torque of wheel bolts and rim screws.
[3] - Inspect complete system for leakage. Locate the source of leakage and make any necessary repairs.
[4] - Check the level of the hydraulic oil.
[5] - Drive the tractor onto a level surface and stop it there.
[6] - Run the engine.
[7] - Turn the steering wheel several times in each direction.
It should be easy to turn the steering wheel smoothly in both directions. The steering lock position must be distinct.
→NOTE:
If the oil is very cold, it will have an adverse effect on this test.
[8] - Drive the tractor with front-wheel drive engaged and again with it disengaged, turning the steering wheel several times in
both directions. There should be no difference in steering characteristics when front-wheel drive is engaged.
There should be no need to correct the position of the steering wheel while the tractor is driving straight ahead.
In faults are evident, see Reference 260-15-040, “Checking the Steering System” .
Section 260 - STEERING AND BRAKES Group 15: Tests and Adjustments
Reference 260-10-020, Brake Check

[1] - Press both brake pedals together.
[2] - Press each brake pedal separately.
The brake pedals must not sink of their own accord.
If the brake pedals do sink excessively, turn to Reference 260-15-050, “Checking the Brake System” . Ignore Point 3 for the
time being.
If the brake pedals behave normally, continue the check procedure from the next Point.
[3] -
CAUTION:
Always perform this test out of doors and ensure that no lives are put at risk.
Drive the tractor and actuate the brakes several times.
The brakes should respond safely and in a normal fashion. The tractor must not pull to one side.
If the brakes should “rattle” in an unusual manner, check the hydraulic oil and change if necessary. See reference “Capacities”
at Section 10, Group 05 in the relevant "Repair" manual. If the hydraulic oil is OK, test the check valve in the hydraulic trailer
brake valve. See Reference 260-15-090, “Checking the Trailer Brake Valve” .
If the brake effect is insufficient, loud noises occur during braking or the brakes work on one side only (pulling the tractor to
one side), the brakes on the rear wheels need to be repaired. See reference “Removing the Rear Brakes” at Section 60, Group
20 in the relevant "Repair" manual.
Checking the handbrake
Apply handbrake.
The handbrake lever must engage in the 4th notch at a force of 100 to 150 N (22 to 34 lb).
In the event of a fault, adjust the handbrake; see “Adjusting the Handbrake” at Section 60, Group 25 in the relevant "Repair"
manual.
Air brake system check (filling pressure and leak test)
[1] - Run engine at a speed of 1200 rpm until the pressure control valve is shut off.
[2] - Wait until enough time has elapsed for the pressure control valve to stabilize. It takes at least one minute for the valve to
stabilize. Now read the operating pressure on the gauge located in the cab.
Pressure should be between 790 and 830 kPa (7.9 and 8.3 bar; 115 and 120 psi).
[3] - Shut off the engine. Check the pressure reading again after 10 minutes.
Pressure drop within a period of 10 minutes must not exceed 16 kPa (0.16 bar; 2.3 psi).
If the operating pressure is not reached or the pressure drop is too large, find the cause as outlined in Group 15. See Reference
260-15-001 , Steering and Brakes, Test and Adjustments — Summary of References.

Reference 260-15-001, Tests and Adjustments — Summary of
References
Reference 260-15-010 , Special Tools
Reference 260-15-020 , Connecting SensoControl Test Equipment
Reference 260-15-030 , Specifications
Reference 260-15-040 , Checking the Steering System
Reference 260-15-050 , Checking the Brake System
Reference 260-15-060 , Bleeding the Brakes
Reference 260-15-070 , Brake Pedal and Switch Adjustment
Reference 260-15-080 , Checking the Handbrake
Reference 260-15-090 , Checking the Trailer Brake Valve
Reference 260-15-100 , Adjusting the Trailer Brake Valve
Reference 260-15-110 , Checking the Air Brake (Visual Inspection)
Reference 260-15-120 , Checking the System for Leaks
Reference 260-15-130 , Checking the “Supply” Coupling End
Reference 260-15-150 , Checking the Dual-Line Brake
Reference 260-15-160 , Checking the Single-Line Brake
Reference 260-15-170 , Adjusting the Handbrake and when Air Brakes are Equipped
Reference 260-15-180 , Checking the Pressure-Regulating Valve and Air-Brake Fill Time
→NOTE:
Tool Catalog (MTC).
Pressure Gauge Set
FKM10002
FKM10002
Check brake plunger travel and adjust brake switch (non-power brake valve). Trailer brake valve check
Fitting
KJD10128
KJD10128
Check brake plunger travel and adjust brake switch (non-power brake valve).
Connector
[ available as spare part ]
AR52361
AR52361
Checking the trailer brake valve
Hydraulic test kit
KJD10194
KJD10194
Checking the air brakes
FKM10470
FKM10470
“SensoControl” measurement unit for hydraulic system pressure testing.
“SensoControl” measurement unit consists of:
FKM10470-1 0-1000 bar pressure sensor
FKM10470-2 0-100 bar pressure sensor (2 used)
FKM10470-3 adapter (3 used)
FKM10470-4 “Serviceman” hand gauge
FKM10470-5 power supply
FKM10471
FKM10471
“SensoControl” measurement unit for hydraulic system pressure testing.
“SensoControl” measurement unit consists of:
FKM10470 pressure measuring system (stage 1)
FKM10471-1 printer cable
FKM10471-2 thermal printer
FKM10471-3 PC adapter with software
Temperature sensor
FKM10472-4
FKM10472-4
Oil temperature measurements in connection with pressure measuring system (stage 1) and pressure measuring system (stage
2).
Reference 260-15-020, Connecting SensoControl Test Equipment
Connecting SensoControl testing equipment
LEGEND:
A FKM10470-1 0-1000 bar pressure sensor
B FKM10470-2 0-100 bar pressure sensor
C FKM10472-4 temperature sensor
D FKM10472-1 through-flow turbine
E FKM10470-4 hand-held measuring unit
F FKM10471-2 thermal printer
G FKM10471-3 PC adapter
P Pressure ports
T Temperature port
Q Volume measurement port
Connect the pressure sensors (A) or (B) with adapter FKM10470-3 to the pressure port (P) male coupler tips on the tractor.
Connect the thermal printer (F) or PC adapter (G) to the hand-held measuring unit (E).
Connect the temperature sensor (C) to the oil filter head.
If needed, connect the flow turbine (D).

Hydraulic Brakes
Attaching the brake valve Torque 50 N˙m
37 lb-ft
Adjusting the brake pedals Brake plunger/pedal clearance 0.15—0.20 mm
0.006—0.008 in.
Point at which brake switch trips Pedal travel 10—14 mm
0.40—0.55 in.
Handbrake
Adjusting the handbrake lever Force to reach 4th notch on gear segment 100—150 N
22—34 lb
Hydraulic Trailer Brake

Maximum brake pressure Pressure 12000—14000 kPa
120—140 bar
1740—2031 psi
Air Brakes
Operating pressure (pressure downstream of pressure regulating valve) Pressure 790—830 kPa
7.9—8.3 bar;
115—120 psi
Leak test Pressure drop within a period of 10 min. max. 16 kPa
0.16 bar
2.3 psi
Checking the dual-line brakes Pressure with brake pedal or handbrake lever applied 700—740 kPa
7.0—7.4 bar
102—107 psi
Checking the single-line brakes Pressure with brake pedal and handbrake lever released 500—540 kPa
5.0—5.4 bar
73—78 psi)
approx. 2.25 minutes

Time taken to fill the 15-liter (3.96 US gal.) compressed air tank Time
at rated engine speed
Reference 260-15-040, Checking the Steering System

Introductory checks
( 1 ) Introductory checks for transmission and hydraulic diagnosis
Action:
Do Reference 255-05-001 , "Introductory Checks for Transmission and Hydraulic Diagnosis".
→NOTE:
Do the introductory checks for transmission and hydraulic diagnosis and check the basic functions of the
hydraulic system.
Result:
YES: GO TO 2
NO:Recondition as needed before beginning with step 2.
( 2 ) Check mechanical components
Action:
2.1 Check that wheels turn smoothly; check for free play.
1. Engine off.
2. Jack up front end of tractor.
3. Turn both wheels and check radial run-out, lateral run-out and free play.
Result:
YES:GO TO 2.2
NO:See Reference "Reconditioning the Planetary Drive" in the relevant Component Technical Manual for front-wheel drive
axles. This description also includes the wheel bearing repair. Repair failures.
Action:
2.2 Check free play of swivel bearings and tie rods.
1. Engine off.
3. Check swivel bearings and tie rods for free play.
Result:
YES:GO TO 2.3
NO:See References "Reconditioning the Knuckle Housing and Kingpin" and "Removing Tie Rods" in the relevant Component
Technical Manual for front-wheel drive axles. Repair failures.
Action:
2.3 Check the steering cylinder for mechanical failures.
CAUTION:
Handbrake engaged and transmission in neutral.
Short circuit the hydraulic hoses
1. Engine off.
3. Disconnect hydraulic hoses (A) and (B) and then connect them as shown.
4. Turn the wheels by hand in each direction and check for unusual resistance.
Result:
YES:GO TO 2.4
NO:See Reference "Reconditioning the Steering Cylinder" in the relevant Component Technical Manual for front-wheel drive
axles. Repair failures.
Action:
2.4 Check the steering column and steering valve for mechanical failures.
Short circuit the hydraulic hoses
1. Engine off.
3. Disconnect hydraulic hoses (A) and (B) and then connect them as shown.
4. Turn steering wheel in each direction.
5. Check steering column and steering valve for unusual resistance or sticking.
Result:
YES:GO TO 2.5
NO:Recondition faulty sub-assemblies or replace them with new ones. See Reference "Removing the Steering Valve" in Section
60, Group 05 of the relevant Repair Manual.
Action:
2.5 Check the leaf springs of the steering valve.
CAUTION:
Hydraulic connection of steering cylinder
1. Engine off.
2. Lower front end of tractor to the ground.
3. Connect hydraulic hoses (A) and (B) to steering cylinder and bleed air from system. To do this, run engine and turn
steering wheel left and right several times.
4. Engine off.
5. Turn steering wheel until resistance is felt, then release steering wheel.
6. The steering wheel must turn back through 8° within two seconds. This causes the spool inside the steering valve to go to
its neutral position.
→NOTE: To test leaf springs, turn steering wheel in both directions with engine off.
Result:
YES: GO TO 3
NO:Replace steering valve. See Reference "Removing the Steering Valve" in Section 60, Group 05 of the relevant Repair
Manual.
( 3 ) Check hydraulic components
Action:
3.1 Check steering system for internal leakage.
CAUTION:

2. Turn steering wheel until it contacts stop.Then use a torque wrench to turn the wheel beyond the stop with a force of 10
N˙m (7.5 lb-ft) for one minute.During this time, the steering wheel may be rotated through not more than 4 complete
rotations.
Result:
YES:GO TO 3.3
NO:GO TO 3.2
Action:
3.2 Check steering valve for internal leakage.
Disconnect hydraulic hoses and seal open ends
1. Shut off engine.
2. Disconnect hydraulic hoses (A) and (B) from the steering cylinder.
3. Seal the hydraulic hoses so that they are pressure-tight.
4. Turn steering wheel until it contacts stop and use a torque wrench to turn the wheel against the stop with a force of 10
N˙m (7.5 lb-ft) for one minute.During this time, the steering wheel may be rotated through not more than 4 complete
rotations.
Result:
YES:GO TO 3.3
NO:Replace steering valve. See Reference "Removing the Steering Valve" in Section 60, Group 05 of the relevant Repair
Manual.
Action:
3.3 Check steering cylinder for internal leakage.
Turn Steering Wheel
Disconnect Hose
Seal line
1. Turn wheels fully to the left.

2. Shut off engine.
3. Disconnect hydraulic hose (A) and place it in a suitable container.
4. Seal the end of the line as shown so that it is pressure-tight.
5. Start the engine and turn the steering wheel to the right against the stop. Then use a torque wrench to turn the wheel
beyond the stop with a force of 10 N˙m (7.5 lb-ft).It is normal that a small amount of oil escapes at the beginning of this
test. Later, no oil must emerge from the steering cylinder.
Disconnect left hose (viewed in direction of travel)
Repeat test with steering to the right. To do this, reverse steering direction and reconnect right hose (viewed in direction of
travel). Then disconnect left hose (B).
Result:
YES: GO TO 4
NO:Recondition the steering cylinder. See Reference "Reconditioning the Steering Cylinder" in the relevant Component
Technical Manual for front-wheel drive axles.
( 4 ) Hydraulic system diagnostics
Action:
→NOTE:
If no failure was found at this stage but the problem still appears, check the entire hydraulic system for
failures.
See Reference 270-15-020 , "Checking the PC Hydraulic System".
To prevent malfunctions, meet the following requirements when installing lines or hoses.
Lines and hoses:
must be free of tension

must not come into contact with moving parts
must not be bent or crushed
must not chafe against sharp edges
Result:
YES:End of check.
Reference 260-15-050, Checking the Brake System

Unlock the brake pedals.
Press both brake pedals together.
The brake pedals must not sink of their own accord.
If both brake pedals sink excessively, determine the cause by performing the following checks.
Checking Brakes for Air in the System
Rapidly depress both brake pedals several times (pump pedals) and try to build up a consistent level of pressure.
If pressure can be built up, bleed brakes.
If a consistent level of pressure cannot be established, check brakes for external leakage.
Brake External Leak Check
Check for signs of external leaks at the brake valve, brake lines, threaded connections, bleed screws or trailer brake valve (if
equipped).
Repair any leaks found.
If no leaks are found, check the brake valve for internal leaks.
Brake Valve Internal Leak Check
[1] - Disconnect the brake lines from the brake valve.
[2] - Seal off the outlet valve connections.
[3] - Press both brake pedals together.
[4] - Press each brake pedal separately.
If the brake pedals no longer go to the floor after the outlet valves are sealed off, the rear wheel brake sealing rings require
replacement. See reference “Rear Wheel Brakes” at Section 60, Group 20 in the relevant "Repair" Manual.
If the brake pedals drop to the floor, the brake valve should be repaired. See reference Disassembling the Brake Valve at
Section 60, Group 15 in the relevant "Repair" Manual.
Reference 260-15-060, Bleeding the Brakes
CAUTION:
It is vital to take action to prevent the tractor from moving when you bleed air from the brakes. Never
operate the rockshaft or selective control valves.
Open and close the bleed valves on the compressed air brake only when the engine is shut off.
Before commencing the procedure outlined below, make sure that the person in the tractor is properly
informed.
CAUTION:
Always follow the steps described here precisely. This is the only way of assuring that the brake system
has been correctly bled.
IMPORTANT:
To avoid oil foaming while bleeding, the procedure should not be started after fast driving, working with
hydraulic implements or carrying out hydraulic tests. After such operation the tractor should be allowed
to stand for one hour to allow the oil to lose any accumulated foam.
→NOTE:
A second person is required to perform this job.
Bleeding sequence:
Without trailer brake:
1. Left rear brake (press left pedal)

2. Right rear brake (press right pedal)
With hydraulic trailer brake:
1. Left rear brake (press left pedal)

2. Trailer brake valve (press both pedals)
With air brake system:
1. Trailer control valve, rear bleed screw (press both pedals)

2. Trailer control valve, front bleed screw (press both pedals)
Bleeding the brake system
Bleeding the rear brakes (left)
Bleeding the air brakes
Bleeding the hydraulic trailer brake valve
[1] - As shown in the relevant illustration, slide a transparent bleed tube over each of the appropriate bleed screws. Place the
other ends of the bleed tubes in the oil filler neck.
Slacken off the bleed screw of the r.h. brake circuit as stipulated in "Bleeding sequence".
[3] -
IMPORTANT:
When bleeding, be sure to turn the steering wheel slowly and evenly. Otherwise the oil in the reservoir
may turn to foam and cause air to get into the brake system.
Turn the steering wheelslowly (!) and evenly to both directions but not to full lock and actuate the right brake pedalslowly
until the oil emerging from the brake is free of bubbles. Tighten the bleed screw with the brake pedal depressed.
[4] - Depress the left brake pedal and hold it at its mid-position.
[5] - Pump the right brake pedaluntil pressure is developed . Hold the right pedal down and take all the pressure off the left
pedal.
[6] - Open the bleed screw with the brake pedal depressed. The pedal will now drop to the floor. Tighten the bleed screw with
the brake pedal depressed. Repeat this procedure at least five times.
[7] - Repeat this procedure for the left brake circuit.
[8] - Shut off the engine and actuate each brake pedal several times (separately!) with the engine shut off. There must be
perceptible (increasing) resistance before each pedal reaches its limit of travel.
IMPORTANT:
If pedal does sink noticeably after resistance has been reached, leaks in the brake system may be the
cause.
[9] - Do an operational check on the brakes. See Reference 260-10-020 , ”Brake Check”.
Reference 260-15-070, Adjusting the Brake Pedals and Switches

Adjusting the brake pedals
Adjusting pedal play
Adjusting pedal play at the screws
[1] - Remove the panels from the steering column. See reference “Removing the Cowl Panels” at Section 40, Group 25 in the
relevant "Repair" Manual.
[2] - Remove the brake switch unit.
[3] - Lock the brake pedals together.
[4] - Measure pedal play at both pistons.
Pedal play must be between 0.15 and 0.20 mm (0.006 and 0.008 in.).
[5] -
IMPORTANT:
Never adjust the pedals singly. The only way to adjust the pedals and ensure that the brakes operate
properly is to lock them together.
Adjust pedal play at screws (A).
→NOTE:
If the prescribed degree of play cannot be obtained at both pedals, one pedal may have a greater play.
[6] - Install the brake switch unit.
Adjusting the brake switches
Brake switch adjustment screws
[1] - Make sure that the brake pedals are adjusted correctly.
[2] - Unlock the brake pedals.
[3] - Turn ignition switch on.
[4] - Go into the diagnostic mode. See Reference 245-05-001 , “General Operation and Entering the Program Mode”.
[5] - Access the basic control unit (BCU), and confirm.
[6] - Access address 005 (beep mode).
[7] - Depress the left brake pedal by 5 mm and turn adjusting screw (A) until the audible switch point is reached.
[8] - Counterlock adjusting screw (A).
[9] - Depress the right brake pedal by 5 mm and turn adjusting screw (B) until the audible switch point is reached.
[10] - Counterlock adjusting screw (B).
[11] - Check the brake switch:
When the brake pedals are depressed, the audible switch point should not be reached until the pedal has travelled approx. 5
mm.
The brake lights must light up when the switch point is reached.
[12] - In reverse order, re-install the steering column panels. See reference “Removing the Cowl Panels” at Section 40, Group
25 in the relevant "Repair" Manual.
[13] - Do an operational check on the brakes. See Reference 260-10-020, “Brake Check” .
Reference 260-15-080, Checking the Handbrake

Checking the Handbrake
Pull the handbrake lever.
The handbrake lever must engage in the 4th notch at a force of 100 to 150 N (22 to 34 lb).
Adjust handbrake as required.
Handbrake adjustment
Handbrake adjustment
[1] - Release the handbrake fully.
[2] - Adjust the handbrake by turning adjusting nut (A).
→NOTE:
Turning the adjusting nut outward makes the handbrake looser. Turning the adjusting nut inward makes
the handbrake tighter.
[3] - Check the handbrake again.
IMPORTANT:
On tractors equipped with air brakes, it is vitally important to "Adjust the Handbrake and Air Brakes".
See Reference 260-15-170, in this group.
Reference 260-15-090, Checking the Trailer Brake Valve

Ascertain pressure ratio
Trailer brake valve
Identifying the pressure ratio
At the location indicated by the arrow is a figure showing the ratio of pilot pressure to brake pressure at the coupler.
The following example explains the ratio of pilot pressure to brake pressure:Pilot pressure x pressure ratio = Brake
pressure
Pilot pressure is 1000 kPa (10 bar; 145 psi) and the number stamped on the trailer brake valve is "6.". This means that brake
pressure at the coupling is 6000 kPa (60 bar, 870 psi). If the number is "9", it would be 9000 kPa (90 bar; 1310 psi).
Checking the trailer brake valve

LEGEND:
A Pressure gauge FKM10207
B Adapter FKM10302
C Pressure hose FKM10209

D Connector FKM10303
E Connector FKM10305
F Internal half coupler
G Quick coupler socket
H Pressure gauge FKM10205

Trailer brake valve components I Connector FKM10303

J Fitting KJD10128
Install Pressure Gauge
IMPORTANT:
To ensure proper function of the trailer brake valve, the tractor brakes must be in full working order.
Make sure that hydraulic brakes and trailer brake valve have been bled properly, and that there are no
leaks in the brake system.
[1] - For brake pressure check: Connect pressure gauge (A) to coupler plug.
[2] - For pilot pressure check: Remove bleed screw from trailer brake valve. Install ring L76408 on fitting KJD10128 (J). Screw
in fitting and connect pressure gauge (H).
[5] - Read pressure with brake pedal not depressed.
With brake pedal not depressed, no pressure should be shown!
[6] - If transmission ratio of trailer brake valve is 1:6
Depress the right brake pedal until a pilot pressure of 930 - 1070 kPa (9.3 - 10.7 bar; 134.9 - 155.2 psi) is obtained. The brake
pressure at the coupler must now be 6000 kPa (60 bar; 870 psi).
Repeat the test with the following values:
Pilot pressure at brake valve: 1700 kPa (17 bar; 246 psi).
Brake pressure at coupler: 9400—10800 kPa (94—108 bar; 1364—1568 psi)
Maximum pressure test:
Pilot pressure at brake valve: 2000—2300 kPa (20—23 bar; 290—330 psi)
If the brake pressure at the coupler does not correspond to the specification quoted, the trailer brake valve must be adjusted.
See Reference 260-15-100, "Adjusting the Trailer Brake Valve".
→NOTE:
Incorrect measurement results are often caused by inexact measurement devices. Therefore, always
ensure that pressure gauges and sensors operate properly. Pay attention to the measurement tolerances
given by the relevant manufacturer.
[7] - If transmission ratio of trailer brake valve is 1:9
Depress the right brake pedal until a pilot pressure of 1100 kPa (11 bar; 160 psi) is obtained at the trailer brake valve.
Perform the maximum pressure test at the following pressure.
Pilot pressure at brake valve: 1400 kPa (14 bars; 203 psi)
If the brake pressure at the coupler does not correspond to the specification quoted, the trailer brake valve must be adjusted.
See Reference 260-15-100, "Adjusting the Trailer Brake Valve".
→NOTE:
[8] - If pressure ratio of trailer brake valve is 1:11.6
Depress the right brake pedal until a pilot pressure of 900 kPa (9 bar; 130 psi) is obtained at the trailer brake valve.
Perform the maximum pressure test at the following pressure.
Pilot pressure at brake valve: 1100 kPa (11 bars; 160 psi)
IMPORTANT:
If the brake pressure at the coupling does not correspond to the specification quoted, system pressure
must be checked. See Reference 270-15-072 , "Checking the System Pressure". If system pressure is not
OK, the trailer brake valve must be replaced.
→NOTE:
Reference 260-15-100, Adjusting the Trailer Brake Valve
Actuating the brake pedal
Adjusting the valve
→NOTE:
The trailer brake valve with a pressure ratio of 1:11.6 cannot be adjusted.
→NOTE:
Bleed the air from the brakes; see Reference 260-15-060 in this Group.
Connect pressure gauge as shown in Reference 260-15-090, "Checking the Trailer Brake Valve".
→NOTE:
Oil temperature must be at approx. of 55°C (120°F).
[2] - Depress r.h. brake pedal until pilot pressure (see chart) has been reached.
[3] - Use hex socket wrench to slacken off the valve pin (A) by about 1 to 2 turns, and flush for approx. 10 seconds while
holding nut (B).
[4] - Release the brakes.
CAUTION:
Do NOT screw the valve pin as far as it can go, as this may damage the valve seat.
[5] - Depress r.h. brake pedal until pilot pressure (see chart) has been reached.
[6] - Screw in the valve pin (by about 1 to 2 turns) until the corresponding brake pressure (see chart) has been obtained.
[7] - Release the brakes.
[8] - Check that the correct pilot pressure is achieved at the correct brake pressure (see table below).
Ratio at trailer brake valve
Ratio
[ See reference "Ascertaining the Pressure Ratio" in Section 260, Group 20. ]
1:6 1:9 1:11.6
(pilot and brake pressure)
1700 kPa 1100 kPa 900 kPa

Pilot pressure 17 bar 11 bar 9 bar
247 psi 160 psi 130 psi
9400—11000 kPa 9500—10800 kPa 9600—10900 kPa

Brake pressure
94—110 bar 95—108 bar 96—109 bar
(at coupler)
1365—1600 psi 1378—1566 psi 1392—1580 psi
If the brake pressure does not correspond to the specification quoted, screw the valve pin in or out (see the test at point 6).
→NOTE:
The trailer brake valve with a pressure ratio of 1:11.6 cannot be adjusted.
[9] - Lock the hex. nut and install protective cap.
Reference 260-15-110, Checking the Air Brake

Preliminary checks
( 1 ) Visual inspection of brake system
Action:
Check all components (V-belt, handbrake linkage, compressor, lines, valves, couplers etc.) of air brake system for damage,
chafing, corrosion, brittleness, looseness and leakage.
Result:
YES: GO TO 2
NO:Correct any problems or replace parts as necessary. See relevant “Repair” manual, Section 60.
( 2 ) Check the red “supply” coupling end
Action:
LEGEND:
A KJD10194-1 pressure gauge
B KJD10194-2 hose
C KJD10194-5 coupler (red)
D KJD10194-7 test connector
Checking supply (red)
→NOTE:
[1] - Connect the KJD10194 pressure gauge set to the red “Supply” coupler.
[2] - Run the engine until the air-brake system is at its operating pressure, then compare the result of the measurement with
the specification.
Pressure at the “Supply” coupler (red) Pressure 7.9 to 8.3 bar
115 to 120 psi
Result:
YES:Proceed with check.
NO:If prescribed pressure is not reached, check the system for leaks. GO TO 3
( 3 ) Checking the air-brake system for leaks
Action:
LEGEND:
B KJD10194-2 hose
C KJD10194-5 coupling end (red)
D KJD10194-7 test fitting
Check pressure
[1] - Connect the KJD10194 pressure gauge set to the red coupler.
To activate the air brake, pull the handbrake to at least the fifth detent position.
[2] - Run engine at a speed of 1200 rpm until the pressure-regulating valve shuts off and maximum pressure is achieved.
[3] - Shut off engine.
[4] - Compare the pressure readings with the specifications.
Residual pressure after one minute = more than 7 bar

Residual pressure after two minutes = more than 6.5 bar
Residual pressure after ten minutes = more than 6.3 bar
Result:
YES: GO TO 4
NO:If pressure drops too fast, check all connections for leaks by applying soap.
( 4 ) Check the dual-line brake
Action:
LEGEND:
B KJD10194-2 hose
C KJD10194-4 coupler (yellow)
Checking the dual-line brake (yellow)
→NOTE:
Bleed the brakes, see Reference 260-15-060 , “Bleeding the Brakes”.

[1] - Make sure that the hydraulic brakes and the trailer control valve are bled correctly. Make sure there are no leaks
anywhere in the brake system.
[2] - Connect the KJD10194 pressure gauge set to the coupler (yellow).
[3] - Run engine until the air brake system reaches its operating pressure.
[4] - Read pressure with handbrake and foot brakes not applied.
With neither footbrake nor handbrake applied, the pressure reading at the yellow coupling end should be zero.
[5] - Apply foot brakes and read pressure.
With brake pedal fully depressed, pressure at the yellow coupling end should be between 6.5 and 8.1 bar (94 and 118 psi).
[6] - Release foot brakes. No pressure should be registered any more.
[7] - Apply handbrake and read pressure.
Pressure at the yellow coupling end should be between 6.5 and 8.1 bar (94 and 118 psi) after the handbrake reaches its first
detent position; pressure must be between 6.5 and 8.1 bar (94 and 118 psi) by the third detent position.
[8] - Release the handbrake fully. No pressure should be registered any more.
Result:
YES: GO TO 5
NO:See Reference 260-15-170, “Adjusting the Handbrake when Air Brakes are Equipped”.
( 5 ) Check the single-line brake (if equipped)
Action:
LEGEND:
B KJD10194-2 hose
C KJD10194-3 coupler (black)
Check the single-line brake
→NOTE:
[2] - Connect pressure test kit KJD10194 to single-line air brake coupler (black).
With neither foot brake nor handbrake applied, pressure at the black coupler should be between 5.0 and 5.4 bar (73 and 78
psi).
[5] - Apply foot brakes and read pressure.With the brake pedal depressed fully, the pressure reading at the black coupling end
should be zero.
[6] - Release foot brakes. Pressure must now be between 5.0 and 5.4 bar (73 and 78 psi) again.
[7] - Apply handbrake and read pressure.There should be NO pressure at the black coupling end when the handbrake reaches
its first detent position; there must be NO pressure by the third detent position.
[8] - Release the handbrake fully. Pressure must now be between 5.0 and 5.4 bar (73 and 78 psi) again.
Result:
YES: GO TO 6
NO:See Reference 260-15-170, “Adjusting the Handbrake when Air Brakes are Equipped”.
( 6 ) Check the pressure-regulating valve and air-brake fill time
Action:
[1] -
CAUTION:
Pressure must be relieved at the compressed-air tank before the pressure gauge is connected.
LEGEND:
B KJD10194-2 hose
Checking the pressure-regulating valve
Connect the KJD10194 pressure gauge set to the compressed-air tank.
[2] - Start the engine and a stopwatch simultaneously and set engine speed to 2300 rpm. Observe the pressure gauge and
record the time taken to reach the pressure cut-off point (when pressure stops rising).
Pressure cut-off point Pressure 790 to 830 kPa (7.9 to 8.3 bar; 115 to 120 psi)
Time taken for filling Time 35 seconds maximum
[3] - Set the engine speed to 1000 rpm. Bring the pressure down as far as possible by repeatedly actuating the foot brake.
Observe the pressure gauge to determine the pressure at which the pressure-regulating valve switches on.
To prevent a further drop in pressure, the pressure-regulating valve must switch on before pressure reaches 5.9 bar (86 psi).
Result:
YES:End of check.
NO:In event of malfunction, “Replace the Pressure-Regulating Valve” , see Section 60, Group 35.
Reference 260-15-110, Checking the Air Brake (Visual Inspection)

Check all components (V-belt, handbrake linkage, compressor, lines, valves, couplers etc.) of air brake system for damage,
chafing, corrosion, brittleness, looseness and leakage.
Correct any problems or replace parts as necessary. See relevant “Repair” manual, Section 60.
Reference 260-15-120, Checking the System for Leaks

[1] -
LEGEND:
B KJD10194-2 hose
C KJD10194-5 coupling end (red)
D KJD10194-7 test fitting
Check pressure
Connect the KJD10194 pressure tester unit to the red coupler
Pressure test kit
KJD10194
Checking the air brake system for leaks
To trigger the air brake, pull the handbrake to at least the fifth detent position.
[2] - Run engine at a speed of 1200 rpm until the pressure-regulating valve shuts off and maximum pressure is achieved.
[3] - Shut off engine.
[4] - Compare the pressure readings with the specifications.
Residual pressure after one minute = more than 7 bar

Residual pressure after two minutes = more than 6.5 bar
Residual pressure after ten minutes = more than 6.3 bar
[5] - If pressure drops too fast, check all connections for leaks by applying soap.
Reference 260-15-130, Checking the Coupling End (Supply)

LEGEND:
B KJD10194-2 hose
C KJD10194-5 coupler (red)
Checking supply (red)
→NOTE:
[1] - Connect the KJD10194 pressure test kit to the red "Supply" coupler.
[2] - Run the engine until the air brake system reaches its operating pressure.
CAUTION:
Pressure at the coupling end should be between 790 and 830 kPa (7.9 and 8.3 bar; 115 and 120 psi).
[3] - If the prescribed pressure is not reached, the system must be checked for leaks. See Reference 260-15-120, “Checking
the System for Leaks”.
Reference 260-15-150, Checking the Dual-Line Brake

LEGEND:
B KJD10194-2 hose
C KJD10194-4 coupler (yellow)
Checking the dual-line brake (yellow)
→NOTE:
→NOTE:
[2] -
Pressure test kit
KJD10194
Pressure testing (dual-line brakes)
Connect the KJD10194 pressure gauge set to the yellow coupler.
With neither footbrake nor handbrake applied, the pressure reading at the yellow coupling end should be zero.
[5] - Apply foot brakes and read pressure.
With the brake pedal depressed fully, pressure at the yellow coupler should be between 650 and 810 kPa (6.5 and 8.1 bar; 94
and 118 psi).
[7] - Release foot brakes. No pressure should be registered any more.
[8] - Apply handbrake and read pressure.

With handbrake applied, pressure at yellow coupling end should be between 650 and 810 kPa (6.5 and 8.1 bar; 94 and 118
psi).
→NOTE:
The prescribed pressure should be available at the coupling end when the handbrake reaches its first
detent position; it must be available by the third detent position.
[9] - Release the handbrake fully. No pressure should be registered any more.
If necessary, see Reference 260-15-170, “Adjusting the Handbrake when Air Brakes are Equipped”.
[10] - Do an operational check on the brakes. See Reference 260-10-020 , “Brake Check”.
Reference 260-15-160, Checking the Single-Line Brake

LEGEND:
B KJD10194-2 hose
C KJD10194-3 coupler (black)
Check the single-line brake
→NOTE:
→NOTE:
[2] -
Pressure test kit
KJD10194
Pressure testing (dual-line brakes)
Connect pressure test kit KJD10194 to single-line air brake coupler (black).
With neither foot brake nor handbrake applied, pressure at the black coupler should be between 500 and 540 kPa (5.0 and 5.4
bar; 73 and 78 psi).
[6] - Apply foot brakes and read pressure.With the brake pedal depressed fully, the pressure reading at the black coupling end
should be zero.
[7] - Release foot brakes. Now pressure should once again be between 500 and 540 kPa (5.0 and 5.4 bar; 73 and 78 psi).
[8] - Apply handbrake and read pressure.With the handbrake applied, the pressure reading at the black coupling end should
also be zero.
→NOTE:
There should be NO pressure at the coupling end when the handbrake reaches its first detent position;
there MUST be no pressure by the third detent position.
[9] - Release the handbrake fully. Now pressure should once again be between 500 and 540 kPa (5.0 and 5.4 bar; 73 and 78
psi).
If necessary, see Reference 260-15-170, “Adjusting the Handbrake when Air Brakes are Equipped”.
Reference 260-15-170, Adjusting the Handbrake when Air Brakes are

Equipped
Air brake system, adjusting handbrake
IMPORTANT:
System pressure must be at least 7 bar (100 psi) before the compressed-air checks are started, and it
must remain above 7 bar (100 psi) for the duration of the checks. If necessary, start the engine in order
to fill the system.
→NOTE:
[1] - With dual-line brakes:
a. Release the handbrake fully.

b. Keep turning the adjusting nut (A) until there is no longer any pressure registered at the yellow coupler.
→NOTE:
Another way to change the adjustment is to adjust the ball-end on the trailer control valve.
See “ Check Dual-Line Brake ” in this Group.
c. Apply handbrake slowly and read pressure at the same time.

Pressure must rise after the first detent position has been passed. Pressure at the yellow coupler must be between 650
and 810 kPa (6.5 and 8.1 bar; 94 and 118 psi) before the third detent position has been reached.
d. Release the handbrake fully.
When the handbrake is released, there should be no pressure at the yellow coupler.
[2] - With single-line brakes:
a. Release the handbrake fully.

b. Turn adjusting nut (A) until a pressure of 500 to 540 kPa (5.0 to 5.4 bar; 73 to 78 psi) is available at the black coupler.
c. Apply handbrake slowly and read pressure at the same time.
Pressure must drop after the first detent position has been passed. Pressure at the black coupler must be zero before the
third detent position has been reached.
d. Release the handbrake fully. A pressure of 500 to 540 kPa (5.0 to 5.4 bar; 73 to 78 psi) must now be available at the
black coupler.
See also “ Check Single-Line Brake ” in this Group.
IMPORTANT:
Other checks, such as measuring the braking force and the variability of the trailer control valve, must be
carried out at properly equipped workshops.
Some of these checks are included in the regular vehicle inspections prescribed by law.
Exceptions may apply in certain countries.
Section 260 - STEERING AND BRAKES Group 20: Theory of Operation
Reference 260-15-180, Checking the Pressure-Regulating Valve and Air-

Brake Fill Time
[1] -
CAUTION:
Pressure must be relieved at the compressed-air tank before the pressure gauge is connected.
→NOTE:
LEGEND:
B KJD10194-2 hose
Checking the pressure-regulating valve
Connect the KJD10194 pressure gauge set to the compressed-air tank.
[2] - Start the engine and a stopwatch simultaneously and set engine speed to 2300 rpm. Observe the pressure gauge and
record the time taken to reach the pressure cut-off point (when pressure stops rising).
Pressure cut-off point Pressure 790 to 830 kPa (7.9 to 8.3 bar; 115 to 120 psi)
Time taken for filling Time 35 seconds maximum
[3] - If pressure rises too slowly, check the system for leaks. See Reference 260-15-120, “Checking the System for Leaks”.
If the specified pressure is not achieved, the pressure-regulating valve must be replaced. See “Replace the Pressure-Regulating
Valve” in Section 60, Group 35.
[4] - Set the engine speed to 1000 rpm. Bring the pressure down as far as possible by repeatedly actuating the foot brake.
Observe the pressure gauge to determine the pressure at which the pressure-regulating valve switches on.
To prevent a further drop in pressure, the pressure-regulating valve must switch on before pressure reaches 5.9 bar (86 psi).
In event of malfunction, “Replace the Pressure-Regulating Valve” , see Section 60, Group 35.

Reference 260-20-001, Theory of Operation — Summary of References
Reference 260-20-010 , Description of Steering System, Operation
Reference 260-20-030 , Brake Valve, Operation
Reference 260-20-030 , Two-Stage Brake Valve, Operation
Reference 260-20-040 , Rear Wheel Brakes, Operation
Reference 260-20-050 , Handbrake, Description
Reference 260-20-060 , Trailer Brake Valve, Description
Reference 260-20-080 , Description of Air Brake System
Reference 260-20-010, Description of Steering System, Operation
Steering system
LEGEND:
A Cross-pin
B Leaf springs (6 used)
C Housing
D Rotor shaft
E Valve spool
F Check valve
G Check valve
H Sleeve
I Stator
J Rotor
K Air suction valve
Rotor (J) and stator (I) form the metering unit.
The control element itself consists of sleeve (H) and spool (E) which is connected directly to the steering wheel.
The sleeve is connected to the rotor by means of cross-pin (A) and rotor shaft (D).
The leaf springs (B) between sleeve and spool ensure an automatic neutral position between sleeve and spool.
If the hydraulic pump or motor should fail, check valve (F) between the spool and sleeve ensures that the steering continues to
function.
Check valve (G) prevents return oil from flowing through the steering valve, as this would produce "jolting" at the steering
wheel. This valve also prevents oil from flowing to the hydraulic pump when the pump is not in operation.
Operation of Metering Unit
Operation of metering unit
LEGEND:
H Medium-pressure oil
I Trapped oil
J Pressure-free oil
→NOTE:
For easier understanding, the following description is based on operation of the metering unit during
emergency steering.
The stator of the metering unit is attached to the steering housing. The rotor with external teeth engages in the internal teeth
of the stator. As the rotor turns, the center point describes a circular path. The movement is caused by the rotor shaft; this
shaft has bow-shaped teeth, since it follows the circular path of the rotor center and, therefore, must be flexible.
As the rotor turns, its teeth mesh with the inner teeth of the stator, reducing the cavity on one side and increasing the cavity
on the other side.
The illustration shows the following positions:
[1] - Moving the steering wheel 1/14 of a turn turns the center point 6/14 in the opposite direction. Thus three cavities are
open and, on the opposite side, three are closed.
[2] - Moving the steering wheel 1/7 of a turn opens six cavities and closes six.
[3] - Turning the steering wheel by one complete turn involves 7 x 6 = 42 cavities.
As 42 cavities are involved in one full turn, the advantage of a vibration-free movement and equal feed pressure is obtained.
An unusually large amount of oil is displaced per turn. This means that the steering valve assembly is small in comparison with
its performance.
→NOTE:
The normal operation of the steering valve assembly is similar to that described above for the metering
unit. Rotation of rotor is assisted by oil flow from hydraulic pump depending upon speed at which
steering wheel is turned. Rotor and stator thus function as a metering unit.
Oil Flow in Steering System
Oil flow In steering system
LEGEND:
A Steering cylinder
B Suction valves
C Valve spool
D Sleeve
E Check valve
F Check valve
G Metering unit
H Return oil connection
I Pressure oil connection
J Pilot line
K High pressure oil

L Return oil
M Pilot oil
→NOTE:
Oil flow for right-hand turn shown.
Turning the steering wheel causes the valve spool to turn relative to the sleeve. Turning the spool in relation to the sleeve
(already at 1.5°) opens the channels and oil can flow to the metering unit. Oil flow supports turning movement of the rotor
which forwards the oil present at the metering unit. Oil then flows through the open oil passages of spool and sleeve to the
relevant oil connection (right or left), depending upon which direction the steering wheel was turned. At the same time return
oil coming from the other oil connection is forwarded to the return oil connection via the open return oil passages of spool and
sleeve.
The quicker the steering wheel is turned the greater is the spool and sleeve movement relative to one another. This turning
means that the openings of the oil passages become larger and a greater amount of oil is forwarded to the metering unit. Thus
a quicker turning action of the rotor is obtained and a greater amount of oil (supply and return) flows through the steering
valve. The greater oil flow causes a quicker steering movement of the front wheels.
While spool and sleeve are turning relative to one another, pilot oil is also forwarded to the priority valve (see Section 270,
Group 20). The priority valve spool is moved by this pilot oil and directs the amount of oil required to the steering valve. If
spool and sleeve continue turning, more pilot oil is directed to the priority valve. This causes the hydraulic pump to pump more
oil which can be used by the steering valve immediately.
Oil Flow in Neutral Position
Oil flow in neutral position
LEGEND:
A Steering cylinder
B Suction valves
C Valve spool
D Sleeve
E Check valve
F Check valve
G Metering unit
J Pilot line
K Low pressure oil
L Return oil
M Trapped oil
N Pilot oil
As soon as the steering wheel movement ceases, leaf springs bring sleeve and spool to neutral position. In neutral position, the
priority valve only releases a small amount of oil which is present at the ring channel of sleeve and ready for immediate use.
The steering valve is thus relieved and the oil is available for other components.
At the same time oil flows from the priority valve to the steering valve via the pilot line. This oil flows back to the brake valve
as return oil. Even if the steering system has not been used for a long time, a small amount of oil flows through the steering
valve. Steering unit temperature adapts the temperature of hydraulic oil. Thermal stress can therefore not occur.
Oil Flow - Emergency Steering
Oil flow - emergency steering
LEGEND:
A Steering cylinder
B Suction valves
C Valve spool
D Sleeve
E Check valve
F Check valve
G Metering unit
J Pilot line
K Low pressure oil
L Return oil
M Pilot oil
→NOTE:
Oil flow for right-hand turn shown.
In case of hydraulic pump failure, the steering system switches automatically to emergency steering. The spool turns until it
turns the sleeve (at 8°) and thereby turns the rotor.
The metering unit now operates as a pump and opens the check valve by means of its suction effect. This means return oil
from the steering cylinder can flow directly to the metering unit. Furthermore, additional oil can be drawn from the brake valve
oil reservoir via the return line. With emergency steering, steering is a little heavier due to the lack of oil pressure influencing
the rotor movement.
As soon as the hydraulic pump is functioning normally, the priority valve automatically supplies oil to the steering valve first.
Other consumers receive oil only when sufficient oil is available for the steering valve.
Reference 260-20-030, Brake Valve, Operation
Brake Valve - Sectional View
LEGEND:
A Inlet
B Supply tank
C Inlet valve
D Check valve with orifice
E Brake piston
F Bore
G Equalizing bore
H Spring
I Return
K Pin
[ Fitted as standard on the latest tractors ]
The supply tank (B) is integrated in the brake valve housing. There are two brake pistons (E). Each brake piston has one inlet
valve (C) and one check valve (D) with an orifice.
In neutral position, the oil from supply tank (B) flows into the piston chambers via bores (F).
When the brake pedals are depressed, pistons (E) are pushed, closing bores (F). Pressure will build up.
As soon as bores (F) are closed and the brake pistons (E) pass by, oil flows through the equalizing bore (G).
Pressure at the two brake pistons is balanced, and the same pressure is applied to the two check valves (D).
This ensures that the brakes take effect equally on both sides.
When only one brake pedal is depressed (brakes used to assist steering), only one opening in the equalizing valve will be
uncovered. The other opening in the equalizing valve remains closed and it is impossible for the pressure in the brake cylinders
to be equal. Thus only one of the rear wheels is actually braked.
As a result of pressure increase, the orifices of check valves (D) rise and oil flows to the rear wheel brakes. As soon as brake
pedals are released, oil flows slowly back via the orifices. The orifices prevent the oil from flowing back to the supply tank too
rapidly.
When brake pedals are released, the oil becomes pressure-free. Springs (H) push the brake pistons back to their original
position. Oil returning from the rear brake enters the piston chambers. As this happens, a vacuum builds up in the piston
chambers. Inlet valve (C) is moved by this reduced pressure and the piston chambers are also filled with oil via the equalizing
bore.
Hydraulic Circuit Diagram
Oil flow in neutral position
LEGEND:
B Supply tank
C Inlet valve
E Brake piston
G Equalizing bore
Oil Flow During Brake Application
Oil flow during braking
LEGEND:
B Supply tank
C Inlet valve
E Brake piston
G Equalizing bore
As soon as bores are closed and the brake pistons pass by, oil flows through the equalizing bore (G). Pressure at the two brake
pistons is balanced, and the same pressure is applied to the two check valves (D). This ensures that the brakes take effect
equally on both sides.
When the brake pedals are depressed, brake pistons (E) are moved. The movement of the brake pistons closes the bores. This
will seal off the piston chambers, causing pressure to build up. At the same time, pressure is equalized (balanced) via the
equalizing bore.
High pressure builds up in the piston chambers. This causes check valves (D) to open. Pressure is equalized and oil from the
piston chambers will flow at a steady rate. The orifices of check valves (D) rise off their seats and oil flows to the rear brake.
The rear brake pistons move.
Reference 260-20-031, Two-Stage Brake Valve

Description
The two-stage brake valve consists of two separate brake cylinders. The brake cylinders can be operated individually (e.g. to
assist with steering when working in the field).
Located in each of the brake cylinders are two brake pistons of differing diameter.
This allows brake pressure to be built up more quickly and the brake system to be filled, thus achieving a better braking effect.
Brake valve
LEGEND:
A Piston (stage 1)
B Valve housing
C Inlet valve
D Oil reservoir
E Piston (stage 2)
F Return spring
G Change-over valve
H Spring
Hydraulic schematic
Hydraulic schematic
LEGEND:
A Piston (stage 1)
B Check valve
C Oil reservoir
D Inlet valve
E Piston (stage 2)
F Spring
G Check valve with orifice
H Holes in the piston (stage 2)
I Change-over valve
J Hole (right/left pressure compensation)
L Rear wheel brake
Start of braking, first stage (oil pressure up to 4 bar; 58 psi)
Start of braking
Schematic, stage 1
LEGEND:
A Piston (stage 1)
B Check valve
C Oil reservoir
D Inlet valve
E Piston (stage 2)
F Spring
I Change-over valve
J Oil pressure below 4 bar (58 psi)
K Pressure-free oil
L Rear wheel brake
Piston (A) and piston (E) are forced towards spring (F) by the action of the brake pedal. Check valve (B) opens and allows the
oil displaced by piston (A) to pass through the small piston (E) and from there to the outlet of the brake valve. The check valve
(G) located there opens and oil reaches the rear wheel brake (L).
The relatively large amount of oil at a moderate pressure means that the pistons in the rear wheel brakes travel as far as
possible in a short time and press the brake plates against the brake disks.
Changing over to the second stage (oil pressure over 4 bar; 58 psi)
Changing over to stage 2
Changing over to stage 2
LEGEND:
A Piston (stage 1)
B Check valve
C Oil reservoir
D Inlet valve
E Piston (stage 2)
F Spring
I Change-over valve
K Pressure-free oil
L Rear wheel brake
M Oil under high pressure (more than 4 bar; 58 psi)
As more force is exerted on the brake pedal, oil pressure increases on the spring side of piston (E). From 4 bar (58 psi), change-
over valve (I) is opened via holes (H). This opens a passage through which the oil displaced by piston (A) can flow at zero
pressure to oil reservoir (C). At the same time check valve (B) closes, preventing pressure from escaping from the brake
system. From now on, force applied to the pedal acts only on piston (E), which due to its smaller diameter develops a high
pressure. In consequence, the brake plates and brake disks in the rear wheel brakes are pressed together tightly.
Neutral
Neutral
Neutral
LEGEND:
A Piston (stage 1)
B Check valve
C Oil reservoir
D Inlet valve
E Piston (stage 2)
F Spring
I Change-over valve
K Pressure-free oil
L Rear wheel brake
End of braking: The springs force the two brake pistons back to their initial positions. At the same time, check valve (G)
closes, forcing the oil flowing back from the brake system through an orifice. This slows the rate of flow of the returning oil and
produces a slight vacuum in the brake valve. In consequence, oil is drawn in via inlet valve (D).
Pressure compensation
LEGEND:
A Piston (stage 1)
B Piston (stage 2)
C Hole
Position of hole
Especially when trailer loads are high and at high speeds, it is important for the braking effect to be the same on both sides of
the tractor. To achieve this, there is a hole (C) in the brake valve housing, allowing pressure to be equalized between the right
and left pistons.
Figure 1
Figure 2
See Figure 1: This shows how hole (C) enables pressure to be equalized between the right and left pistons when the two pedals
are pressed together.
See Figure 2: If the steering brake is actuated when working in the field, only one brake piston moves forward and develops
pressure. In this case, it is not desirable for pressure to be equalized and this is prevented by hole (C) remaining closed as the
other piston does not move from its neutral position.
Reference 260-20-040, Rear Wheel Brakes, Operation
Rear wheel brake
LEGEND:
A Bleed screw
B Oil supply to brakes
C Planet pinion carrier
D Rear axle
E Final drive shaft
F Brake piston
G Return pin (3 used)
H Brake disk
I Brake plate
Oil from the brake valve is routed behind the brake piston (F). From approx. 150 kPa (1.5 bar; 22 psi), the return pin springs (G)
are compressed and the brake piston moves against the rotating brake disk (H). From approx. 300 kPa (3 bar; 44 psi), the
brake piston is against the brake disk.
As braking pressure is increased, the brake piston presses the brake disk harder against the fixed brake plate (I) and the final
drive shaft (E) is braked. Braking action is transferred from the final drive shaft via the planet pinion carrier and the rear axle
(D) to the rear wheel.
When the brake pedals are released, oil pressure is decreased and the return pins pull the brake pistons to their initial position.
Oil returns to the brake valve.
Reference 260-20-050, Handbrake, Description
LEGEND:
A Handbrake lever
B Cam
C Pressure plate
D Disk pack
E Differential
F Final drive shaft
G Differential lock housing
H Handbrake housing cover
I Bowden cable
J Brake lever
Handbrake
The handbrake consists primarily of handbrake lever (A), bowden cable (I), brake lever (J), cam (B), handbrake housing cover
(H), pressure plate (C) and disk pack (D).
When handbrake lever (A) is pulled, brake lever (J) is applied via bowden cable (I). As it moves, lever (J) actuates cam (B),
displacing pressure plate (C) and pressing the disk pack (D) against the differential housing.
This causes the brake disks with teeth on the inside to be compressed with the brake disks with teeth on the outside, and they
brake the differential (E) via differential lock housing (G).
The braking effect is transmitted to the rear wheels via the two final drives.
Reference 260-20-060, Trailer Brake Valve, Description

Pressure ratio
Trailer brake valve
Identifying the pressure ratio
At the location indicated by the arrow is a figure showing the ratio of pilot pressure to brake pressure at the coupler.
The following example explains the ratio of pilot pressure to brake pressure:Pilot pressure x pressure ratio = Brake
pressure
Pilot pressure is 1000 kPa (10 bar; 145 psi) and the number stamped on the trailer brake valve is "6.". This means that brake
pressure at the coupling is 6000 kPa (60 bar, 870 psi). If the number is "9", it would be 9000 kPa (90 bar; 1310 psi).
Oil Flow in Trailer Brake Valve
Oil flow
LEGEND:
A Breather
B Piston
C Control spool
D From priority valve
E Pilot line to hydraulic pump controller
F Pressure relief valve
G Throttle screw
H From brake valve
K To quick coupler
L Groove (3 used)
M Relief bore (3 used)
N Spring
O To sump
P High-pressure oil
Q Medium-pressure oil
R Pilot oil
S Control oil
T Return oil
IMPORTANT:
The illustration and description do not apply to trailer brake valves with a pressure ratio of 1:11.6.
When the foot brakes are applied, pilot oil (R) from brake valve (H) flows behind piston (B) and pushes spool (C) to the right
after having overcome the pressure of spring (N), thereby opening oil channel (K) leading to the quick coupler. At the same
time pressure oil flows through the three grooves (L) in the spool to throttle screw (G), which is set so as to create a pressure
ratio (e.g. 1:6; see "Ascertain pressure ratio"). This means that when pilot oil (R) is 1000 kPa (10 bar; 145 psi), the oil (P) that is
fed to quick coupler (K) is at a pressure of 6000 kPa (60 bar; 870 psi).
When the braking operation is completed and pilot oil pressure (R) has decreased, spring (N) moves the spool to the left,
returning it to neutral position. The pressure of the oil from the quick coupler is reduced via relief bores (M).
The spool opens the pressure oil channel to the quick coupler at a pressure of 400 kPa (4 bar; 60 psi).
Pressure relief valve (F) restricts the load-sensing oil (S) to the controller of hydraulic pump (E) in such a way that the latter
never provides the trailer brake valve with a brake pressure (P) of more than 15000 kPa (150 bar; 2200 psi).
Check valve
Check valve
The check valve is located in the load-sensing oil line leading to the hydraulic pump controller. Its purpose is to avoid vibrations
during braking.
Reference 260-20-080, Description of Air Brake System
→NOTE:
The text refers to the drawing below.
The pilot-operated air brake system is a dual-circuit unit. It can be combined with a single-circuit system. The operating
pressure is 800 kPa (8 bar; 116 psi).
The compressor (A) draws filtered outside air from the engine air filter, compresses this air and sends it via the pressure
regulating valve (E) to the compressed air tank (C).
Supply pressure is shown on the air pressure gauge (B).
If no trailer is connected, compressed air is present at the closed intake seat in the pilot-operated trailer control valve (H) and
at the closed return valve in the “Supply” coupler (M).
When the tractor′s brake system is activated, hydraulic pressure increases and is admitted to the pilot-operated trailer control
valve (H). As the pressure in the hydraulic section increases, air pressure rises in the brake line from the trailer control valve
(H) to the “Brake” coupler (K) to the supply tank to initiate braking in the attached trailer. Otherwise compressed air is held at
the closed return valve in the “Brake” coupler (K).
The increased pressure in the brake line between the trailer control valve (H) and the “Brake” coupler (K) is admitted to the
trailer control valve (F) control port for single-circuit braking
[ If equipped ]
. Pressure in the control line between the trailer control valve (F) and the single-circuit coupler (L) is reduced and can be
gradually vented to atmospheric pressure. Braking is initiated in the attached trailer.
The single-circuit trailer control valve (F) has a pressure limiter to assure that a pressure of 500—540 kPa (5.0—5.4 bar; 73—78
psi) is not exceeded at the single-circuit coupler (L) when braking is not activated. This pressure cut-off is required because the
supply pressure in the compressed air tank is at least 700 kPa (7 bar; 102 psi).
Actuating the handbrake simultaneously activates the pilot-operated trailer control valve (H) and compressed air at the supply
tank pressure is supplied to the line between the control valve and the “Brake” (K) coupler as well as to the pilot line to the air-
operated trailer control valve (F). If a trailer is attached, its brakes are fully applied along with the service brake system, the
single-circuit braking unit′s pilot line is vented to atmospheric pressure and full-pressure compressed air is supplied to the dual-
circuit braking system.
Air brakes
LEGEND:
A Compressor
B Air pressure gauge
C Compressed air tank
D Check and fill port
E Pressure-regulating valve
F Trailer control valve (single-circuit braking)
[ If equipped ]
G Handbrake lever
H Trailer control valve (dual-circuit braking)
K Coupling end (yellow, brake)
L Coupling end (black, single-circuit braking)
[ If equipped ]
M Coupling end (red, supply)

[ If equipped ]
N Tractor brake pilot pressure
O Water drain valve
Compressor
LEGEND:
A Pressurized (lube) oil line
B Oil return line
C Intake line
D Compressed air line
Compressor
The compressor is located on the engine and is driven by the drive belt. It is a single-stage piston-type compressor. For
lubrication purposes, the compressor is connected to the engine′s oil circuit.
Pressure-regulating valve
Pressure-regulating valve
The pressure-regulating valve (A) is located between the compressor and air tank. It limits system fill pressure to approx. 810
kPa (8.1 bar; 118 psi). The fill pressure equals system operating pressure.
Compressed air tank

LEGEND:
A Water drain valve
B To pressure gauge
C Check and fill port
Compressed air tank
The compressed air tank stores compressed air produced by the compressor. The water drain valve (A) is used to remove any
condensates present in the air tank.
Trailer control valve
Dual-line brake
Trailer control valve
HYDRAULIC SYSTEM (g) by Belgreen v2.0
The trailer control valve operates with the hydraulic master cylinder to control the dual-circuit braking system.
When the brake pedal is pressed the control valve is hydraulically actuated via lines (A and B).
When the handbrake is activated, the control valve is also actuated via linkage (C).
Single-line brake
Single-line brake
Together with the trailer control valve for the dual-line brake system, the trailer control valve controls the single-line brake
system. The trailer control valve has an integral pressure-limiting device, which ensures that in an unbraked condition the
pressure at the coupling end never exceeds a value of 500 to 540 kPa (5.0 to 5.4 bar; 73 to 78 psi). This pressure cut-off is
required because the supply pressure in the compressed air tank is at least 700 kPa (7 bar; 102 psi).
Coupling end
Coupling ends
The coupling ends connect the compressed air system to the trailer brakes. They conform with ISO Standard 1728. The
coupling end for supply (C) has a red cover and an axial lock to prevent incorrect cross-connection.
The coupling end for brake line (A) has a yellow cover and a lateral lock to prevent incorrect cross-connection. The coupling
end for single-line brake (B) has a black cover. The locks ensure that coupling ends that do not match cannot be connected to
each other.
To connect two matching coupling ends, turn them with the guides engaged. The detent at the end of the turn ensures that the
two coupling ends are firmly connected.
Section 270 - HYDRAULIC SYSTEM

Table of contents
Reference 270-10-001, Operational Checkout of Hydraulic System, Summary of References ............. 1
Reference 270-10-010, Hydraulic System Load Check ......................................................................... 1
Reference 270-10-020, Hitch Control - Operational Checkout .............................................................. 2
Reference 270-10-030, External Control of Hitch - Operational Checkout ............................................ 2
Reference 270-10-040, Selective Control Valves - Operational Checkout ............................................ 4
Reference 270-15-000, PC Hydraulic System — Summary of References ............................................ 6
Reference 270-15-001, Safety Measures for Hydraulic Checks ............................................................ 6
Reference 270-15-003, Connecting SensoControl Test Equipment .................................................... 11
Reference 270-15-010, Heating Up Hydraulic Oil ............................................................................... 11
System check ..................................................................................................................................... 13
Reference 270-15-021, PC Hydraulic System — Test Result Table ..................................................... 19
Reference 270-15-052, Checking the Delivery Rate of the Hydraulic Pump ....................................... 20
Reference 270-15-070, Preparing Pressure Test ................................................................................ 22
Reference 270-15-071, Checking the LS Pressure .............................................................................. 25
Reference 270-15-072, Checking the System Pressure ...................................................................... 27
Reference 270-15-073, Checking the Steering Pressure (Primary Circuit) ......................................... 28
Reference 270-15-074, Checking the Braking Pressure of the Hydraulic Trailer Brake (Primary Circuit)
..................................................................................................................................................... 29
Reference 270-15-075, Checking the LS Pressure of the Steering System ......................................... 31
Pressure Relief Valve Test .................................................................................................................. 32
Reference 270-15-091, Selective Control Valves — Checking for Leaks at Couplers ......................... 32
Reference 270-15-110, Checking the Stepper Motor and Rockshaft Valve ........................................ 34
Reference 270-15-130, Rockshaft Valve — Checking for Leaks ......................................................... 35
Reference 270-15-131, Rockshaft Valve (Wide Version) — Checking the Pressure-Relief Valve ........ 36
Reference 270-15-132, Rockshaft Valve — Checking Depth to Which Pressure and Discharge Valves
are Screwed In ............................................................................................................................. 36
Reference 270-15-150, Rockshaft — Checking the Position Sensor ................................................... 37
Reference 270-15-151, Rockshaft Valve — Testing and Adjusting the Draft Sensor .......................... 39
Reference 270-20-002, PC Hydraulic System — Summary of References .......................................... 41
Reference 270-20-060, PC Hydraulic System — Description .............................................................. 41
Reference 270-20-070, PC Hydraulic System — Operation ................................................................ 42
Reference 270-20-080, PC Hydraulic System — Symbolic Representation ........................................ 43
Reference 270-20-090, PC Hydraulic System — Schematic View ....................................................... 45
Reference 270-20-160, PC Hydraulic System — Description of Hydraulic Pump ................................ 47
Reference 270-20-170, PC Hydraulic System — Oil Lines of Hydraulic Pump ..................................... 47
Reference 270-20-180, PC Hydraulic System—Operation of Hydraulic Pump .................................... 49
Reference 270-20-190, Filter Screen — Description ........................................................................... 50
Reference 270-20-200, Transmission Oil Cooler — Description .......................................................... 50
Reference 270-20-260, PC Hydraulic System — Description and Arrangement of Shuttle Valves ...... 51
Reference 270-20-290, PC Hydraulic System — Description of Priority Valve and By-Pass Valve ...... 52
Reference 270-20-300, PC Hydraulic System — Operation of Priority Valve and By-Pass Valve ........ 53
PC Hydraulic System - Operation of Pressure-Relief Valve ................................................................. 54
Reference 270-20-320, Rockshaft — Description ............................................................................... 54
Reference 270-20-330, Rockshaft — Operation of Rockshaft Control ................................................ 56
Reference 270-20-340, Rockshaft — Operation of Rockshaft Valve ................................................... 58
Reference 270-20-350, Rockshaft — Operation of Position Sensor .................................................... 62
Reference 270-20-360, Rockshaft — Operation of Draft Sensor ......................................................... 63

Reference 270-20-370, Rockshaft — Description of Controls ............................................................. 63
Reference 270-20-380, Rockshaft — Direct Actuation ........................................................................ 64
Reference 270-20-390, 105, 205 and 305 Series Selective Control Valves — Description ................. 65
Reference 270-20-480, Couplers — Description ................................................................................. 66
Reference 270-20-600, 105 Series Selective Control Valves — Operation ......................................... 68
Reference 270-20-625, 305 Series Selective Control Valves — Flow Control ..................................... 73
Reference 270-20-630, LS Valve, Shuttle Valve and By-Pass Valve — Operation ............................... 75
Section 270 - HYDRAULIC SYSTEM Group 10: Operational Check-Out

Reference 270-10-001, Operational Checkout of Hydraulic System,
Summary of References
Reference 270-10-010 , Hydraulic System Load Check.
Reference 270-10-020 , Hitch Control - Operational Check.
Reference 270-10-030 , Hitch Remote Control - Operational Check.
Reference 270-10-040 , Selective Control Valves - Operational Check.
→NOTE:
For operational checks of other hydraulic components (steering and brakes) see Section 260, Group 10.
Reference 270-10-010, Hydraulic System Load Check
CAUTION:
[1] - Warm the hydraulic oil to at least 40°C (104°F), see Reference 270-15-010 .
[2] - Place all control valves to neutral and start the engine.
Shut off the engine and listen to the engine as it stops.
[3] - Restart the engine and operate a selective control valve.
While the SCV is in operation, shut off the engine and listen to the engine as it stops.
[4] - — If the engine runs longer, seems less loaded or turns more freely in step 2 than in step 3, the hydraulic system is
operating at normal working pressure (stand-by pressure) with all valves in their neutral position.
— If the engine sound is identical in steps 2 and 3, the hydraulic system is operating in high-pressure mode (max. system
pressure).
The following are possible causes:
Leak in Load Sense circuit. Reference 270-15-071 , ”Checking the LS (Load-Sensing) Pressure”
Reference 270-15-075 , ”Checking the LS Pressure of the Steering System”
Reference 270-10-020, Hitch Control - Operational Checkout

LEGEND:
B Rocker switch
C Rate-of-drop control
D Height limit control
E Depth control stop
Hitch control
Rockshaft control - operational checkout
CAUTION:
Warm the hydraulic oil to at least 40°C (104°F), see Reference 270-15-010 .
Check Description - Process Result - Lift arms ...
Lift arms completely lowered, key switch off, all controls turned to right, depth control in transport
Latches must not move.
position, start engine.
Move depth control from transport to 9 and back to transport — raise to max. height.
Depth control and
Sensitivity control counterclockwise, depth control from transport to 5 — lower to half of full travel.
position sensor
Move depth control between 4.5 and 5.5 — follow control movement.
Depth control to transport position. raise to max. height.

Lift limit Turn lift limit from right to left. lower to half of full travel.
Turn lift limit from left to right. raise to max. height.
Depth control from transport position to 9 and during drop

Drop restrictor lower per drop restrictor setting.
move drop restrictor from right to left and back to the right.
Move depth control from 9 to 0 and back until draft links are about horizontal. Turn sensitivity
control to right. If equipped, disconnect the sway bars, individually load the draft-sensing pins must lower slightly with lateral pressure
Draft sensors horizontally by pushing the right draft link toward the rear wheel. The draft links must not contact on the draft links and raise to original
the rear wheel. Repeat the test on the l.h. side. The tractors may be equipped with one sensor (on position when load is removed.
the r.h. side) or with two sensors.
Remote control to raise. raise immediately (1 sec).

Remote control
Remote control to lower. lower immediately (1 sec).
Rocker switch to raise. raise to transport position.

Quick lower Rocker switch to lower. lower slowly.
Turn drop restrictor from right to left. follow restrictor position.
Reference 270-10-030, External Control of Hitch - Operational Checkout
Remote control switch
CAUTION:
[2] - Actuate remote control RAISE switch and keep it pressed down. Record the time lapse until the draft links start to rise.
Release the switch.
[3] - Actuate switch again. Draft links must now start to rise immediately. Release the switch.
[4] - Actuate remote control LOWER switch and keep it pressed down. Record the time lapse until the draft links start to lower.
The time taken for the draft links to respond to the remote control must be the same both for raising and lowering.
Possible reasons for different response times:
Fault in electrical circuit.

Raising or lowering valve not spaced correctly. Reference 270-15-132 , Rockshaft Valve — Checking the Depth to Which
Pressure and Discharge Valves are Screwed In.
Stepper motor deadband step is too big or too small. Reference 270-15-110 , Checking the Stepper Motor and Rockshaft
Valve.
The stepper motor is stiff or defective. Reference 270-15-110 , Checking the Stepper Motor and Rockshaft Valve.
Reference 270-10-040, Selective Control Valves - Operational Checkout
CAUTION:
→NOTE:
The SCVs are actuated mechanically by means of bowden cables.
Operational check:
[2] -
SCV control levers
One at a time, move each SCV lever (A) backward and forward (the number of levers varies depending on how the tractor is
equipped).
A brief change in engine noise should be noticed in every position.

The high-pressure hoses show signs of being under pressure.
When the lever is moved in and out of the float position there should be slight resistance but no increase in effort should
be required to operate the lever.
The lever should not need to be held in the float position.
If the SCV is detented
[ If equipped ]
, the lever should remain in the ”Extend” or ”Retract” position.
[3] -
SCV metering valve

Section 270 - HYDRAULIC SYSTEM Group 15: Tests and Adjustments
Actuate each SCV using an 89 x 203 mm (3-1/2 x 8 in.) cylinder attached to the couplers and observe operation.
The cylinder should extend and retract smoothly.

When the SCV metering valve
[ If equipped ]
(A) is turned clockwise, the cylinder′s raise speed should be reduced.
When the SCV metering valve
[ If equipped ]
(A) is turned counterclockwise, the cylinder′s raise speed should be increased.
With metering valve
[ If equipped ]
(A) turned completely counterclockwise and the engine at 2000 rpm, the cylinder should take less than 2.5 seconds to
extend fully from a completely retracted position.
[4] - With the engine at 1000 rpm extend the cylinder and simultaneously turn the steering wheel (one revolution per second).
The steering should not require additional effort and the cylinder should operate more slowly.
The cylinder speed should increase when the steering wheel is against the stop.
[5] -
Adjustment knob (for 305 series SCV only)
Select "no detent"
[ If equipped ]
(C) (loader symbol).
If the SCV lever is released, it should return to neutral without the cylinder reaching the end of its stroke.
[6] - Select "continuous detent"
[ If equipped ]
(A) (engine symbol).
The SCV lever should remain in the extend or retract position when the cylinder reaches the end of its stroke.
[7] - Select "automatic detent"
[ If equipped ]
(B) (cylinder symbol).
The SCV lever should return to neutral when the cylinder reaches the end of its stroke.
[8] - The SCV lever must return to neutral by itself when the engine is shut off. (This does not apply if the SCV lever is in float
position.)

Reference 270-15-000, PC Hydraulic System — Summary of References
Test procedures and adjustments involving the PC hydraulic system are dealt with in the following References:
Reference 270-15-000 , “PC Hydraulic System — Summary of References“

See Reference 270-15-001 , “Safety Measures for Hydraulic Checks”
Reference 270-15-002 , “Special Tools”
Reference 270-15-003 , “Connecting SensoControl Test Equipment”
Reference 270-15-010 , “Heating Up Hydraulic Oil“
Reference 270-15-020 , “Checking the PC Hydraulic System”
Reference 270-15-021 , “PC Hydraulic System — Test Result Table”
Reference 270-15-052 , “Checking the Delivery Rate of the Hydraulic Pump”
Reference 270-15-070 , “Preparing Pressure Test”
Reference 270-15-071 , “Checking the LS Pressure”
Reference 270-15-072 , “Checking the System Pressure”
Reference 270-15-073 , “Checking the Steering Pressure (Primary Circuit)”
Reference 270-15-074 , “Checking the Braking Pressure of the Hydraulic Trailer Brake (Primary Circuit)”
Reference 270-15-075 , “Checking the LS Pressure of the Steering System”
“Pressure Relief Valve Test“
Reference 270-15-091 , “Selective Control Valves — Checking for Leaks at Couplers”
Reference 270-15-110 , “Checking the Stepper Motor and Hitch Valve”
Reference 270-15-130 , “Hitch Valve — Checking for Leaks”
Reference 270-15-131 , “Hitch Valve — Checking the Pressure Relief Valve”
Reference 270-15-132 , “Hitch Valve — Checking the Depth to Which Raising and Lowering Valves are Screwed In”
Reference 270-15-150 , “Hitch Valve — Checking the Position Sensor”
Reference 270-15-151 , “Hitch — Testing and Adjusting the Draft Sensors”
Reference 270-15-001, Safety Measures for Hydraulic Checks

You should comply with the safety measures at the beginning of this manual as well as the ones mentioned below. See "Safety
Measures", Section 210, Group 05.
CAUTION:
Escaping oil under pressure can penetrate the skin and cause severe injuries. Avoid the hazard by
relieving pressure before disconnecting hydraulic or other lines. Before restoring system pressure, make
sure that all connections are tight and all lines secure. Pinpoint hydraulic oil leaks can be hard to see;
use a piece of cardboard to find these leaks. Do not use your hands.
CAUTION:
Due to the risk of severe infection, seek medical assistance immediately if injured by oil under pressure.
CAUTION:
Shut off the engine before checking oil lines close to moving machine parts.
CAUTION:
CAUTION:
During tests that involve running the engine, always engage the parking lock.
CAUTION:
CAUTION:
Before connecting implements to the three-point hitch, the hitch sensitivity control must be moved to
position “1” (position control) to prevent unintentional raising or lowering of the rockshaft.
CAUTION:
If tests are to carried out on moving parts (e.g. rockshaft, front hitch, front loader, hydraulic cylinders
etc.), be aware of the potential for accidents. Never work within the operating range of moving parts.
CAUTION:
If testing involves putting the tractor in motion (e.g. a test drive), make sure this is done out of doors in
an open area. Make sure that no-one is put at risk.
→NOTE:
Tool Catalog (MTC).
FKM10470
FKM10470
”SensoControl” measurement unit for hydraulic system pressure testing.
”SensoControl” measurement unit consists of:
FKM10470-1 pressure sensor (0-1000 bar)
FKM10470-2 pressure sensor (0-100 bar) (2 used)
FKM10470-3 adapter (3 used)
FKM10470-4 ”Serviceman” hand-held measuring unit
FKM10470-5 power supply
FKM10471
FKM10471
”SensoControl” measurement unit for hydraulic system pressure testing.
”SensoControl” measurement unit consists of:
FKM10470 pressure measuring system (stage 1)
FKM10471-1 printer cable
FKM10471-2 thermal printer
FKM10471-3 PC adapter with software
Temperature sensor
FKM10472-4
FKM10472-4
2).
Pressure test kit
LEGEND:
A 38H1417
B 38H5069
C RE43774
D FKM10482-1
E AL80099
F FKM10482-2
Pressure test kit
FKM10482
Includes several adapters and fittings for the connection of pressure measuring systems.
Reference 270-15-003, Connecting SensoControl Test Equipment
Connecting SensoControl testing equipment
LEGEND:
A FKM10470-1 pressure sensor (0-1000 bar)
B FKM10470-2 pressure sensor (0-100 bar)
C FKM10472-4 temperature sensor
D FKM10472-1 flow turbine
E FKM10470-4 hand-held measuring unit
F FKM10471-2 thermal printer
G FKM10471-3 PC adapter
P Pressure ports
T Temperature port
Q Volume measurement port
Connect the pressure sensors (A) or (B) with adapter FKM10470-3 to the pressure port (P) male coupler tips on the tractor.
Connect the thermal printer (F) or PC adapter (G) to the hand-held measuring unit (E).
Connect the temperature sensor (C) to the oil filter head.
If needed, connect the flow turbine (D).
Reference 270-15-010, Heating Up Hydraulic Oil
Adjustable restrictor
CAUTION:
CAUTION:
Avoid the risk of suffocation: do NOT operate the tractor in enclosed areas unless a suitable exhaust
extraction system is used!
[1] - Use a hose to connect the quick couplers on an SCV. For a faster warm-up, it may be necessary to similarly connect a
second SCV.
→NOTE:
An adjustable restrictor
[ JT07120 is part of the JT07115 pressure test kit ]

(A) may be connected for faster warm-ups. The restrictor should be almost (but not quite) closed.
[2] - Install a thermometer.
[3] - If equipped, place the SCV flow regulator to the center position and select the manual lever return mode.
[4] - Run the engine at 1700 rpm and engage the SCV.
[5] - Observe the thermometer until the desired temperature is reached, then move the lever back to neutral.
Reference 270-15-020, Checking the PC Hydraulic System

General Information on Checking the System:
When checking the hydraulic system, a distinction is drawn between faults in thetransmission oil circuit (low-pressure
circuit) and faults in the actualhydraulic system (high-pressure circuit).
Transmission oil circuit problems involve: transmission oil pump, clutch housing valves, power train elements (vehicle
clutch, clutches for PTOs, front wheel drive, differential and transmission), oil cooler and transmission lubrication.
Hydraulic system problems involve: hydraulic pump, main valve block with priority valve, hitch, selective control valves,
steering valve and trailer brake valve.
Information on Checking the System:
If the SCV that is switched on is connected to an implement that does not have its own control valve (or its control valve is
switched off), the hydraulic system operates all the time at high pressure.
However, if the implement′s control valve is connected to the LS (Load-Sensing) input of the SCV block, system pressure will
automatically match requirements as soon as the SCV is switched on.
If one or more of the hydraulic units are not functioning properly, not functioning at all, or functioning only in combination with
other units, the cause is a leak in the LS circuit.
Shuttle valve missing, defective or blocked by a foreign body.

Shuttle valve seat is damaged.
Surface between hydraulic valves is not sealing properly.
Studs on hydraulic block not tightened properly.
Priority inlet valve is sticking or its restrictor bores are blocked.
System check
CAUTION:
Whenever performing these checks, always observe the relevant safety precautions. See Reference
270-15-001 , "Safety Measures for Hydraulic Checks".
The procedure described below represents a step-by-step approach to troubleshooting the hydraulic system.
IMPORTANT:
→NOTE:
The results of the tests should be recorded in the test result table. See Reference 270-15-021 , Hydraulic System — Test Result
Table.
For further information, see Reference 210-15-001 , "General References - Summary".
( 1 ) Checking the diagnostic trouble codes
Action:
See Reference 245-05-002 , "Accessing the Addresses and Diagnostic Trouble Codes".
Make sure that none of the diagnostic trouble codes apply to electrical faults (e.g. a shorted circuit).
Result:
YES: GO TO 2
NO:Rectify the electrical fault.
Action:
Result:
YES: GO TO 3
NO:Rectify any fault that has occurred.
( 3 ) Checking the temperature of the hydraulic oil
Action:
Ascertain the temperature of the hydraulic oil.
Hydraulic oil temperature during pressure checks Temperature min. 60°C
min. 140°F
Result:
YES: GO TO 4
NO:Warm up the hydraulic oil. See Reference 270-15-010 .
( 4 ) Check system pressure
Action:
Check system pressure
4.1 - Check "min" system pressure
Connect the tester to the quick-coupler (see Reference 270-15-072 , "Checking the System Pressure").
SCVs and hitch in neutral. Steering not used.
Min. system pressure: 1300 - 1500 kPa (13 - 15 bar; 188 - 217 psi)
Result:
YES:GO TO 4.2
NO:No pressure or pressure too low: Go to 4.2, then to 4.3
Action:
4.2 - Check "max" system pressure
One at a time, engage SCVs, note pressure in each case and return to neutral.
"Max." system pressure in each case: 19500 - 2000 kPa (195 - 200 bar; 2830 - 2900 psi)
In neutral, system pressure should take about 1.5 sec. to drop to "min."
Result:
YES: GO TO 5
NO:Max. pressure OK, but min. system pressure not OK: GO TO 4.3Pressure too low: Leakage in LS circuit, GO TO 4.4Pump is
defective, ascertain its delivery rate, see Reference 270-15-052 , "Checking the Delivery Rate of the Hydraulic Pump".Pressure
too high: by-pass valve is defective.Pressure not OK when SCV is selected: check relevant SCV.Rectify the fault: GO TO 4
Action:
4.3 - If "min" system pressure is too low, check the following possible causes:
By-pass valve defective?

Leak on suction side of pump?
Pump drive defective?
Internal leakage in hitch valve housing? (caused by pressure peaks - damage resulting from defective by-pass valve)
Result:
NO:Rectify the fault: GO TO 4
Action:
4.4 - If "max" system pressure is too low, check the following possible causes:
Internal leakage: Check that all the shuttle valves are installed correctly.
Check torque and seals on valve block. See reference "Install Shuttle Valves" at Section 70, Group 25 in the Repair Manual.
On tractors from serial no. 510729, the pressure relief valve may be tripping too soon. A defective pressure relief valve must
be replaced. See also “Pressure Relief Valve Test” .
Result:
NO:Rectify the fault: GO TO 4

( 5 ) Steering pressure check (primary circuit)
Action:
5.1 - Check "min" steering pressure
Check steering pressure
Connect test equipment, see Reference 270-15-073 , "Checking the Steering Pressure (Primary Circuit)"
All valves in neutral.
Steering neutral:
1000 - 1500 kPa (10 - 15 bar; 145 - 218 psi)
Result:
YES:Go to 5.2
NO:Pressure too low or zero: Check the spool of the priority valve and restrictor bores, see "Reconditioning the Priority Valve"
in Section 70, Group 15 of the Repair manual.Rectify the fault: GO TO 5
Action:
5.2 - Check "max" steering pressure
Steering against stop:
18000 - 19000 kPa (180 - 190 bar; 2610 - 2756 psi)
Result:
YES: GO TO 6
NO:Pressure too high or too low: Replace the steering valve with a new one and repeat this test.
( 6 ) Checking the LS (Load-Sensing) pressure
Action:
Test port for pilot (LS) pressure
Connect test equipment, see Reference 270-15-071 , "Checking the LS Pressure"
Run the engine at 1500 rpm.
During this testno pressure is measured at test port (A). With all valves in neutral position, the LS oil is directed to sump
pressure-free.Min. LS pressure:0 kPa (0 bars; 0 psi)
Engage different SCVs alternately.
"Max." LS pressure (SCV engaged):18500 - 19000 kPa (185 - 190 bar; 2683 - 2756 psi)
Result:
YES: GO TO 7
NO:Min. LS pressure too high: Oil leaking from the pressure circuit to the Load-Sensing circuit.Rectify the fault: GO TO 4
( 7 ) Checking the LS pressure (Load-Sensing) of the steering system
Action:
Check LS pressure of steering system
Connect test equipment, see Reference 270-15-075 , "Checking the LS Pressure of the Steering System"
Measure min. LS pressure with steering in neutral:0 kPa (0 bars; 0 psi)

Measure max. LS pressure with steering at its stop:17500 - 18000 kPa (175 - 180 bar; 2538 - 2610 psi)
Result:
YES:The PC hydraulic system test is now completed.
NO:Check the spool of the priority valve and restrictor bores, see "Reconditioning the Priority Valve" in Section 70, Group 15 of
the Repair manual. Then repeat this check.
Reference 270-15-021, PC Hydraulic System — Test Result Table

Hydraulic System — Test Result Table
Owner .......... Date ..........
Model .......... Serial no. .......... Hours of operation ..........
Hydraulic equipment ..........
Hydraulic problem ..........
Test report
Test no. Engine speed / desired

Designation Actual Value
Ref. no. Hydraulic oil at least 60°C (140°F)
4 System pressure: at 1500 rpm
min.
1300 - 1500 kPa (13 - 15 bar; 188 - 217.5 psi)
(standby pressure)
19000 - 20500 kPa

max.
(190 - 205 bar; 2756 - 2970 psi)
5 Steering pressure (primary circuit): at 1500 rpm
1000 - 1500 kPa

min. (steering neutral)
(10 - 15 bar; 145 - 218 psi)
18000 - 19000 kPa

max. (steering against stop)
(180 - 190 bar; 2610 - 2756 psi)
6 LS pressure (Load-Sensing): at 1500 rpm
0 kPa
min.
(0 bar; 0 psi)
18500 - 19000 kPa

max.
(185 - 190 bar; 2683 - 2756 psi)
7 LS pressure (steering) at 1500 rpm
0 kPa
min.
(0 bar; 0 psi)
17500 - 18000 kPa

max.
(175 - 180 bar; 2538 - 2610 psi)
270-15-052 Hydraulic pump delivery rate: at 2300 rpm

3
with 23 cm (1.4 cu.in.) hydraulic pump
54 L/min (14.3 U.S.gpm)
—measured at SCV
with 27 cm 3 (1.7 cu.in.) hydraulic pump

64 L/min (16.9 U.S.gpm)
—measured at SCV
Reference 270-15-052, Checking the Delivery Rate of the Hydraulic

Pump
Check the hydraulic pump′s rate of delivery
CAUTION:
Take safety precautions! See Reference 270-15-001 , "Safety Measures for Hydraulic Checks".
[1] - Connect testers FKM10472 (A) and FKM10470-4 (B)
[ Included in FKM10470 Pressure Measuring Sys. (Stage 1) ]

, as shown, to the SCV and place them so that values can be read from the operator′s station.
Flow measurement system
FKM10472
FKM10472
Check the hydraulic pump′s rate of delivery
[2] - Fully open the restrictor on the tester.
[3] - Set flow-regulating valve of SCVs to maximum through-flow.
[6] - Actuate an SCV, and pay attention to the direction of flow.
[7] - Read the rate of flow.
[8] - Repeat measurement with another SCV, and compare the results. Record the higher reading.
Delivery rate of hydraulic pump
23 cm 3 (1.4 cu in.) hydraulic pump 27 cm 3 (1.7 cu in.) hydraulic pump
54 liters per min (14.3 U.S.gpm) 64 liters per min (16.9 U.S.gpm)
Reference 270-15-070, Preparing Pressure Test

The following procedure describes how to connect pressure test kit FKM10482.
Pressure test kit
LEGEND:
A 38H1417
B 38H5069
C RE43774
D FKM10482-1
E AL80099
F FKM10482-2
Pressure test kit
FKM10482
Includes several adapters and fittings for the connection of pressure measuring systems.
[1] -
Remove support
Disengage center link and remove support (A).
[2] -
LEGEND:
B Pressure line
C 38H1417
Disconnect pressure line
Lower the rockshaft completely. Then disconnect pressure line (B) and seal connection with cap (C).
[3] -
Remove plugs
Remove cap (A) and plug (B).
→NOTE:
If it is intended to measure the LS pressure, the cap of the by-pass valve must also be removed.
[4] -
Valve spool and spring
Tractors with hydraulic trailer brake: Pull spool (C) and its spring out of the priority valve.
[5] -
Shuttle valve
Tractors with hydraulic trailer brake: Remove shuttle valve (D) from bore using a magnet.
[6] -
LEGEND:
A Valve spool of priority valve
B Shuttle valve
C Spring
Valve, exploded view
Tractors with hydraulic trailer brake: Apply a liberal coating of multipurpose grease to all parts and assemble them.
→NOTE:
The grease should prevent the spring and the shuttle valve from falling out during assembly.
[7] -
Install valve spool
Tractors with hydraulic trailer brake: Carefully install valve spool (A).
IMPORTANT:
When removing the pressure test kit later, repeat steps 4 through 7.
[8] -
LEGEND:
A Test port (AL80099)
B Guide (from available parts)
C Adapter (FKM10482-2)
D Adapter (FKM10482-1)
Install quick-coupler
Install the parts of the pressure test kit as shown.

Reference 270-15-071, Checking the LS Pressure
LS pressure test port
CAUTION:
Take safety precautions! See Reference 270-15-001 , Safety Measures for Hydraulic Checks.
[1] - Connect test equipment to test port (A) as shown, see Reference 270-15-070 , ”Preparing Pressure Test”.
CAUTION:
The tester must be installed in such a way that the operator can take a reading without endangering
himself. Stay well clear of the rockshaft.
[4] - Measure LS pressure: Place all control valves in neutral and read the pressure.
→NOTE:
During this testno pressure is measured since the LS oil is directed to sump pressure-free when all valves
are in neutral position.
Min. LS pressure Pressure 0 kPa
0 bar
0 psi
[5] - Measure max. LS pressure: Engage SCV and read the pressure.
Max. LS pressure Pressure 18500 to 19000 kPa
185 to 190 bar
2830 to 2756 psi
→NOTE:
Possible causes for an abnormal LS pressure reading:
Shuttle valve missing, defective or blocked by foreign objects.

Studs on hydraulic block not tightened properly.
Metering orifices in by-pass valve or priority valve blocked.
Valve springs or valve spool of by-pass valve defective.
Reference 270-15-072, Checking the System Pressure
System pressure test port
CAUTION:
CAUTION:
[4] - Measure min. system pressure: Place all control valves in neutral and read the pressure.
Min. system pressure (standby pressure): Pressure 1300 - 1500 kPa
13 - 15 bar
188 - 217 psi
[5] - Measure max. system pressure: Engage SCV and read the pressure.
"Max." system pressure: Pressure 19500 to 20000 kPa
195 to 200 bar
2830 to 2900 psi
→NOTE:
Possible causes for an abnormal system pressure reading:
Shuttle valve missing, defective or blocked by foreign objects.

Studs on valve block not tightened properly.
Leakage at a line or at the hydraulic pump within the differential housing.
Wear at the hydraulic pump.
Reference 270-15-073, Checking the Steering Pressure (Primary Circuit)
CAUTION:
CAUTION:
[4] - Measure min. steering pressure: Place the steering in neutral and read the pressure.
Min. steering pressure Pressure 1000 - 1500 kPa
10 - 15 bar
145 - 218 psi
[5] - Measure max. system pressure: Turn steering against its stop and hold it here.
Max. steering pressure Pressure 18000 - 19000 kPa
180 - 190 bar
2610 - 2756 psi
→NOTE:
→NOTE:
The pressure measured may be slightly lower on tractors up to serial no. 394893.
Reference 270-15-074, Checking the Braking Pressure of the Hydraulic

Trailer Brake (Primary Circuit)
CAUTION:
[1] - Connect test equipment to test port (A) as shown, see Reference 270-15-070 , ”Preparing Pressure Test”. (This is the
same test port as for the steering pressure test.)
CAUTION:
[4] - Depress the brake pedals with increasing force and measure the brake pressure. The brake pressure must be well
controllable with the pedal force.
Brake pressure Pressure 1000 to 13000 kPa
10 to 130 bar
145 - 1885 psi
→NOTE:
Reference 270-15-075, Checking the LS Pressure of the Steering System
Check LS pressure of steering system
CAUTION:
[1] - Engage park lock and apply handbrake. Remove rear wheel on r.h. side. See Reference ”Installing the front and rear
wheels” , in Section 80, Group 15 of the Repair manual.
[2] - Install T-Fitting (38H5069) and test port (AL80099) between hose and LS line of the steering system. Then connect test
equipment.
CAUTION:
Properly support r.h. final drive housing.
[5] - Measure min. steering pressure: Place the steering in neutral and read the pressure.
Min. LS pressure of steering system Pressure 0 kPa
0 bar
0 psi
[6] - Measure max. system pressure: Turn steering against its stop and hold it here.
Max. LS pressure of steering system Pressure 18000 kPa
180 bar
2610 psi
→NOTE:
Pressure Relief Valve Test
Pressure-relief valve
It is NOT possible to carry out a check directly on pressure-relief valve (A). If the specified value is not achieved in the system
check, a faulty pressure-relief valve may be the cause.
In exceptional circumstances, the pressure at which the pressure-relief valve trips may be altered.
IMPORTANT:
The pressure at which the pressure-relief valve trips must not be increased by more than 5 bar (73 psi).
Exceeding this value is potentially dangerous.
To increase pressure by 5 bar (73 psi), slacken off the locknut and turn the screw clockwise by 1/8 of a turn.
See also “PC Hydraulic System - Operation of Pressure-Relief Valve” .
Reference 270-15-091, Selective Control Valves — Checking for Leaks at

Couplers
CAUTION:
[1] -
CAUTION:
During the following test, make sure that everyone stays well clear of the SCVs.
Quick coupler
Pull the dust caps (A) off the couplers that are to be checked.
[2] - Switch the engine on and operate the relevant SCV.
Pushing the control lever forward makes the pressure rise at the upper coupler.
Pulling the control lever to rear makes the pressure rise at the lower coupler.
[3] - No oil should emerge from the oil leak-off hoses of the couplers.
[4] - Repeat the check with a pressure gauge connected to the relevant coupler.
Reference 270-15-110, Checking the Stepper Motor and Rockshaft Valve
CAUTION:
→NOTE:
A seized stepper motor will not create any diagnostic trouble codes.
Checking and centering the stepper motor
Stepper motor
Checking the stepper motor:
[1] - Turn ignition switch OFF.
[2] - Disconnect plug (A) and remove protective cap (B).
[3] - Use a screwdriver to press down the pin on the stepper motor and at the same time turn it until it clicks into place.
[4] - With slight resistance, it should be possible to turn the shaft about 1/4 of a turn in both directions. When released, the
shaft should return to its original position. If this is not the case, the stepper motor is damaged and must be replaced.
→NOTE:
Once the stepper motor has been taken out, carefully check whether any of the rockshaft valves are
stuck.
Centering the cam on the stepper motor:
Checking the rockshaft valve
CAUTION:
During this test, the three-point hitch rises and falls. Stay clear of the danger zone!
[1] - Run the engine. Disconnect the plug and take off the protective cap.
[2] - Use a screwdriver to press down the shaft on the stepper motor and turn it slightly until it engages.
[3] - Turn screwdriver clockwise (to the right) — rockshaft rises.
[4] - Turn screwdriver counterclockwise (to the left) — rockshaft drops.
[5] - When released, the shaft should return to its original position.
[6] - Turn the ignition off, put the protective cap on and reconnect the cable.
Possible causes of faults (assuming the stepper motor is functioning properly)

Rockshaft fails to respond or its See Reference 270-15-020 , “Checking the PC Hydraulic
Hydraulic problem.
reaction is insufficient System”
Shaft cannot be turned, or is very Pressure or discharge valve is See reference “Reconditioning the Rockshaft Valve” in the
stiff damaged relevant Repair manual.
See reference “Rockshaft Valve — Depth to Which Pressure and

The shaft is very slack (no Pressure and discharge
Discharge Valves are Screwed In” in the relevant Repair
resistance) valves set incorrectly
manual.
Reference 270-15-130, Rockshaft Valve — Checking for Leaks
CAUTION:
[1] - Put a load weighing approx. 800 kg (1700 lb) on the three-point hitch, and raise it to the highest position.
[2] - Install a dial indicator and place its contact point in the center of the draft link balls.
[3] - Switch the engine off and take the reading on the dial gauge.
Maximum permissible lowering of draft links within 3 minutes:
0.4 mm/min (0.016 in./min)
Possible cause, if not within specification:
Lowering valve, check valve or relief valve (in rockshaft valve) defective.
Rockshaft valve housing cracked.
Reference 270-15-131, Rockshaft Valve (Wide Version) — Checking the

Pressure-Relief Valve
LEGEND:
A Pressure gauge JT05473
B Accessory kit JDH43A
C Connector KJD10136
D Pressure relief valve
E Fitting plug R27474
F Test housing T37190
G D01019AA hand-operated hydraulic pump
Checking pressure relief valve of rockshaft
CAUTION:
IMPORTANT:
Opening pressure must never be higher than the figures given above, as this may result in damage to the
rockshaft.
→NOTE:
Before removing or installing the pressure-relief valve, see ”Repairing the Rockshaft Valve” in the Repair
manual, Section 70, Group 15.
[1] - Install pressure-relief valve (D) on test housing (F).
[2] - Connect the hand pump and pressure gauge (see illustration). Place the test housing in a suitable oil container.
[3] - Actuate hand-operated pump, and at the same time watch the pressure gauge to see the point at which the pressure
drops suddenly (i.e. the point at which the valve opens).
Opening pressure Pressure 20800 to 22200 kPa
208 to 222 bar
3017 to 3220 psi
Closing pressure Pressure 17000 kPa
170 bar
2470 psi
[4] - Carry out the test repeatedly to obtain accurate figures and ensure that the valve is functioning properly. If the opening
or closing pressures are not to specification, replace the pressure-relief valve with a new one.
Reference 270-15-132, Rockshaft Valve — Checking Depth to Which

Pressure and Discharge Valves are Screwed In
Checking clearance between ball bearing and valve spool
CAUTION:
[1] - Remove stepper motor.
[2] - Check clearance between ball bearing (A) and valve spool (B) using a feeler gauge.
Ball bearing to valve spool Clearance 0.1 to 0.2 mm
0.004 to 0.008 in.
Add or remove shims under valve sleeves (C), if necessary. Thickness of shim packs on l.h. and r.h. sides must be the same.
[3] - Make sure that valve sleeves (C) are tightened to the correct torque.
Valve sleeve Torque 90 N˙m
66 lb-ft
[4] - Install the stepper motor.
[5] -
IMPORTANT:
After adjustment, it is important to recalibrate the hitch control.
For calibration of rockshaft control, see Reference 245-BCU-002 , Calibration and Input Addresses for Rockshaft Control.
Reference 270-15-150, Rockshaft — Checking the Position Sensor
LEGEND:
A Position sensor
B Protective cap
Position sensor
[1] -
CAUTION:
Lower lift arms completely, shut engine off.
[2] - Check supply voltage. Access diagnostic addressBCU116 ; see Reference 245-05-002, ”Accessing the Addresses and
Diagnostic Trouble Codes”.
Power supply Voltage 4.75 - 5.25 volts
[3] - Check output voltage. Access diagnostic addressBCU108 ; see reference 245-05-002, ”Accessing the Addresses and
Diagnostic Trouble Codes”. Desired value with lift arms completely lowered:
Output voltage Voltage 3.5 - 4.5 volts
With the lift arms fully raised the reading should not be below 0.5 volt.
Over the entire range of movement the voltage change should be at least 1.5 volts.
If this does not occur, replace the position sensor (A).
Reference 270-15-151, Rockshaft Valve — Testing and Adjusting the

Draft Sensor
LEGEND:
A Shield
B Draft sensor
C Hex. socket screws
Shield
Sensor
CAUTION:
[1] - Check supply voltage. Access diagnostic address 116; see Reference 245-05-002 , "Accessing the Addresses and
Diagnostic Trouble Codes".
Power supply Voltage 4.75 - 5.25 volts
[2] - Check output voltage. Call up diagnostic address 105 for the right draft sensor. See Reference 245-05-002 , Calling up
Addresses and Diagnostic Trouble Codes.
Output voltage Voltage 2.4 - 2.6 volts
[3] - Adjust the draft sensor (output voltage):
IMPORTANT:
During the adjustment draft links must not be installed on the bearing pins.
a. Remove shield (A) from the bottom of the differential housing.

Section 270 - HYDRAULIC SYSTEM Group 20: Theory of Operation
b. Access diagnostic address 105.

c. Loosen the three hex. socket screws (C) on draft sensor (B).
d. Turn the draft sensor in the bearing pin until an output voltage reading of 2.5 volts is obtained.
e. Tighten the hex. socket screws evenly to 12 N˙m (9 lb-ft); the output voltage of 2.5 ± 0.1 volts must not change.
[4] - Reinstall shield (A). Make sure the sensor wire is not pinched.
[5] -
IMPORTANT:
After adjustment, it is important to recalibrate the hitch control.
For calibration of rockshaft control, see Reference 245-BCU-002 , "Calibration and Input Addresses for Rockshaft Control".

Reference 270-20-002, PC Hydraulic System — Summary of References
Operation of the PC hydraulic system is dealt with at the following reference points:
Reference 210-15-065 , Hydraulic circuit symbols

Reference 270-20-060 , PC Hydraulic System — Description
Reference 270-20-070 , PC Hydraulic System — Operation
Reference 270-20-080 , PC Hydraulic System — Symbolic Representation
Reference 270-20-090 , PC Hydraulic System — Schematic View
Reference 270-20-160 , PC Hydraulic System — Description of Hydraulic Pump
Reference 270-20-170 , PC Hydraulic System — Oil Lines of Hydraulic Pump
Reference 270-20-180 , PC Hydraulic System — Operation of Hydraulic Pump
Reference 270-20-190 , Filter Screen — Description
Reference 270-20-200 , Transmission Oil Cooler — Description
Reference 270-20-260 , PC Hydraulic System — Description and Arrangement of Shuttle Valves
Reference 270-20-290 , PC Hydraulic System — Description of Priority Valve and By-Pass Valve
Reference 270-20-300 , PC Hydraulic System — Operation of Priority Valve and By-Pass Valve
PC Hydraulic System - Operation of Pressure-Relief Valve
Reference 245-BCU-201 , Operation of Hitch Control
Reference 270-20-320 , Hitch — Description
Reference 270-20-330 , Hitch — Operation of Hitch Control
Reference 270-20-340 , Hitch — Operation of Hitch Valve
Reference 270-20-350 , Hitch — Operation of Position Sensor
Reference 270-20-360 , Hitch — Operation of Draft Sensor
Reference 270-20-370 , Hitch — Description of Controls
Reference 270-20-380 , Hitch — Direct Actuation
Reference 270-20-390 , 105, 205 and 305 Series Selective Control Valves — Description
Reference 270-20-480 , Couplers — Description
Reference 270-20-600 , 105 Series Selective Control Valves — Operation
Reference 270-20-625 , 305 Series Selective Control Valves — Flow Control
Reference 270-20-630 , LS Valve, Shuttle Valve and By-Pass Valve — Operation
Reference 270-20-060, PC Hydraulic System — Description

General information
In tractor hydraulics, a distinction is drawn between the transmission circuit (low-pressure circuit) and the high-pressure circuit.
Transmission oil circuit
The transmission oil circuit has a maximum oil pressure of2000 kPa (20 bar; 290 psi) and includes the transmission oil
pump, oil cooler, oil filter, various valves, transmission lube and the traction clutch, transmission, PTO, differential lock and
front wheel drive valves.
PC hydraulic system
The PC hydraulic system has a maximum oil pressure of20000 kPa (200 bar; 2900 psi) and includes the hydraulic pump,
main block with priority valve, hydrostatic steering, rockshaft valve, selective control valves, hydraulic oil filter, trailer brake
valve, Power Beyond valve and independent control valve.
The PC hydraulic system functions as an open-center system with Load-Sensing control.
Reference 270-20-070, PC Hydraulic System — Operation
→NOTE:
Description refers to the following legend and illustrations.
Hydraulic pump (12) draws oil from the sump (differential housing; 10) through filter screen (11) and conveys it to the priority
valve (14).
The priority valve controls the supply of high-pressure oil in such a way that priority is accorded to steering valve (39) and
hydraulic trailer brake valve (30). Once the steering system and trailer brake are supplied with oil, the priority valve gives
access to SCVs (2), (3) and (4) and to rockshaft valve (5).
System pressure changes to meet the needs of the sub-assemblies as they currently stand. This is achieved via the LS valves
and the various shuttle valves (29), which apply pilot pressure to the by-pass valve (15). As soon as LS
[ LS = Load Sensing ]
pressure is high enough to trip the by-pass valve, excess hydraulic oil flows with minimal energy-loss back to the sump.
If none of the hydraulic sub-assemblies are actuated, by-pass valve (6) trips at the moderate LS pressure of approx. 1500 kPa
(15 bar; 218 psi), thus directing excess oil out of the system and back to sump (10) with minimal energy-loss.
If the steering valve or hydraulic trailer brake valve are actuated, the LS pressure thus created activates priority valve (14) and
moves it to a position that guarantees a supply of high-pressure oil to both of the valves. Provided the hydraulic pump is
capable of delivering sufficient oil, the remaining sub-assemblies are also supplied with oil.
The oil pressure in the steering valve′s oil circuit is restricted to a max. of 17500 kPa (175 bar; 2540 psi) by pressure-limiting
valve (41).
If system pressure reaches 20000 kPa (200 bar; 2900 psi), pressure-limiting valve (16) starts to open, directing oil to the sump.
This is to protect the hydraulic and mechanical sub-assemblies from overloading.
In the housing of the rockshaft valve (5), pressure and discharge valves (19 and 18) ensure that rockshaft (6) is actuated.
These two valves are controlled by a stepper motor. To protect the rockshaft valve and hydraulic sub-assemblies from surges
in pressure, surge-relief valve (17) opens at a pressure of 22000 kPa (220 bar; 3190 psi), thus relieving the system. These
pressure surges are especially likely to occur when the tractor is driving with the implement raised.
Oil returning to the sump is used to provide an adequate supply of lube oil to the final drives via passage (13).
The reservoir (38) of brake valve (33) is filled with oil returning from the steering system.
Reference 270-20-080, PC Hydraulic System — Symbolic Representation
Hydraulic system - symbolic representation
LEGEND:
1 Endplate (l.h. side when viewed in direction of travel)
2 305 Series SCV with couplers
5 Valve block of hitch valve
6 Lift cylinder
7 Valve block of by-pass valve
8 Valve block of priority valve
9 Endplate (r.h. side when viewed in direction of travel)
10 Sump (differential housing)
11 Filter screen
12 Hydraulic pump
13 Final drive lubrication
14 Priority valve
15 By-pass valve
16 Pressure-limiting valve (system pressure)
17 Pressure-relief valve
18 Lowering valve
19 Raising valve
20 Valve spool (105 series SCV)
21 LS valve (pressure compensator)
24 Shut-off valve
25 Valve spool
26 Hydraulic detent
29 Shuttle valve
30 Trailer brake valve with coupler
31 Pressure-limiting valve
32 Control spool
33 Brake valve
34 L.h. brake piston
35 L.h. rear brake
36 R.h. rear brake
37 R.h. brake piston
38 Brake valve oil reservoir
39 Steering valve
40 Steering cylinder
41 Pressure-limiting valve
42 Damper
43 Pressure-relief valve (from serial no. 510729)
→NOTE:
To find out what the hydraulic symbols mean, see Reference 210-15-065 , Hydraulic Circuit Symbols.
→NOTE:
For a symbolic representation of the two-stage brake brake valve, see Reference 260-20-31 , “Two-Stage
Brake Valve, Operation”.
Reference 270-20-090, PC Hydraulic System — Schematic View
Hydraulic system - schematic view
LEGEND:
1 SCV with couplers
2 Shuttle valve
3 Main block with by-pass valve and priority valve
4 Rockshaft valve
5 Trailer brake valve with coupler
[ If equipped ]
6 Check valve with restrictor

[ If equipped ]
7 Rockshaft cylinder
8 Sump (differential housing)
9 Annular passage in brake piston
10 Filter screen
11 Final drive lubrication
12 Hydraulic pump
13 Differential drive shaft
14 To transmission oil pump
15 Brake valve
16 Steering cylinders
17 Steering valve
18 Steering neutral
19 Steering actuated
20 Attenuator
21 High-pressure oil
22 High-pressure oil for brakes
23 Pilot oil
24 Pressure-free or return oil
Reference 270-20-160, PC Hydraulic System — Description of Hydraulic
Pump
Hydraulic pump
Hydraulic pump
[ Constant flow pump ]

(A) supplies the sub-assemblies of the hydraulic system with oil.
The pump is a gear-type design with external gearing. It is located inside the differential housing and is driven directly by the
engine.
Depending on type, the hydraulic pump has a maximum delivery rate of 23 cm 3 (1.4 cu in.) or 27 cm 3 (1.7 cu in.) per
revolution.
At an engine speed of 2300 rpm, the flow rate is 54 l/min (14.25 U.S.gal/min) or 63 l/min (16.7 U.S.gal/min).
Reference 270-20-170, PC Hydraulic System — Oil Lines of Hydraulic

Pump
LEGEND:
A From sump
B To main block (priority valve)
C Return from main block
Lines at the hydraulic pump
Lines at the hydraulic pump
Reference 270-20-180, PC Hydraulic System—Operation of Hydraulic

Pump
Hydraulic Pump
LEGEND:
A Housing
B Driving gear
C Driven gear
D From sump
E To main block
F High-pressure oil
G Pressure-free oil
Basically, the pump consists of housing, cover, base plate, two externally-toothed gears and two gear bearing plates.
The gears in the pump mesh with one another. The drive shaft drives gear (B), which in turn drives the other gear (C).
As the gears rotate, the teeth that have just stopped meshing trap the oil between the gears and the housing, and oil is
expelled from the outlet side.
As the teeth mesh with one another again, they prevent the oil from flowing back to the inlet side.
The pump bearings are balanced hydrostatically.
The two bearing plates are supported by system pressure passing through holes; this reduces the axial play of the gears, thus
increasing the efficiency of the pump. At the same time, it also lubricates the pump.
Reference 270-20-190, Filter Screen — Description
Filter screen
Filter screen (A) is located in the sump of the differential housing; it protects the hydraulic oil pump and transmission oil pump
from impurities in the hydraulic oil.
Reference 270-20-200, Transmission Oil Cooler — Description

LEGEND:
A Oil cooler
B Connecting lines
Transmission oil cooler
Oil cooler (A) is located in front of the radiator in the airstream of the fan. The excess oil delivered by the transmission oil pump
is fed through the oil cooler, where it loses its heat to the ambient air.
→NOTE:
The version shown in the illustration is a combined unit, as it incorporates the condenser of the air-
conditioning system.
The oil cooler reduces the temperature of the transmission/hydraulic oil, thus protecting the components of the transmission
and hydraulic system against overheating. A cooler-relief valve is installed upstream from the oil cooler in order to protect the
cooler against excessive pressure.
Reference 270-20-260, PC Hydraulic System — Description and

Arrangement of Shuttle Valves
Arrangement of the Shuttle Valves
Shuttle valves
LEGEND:
A Shuttle valves
B Shuttle valve only if an external control valve is connected
C Left endplate
Regardless of type or number of SCVs installed, viewed in direction of travel, shuttle valves (A) are always installed in the
recess provided on the l.h. side of the SCVs. For exceptions, see below.
IMPORTANT:
A shuttle valve (B) is only ever installed between left-hand endplate (C) and the leftmost SCV if
something such as a front-loader control valve is connected to endplate (C).
The shuttle valves pass on the strongest signal from the consumers to the by-pass valve in the main block, which then pumps
oil under pressure to the consumers.
Additional shuttle valves
Shuttle valve with hydraulic trailer brake valve
If an hydraulic trailer brake is equipped, a further shuttle valve (D) is installed in the trailer brake′s LS line.
Reference 270-20-290, PC Hydraulic System — Description of Priority

Valve and By-Pass Valve
Priority valve
Thepriority valve is installed in the valve block at location (A).
The priority valve ensures that - when necessary - the steering valve and hydraulic trailer brake valve (if equipped) receive
pressure oil with priority over all other hydraulic sub-assemblies.
Theby-pass valve is installed in the valve block at location (B).
When there is no requirement for high-pressure oil, the by-pass valve feeds excess oil from the hydraulic pump back to the
sump with minimal energy-loss.
There is also arelief valve in the valve block; it limits the pressure of the pump.
Apressure-limiting valve restricts steering pressure to between 175 to 180 bar (2540 - 2610 psi). This valve is installed in
the steering unit (steering valve).
Reference 270-20-300, PC Hydraulic System — Operation of Priority

Valve and By-Pass Valve
Priority Valve and By-Pass Valve — Operation
LEGEND:
A Sump/reservoir
B Filter screen
C Hydraulic pump
D Check valve
E Priority valve
F System pressure (as control pressure)
G Spring
H LS signal from steering or hydraulic trailer brake
I LS signal of SCVs or rockshaft valve
J Spring
K By-pass valve
L System pressure (as control pressure)
M Pressure limiting valve
N Return passage to sump
O LS passage (SCV and rockshaft valve)
P Pressure passage (SCV and rockshaft valve)
Q Pressure line to hydraulic trailer brake valve
R Pressure line to steering valve
S LS line (steering valve)
T LS line (hydraulic trailer brake valve)
U Shuttle valve
V To lubrication of final drives, and to sump
The priority valve gives priority to supplying oil under pressure to the steering system (R) and to the trailer brake (Q). The
priority valve receives a return signal from the steering and brake in the form of LS pressure (H), which together with spring (G)
acts on the top end of the valve, preventing the valve from tripping. This is the primary circuit, as the primary intention is to
keep the steering system and trailer brake supplied with sufficient oil at all times.
LS pressure and spring force hold the priority valve in the primary position until there is no need for more oil under pressure at
the steering system and brake. The drop in LS pressure means that oil pressure (F) becomes strong enough on the underside of
the valve to push the spool against spring (G). This is the secondary circuit, as the secondary intention is to supply oil under
pressure to the selective control valves and rockshaft valve.
An intermediate position may be attained if the steering system and hydraulic trailer brake require only a small quantity of oil.
In this situation, any remaining oil returns to the secondary circuit.
While the selective control valves and rockshaft valve are in operation, by-pass valve (K) has the task of changing system
pressure to meet the current requirements.
Pump pressure (C) acts on the one side, while LS pressure (control pressure) from the consumers plus spring force act on the
other.
If pump pressure exceeds the pressure of the oil demanded by the consumers and the force of the spring together, the by-pass
valve moves to a position in which it directs excess oil directly into sump (A). This has the advantage that excess oil flows away
with minimal energy loss.
Priority valve (E) and by-pass valve (K) constantly change their positions in response to requirements.
When in operation, system pressure is monitored continuously by pressure-limiting valve (M), which opens as soon as 20000
kPa (200 bar; 2900 psi) is exceeded, thus directing oil into the sump.
PC Hydraulic System - Operation of Pressure-Relief Valve
Pressure-relief valve
Pressure-relief valve (A) is installed as standard from tractor serial number 510729.
The pressure-relief valve protects the hydraulic system against the dangerous pressure spikes that may occur on implements.
Pressure-relief valve, trip point Pressure 205 bar
(2973 psi)
Reference 270-20-320, Rockshaft — Description
LEGEND:
A Rockshaft cylinder
B Draft force pin or load control shaft
C Stepper motor
D Rockshaft valve
E Position sensor
Rockshaft
Rockshaft
The tractor has two external rockshaft cylinders (A) designed to raise and lower the three-point hitch and implement.
The movement of the rockshaft cylinders is controlled by rockshaft valve (E). The rockshaft valve is actuated by a stepper
motor (C).
The rockshaft is controlled by the Basic Control Unit (BCU
[ BCU = Basic Control Unit ]

).
Reference 270-20-330, Rockshaft — Operation of Rockshaft Control

General information
Operation of rockshaft control
LEGEND:
A Operation unit
B Basic control unit (BCU)
C Position sensor
D Hydraulic pump
E Stepper motor
F Rockshaft valve
G Draft force pin with draft sensor
H Draft link
Hydraulic pump (D) transfers pressurized oil via the main valve block to rockshaft valve (F), which controls the rockshaft
cylinders. The rockshaft cylinders act on draft links (H), enabling implements to be raised or lowered.
The rockshaft assembly is controlled electronically.
Electronic control unit (B) receives the preset desired values from the operation unit (A) and the actual values from draft sensor
(G) or position sensor (C).
These values are coordinated in electronic control unit (B) before being passed on to stepper motor (E). The stepper motor
opens the pressure or discharge valve in the rockshaft valve assembly by means of a cam.
Operating with depth control
In depth control, the preset desired value at operation unit (A) is coordinated with the actual value from position sensor (C).
Operating with load control
In load control, the preset desired value at operation unit (A) is coordinated with the actual load value at draft sensor(s) (G).
Reference 270-20-340, Rockshaft — Operation of Rockshaft Valve
Rockshaft valve (wide version)
LEGEND:
A Stepper motor
B Cam
C Valve seat
D Valve spool
E Pressure valve
F From hydraulic pump
G Check valve
H To lift cylinders
K Pressure-limiting valve
L Discharge valve
M Return passage
N High-pressure oil
O LS oil (LS pressure)
P Return oil
→NOTE:
Rockshaft valves are shown in their ”raise” position.
The rockshaft valve supplies the rockshaft cylinders with high-pressure oil.
The rockshaft valve comprises the pressure and discharge valves (E) and (L), check valve (G), pressure-limiting valve (K) and
stepper motor (A).
During thelifting process, stepper motor (A) receives a signal from the electronic control unit and rotates cam (B), which raises
valve spool (D) from the seat (C) of pressure valve (E). High-pressure oil (N) can now flow through check valve (G) to the two
rockshaft cylinders.
During thelowering process, discharge valve (L) is opened by the cam and the oil flows out of the rockshaft cylinders under
the pressure of the suspended load.
When the rockshaft valve is in its neutral position, check valve (G) traps the hydraulic oil in the rockshaft cylinders and
prevents the lift arms from lowering when the engine is shut off.
Pressure-limiting valve (K) reduces pressure peaks caused when transporting heavy implements.
Load-Sense oil (O) gives a signal to the hydraulic pump, which then pumps high-pressure oil (N) as required.
Rockshaft valve (narrow version)
LEGEND:
A Stepper motor
B Cam
C Valve seat
D Valve spool
E Pressure valve
F From hydraulic pump
G Check valve
H To lift cylinders
K Pressure-limiting valve
L Discharge valve
M Return passage
N High-pressure oil
O LS oil (LS pressure)
P Return oil
Reference 270-20-350, Rockshaft — Operation of Position Sensor

LEGEND:
A Housing
B Lift shaft support
C Rockshaft
D Toothed segment
E Toothed segment
F Sender
Position sensor
The position sensor is mounted on the front (as seen in the direction of travel) of the lift shaft support. It consists of housing
(A), two segments (E and D) and sender (F).
The position sensor passes the lift arm position as an actual value to the HCU. The position is transferred via segment (D) on lift
shaft (C) and segment (E) in housing (A) to sender (F).
The control unit compares the lift arm position with the desired values from the control console as commanded by the operator
in order to reach a “decision” as to whether any lift arm movement is required. If movement is required, the stepper motor
receives a corresponding command.
Reference 270-20-360, Rockshaft — Operation of Draft Sensor

LEGEND:
A Magnet
B Draft sensor
C Differential housing
D Pin
E Metal rod
F Draft force
G Draft link
H Bearing pin
Draft sensor
The two draft sensors in the draft link bearing pin (draft force pin) at the bottom of the differential housing provide the actual
implement draft force value (F) to the electronic control unit that controls the rockshaft.
The draft sensors (B) need to be in a specific position and require adjustment.
The bearing pins (H) are held in place by a pin (D).
Inside the bearing pins there is a metal rod (E) with a magnet (A) over a sensor (B). When bearing pins (H) are flexed by the
draft force (F) of the draft links, the metal rod is displaced. The resultant magnetic field alteration (Hall effect) is received by
the sensor and passed to the electronic control unit. The function is produced only in a horizontal direction.
Reference 270-20-370, Rockshaft — Description of Controls

LEGEND:
B Raising/lowering switch
C Rate-of-drop control
D Raise-limit control
E Depth control stop
Controls on console on r.h. side
→NOTE:
Refer to the Operator′s Manual of your tractor to find out how to set the different operating modes of the
rockshaft.
The rockshaft controls are electrical components, namely one switch and four potentiometers. They are grouped together in
one control unit and located on the right side console.
These controls are used to set the desired values for controlling the rockshaft.
Depth adjustment control (A) and raising/lowering switch (B) are used to raise or the rockshaft. If depth adjustment control (A)
is moved from position “9” (fully lowered) towards the “0” position (max. raised height) on the scale, the rockshaft will rise;
conversely, it will drop if the control is moved from “0” to “9”. If the top part of raising/lowering switch (B) is pressed, the
rockshaft will rise. Pressing the bottom part of the switch makes the rockshaft drop.
Control knobs (C) and (D) are used to set the speed at which the rockshaft drops and the maximum height to which the
rockshaft rises. If you start with control knob (C) turned to the r.h. stop (max. drop speed) and turn it counterclockwise, you will
reduce the speed at which the rockshaft drops. If you start with control knob (D) turned to the r.h. stop (max. height) and turn
it counterclockwise, you will limit the height to which the rockshaft rises.
By pressing and turning the depth control stop (E) you can adjust the stop that limits movement of the depth adjustment
control (A).
Reference 270-20-380, Rockshaft — Direct Actuation
Direct Actuation
CAUTION:
When testing the rockshaft, the lift arms pose a risk of injury as they rise. For this reason, keep well
clear of the working area of the lift and draft links.
In the event of electrical failure, the rockshaft can be controlled as follows:
[1] - Disconnect cable connection (A) at the stepper motor.
[2] - Remove cap (B), which protects the pin on the stepper motor.
[4] - From the operator′s seat, use a screwdriver to press down the stepper motor pin until it engages, then turn slowly to the
right for RAISING, or left for LOWERING.
Reference 270-20-390, 105, 205 and 305 Series Selective Control Valves
— Description
LEGEND:
A 305 Series SCV
B 205 Series SCV
C 105 Series SCV
305 and 205 SCVs
205 and 105 SCVs
Control knob on 305 series SCV
The selective control valves (SCVs) are of the double-acting spool type, and are actuated mechanically via bowden cables.
Operating the 305 series SCV:
In position (A), the control lever remains in the ”Raise” or ”Lower” position until it is moved manually.
In position (B), the control lever moves to ”neutral” as soon as it is released. Maximum obtainable oil flow varies
depending on delivery rate of the hydraulic pump.
In position (C), the control lever remains in the ”Raise” or ”Lower” position until the pressure in the oil circuit has reached
a predetermined value (e.g. when the remote control cylinder has reached its end position).
Functions:
The different SCVs function as follows:
105 Series:
Raise
Neutral
Lower
205 Series:
Raise
Neutral
Lower
Float position
305 Series:
Raise
Neutral
Lower
Float position
Flow control valve
Flow control (305 series SCVs):
Flow control
The flow control valve (see arrow) is used to regulate the flow at the upper quick-coupler. This allows, for example, that travel
speeds of implement hydraulic cylinders are adjusted. This function is available for 305 series SCVs only.
IMPORTANT:
The minimum time for full extension and retraction of a remote cylinder must be above 1.5 seconds.
Faster speeds may cause damage.
Reference 270-20-480, Couplers — Description
DeLuxe and Standard couplers
LEGEND:
A DeLuxe coupler
B Standard coupler
There are two variants of coupler, both of which operate as breakaway couplers. They comply with ISO 5675.
On the standard version (B), the connection can be broken while there is still pressure on the implement side.
On the DeLuxe version (A), the connection can be made or broken under pressure.
Reference 270-20-600, 105 Series Selective Control Valves — Operation
105 Series
Neutral position: The valve is in neutral position when the valve spool is in position (0). It is kept in this position by spring
(M). That means, the valve spool is neither pushed nor pulled. In this position, channels to connections (D) and (I) are closed.
Connecting passage (E) is connected to return channel (A) via relief bore (H).
Valve spool pushed: When the valve spool is moved to position (1), pressure oil flows from channel (F) to LS valve (H) via
channel (G). From there, the pressure oil is directed to connection (D) via connecting passage (E). Connection (I) is closed.
Valve spool pulled: When the valve spool is moved to position (2), pressure oil flows from channel (F) to LS valve (H) via
channel (G). From there, the pressure oil is directed to connection (I) via connecting passage (E). Connection (D) is closed.
LS valve and shuttle valve: With SCV engaged (position 1 or 2) the oil pressure in connecting passage (E) increases until
pressure oil is no longer required or until the pressure is limited by the pressure limiting valve
[ Not shown ]
at 20500 kPa (205 bar; 2973 psi). During this process, the shuttle valve
[ Not shown ]
which is connected to connecting passage (E), directs the LS signal to the by-pass valve
[ Not shown ]
, which adjusts the system pressure to the requirements.
While the SCV is engaged, the LS valve (H) ensures that the oil pressure at connections (I) and (D) remain almost constant,
even if several SCVs are in operation at the same time.
See Reference 270-20-630 , LS Valve, Shuttle Valve and By-Pass Valve — Operation in this Group.
205 Series
Connecting passage (E) is connected to return channel (A) via relief bore (R).
channel (G). From there, the pressure oil is directed to connection (D) via connecting passage (E). Connection (I) is closed.
channel (G). From there, the pressure oil is directed to connection (I) via connecting passage (E). Connection (D) is closed.
Float position: When the valve spool is pulled to position (3), it is locked by spring loaded balls (O) and held in this position. In
this position, both connections (D) and (I) as well as connecting passage (E) are connected to the return channel (A). The
shuttle valve
[ Not shown ]
closes the connection to the LS channel since the stand-by pressure is higher than the pressure at one of the connections (D)
or (I).
LS valve and shuttle valve: With SCV engaged (position 1 or 2) the oil pressure in the connecting passage increases until
[ Not shown ]
[ Not shown ]
[ Not shown ]
, which adjusts the system pressure to the requirements. When several SCVs are engaged at the same time, the shuttle valves
always direct the highest pressure to the by-pass valve.
305 Series
Channels (F) and (G) are pressure-free.
channel (G). From there, the pressure oil is directed to connection (D) via connecting passage (E). Connection (I) is connected
to return channel (A).
channel (G). From there, the pressure oil is directed to connection (I) via connecting passage (E). Connection (D) is connected
to return channel (A).
Float position: When the valve spool is pulled to position (3), it is locked by spring loaded balls (O) and held in this position. In
this position, both connections (D) and (I) as well as connecting passage (E) are connected to the return channel (A). The
shuttle valve
[ Not shown ]
closes the connection to the LS channel since the stand-by pressure is higher than the pressure in one of the connections (D) or
(I).
LS valve and shuttle valve: With SCV engaged (position 1 or 2) the oil pressure in the connecting passage increases until
[ Not shown ]
[ Not shown ]
[ Not shown ]
, which adjusts the system pressure to the requirements. When several SCVs are engaged at the same time, the shuttle valves
always direct the highest pressure to the by-pass valve.
Operating Modes: Knob (L) allows to pre-select three different detent functions.
Automatic detent — The valve spool engages in the detent when activated and returns to neutral position automatically
as soon as the pressure exceeds 18000 kPa (180 bar; 2610 psi).At 18000 kPa (180 bar; 2610 psi), a valve
[ Not shown ]
installed in the SCV opens a channel through which pressure oil flows to the top side of cam ring (N) moving pin (Q) down.
This causes the balls (O) to release the detent and the valve spool moves to neutral position.
No detent — The valve spool returns to neutral as soon as the control lever is released. At this, detent sleeve (K) is in a
position that prevents balls (O) from engaging in the detent. The valve spool is moved to neutral position (0) by spring
(M).In float position, the valve spool automatically engages in the detent.
Continuous detent — The valve spool must be moved back to neutral position manually using the control lever.When
the SCV is engaged, the oil pressure created in channel (S) causes piston (R) to push pin (Q) up which in turn presses
balls (O) outward into detent sleeve (K). The valve spool must be moved to neutral position manually to overcome the
detent.
An SCV that is in a detent position is moved to neutral position automatically when the engine is shut off. As soon as there is no
more oil pressure acting on piston (R), spring (P) can push pin (Q) down. In doing so, balls (O) move inward and the detent is
released (illustration shows neutral position). This does not apply, if the SCV is engaged in float position.
Flow control: Knob (J) allows the amount of oil flowing between connections (D) and (I) to be regulated. This allows, for
example, the travel speed of a remote cylinder to be controlled. For detailed information on the theory of operation, see
Reference 270-20-625 , 305 Series Selective Control Valves — Flow Control
Reference 270-20-625, 305 Series Selective Control Valves — Flow

Control
The 305 series SCV is equipped with a flow control valve which can be adjusted with a knob. The valve influences the operation
of the LS valve, which means that it is possible to manually intervene with the automatic flow rate adjustment.
The flow of the SCV can be varied through the entire range using the knob.
Reference 270-20-630, LS Valve, Shuttle Valve and By-Pass Valve —

Operation
Pressure compensator and shuttle valve
The following description explains the interaction between LS valve, shuttle valve and by-pass valve:
There is a continuous flow of pressure oil from hydraulic pump (A) to channel (M) of the SCV. If no valve is actuated, by-pass
valve (B) regulates the system pressure to approx. 1300 to 1500 kPa (13 to 15 bar; 188 to 217 psi). This pressure corresponds
MISCELLANEOUS (g) by Belgreen v2.0
to the force required to switch the by-pass valve against spring (C) to a position where oil is directed to the return channel. In
this way, the standby pressure in the hydraulic system is created. No LS pressure is created in this situation.
When an SCV is now engaged (shown on r.h. side of illustration), pressure oil flows into channel (F) opening the LS valve
(pressure compensator
[ The LS valve operates like a pressure compensator. ]

) (G) against spring (H). Pressure oil is then directed to the upper connection (I) and to the shuttle valve (K) via connecting
passage (J). The shuttle valve moves towards the lowest pressure and opens the LS channel to by-pass valve (B). There,
pressure is built up which corresponds to the pressure at connection (I) and supports spring (C) during closure of the by-pass
valve. This allows the pump to increase the system pressure.
At the same time, pressure oil flows to the spring side (H) of LS valve (G) via LS channel (L). Consequently, as soon as the
pressure build-up at the SCV connection is completed, the pressure oil coming via LS channel (L) supports spring (H) causing
the LS valve (G) to close. This means that each SCV is only supplied with the oil pressure that is actually required. This also
allows that several SCVs can be supplied with different pressures at the same time. The system pressure then always depends
on the SCV requiring the highest pressure.
Once the required pressure has been obtained and the pressure compensator is closed, pressure in connecting passage (J) and
in LS channel (L) will no longer increase. The pump pressure now overcomes the force of spring (C) and LS pressure and by-
pass valve (B) opens. This directs excess oil to the return channel to avoid further increase of the system pressure.
To protect the hydraulic system against excessive oil pressure, LS channel (L) is equipped with pressure limiting valve (D)
which opens a connection to the return channel at approx. 20000 kPa (200 bar; 2900 psi).
Section 280 - MISCELLANEOUS

Table of contents
Reference 280-10-001, Various Operational Tests, Summary of References ....................................... 1
Reference 280-10-010, Operational Test on Front-Wheel Drive Axle ................................................... 2
Check Positive Front Wheel Lead at Front-Wheel Drive Axle ................................................................ 4
Reference 280-15-001, Various Tests and Adjustments, Summary of References ............................... 6
Correcting the nitrogen precharge ....................................................................................................... 7
Reference 280-15-015, Checking Front Hitch for Leaks ..................................................................... 11
Reference 280-20-001, Theory of Operation, Summary of References .............................................. 12
Reference 280-20-008, Front Hitch Functional Group - Identification ................................................. 13
Reference 280-20-009, Circuit Plan - Front Hitch ............................................................................... 14
Reference 280-20-010, Operation of Multi-Valve ................................................................................ 16
Section 280 - MISCELLANEOUS Group 10: Operational Check-Out

Reference 280-10-001, Various Operational Tests, Summary of
References
Reference 280-10-010 , Operational Test on Front-Wheel Drive Axle
Reference 280-10-015 , Checking Positive Front Wheel Lead on Front-Wheel Drive Axle
Reference 280-10-010, Operational Test on Front-Wheel Drive Axle

Before the operational check:
[1] - Perform a visual check. Pay attention to possible damage on front wheel drive axle, rims and tires. Also pay attention to
oil leakage at steering cylinder and axle.
[2] - Tighten all wheel bolts to the specified torque and check the tire pressure. See relevant Operator′s Manual.
[3] - Check all oil levels.
Correct oil levels, see references "Planetary Drive — Fill with Oil" in Group 10 and "Axle Housing — Fill with Oil" in Group 20 in
the relevant Component Technical Manual (CTM).
[4] - Evaluating the tire profile of the front wheels:
More wear on the outside indicates too much toe-in

More wear on the inside indicates not enough or even negative toe-in
See reference "Checking and Adjusting Tread (Basic Adjustment)" in Group 05 of the relevant Component Technical Manual
(CTM) and in the relevant Operator′s Manual.
→NOTE:
Tire profile deformations may occur depending on the tractor operating conditions. If, for example, the
tractor is often operated on the road the profile will show V-shaped wear.
The following must also be noted: If tire problems occur on tractors that are driven a lot on roads, bear in
mind how the road surface is constructed. There is often a pronounced camber, with the road falling
away to either side. If the tractor is driven frequently on such a surface, the outside of the right tire
tread (left where traffic drives on the left) will wear out more quickly than the tread on the inside of the
same tire. The tread on the opposite tire is not affected.
Operational check:
CAUTION:
Take extra care to avoid personal injury during these checks. Always perform checks which involve
driving the tractor on an area that is large enough, well visible and not open to public traffic.
CAUTION:
Follow safety and repair instructions, see reference "General Safety and Repair Information" in Group 01
in the relevant Component Technical Manual (CTM).
[1] - Pay attention to unusual noise and reactions of the front wheel drive axle at all times when performing the following
steps.
[2] - Start the engine, run it at mid idle, keep the tractor stationary and steer in both directions.
Neither the wheels nor the fenders must contact the tractor at full turn.
[3] - Drive the tractor forward at walking speed and turn the steering wheel alternately fully left and right.
[4] - Drive the tractor forward at medium speed and slowly turn the steering wheel by max. 1/8 of a turn left and right.
CAUTION:
Depending on tires and ballast, the tractor may get out of control. In this case, stop the check
immediately and re-start with smaller steering movements.
[5] - Drive the tractor at walking speed and while describing a circle as small as possible alternately turn the front-wheel drive
on and off.
When turning on the front-wheel drive, the u.j. shaft and the planetary drives will heavily distort. Slipping of the front wheel
drive clutch and/or of the front tires (the tractor pushes over the front wheels and understeers) occurs.
If no distortion of the driveline or increase in slippage occurs, the following points must be considered:
Electrical problems (see Sections 40 and 240 of the relevant Technical Manual for a solution)
1. Defective fuse or relay of the front wheel drive clutch

2. Defective switch of the front wheel drive clutch
3. Defective solenoid valve
4. Open circuit
Mechanical problems (see Sections 56 and 256 of the relevant Technical Manual for a solution)
1. Solenoid valve stuck or oil channel restricted

2. Lack of oil pressure to switch the front wheel drive clutch
3. Defective clutch piston rings
4. Heavy wear on clutch disks
5. Fault at the output of the front wheel drive clutch
[6] - Drive the tractor straight ahead at medium speed and alternately turn the front-wheel drive on and off. Pay attention to
the front wheel slip.
Increased slippage will be noticed during this check if the wrong tire combination has been selected. In the long run, this will
result in excessive tire wear. When driving on hard surfaces with front wheel drive engaged, a wrong tire combination will
result in increased wear of the front wheel drive clutch.
→NOTE:
When disengaging the vehicle clutch, an increased braking effect can be noticed as soon as the front
wheel drive is turned on.
See "Tire Combinations" in the Operator′s Manual and reference "Positive Front Wheel Lead Check" in this Group.
[7] - Run the engine at idle speed and drive the tractor straight ahead in low gear. From time to time, create a load change by
tapping on the foot throttle. Doing this will result in loud knocking sounds if backlash between pinion shaft and ring gear is
excessive.
Correcting the backlash requires a great deal of repair work. Adjust the backlash only if the noise is unusually loud, see
references "Repair Differential (00.16 Axle)" and "Repair Differential (20.09, 20.09C, 20.11 and 20.16 Axles)" in Group 20 in the
relevant Component Technical Manual (CTM).
IMPORTANT:
It must be clearly identified where the noises come from. The rear axle differential and the transmission
gears will also cause noises during this check.
[8] - For unusual noises during one of the checks, see reference "Noises when Driving with Front-Wheel Drive Engaged" in
Section 212, Group 80.
For unusual vibrations during one of the checks, see reference "Unusual Vibrations when Driving with Front-Wheel Drive
Engaged" in Section 212, Group 80.
Check Positive Front Wheel Lead at Front-Wheel Drive Axle
Check positive front wheel lead at front-wheel drive axle
Positive front wheel lead: 1.5 to 4%
→NOTE:
Observe correct positive front wheel lead. Incorrect front wheel lead causes excessive wear of tires and
other components.
[1] - Check tire inflation pressure.
[2] - Mark drive flange of front wheel drive axle (A) and the flange of universal jointed shaft (B) (see arrows).
[3] - Secure universal jointed shaft with a rope as shown.
[4] -
CAUTION:
With tractor running, stay clear of moving parts.
Switch on front wheel drive and drive the tractor slowly forward in the lowest gear until the drive flange of the front wheel drive
axle has turned 25 times.
Section 280 - MISCELLANEOUS Group 15: Tests and Adjustments
→NOTE:
When the drive flange has turned 25 times, the universal jointed shaft should have turned 25.5 to 26
times, which represents a positive front wheel lead of between 2% and 4%. If positive front wheel lead is
not correct, check the tire combination (see Operator′s Manual).

Reference 280-15-001, Various Tests and Adjustments, Summary of
References
Reference 280-15-010 , Checking Accumulator of Front Hitch
Reference 280-15-015 , Checking Front Hitch for Leaks
Reference 280-15-010, Checking Accumulator of Front Hitch

The check consists of:
Checking the accumulator′s nitrogen precharge

Correcting the nitrogen precharge
Checking the accumulator′s nitrogen precharge

( 1 ) Preparing for the check
Action:
Remove attached implements (front and rear)

Lower the front hitch to the ground
Turn the front wheels to the right
Turn the engine off
Result:
YES: GO TO 2
( 2 ) Installing the FKM10474 fill-and-check device
Action:
CAUTION:
Wear safety goggles when working on accumulators. Be careful when opening the reservoir valve and
pressure regulator.
IMPORTANT:
To avoid damaging the fill and check device, the accumulator fill screw must be loosened with a hex
socket wrench (size: 6 mm) by approx. 1/4 turn, before the device is connected. Turn knurled screw (B)
clockwise to close the drain valve.
Remove the accumulator seal nut. Screw FKM10474 fill and check device onto the connection of the accumulator.
LEGEND:
A Lever
B Knurled screw
C Pressure gauge
Installing the FKM10474 fill-and-check device
Result:
YES: GO TO 3 (checking the nitrogen precharge).
( 3 ) Check nitrogen precharge
Action:
[1] - Simultaneously push lever (A) in and turn it until it engages in the hex socket of the fill screw.
LEGEND:
A Lever
B Knurled screw
C Pressure gauge
Installing the FKM10474 fill-and-check device
[2] - Turn lever (A) counterclockwise to open the fill screw. It is audible when nitrogen flows to pressure gauge (C) where the
pressure can be read. Once the pressure stops increasing, close the fill screw.
5620 to 5820 tractors

Front hitch accumulator, nitrogen precharge Pressure 3900 ±100 kPa
39 ±1 bar
565 ±14.5 psi
If there is a deviation of more than ±100 kPa (1 bar; 14.5 psi), the pressure must be corrected.
Result:
YES:GO TO Remove the fill and check device .
NO:If pressure is too high, slightly loosen knurled screw (B). Allow nitrogen to escape until the desired value is obtain, then re-
tighten knurled screw (B). Then GO TO Remove the fill and check device .
NO:If pressure is too low, the accumulator must be charged. GO TO Filling the accumulator with nitrogen .
Correcting the nitrogen precharge

( 1 ) Preparing to fill with nitrogen
Action:
GO TO Checking the accumulator′s nitrogen precharge .
Result:
YES: GO TO 2 (Filling the accumulator with nitrogen).
( 2 ) Filling the accumulator with nitrogen
Action:
[1] - If the pressure test shows less than 3800 kPa (8380 bar; 565 psi), the accumulator must be charged. Take into account
the measuring tolerance of the pressure gauge.
CAUTION:
Wear safety goggles when working on accumulators. Be careful when opening the reservoir valve and
pressure regulator.
CAUTION:
Only nitrogen should be used to increase the accumulator nitrogen precharge. There is a risk of
explosion if oxygen or air is used.
Never exceed the accumulator operating pressure, maximum nitrogen precharge pressure and pressure
gauge capacity. For this reason a pressure reducer with safety device must be installed. For filling to be
possible the residual pressure in the nitrogen bottle must exceed the accumulator pressure.
[2] - Turn knurled screw (G) clockwise to close the drain valve.
LEGEND:
A Bottle valve
B Pressure gauge
C Hose connection
D Hose
E Lever
F Pressure gauge
G Knurled screw
H Pressure limiter valve
Filling with nitrogen
[3] - Screw FKM10474 fill and check device onto the connection of the accumulator.
[4] - Connect hose (D) to the fill and check device and the pressure reducer (C).
[5] - Open pressure reducer valve (H) to set the discharge pressure as low as possible.
[6] - Open valve (A) on the bottle and adjust pressure reducer valve (H) until the pressure reading on gauge (B) is within
specification.
5620 to 5820 tractors

Front hitch accumulator, nitrogen precharge Pressure 3900 ±100 kPa
39 ±1 bar
565 ±14.5 psi
[7] - Purge air from hose: Carefully loosen (do NOT disconnect) the fitting of hose (D) on the fill and check device until it is
audible that air escapes. Allow air or nitrogen to escape for about 2 to 3 seconds, then close the fitting.
CAUTION:
Do not open fitting too far. Wear gloves and eye protection.
[8] - Simultaneously push lever (A) in and turn it until it engages in the hex socket of the fill screw.
LEGEND:
A Bottle valve
B Pressure gauge
C Hose connection
D Hose
E Lever
F Pressure gauge
G Knurled screw
H Pressure limiter valve
Filling with nitrogen
[9] - Using lever (H) turn fill screw counterclockwise to allow nitrogen to flow into the accumulator.
[10] - Wait for the temperature in the accumulator to stabilize, then check the pressure on gauge (F).
[11] - Pressure deviations:
If pressure is too high, close valve (A) of the bottle and open knurled screw (G) to reduce the pressure to the specified
value.
If pressure is too low, adjust the setting of pressure reducer valve (H).
[12] - Once filling is completed, turn lever (E) clockwise until the fill screw is completely closed.
Result:
YES: GO TO 3 (Remove the fill and check device).
( 3 ) Remove the fill and check device
Action:
[1] - Close bottle valve (A).

LEGEND:
A Bottle valve
B Lever
C Knurled screw
Bottle valve, knurled screw and lever

Section 280 - MISCELLANEOUS Group 20: Theory of Operation
[2] - Make sure that the fill screw is completely closed (turn clockwise). Open knurled screw (C) to allow nitrogen to escape
from the fill and check device.
[3] - Remove hose and fill and check device.
[4] - Tighten fill screw to specified torque.
Accumulator, fill screw Final torque 20 +5 N˙m

+4
15 lb-ft
[5] - Screw the seal nut onto the accumulator.
[6] - Do an operational check; watch particularly for any leaks in the hydraulic system and check that the front hitch operates
properly.
Result:
YES:END OF CHECK-OUT
Reference 280-15-015, Checking Front Hitch for Leaks
CAUTION:
[1] - See Reference 270-15-010 for how to heat up the hydraulic oil.
[2] - Put a load weighing approx. 800 kg (1700 lb) on the front hitch, and raise it to the highest position.
[3] - Move the two levers on the multi-valve to their "closed" position.
[4] - Mark the height of the hooks on the front hitch and wait for three minutes.
[5] - Maximum permissible lowering of lift arms within 3 minutes:
0.4 mm/min (0.016 in./min)
Possible cause, if not within specification:
Wear at the piston rings on the lift cylinder. Leaking piston rings may cause oil to flow around the piston with the result
that the lift arms drop. Recondition the lift cylinder; see Section 80, Group 15 in the Repair manual.

Reference 280-20-001, Theory of Operation, Summary of References
Reference 280-20-008 , Front Hitch Functional Group - Identification.
Reference 280-20-009 , Circuit Plan - Front Hitch.
Reference 280-20-010 , Operation of Multi-Valve.
Reference 280-20-008, Front Hitch Functional Group - Identification
Front hitch functional group
LEGEND:
A Multi-valve
B Lift cylinder
D Accumulator
P1 Hose connected to P1
P2 Hose connected to P2
TP007 Test port for checking extension pressure; see pressure test at SCV - P1
TP008 Test port for checking retraction pressure; see pressure test at SCV - P2
TP024 Test port for checking extension pressure; see pressure test at front hitch coupler - P1
TP025 Test port for checking nitrogen pressure; see reference "Checking Accumulator of Front Hitch"
Reference 280-20-009, Circuit Plan - Front Hitch
Front hitch circuit plan
LEGEND:
A Multi-valve
B Lift cylinder
C Accumulator
D Sump
E Selective control valve 305
F Selective control valve 205
G Hitch valve
H By-pass valve (housing)
I Priority valve (housing)
J Pressure-limiting valve
K By-pass valve (valve spool)
L Priority valve (valve spool)
M Sump
N Hydraulic pump
O Hydraulic oil filter
Test possibilities are marked as "TP"
[ "TP" is the English abbreviation for "Test Port" ]

and are as follows:
TP001 - Checking the LS (Load Sensing) Pressure; see Reference 270-15-071 LS pressure, 0 - 190 bar; 0 - 2756 psi
TP002 - Checking the System Pressure; see Reference 270-15-072 "min" system pressure, 13 - 15 bar; 188 - 217
psi"max" system pressure, 195 - 200 bar; 2830 - 2900 psi
TP008 - check retraction pressure; see "Pressure Test at SCV"
TP007 - check extension pressure; see "Pressure Test at SCV"
TP024 - check extension pressure; see "Pressure Test at Front Hitch Coupler"
TP025 - check nitrogen pressure at accumulator; see Reference 280-15-10 , "Checking Accumulator of Front
Hitch"Nitrogen pressure, 39 bar ±1 bar; 565 psi ±14.5 psi.
Reference 280-20-010, Operation of Multi-Valve

The multi-valve consists of a valve block in which two separate shut-off valves are arranged. The shut-off valves connect a
Series 205 (or 305) SCV to the double-acting lift cylinders of the front hitch. When the SCV is operated, the lift arms rise or fall
depending on the position of the SCV. The multi-valve is located between the SCV and the two lift cylinders; it allows the flow of
oil to and from the lift cylinders to be interrupted.
The pressure-limiting valve located in the hydraulic system serves as a safety element — it protects the whole system from
excessive pressure. See also Reference 270-20-070 , PC Hydraulic System — Operation. Another safety element is the
accumulator, which with its compressed nitrogen can compensate for any pressure peaks that may occur, e.g. when travelling.
This relieves the mechanical and hydraulic components and also makes it more comfortable for the operator.
Oil flow interrupted
Oil flow interrupted, photo
Oil flow interrupted, schematic
LEGEND:
A Connection from multi-valve to lift cylinders (raise lift arms)
B Connection from multi-valve to lift cylinders (lower lift arms)
C Check valve
D Shut-off valve (lower-lift-arm function)
E1 Bottom port of SCV
E2 Top port of SCV
F Shut-off valve (raise-lift-arm function)
G Accumulator
H Quick-coupler for special functions
K High-pressure oil
L Return oil or pressure-free oil
M Trapped oil
N Nitrogen charge of accumulator
a1 "Extend piston rod" port on right lift cylinder (viewed in direction of travel)
a2 "Extend piston rod" port on left lift cylinder (viewed in direction of travel)
b1 "Retract piston rod" port on right lift cylinder (viewed in direction of travel)
b2 "Retract piston rod" port on left lift cylinder (viewed in direction of travel)
P1 Port on multi-valve to port (E1) on SCV
The two shut-off valves are in their closed positions and the flow of oil is stopped in both directions. In the schematic view, the
lift cylinders are in their raised position and they are prevented from dropping (e.g. while travelling) by the closed shut-off
valves.
→NOTE:
When the oil flow is stopped, the SCV can no longer affect the position of the front-mounted implement.
Note that a lowered front-mounted implement cannot be operated in float position while the multi-valve
is blocked.
Power-assisted lowering not possible
Raising with oil pressure, photo
Raising with oil pressure, schematic
LEGEND:
C Check valve
E2 Top port of SCV
G Accumulator
K High-pressure oil
M Trapped oil
Closing shut-off valve (D) blocks the passage from SCV port (E2) to ports (a1) and (a2). With the valve in this position, it is not
possible to apply power to the lift cylinders in the lowering direction (this situation is not illustrated schematically).
Shut-off valve (F) opens the passage from SCV port (E1) to lift cylinder ports (b1) and (b2). The piston rods retract and the lift
arms start to move up. At the same time, displaced oil is directed via lift cylinder ports (a1) and (a2) to check valve (C) and
from there to port (E2) of the SCV.
Raising the lift arms
Raising the lift arms, photo
Raising the lift arms, schematic
LEGEND:

C Check valve
E2 Top port of SCV
G Accumulator
K High-pressure oil
M Trapped oil
The two shut-off valves (D) and (F) are in their open position, allowing oil to flow freely to the lift cylinders when the SCV is
actuated. Oil returning from the lift cylinders passes through shut-off valve (D); if necessary, it also passes via check valve (C)
to port (E2) of the SCV.
When there is pressure at port (E1), oil flows from the SCV to ports (b1) and (b2) via port (P1). The piston rods of the lift
cylinders retract and the lift arms start to move up. At the same time, oil pressure is present at quick-coupler (H) and any
consumer connected to it can be supplied with oil under pressure.
→NOTE:
On certain front-mounted implements, special-function hydraulic cylinders are powered via quick-coupler
(H). These special functions are active only during the raising process and they cease to apply as soon as
the front-mounted implement is raised.
Power-assisted lowering of the lift arms
Lowering the lift arms, photo
Lowering the lift arms, schematic
LEGEND:
C Check valve
E2 Top port of SCV
G Accumulator
K High-pressure oil
M Trapped oil
The two shut-off valves (D) and (F) are in their open position, allowing oil to flow freely to the lift cylinders when the SCV is
actuated. When there is pressure at port (E2), oil flows from the SCV to ports (a1) and (a2) via port (P2). The piston rods of the
lift cylinders extend and the lift arms start to move down. The oil expelled by the pistons becomes pressure-free and is directed
OPERATOR′S CAB (g) by Belgreen v2.0
via the open shut-off valve (F) to port (E1) of the SCV.
Section 290 - OPERATOR′S CAB

Table of contents
Reference 290-10-001, Air-Conditioning System, Heater and Operator′s Seat——Summary of
References .................................................................................................................................... 1
Operational checks ............................................................................................................................... 2
Operational Checks .............................................................................................................................. 6
Reference 290-15-001, Air-Conditioning System, Heater and Operator′s Seat, Test and
Adjustments—Summary of References ......................................................................................... 8
Reference 290-15-010, Safety at Work ................................................................................................ 8
Reference 290-15-015, Handling Refrigerant ....................................................................................... 8
Reference 290-15-020, Safety Equipment ............................................................................................ 9
Reference 290-15-025, In an Emergency ............................................................................................. 9
Reference 290-15-030, Storage of Refrigerant Containers ................................................................... 9
Reference 290-15-035, R134a Refrigerant ......................................................................................... 10
Reference 290-15-040, Important ...................................................................................................... 10
Reference 290-15-050, Special Tools ................................................................................................. 11
Reference 290-15-060, Specifications ................................................................................................ 13
Air-conditioning system checks .......................................................................................................... 14
Reference 290-15-070, Pressure Deviations ...................................................................................... 24
Reference 290-20-001, Air-Conditioning, Heating and Ventilation Systems, Operation—Summary of
References .................................................................................................................................. 25
Reference 290-20-010, Principle of Heat Exchange ........................................................................... 26
Reference 290-20-015, R134a Refrigerant ......................................................................................... 26
Reference 290-20-020, Refrigerant Circuit Layout ............................................................................. 28
Reference 290-20-030, Functional Description of Components—Refrigerant Circuit ......................... 29
Reference 290-20-031, Functional Description of Components—Compressor .................................... 30
Reference 290-20-032, Functional Description of Components—Condenser ...................................... 31
Reference 290-20-033, Functional Description of Components—Receiver-Drier ................................ 31
Reference 290-20-034, Functional Description of Components—Expansion Valve ............................. 33
Reference 290-20-035, Functional Description of Components—Thermostat Switch ......................... 34
Reference 290-20-036, Functional Description of Components—Evaporator ..................................... 35
Reference 290-20-037, Functional Description of Components—High/Low Pressure Switch .............. 35
Reference 290-20-038, Functional Description of Components—Control Knobs for Heating and Cooling
..................................................................................................................................................... 36
Reference 290-20-040, Heating and Ventilation ................................................................................. 37
Section 290 - OPERATOR′S CAB Group 10: Operational Check-Out

Reference 290-10-001, Air-Conditioning System, Heater and Operator′s
Seat——Summary of References
Reference 290-10-002 , “Air-Conditioning System and Heater—Test Sequence”
Reference 290-10-004 , “Air Comfort Seat—Test Sequence”
Reference 290-10-002, Air-Conditioning System and Heater—Test

Sequence
tools are required to perform these checks.
Always begin at the first step and follow the sequence from left to right. Read each step completely before performing the
CAUTION:
Operational checks
( 1 ) Tests with the engine shut off
Action:
A—Check compressor clutch
Controls for air-conditioning, heating and ventilation systems
Open cab doors.

Turn ON key switch.
Compressor switch (A) ON.
Set the cooling control knob (B) to maximum cooling effect.
Turn the fan control knob (D) on and off several times.
→NOTE:
The compressor clutch should make an audible click.
The following requirements must be met:

Temperature in evaporator housing is above 3 °C (37 °F), so that thermostat switch is activated.
Static refrigerant pressure over 2.4 bar (35 psi; 240 kPa), so that the high and low pressure switches are activated.
Result:
YES:GO TO 1B
NO:See Reference 240-10-011 , "SE10-Fan and Air-Conditioning System".
Action:
B—Check fan fuses and motors
Move the fan speed control knob (D) from the lowest to the highest speed.
Fan speed must vary with the position of the switch.
Check the following fuses:

F06/01
F06/02
F06/03
F06/06
Result:
YES:GO TO 1C.
NO:One or both fan motors are defective. Recondition or replace with new one(s); see reference "Removing and Installing the
Fan and Radiator" at Section 90, Group 15 in the relevant "Repair" manual.
Action:
C—Air flow check
Set the fan control switch (D) to maximum output.

Open louvers.
Check the air flow from all ducts and in all positions.
Result:
YES: GO TO 2 .
NO:Check for blockages in the air ducts, filters and louvers, and recondition.
( 2 ) Checking the air-conditioning system with the engine switched on
Action:

Switch the compressor switch (A) on.
Set the fan control knob (D) to maximum output.
Set the heating control knob (C) to minimum heating effect.
Close the cab doors.
Check the following:
Cold airflow from air louvers after approx. 6 minutes.
Compressor intake line should be cool or cold.
Result:
YES: GO TO 3 .
NO:Check the refrigerant (visually, at receiver-drier), and top up with more refrigerant if necessary. See reference "Topping Up
a Partly Discharged System" in Section 90, Group 10 of the relevant "Repair" Manual.
( 3 ) Air-conditioning temperature check
Action:
Measure outside temperature (in the shade).

Close the cab doors.

Set the fan control knob (D) to maximum output.Wait 15 to 20 minutes and measure temperature at front air louver (see
table).
Difference in temperature (min.)
Outside temperature Difference in temperature
less than 24 °C (75 °F) 12 °C (54 °F)
between 24 and 32 °C (75 and 90 °F) 14 °C (57 °F)
more than 32°C (90°F) 16 °C (61 °F)
Result:
NO: GO TO 4 .
( 4 ) Checking the heater valve
Action:
Switch the compressor switch (A) off.

Turn the heating control knob (C) clockwise to maximum heating effect.After approx. 2 minutes, warm air should flow
from the air louvers.
Turn the heating control knob (C) counter-clockwise to minimum heating effect.After a few minutes, cold air should flow
from the air louvers.
Result:
NO:Check bowden cable. Make sure that heater valve is in the inlet circuit (are hoses installed correctly?), or replace heater
valve with a new one if necessary. See references "Heater Valve — Adjusting the Bowden Cables" or "Removing and Installing
the Heater Valve" at Section 90, Group 15 in the relevant "Repair" manual.
Reference 290-10-004, Air Comfort Seat—Test Sequence

Always begin with the first step and follow the sequence from left to right. Read each step completely before performing the
CAUTION:
Operational Checks
( 1 ) Checking the function of the electrics
Action:
A—Check electrical components
Turn ignition switch on.

The air compressor can be heard.
Result:
YES: GO TO 2 .
NO:GO TO 1B.
Action:
B—Check fuses
Remove and check the following fuses:

F05/10
F06/12
→NOTE: Replace defective fuses with new fuses.
Result:
YES: GO TO 2 .
NO:GO TO 1C
Action:
C—Check electrical circuit
Check the electrical circuit of the operator′s seat. See Reference 240-10-006 , ”SE4-Cigarette Lighter and Operator′s
Section 290 - OPERATOR′S CAB Group 15: Tests and Adjustments
Seat”.
Result:
YES: GO TO 2 .
NO:Replace compressor. See Reference ”Air Comfort Seat—Remove Compressor” in Section 90, Group 20 of the relevant
Repair Manual.
( 2 ) Checking the pneumatics
Action:
A—Check hose connections
Turn ignition switch on.

The air compressor can be heard and it goes automatically to its medium setting.
Result:
NO:Hoses are bent, trapped or loose. See Reference ”Air Comfort Seat—Replace Air Hoses” in Section 90, Group 20 of the
relevant Repair Manual.

Reference 290-15-001, Air-Conditioning System, Heater and Operator′s
Seat, Test and Adjustments—Summary of References
Air conditioning, heater and operator′s seat
Reference 290-15-010 , Safety at Work

Reference 290-15-015 , Handling Refrigerant
Reference 290-15-020 , Safety Equipment
Reference 290-15-025 , In an Emergency
Reference 290-15-030 , Storage of Refrigerant Containers
Reference 290-15-035 , R134a Refrigerant
Reference 290-15-040 , Important
Reference 290-15-050 , Special Tools
Reference 290-15-060 , Specifications
Reference 290-15-065 , Explanation of Checks
Reference 290-15-070 , Pressure Deviations
Reference 290-15-010, Safety at Work
CAUTION:
Certain basic safety regulations apply when dealing with air conditioning systems which must be
observed at all times. They are backed up by legislation covering safety precautions for air conditioning
systems. The following excerpts are particularly important:
Air conditioning systems may be operated, serviced or repaired by authorized, trained personnel only.
Adolescents should not be allowed to carry out service work on air conditioning systems involving the
discharge of Category 2 or 3 refrigerants, unless trade training of adolescents over 16 years old requires
such work. In this case, the adolescent must be supervised by a trained adult.
Before repairing components carrying refrigerant, remove refrigerant as far as necessary to ensure that
the work can be carried out safely.
Refrigerant should be extracted by suction and re-used. When refrigerant is discharged into the air,
there is the danger of asphyxiation, especially if work is being performed in an inspection pit, since
refrigerant is heavier than air and concentrates at the lowest level. Moreover, refrigerant is odorless and
colorless, so small quantities emerging from a leak cannot be detected. In such a case, ensure that there
is adequate ventilation at the place of work.
Smoking and naked flames are not permitted in enclosed spaces where refrigerant has been released.
High temperatures cause chemical reactions in the refrigerant gas and highly poisonous substances can
form. If inhaled, these substances have serious effects on health.
High temperatures produced by welding and soldering cause very high pressures inside components of
the air conditioning system, and these pressures may result in an explosion.
Reference 290-15-015, Handling Refrigerant
CAUTION:
When handling refrigerant, always wear safety glasses and suitable gloves. Contact with escaping
refrigerant may result in serious frostbite, or even blindness if the refrigerant strikes the eye.
If there is a possibility of exposing the refrigerant to high temperatures a suitable breathing mask should be worn. However, a
breathing mask provides no protection against asphyxiation if large quantities of refrigerant escape.
Reference 290-15-020, Safety Equipment
Safety equipment
This equipment consists of safety glasses, safety gloves and, where appropriate, a breathing mask (if there is the risk of
poisonous gases being released).
CAUTION:
A breathing mask provides NO protection against lack of oxygen.
Prepare a 1% boric acid solution for rinsing the eyes and a solution consisting of 1 part essence of vinegar and 5 parts water for
washing affected parts of the body. Also provide a first aid kit.
Reference 290-15-025, In an Emergency

Rinse eye with cold water; preferably use a 1% boric acid solution.
Wash affected parts of the body with water, or preferably with a solution consisting of one part essence of
vinegar and five parts water.
See a doctor as soon as first aid has been administered.
Reference 290-15-030, Storage of Refrigerant Containers
CAUTION:
Refrigerant containers are under pressure, and this pressure increases rapidly when the temperature of
the container rises. The thin-walled refill containers are particularly at risk in this respect. Refrigerant
containers must never be exposed to temperatures over 52°C (120°F).
Never store pressurized containers in the vicinity of heat sources or in places exposed to direct sunlight.
Never open pressurized containers by force or damage them in any way.
Reference 290-15-035, R134a Refrigerant
IMPORTANT:
The air conditioning system operates using R134a refrigerant (tetrafluorethane). This substance does not
contain any chlorine atoms, so it does not have a detrimental effect on the ozone in the Earth′s
atmosphere.
Nevertheless, refrigerant should not simply be discharged. It should be captured by a recycling unit.
Refrigerant stored in a recycling unit may be re-used at any time.
The recycling unit used to do this must be of a type suitable for handling R134a refrigerant.
The boiling point of R134a is minus 26,5°C (minus 15.7°F) and its freezing point is minus 101°C (minus
149.8°F).
Before replacing any component, it is vital to check whether it is compatible with the refrigerant used.
It is still essential to ensure that the correct refrigerant oil is used. R12 systems were lubricated with
mineral oil, which is totally unsuitable for R134a systems. The latter require PAG oil, which mixes very
well with the refrigerant and provides ideal lubrication throughout the system.
Reference 290-15-040, Important

Refrigerant
Use R134a refrigerant only. Any other refrigerant will impair the function of the air-conditioning system and render all claims
for damages made against the manufacturer null and void.
PAG Refrigerant Oil
Use prescribed refrigerant oil only. Failure to do so will result in damage to the compressor.
→NOTE:
Order tools from the U.S. SERVICEGARD ™ or from the European Microfiche Tool Catalog (MTC).
Leak Tester
FKM10444
FKM10444
Identifying refrigerant leaks.
→NOTE:
Leak tester or leak detection kit can be used with R12 as well as R134a refrigerant.
Pressure Gauge Kit
FKM10445
FKM10445
Evacuating, filling and checking the air conditioning system.
IMPORTANT:
Use only service units suitable for handling R134a refrigerant.
Refrigerant can (R134a; 920g; 750 ml)
FKM10447
FKM10447
Filling the system
IMPORTANT:
Charging valve
FKM10443
FKM10443
Filling the system
IMPORTANT:

Air-conditioning system Cooling output 7 kW
Air conditioning, pressure side Refrigerant pressure 1500-2000 kPa (15-20 bar; 218-290 psi)
Air conditioning, suction side Refrigerant pressure 50-200 kPa, (0.5-2 bar; 7.5-29 psi)
Refrigerant circuit Oil volume (PAG oil) 280 ml (9.5 fl. oz.)
R134a Refrigerant volume 1600 g (3.53 lb)
Hub to pulley Clearance 0.35-0.65 mm (0.014-0.025 in.)
Compressor clutch coil Current draw at 12 V, 20°C (68°F) approx. 2.5 amps, 40 W power
Compressor clutch Resistance 3.5 to 4 ohms
High and low pressure switches Opening pressure (low pressure) with pressure dropping 150-90 kPa (1.5-0.9 bar) (22-13 psi)
High and low pressure switches Closing pressure (low pressure) with pressure rising 240 kPa (2.4 bar) (35 psi)
High and low pressure switches Opening pressure (high pressure) with pressure rising 2420-2780 kPa (24.2-27.8 bar) (355-405 psi)
High and low pressure switches Closing pressure (high pressure) with pressure dropping 1880-1520 kPa (18.8-15.2 bar) (275-220 psi)
Reference 290-15-065, Explanation of Checks

Always begin with the first step and follow the sequence from left to right. Read each step completely before performing the
→NOTE:
A frequent cause of faults in air conditioning systems is too much moisture in the refrigerant circuit.
Moisture results in air-conditioning components icing up from the inside and functioning incorrectly. Too
much moisture can also produce acid, which destroys the air-conditioning system from within.
If moisture is suspected, the air-conditioning system must be evacuated, cleaned, bled and refilled with
new or recycled refrigerant. The refrigerant oil contained in the compressor must be changed.
It is particularly important to replace the receiver-drier, as it gradually loses its ability to absorb
moisture. Eventually, it loses this ability altogether.
After replacing a defective component or rectifying a fault, it is advisable to perform the operational
check described in 290-05.
Air-conditioning system checks

( 1 ) Visual check
Action:
Check tension of compressor belt.

Cab filters must be clean.
Air passages must be clear.
Check that lines are not damaged.
Hoses must not be deformed or trapped.
Condenser and evaporator must not be contaminated.
All electrical leads should be in good condition.
Note any unusual noises that occur when in operation.
Check for oil leaks at the condenser, compressor and threaded connections.
Result:
NO:Rectify any faults found.Now return to testing.
YES: GO TO 2
( 2 ) Preliminary checks
Action:
A—Check fan motors
Fan switch
Turn on ignition
Move the fan speed control knob (D) from the lowest to the highest speed.
Fan speed must vary with the position of the switch.
Check for uniform air flow at all ducts to make sure both motors are operating.
Result:
NO: GO TO 3 Now return to testing.
YES:GO TO 2B
Action:
B—Check compressor magnetic clutch switch
Operation unit
Open cab doors.

Turn on ignition.
Set the fan control knob (D) to minimum speed.
Switch the compressor switch (A) on and off several times.
→NOTE:
The compressor clutch must give an audible click.
The following requirements must be met:

Evaporator core temperature must be above 3 °C (37 °F)
Static refrigerant pressure over 2.4 bar (35 psi) (240 kPa)
Result:
NO: GO TO 3 Now return to testing.
YES:GO TO 2C
Action:
C—Check compressor magnetic clutch
Operation unit
Run engine at slow idle speed.

Set the fan control knob (D) to minimum speed.
Switch the compressor switch (A) on and off several times.
→NOTE:
When the switch is operated the engine sound should change slightly and the compressor drive pulley
hub should rotate.
Result:
NO:Check the operation of the high and low pressure switches, then recondition the compressor magnetic clutch. See
Reference 240-15-008 , "SE10 — Fan and Air-Conditioning System" and reference "Disassembling the Magnetic Clutch" in
Section 90, Group 10 of the relevant "Repair" manual.Now return to testing.
YES: GO TO 4
( 3 ) Exclude improper operation
Action:
A—Check the fuses
The following requirements must be met for the compressor clutch to operate:
Ignition must be switched on.

The compressor switch must be switched on and conducting battery voltage to the fuses in its ON position.
Terminal "B" of the fan switch must be conducting battery voltage in all of its switch positions.
Remove and check the following fuses:

F06/01
F06/02
F06/03
F06/06
Result:
NO:Replace any fuses with new ones as necessary, and check the circuit. GO TO Reference 240-10-011 , "SE10 — Fan and Air
Conditioning System".
NO:The fuses are OK, but the fan is not functioning properly. Check the circuit; see Reference 240-10-011 , "SE10 — Fan and
Air Conditioning System".Now return to testing.
YES:GO TO 3B
Action:
B—Check fan relay K08/2
The following requirements must be met for the compressor clutch to operate:
Ignition must be switched on.

Turn on the fan control knob and set it to maximum output.
As the knob is being turned to maximum output you must detect a distinct increase in the air-flow.
Voltage must be present at relay K08/2.
The relay must trip.
Result:
NO:Current is present at relay K08/2, but the relay does not trip. Check the relay, see Reference 240-15-008 , "SE10 — Fan and
Air Conditioning System".
NO:Current is present at relay K08/2 and the relay trips, but the fan does not achieve maximum output. Check the circuit; see
Reference 240-10-011 , "SE10 — Fan and Air Conditioning System".Now return to testing.
YES: GO TO 4
( 4 ) System pressure check (static)
Action:
LEGEND:
A High-pressure port
B Low-pressure port
C Receiver-drier
High- and low-pressure ports
Measure the air temperature in the shade.

DoNOT start the tractor for this test.
Connect pressure gauge kit FKM10445
Pressure gauge kit
FKM10445
FKM10445
Evacuating, filling and checking the air-conditioning system
with closed valves to the test ports shown (A, B).
Open the high and low pressure valve and close both valves after the pressure rise ends.
Read the pressure values and compare them with the values in the table.
Temperature and minimum pressure
Temperature Minimum pressure
°F °C kPa bar psi
60 15 390 3.9 56
65 18 435 4.35 63
70 21 490 4.9 71
75 24 540 5.4 79
80 27 600 6 88
85 29 650 6.5 94
90 32 700 7 103
95 35 800 8 114
100 38 850 8.5 125
105 41 950 9.5 136
110 43 1000 10 144
115 46 1100 11 157
→NOTE:
A static pressure reading 20 - 30% greater than the values listed in the chart is an indication that the
system has been charged with incorrect refrigerant or with a mix of different refrigerants.
In this case, discharge and refill the system. See reference "Discharging the System" and then reference
"Filling the System" in Section 90, Group 10 of the relevant "Repair" manual.
Result:
NO:If the system does not contain the wrong type of refrigerant or a mix of different refrigerants, top it up to the correct level.
See reference "Topping Up a Partly Discharged System" in Section 90, Group 10 of the relevant "Repair" Manual.Now return to
testing.
YES: GO TO 5 .
( 5 ) System pressure test (dynamic)
Action:
Operation unit
Cab doors and windows must be closed.

→NOTE:
At cool temperatures, the compressor may have to be connected directly to the battery for this system
check. If necessary, disconnect the lead at the compressor and use a jumper wire to connect the clutch
coil to terminal 30 on the alternator.
Check ambient temperature and pressure.

Compare temperature and pressure readings with the figures in the table below.
→NOTE:
The lower figures are valid at approx. 10% humidity, the higher figures at approx. 90% humidity.
System Pressure Chart
System pressure chart (low pressure)
Temperature Low pressure
°C °F kPa bar psi
11-16 51-60 7-40 0.07-0.4 1-6
16-21 61-70 20-70 0.2-0.7 3-10
22-27 71-80 40-100 0.4-1.0 6-14
27-32 81-90 60-120 0.6-1.2 9-18
33-38 91-100 80-150 0.8-1.5 12-22
39-43 101-110 100-180 1.0-1.8 15-26
44-49 111-120 120-200 1.2-2.0 18-30
System pressure chart (high pressure)
Temperature High pressure
°C °F kPa bar psi
11-16 51-60 1000-1400 10.0-14.0 145-205
16-21 61-70 1100-1550 11.0-15.5 160-225
22-27 71-80 1250-1750 12.5-17.5 180-250
27-32 81-90 1400-1950 14.0-19.5 205-280
33-38 91-100 1600-2200 16.0-22.0 235-315
39-43 101-110 1900-2450 19.0-24.5 275-355
44-49 111-120 2150-2800 21.5-28.0 310-400
Result:
NO:See Reference 290-15-070 , "Pressure Deviations".Now return to testing.
YES: GO TO 6 .
( 6 ) Leak test
Action:
Leak test
Operation unit
FKM10444 leak detector

CAUTION:
Keep away from moving engine parts at all times. Avoid accidents!
Using FKM10444 leak detector

Leak detector
FKM10444
FKM10444
Identifying refrigerant leaks
, check entire refrigerant circuit for leaks.Comply with the manufacturer′s instructions.
Hold the leak detector at the air outlets in the cab to test whether there is a leak in the evaporator housing.
Result:
NO:If a leak is found at any part of the air-conditioning system, the leak must be repaired or the leaking component must be
replaced. See reference "Air-Conditioning System—Summary of References" at Section 90, Group 30 in the relevant "Repair"
Manual.Now return to testing.
YES: GO TO 7
( 7 ) Component tests
Action:
A—Thermostat switch
Thermostat switch, thermal sensor and cable
Open the service hatch in the outer roof.

Check thermal sensor (A) for damage and make sure that it is in the correct position on the evaporator.
Turn the cooling control knob several times in both directions.
It must be possible to adjust thermostat switch (B) with cable (C).
Check all electrical contacts at thermostat switch (B).
Result:
NO:Replace the thermostat switch with a new one. See reference "Removing and Installing the Thermostat Switch" in Section
90, Group 10 of the relevant "Repair" Manual.Now return to testing.
YES:GO TO 7B
Action:
B—Evaporator
Remove any dirt and check for signs of damage.
CAUTION:
Before removing the evaporator, first evacuate the refrigerant from the air-conditioning system.
Result:
NO:If the evaporator shows signs of damage, it must be replaced. See reference "Removing and Installing the Evaporator and
Expansion Valve" in Section 90, Group 10 of the relevant "Repair" Manual.Now return to testing.
YES:GO TO 7C
Action:
C—Expansion valve
Operation unit
Thermal head
Check thermal head (E) for signs of damage.

Check all connections.
Bring the service unit′s pressure gauge set close to the cab.
→NOTE: If the pressure gauge cannot be seen from the cab, two people will be required for this test.

Set the cooling control knob (B) to minimum cooling effect.
Set the heating control knob (C) to maximum heating effect (hot).
Turn the fan control knob (D) on.
Use a commercially-available cold-spray (ice-spray) to spray the thermal head (E) until the valve closes.
Quickly check the pressure gauge for possible pressure drop.
Pressure should drop when the thermal head is cold and increase when the head is warm.
→NOTE: For pressure values see "System Pressure Chart".
Repeat the test 2 - 3 times to establish the expansion pattern of the thermal head. Replace the valve if the pressure
changes very slowly.
→NOTE: See Section 90 of the Repair Manual to prevent the entry of antifreeze in the evaporator.
CAUTION:
Discharge the refrigerant from the air-conditioning system before removing the expansion valve.
Result:
NO:Replace the expansion valve. See reference "Removing and Installing the Evaporator and Expansion Valve" in Section 90,
Group 10 of the relevant "Repair" Manual.Now return to testing.
YES:End of test.
Section 290 - OPERATOR′S CAB Group 20: Theory of Operation
Reference 290-15-070, Pressure Deviations

Low pressure and
Reduce the amount of refrigerant in system. See reference “Discharging the
high pressure System has been over-filled.
System” at Section 90, Group 10 in the relevant "Repair" Manual.
both too high.
Clean or unplug condenser. Replace condenser, if necessary. See reference

Condenser contaminated or
“Removing and Installing the Condenser” at Section 90, Group 10 in the relevant
plugged.
"Repair" Manual.
Low pressure too Unplug condenser or replace, if necessary. See reference “Removing and
low and high Condenser plugged. Installing the Condenser” at Section 90, Group 10 in the relevant "Repair"
pressure too high Manual.
Receiver-drier plugged. Unplug receiver-drier or replace, if necessary.
Replace expansion valve and receiver-drier. See reference “Removing and

Expansion valve not
Installing the Receiver-Drier” at Section 90, Group 10 in the relevant "Repair"
functioning correctly.
Manual.
Low pressure too

Compressor not functioning Repair or replace compressor. See reference “Removing the Compressor” at
high but high
correctly. Section 90, Group 10 in the relevant "Repair" Manual.
pressure normal
Check drive belt.

Check electrical wiring. See Reference 240-10-011 , “SE10-Fan and Air
Conditioning System”.
Change high/low pressure switch. See reference “Removing and Installing the
Low pressure and
High/Low Pressure Switch” at Section 90, Group 10 in the relevant "Repair"
high pressure are Compressor not functioning.
Manual.
the same.
Check thermostat switch. See Reference 240-15-008 , “SE10-Fan and Air
Conditioning System”.
Check magnetic clutch of compressor. See Reference 240-15-008 , “SE10-Fan
and Air Conditioning System”.
Low pressure too

Not enough refrigerant in Top up system. See reference “Topping Up a Partly Discharged System” at
low but high
circuit. Section 90, Group 10 in the relevant "Repair" Manual.
pressure normal.
Expansion valve not Replace expansion valve. See reference “Replacing the Expansion Valve” at
functioning correctly. Section 90, Group 10 in the relevant "Repair" Manual.
Clean evaporator.
Evaporator contaminated or Unplug evaporator or replace, if necessary. See reference “Removing and
plugged. Installing the Evaporator and Expansion Valve” at Section 90, Group 10 in the
relevant "Repair" Manual.
Low pressure and

Not enough refrigerant in Top up system. See reference “Topping Up a Partly Discharged System” at
high pressure
circuit. Section 90, Group 10 in the relevant "Repair" Manual.
both too low.
Unplug receiver-drier or replace, if necessary. See reference “Removing and

Receiver-drier plugged. Installing the Receiver-Drier” at Section 90, Group 10 in the relevant "Repair"
Manual.
Expansion valve not Replace expansion valve. See reference “Replacing the Expansion Valve” at
functioning correctly. Section 90, Group 10 in the relevant "Repair" Manual.
Evacuate system, replace receiver-drier and then refill system.

See:
1. Reference “Discharging the System” at Section 90, Group 10 in the relevant
Too much moisture in circuit, "Repair" Manual.
causing components to ice up. 2. Reference “Removing and Installing the Receiver-Drier” at Section 90, Group
10 in the relevant "Repair" Manual.
3. Reference “Filling the System” at Section 90, Group 10 in the relevant "Repair"
Manual.
Compressor not functioning Repair compressor or replace, if necessary. See reference “Installing the
correctly. Compressor” at Section 90, Group 10 in the relevant "Repair" Manual.

Reference 290-20-001, Air-Conditioning, Heating and Ventilation
Systems, Operation—Summary of References
Reference 290-20-010 , “Principle of Heat Exchange”
Reference 290-20-015 , “R134A Refrigerant”
Reference 290-20-020 , “Refrigerant Circuit Layout”
Reference 290-20-030 , “Functional Description of Components—Refrigerant Circuit”
Reference 290-20-031 , “Functional Description of Components—Compressor”
Reference 290-20-032 , “Functional Description of Components—Condenser”
Reference 290-20-033 , “Functional Description of Components—Receiver-Drier”
Reference 290-20-034 , “Functional Description of Components—Expansion Valve”
Reference 290-20-035 , “Functional Description of Components—Thermostat Switch”
Reference 290-20-036 , “Functional Description of Components—Evaporator”
Reference 290-20-037 , “Functional Description of Components—High/Low Pressure Switch”
Reference 290-20-038 , “Functional Description of Components—Control Knobs for Heating and Cooling”
Reference 290-20-040 , “Heating and Ventilation”
Reference 290-20-010, Principle of Heat Exchange
Principle of heat exchange
LEGEND:
A Liquid refrigerant under high pressure
B Gaseous refrigerant under high pressure
C Gaseous refrigerant under low pressure
D Exchange of heat
E Energy in the form of heat
The simplified example set out below is intended to show how heat is exchanged in an air conditioning system. Each
explanation concludes with the part of the air conditioning system that corresponds to the principle involved.
Fig. 1: Gaseous refrigerant is contained in a cylinder which has a certain reserve of energy (E) in the form of heat. (intake line
of compressor).
Fig. 2: A piston reduces the space in which the gaseous refrigerant is trapped. This concentrates the heat (E) in a smaller
space. This means that the temperature inside the cylinder is now higher than it was before. Heat is now exchanged, with the
surrounding area absorbing the heat of the gas. Heat always moves from a hotter substance to a colder one. (compressor to
condenser)
Fig. 3: The pressurized refrigerant condenses on the cylinder wall and becomes a liquid. The gas has transferred its heat
through the cylinder wall to the surrounding area. (condenser)
Fig. 4: The space inside the cylinder is increased. This means that the pressure drops rapidly and the liquid refrigerant is free
to expand. The refrigerant evaporates and returns to its gaseous state. In consequence, the heat remaining in the gas is free to
spread through a larger area. The temperature inside the cylinder drops and heat is exchanged once again. This time the heat
is absorbed from the surrounding area by the cold cylinder. (expansion valve and evaporator)
Reference 290-20-015, R134a Refrigerant
IMPORTANT:
The air conditioning system operates using R134a refrigerant (tetrafluorethane). This substance does not
contain any chlorine atoms, so it does not have a detrimental effect on the ozone in the Earth′s
atmosphere.
Even so, the refrigerant must never be discharged straight into the air. It must be trapped in a recycling
unit. The refrigerant stored in the recycling unit can be reused at any time.
The recycling unit used to do this must be of a type suitable for handling R134a refrigerant.
The boiling point of R134a is minus 26.5°C (minus 15.7°F) and its freezing point is minus 101°C (minus
149.8°F).
Before replacing any component, it is vital to check whether it is compatible with the refrigerant used.
It is still essential to ensure that the correct refrigerant oil is used. R12 systems were lubricated with
mineral oil, which is totally unsuitable for R134a systems. The latter require PAG oil, which mixes very
well with the refrigerant and provides ideal lubrication throughout the system.
Reference 290-20-020, Refrigerant Circuit Layout
Refrigerant circuit diagram
LEGEND:
A Air inlet (2 used)
B Cab air filter (2 used)
C Radiator
D Fan motor (2 used)
E Heater valve
F Knob for heating
G Knob for cooling
H Compressor switch
I Control knob for fan
J Expansion valve
K Evaporator
L High/low pressure switch
M Receiver-drier
N Compressor
O High pressure line
P Low pressure line
Q Condenser, combined with oil cooler
Reference 290-20-030, Functional Description of

Components—Refrigerant Circuit
Functional description of refrigerant circuit
LEGEND:
A Evaporator
B Thermal sensor (defrost switch)
C Defrost switch
D Thermal sensor (thermostat switch)
E Thermostat switch
F Compressor switch
G Cooling control knob
H Drier
I High/low-pressure switches
J Condenser
K Magnetic clutch
L Presssure relief valve

M Check valve
N Compressor
O Variable throttle
P Expansion valve
Q Thermal head
S Gaseous refrigerant under high pressure
T Liquid refrigerant under high pressure
U Gaseous refrigerant under low pressure
V Liquid refrigerant under low pressure
The air conditioning system operates on the compression principle. The main components are the compressor (N), condenser
(J), receiver-drier (H), expansion valve (P), evaporator (A), cooling control knob (G), thermostat switch (E), defrost switch (C),
compressor switch (F) and high-low pressure switch (I).
Gaseous refrigerant is compressed in compressor (N), causing it to absorb heat. Then the pressurized gas is fed through the
condenser (J), where it transfers its heat to the cooling fins and condenses.
The compressor contains also a relief valve (L) and a check valve (M). The purpose of the relief valve is to release refrigerant
under excessive pressure conditions in order to avoid damage to the system.
The check valve prevents the compressor from emptying by enclosing the refrigerant mixture in the compressor when the
latter is switched off.
The pressurized liquid refrigerant flows through the receiver-drier (H). There a special filter removes all impurities, moisture
and acid.
After it leaves the receiver-drier (H), the refrigerant passes to expansion valve (P), where it is fed through a variable throttle
(O). The pressure is still high at the inlet side of the expansion valve. Once the refrigerant has passed through the throttle,
however, it is free to expand and cool down.
Expansion is completed in evaporator (A), where the refrigerant returns to its gaseous state and cools down the surrounding
area considerably. The refrigerant transfers its cold temperature to the evaporator′s cooling fins, and air flowing through the
evaporator is cooled down.
High/low pressure switch (I) determines the refrigerant pressure in the expansion valve′s inlet line. This is required in order to
switch off the compressor if the pressure becomes too high or too low.
By means of the compressor switch (F) two operating modes can be selected.
First switch position: Compressor switch at the ”snow flake” symbol means that the air-conditioning system cools down the
operator′s cab according to the position of temperature control switch, and dries the air.
Second switch position: Compressor switch at ”circle” symbol means that the air-conditioning system is switched off and the
compressor is not in operation.
Thermostat switch (E) or defrost switch (C) control the cooling output by switching compressor (N) on or off. The thermostat
switch can be reset by turning cooling control knob (G).
The refrigerant flows back via the evaporator return line and is unimpeded as it passes through the housing of expansion valve
(P). There it influences the gas-filled thermal head (Q), which actuates variable throttle (O) in relation to the temperature. In
this way, the refrigerant always flows to evaporator (A) at the optimum rate.
Then the gaseous refrigerant is fed back into compressor (N), and the circuit is closed.

Components—Compressor
LEGEND:
A Low pressure line
B High pressure line
C Drive belt pulley
D Magnetic clutch
E Test port
Compressor
The compressor is located on the engine and is driven by a multi-groove drive belt.
The compressor is of the axial piston type and is controlled by a swashplate.
The purpose of the compressor is to ingest the gaseous refrigerant from the low pressure area, to compress it and send it on to
the condenser.
As the low pressure gas volume is compressed the temperature of the refrigerant rises.
The compressor drive assembly includes a magnetic clutch, which allows the compressor to be switched on and off at the
compressor switch while the air-conditioning system is in operation.
The compressor housing also serves as the reservoir for refrigerant oil.
Automatic temperature regulation is achieved by switching the thermostat switch on and off. This allows the cooling effect in
the cab to be held constant.
The compressor is switched off and on by the high/low pressure switch if refrigerant pressure is too high or too low.

Components—Condenser
LEGEND:
A Condenser with dust protection
Condenser
The condenser is located in front of the radiator, looking in the direction of travel. The purpose of the condenser is to cool down
the pressurized refrigerant gas so that it condenses and leaves the condenser as a liquid. The same component also houses
the hydraulic and transmission oil cooler.
The cooling effect is produced by the airflow created by the fan. The condenser′s inlet is connected to the compressor′s
pressure connection, its return line to the receiver-drier.
Components—Receiver-Drier
LEGEND:
A To expansion valve
B Screen
C Filter elements
D Desiccant (moisture-absorbing material)
E Spring
F From condenser
Receiver-drier operation
The receiver-drier performs two functions. Firstly, it receives high pressure refrigerant from the condenser and stores it until it
is required by the evaporator. Secondly, it absorbs moisture and acid that would have a detrimental effect on the system′s
ability to operate.
Solid foreign bodies are separated out by filter elements (C), whereas the desiccant (D), which fills the space between the
filters, absorbs moisture and acid.
The receiver-drier′s inlet is connected to the condenser, and its return line to the expansion valve.
The receiver-drier should be replaced every time the air conditioning system is repaired, as the moisture-absorbing material
becomes less effective as time passes.

Components—Expansion Valve
Expansion valve operation
LEGEND:
A Thermal head
B Diaphragm
C Pressure plate
D To compressor
E From receiver-drier
F Valve ball
G Ball seat
H Pressure spring
J Valve plug
K To evaporator
L Actuating pin
M From evaporator
N Liquid high pressure refrigerant
O Liquid low pressure refrigerant
P Gaseous low pressure refrigerant
Q Gas in thermal head
The expansion valve is located on the right side of the evaporator looking in the direction of forward travel and is connected to
the evaporator′s inlet and return lines.
The expansion valve is a diaphragm-actuated valve with a stainless steel thermal head. Its purpose is to control the
throughflow of refrigerant in relation to the return temperature from the evaporator.
If too much refrigerant flows through the evaporator, liquid refrigerant could reach the compressor via the return line, and
cause damage to the compressor.
Too much liquid refrigerant is one reason why the system may not be performing well, as the refrigerant does not evaporate
completely.
A variable throttle is located in the inlet to the expansion valve. This throttle is formed by valve ball (F) and actuating pin (L). At
this point the pressure of the liquid refrigerant is reduced considerably. This allows the refrigerant to expand and change into
its gaseous state in the evaporator, thus bringing down the temperature.
Once the refrigerant has left the evaporator, it has to flow through the expansion valve once again. However, it does not do so
through the throttle, but through a passage where the refrigerant temperature can be registered by thermal head (A).
The thermal head is filled with gas, which expands and contracts as the temperature rises and falls. This process is employed
to produce a movement at diaphragm (B) that is passed on to the throttle. This makes it possible to control the throughflow of
refrigerant in relation to its temperature.

Components—Thermostat Switch
LEGEND:
A Sensing bulb (gas-filled capillary tube)
B Thermostat switch
C Bowden cable
D Evaporator
Thermostat switch
Thermostat switch (B) is located in the cab roof.
It is activated by a bowden cable (C) moved by the cooling control switch.
The thermostat switch controls the cooling output of the air conditioning system by switching the compressor on and off, thus
regulating the evaporator′s temperature. This effect is determined by the position to which the cooling control switch is set.
The switch consists of a set of contacts which receive current via the fan switch. Current flows on from the thermostat switch to
the magnetic clutch for the compressor.
Opening and closing of the electrical contacts is controlled by a gas-filled capillary tube (A) which is fitted with a membrane or
bellows on one end. The other end of the capillary tube is inserted in the evaporator core (D).
When the thermostat switch is actuated, the switch contacts close, allowing current to flow between the switch and the
compressor. However, the compressor comes into operation only if the ventilator fan is also in operation.
Once the temperature in evaporator (D) reaches a preselected lower limit, the switch contacts open and the compressor is shut
off. The compressor remains inoperative until the evaporator temperature reaches the upper limit value.
When this happens, the switch contacts close again and the compressor comes into operation once more. In this way, the
compressor is switched on and off as required and in relation to the temperature inside the evaporator.

Components—Evaporator
LEGEND:
A Evaporator
Evaporator
Evaporator (A) is located in the cab roof.
It allows the heat transfer to take place between the refrigerant and the cab air.
Close beside it is the radiator (heat exchanger) of the heating system which, as required, heats cab air by passing it through
the engine coolant. It is controlled via the heating valve.
The refrigerant is still in its liquid form as it comes from the expansion valve. It expands in the evaporator and becomes a gas.
The resulting low temperature is transferred to the cooling fins and the airflow produced by the fan transfers its heat to the
fins.
The moisture in the ambient air condenses when it comes into contact with the cold evaporator fins. The condensation is
drained away via drain hoses.
The gaseous refrigerant is moved from the evaporator outlet via the expansion valve to the compressor.
Reference 290-20-037, Functional Description of Components—High/Low

Pressure Switch
High/low pressure switch
The high/low pressure switch (A) is located in the cab roof directly next to expansion valve (B) and is used to shut off the
compressor when the system pressure is too high or low.
The compressor is shut off when system pressure is below 1.5-0.9 bar (150-90 kPa; 22-13 psi) in the low pressure area or over
24.2-27.8 bar (2420-2780 kPa; 355-405 psi) in the high pressure area.
The compressor is turned on when system pressure is over 2.4 bar (240 kPa; 35 psi) in the low pressure area or under
18.8-15.2 bar (1880-1520 kPa; 275-225 psi) in the high pressure area.
Reference 290-20-038, Functional Description of Components—Control

Knobs for Heating and Cooling
LEGEND:
A Knob for cooling
B Knob for heating
Control console
Heating is regulated by heating control knob (B), which is located in the cab roof; cab cooling is regulated at knob (A).
Heating control knob (B) is connected to the heating valve by a bowden cable; it regulates the inflow of warm air.
Cooling control knob (A) is connected to the thermostat switch by a bowden cable; it regulates the inflow of cold air.
Heating and cooling can be regulated independently of one another.
Reference 290-20-040, Heating and Ventilation
Heating and ventilation
LEGEND:
A Air inlet (2 used)
B Cab air filter (2 used)
C Radiator
D Fan motor (2 used)
E Heater valve
F Knob for heating
G Inlet (from cylinder block)
H Return to coolant pump
J Hot water inlet
K Warm water return
L Warm air
M Fresh air
N Recirculated air
The heating system is connected to the tractor engine cooling system. The heated engine coolant is directed out of the engine
SPECIAL TOOLS (g) by Belgreen v2.0
block to the heater valve in the roof and from there to the radiator. The heater valve regulates or completely shuts off the flow
of coolant. When the valve is open, engine coolant flows through the radiator and via the return line to the coolant pump.
The fan motors suck in fresh air through the air inlets under each side of the cab roof.
The fresh air passes through the air filters into the air ducts in the cab roof and mixes with air recirculated from the cab. This
air mixture flows through the radiator and becomes heated. The two fans push warm air through the cab air vents, which can
be adjusted to direct the air as desired.
The fans provide a positive pressure in the cab to keep dust and dirt out.
Section 299 - SPECIAL TOOLS

Table of contents
Group 05 - Special Tools (Dealer-Fabricated) ..................................................................................... 1
Reference 299-05-001, Special Tools (Dealer-Fabricated) — Summary ............................................... 1
Reference 299-05-010, Holding Tool .................................................................................................... 1
Reference 299-05-011, Adjusting Tool ................................................................................................. 1
Reference 299-05-012, DFRW2—Needle Valve Test Hose Assembly .................................................... 2
Reference 299-05-015, Special Tool for 29-BIT CAN BUS—DFLX12 ...................................................... 2
Reference 299-05-016, DFLX14—Solenoid Test Harness ..................................................................... 3
Group 10 - Special Tools and Test Equipment .................................................................................... 5
AR52361 - Socket ................................................................................................................................. 5
D01019AA - Manually operated hydraulic pump .................................................................................. 5
FKM10002 or JT05470 - Pressure test kit .............................................................................................. 5
Battery Load Tester FKM10409 ............................................................................................................ 6
FKM10443 - Charging valve .................................................................................................................. 6
FKM10444 - Leak detector .................................................................................................................... 6
FKM10445 - Universal pressure test kit ................................................................................................ 7
FKM10447 - Refrigerant container (R134a; 920g; 750 ml) ................................................................... 7
FKM10470 - Pressure Measuring System (stage 1) .............................................................................. 8
FKM10471 - Pressure measuring system (stage 2) .............................................................................. 8
FKM10472 - Flow measurement system ............................................................................................... 9
FKM10472-4 - Temperature sensor ...................................................................................................... 9
FKM10482 - Pressure Test Kit ............................................................................................................... 9
Clamp-on Current Probe JT02153 ....................................................................................................... 10
JT03248 - Fitting ................................................................................................................................. 10
JT05791A - Multimeter ........................................................................................................................ 10
JT07115 - Pressure test kit .................................................................................................................. 11
KJD10128 - Fitting ............................................................................................................................... 11
KJD10292 - Diagnostic Harness .......................................................................................................... 11
KJD10194 - Pressure Test Kit .............................................................................................................. 12
KJD10352 - Restriction fitting ............................................................................................................. 12
KJD10495 - Hose connector ................................................................................................................ 12
RE200689 - Performance monitor ...................................................................................................... 12
RE37996 - Adjusting tool .................................................................................................................... 13
Section 299 - SPECIAL TOOLS Group 05: Special Tools (Dealer-Fabricated)
Group 05 - Special Tools (Dealer-Fabricated)

Reference 299-05-001, Special Tools (Dealer-Fabricated) — Summary
Reference 299-05-010 , Holding Tool
Reference 299-05-011 , Adjusting Tool
Reference 299-05-015 , Special Tool for 29-BIT CAN BUS—DFLX12
Reference 299-05-016 , Solenoid Test Harness—DFLX14
Reference 299-05-010, Holding Tool

LEGEND:
A 30x12x110 mm (1.18x0.472x4.33 in.) flat bar steel
B Welded seam
30x12x20 mm (1.18x0.472x0.79 in.) flat bar steel
C
(2 used)
Holding tool
To hold the shifter shaft detent in place when adjusting shifting mechanism and neutral start switch.
Reference 299-05-011, Adjusting Tool
Adjusting tool
LEGEND:
A M16 x 70 screw
B Attaching flange with M16 nut
Adjusting the 100 Series SCV unit in the dynamic pressure difference test.
Reference 299-05-012, DFRW2—Needle Valve Test Hose Assembly
DFRW2—needle valve test hose assembly
LEGEND:
A 29H717 3/8 NPT x 15 mm (6 in.) Connecting piece
B 15H199 3/4 NPT Elbow
C JT03402 3/4 NPT Shut-off valve
[ Included in tool kit JDH43A ]
D 29H659 (M) 3/8 NPT x 2-1/2 in. connecting piece
E 15H532 3/8 NPT T-fitting
F 15H642 3/8 M x 1/4 F NPT Bushing
G JT03265 (M) 1/4 NPT Gauge coupler
H B29217 (F) 3/8 NPT (M) x 3/4-16 (F) O-ring
I AA20991 Hose
J JT03218 3/8 NPT x 9/16-18 (F) JIC Union
K JT03341 9/16-18 JIC SW 90° Elbow
L JT03445 9/16-18 JIC x M14 x 1.5 Connector
M JT03421 9/16-18 JIC x 11/16-16 ORFS Adapter
Use JT03341 (K) for charge pump air leak test.
Use JT03445 (L) for transmission charge pump air leak test.
Use JT03421 (M) to flow test axle lube pump.
Reference 299-05-015, Special Tool for 29-BIT CAN BUS—DFLX12
LEGEND:
A 57M7263 pin contact connector body (2 used)
B 57M7252 pin (4 used)
C 57M7377 dust cover (4 used)
D 57M7291 connector (2 used)
[ AL153274 resistor Between pins E and F ]
E (120 ohm) (2 used)
Special tool for 29-BIT- CAN BUS continuity test

(terminators A61 and A62)
Reference 299-05-016, DFLX14—Solenoid Test Harness

LEGEND:
Solenoid test harness
Connector
LEGEND:
1 (2x) 57M7315 Connector
2 57M7258 Seal (2 used)
3 R104846 Sleeve terminal (1 used)
4 57M7266 Female terminal (1 used)
5 57M7267 Male terminal (1 used)
6 R104919 Pin terminal (1 used)
→NOTE:
Order solenoid test harness JDG774 through normal parts channels.
Section 299 - SPECIAL TOOLS Group 10: Special Tools and Test Equipment
The additional connector must be installed between the solenoid plug (cable to pin A) and the measuring plug.
The additional connector can be used to check current strength at the solenoids as well as voltages.
Group 10 - Special Tools and Test Equipment

AR52361 - Socket
AR52361 - Socket
AR52361 - Socket
Checking the trailer brake valve.
D01019AA - Manually operated hydraulic pump
Testing and adjusting shock valves of steering valve.
FKM10002 or JT05470 - Pressure test kit
FKM10002 or JT05470
Pressure test kit for hydraulic checks
Battery Load Tester FKM10409
FKM10409 - Battery load tester
FKM10409 - Battery load tester
Checking the battery.
FKM10443 - Charging valve
Filling the system.
FKM10444 - Leak detector
Identifying refrigerant leaks.
FKM10445 - Universal pressure test kit
Evacuating, filling and checking the air-conditioning system.
FKM10447 - Refrigerant container (R134a; 920g; 750 ml)
Filling the system.
FKM10470 - Pressure Measuring System (stage 1)
FKM10470 - Pressure measuring system (stage 1)
Pressure tests
SensoControl© measurement unit for testing hydraulic systems.
FKM10472 - Flow measurement system
LEGEND:
FKM10472-4 - Temperature sensor
2).
FKM10482 - Pressure Test Kit
LEGEND:
A 38H1417
B 38H5069
C RE43774
D FKM10482-1
E AL80099
F FKM10482-2
Pressure test kit
This pressure test kit includes all the adapters required for pressure-testing the hydraulic system.
Clamp-on Current Probe JT02153
JT02153 - Clamp-on current probe
JT02153 - Clamp-on current probe
Checking the electrical circuits (in conjunction with JT05791A multimeter).
JT03248 - Fitting
JT03248 - Fitting
JT03248 - Fitting
Testing and adjusting shock valves of steering valve.
JT05791A - Multimeter
JT07115 - Pressure test kit
Testing the system pressure.
KJD10128 - Fitting
KJD10128 - Fitting
KJD10128 - Fitting
Checking the brake piston travel and adjusting the brake switch (non-power brake valve).
KJD10292 - Diagnostic Harness
KJD10292 - Diagnostic harness
KJD10292 - Diagnostic harness
KJD10194 - Pressure Test Kit
Pressure test kit
KJD10194 - Pressure test kit
Checking air brake system for leaks; testing pressure (dual-line brake system).
KJD10352 - Restriction fitting
Testing the flow rate.
KJD10495 - Hose connector
Connecting to the flow measurement system.
RE200689 - Performance monitor
[ Performance monitor available as spare part ]
RE37996 - Adjusting tool
Adjusting the neutral start switch.

John Deere 5620, 5720, 5820 Tractor Diagnostic &amp; Tests (TM4791) Shop Manual

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

You might also like

John Deere 5620, 5720, 5820 Tractor Diagnostic &amp; Tests (TM4791) Shop Manual

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

John Deere 5620, 5720, 5820 Tractor Diagnostic &amp; Tests (TM4791) Shop Manual

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

John Deere Agriculture

5620, 5720 and 5820 Tractors

DIAGNOSIS AND TESTS

tm4791, April 2006

Group 05 - Special Tools (Dealer-Fabricated)

5620, 5720 and 5820

Section 210 - GENERAL INFORMATION

Group 05 - Safety Measures

Follow recommended precautions and safe operating practices.

Prevent Machine Runaway

Avoid possible injury or death from machinery runaway.

Handle Fluids Safely—Avoid Fires

Make sure machine is clean of trash, grease, and debris.

Prevent Battery Explosions

Prepare for Emergencies

First Aid Kit

Be prepared if a ﬁre starts.

Keep a ﬁrst aid kit and ﬁre extinguisher handy.

Prevent Acid Burns

Avoid the hazard by:

1. Filling batteries in a well-ventilated area.

If you spill acid on yourself:

1. Flush your skin with water.

1. Do not induce vomiting.

Avoid High-Pressure Fluids

Service Cooling System Safely

Remove Paint Before Welding or Heating

Avoid potentially toxic fumes and dust.

Remove paint before heating:

Dispose of paint and solvent properly.

Avoid Heating Near Pressurized Fluid Lines

Work In Ventilated Area

Engine exhaust fumes

Wear Protective Clothing

Prolonged exposure to loud noise can cause impairment or loss of hearing.

Practice Safe Maintenance

Keep Area Clean

Park Machine Safely

Remove the Key

Before working on the machine:

Lower all equipment to the ground.

Use Proper Lifting Equipment

Proper Lifting Equipment

Construct Dealer-Made Tools Safely

Construct Dealer-Made Tools Safely

Support Machine Properly

Work in Clean Area

Clean Work Area

Before starting a job:

Clean work area and machine.

Illuminate Work Area Safely

Work Area Safely

Service Machines Safely

Use Proper Tools

Use power tools only to loosen threaded parts and fasteners.

Use only service parts meeting John Deere speciﬁcations.

Service Tires Safely

Explosive Tire and Rim Parts

Service Front-Wheel Drive Tractor Safely

John Deere 5620, 5720, 5820 Tractor Diagnostic & Tests (TM4791) Shop Manual

John Deere 5620, 5720, 5820 Tractor Diagnostic & Tests (TM4791) Shop Manual

John Deere 5620, 5720, 5820 Tractor Diagnostic & Tests (TM4791) Shop Manual